Krome Parameter Guide

Parameter Guide
E 1
About this manual

The manuals and how to use them
TheKROMEcomeswiththefollowingmanuals.
VideoManual(approximately60minutes)
QuickStartGuide(printedandPDF)
OperationGuide(PDF)
ParameterGuide(PDF)
VoiceNameList(PDF)
Allofthesemanualsareontheincludedaccessorydisc.
AprintedcopyisincludedonlyfortheQuickStart
Guide.
Video Manual
Thisvideoillustratesthemainfunctionalityofthe
KROME.
Conventions in this manual

References to the KROME
TheKROMEisavailablein88key,73key,and61key
models.Themanualsrefertoallmodelswithoutdistinction
astheKROME.Thefrontpanelandrearpanel
illustrationsinthemanualshowthe61keymodel,butthey
applyidenticallytotheothermodels.
Abbreviations for the manuals: QS, OG, PG, VNL

Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsare
abbreviatedasfollows.
QS:QuickStartGuide
OG:OperationGuide
PG:ParameterGuide
VNL:TheVoiceNameList
Quick Start Guide

ThisprovidesasimpleexplanationoftheKROMEs
functions.Tobegin,pleasewatchtheVideoManualand
readtheQuickStartGuide.
Symbols,
, Note, Tips
Operation Guide
Example screen displays
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer
thequestion,HowdoIdothis?
Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe
KROME,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode,
howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,andsoon.
Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects,the
Arpeggiator,DrumTrack,andDrumKits.
Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideaswellas
supplementalinformationsuchasalistofspecifications.
Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof
thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmaynot
necessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheDisplayof
yourinstrument.
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,a
MIDIrelatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.
InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare
brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
Parameter Guide
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion,
Whatdoesthisdo?
Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide
includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe
KROME.
Voice Name List

TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetupsthat
areintheKROMEwhenitisshippedfromthefactory,
includingPrograms,Combinations,Multisamples,
Drumsamples,DrumKits,ArpeggioPatterns,DrumTrack
Patterns,TemplateSongs,andEffectPresets.
PDF versions
TheKROMEPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasynavigation
andsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDFcontents
information,whichgenerallyappearsonthesideofthe
windowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujumpquicklytoa
specificsection.Allcrossreferencesarehyperlinks,sothat
clickingonthemautomaticallytakesyoutothesourceofthe
reference.
* Allotherproductandcompanynamesaretrademarks
orregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectiveholders.
ii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track

(AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track). . . . 46
Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
61:OSC1AMSMix1 ........................46
62:OSC1AMSMix2............................. 51
64:OSC2AMSMix1,65:OSC2AMSMix2 ..51
69:CommonKeyTrk1
(CommonKeyboardTrack1) .................51
610:CommonKeyTrk2
(CommonKeyboardTrack2) .................52
PROG Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

PROG P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
01:Main ................................... 2
03:Mixer&DrumTrack ..................... 5
05:Arpeggiator...................................6
07:ToneAdjust............................. 7
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
11:ProgramBasic .......................... 12
12:NoteOn/Scale................................14
13:ControllersSetup .............................16
71:ARPSetup..............................53
72:ARPScanZone..........................55
74:DrumTrackPattern......................55
75:DrumTrackProgram......................... 56
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . 58
21:OSC1Setup ............................ 17
22:OSC1Velocity .......................... 19
23:OSC1Pitch............................. 20
25:OSC2Setup ............................ 22
26:OSC2Velocity .......................... 22
27:OSC2Pitch............................. 23
210:PitchEG...................................23
81:Routing................................58
82:InsertFXSetup............................... 59
83:IFX1...................................60
84:IFX2,85:IFX3,86:IFX4,87:IFX5 ........60
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
PROG P3: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

31:Filter1 ................................. 26
32:Filter1KeyboardTrack.................. 28
33:Filter1Modulation ...................... 29
34:Filter1LFOMod. ....................... 30
35:Filter1EG.............................. 31
36:Filter2 ................................. 34
37:Filter2KeyboardTrack.................. 34
38:Filter2Modulation ...................... 34
39:Filter2LFOMod. ....................... 34
310:Filter2EG............................. 34
PROG P4: Amp/EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

41:Amp1/Driver1.......................... 35
42:Amp1Modulation ............................36
43:Amp1EG .............................. 38
45:Amp2/Driver2.......................... 40
46:Amp2Modulation...................... 40
47:Amp2EG .............................. 40
410:EQ ................................... 41
PROG P5: LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

51:OSC1LFO1............................ 42
52:OSC1LFO2..................................44
55:OSC2LFO1............................ 44
56:OSC2LFO2............................ 44
510:CommonLFO ..............................45
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/

LFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
91:Routing................................61
92:MFX1 ..................................62
93:MFX2,94:TFX .........................62
95:CommonFXLFO............................. 63
Program: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
COMBI Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
COMBI P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
01:ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916 .....70
03:MixerT0108,04:MixerT0916 ..........73
05:ARPEGGIATORA,06:ARPEGGIATORB ...... 74
07:ToneAdjust ................................. 75
Controls......................................... 76
COMBI P1: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

11:ControllersSetup ........................78
COMBI P2: EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21:EQTrimT0108,22:EQTrimT0916......79
23:EQGainT0108,24:EQGainT0916........... 80
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
31:MIDIT0108,32:MIDIT0916 ...........81
33:OSCT0108,34:OSCT0916 .............81
35:PitchT0108,36:PitchT0916 ............82
37:ScaleT0108,38:ScaleT0916 ............83
iii
Table of Contents
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) . .125
41:KeyZoneT0108,42:KeyZoneT0916
(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916)............. 84
43:VelZoneT0108,44:VelZoneT0916
(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916) .............. 85
45:DelayT0108,46:DelayT0916.......... 86
31:MIDIT0108,32:MIDIT0916 .......... 125

33:OSCT0108,34:OSCT0916 ............126
35:PitchT0108,36:PitchT0916 ................127
37:ScaleT0108,38:ScaleT0916 ................128
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

51:<1>T0108,52:<1>T0916.............. 87
53:<2>T0108,54:<2>T0916................... 88
55:<3>T0108,56:<3>T0916.............. 88
57:<4>T0108,58:<4>T0916................... 89
59:<5>T0108,510:<5>T0916............. 89
511:<6>T0108,512:<6>T0916............ 90
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
71:SetupT0108,72:SetupT0916 .......... 91
73:ArpeggiatorA,74:ArpeggiatorB............. 92
75:ARPScanZone .............................. 93
77:DrumTrack............................ 93
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect). . . . . . 95

81:Routing1T0108,82:Routing1T0916 .... 95
83:InsertFXSetup ......................... 96
84:IFX1 ....................................... 97
85:IFX2,86:IFX3,87:IFX4,88:IFX5............ 97
89:FXControlT0108,810:FXControlT0916..... 98
COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/

LFO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
91:Routing ............................... 99
92:MFX1................................. 99
93:MFX2,94:TFX ....................... 100
95:CommonFXLFO ........................... 100
Combination: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . .101
Sequencer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

An overview of Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . .105
SEQ Page Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
SEQ P0: Play/REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
01:ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916.... 109
03:MixerT0108,04:MixerT0916.............. 113
05:ArpeggiatorA,06:ArpeggiatorB ....... 114
07:ToneAdjust................................ 115
08:Preferences ................................ 116
09:PlayLoopT0108,010:PlayLoopT0916.. 119
Controls ....................................... 120
SEQ P1: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

11:Setup ................................ 122
SEQ P2: EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

21:TrimT0108,22:TrimT0916 .......... 123
23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916................... 124
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

41:KeyZoneT0108,42:KeyZoneT0916
(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916) ............ 129
43:VelZoneT0108,44:VelZoneT0916
(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916) ...................130
45:DelayT0108,46:DelayT0916 ..............131
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

51:<1>T0108,52:<1>T0916 .............. 133
53:<2>T0108,54:<2>T0916 ...................134
55:<3>T0108,56:<3>T0916 .............. 134
57:<4>T0108,58:<4>T0916 .............. 135
59:<5>T0108,510:<5>T0916 .............135
511:<6>T0108,512:<6>T0916 .................136
SEQ P6: Track Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

61:TrackEdit............................. 137
62:TrackView.................................138
63:TrackName ...........................142
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
71:ARPSetupT0108,72:ARPSetupT0916...143
73:ArpeggiatorA,74:ArpeggiatorB ............144
75:ARPScanZone ........................145
77:DrumTrack ...........................145
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . .148

81:Routing1T0108,82:Routing1T0916 ... 148
83:InsertFXSetup......................... 149
84:IFX1.......................................150
85:IFX2,86:IFX3,87:IFX4,88:IFX5 ....... 150
89:FXControlT0108,810:FXControlT0916
.......................................... 150
SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/

LFO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
91:Routing............................... 152
92:MFX1 ......................................153
93:MFX2,94:TFX ........................153
95:CommonFXLFO............................154
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

101:PatternEdit........................... 155
102:PatternName ..............................157
103:RPPRSetup................................157
SEQ P11: Cue List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

111:CueList ..............................160
Sequencer: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

System Exclusive events supported in
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
KROMEsequencerfileformats ....................192
iv
Table of Contents
Global mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Global Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Global P0: Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
01:Basic................................. 194
02:SystemPreference...........................196
Global P1: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

11:MIDIBasic ............................ 198
12:MIDIRouting......................... 200
Routing...................................240
Mixer .......................................... 243
ControllingtheInsertEffectsviaMIDI............. 244
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

In/Out ....................................245
Routing...................................245
Mixer.....................................246
ControllingtheMasterEffectsviaMIDI .......247
Total Effect (TFX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
21:FootControllers....................... 202
22:MIDICC#Assign ............................202
In/Out ....................................248
Routing...................................248
Mixer.....................................248
UsingMIDItocontroltheTotalEffect .........248
Global P3: Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
31:Scales ................................ 203
MainOutputs ..............................248
Global P4: Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
41:ProgramMain......................... 204
42:ProgramSub .......................... 204
43:CombinationMain,44:CombinationSub .. 204
Dynamics (Dynamic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Global P2: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Global P5: Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

51:SampleSetup ......................... 206
52:SampleParameters ..........................207
53:Driver/EQ ............................ 208
54:VelocitySplit.......................... 209
55:Voice/Mixer ........................... 210
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
000:NoEffect..............................251
001:StereoCompressor......................251
002:RedComp .............................251
003:StereoLimiter............................... 252
004:MultibandLimiter ......................253
005:St.MasteringLimtr(StereoMasteringLimiter)... 253
006:StereoGate............................253
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Media: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
007:St.Parametric4EQ
(StereoParametric4BandEQ) ...............255
008:St.Graphic7EQ
(StereoGraphic7BandEQ) ..................255
009:St.Exciter/Enhncr(StereoExciter/Enhancer).. 256
010:StereoIsolator..........................256
011:St.Wah/AutoWah(StereoWah/AutoWah)..... 257
012:St.VintageWah
(StereoVintage/CustomWah) ................258
013:VOXWah .............................258
014:St.RandomFilter(StereoRandomFilter)....... 259
015:MultiModeFilter(StereoMultiModeFilter) .... 260
016:St.SubOscillator(StereoSubOscillator) ...260
017:TalkingModulator......................261
018:StereoDecimator.......................261
019:St.AnalogRecord(StereoAnalogRecord)...... 262
Effect Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD

Amp Mic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
61:PatternSetup ...............................211
ArpeggioPatternEdit ............................213
ToolTablet .....................................214
Global: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Media mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Media: File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
01:Load................................. 225
02:Save .......................................226
03:Utility......................................226
08:MediaInformation ..................... 226
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Effectsineachmode ....................... 235
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)andTempo
Synchronization .................................236
CommonFXLFOs ...............................237
FXControlBuses................................238
EffectI/O.......................................239
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

In/Out.................................... 240
020:OD/Hi.GainWah
(Overdrive/Hi.GainWah)....................263
021:St.GuitarCabinet(StereoGuitarCabinet) ...... 264
022:St.BassCabinet(StereoBassCabinet).......... 264
023:BassAmpModel ............................ 265
024:BassAmp+Cabinet(BassAmpModel+Cabinet) . 265
025:TrebleBST(TrebleBooster)...............266
026:TubePreAmpModel
(TubePreAmpModeling) ...................266
027:St.TubePreAmp
(StereoTubePreAmpModeling) .............266
Table of Contents
028:MicModel+PreAmp
(MicModeling+PreAmp).................. 267
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
029:StereoChorus ......................... 268
030:VintageChorus........................ 268
031:BlackChorus............................... 269
032:EPChorus............................ 269
033:St.HarmonicChorus(StereoHarmonicChorus). 269
034:St.BiphaseMod.
(StereoBiphaseModulation)................ 270
035:MultitapCho/Delay
(MultitapChorus/Delay).................... 270
036:Ensemble ............................. 271
037:PolysixEnsemble........................... 271
038:StereoFlanger ......................... 271
039:VintageFlanger ....................... 272
040:St.RandomFlanger(StereoRandomFlanger) .. 272
041:St.Env.Flanger(StereoEnvelopeFlanger) ..... 273
042:StereoPhaser.......................... 273
043:SmallPhaser.......................... 274
044:OrangePhaser ........................ 274
045:BlackPhaser ............................... 274
046:UVIBE............................... 274
047:St.RandomPhaser
(StereoRandomPhaser).................... 275
048:St.Env.Phaser(StereoEnvelopePhaser) ....... 276
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 277

049:StereoVibrato ......................... 277
050:St.AutoFadeMod.
(StereoAutoFadeModulation) .............. 277
051:2VoiceResonator...................... 278
052:Doppler.............................. 279
053:Scratch............................... 279
054:GrainShifter.......................... 280
055:StereoTremolo ........................ 281
056:TEXTreml(TEXTremolo) .............. 281
057:St.Env.Tremolo(StereoEnvelopeTremolo).... 281
058:StereoAutoPan....................... 282
059:St.Phaser+Trml(StereoPhaser+Tremolo).... 283
060:St.RingModulator
(StereoRingModulator) .................... 283
061:Detune ............................... 284
062:PitchShifter................................ 285
063:PitchShifterBPM ...................... 285
064:PitchShiftMod.(PitchShiftModulation) . 286
065:OrganVib/Chorus(OrganVibrato/Chorus) 286
066:RotarySpeaker ........................ 287
067:St.EPTone+Trml(StereoEPTone+Tremolo) .... 288
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
068:L/C/RDelay........................... 289
069:Stereo/CrossDelay.......................... 289
070:St.MultitapDelay(StereoMultitapDelay)..... 290
071:St.ModDelay(StereoModulationDelay) . 290
072:St.DynamicDelay(StereoDynamicDelay)..... 291
073:St.AutoPanningDly
(StereoAutoPanningDelay)..................... 292
074:EchoPlus .................................. 293
vi
075:TapeEcho .............................293
076:AutoReverse ..........................293
077:SequenceBPMDly(SequenceBPMDelay) ......294
078:L/C/RBPMDelay............................295
079:StereoBPMDelay...................... 295
080:St.BPMMtapDelay
(StereoBPMMultitapDelay)......................296
081:St.BPMMod.Delay
(StereoBPMModulationDelay) ...................296
082:St.BPMAutoPanDly
(StereoBPMAutoPanningDelay) ............297
083:TapeEchoBPM........................297
Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER) .299

084:ReverbHall............................ 299
085:ReverbSmoothHall .....................299
086:ReverbWetPlate .......................299
087:ReverbDryPlate....................... 299
088:ReverbRoom..........................299
089:ReverbBrightRoom.....................299
090:Reverb2Spring......................... 300
091:Reverb2Hall........................... 300
092:Reverb2Plate..........................300
093:Reverb2Room.........................300
094:EarlyReflections ....................... 300
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono). . . . . . . . .301

095:P4EQExciter
(Parametric4BandEQExciter) ............. 301
096:P4EQWah
(Parametric4BandEQWah/AutoWah)...........301
097:P4EQCho/Flng
(Parametric4BandEQChorus/Flanger)...... 302
098:P4EQPhaser
(Parametric4BandEQPhaser).............. 302
099:P4EQMt.Delay
(Parametric4BandEQMultitapDelay)...........303
100:CompWah(CompressorWah/AutoWah)....303
101:CompAmpSim
(CompressorAmpSimulation) ...................304
102:CompOD/HiGain
(CompressorOverdrive/Hi.Gain).................304
103:CompP4EQ
(CompressorParametric4BandEQ) ..............305
104:CompCho/Flng
(CompressorChorus/Flanger)....................305
105:CompPhaser(CompressorPhaser) ..........306
106:CompMt.Delay
(CompressorMultitapDelay)....................306
107:LimiterP4EQ
(LimiterParametric4BandEQ)..................307
108:LimiterCho/Flng
(LimiterChorus/Flanger) ...................307
109:LimiterPhaser........................308
110:LimiterMt.Delay(LimiterMultitapDelay) ...308
111:ExciterComp(ExciterCompressor)..........309
112:ExciterLimiter .............................309
113:ExciterCho/Flng(ExciterChorus/Flanger)....310
114:ExciterPhaser..............................310
115:ExciterMt.Delay(ExciterMultitapDelay)....311
116:OD/HGAmpSim
(Overdrive/Hi.GainAmpSimulation) .............311
Table of Contents
117:OD/HGCho/Flng
(Overdrive/Hi.GainChorus/Flanger) ..............312
118:OD/HGPhaser(Overdrive/Hi.GainPhaser)...312
119:OD/HGMt.Delay
(Overdrive/Hi.GainMultitapDelay)..............313
120:WahAmpSim(WahAmpSimulation) .......313
121:DecimatorAmp(DecimatorAmpSimulation)
...............................................314
122:DecimatorComp
(DecimatorCompressor) .................. 314
123:AmpSimTremolo
(AmpSimulationTremolo) ................. 314
124:Cho/FlngMt.Dly
(Chorus/FlangerMultitapDelay).................315
125:PhaserCho/Flng(PhaserChorus/Flanger)....315
126:ReverbGate ...............................316
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) . . . . . 317

127:P4EQ//P4EQ
(Parametric4BandEQ//Parametric4BandEQ) ....319
128:P4EQ//Comp
(Parametric4BandEQ//Compressor) ....... 319
129:P4EQ//Limiter
(Parametric4BandEQ//Limiter) ............ 319
130:P4EQ//Exciter
(Parametric4BandEQ//Exciter)..................319
131:P4EQ//OD/HG
(Parametric4BandEQ//Overdrive/Hi.Gain) . 319
132:P4EQ//Wah
(Parametric4BandEQ//Wah).............. 319
133:P4EQ//Cho/Flng
(Parametric4BandEQ//Chorus/Flanger) ..........320
134:P4EQ//Phaser
(Parametric4BandEQ//Phaser) ............ 320
135:P4EQ//BPMDly
(Parametric4BandEQ//MultitapBPMDelay) 320
136:Comp//Comp(Compressor//Compressor).....320
137:Comp//Limiter(Compressor//Limiter) .. 320
138:Comp//Exciter(Compressor//Exciter)... 320
139:Comp//OD/HG
(Compressor//OverdriveHi.Gain) ................321
140:Comp//Wah(Compressor//Wah)....... 321
141:Comp//Cho/Flng
(Compressor//Chorus/Flanger) ............. 321
142:Comp//Phaser(Compressor//Phaser) .........321
143:Comp//BPMDly
(Compressor//MultitapBPMDelay) ......... 321
144:Limiter//Limiter...................... 321
145:Limiter//Exciter.............................322
146:Limiter//OD/HG
(Limiter//Overdrive/Hi.Gain)............... 322
147:Limiter//Wah......................... 322
148:Limiter//Cho/Fl(Limiter//Chorus/Flanger)....322
149:Limiter//Phaser ....................... 322
150:Limiter//BPMDl
(Limiter//MultitapBPMDelay)............. 322
151:Exciter//Exciter .............................323
152:Exciter//OD/HG
(Exciter//Overdrive/Hi.Gain)............... 323
153:Exciter//Wah......................... 323
154:Exciter//Cho/Fl(Exciter//Chorus/Flanger) .....323
155:Exciter//Phaser....................... 323
156:Exciter//BPMDl
(Exciter//MultitapBPMDelay) ..............323
157:OD/HG//OD/HG
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Overdrive/Hi.Gain) .......... 324
158:OD/HG//Wah
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Wah) ..................324
159:OD/HG//Cho/Fln
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Chorus/Flanger)........324
160:OD/HG//Phaser(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Phaser). 324
161:OD/HG//BPMDly
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//MultitapBPMDelay)....324
162:Wah//Wah ............................324
163:Wah//Cho/Flng(Wah//Chorus/Flanger) ...... 325
164:Wah//Phaser ..........................325
165:Wah//BPMDly
(Wah//MultitapBPMDelay) ................325
166:Cho/Fl//Cho/Fl
(Chorus/Flanger//Chorus/Flanger) ................ 325
167:Cho/Fl//Phaser
(Chorus/Flanger//Phaser) ...................325
168:Cho/Fl//BPMDly(Chorus/Flanger//Multitap
BPMDelay)................................325
169:Phaser//Phaser........................326
170:Phaser//BPMDly
(Phaser//MultitapBPMDelay) ..............326
171:BPMDl//BPMDl
(MultitapBPMDelay//MultitapBPMDelay)..326
Double Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

172:St.MltbandLimiter
(StereoMultibandLimiter)...................327
173:PianoBody/Damper
(PianoBody/DamperSimulation).................. 327
174:Vocoder.................................... 328
175:OD/HyperGainWah
(Overdrive/HyperGainWah) ..................... 328
176:GuitarAmp+P4EQ
(GuitarAmpModel+Parametric4BandEQ)....... 329
177:G.AmpCleanCombo...................329
178:G.AmpCalifornia ......................329
179:G.AmpTweed .........................329
180:G.AmpModdedOD ......................... 330
181:BassTubeAmp+Cab.
(BassTubeAmpModel+Cabinet) ................. 330
182:EPCabinet/Drive .......................331
183:St.Mic+PreAmp
(StereoMicModeling+PreAmp).............331
184:MultitapCho/Delay
(MultitapChorus/Delay) ....................331
184:St.PitchShifter(StereoPitchShifter) ........... 332
185:St.PitchShiftBPM(StereoPitchShifterBPM).... 333
186:RotarySpeakerOD(RotarySpeakerOverdrive) . 333
188:L/C/RLongDelay ......................334
189:St/CrossLongDelay(Stereo/CrossLongDelay) . 334
190:HoldDelay ................................. 335
191:LCRBPMLongDly
(L/C/RBPMLongDelay)....................336
192:St.BPMLongDly(StereoBPMLongDelay) .... 336
193:EarlyReflections .......................337
vii
Table of Contents
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS) . . . . .339
AlternateModulationOverview ............. 339
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)List........... 340
AlternateModulationsettings .................... 342
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod) . . . .346

DynamicModulationSourceList ................. 346
Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

SW1/2Assignments ........................ 348
RealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignments .... 348
Knobs14 ................................ 349
FootSwitchAssignments................... 349
FootPedalAssignments.................... 350
System exclusive messages affected by Create

Excl Data, Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit.352
MIDI transmission when the KROMEs
controllers are operated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
KROME and MIDI CCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
ResponsestostandardMIDIcontrollers ...... 356
ParameterscontrolledbyMIDICCs#7079 ......... 358
MIDI applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

AboutMIDI............................... 359
SettingswhenconnectedtoaMIDIdeviceor
computer ................................. 359
MessagestransmittedandreceivedbytheKROME . 360
Compatibility with the M50. . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

MIDI Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
viii
Program mode
PROG Page Select
YoucanselectProgrammodepagesinseveralways.
Page
Alternatively,pressthemodebuttonontheupperleftside
ofthedisplay,andthenpresstherightsideofthemenu.
PLAY
1. PressthePAGEbutton.
P0:Play
P1:Basic/
Controllers
Basicprogramsettings,suchasvoice
assignmode.(seep.12)
SW1,2,andknobsettings.(seep.16)
P2:OSC/Pitch
Oscillatorselectionandpitchsettings.(see
p.17)
P3:Filter
Filter1,2(tone)settings.(seep.26)
P4:Amp/EQ
Amp1,2(volume)settings.(seep.35)
Amp1,2driverandpansettings.(seep.40)
3bandparametricEQsettings.(seep.41)
PageSelectshowsanabbreviatednameforeachpage.
Other ways to select pages

HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumerickeys09
tojumptothecorrespondingpage.
Forexample,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpress
numerickey4tojumptotheP4:Amp/EQpage.
PresstheEXITbuttontoreturntothePlaypage.If
somethingotherthanthemainpageisselected,pressthe
EXITbuttontoaccessthemainpage.
EFFECT
2. Selectthedesiredpageinthedisplay.
ARP&DRUMTRACK
EDIT
ThepagepriortopressingthePAGEbuttonisshownin
lightblue.
Main content
Selectandplayprograms.(seep.2)
OscillatorandDrumtracklevelsettings.
(seep.5)
Simpledrumtrackediting.(seep.6)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(seep.6)
ToneAdjustsettings.(seep.8)
P5:LFO
LFOsettings.(seep.42)
P6:AMS/
Common
KeyTrack
AMSMixersettings.(seep.46)
Commonkeyboardtrackingsettings.(see
p.52)
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
Arpeggiatorsettings.(seep.53)
Drumtracksettings.(seep.55)
P8:Routing/IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffect
sendlevelsettings.(seep.58)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.59)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
Mastereffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.62)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(see
p.62)
CommonFXLFOsettings(seep.63)
Program mode
PROG P0: Play

ThisisthemainProgrammodepage.Here,youcan:
Selectaprogramtoplay.
Program Select
[AF: 0...127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 1...128]
SelectpatternsandprogramsfortheDrumTrack.
Hereyoucanselectaprogram.
Adjusttheoscillatoranddrumtracklevels.
To switch programs
MakesimpleeditsfortheArpeggiator.
AdjusttheRealtimeContorols.
ChooseProgramSelect,usethenumerickeys09toenter
aprogramnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters
ChooseProgramSelect,andturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
AllMIDIdatainProgP0:Playistransmittedand
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannelMIDIChannel
(Global11a).
PresstheProgramSelectPopuptoviewandselectfrom
theBank/ProgramSelectmenuorganizedbybank.
Tip: Auto Song Setup
PresstheCategoryPopuptoviewandselectfromthe
Category/ProgramSelectmenuorganizedbycategory.
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrentProgramor
CombinationintoaSong,andthenputstheKROMEin
recordreadymode.
Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectprograms.(seeFoot
SwitchAssignonpage 202andListofFootSwitch
assignmentsonpage 349)
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhileyoure
playing,youcanuseAutoSongSetuptostartrecording
immediately.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSong
Setuponpage 106.
YoucanselectprogramsbytransmittingaMIDIProgram
ChangefromaconnectedexternalMIDIdevice.
Bank/Program Select menu:

1. PressthepopupbuttonattheleftofProgramSelectto
opentheBank/ProgramSelectmenu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsonthelefttoselectaspecificbank.
01: Main
01
Menu
01a
01c
01b
01d
TheVariationbuttonisactiveifBankGMisselected;
pressingitwillswitchthebanksinthefollowingorder:
GMg(1)g(2)...g(8)g(9)GM.
3. Fromthelist,YoucantouchaProgramsnamedirectly,
orusetheINCandDECbuttons.
Usethescrollbartoviewinformationnotcurrentlyshown.
Note:Ifyouwanttofindasoundbyitsprogramname,use
theFindfunction(seep.2).
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,orpress
theCancelbuttontoexitwithoutswitchingPrograms.
01e
Bank/Program Select menu

Tab
01a: Program Select

Bank (Bank Select)
[A...F, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d)]
ThisistheBankcontainingthecurrentProgram.
PresstheBANKAFbuttontoselectabank.
ToselecttheGMbank,usethenumerickeys.
GM:Whileholdingdown[0],press[].
g(1)g(9):Whileholdingdown[0],pressavariation
number[1][9].Ifthebankcontainsnovariation
programs,thebasicGMsoundsetwillbeselected.(An
*symbolisshownatthebeginningoftheprogram
name.)
g(d):Whileholdingdown[0],press[.].
Mode
Category Popup
Page Menu Stop Watch
Tempo
Bank
Program Select Popup
Program Select
Scroll bar
Find (search function)

Hereshowtosearchforaprogrambypartofitsname.
1. IntheBank/ProgramSelectmenuortheCategory/Pro
gramSelectmenu,selectthetabthatyouwantto
search.
Note:Theprogramsintheselectedtabwillbethetargetfor
searching.
2. PresstheFindbuttononthelowerleftsidetoopenthe
dialogbox.
PROG P0: Play 01: Main
4. Toselectfromasubcategory,presstheJumptoSub
button.
Find menu
Pressoneofthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Note:OnlySubcategoriesthatareassignedtoProgramscan
beselectedfromthetabs.
Toconfirmyourselection,presstheOKbutton.Ifyou
decidetocancel,presstheCancelbutton.Youwillreturnto
themaincategories.
Sub
category
tab
3. PresstheTbutton,andenterthedesiredsearchtext
inthetextfield.Whenyouveenteredthetext,pressthe
OKbutton.
4. IftheIgnoreCasecheckboxisselected,thesearch
willnotdistinguishbetweenuppercaseandlowercase.
5. PresstheFindbuttontosearchforthetextthatyou
entered.
6. UsethePrev.andNextbuttonstofindthepreviousor
nextsound.
Scroll bar
5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,orpress
theCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchangingthePro
gram.
7. PresstheOKbuttontoselectaprograminthelist.
Note:YoucanassignacategorytoaProgramintheWrite
Programdialog.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionwillbe
cancelled.
(Tempo)
8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbut
tontocancelyourselection.
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,whichappliestothe
arpeggiator,temposyncedLFOs,andtemposyncedeffects.
Category
[00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectprogramsbymaincategoryandsub
category.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoeighteenmain
categories,andeachcategoryisclassifiedintoeightsub
categories.Youcanusethesemaincategoriesandsub
categoriestofindandselectprograms.Hereyoucanselecta
programbyitsmaincategoryandsubcategory.
Category/Program Select menu:

1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton(abovetheProgram
Selectparameter)toopentheCategory/ProgramSelect
menu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsontheleftorrighttoselectthe
desiredcategory.
[40.00... 300.00, EXT]
040.00...300.00allowsyoutosetaspecifictempoinBPM,
with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousingthestandard
dataentrycontrols,youcanusetheTEMPOknobtoadjust
thebpm,orjustplayafewquarternotesontheTAPbutton.
EXTisdisplayediftheMIDIClock(Global11a)issetto
ExternalMIDIorExternalUSB.Thisisalsoshownifthe
MIDIClocksettingisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeing
receivedfromanexternaldevice.IfthetemposourceisEXT,
thearpeggiatoretc.willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdata
fromanexternalMIDIdevice.
Mode
Thisindicatesthemodethatscurrentlyselected.
3. Selectaprogramfromthelist.YoucantouchaPro
gramsnamedirectly,orusetheINCandDECbuttons.
Whenyoupressthisbutton,themodemenuwillappear.In
themodemenu,pressthenameofthedesiredmode.Ifyou
selectthesamemodewhereyouwerepriortoaccessingthe
modemenu,thePageSelectmenuofthatmodewillappear.If
youpresstheareatotherightofthemodename,thepage
selectmenuforthecorrespondingmodewillappear.
UsethescrollbartobrowsethroughallProgramsinthe
Category.
Toclosethemenu,presstheClosebuttonortheEXIT
button.
Youcansearchforaprogrambyaportionofitsname(see
p.2).
IfyouaccessedthismenufromGlobalorMediamode,it
willincludeanitemnamedReturn.PressingReturnwill
takeyoubacktothemodeandpagewhereyouwerepriorto
selectingGlobalorMediamode.
Note:OnlyCategoriesandSubcategoriesthatareassigned
toprogramscanbeselectedfromthetabs.
Category/Program Select menu

Category
tab
When accessed from

Program, Combination,
or Sequencer mode
When accessed from

Global or Media mode
Scroll bar
Program mode
TONE CONTROLS
Stop Watch
Whenyoupressthebuttonontheupperrightsideofthe
display,thescreenwillshowtheamountoftimethathas
elapsedsincethepowerwasturnedon.Youcanusethe
START/STOPbuttonandRESETbuttontomeasurea
duration.
START/STOP:Starts/stopsthestopwatch.
RESET:Resetsthestopwatchto000:00:00.
CUTOFF (Filter Cut Off)
[000...127]
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.
RESONANCE (Filter Resonance)
[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71.
EG INTENSITY (Filter EG Intensity)
[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsandreceives
MIDICC#79.
01b: Program Information
RELEASE (EG Release)
Thefollowinginformationfortheselectedprogramis
displayed:
ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
OSC Pictures
USER CONTROLS
Thisshowsagraphicfortheoscillator.Inthecaseofdouble
oscillatorsordoubledrums,theOctave(footageofthe
oscillatorsbasicpitch)isalsoshown.
Ifyouwanttochangetheoscillatorsgraphic,doubleclick
thegraphic,andchangethesettinginthemenu.Youcan
alsosetthisinP1ProgramBasicOSCPicture(seep.12).
SW1, SW2
ThesearethefunctionscontrolledbytheSW1,SW2
switches.
01c: Controls
ThisindicatesthesettingsoftheREALTIMECONTROLS
knobs(thenameoftheoperableparametersandtheir
currentvalue),andthe3bandEQsettings.
ThecurrentlyselectedREALTIMECONTROLSknob
functionsandtheEQsettingsareshown.UsetheSELECT
buttontoselectthefunctioncontrolledbytheknobs.
ThefunctionsoftheTONECONTROLSknobsarefixed.
YoucanassignvariousfunctionstotheUSERCONTROLS
knobs.AMIDIcontrolchangeisassignedtoeachfunction.
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
MIDICC.
Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe
parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe
controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthecontrollerisat
0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontrollerisat127.For
anotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagrambelow.
CC parameter scaling
99
Parameter
Value
[000...127]
1...4
[000...127]
YoucansetRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14toawide
varietyofmodulationfunctions,usingtheP1:Basic/
ControllersControllersSetuppage.
ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
messagesusuallyCCs.
ARP CONTROLS
Thefunctionsofknobs14arefixed.Theknobswillcontrol
thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes,theirvelocity,the
pitchrange,andthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.
GATE
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststheduration(gatetime)ofthearpeggiatednotes
(SeeGateonpage 54).
VELOCITY
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes(SeeVelocity
onpage 54).
SWING
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhedegreeofshuffleforthearpeggiopattern(See
Swingonpage 54).
STEP
[64...+00...+63]
Thischangesthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthepatterns
length(Length)inunitsofonehalf.Turningtheknob
towardtherightwillshortentheintervalbetween
arpeggiatednotes(Resolution)inunitsofonehalf.When
theknobisinthecenter(12oclock),thenumberofsteps
andthespeedwillbeasspecifiedbytheLengthand
Resolution(SeeResolution*onpage 54).
EQ (Low, Mid [Hz], Mid, High)

As Programmed
Thisindicatesthe3bandEQsettings.Youcaneditthe
values.
00
0
64
CC Value
127
Low[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthe80Hz
lowshelvingEQin0.5dBsteps.
Mid[Hz][100...10.0k]:Adjuststhecenterfrequencyofthe
midsweepableEQ.
Mid[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthemid
sweepableEQin0.5dBsteps.
High[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthe10kHz
highshelvingEQin0.5dBsteps.
PROG P0: Play 03: Mixer & Drum Track
01d: Effect
03: Mixer & Drum Track
IFX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MFX 1, 2
[000...127]
03
Menu
01a
TFX
Hereyoucanviewtheeffectsthatareassignedtotheinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffect.
03b
03a
Forthemastereffectsyoucanadjustthesendamounts.
TheMASTERFXandTOTALFXbuttonsrespectivelyturn
mastereffects1/2andthetotaleffecton/off(seeGlobal).
ChangingtheEnableMFX1&2andEnableTFX
settingswillrespectivelytransmitthecontrolchange
messagesCC#94(effectcontrol4)orCC#95(effect
control5).Thetransmittedvaluewillbe0foroff,and
127foron.
01e: Velocity Meter
03a: OSC/DrumTrack Mixer

Here,youcanadjustthevolumeandchangethePlay/Mute
andSoloOn/Offsettingsofoscillators1and2andthedrum
track.
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
OSC Play/Mute:
Thisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheglobal
MIDIchannel,producedbythekeyboard,MIDIIN,or
arpeggiator.(Ifmultiplenoteonmessagesarereceived
simultaneously,thehighestvelocitywillbedisplayed.)
OSC1 Play/Mute
ThemeterwillrespondevenifKeyZoneorVelZone
settingsaresetsothatthenotedoesnotactuallysound.
Thismeterindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalue;itdoesnot
respondtochangesintheVolumeknobsetting,norto
changesintheleveloftheaudiosignalproducedbythe
Filter,Amp,EG,LFO,EQ,oreffects.
Mute:Oscillator1willbemuted(silent).
OSC2 Play/Mute
01: Menu Command
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[Play, Mute]
Play:Oscillator2willsound.
Mute:Oscillator2willbemuted(silent).
Note:OSC2Play/Mutecannotbesetforaprogramwhose
OscillatorModeisSingleorDrums.
DRUM Track Play/Mute 1

V
[Play, Mute]
Play:Oscillator1willsound.
[Play, Mute]
Play:Thedrumtrackwillsound.
Mute:Thedrumtrackwillbemuted(silent).
OSC Solo:
OSC1 Solo
[Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator1.
OSC2 Solo
[Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator2.
DRUM Track Solo
[Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforthedrumtrack.
Note:Soloappliestooscillators1and2,thedrumtrack.
Note:OSC2Solocannotbesetforaprogramwhose
OscillatorModeisSingleorDrums.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offsettingisnotsavedwhenyouwrite
theprogram.
Exclusive Solo
[Off, On]
ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectstheway
thatSoloworks.IfExclusiveSoloisoff(unchecked),
MultipleSoloswillbeactive,allowingyoutoturnSoloon/
offformorethanoneoftheitems:oscillators1and2,and
thedrumtrack.EachtimeyoupressaSolobutton,thesolo
settingwilltoggleonandoff.
IfExclusiveSoloison(checked),onlyoneoftheapplicable
itemscanbesoloed.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Tip:YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
andpressing2onthenumerickeypad.
Program mode
OSC Volume:
OSC 1 Volume
[000...127]
05: Arpeggiator
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator1.
05
Menu
01a
OSC 2 Volume
[000...127]
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator2.
DRUM Track Volume
05a
[000...127]
05b
Adjuststhevolumeofthedrumtrack.
Velocity Meter
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalueoftheglobal
MIDIchannelandthedrumtracksProgMIDICh(seep.5).
03b: Drum Track

TheDrumTrackprovidesaneasywayforyoutoplaybacka
rhythmsectionusingtheKROMEshighqualitydrum
programsandarichvarietyofdrumpatterns.
Pattern Bank
[Preset, User]
Pattern No.
[P000...605, U000...999]
ArpeggiatorparametersareeditedinP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack),butmajorparameterscanbe
editedhereaswell.WhenyouareplayinginProgP0:Play,
youcaneditthearpeggiatorinrealtime,suchaschanging
thearpeggiopatternetc.
Towrite(save)theeditedcontent,useWriteProgram.You
canalsousetheTEMPOknob,TAPbuttonandthearpeggio
control(ARP)knobsGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,andSTEP
toeditthearpeggioinrealtime.
Selectthepatternyouwanttouseinthedrumtrack.Youcan
createuserpatternsinSeqP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEdit.
05a: ARP CONTROLS
Drum Track Program

[A...F: 000127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001128]
ARP CONTROLS
Selecttheprogramthatwillplaythedrumtrackpattern.
Note:OnlyprogramsoftheDrumscategorycanbeselected.
TheMIDIchannelofthedrumtrackisspecifiedbythe
GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpageDrumTrackProg
MIDICh.MIDImessagetransmissionforapatternis
specifiedbyProgMIDIOut.Programchangesarenot
transmittedorreceived.
High Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10 kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Frequency
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5 dB.
Low Gain
GATE
[64...+00...+63]
VELOCITY
[64...+00...+63]
SWING
[64...+00...+63]
seep.4,p.54
STEP
[64...+00...+63]
seep.4
[100Hz...10kHz]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
Mid Gain
ThisshowsthevalueofeachparameterfortheARP
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLSknobs(seep.4
andp.54).
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
05b: Arpeggiator
Pattern
[P0...P4, U000 (INT)...U0899(INT),

U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Arpeggio Pattern Preview
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80 HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Thisshowsagraphicofthestepsoftheuserarpeggio
pattern.
Note:TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack).
Resolution
Octave
[ , , , , , , , ]
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Sort
[Off, On]
Latch
[Off, On]
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
03: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Makesettingsfortheprogramarpeggiator.Formore
information,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT(Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack)onpage 53.
Note:TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack).
PROG P0: Play 07: Tone Adjust
Relative Tone Adjust parameter scaling
05: Menu Command
99
Parameter
Value
3:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
Commandonpage 64.
As Programmed
00
99
07: Tone Adjust

07a
+99
Relative Tone Adjust Value

07
Menu
07b
07c
TheToneAdjustfunctionassignsimportantprogram
parametersandeasyeditparameterstotheswitchesand
slidersinthedisplayforquickeditsofselectedparameters.
Tip:InCombinationandSequencermodes,ToneAdjustalso
letsyoueditProgramparameterswithouttheneedtosavea
differentversionoftheoriginalProgram.Formore
informationonToneAdjustinthesemodes,pleasesee0
7c:ToneAdjustonpage 75andpage 115.
AfewoftheProgramparameterscontrolledbyRelative
ToneAdjustarebipolar,meaningthattheycanbeeither
positiveornegative(insteadofjustpositive).Whenthese
Programparametersaresettonegativevalues,theTone
Adjustparametermaybehavedifferentlyfromthe
descriptionabove.
Forinstance,iftheEGIntensityissettoanegativevalue,
RelativeToneAdjustvalueswillrangefrom0to99,the
inverseofthediagramabove.EGSustainworksdifferently;
ifitssettoanegativevalue,ToneAdjustvaluesrangefrom
0downtotheprogrammedvalue,andthenupto+99,as
shownbelow.
Relative Tone Adjust parameter scaling: EG Sustain
99
Parameter
Value
00
Absolute (Abs), Relative (Rel), Meta parameter

TherearethreekindsofToneAdjustparameters:Absolute,
Relative,andMeta.
AbsoluteparametersusuallyeditasingleProgram
parameter,suchasOscillator1Drive.TheProgramand
ToneAdjustparametersmirroroneanother;whenyou
changeone,theotherwillchangetomatch.
As Programmed
99
99
+99
Relative Tone Adjust Value
RelativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormoreProgram
parameterssimultaneously.Forinstance,F/AEGAttack
TimeaffectsatotalofsixProgramparameters.Thevalueof
theRelativeparametershowstheamountofchangetothese
underlyingProgramparameters.
MetaparametersdontaffectProgramparametersdirectly.
Instead,theyaffectthewaythatotherToneAdjust
parameterswork.Forinstance,MultisampleMin#and
Max#settheminimumandmaximumvaluesoftheTone
AdjustMultisampleparameter.
IftheRelativeparameterissetto0(thesliderinthedisplay
isatthecenterposition),thevalueofthecorresponding
programparameterwillnotchange.
Saving Tone Adjust Edits
Thedefinitionsofhigherandlowersettingscanvary,
dependingonthespecificparameter.Unlessnoted
otherwise,theyworkasfollows:
WhentheRelativeparameterisat+99(themaximum),the
Programparametersareallattheirmaximumaswell.
Similarly,whentheRelativeparameterisat99(the
minimum),theProgramparametersareatzero.
ToneAdjusteditsaresavedintwodifferentways,
dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor
Absolute.(Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAbsolute
(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameterbelow.)
EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesoundimmediately,
butdontchangetheunderlyingProgramparameter
settingsuntiltheProgramissaved.WhentheProgramis
saved,theKROMEcalculatesthecombinedeffectsofTone
AdjustanddedicatedCCmodulation(fromtheRealTime
knobs,forinstance),andsavestheresultsintotheProgram
parametersdirectly.Atthatpoint,alloftheRelative
parametersareresetto0.
EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediatelyreflectedin
thecorrespondingonscreenparameters,andviceversa.
Tone Adjust and MIDI SysEx

TheToneAdjusteditsallsendandreceiveMIDISystem
Exclusivemessages.Youcanusethistorecordandplay
backToneAdjusteditswithasequencer,includingthebuilt
insequencer.
Program mode
Note:SystemexclusivemessagesarenotToneAdjust
parameters;theyarelinkedtotheactualvalue.Forexample,
ifasliderinthedisplayisassignedtocontrolfilter
resonance,andyoumovethissliderwhilerecordingtothe
sequencer,theslidermovementwillberecorded,butthe
changeinfilterresonancewillnotberecorded.Thismeans
thatifyoulaterreassigntheToneAdjustparameterto
controlLFO1Speed,playingbackthesequencerwillcause
theLFOspeed(notthefilterresonance)tochange.
Interaction between Tone Adjust and MIDI CCs

AnumberoftheCommonToneAdjustparameterscan
affectparameterswhicharealsomodulatedbydedicated
MIDICCs.ThespecificCCnumbersarenotedinthe
descriptionsfortheindividualToneAdjustparameters.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeToneAdjustParameterson
page 10.
ToneAdjustandtheCCsworkindependently.Itspossible,
forinstance,forToneAdjusttoreducethevalueofa
parameter,andthenforaCCtoincreaseitagain.
ToneAdjustscalestheparameterfirst,andthentheCC
scalestheresultoftheToneAdjust.
07a: Program Select & Tempo
Stored Value
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,beforethe
effectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoToneAdjust
parameterswhichcontrolasingleProgramparameter.
IfyouunassignaRelativeparameterfromacontrol,itwill
reverttothisvalue.
07c: Tone Adjust

Here,youcanassignToneAdjustparameterstoswitches
andslidersinthedisplay.
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesinthedisplayactalittledifferently
thansliders.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,oran
Absoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectlyreflects
theparametervalue:
SwitchOn=On
Bank (Bank Select)

Program Select
[A...F, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d)]
[A...F: 000127, GM, g(1)...g(9),

g(d): 001128]
Assign
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
On/Off
(Tempo)
Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogramselected
forediting:theprogrambank/number/name,andthe
tempousedtocontrolthearpeggiatoretc.Formore
information,pleasesee01a:ProgramSelectonpage 2.
07b: Selected parameter information

Selected parameter information
Thisstatuslineshowsdetailed,readonlyinformationabout
thecurrentlyselectedToneAdjustparameter.
Control
Assignment
SwitchOff=Off
Value
Type Stored Value
Value
Assign
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
displayedswitch.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,
pleaseseeCommonToneAdjustParametersandTone
AdjustParametersbelow.
On Value
WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesameasthe
SwitchStatus(seebelow).
Switch Status
Control
[SW1...8, SL1...8]
ThisisthecontrollerinthedisplaytowhichtheToneAdjust
parameterisassigned.
SW:Switch
Assignment
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtothe
controller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssignparameter,
below.
Sliders 1...8
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
displayedslider.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,please
seeCommonToneAdjustParametersandToneAdjust
Parametersbelow.
Assign
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
control.
[Rel, Abs, Meta]
Thisshowsthetypeofparameter,whichrelatestohowedits
totheparameterareadjustedandsaved.Formore
information,pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Meta
parameteronpage 7.
[Off, On]
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
Assign
SL:Slider
Type
[Depends on parameter]
TheparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchisOn.
Value
PerOscillatorparametersapplytoOSC1and2individually,
andaremarkedassuch:OSC1andOSC2.
AmpEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheAmpEGs.
Eachslidercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter,andeach
parametercanbeassignedtoonlyoneslider.
AmpEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheAmpEGs.
Toswapaparameterfromoneslidertoanother,youllneed
tofirstunassignitfromtheoldslider,andthenassignitto
thenewslider.
AmpEGSustainLevel.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheAmpEGs.
Value
valueswilldependontheparameterassignedtotheslider.
Common Tone Adjust Parameters
AmpEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheAmpEGs.
PitchEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesofthePitchEG.
PitchEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG.
TheseparametersaffectbothOscillators1and2.
PitchEGSustainLevel(N/A).(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsofthePitchEG.
Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheCommonToneAdjust
parametersareRelative.
PitchEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesofthePitchEG.
Note:Attherightofeachparameter,the(valuerangeand
CC#)areshowninparentheses.
PitchLFO1Intensity.(99...+99,CC#77)
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
Off.ThismeansthattheToneAdjustcontrolhasnoeffect.
99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
FilterCutoff.(99...+99,CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.It
affectsbothFiltersAandB.
FilterResonance.(99...+99,CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.Itaffects
bothFiltersAandB.
FilterEGIntensity.(99...+99,CC#79)
ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutofffrequency.
ItaffectsFiltersAandBsimultaneously.
99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum.
Modulationisinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,as
theoriginalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginalPrograms
EGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingtheToneAdjustto
+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheeffectofvelocityontheAmplevel.
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
F/AEGAttackTime.(99...+99,CC#73)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,along
withotherrelatedparameters.
LFO1Speed.(99...+99,CC#76)
ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/
Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.Formore
information,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 42.
LFO1Fade.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeFadeonpage 43.
LFO1Delay.(99...+99,CC#78)
ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Delayonpage 43.
ThisparameterinteractswithCC#78.
LFO1Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO1isstopped
orrunning.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStopon
page 42.
ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginalvalues.
Forexample,ifyousetthistoPROGwhentheoscillator1
LFOisstoppedandoscillator2isplaying,theoriginal
settingoftheparameterwillbeused.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmpEGs
StartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttackTime
AMS,asdescribedbelow:
LFO2Speed.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sfrequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/
Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.Formore
information,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 42.
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,StartLevel
AMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefromtheir
programmedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,theAttack
Levelwillchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.
LFO2Fade.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeFadeonpage 43.
F/AEGDecayTime.(99...+99,CC#75)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterandAmp
EGs.ItinteractswithCC#75.
F/AEGSustainLevel.(99...+99,CC#70)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
F/AEGReleaseTime.(99...+99,CC#72)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
FilterEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterEGs.
FilterEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterEGs.
LFO2Delay.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Delayonpage 43.
LFO2Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO2isstopped
orrunning.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStopon
page 42.
CommonLFOSpeed.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheCommonLFOsfrequency.WhentheLFOis
inMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.
FilterEGSustainLevel.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterEGs.
Unison.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparameterturnsUnisononandoff.Formore
information,pleaseseeUnisononpage 13.
FilterEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterEGs.
NumberOfVoices.(2...6,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthenumberofUnisonvoices.
Program mode
IfUnisonisnotOn,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formore
information,pleaseseeNumberofVoicesonpage 13.
Detune.(00...99,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetstheamountofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,this
parameterhasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Detuneonpage 13.
Thickness.(Off/01...09,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthepatternofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,orifDetune
issetto0,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formore
information,pleaseseeThicknessonpage 13.
Tone Adjust Parameters

Macro parameters
ThefollowingthreeparametersaffectbothOscillator1and
Oscillator2.
Note:Inthelistbelow,attherightofeachparameter,the
valuerangeandedittypeareshowninparentheses.
PitchStretch.(12...+12,Relative)
ThisspecialcontrolincreasestheOscillatorTuneparameter
whileloweringtheTransposeparameter.Theresultisthat
thepitchstaysthesame,butthemappingofthesamplesto
thekeyschanges.Youcanusethistocreateinterestingshifts
intimbre.
Hold.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisletsyouturnHoldonandoff.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeHoldonpage 14.
Reverse.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisturnsReverseon/offformultisamplesthatallowthe
reversesettingforbothoscillators.PROGrestoresthe
Programsoriginalsettings.Reverseplaysthewaveform
fromendtostart;theeffectisonlynoticeablewithunlooped
samples.
Per-Oscillator parameters
TheseparametersaffecteachOscillatorseparately.Inthe
list,theparametersforOscillator1appearfirst,witheach
nameprefacedbyOSC1;theparametersforOscillator2
appearnext,prefacedbyOSC2.
Unlessotherwisespecified,allofthePerOscillator
parametersareAbsolute.
Note:Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare(value,
edittype)respectively.
Tune.(1200...+1200,Relative)
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe
OscillatorsTunesetting,asdescribedunderTuneon
page 17.
Transpose.(60...+60,Relative)
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe
OscillatorsTransposesetting,asdescribedunder
Transposeonpage 17.
Note:aswithTranspose,below,thisisasimpleadditionor
subtraction,asopposedtothemorecomplexscaling
function.
MS/DKitSelect.(PROG/0...540,Absolute)
InSingleorDoublePrograms,thisletsyouselectanew
MultisamplefortheOscillator.InDrumPrograms,itlets
youselectadifferentDrumKit.
Ingeneral,itsbesttousethisinconjunctionwiththeMS
TypeandMS/DKitBankparameters,asdescribedbelow.
PROGrestorestheProgramsoriginalMultisamples(orthe
DrumKit,foraDrumProgram),includingallvelocity
rangesandReverseandStartOffsetsettings.
10
YoucanalsolimittherangeofthecontrolbyusingtheMin
#andMax#parameters,describedbelow.
For Single and Double Programs:

MS/DKitSelectoverridesalloftheMultisampleVelocity
zones,sothatthenewlyselectedMultisampleplaysoverthe
entirevelocityrange.
Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankastheoriginal
ProgramsMS1.
YoucanusetheMS/DKitBankparameter,describedbelow,
tochangethesedefaultsasdesired.
For Multisamples only:

YoucanusetheToneAdjustReverseandStartOffset
parameterstomodifythenewlyselectedMultisample.By
default,theReverseissettoOff,anditsStartOffsetissetto
0.
For Drum Programs:
Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankastheoriginal
ProgramsDrumkit.YoucanusetheMSBankparameter,
describedbelow,toselectadifferentBank.
MSBank.(Mono,Stereo...,Meta)
ThisMetaparametermodifiestheMS/DkitSelect
parameter,sothatyoucanselectMultisamplesfromany
Bankyoulike.
MS/DKitMin#.(0...540,Meta)
ThisMetaparametersetsaminimumvaluefortheMS/Dkit
Selectparameter.Youcanusethisinconjunctionwiththe
MS/DKitMax#parameter,below,sothatfrontpanelvalue
dialselectsonlyfromasmallsetofchoices.Thisis
particularlyconvenientwiththeinternal,inwhichsimilar
Multisamplesaregroupedtogether.Forinstance,thismakes
iteasytoselectbetweenagroupofbells,orasetofelectric
basses.
MS/DKitMax#.(0...540,Meta)
ThisMetaparametersetsamaximumvaluefortheMS/
DkitSelectparameter.PleaseseeMS/DKitMin#,above,
formoreinformation.
StartOffset.(0ff,1th...8th,Absolute)
ThisallowsyoutochangetheStartOffsetofthe
MultisamplespecifiedbytheMSSelectparameter.It
appliesonlywhen:
TheProgramisaSingleorDouble(notaDrumKit)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOffset(StartOffset)on
page 18.
Drive.(0...99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsDriveparameter,asdescribed
underDriveonpage 35.
LowBoost.(0...99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsLowBoostparameter,as
describedunderLowBoostonpage 35.
PitchSlope.(1.0...2.0,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsPitchSlopeparameter,as
describedunderPitchSlopeonpage 20.
LFO1Waveform.(Triangle...Rad6,Absolute)
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO1,as
describedunderWaveformonpage 42.
LFO2Waveform.(Triangle...Rnd6,Absolute)
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO2,as
describedunderWaveformonpage 42.
AmpLFO1Intensity.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmpmodulation
fromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensity(LFO1)on
page 38.
AmpLFO2Intensity.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmpmodulation
fromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensity(LFO1)on
page 38.
FilterLFO1IntensitytoA.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensitytoA
onpage 30.
FilterLFO1IntensitytoB.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensitytoB
onpage 31.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoA.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensitytoA
onpage 30.
07: Menu Command
3:CopyToneAdjustseep.65
4:ResetToneAdjustseep.65
Commandonpage 64.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoB.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensitytoB
onpage 31.
PitchLFO1AMSIntensity.(12.00...+12.00,Absolute)
YoucanuseanAMSsource,suchasaftertouch,tomodulate
thedepthofpitchmodulation(vibrato)fromLFO1.This
controlstheintensityofthatAMSmodulation.Formore
information,pleaseseeIntensityonpage 21.
PitchLFO2AMSIntensity.(12.00...+12.00,Absolute)
ThisissimilartoPitchLFO1AMSIntensity,above.
Default Tone Adjust Settings

YoucanusetheToneAdjustfunctiontoeditallofthe
importantprogramparametersonthissinglepage.Mostof
thepresetsoundsusethedefaultlayoutshownbelow.You
cancustomizethesedefaultsettingsforeachprogram.
FordetailsontheToneAdjustfunction,pleasesee07b:
Selectedparameterinformationonpage 8.
Tone Adjust parameters

Thisappliestocommontoneadjustparametersandtone
adjustparametersfollowingthe07b:Selectedparameter
informationonpage 8.
Default Tone Adjust Settings
Controller
Default settings
SW1
[OSC1]Transpose
SW2
[OSC2]Transpose
SW3
[OSC1]Tune
SW4
[OSC2]Tune
SW5
[OSC1]MS/DKitSelect
SW6
FilterCutoff
SW7
FilterResonance
SW8
FilterEGIntensity
Slider1
[OSC1&2]PitchStretch
Slider2
[OSC1]FilterLFO1IntA
Slider3
[OSC1]AmpLFOInt
Slider4
[OSC1]Drive
Slider5
F/AEGAttackTime
Slider6
F/AEGDecayTime
Slider7
F/AEGSustainLevel
Slider8
F/AEGReleaseTime
11
Program mode
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers

OSCPicture2isunavailableiftheOscillatorModeisSingle
orDrums.
11: Program Basic

11
Menu
11a
11b: Voice Assign Mode

Voice Assign Mode
[Poly, Mono]
Selectthebasicvoiceallocationmode.Dependingonwhich
oneyouselect,variousotheroptionswillappear,suchas
PolyLegato(Polymodeonly)andUnison(Monomode
only).
11b
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowingyou
playchords.
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsfortheProgram.
Amongotherthings,youcan:
SetuptheProgramtobeaSingle,aDouble,aDrumKit,
oraDoubleDrumKit.
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor
monophonically.
11a: Oscillator Mode

Oscillator Mode
[Single, Double, Drums, Double Drums]
SpecifiestheProgramsoscillatorassignment;whetherit
willuseoneortwooscillators,oradrumkit.
Single:Theprogramwilluseoneoscillator(Oscillator1,
Filter1,Amplifier1).Inthiscase,theprogramwillnormally
haveamaximumof120notepolyphony.
Double:Theprogramwillusetwooscillators(Oscillator1/
2,Filter1/2,Amplifier1/2).Inthiscasetheprogramwill
normallyhaveamaximumof60notepolyphony.
Drums:Theprogramwilluseoneoscillator(aswhenSingle
isselected),butOscillator1willbeassignedadrumkit
insteadofamultisample.Inthiscasetheprogramwill
normallyhaveamaximumof120notepolyphony.
DoubleDrums:TheProgramwillusetwooscillatorstoplay
twoDrumKits.InthiscasetheProgramwillnormallyhave
amaximumof60notepolyphony.
OSC Picture 1, 2
[MS Names...]
Hereyoucanspecifyagraphicforoscillators1and2that
willbeshowninthemainP0Playpage.
Toopenthemenu,pressthepopupbuttonorpressthe
previewareatwiceinsuccession.
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically,producing
onlyonenoteatatime.
Poly Legato
[Off, On]
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
toPoly.
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
On(checked):Whenyouplayalegatophrase,onlythefirst
noteofthatphrase(andwithinapproximatelythefirst
30msec)willusethenormalmultisamplestartpoint
specifiedbyStartOffset(Prog21a);allsubsequentnotes
willusethelegatostartpointspecifiedforeach
multisample.
Note:Thisisausefulwaytosimulatethepercussiveattack
ofatonewheeltypeorgan.
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingofthe
StartOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplaylegatoor
detached.
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave
anyeffect.
Single Trigger
[Off, On]
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeis
settoPoly.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,the
previousnotewillbesilencedbeforethenextnoteis
sounded,sothatthetwodonotoverlap.
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,
thenoteswilloverlap.
Mono Legato
[Off, On]
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Legatomeanstoplaynotessothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegatophrase
willsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnoteswillhavea
smoothersound,formoregentletransitionsbetweenthe
notes.
TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwodifferent
MonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachievesthis
smoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescriptionofthat
parameterformoredetails.
Tochoosethegraphic,pressthegraphicviewatthebottom
ofthemenuortheleftorrightgraphicsintheupperpart.To
confirmyourselection,presstheOKbuttonorpressthe
uppermiddlegraphictwiceinsuccession.
12
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,the
noteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,according
tothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethesame
soundasdetachedplaying.
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers 11: Program Basic
Mode
[Normal, Use Legato Offset]
Voice
Detune
ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatoisOn.
12
Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,themultisample,envelopes,
andLFOswillnotbereset;onlythepitchoftheoscillator
willchange.Thissettingisparticularlyeffectiveforwind
instrumentsandanalogsynthsounds.
2
3
+12
Withthisoption,thepitchmayoccasionallybe
incorrect,dependingonwhichmultisampleyouplay,
andwhereonthekeyboardyouplay.
UseLegatoOffset:Whenyouplaylegato,thesecondand
subsequentnoteswillusethelegatostartpointspecifiedfor
eachmultisample,ratherthantheStartOffset(StartOffset
21a)setting.
Thisiseffectivewhenusedwithamultisampleforwhich
youveassignedaspecificlegatooffsetpoint.Forexample,
youmightuseittocontroltheattackofabreathy,slow
attacksaxsound.Onsomemultisamples,thiswillhaveno
effect.
EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
detachedplaying.
Priority
[Low, High, Last]
PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmorethan
onenoteisbeinghelddown.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto24
andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesissetto4:
Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewillbedetuned
upby4cents,andvoice4willbedetunedupby12cents.
Voice
Detune
12
2
3
+4
+12
Thickness
[Off, 01...09]
ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuningforthe
unisonvoices.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacrossthe
Detunerange,asshownabove.
0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetricway,
increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,andchangingthe
wayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeatagainstoneanother.
Thiscreatesaneffectsimilartovintageanalogsynthesizers,
inwhichoscillatorswouldfrequentlydriftslightlyoutof
tune.Highernumbersincreasetheeffect.
Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
Unison
[On, Off]
11: Menu Command
UnisoncanbeusedinMonomode.
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramusestwoor
morestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathicksound.
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparameterstosetthe
numberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,andthe
Thicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.
Number of Voices
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Commandonpage 64.
[2...6]
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itappliesonly
whenUnisonisOn.
Detune
[00...99 cents]
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnisonvoices,
incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThicknessparameter,
below,controlshowthevoicesaredistributedacrossthe
detuneamount.WhenThicknessisOff,thevoicesare
distributedevenly,centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoicesparameter
issetto3,Detuneissetto24,andThicknessisOff:
Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwowill
notbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedupby12
cents.
13
Program mode
Using Hold with Acoustic Pianos
12: Note-On/Scale
12
Menu
12c
12a
Holdisalsousefulforsimulatingthetopoctavesofan
acousticpiano,inwhichnotesalwayssustainuntiltheyfade
outnaturally,regardlessofhowlongyouholdthekey.
TheHoldBottomandHoldTopparametersaredesigned
forexactlythispurpose.Theyletyoulimittheeffectofthe
Holdparametertoaspecificrangeofthekeyboard.
Hold Bottom
12b
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Hold Top
12d
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Here,youcanmakethefollowingsettings.
MakekeyboardsplitsettingsforOSC1,OSC2,andHold.
Enable/disablethehalfdamperfunction.
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuousfoot
pedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoastandard
footswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermoresubtlecontrolof
sustain,whichcanbeespeciallyusefulforpianosounds.
Selectthebasicscaleoftheprogram.
12a: Key Zone

Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopandbottom
keylimitsforOscillators1and2.Also,youcancontrolthe
keyboardrangeoverwhichtheHoldparametertakeseffect.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
OSC 1 Bottom
[C1...G9]
TheKROMEwillautomaticallysensewhenahalfdamperis
connectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput.Forproper
operation,youwillalsoneedtocalibratethepedal,using
theHalfDamperCalibrationcommandintheGlobalmenu.
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperworkjust
likeastandardfootswitch.InconjunctionwiththeEnable
HalfDamperparameter,below,intermediatepositions
allowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similartothedamper
pedalofanacousticpiano.
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay.
Enable Half-Damper
OSC 1 Top
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals,normal
sustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willallmodulatetheAmp
EG,asdescribedbelow.
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay.
OSC 2 Bottom
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay.
OSC 2 Top
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay.
Hold
[On, Off]
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasifyou
wereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryouliftyourfingers
fromthekeyboard.
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(andAmp
EG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwillplayforthe
entirelengthofthemultisample(s).
[On, Off]
WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDICC#64
willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnotmodulatetheAmp
EG.
Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time

TheamountofmodulationdependsonwhethertheAmp
EGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewithmostacoustic
pianosounds),orsetto1ormore.Themodulationis
continuous,from1x(nochange)to55timeslonger;thetable
belowshowsaselectionofrepresentativepoints.
Half-Damper modulation of Amp EG Release Time
Multiply Amp EG Release Time by
CC#64 Value
If Sustain = 0
If Sustain = 1 or more
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledfortherange
setbytheHoldBottomandHoldTopparameters,below.
1x
1x
32
2.1x
2.1x
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe
defaultsetting.
64
3.2x
80
5.9x
Using Hold with Drum Kits
96
22.3x
127
55x
Holdcanbeespeciallyusefulfordrumprograms,sinceit
letsthedrumsamplesringoutnaturally.Ingeneral,when
yousettheOscillatorModetoDrums,itsgoodtosetHold
toOn.
3.2x
12c: OSC1/2 Note-On Control
OnceyouveturnedonHoldforadrumprogram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasisaccordingto
settingswithintheselectedDrumKit.
OSC1 Delay
IfakeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameter(Global54a)
isunchecked,thenotewillbeheld.
ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelayingone
oscillatorinrelationtotheother.
IfthekeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameterischecked,
itwillnotbeheld.
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthesoundby
aparticularamountoftime,thesoundwillplayassoonas
youreleasethekey.Youcanusethistocreatetheclick
heardwhenaharpsichordnoteisreleased,forinstance.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbeheld
regardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceivesetting.
14
12b: Half-Damper Control
[0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator1actuallybeginstosound.
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers 12: Note-On/Scale
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalsobestto
settheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0.
WhenKeyissettoC,usetheC,D,F,GandAnotes.Other
keyswillplaythenormalequaltemperedpitches.
Mode
Pelog:ThisisanotherIndonesiangamelanscale,withseven
notesperoctave.
[Key, Key + Damper]
Normally,youplaynotessimplybypressingkeysonthe
keyboard.Inspecialcases,however,youcansetthis
parametersothatyoumustfirstbeholdingdownthe
damperpedal,andthenpressakey,inordertoplayanote.
Forinstance,thiscanbeusefulwhenmodelingthebehavior
ofapianosoundboard.
Keyisthenormalmode.
WhenKeyissettoC,usethewhitekeys.Theblackkeyswill
playtheequaltemperedpitches.
Stretch:Thistuningisusedforacousticpianos.
UserAllNotesScale:Thisisauserprogrammedscalewith
differentsettingsforall128MIDInotes.Youcansetupthis
scaleinGlobalmode(Global31b).
WhenyouselectKey+Damper,noteswillonlysoundifthe
damperpedalisbeinghelddown.Whenthedamperpedal
isreleased,allnoteswillbestoppedeveniftheyarestill
beinghelddown.
UserOctaveScale0015:Theseareuserprogrammedscales
withsettingsforeachofthe12notesinanoctave.Youcan
setthemupinGlobalmode(Global31a).
OSC2 Delay
Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
[0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Mode
[Key, Key + Damper]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator2actuallybeginstosound.
Key (Scale Key)
ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqualTemperament,
thecombinationoftheselectedscaleandtheKey
settingmayskewthetuningofthenote.Forexample,A
abovemiddleCmightbecome442 Hz,insteadofthe
normal440 Hz.YoucanusetheGlobalModesMaster
Tune(Global01a)parametertocorrectthis,if
necessary.
SeeOSC1DelayandMode,above.
12d: Scale
Type
[Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
[CB]
Random
[07]
Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey
parameter,below,isveryimportant.
Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchforeach
note.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbecompletely
stable;highervaluescreatemorerandomization.
EqualTemperament:Thisisthemostwidelyusedscaleby
far,inwhicheachsemitonestepisspacedatequalpitch
intervals.
Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstrumentsthat
havenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalogsynths,tape
mechanismorgansoracousticinstruments.
EqualTemperamentallowseasymodulation,sothatachord
progressionplayedinthekeyofCsoundsroughlythesame
asthesameprogressionplayedinF#.Sacrificed,however,is
someofthepurityofindividualintervalsofferedbythe
scalesbelow.
12: Menu Command
PureMajor:Inthistemperament,majorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
PureMinor:Inthistemperament,minorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
Arabic:Thisscaleincludesthequartertoneintervalsusedin
Arabicmusic.
Commandonpage 64.
Pythagoras:ThisscaleisbasedonancientGreekmusic
theory,andisespeciallyeffectiveforplayingmelodies.It
producescompletelypurefifths,withoneexception,atthe
expenseofdetuningotherintervalsthirdsinparticular.
AsmuchasPythagorasmighthavelikedtodoso,itsnot
possibletomakeallthefifthspurewhilealsokeepingthe
octaveintune.Forthesakeoftheoctave,oneofthefifthsthe
intervalfromthesharpfourthdegreetothesharpfirst
degreeismadequiteflat.
Werkmeister(WerkmeisterIII):Thisscalewasoneofthe
manytemperamentsystemsdevelopedtowardstheendof
theBaroqueperiod.TheseWellTemperedtuningswere
aimedatallowingrelativelyfreetranspositionalthough
youllstillnoticethatthedifferentkeysmaintaintheirown
distinctcharacteristics,unlikeEqualTemperament.
J.S.Bachwasreferringtothesenewscalesinhistitle,The
WellTemperedClavier.Assuch,thisgroupare
particularlyappropriateforlatebaroqueorganand
harpsichordmusic.
Kirnberger(KirnbergerIII):ThisisasecondWell
Temperedtuning,datingfromtheearly18thcentury.
Slendro:ThisisanIndonesiangamelanscale,withfive
notesperoctave.
15
Program mode
13: Controllers Setup

18
Menu
18a
18b
HereyoucanspecifytheSW1andSW2switchandfront
panel14knobsoftheprogramwhenRealtimeControls
USERisselected.
13a: Panel Switch 1/2 Assign

SW1 (SW1 Assign)
[Off, ..., JS-Y Lock]
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeListofSW1/2assignmentsonpage 348.
Note:Ifyouchangethefunctionsetting,thestatusisresetto
off.
Note:Theon/offstatusoftheSW1,SW2switchesis
memorizedwhenyousavetheprogram.
Mode (SW1 Mode)
[Toggle, Momentary]
Thisspecifiestheon/offoperationwhenyoupresstheSW1
switch.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOffeach
timeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.
SW2 (SW2 Assign)
Mode (SW2 Mode)
[Toggle, Momentary]
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW2.Thefunctionsthatcanbe
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthesubstitution
ofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1Mod.(CC#80).
13b: Realtime Controls Knob Assign

Hereyoucanselectthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whenControl
Assign(08b)RealtimeControlsUSERisselected.(See
RealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentsonpage 348)
Thefunctionsyouassignhereareactivewhenyouusethe
SELECTbuttontoselectUSER,andoperateknobs14.
USER [1]
USER [2]
USER [3]
USER [4]
V
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#95, CC#102119]

[Off, ..., MIDI CC#95, CC#102119]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#95, CC#102119]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#95, CC#102119]
13: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
16
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 21: OSC1 Setup
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch

Thesepagescontrolthefirstandmostbasicelementsof
sounds:theMultisamplesthattheoscillatorsplay,andthe
pitchatwhichitplaysthem.Forinstance,youcan:
SelectMultisamplesforSingleandDoublePrograms,or
DrumKitsforDrumsandDoubleDrumsPrograms.
Setupvelocitysplits,crossfades,andlayersforSingleand
DoublePrograms.
21: OSC1 Setup

21
Menu
21a
21b
Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingtheoctave,fine
tuning,andsoon.
Controlpitchmodulationusingavarietyofcontrollers
suchasLFO,pitchEG,andthejoystick.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Drums,onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesfor
Oscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
Multisamples, and Drum Kits

MultisamplesandDrumKitsallowyoutoplaysamplesin
differentways.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacrossthe
keyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitarMultisample
mighthavesixsamplesoneforeachstring.
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
playingdrumsamples.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers

Eachoscillatorhaseightvelocityzonesthatallowdifferent
keyboardvelocitiestoswitchthemultisampleordrum
samplethatisactuallysounded.
Velocity Split
Programssoundsarebasedonmultisamples,andthispage
letsyousetupallofthebasicmultisamplerelatedsettings.
SelectMultisamplesfortheOscillator(inaSingleor
DoubleProgram),orselecttheDrumKitforaDrum
Program
SettheOscillatorsbasicpitch
21a: OSC1 Frequency

Oscillator Mode Single, Double
OSC1 Frequency
Foreachzone,youcanspecifythethreshold(boundary
value)andcrossfade(howvelocitywillsmoothlyfade
betweenthesamplesofadjacentzones).Thisallowsyouto
createvelocityswitchedorlayeredsounds,suchasthe
followingexamples.
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheOscillator,inoctaves.The
defaultis+0[8].Thestandardoctaveofamultisampleis+0
[8].
Velocitysplitsinwhichthezonesarecleanlyseparatedat
theirthreshold
Transpose
Velocitycrossfadesinwhichthezoneswillsmoothly
crossfadebeyondtheirthreshold.
Velocitylayersinwhichadditionalsoundsareaddedfor
avelocityregionaboveaspecifiedthreshold.
Note:IftheOscillatorModeisDrumsorDoubleDrums,the
velocityzonesettingsalreadyspecifiedforthedrumkitwill
beapplied,andwillnotbeshowninthescreen.Thevelocity
zonesforadrumkitcanbeeditedinGlobalP5DrumKit
(seep.205).PressingtheJumptoDrumKitEditbutton
showninthescreenwilltakeyoudirectlytoGlobalP5.
Octave
[2[32'], 1[16'], +0[8'], +1[4']]
[12...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
octave.
Tune
[1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Frequency Offset
[10.0Hz ... +10Hz]
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1 Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
21b: Multisamples
Usetheslideronthelefttocheckthesettingsofeachdrum
sampleshowninabbreviatedform.Dragtheslidertoview
thesettings.
1: Multisample 1
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle
Multisample,justsetupMultisample1asdesired,andthen
settheThresholdVelocityto1andtheCrossfade
(CrossfadeRange)toOff.
Multisample On/Off
[Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthemultisample1willsound.
ItwillsoundifthisisOn.
17
Program mode
Bank
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel.
[Mono, Stereo, XL, M, XL, St]
ThisisdisplayedifMultisampleOn/OffisOn.
Youcanchoosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereo
Multisamples.
Mono,Stereo:Conventionalmonauralorstereo
multisamples.
XL.M(eXtraLargeMono),XL.St(eXtraLargeStereo):
Highcapacitymonauralorstereomultisamples.
NotethatstereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceasmany
voicesasmonoMultisamples.
Multisample select
[List of Multisample]
Thisspecifiesamultisample.
Somemultisampleshaveanupperlimit;notesplayed
abovethatlimitwillnotsound.
WhenyoupresstheMultisampleSelectpopupbutton,the
multisamplelistwillappear,allowingyoutoselecta
multisamplefromthelist.
Usethetabstoselectacategory,andselectamultisample
withinthecategory.
Youcansearchforamultisamplebyaportionofitsname
(seep.2).
2...8: (Multisample 2...8)

ThesearethemultisamplesettingsfortheMultisample28.
Theparametersareexactlythesameasthosefor
Multisample1.
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonesfortheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandforeachoscillator.
Themetertotheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocity.This
allowsyoutoverifythemultisamplesandoscillatorsthat
willsoundateachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteron
page 5.).
21c: OSC1 (Drum Kit Frequency)

Oscillator Mode Drums, Double Drums
21
Menu
21c
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmtheselection,ortheCancel
buttontocancel.
21d
Octave
[2[32'], 1[16'], +0[8'], +1[4']]
Thisadjuststhepitchinoctaveunits.Whenusingadrum
kit,settheOctaveto8.
Rev (Reverse)
[Off, On]
Thisplaystheselectedmultisampleinreversewithout
loopingit.
Note:Ifanindividualsamplewithinthemultisampleis
alreadysettoreverse,itwillplayinreversewithoutthis
setting.
Transpose
[12...+12]
Thisadjuststhelocationoftheinstrumentsintheselected
drumkit.Unlessyouneedtochangethis,leaveitat0.
Tune
[1200...+1200]
On(checked):Themultisamplewillplayinreverse.
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentunits.
Forvelocityzonesthatarenotselected(shownasoneline),
RevOnisindicatedas[R].
ThepitchofeachdrumkitcanbeadjustedinGlobalP5:
Drumkit.
Off(unchecked):Themultisamplewillplaynormally.
Freq. Offset (Frequency Offset)

[10.0Hz ... +10Hz]
Offset (Start Offset)
[Off, 1st...8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
Multisamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.
TheStartOffsetspecifieswhethertousethenormalstart
point(Off),ortouseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st
8th).
SomeMultisamplesmayhavefewerthan8pre
programmedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepoints
canbeselected.
Level
[000...127]
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.The
Ampsectioncanmodifythisbasiclevelextensivelywith
envelopes,LFOs,keyboardtracking,andothermodulation;
formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP4:Amp/EQon
page 35.
18
Wheneditingadrumprogram,youmustsetthis
parameterto8.Withothersettings,thesoundsofthe
drumkitwillbeassignedtothewrongnotesofthe
keyboard.
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1 Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 22: OSC1 Velocity
21d: Drum Kit

TheseparametersappearwhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DrumsorDoubleDrums.
Drum Kit
[000...031 (INT), 032...047 (USER),

048056 (GM)]
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
22b: Multisample Velocity Zone
Thisselectsadrumkit.
Hereyoucanspecifythevelocityzoneforeachofthe
oscillatorseightmultisamples.
Jump to Drum kit Edit Page button
Threshold Velocity
PressingthisbuttonwilltakeyoudirectlytoGlobalP5:
DrumKitwhereyoucaneditthedrumkitselectedbyDrum
KitSelect.EvenifOscillatorModeissettoDoubleDrums,
youwillhearonlythekitthatwasselected.IftheGMdrum
kitwasselected,thelastselecteddrumkitwillbeselected.
Asdesired,useCopyDrumKittocopytheGMdrumkit
totheUSERbank.
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisamplewill
sound.Multisample1sThresholdVelocitycanbeequalto,
butnotlowerthan,thatofMultisample2.
[001...127]
Crossfade (Crossfade Range)
[Off, 001...127]
ThissetstherangeofvelocitiesoverwhichMultisample1
willfadeintoMultisample2,goingupfromtheThreshold
Velocity.
Forinstance,iftheThresholdVelocityissetto64,andthe
Crossfadeissetto20,MS2willstarttofadeinatvelocities
of84andbelow.
21: Menu Command
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheCrossfade,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue(See*
EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Commandonpage 64.
Thisshowsthevelocityzone.
Select
22: OSC1 Velocity
Xfade Range = 20
Curve = Linear
23
Menu
84
Bottom Velocity = 64
23a
23b
23c
23d
Hereyoucanmakethefollowingsettings.
Velocityzoneforoscillator1
Themultisamplesvelocitysplitandcrossfadesettings
22a: OSC 1 Velocity Zone

Velocitycanbeusedtoswitchbetweensoundingoscillators
1and2.Hereyoucanspecifythevelocityzoneforoscillator
1.
Thisvelocityzonesettingtakespriorityoverthevelocity
settingsofmultisamples18.Thestatusofthesettingsis
indicatedbythegraphontherightsideofthescreen.This
letsyoumakesettingswhilecomparingthemwiththe
velocitysplitgraph.
Bottom
[001...127]
Curve
[Linear, Power, Layer]
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwoMultisamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofMultisamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwoMultisamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddle
ofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpinthe
volumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLinear
instead.
LayermeansthatthetwoMultisampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Top
[001...127]
ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Note:TheOSC1Topvelocitymustbegreaterthanthe
OSC1Bottomvelocity.
19
Program mode
Crossfade Curves
Top
Linear
ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
MS2
[001...127]
TheOSC1TopvelocitymustbegreaterthantheOSC1
Bottomvelocity.
MS1
Volume
Xfade
Velocity
Velocity Split
Power
Thisshowsthevelocityzonefortheoscillator.
MS2
Themeterontheleftshowsthenoteonvelocityvaluesfor
theglobalMIDIchannel.Thisletsyouverifythe
multisamplesthatwillsoundateachvelocity(See01e:
VelocityMeteronpage 5.).
MS1
Volume
Jump to Drum kit Edit Page button
Xfade
SeeJumptoDrumkitEditPagebuttononpage 19.
Velocity
Layer
22: Menu Command
MS2
MS1
Volume
Xfade
Commandonpage 64.
Velocity
Velocity Split Zone

Thisspecifiesthevelocityzoneforeachoftheoscillators
eightmultisamples.Themetershowsthenoteonvelocity
value.
23: OSC1 Pitch

23
Menu
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonesfortheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandforeachoscillator.
23a
Themeterattheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocity.This
allowsyoutoverifythemultisamplesandoscillatorsthat
willsoundateachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteron
page 5.).
23b
23c
23d
22c: OSC1 Velocity

Oscillator Mode Drums, Double Drums
22c
21
Menu
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforOscillator1spitch
modulation.Forexample,youcan:
SpecifypitchbendcontrolledbythejoystickX(oran
incomingpitchbendmessage)settoindependentBend
UpandBendDown,orcontrolledbyanincoming
messageCC#16(theribboncontrolmessageetc).
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchangeswhen
youplayupanddownthekeyboard.
AssignAMSmodulationforpitch.
SetupinitialamountsofpitchmodulationfromthePitch
EGandLFO1/2,aswellasAMSmodulationofLFOand
EGamounts.
Velocitycanbeusedtoswitchbetweenthedrumkits
soundedbyoscillators1and2.Hereyoucanspecifythe
velocityzoneforoscillator1.Thestatusofthesettingswill
beindicatedinthegraphontherightsideofthescreen.This
letsyoueditsettingswhilecomparingthemwiththe
velocitysplitgraph.
Bottom
[001...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
20
SetupPortamento.
23a: Pitch
Pitch Slope
[1.0...+2.0]
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 23: OSC1 Pitch
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,theeffectof
theEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmeanlowerpitches,
andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigherpitches.
Pitch Slope, pitch, and note

+2
Pitch
AMS (Pitch EG)
+1
2oct
1oct
1oct
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity
1
C4 C5
Note on keyboard
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescausethepitchto
fallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthekeyboard
wontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasifyourealways
playingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecialeffectssounds,for
instance.
Ribbon
[12...+12]
SpecifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenCC#16
isreceived.
Withapositive(+)setting,thepitchwillrisewhenthevalue
ofCC#16ishigherthanthecentervalueof64.Witha
negative()setting,thepitchwillfall.
JS (+X)
[60...+12]
[12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEGAMS
modulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitialIntensity
areaddedtogethertodeterminethePitchEGsfinaleffect.
Withpositive(+)values,greatermodulationwillincrease
theeffectofthePitchEG,asshowninexampleBbelow.
Withnegative()values,greatermodulationwillintroduce
theoppositeeffectofthePitchEGlikeinvertingthepolarity
oftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveraldifferentways:
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
parameter,andthenreducethisamountwithAMS.In
thiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimplydiminished,
andnotactuallyinverted,asshowninexampleC.
YoucanalsosettheAMSIntensityamounttobegreater
thantheinitialIntensity.Inthiscase,theEGwillhavea
positiveeffectwithlowmodulationamounts,andan
invertedeffectathighermodulationamountsasshownin
exampleD.
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheright(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoapositive
value.
Pitch EG AMS
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseoneoctaveabovethe
originalpitch.
Change
to Pitch
JS (X)
A. Original EG
[60...+12]
C. Intensity = 3.00
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheleft(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoanegative
value.
Change
to Pitch
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfiveoctavesbelowthe
originalpitch.Youcanusethistocreateguitarstyle
downwardswoops.
23c: Portamento
AMS (Pitch)
[List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsaAMSsourcetocontrolthepitch.Foralistof
AMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(AlternateModulation
Source)Listonpage 340.
Intensity
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
ofthePitchEG.
[12.00...+12.00]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitch
modulation,insemitones.
B. Intensity = +6.00
D. Intensity = 24.00
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetweennotes,
insteadofchangingabruptly.
Enable
[Off, On]
On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitchglides
smoothlybetweennotes.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthedefault
state.
Fingered
[Off, On]
ForexampleifyousetAMS(Pitch)toJS+Y:CC#01andthen
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,thepitchwillriseif
thisparameterissettoapositive(+)value,orfallifthis
parameterissettoanegative()value.
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamentothrough
yourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playinglegatowill
turnonPortamento,andplayingdetachedwillturnitoff
again.
23b: Pitch EG
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
Intensity
[12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonOscillator
1sfrequency,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMSmodulation.
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,positive
valuesfromtheEGraisethepitch,andnegativevalues
lowerthepitch.
On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
Mode
[Rate, Time]
RatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglideagivendistanceinpitchfor
instance,onesecondperoctave.Putanotherway,gliding
21
Program mode
severaloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthanglidingahalf
step.
TimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglidefromonenotetoanother,regardless
ofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisisespeciallyusefulwhen
playingchords,sinceitensuresthateachnoteinthechord
willenditsglideatthesametime.
Time
[000...127]
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickup,theeffectoftheLFOwill
fadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthetopofits
range,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelledout.
AMS (LFO1)
oftheLFOappliedtopitch.
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.
Intensity
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(LFO1)
modulationforpitch.
Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off
Withasettingof0,modulationwillnotbeapplied.Witha
settingof12.00,theOSC1LFO1willapplyamaximumof
+/1octaveofpitchmodulation.
Youcanturnportamentoon/offbyusingthetwoassignable
switchesSW1andSW2.
Todoso:
1. GototheProgP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetup
page.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2to
Porta.SW(CC#65).
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable
Portamento.
IfyouassignportamentotoSW1/2,MIDIportamento
controller#65willbetransmittedeachtimeyouusethe
switch.Youcanalsoturnportamentoon/offby
receivingMIDIcontroller#65.
[12.00...+12.00]
ForexampleifAMS(LFO1)issettoJS+Y:CC#01andyou
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,pitchmodulationfrom
OSC1LFO1willbeappliedinpositivephaseifthisisa
positive(+)value,orappliedinnegativephaseifthisisa
negative
()value.
LFO1Int.,JS+YInt.,andAMS(LFO1)settingsaresummed
todeterminethedepthanddirectionofpitchmodulation
producedbyOSC1LFO1.
LFO2:
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothoseforLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunderLFO1,
above.
23d: LFO1/2
V
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingtheLFO1
Int.,LFO2Int.parameters.
UseJS+YInt.toadjusttheamountofLFOproducedby
JS+Yoperations.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
Commandonpage 64.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
LFO1
LFO1 Int. (LFO1 Intensity)
[12.00...+12.00]
25: OSC2 Setup
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,in
semitones,beforeanyJS+YInt.orAMSmodulation.
Onthispageyoucanspecifythebasicoscillatorpitchfor
oscillator2,andassignthemultisamples.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
DoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
JS+Y Int. (LFO1 JS+Y Intensity) [12.00...+12.00]
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder21:OSC1Setuponpage 17.
SpecifythedepthofpitchmodulationproducedbyOSC1
LFO1whenthejoystickismovedinthe+Y(away)direction
(orwhenCC#1isreceived).(Joystickcontrolinthe+Y
directioniscalledJS+Y.)
ThisparametersetsthemaximumamountofLFO
modulationaddedbyJS+Y,insemitones.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe+Y
directionwillcausetheOSC1LFO1toproducedeeperpitch
modulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.You
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyLFO1Int.,above.Forexample:
1. SetLFO1Int.to+7.00.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthepitch,
bendingitbyaperfect5th.
2. SetJS+YInt.Intensityto7.00.
22
23: Menu Command
LFO1andLFO2canbothcontrolthepitch.Youcancontrol
thestrengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthreedifferent
ways:
26: OSC2 Velocity

Onthispageyoucanspecifythevelocityzonesforoscillator
2itselfandforthemultisamples.
describedunder22:OSC1Velocityonpage 19.
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 27: OSC2 Pitch
27: OSC2 Pitch
210: Pitch EG
ThispagecontrolsthepitchsettingsforOscillator2.
describedunder23:OSC1Pitchonpage 20.
210
Menu
210a
210b
210c
ThePitchEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestothepitchofOscillators1
and2.Theparametersonthispagecontroltheshapeofthe
EG.Forinstance,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationtimeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthepitch,usethe
PitchEGparametersontheP2:OSC/PitchOSC1Pitchpage
andOSC2Pitchpage,asdescribedunder23b:PitchEG
onpage 21.
Differences from the other EGs

ThePitchEGisdifferentfromtheFilterandAmpEGsin
severalways:
ThesinglePitchEGissharedbybothOscillator1and
Oscillator2.
TheSustainlevelisalways0.
TheLevelmodulationhastwoAMSsourcesinsteadof
one,andtheTimemodulationhasoneAMSsource
insteadofthree.
Pitch EG is also an AMS source

YoucanusethePitchEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselectthePitchEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
210a:EG Reset
AMS (EG Reset AMS)
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestartpoint.
Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFOtotriggerthe
EGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisinadditiontothe
initialnoteon,whichalwayscausestheEGtostart.
Threshold
[99...+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjusttheexact
pointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbereset,
effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstotherrhythmic
effects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassingthrough
thethresholdmovingdownwards.
23
Program mode
Note:ForseveralLFOwaveformtypes,oriftheLFOcycleis
fast,theLFOoutputmaynotalwayskeepupwithhigh
valuessuchas+99or99.
Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmaycause
inconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEGwillnot
resetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThresholduntilthe
EGtriggersconsistently.
Attack
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStartlevel
totheAttacklevel.
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansettheStart
levelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstartinstantaneouslyat
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay
[00...99]
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevelto
theBreaklevel.
210b:Envelope
Pitch EG
Slope
Attack
Level
Break
Level
Sustain Level
(Always 0)
Star t
Level
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheBreak
leveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitchEGisalways0).
OnceitreachestheSustain,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release
Level
Change to
Pitch
Time
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Slope
Time
[00...99]
Release
Time
Release
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromtheSustain
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue
(See*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Note-on or reset
Theenvelopemovestoaspecifiedleveloverthespecified
time,andthenmovestothenextspecifiedleveloverthe
specifiedtime.Itproducesamodulationsignal
correspondingtothismovement.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfourlevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraightlines.
Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelytobemade
outofcurves.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchangequicklyat
first,andthenslowdownasitapproachesthenextpoint.
Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,linearsegments.
Level
Eachofthefourlevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethepitch(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negative
levelswillmakeitgodown.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurvedshapes
naturally.TheKROMEgoesastepfurtherthanvintage
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelopesegments.
Notethat,unliketheFilterandAmpEGs,thePitchEGs
SustainLevelisalways0.
Pitch EG Curve
Start
[99...+99]
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Thissetstheinitiallevelatnoteon.
Attack
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
[99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
Break
[99...+99]
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendofthe
Decaytime.
Release
[99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremainthe
same.However,greatercurvaturewilltendtosoundfaster,
becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyatthebeginning.
Different curve settings for up and down

EG Value
Actual Time
10
10ms
20
44ms
30
104ms
40
224ms
50
464ms
60
944ms
70
1.8seconds
80
3.8seconds
90
10.9seconds
99
87.3seconds
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegmentswhichgo
down.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,suchas
DecayandRelease.
Attack
[0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthetransition
fromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
Decay
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthetransition
fromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
24
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 210: Pitch EG
Slope
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthetransition
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitch
EGisalways0).
Release
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
210c:EG Level/Time Modulation

Level
AMS2
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourceforcontrollingtheEGs
Levelparameters.TheStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevels
sharethissource,buteachhasitsownmodulationintensity.
TheparametersofAMS2areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,
above.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontroltheTime
parametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,andSlopetimes
sharethisAMSsource,buteachhasitsownmodulation
intensity.
Pitch EG Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouusetwodifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheLevelparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthetwo
AMSsources,theStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevelseach
havetheirownmodulationintensities.
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Note-on
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,you
cancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestotheEGshape,
asshownbelow.
Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevelreached
attheendofthesegment.
Note-on
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack=
Decay=
Slope=
Softly played note.

Original Shape.
Strongly played note.

Times are longer.
Reaches Sustain more
slowly.

Times are shorter.
quickly.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeorthe
Breaklevel.
ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attacklevel,
orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatarealready
sounding,unlesstheEGisthenrestartedviaEGReset.
Note-on
AMS
AMS
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbeuseful
here,forinstance.
Pitch EG Level Modulation
At (Attack)
Original Shape
Positive AMS on Start,

Attack, and Break
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
Attackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerathigher
velocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,theAttacktime
willgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
Negative AMS on Start,

Attack, and Break
Positive AMS on Start and Break,

Negative AMS on Attack
AMS1
AMS1
Dc (Decay)
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
St (Start)
Forexample,ifyousettheAMS1sourcetoVelocityandset
Stto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplayharder.If
youinsteadsetStto99,theStartlevelwilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
[99...+99]
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
Br (Break)
[99...+99]
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Sl (Slope)
[99...+99]
modulationfortheSlopetime.
[99...+99]
modulationfortheStartlevel.
At (Attack)
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvalueforinstance,
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
timealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcutthe
Attacktimealmostinhalf.
210: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
[99...+99]
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
25
Program mode
PROG P3: Filter

Filteringcanmakesubtleordramaticchangestothe
oscillatorstimbre.Eachoscillatorhastwomultimode
resonantfilters,AandB,aswellasadedicatedfilter
envelopeandkeyboardtrackinggenerator.
When24 dB/octisselected,onlythecontrolsforFilterAare
active;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Serial and Parallel Routing
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallaspectsofthefilters.Among
otherthings,youcan:
Makebasicsettingsforeachoscillatorsfilters,including
routing,modes,cutoff,resonance,etc.
Oscillator
Filter A (Low Pass)
Filter B (High Pass)
Setupfiltermodulation,includingkeyboardtracking,the
filterenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMScontrol.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesforOscillator2s
filterswillbegrayedout.
31: Filter1
Filter A (Low Pass)

31
Menu
Oscillator
Filter B (High Pass)
31a
Low Pass:
12dB/oct
31c
31b
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforOscillator1s
FilterAandFilterB.Forexample,youcan:
Setupthefilterstoproduceasingle12 dB/octfilter,dual
12 dB/octfiltersineitherserialorparallelrouting,ora
single24 dB/octfilter.
SeteachofthetwofilterstoLowPass,HighPass,Band
Pass,orBandRejectmodes.
Setthecutoff,resonance,andinputandoutputlevelsof
eachfilter,includingmodulationofresonanceandoutput
level.
31a: Filter Routing

Filter Routing
[Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB(4Pole)]
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.This
parametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthefiltersare
used,andifbothareused,itcontrolshowtheyare
connectedtoeachother.
Single.ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,12 dB/
octavefilter(6 dBforBandPassandBandReject).Whenthis
optionisselected,thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Serial.ThisusesbothFilterAandFilterB.Theoscillator
firstgoesthroughFilterA,andthentheoutputofFilterAis
processedthroughFilterB.
Parallel.ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsofthe
twofiltersarethensummedtogether.
24dB/oct.Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4pole,
24 dB/octavefilter(12 dBforBandPassandBandReject).In
comparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesasharperrolloff
beyondthecutofffrequency,aswellasaslightlymore
delicateresonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthis
generaltypeoffilter.
26
Low Pass:
24dB/oct / 24db/oct
12db/oct
31b: Filter A
Filter Type
[Low Pass (12dB/oct), High Pass (12dB/oct),
Band Pass (6dB/oct), Band Reject (6dB/oct)]
Thefilterwillproduceverydifferentresultsdependingon
theselectedfiltertype.Theselectionswillchangeslightly
accordingtotheselectedFilterRouting,toshowthecorrect
cutoffslopeindBperoctave.
LowPass(12dB/oct).Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesound
whicharehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
timbressounddarker.
HighPass(12dB/oct).Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesound
whicharelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethis
tomaketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BandPass(6dB/oct).Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,
bothhighsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramaticallydependingon
thecutoffsettingandtheoscillatorsmultisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBandPassfilter
tocreatetelephoneorvintagephonographsounds.With
higherresonancesettings,itcancreatebuzzyornasal
timbres.
BandReject(6dB/oct).Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotch
filtercutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.TrymodulatingthecutoffwithanLFOto
createphaserlikeeffects.
PROG P3: Filter 31: Filter1
AMS (Resonance)
Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency
ThisselectsaAMSsourcetocontroltheResonanceamount.
Low Pass
AMS Int.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonance
modulation.
Forexample,ifVelocityhasbeenselected,changesin
keyboardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.Withpositive(+)
values,theresonancewillincreaseasyouplaymore
strongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonancewill
approachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.With
negative()values,theresonancewilldecreaseasyouplay
morestrongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonance
willapproachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.
High Pass
TheresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingtheResonance
andAMSInt.values.
Band Pass
Output
[00...99]
ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanusethisto
balancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhentheRoutingis
settoParallel,ortoturndownthevolumetoavoidclipping
laterinthesignalchain.
AMS (Output AMS)
Band Reject
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheoutputlevel
ofFilterA.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS Int.
Bypass
[Off, On]
ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheoutputlevel
modulation.
31c: Filter B
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
WhenBypassisOn,FilterAwillhavenoeffect.
Frequency
[99...+99]
[00...99]
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissettoSerial
orParallel.Otherwise,theparametersinthissectionwillbe
grayedout.
ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,inincrements
of1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectofthecutoff
frequencywillchangedependingontheselectedFilter
Type.
TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothoseforFilterA.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
FilterA,above.
Trim
[00...99]
Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.Ifyou
noticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywithhigh
Resonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldownhere,orat
theOutput.
Resonance
[00...99]
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthecutoff
frequency.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,andfrequencies
beyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminishsmoothly.
31: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbreof
thefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormoreextreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa
separate,whistlingpitch.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,pleasesee
KeyFollowonpage 29.
Resonance
Low resonance value
High resonance value
27
Program mode
Keyboard Track Shape and Intensity
32: Filter1 Keyboard Track
Intensity = +99 (Original Shape)
32
Menu
32a
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
keyboardtrack.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,andcontrol
howthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff.
orParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilterBwillbe
grayedout.
Intensity to B
32a: Keyboard Track

Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplayhigher
pitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingrecreatesthis
effectbyraisingthelowpassfiltercutofffrequencyasyou
playhigheronthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkey
trackingisnecessaryinordertomakethetimbreconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
TheKROMEkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore
complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.For
instance,youcan:
Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe
middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmoreslowlyor
notatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlikeeffects.
How it works: Keys and Ramps

Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,or
slopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.Thebottomand
topkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopoftheMIDIrange,
respectively.YoucansettheotherthreekeysnamedKey
Low,Center,andKeyHightobeanywhereinbetween.
ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchangebetween
eachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLoCent(LowCenter)
Rampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesamebetweenthe
KeyLowkeyandtheCenterkey.
TheKeyvaluewillbethebreakpoint,andtheslopeofthe
lowerandhigherregionsonthekeyboardisspecifiedbythe
Ramp.
AttheCenterkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtracking
hasnoeffect.
Intensity to A
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterAscutofffrequency.TheoveralleffectoftheKeyboard
TrackisacombinationofthisIntensityvalueandtheoverall
KeyboardTrackshape.
Withpositivevalues(+),theeffectwillbeinthedirection
specifiedbykeyboardtracking;iftherampgoesup,the
filtercutoffwillincrease.
Withnegativevalues(),theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;iftherampgoesup,thefiltercutoffwilldecrease.
28
Low Break Key
Center Key
High Break Key
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterBscutofffrequency.
Key
Key Low
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
lowerrangewillbeconnected.
Center
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointforthe
centerofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboard
trackinghasnoeffectonthefiltercutoff,oronanyAMS
destinations.
Key High
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
upperrangewillbeconnected.
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenterKey;
negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
settingswillchangedependingonwhethertherampisto
theleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playloweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
playhigheronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgoup.
Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationoftheramp
values,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoA(B)parameters.
WhenIntensitytoA(B)issetto+99,arampof50changes
thefilterfrequencyby1octaveforeveryoctaveofthe
keyboard,andarampof+99changesthefrequencyby2
octavesforeveryoctaveofthekeyboard.
PROG P3: Filter 33: Filter1 Modulation
Btm Lo (Bottom-Low)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDInote
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Lo Cent (Low-Center)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Cent Hi (Center-High)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Hi Top (High-Top)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
Commandonpage 64.
33: Filter1 Modulation

ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan:
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfiltercutoff.
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
grayedout.
33
Menu
33a
+Inf and Inf ramps

+InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Infor
Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextremehighestor
lowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
33b
+Inf and Inf Ramps

Ramp = +Inf
33a: Filter EG
TheFilterEGmodulatestheFilterAandBcutoff
frequenciesovertime.YoucancontrolhowstronglytheEG
willaffectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
Ramp = 50
SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
Ramp = Inf
Key Low
Center
Key High
Note:ifyousettheCentHirampto+InforInf,theHiTop
parameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyousettheLo
Centrampto+InforInf,theBtmLorampwillbegrayed
out.
UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGappliedtothe
filter.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
appliedtothefilter.
Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresultsare
addedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
Key Follow
TosetuptheEGitself,includingattackandreleasetimes,
levels,andsoon,pleasesee35:Filter1EGonpage 31.
TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthefilter
frequencytracksthepitchofthekeyboard:
Velocity to A
1. SettheFilterFrequencyto30.
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilterEG
appliedtoFilterA.
2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99.
3. SettheBtmLoandLoCentrampsto50.
[99...+99]
Velocity control of Filter EG
4. SettheCentHiandHiToprampsto+50.
In all examples below, Intensity to A = +50
5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
ThesettingsfortheKeyLowandKeyHighkeysdont
matterinthiscase.
Filter Keyboard Track is also an AMS source
A. Original EG
B. Velocity to A = +50
C. Velocity to A = 25
D. Velocity to A = 99
Original
YoucanusethefilterkeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectFilterKTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
Original
32: Menu Command
Withpositive(+)values,playingmorestronglywill
increasetheeffectoftheFilterEG,asshowninexampleB
above.
Withnegative()values,playingmorestronglywill
introducetheoppositeeffectoftheFilterEGlikeinverting
thepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveral
differentways:
29
Program mode
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
toA/Bparameters,andthenreducethisamountwith
velocity.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimply
diminished,andnotactuallyinverted,asshownin
exampleCabove.
YoucanalsosettheVelocitytoA/Bamountssothatthey
aregreaterthantheinitialamountsofIntensitytoA/B.In
thiscase,theEGwillhaveapositiveeffectatlow
velocities,andaninvertedeffectathighvelocitiesas
showninexampleD.
Velocity to B
[99...+99]
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilterEG
appliedtoFilterB.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
VelocitytoAabove.
Intensity to A
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
TheFilterEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
Positivevaluesincreasethecutofffrequency,andnegative
valuesdecreasethecutofffrequency.Forinstance,pleasesee
thegraphicVelocitycontrolofFilterEGabove.TheEG
shapeinexampleArisesupatfirst,andthenfallsbelow0
towardstheend.
WhenIntensitytoAissettoapositive(+)value,theEGs
effectwillmatchitsshape.WhentheEGrisesabove0,the
cutofffrequencywillincrease.
Withnegative()values,theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;whentheEGrisesabove0,thefiltercutoffwill
decrease.
Intensity to B
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterBs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIntensitytoAabove.
AMS (Filter EG AMS)
oftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofilters
shareasingleAMSsource,withseparateintensitysettings.
Otherwise,theAMSmodulationwillworkinthesameway
astheVelocitytoAparameter,describedabove.
Int to A (AMS Intensity to A)
AMS2 (Filter A AMS2)
Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling
FilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,please
seeAMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity (AMS2 Intensity)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS2.
Filter B
TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothoseforFilterA.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
FilterA,above.
33: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
34: Filter1 LFO Mod.

LFO1,LFO2,andtheCommonLFOcanallmodulateFilter
AandBscutofffrequencies.Youcancontrolthestrengthof
eachLFOsmodulationindependentlyforeachfilter,in
threedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
UseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamounttheLFO.
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthethree
LFOs,anddososeparatelyforbothFilterAandFilterB.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
34
Menu
34a
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterA.
Int to B (AMS Intensity to B)
[99...+99]
34b
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterB.
34a: LFO 1/2
33b: Filter A/B Modulation

ThissectionletsyouassignanytwoAMSsourcestocontrol
FilterA,andanothertwoAMSsourcestocontrolFilterB.
ThismodulationisaddedtothebasicFilterAandBcutoff
frequencies,assetontheFilter1page.
Filter A
AMS1 (Filter A AMS1)
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrollingFilter
Ascutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleasesee
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity (AMS1 Intensity)

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS1.
30
[99...+99]
LFO1
Intensity to A
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
canproduceinterestingeffectsbyusingthesameLFOto
modulatetwodifferentparameters(suchasFilterAand
FilterB),butwithonesettoapositiveintensity,andthe
othersettoanegativeintensity.
PROG P3: Filter 35: Filter1 EG
LFO modulation of Filter Cutoff
34: Menu Command
Low setting
High setting
Intensity to B
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterBscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
JSY Intensity to A
Commandonpage 64.
[99...+99]
ThisadjuststhedepthbywhichtheLFOwillmodulatethe
cutofffrequencyoffilterAwhenyoumovethejoystickfrom
thecenterintheYdirection(towardyourself)(orwhen
CC#2isreceived).(JoystickcontrolintheYdirectionis
calledJSY.)
35: Filter1 EG
35
Menu
35a
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyIntensitytoA,above.Forexample:
1. SetIntensitytoAto+50.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthefilter
cutoff.
35b
2. SetJSYIntensitytoAto50.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickdown,theeffectoftheLFO
willfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthe
bottomofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelled
out.
JSY Intensity to B (LFO1)
[99...+99]
ThisletsyouuseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFOapplied
toFilterB.
AMS (LFO1)
oftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofilterssharea
singleAMSsource,butwithseparateintensitysettings.
TheFilterEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestothecutofffrequenciesof
FiltersAandB.Theparametersonthispagecontrolthe
shapeoftheEG.Amongotherthings,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationshapeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthefilters,usethe
FilterEGparametersontheP3:FilterModulationpage,as
describedunder33a:FilterEGonpage 29.
Intensity to A (LFO1)
Filter EG is also an AMS source
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationforFilterA.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettings
meanthatYS+YwillincreasetheamountofLFO1appliedto
FilterA.
Intensity to B (LFO1)
[99...+99]
modulationforFilterB.
LFO 2
above.
34b: Common LFO

TheparametersfortheCommonLFOareidenticaltothose
forLFO1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptions
underLFO1,above.
NotethatwhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeachvoice,
theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesintheProgram.
Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthevoicestohave
anidenticalLFOeffect.
YoucanusetheFilterEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselecttheFilterEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
35a: EG Reset
AMS
Threshold
[99...+99]
effects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassingthrough
thethresholdmovingdownwards.
Note:WithsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFOspeeds,
theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextremevaluesof+99or
31
Program mode
99.Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmay
causeinconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEG
doesntresetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThreshold
untiltheEGtriggersconsistently.
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay
[00...99]
theBreaklevel.
35b: Envelope
Slope
Filter EG
Attack
Level
Break
Level
Star t
Level
Release
Level
Change to
Time
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Slope
Time
Release
[00...99]
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Release
Time
Note-on or reset
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymovingfrom
oneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,andthenmoving
toanotherleveloveranotherperiodoftime,andsoon.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negative
levelswillmakeitgodown.
Start
[00...99]
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Sustain
Level
[99...+99]
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue
(See*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperation
guide.).
Curve
outofcurves.
ThissetstheinitialEGlevelatnoteon.
Attack
[99...+99]
Filter EG Curve
Break
Curve=0L (Linear)
[99...+99]
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Decaytime.
Sus (Sustain)
[99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release
[99...+99]
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
EG Value
down.
Actual Time
10
10ms
20
44ms
30
104ms
40
224ms
50
464ms
60
944ms
70
1.8seconds
80
3.8seconds
90
10.9seconds
99
87.3seconds
Decay
Attack
DecayandRelease.
Attack
[00...99]
totheAttacklevel.
32
Curve=0L (Linear)
PROG P3: Filter 35: Filter1 EG
Slope
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
Release
Br (Break)
35c: EG Level/Time Modulation

Level
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrolthe
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,andBreak
levelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneachhavedifferent
modulationintensities.
asshownbelow.
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated

OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwopoints,that
segmentcannolongerbemodulated.Thisincludesboththe
timeofthesegment,andthelevelreachedattheendofthe
segment.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeorthe
Breaklevel.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveassignedthe
CommonLFOtomodulateBreakLevel.TheLFOmaybe
movingallthetime,buttheBreakLevelisonlyaffectedby
theLFOsvalueattheinstantthattheDecaysegmentstarts.
Afterthat,thelevelisfixed.
Finally,thisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,
Attacklevel,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatare
alreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetviaAMS.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Filter EG Time Modulation
Note-on
Note-on
Note-on
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
Softly played note.

Original Shape
Stongly played note.

Times are longer.
Reaches Sustainmore
slowly.
Stongly played note.

Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustainmore
quickly.
AMS1
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
here,forinstance.
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
Filter EG Level Modulation
Original Shape
[99...+99]

Attack, and Break
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
Attacktimealmostinhalf.(Seepage 342)
Dc (Decay)
[99...+99]
Sl (Slope)
Attack, and Break
AMS

SelectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevelparameters.
St (Start)
[99...+99]
St(Start)to+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
harder.IfyouinsteadsetSt(Start)to99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
[99...+99]
Rl (Release)
[99...+99]
modulationfortheReleasetime.
AMS2 and AMS3

TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,respectively,
forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.Eachhasitsown
intensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,andRelease.The
parametersofbothAMS2andAMS3areidenticaltothoseof
AMS1,above.
33
Program mode
35: Menu Command
5:SyncBothEGsseep.66
Commandonpage 64.
36: Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfilter2settings.Itis
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
describedunder31:Filter1onpage 26.
37: Filter2 Keyboard Track

ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator2skeyboard
track.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,andcontrol
howthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff.
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfiltercutoff.
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
grayedout.
38: Filter2 Modulation

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfiltermodulation.Itis
availablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
describedunder33:Filter1Modulationonpage 29.
39: Filter2 LFO Mod.

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sLFOfiltermodulation.Itis
describedunder34:Filter1LFOMod.onpage 30.
310: Filter2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sFilterEG.Itisavailable
whentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
Drums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
describedunder35:Filter1EGonpage 31.
34
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 41: Amp1/Driver1
PROG P4: Amp/EQ

Oscillators1and2haveseparatecontrolsforvolume(also
calledamplitude,orampforshort);pan;andDrive;as
wellasdedicatedampenvelopesandkeyboardtracking
generators.Additionally,bothOscillatorsshareathreeband
EQ.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolalloftheserelatedparameters.
AMS (Drive)
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontroltheDrive
amount.
Intensity
[99...+99]
SetuptheDrivercircuit,whichaddssaturationandbass
boosttothetimbre.
modulationforDrive.
Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
Low Boost
Controlamplevelandmodulation,includingkeyboard
tracking,theampenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMS
control.
SetupthethreebandTrackEQ.
Oscillator1samp,pan,anddriveparametersareactive;the
pagesforOscillator2willbegrayedout.
[00...99]
ThislowfrequencyEQcontrolsthebodycharacterofthe
sound.ThespecificEQfrequenciesaffectedwillchange
withtheDrivesetting.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.
AMS
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontroltheLow
Boostamount.
41: Amp1/Driver1
41
Menu
41a
Intensity
41b: Amp Level
41b
Amp Level
[000...127]
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumelevelofOscillator1,before
keyboardtracking,velocity,andothermodulation.
41c
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp/EQsection.
Here,youcan:
SetuptheDrivercircuit.
Settheinitialvolumelevel.
Mixer, DrumTrack and volume

YoucancontroltheOscillatorvolumedirectlyfromthe
slidersinthe03Mixer&DramTrackpage.Thisisa
separateparameter,inadditiontoAmpLevel.
MIDI and volume
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
41a: Driver
TheDriveraddssaturationandoverdrivetothesound,for
everythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrasticdistortion.Unlike
anoverdriveeffect,theDriverprocesseseachvoice
individually,sothetimbrestaysthesameregardlessofhow
manyvoicesarebeingplayed.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoverallDrivereffect.Drivecontributes
edgeandbite,andLowBoostprovidesthebodyaswellas
boostingthebass.
Bypass
[99...+99]
modulationforLowBoost.
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumeviaMIDI
usingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11).
Whenusedoneatatime,thetwocontrollersworkin
exactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127isequalto
theAmpLevelsetting,andlowervaluesreducethe
volume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,the
onewiththelowervaluedeterminesthemaximum
volume,andtheonewiththehighervaluescalesdown
fromthatmaximum.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
[Off, On]
On(checked):theDriveriscompletelyremovedfromthe
signalpath.
Drive
[00...99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthetimbre.Low
settingswillproducemildsaturation,andhighersettings
createmoreobviousdistortion.
Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwiththe
Drive.
Note:EvenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,theDriver
circuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisacompletely
pristinesound,usetheBypasscontrolinstead.
35
Program mode
41c: Pan
Pan
42: Amp1 Modulation

[Random, L001...C064...R127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.AsettingofL001
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,andR127
tothefarright.
42
Menu
42a
WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe
differentforeachnoteon.
YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).
ACC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythePan
parameter,and127placesthesoundatthefarright.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global1
1a).
Note:RandomcannotbeselectedviaaMIDIcontrolchange.
Youllneedtoselectithere.
AMS (Pan)
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.
Intensity
42b
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmplevel
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrolthe
Amplevel.
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel.
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel.
Thetotaleffectofthemodulationcanincreasethevolumeto
amaximumoftwotimeslouderthantheAmpLevelsetting.
[99...+99]
modulationforPan.
42a: Keyboard Track
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissettoNote
Number,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethesoundto
movetowardtherightasyouplayhigherthanC4,and
towardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.Negative()
intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyouplayup
anddownthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkey
trackingisnecessaryinordertomakethevolumeconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
Use DKit Setting
[Off, On]
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeis
settoDrumsorDoubleDrums.
UnlikestandardPrograms,DrumKitscanhaveadifferent
pansettingforeverynote.Thisparameterletsyouchoose
whethertousetheDrumKitpansettings,ortousethe
Programspansettinginstead.
On(checked):TheProgramwillusetheDrumKitspernote
pansettings;panAMSwillstillapply(Global55b).Thisis
thedefaultsetting.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramwillignoretheDrumKits
settings,andusetheProgrampaninstead.
AllkeysofthedrumkitwillusethePansetting.
41: Menu Command
KROMEskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeoverupto
fourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethevolumeincreaseveryquicklyoverthemiddle
ofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowlyornotat
allinthehigheroctaves.
Makethevolumeincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Key:
Key Low
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpoint
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthe
trackinghasnoeffectonthevolume,oronanyAMS
destinations.
Key High
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Commandonpage 64.
[C1...G9]
Ramp:
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
36
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 42: Amp1 Modulation
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
playlower,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
playhigher,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgoup.
Differences from other Keyboard Tracks

ThereareseveraldifferencesbetweentheAmpkeyboard
trackingandtheFilterandCommonkeyboardtracking.
Forexample,theresultsoftheRampvaluesaredifferent.As
showninthegraphicAmpKeyboardTracking,below,
negativeslopesaremoresteepthanpositiveslopes.
Also,theampdoesnothaveseparatecontrolofIntensity.
Instead,Intensityisalwaysfixedatthemaximumamount,
allowingkeyboardtrackingtochangethevolumefrom
completesilencetotwiceasloudastheprogrammedlevel.
Btm Lo (Bottom-Low)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Lo Cent (Low-Center)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Cent Hi (Center-High)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Hi Top (High-Top)
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
Ramp
Change in level
Inf
Silentinonehalfstep
99
Silentinonewholestep
95
Silentinoneoctave
48
Silentintwooctaves
25
Silentinfouroctaves
00
nochange
+25
x2infouroctaves
+50
x2intwooctaves
+99
x2inoneoctave
+Inf
x2inonehalfstep
+Inf and Inf ramps

Whenarampissetto+Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgoto
itshighestvalue(doubletheprogrammedvolume)overa
singlehalfstep.
Similarly,whenarampissettoInf,thekeyboardtracking
willgotoitslowestvalue(completesilence)overasingle
halfstep.
Note:IfyousettheCentHi(CenterHigh)rampto+Infor
Inf,theHiTop(HighTop)parameterwillbegrayedout.
Similarly,ifyousettheLoCent(LowCenter)rampto+Inf
orInf,theBtmLo(BottomLow)rampwillbegrayedout.
Amp KTrk is also an AMS source

YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectAmpKTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
42b: Amp Modulation

YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbybothvelocityandan
AMSsource.
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmpEGlevel
parameters.Theresultingvolumeisdeterminedbymultiplying
thevolumechangesoftheampEGbyothervaluessuchas
AMS.Iftheseoriginallevelsarelow,themaximumvolume
availablewithmodulationwillalsobereduced.
Velocity Intensity
[99...+99]
Withpositive(+)values,thevolumewillincreaseasyou
playharder.
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
Velocity modulation of Amp level, with Amp EG
Volume
Time
Time
Low velocity
High velocity
Amp Keyboard Tracking

Ramp values:
+99
+50
+25
Ramp values:
99 97 95
48
25
Louder x2
Change to
Volume
No change
Silence
Low Break: D1
Center: G2
High Break: C4
37
Program mode
AMS
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Amp1level.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
43: Amp1 EG
43
Menu
43a
Intensity
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positive(+)
valuesofthisparameterwillmakethevolumeincrease
whenmovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection.
Notethatiftheothermodulationsettingshavealready
raisedthevolumetoitsmaximumlevel(doubletheAmp
LevelandAmpEGlevelsettings),thevolumecannotbe
increasedanyfurther.
LFO 1/2
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelwithbothLFO1andLFO2.
LFO1
43c
Theseparametersletyoucreatetimevaryingchangesinthe
volumeofoscillator1.
43a: EG Reset
AMS
Intensity (LFO1)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofLFO1seffectonthe
oscillatorsvolume.
Negative()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
AMS (LFO1)
43b
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,itcannot
bereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeepplayingforever!)
Threshold
Intensity
effects.Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggers
whenpassingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.
Whenthethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards.
[99...+99]
modulationfortheAmplevel.
LFO2
above.
42: Menu Command
[99...+99]
Note:WithsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFOspeeds,
theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextremevaluesof+99or
99.Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmay
causeinconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEG
doesntresetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThreshold
untiltheEGtriggersconsistently.
43b: Envelope
Theseparametersspecifyhowtheamp1EGwillchange
overtime.
Commandonpage 64.
Amp EG
Start
Level
Attack
Level
Break
Level
Sustain
Level
Volume
Time
Attack
Time
Note-on or reset
Decay
Time
Slope
Time
Release
Time
Note-off
Level
Start
[00...99]
Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
Attack
38
[00...99]
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 43: Amp1 EG
Break
[00...99]
Amp EG Curve
Decaytime.
Sustain
Curve=0L (Linear)
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
[00...99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow.
EG Value
10
10ms
20
44ms
30
104ms
40
224ms
50
464ms
60
944ms
70
1.8seconds
80
3.8seconds
90
10.9seconds
99
87.3seconds
Attack
Curve=0L (Linear)
Actual Time

down.
DecayandRelease.
Attack
[00...99]
totheAttacklevel.
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
[00...99]
Decay
Slope
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
theBreaklevel.
Release
Slope
[00...99]
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Release
[00...99]
leveltosilence.
Curve
outofcurves.
43c: EG Level/Time Modulation

Level
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrolthe
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,andBreak
levelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneachhavedifferent
modulationintensities.
asshownbelow.
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated

OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwopoints,that
segmentcannolongerbemodulated.Thisincludesboththe
timeofthesegment,andthelevelreachedattheendofthe
segment.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOnceanEGsegment
begins,itcantbemodulatedonpage 33.
39
Program mode
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
Amp EG Level Modulation

Volume
Volume
Time
Time
Original Shape

Attack, and Break
Volume
Time
Sl (Slope)
Time

AMS
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
St (Start)
Dc (Decay)
[99...+99]
Volume

Attack, and Break
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmakethesegment
segmenttimealmostinhalf.
[99...+99]
Rl (Release)
[99...+99]
modulationfortheReleasetime.
AMS2 and AMS3

TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,respectively,
forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.Eachhasitsown
intensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,andRelease.The
parametersofbothAMS2andAMS3areidenticaltothoseof
AMS1,above.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandsetSt
(Start)to+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplayharder.
IfyouinsteadsetSt(Start)to99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
[99...+99]
43: Menu Command
Br (Break)
[99...+99]
Commandonpage 64.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Amp EG Time Modulation
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
Softly played note.

Original Shape.

Times are longer.
Reaches Sustain
more slowly.

Times are shorter.
quickly.
AMS1
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
here,forinstance.
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
40
45: Amp2/Driver2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasiclevel,pan,anddriver
settings.ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
describedunder41:Amp1/Driver1onpage 35.
46: Amp2 Modulation

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampmodulation.Itis
describedunder42:Amp1Modulationonpage 36.
47: Amp2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampEG.Itisavailable
describedunder43:Amp1EGonpage 38.
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 410: EQ
410: EQ
410
Menu
410a
ThisthreebandEQ,withsweepablemid,issharedbyboth
oftheProgramsoscillators1,2.
InCombinationsandSequencers,eachtimbreandtrackhas
itsownindividualEQ.YoucanimporttheProgramsEQ
settingsintoTracksandTimbresbyusingtheCombination
andSequencerAutoLoadProgramEQoptions.
410a:3 Band Parametric EQ

Bypass
[On, Off]
On(checked):AlloftheEQwillbedisabled,includingthe
InputTrim.
BypassisusefulforcomparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththe
originalsignal.
Input Trim
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Thesetting
correspondstothevolume;50correspondsto12dB,and25
correspondsto24dB.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrolscan
causesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.Youcan
compensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
Low Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
Mid Frequency
[100(Hz)...10.00k(Hz)]
Mid Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
0.5dB.
High Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
410: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
41
Program mode
PROG P5: LFO

EachoftheOscillators1,2hastwoLFOs,whichyoucanuse
tomodulatethefilter,amp,pitch,andmanyother
parameters.
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandom
timing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold;the
timingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsoshareasingleCommonLFO,
similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalogsynths.
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsof
Random13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanusethem
tocreatemoregentlerandomvariations.
Thesepagesletyousetupalloftheparametersforallfive
LFOs.
Phase
[180...+180, Random]
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartofthe
note,instepsof5degrees.
51: OSC1 LFO1
IfKeySyncisOff,theStartPhasewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
51
Menu
51a
Frequency
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,asshowninthetable
below.
ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeedsmuch
fasterandmuchslowerthanareavailablethroughthisbasic
setting.
51b
51c
Frequency Value
Frequency in Hz
00
0.014Hz
ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFOof
Oscillator1.Forinstance,youcan:
10
0.112Hz
20
0.422Hz
SelecttheLFOsbasicwaveform,andmodifyitwiththe
Shapeparameter.
30
0.979Hz
40
1.79Hz
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMScontrollers
tomodulatethefrequency.
50
2.84Hz
60
4.14Hz
UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhethertheLFO
runsseparatelyforeachvoice,orissynchronizedacross
allofthevoices
70
5.69Hz
80
7.49Hz
90
9.53Hz
UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhowlong
theLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,andwhetheritstarts
abruptlyorfadesinslowly.
99
26.25Hz
99+Fine99
32Hz
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo.
Stop
51a: OSC 1 LFO 1
On(checked):InsteadoftheLFOoperatingnormally,itwill
ignoretheFrequencysetting.TheLFOwillmaintainthe
initialvalue(determinedbythecombinationofWaveform,
Phase,Shape,andOffset)untilthenoteoff.
Waveform
[Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
graphicbelow.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,butafew
willbenefitfrommoredetails:
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeis
specificallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformis
positiveonly,sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonlybend
up,andnotdown.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyatfixed
intervalsoftime.
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthetiming.
[Off, On]
Sincethevaluewillchangeonlyatnoteon,usingaRandom
waveformwillproduceafixedvaluethatchangesrandomly
ateachnoteon(oratthefirstnoteon).
Off(unchecked):TheLFOwilloperatenormally.
Shape
[99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyoucansee
inthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethewaveformseither
moreroundedormoreextreme.Itcanalsobeusefulto
emphasizecertainvalueranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFOto
modulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehighvalue
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthehigher
LFO waveform
42
Triangle
Guitar
Step Triangle-4
Random1
(S/H)
Random4
(Continuous)
Saw
Exponential
Triangle
Step Triangle-6
Random2
(S/H)
Random5
(Continuous)
Square
Exponential
Saw Down
Step Saw-4
Random3
(S/H)
Random6
(Continuous)
Sine
Exponential
Saw Up
Step Saw-6
PROG P5: LFO 51: OSC1 LFO1
frequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,thefilterwill
spendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,its
importanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalaftertheShape
function,asshownbelow:
LFO Shape
How the LFO signal is affected by Shape and Offset
+99
Waveform
Shape
0
99
Shape = 0 (original waveform)

Shape = +99
Fade
Shape = 99
[00...99]
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.
Whentheseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout.
TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimplystarting
immediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameterspecifiesthe
timefromwhentheLFObeginstoplayuntilitreachesits
maximumamplitude.
AMS (Shape)
IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill
beginafterthedelayiscomplete.
ThisselectsaAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
AMS Int (Intensity)
WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteinthephrase.
LFO Fade and Delay
Delay
Fade
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstartseach
timeyoupressakey,andanindependentLFOrunsforeach
note.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFOstarts
fromthephasedeterminedbythefirstnoteinthephrase,so
thattheLFOsforallnotesbeingheldaresynchronized
together.TheFadeandDelaysettingswillonlyapplytothe
firstnotesLFO.
NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFOspeedmay
stillbedifferentifyoumodulatetheFrequencybynote
number,velocity,keyscaling,orothernotespecificAMS
sources.
Offset
[99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOforvibrato.If
theOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecenteredonthenotes
originalpitch,bendingitbothupanddown.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowillonly
raisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote.
Offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato
Pitch
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform,whichis
designedtoemulatebendingastringonaguitarsothatthe
pitchonlygoesup,andnotdown.Becauseofthis,the
waveformiscenteredon50,andnoton0.Ofcourse,youcan
alwaysuseanegativeOffsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0
again!
Note-on
Delay
[00...99]
ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
51b: Frequency Modulation

Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsources(AMS)to
adjustthespeedoftheLFO.
AMS1 (Frequency)
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcefortheLFO1sfrequency.
NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1sfrequency.
Intensity
[99...+99]
ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1(Frequency).TheInt
ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
WhenAMSisatitsmaximumvalue(forexamplebymoving
thejoystickfullyawayfromyourself),theAMSaffectsthe
frequencyasshownbelow:
Intensity
Change to LFO Frequency
+99
64x
+82
32x
+66
16x
+49
8x
+33
4x
+16
2x
16
1/2x
33
1/4x
49
1/8x
66
1/16x
82
1/32x
99
1/64x
Faster
Slower
43
Program mode
Int Mod AMS (Intensity Mod AMS)

ThisselectsasecondaryAMSsourcetoscaletheintensityof
AMS1.
Intensity
Forexample,ifAMS1issettothePitchEG,andIntMod
AMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettingsmeanthatYS+Y
willincreasetheintensityofthePitchEGmodulationof
LFOFrequency.
Intensity
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromAMS2(Freq.
AMS2).
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfirstLFO.Itisavailable
describedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 42.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
[Off, On]
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theLFOwillsynchronizeto
thesystemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDI
Clock.TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNote
andTimesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency
andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOff,theFrequencyand
FrequencyModulationsettingswilldeterminethespeedof
theLFO,andthetemposettingswillhavenoeffect.
[ ... ]
Base Note (Sync. Base Note)
ThissetsthebasicspeedoftheLFO,relativetothesystem
tempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote,
includingtriplets.
Times (Sync. Times)
[01...32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.Forinstance,if
theBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,andTimesissetto
03,theLFOwillcycleoveradottedeighthnote.
51: Menu Command
3:SwapLFO1&2seep.66
Commandonpage 64.
56: OSC2 LFO2

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2ssecondLFO.Itisavailable
ItsparametersareexactlythesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,
asdescribedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 42except
thatLFO1cannotmodulateLFO2.
51c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync.
44
55: OSC2 LFO1
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourcefortheLFO1s
frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
ThisisOscillator1ssecondLFO.Itsparametersareexactly
thesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,asdescribedunder51:
OSC1LFO1onpage 42exceptthatLFO1cannotmodulate
LFO2.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntModAMS.
EvenifthemainAMS1Intensityissetto0,IntModAMS
canstillcontrolthefinalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/
99range.
AMS2 (Freq. AMS2)
52: OSC1 LFO2
PROG P5: LFO 510: Common LFO
Shape
510: Common LFO

58
Menu
58a
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.
AMS (Shape)
58b
[99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Formore
details,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Shapeon
page 42.
ThisselectsaAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
58c
Thisisasingle,CommonLFO,globalforallvoicesinthe
ProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsomevintageanalog
synths.
Differences from LFO1/2
AMS Int (AMS Intensity)
Reset AMS
TheCommonLFOstartsrunningassoonasyouselectthe
Program,andonlyresetswhenyoutellittodosoexplicitly
viatheResetSourcecontrol,below.Thisisdifferentfrom
LFO1/2sKeySyncparameter,whichresetswheneverall
notesarereleased.
TheCommonLFOspersistencecanbehandyifyouwantto
createaconstantrhythmwithanLFO,andthenplay
underneaththatrhythmwithoutretriggeringit.For
instance,youcanuseaMIDIcontrollerinyoursequencerto
resettheCommonLFOeveryfewbars,regardlessofwhat
notesarebeingplayed.
TheCommonLFOhasmostofthesamecontrolsasLFO1/2.
However,itdoesnotincludetheDelay,Fade,andKeySync
settings,sincetheseonlymakesenseforpervoiceLFOs.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheLFOtotheStart
Phase.TheLFOresetswhentheAMSvaluepassesthe
halfwaymark:+50formostAMSsources,or64forMIDI
controllers.
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOsKeySync.
setting,setthistoGate2+Damper.
Offset
[99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Foracompletedescription,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1
Offsetonpage 43.
510a:Common LFO
Waveform
[Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.Foracompletelistof
thewaveformsandmoredetails,pleaseseetheentryunder
LFO1Waveformonpage 42.
Phase
[180...+180, Random]
TheResetAMS,describedabove,letsyouresetthe
CommonLFO.ThisisthephasefromwhichtheLFOwill
startwhenitisreset.
Frequency
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds.Foracomplete
description,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Frequency
onpage 42.
Stop
[Off, On]
On(checked):InsteadoftheLFOoperatingnormally,itwill
ignoretheFrequencysetting.Instead,theLFOsimply
generatesasinglevaluewhentheProgramisselected,and
thenholdsthatvalueuntilyouselectanotherProgram,or
untilyouresettheLFOviaAMS.
510b:Frequency Modulation
TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyModulation
settingsforLFO1,asdescribedunder51b:Frequency
Modulationonpage 43.
510c:Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync

TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyMIDI/
TempoSyncforLFO1,asdescribedunder51c:Frequency
MIDI/TempoSync.onpage 44.
510: Menu Command
2:SwapLFO1&2seep.66
Commandonpage 64.
Note:ThisisdifferentfromLFO1/2,inwhichthevalueis
resetwitheverynoteon.
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandomwaveforms
tocreatestatic,randommodulation,withthevalue
changingonlywhenyoufirstselecttheProgram.
Off(unchecked):WhenStopisOff,theLFOwillfunction
normally.
45
Program mode
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track

(AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track)
EachOscillatorhastwoAMSMixers,whicharesimplebut
powerfultoolsforcombiningandmodifyingAMSsignals.
Quantizeturnssmoothtransitionsintodiscretesteps.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeQuantizeonpage 49.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsosharetwoCommonkeyboard
trackinggenerators,inadditiontothededicatedkeyboard
trackingfortheFilterandAmp.
GateControlusesathirdAMSsourcetoswitchbetween
twoAMSinputs(orafixedvalue).Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeGateControlonpage 49.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallofthesemodulationsources.
Oscillator1sAMSMixersareactive;thepagesforOscillator
2willbegrayedout.
A+B
AMS Mixer, Type = A+B
Amt A
61: OSC1 AMS Mix1
AMS A
61
Menu
Output
AMS B
61a
Amt B
61b
A+BmergestwoAMSsourcesintoone.Thiscanbehandy
whenyouneedtoaddonemoremodulationsourcetoa
parameter,butyouvealreadyusedupalloftheavailable
AMSslots.
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcanalso
usethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvarious
ways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,andmore.
YoucanselecttheoutputoftheAMSmixersasanAMS
sourceinthesamewayasanLFOorEQ.
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputstothe
AMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,ifyou
useLFO1asaninputtoanAMSMixer,youcanusethe
processedversionoftheLFOtocontroloneAMS
destination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrolanother.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOtomodulate
FilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatitwouldbe
interestingtoscalethatparameterwithanEGaswell.
ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput,butyoucaneasily
mergetheLFOandtheEGtogetherusingtheA+BAMS
Mixer:
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonanceAMS
source.
AMS Mixer A+B example
AMS A: LFO
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,by
usingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
AMS B: EG
61a: AMS Mixer 1

Mixer Type
[A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,

Shape, Quantize, Gate Control]
ThiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedbyAMS
Mixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedindetailover
thenextseveralpages.
A+B Output
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeA+Bonpage 46.
AMS A
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewiththe
other.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAmtAxBon
page 47.
OffsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfromanAMS
source.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOffsetonpage 47.
Smoothingspecifiesthesmoothnessofmovementbetweentwo
values.Youcanusethistosmoothsuddenchangessuchasan
abruptmovementofthejoystickorsharpangleoftheLFO.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 48.
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Formore
information,pleaseseeShapeonpage 48.
ThisselectsthefirstAMSinput.
AMS A Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSAinput.
AMS B
ThisselectsthesecondAMSinput.
AMS B Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSBinput.
46
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) 61: OSC1 AMS Mix1
Amt AxB
Offset
AMS Mixer, Type = Offset
AMS Mixer, Type =Amt A x B
Amt A
Output
AMS A
AMS B
Output
AMS A
Amt B
Thissimpleprocessoraddsaconstantoffsettotheinput,
andalsoallowsyoutodoublethegainofanAMSsource.
Amt A
ThisMixerTypeusesAMSBtoscaletheamountofAMSA.
Forinstance,youcancontroltheamountofLFO1withthe
FilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthePitchEGwiththe
joystick.
Forinstance,youcanusethistoconvertabipolarLFO(both
negativeandpositive)toaunipolarLFO(positiveonly).To
dothis:
1. SelecttheLFOastheAMSAinput.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto50.
AMS Mixer Amt AxB example
ThiscutstheoverallleveloftheLFOinhalf,sothatinstead
ofswingingbetween99and+99,itonlyswingsbetween
50and+50.
AMS A: LFO
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto50.
Thisadds50totheLFOlevel,sothatitnowswingsbetween
0and+99,asshownbelow.
AMS Mixer Offset examples
AMS B: EG
AMS A: LFO
+99
0
Amt A*B Output

99
AMS A
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsource,whichcanthenbescaled
byAMSB.
Offset = +50, Amount = 50

+99
AMS A Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialamountofAMSA,before
modulationfromAMSB.InputfromAMSBthenaddsto
thisinitialamount.
0
99
Offset = 99, Amount = +199

+99
EvenifAmountAissetto0,AMSBcanstillcontrolthefinal
amountofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
AMS B
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsource,toscaletheamountof
AMSA.
AMS B Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
modulationofAMSA.
Forexample,ifAMSAissettoLFO1andAMSBissetto
theFilterEG,positivesettingsmeanthattheEGwill
increasetheamountofLFO1.
Tip: use SW 1/2 to turn an AMS source on and off
0
99
Clipped
at Output
AMS A
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobeoffset.
AMS A Amount
[199...+199]
ThiscontrolsthebasiclevelofAMSA.
1. SetAMSAtothedesiredsource,andsettheAMSA
Amountto0.
+199doublestheoriginalsignallevel,while199doubles
theoriginalsignallevelandinvertsthephase.Thevalues
areclippedonlyattheoutput;internally,theycanbegreater
thanthenormalrangeof99to+99.
2. SetAMSBtoSW1or2,andAMSBAmountto+99.
AMS A Offset
YoucanuseAmtAxBtogateanAMSsource:
Now,SW1or2willturnAMSAonandoff.
[199...+199]
ThiscontrolstheamountofoffsetforAMSA.
SettingOffsetto+199shiftsanAMSinputof99alltheway
to+99.InconjunctionwithhighAMSAAmountvalues,
thiscanbeusefulforcreatingclippedshapes,suchasshown
inthelastoftheAMSMixerOffsetexamplesabove.
47
Program mode
Smoothing
Shape
ThisMixerTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,creatingmore
gentletransitionsbetweenvalues.Youhaveseparatecontrol
oftheamountofsmoothingduringtheattack(whenthe
signalisincreasing)anddecay(whenitsdecreasing).
ThehighertheAttackandDecaysettings,themorethe
inputwillbesmoothed.
ThisMixerTypeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.This
appliesdeformationtotheAMSinput.Youcanusethisto
customizeacontrollercurve,suchastheexponentialcurve
ofthejoystickorthelogarithmiccurveofvelocitycontrol.It
canalsoaltertheshapeofprogrammablemodulation
sources,suchasEGsandLFOs.
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,creating
moregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Highersettingscreate
autofadeeffects,transformingaquickgestureintoalonger
fadeinand/orfadeoutevent.
Note:ShapeonlyaffectsAMSsignalswhichalreadyhave
someamountofslope,suchasEGs,triangleandsineLFOs,
andsoon.Itdoesnotaffectsignalswhichonlycontain
abrupttransitions,suchassquarewaves.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof
programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs.For
instance,youcanturnablipintoasimpleenvelopeshape,
asshownbelow.
AMS A
AMS Mixer Smoothing examples

Original AMS A:
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobeshaped.
Shape
Smoothing with Long Attack

and Short Decay:
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofcurvature,andwhetherthe
curvesareconcaveorconvex.Asyoucanseeinthegraphic
examples,theshapewilltendtoemphasizecertainvalue
ranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO,
throughShape,tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShape
emphasizesthehighvaluerange,thefilterwillspendmore
timeatthehigherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelow
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthelower
frequencies.
Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Decay:
Mode
[Symmetric, Asymmetric]
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobesmoothed.
ThisselectswhethertheShapeparameterwillproduceone
ortwocurves.ThegraphicAMSMixerShapeexamples
mayhelptovisualizehowthisworks.
Asymmetricwillproduceasinglecurve,extendingfrom
99to+99.
AMS A Attack
Symmetricwillproducetwomatchingcurvesextending
outwardsfrom0to99and+99,respectively.
AMS A
[00...+99]
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,highervalue.
HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes.
DependingonhowquicklytheAMSinputvalueis
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatthevalueis
neverquitereached,asshowninAMSMixerShape
examplesabove.
AMS A Decay
[00...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
Bipolar and Unipolar AMS sources

TounderstandShape,ithelpstounderstandthedifference
betweenbipolarandunipolarAMSsources.
Bipolarsourcescanswingallthewayfrom99to+99,with
0inthemiddle.MostLFOsarebipolar,forinstance;sois
PitchBend.
Generally,bipolarAMSsourceswillworkbetterwiththe
Asymmetricmode,butSymmetricmayalsoproduce
interestingresults.
Unipolarsourcesonlygofrom0to99,with50inthe
middle.MIDIcontrollers,suchasJS+Y(CC#1),areall
unipolar.Inpractice,EGsareusuallyprogrammedtobe
unipolar,eventhoughtheFilterandPitchEGsdoallow
bothpositiveandnegativelevels.
Withunipolarsources,itsalmostalwaysbettertousethe
Symmetricmode.TheAsymmetricmodecancauseoffsets
andotherstrangeresults.
48
AMS A
AMS Mixer Shape examples
Bipolar Triangle Wave
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobequantized.
Asymmetric
+99
Number Of Steps
[2...32]
Thiscontrolstheseverityoftheeffect.Thelowerthenumber
ofsteps,themoresteppytheoutputwillbe.
99
Forinstance,whenthisissetto2,therewillbestepsat0,
50,and99.WithabipolarAMSinput,therewillalsobe
stepsat50and99.
Symmetric
+99
Asanotherexample,whenitissetto5,therewillbestepsat
0,20,40,60,80,and99(aswellas20,40,60,80,and99
forbipolarinputs).
0
99
Tip: Quantized Joystick Pitch Bend

Bipolar Sawtooth Wave
Asymmetric
Symmetric
+99
Youcanusethejoysticktocreatequantizedpitchbendsthat
simulateslidingacrossthefretsofaguitar,orjumpbend
soundscausedbydifferencesinthelengthofthetubeofa
trumpet.Todoso:
1. SelecttheAMSMixerastheOscillatorPitchAMS
input.
2. SetthePitchAMSIntensitytoanyexacthalfstep
value,suchas+5.00,+7.00,etc.
99
3. SettheJS(+X),JS(X)amountto0.00.
Unipolar Triangle Wave
Asymmetric
(not recommended)
Symmetric
4. IntheAMSMixer,selecttheJSXasAMSA.
5. SettheNumberOfStepstothesamenumberyouused
inStep2.
+99
Now,playingthejoystickwillcreatequantizedpitchbends.
JSXwillstillproducesmoothpitchbends,asusual,soyou
canusebothtechniquestogether.
0
99
Shape = 0 (original waveform)
Gate Control
Shape = +99
AMS Mixer, Type = Gate Control
Shape = 99
Control
Quantize
Fixed Value
ThisMixerTypechangestheinputfromacontinuoussignal
intoaseriesofdiscretesteps.Insteadofmovingsmoothly
betweenvalues,itwillsnapimmediatelyfromonevalueto
another.
YoucanusethistochangetheshapeofLFOsorEGs,orto
forceacontrollertolandonafewspecificvalues.
AMS Mixer Quantize examples
Unipolar (e.g., JS+Y)
+99
Original
AMS A
0
99
+99
Quantize
Steps = 8
0
99
+99
Quantize
Steps = 16
0
99
Bipolar (e.g., LFO)
Below
AMS
Fixed Value
At & Above
AMS
ThisMixerTypeletsyousetuptwodifferentAMSsources
(orfixedAMSamounts),andthenswitchbetweenthetwo
usingathirdAMSsource.
Itssimilartoanaudiogatewithasidechain,butwitheven
moreflexibilitysinceyougettochoosewhathappenswhen
thegateisclosed(belowthethreshold),aswellaswhenits
open(abovethethreshold).
Youcanalsochoosewhetherthegatewillbeabletoopen
andclosecontinuouslyinresponsetothecontrolsource,or
whetheritonlyopensorclosesatthebeginningofthenote,
andthenstaysthatwayoverthenotesentireduration.
YoucanusetheGateto:
Useafootswitch(orothercontroller)toapplypitchbend
orothereffectstosomenotes,butnottoothers
Theparameterwillbeappliedwhenthecontroller
reachesaspecificthreshold.Forexample,thevelocity
valuecouldcontrolthefilterresonanceonlyifthevelocity
valueexceeds90.
Usethejoystick,switches,orcontrollerstochange
betweentwoseparateLFOs(orotherAMSsources).
49
Program mode
Gate Control:
Source
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocon
trolthepitch.
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontrolthegate.
Control At Note-On Only
[Off, On]
Whenthisisenabled(checked),thevalueoftheControl
Sourceatnoteonwillselecttheoutput(BelowThreshold
orAt&AboveThreshold).Theselectedoutputwillthen
remainactivethroughoutthedurationofthenote,
regardlessofanysubsequentchangeintheControlSources
value.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandsetPitch
JS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
8. Turnonthefootswitch,andaddanewnotetothepre
viouschord.
9. MovethejoystickintheXdirection;pitchbendwillbe
appliedonlytothenewlyplayednote.
Notethattheoutputvalueitselfcancontinuetochange;
onlytheselectionofBeloworAt&Aboveisfixed.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoupressedonthefootswitch)willnot.
Threshold
Selective pitch-bend, using only the joystick
[99...+99]
ThissetsthevalueoftheControlSourceatwhichthegate
opensorcloses.
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold,
theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMSsourceselected
underBelowThreshold.
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequalto
theThreshold,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMS
sourceselectedintheAt&AboveThresholdparameter.
Below Threshold
[Fixed Value, AMS A]
ThisselectswhetherBelowThresholdusesapresetvalue,
ortheselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value
[99...+99]
Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.Thisonlyapplies
whenBelowThresholdissettoFixedValue.
AMS A
YoucanalsouseasingleAMSsourceasboththeControl
Sourceandavaluesource:
1. SettheControlSourcetoJSX.
Gate Output:
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.This
onlyapplieswhenBelowThresholdissettoAMSA.
3. SettheThresholdto00.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoAMSA:JSX.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocon
trolthepitch.
7. Withthejoystickinthecenter,playachord,andholdit
throughstep9.
8. Bendthejoysticktotheleft,andthenplayanewnote
abovethechord.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandsetPitch
JS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
9. Usethejoysticktobendthepitchofthenewnote.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoubentthejoystickdown)willnot.Thismethodis
particularlygoodforbendingthetopnoteofachordupto
pitch.
Generating a static value
At & Above Thresh (At & Above Threshold)

[Fixed Value, AMS B]
Sometimes,itcanbehandytohaveapresetvalueasan
AMSsource.TheGateisonewaytocreatethis.Todoso:
ThisselectswhetherAt&AboveThresholdusesapreset
value,ortheselectedAMSsource.
1. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&AboveThreshold
toFixedValue,andenterthesamevalueintoeach.
Fixed Value
[99...+99]
Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltotheThreshold.
ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThresholdissetto
FixedValue.
AMS B
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltothe
Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThreshold
issettoAMSB.
Tips on using the Gate

Selective pitch-bend, using a switch
YoucanuseControlAtNoteOnOnlytoapplyaneffectto
somenotes,butnotothers,basedonthestateofanAMS
sourceatthestartofthenote.Forinstance:
1. SettheControlSourcetoFootSW:CC#82
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
3. SettheThresholdto50.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoaFixedValueof+00.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoAMSB:JSX.
50
7. Turnoffthefootswitch,andwhileholdingdowna
chord,movethejoystickintheXdirection.Thepitch
willnotchange.
Now,theAMSmixerwillalwaysgeneratethisstaticvalue.
61: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
62: OSC1 AMS Mix2

ThisisthesecondAMSMixerforOscillator1.The
parametersareexactlythesameasthoseforAMSMixer1,
asdescribedunder61a:AMSMixer1onpage 46.
69: Common KeyTrk 1

(Common Keyboard Track 1)
69
Menu
69a
64: OSC 2 AMS Mix1

65: OSC 2 AMS Mix2
ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator2.
TheseareavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
describedunder61:OSC1AMSMix1onpage 46.
ThetwoOscillatorssharetwoCommonkeyboardtracking
generators,inadditiontoeachOscillatorsdedicated
keyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp.Youcanusethese
CommonkeytracksasAMSsourcesformodulatingmost
AMSdestinations.
TheCommonKeyboardTrackparametersaresharedbythe
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesarecalculated
individuallyforeachvoice.
What does Keyboard Tracking do?

Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythe
modulationamountasyouplayupanddownthekeyboard.
Thiscanbeusefulformakingthetimbreconsistentacross
theentirerange,oradjustingparametersaccordingtopitch.
TheKROMEkeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeoverupto
fourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethemodulationincreaseveryquicklyoverthe
middleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowlyor
notatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethemodulationincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Common Keyboard Tracking
At the Center Key, the AMS value is always 0.
AMS
Ramp:
+99
+99
+50
Ramp = +99
Ramp:
+99
99
00
50
99
Ramp = 50
99
AMS
Low Break
Center
High Break
Formoreinformation,pleasesee32:Filter1Keyboard
Trackonpage 28.
51
Program mode
69a: Keyboard Track 1
Key
+Inf and Inf Ramps
Low Break
[C1...G9]
Ramp = +Inf
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthe
trackinghasnoeffectontheAMSdestinations.
High Break
[C1...G9]
Ramp = 50
Ramp = Inf
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Key Low
Center
Key High
Note:IfyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,the
HighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyouset
theLowCenterrampto+InforInf,theBottomLowramp
willbegrayedout.
Ramp
V
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeRamp
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmakethe
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayloweron
thekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgo
higher.
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigheron
thekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgoup.
Bottom-Low
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
rangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Low-Center
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenterkeys.
Center-High
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
High-Top
[Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthetop
oftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
ThetablebelowshowshowtheRampsaffecttheAMS
output:
Ramp value
Inf
AMS change
goesto99in1halfstep
99
20peroctave
50
10peroctave
nochange
+50
+10peroctave
+99
+20peroctave
+Inf
goesto+99in1halfstep
+Inf and Inf ramps

52
69: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
610: Common KeyTrk 2

(Common Keyboard Track 2)
Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthesecondcommon
keyboardtrack.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee69:CommonKeyTrk1
(CommonKeyboardTrack1)onpage 51.
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 71: ARP Setup
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)

Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthearpeggiatorusedbythe
program.
Youcanmakesettingssothatwhenyouselectaprogram,
thesearpeggiatorsettingswillautomaticallyswitchtothe
arpeggiatorsettingsthatarememorizedintheselected
program.(GlobalP0:01cLoadARPwhenchanging
Programonpage 195)
Thearpeggiatorcanbeswitchedon/offbytheARPbutton.
Whenon,thekeyLEDwilllightup.
ThesettingsoftheARPbutton,TEMPO,arpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATE,VELOCITY,SWINGandSTEPknobscanbe
savedforeachprogram.
Note:Theparametersbelowthataremarkedwith*can
alsobeeditedinP0:PlayArpeggiator.
ThesesettingswillbevalidwhenLoadARPwhen
changingProgram(Global01c)ischecked.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,orrecordnotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatorontoanexternalsequencer.(SeeOG
page 96)
71b: Arpggiator Setup

Pattern*
Selectsthearpeggiopattern.
Preset/User No
Presetarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)...U0899(INT)
Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)
Userarpeggiopatterns
Note:U0000(INT)U1027(USER)arerewritable.UseGlobal
P6:ArpeggioPatterntocreatearpeggiopatterns.
Example: Preset pattern

Thewayinwhichthepatternisplayedwilldependon
settingssuchasOctaveandSort.P0P4inthefollowing
diagramsshowhowthearpeggiowillbeplayedwhen
Octaveissetto1,andSortischecked.P4:RANDOMisonly
onepossibility.
P0: UP
UP
71: ARP Setup
P1: DOWN
71
Menu
Contents
P0...P4
Note:Pattern,Resolution,Octave,Sort,Latch,KeySync.,
Keyboard,and (Tempo)canalsobesetfromtheP0:Play,
Arpeggiopage.
71a
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
DOWN
71b
P2: ALT1
ALT1
71a: Tempo
(Tempo)*
P3: ALT2
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
ALT2
Setsthetempo,expressedasbeatsperminute.
YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningthefrontpanelTEMPO
knob.Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressingthe
TAPbuttonatthedesiredinterval.
WhenMIDIClock(GlobalP1:11b)issettoeither
ExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,thisparameterwill
indicateEXT,andthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizeto
theMIDIClockreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfMIDIClockissettoAuto,thisindicationwillbe
shownonlyifMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfrom
anexternaldevice.WhentheEXTindicationisshown,
thearpeggiatoretc.willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdata
fromtheexternalMIDIdevice.
P4: RANDOM
RANDOM
Octave*
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Specifiesthenumberofoctavesinwhichthearpeggiowill
beplayed.
Ifauserarpeggiopatternisselected,therangeofthe
arpeggiowilldependontheOctaveMotion(GlobalP6:
61b)setting.
53
Program mode
Thiscanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol(ARP)
SWINGknob.Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwilladjust
thetiminginthedirection,andturningittowardthe
rightwilladjustthetiminginthe+direction.
Octave: 4
UP
Sort*
[Off, On]
Thisspecifiestheorderinwhichthenotesyoupresswillbe
arpeggiated.
[ , , , , , , , ]
Resolution*
Specifiesthetimingresolutionofthearpeggio.Thenotesof
thearpeggiowillbeplayedattheintervalyouspecify: , ,
, , , , ,or .Thespeedofthearpeggiopatternis
determinedbytheArpeggiator(Tempo)andthe
Resolution.
TurningthearpeggiocontrolARPSTEPknobtowardthe
rightwillshortenthespacingofthearpeggiatednotes
(Resolution)inincrementsofhalvingthespacing.Turning
theknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthelengthofthe
pattern(Length)inincrementsofhalvingthelength.When
theknobisinthecenterposition(12oclock),thevalueswill
beasspecifiedbytheLengthandResolutionsettings
(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetuppage).
Gate
[000...100(%), Step]
On (checked):Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderoftheir
pitch,regardlessoftheorderinwhichyoupressedthem.
Off (unchecked):Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderin
whichyoupressedthem.
Sort
OFF, UP
Sort
ON, UP
Latch*
[Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornotthearpeggiowillcontinueplaying
afteryoutakeyourhandoffofthekeyboard.
Specifiesthelength(gatetime)ofeachnoteinthearpeggio.
On(checked):Thearpeggiowillcontinueplayingafteryou
removeyourhandfromthekeyboard.
000100(%):Eachnotewillbeplayedwiththespecifiedgate
time.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiowillstopwhenyouremove
yourhandfromthekeyboard.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenauserarpeggiopattern
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)isselectedforPattern.When
thisisselected,thegatetimespecifiedforeachstepwillbe
used.
Thegatetimecanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob.Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleftwill
shortenthegatetime,androtatingittowardtherightwill
lengthenthegatetime.Whentheknobisatthe12oclock
position,thegatetimewillbeasspecifiedhere.
Velocity
[001...127, Key, Step]
Key Sync.*
[Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthearpeggiopatternwillbeginwhenyou
pressakey,orwhetheritwillalwaysfollowthe (Tempo)
(Prog01a).
On(checked):Thearpeggiopatternwillstartplayingfrom
thebeginningwhenanoteonoccursfromacondition
wherenokeysarepressed.Thissettingissuitablewhenyou
areplayinginrealtimeandwantthearpeggiotoplayfrom
thebeginningofthemeasure.
Specifiesthevelocityofthenotesinthearpeggio.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiopatternwillalwaysplay
accordingtothe (Tempo).
001127:Eachnotewillsoundwiththespecifiedvelocity
value.
Keyboard*
Key:Eachnotewillsoundwiththevelocityvalueatwhichit
wasactuallyplayed.
Thisspecifieswhetherthenotesyouplayonthekeyboard
willbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingsoundedas
partofthearpeggio.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenanuserarpeggiopattern
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)isselectedforPattern.When
thisisselected,thevelocityspecifiedforeachstepwillbe
used.
Thevelocitycanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)VELOCITYknob.Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleft
willdecreasethevelocity,androtatingittowardtheright
willincreasethevelocity.Whentheknobisatthe12oclock
position,thevelocitywillbeasspecifiedhere.
Whenapreloaduserarpeggiopatternisselected,settingthe
GateorVelocitytoStepwilladdasenseofgroovetothe
arpeggiopattern.
Swing
[100...+100(%)]
Thisparametershiftsthetimingoftheoddnumberednotes
ofthearpeggio.
When Resolution =
Step 1
[Off, On]
On(checked):Thenotesyouplaywillbesoundedontheir
own,inadditiontobeingsoundedaspartofthearpeggio.
Forexampleifyousimultaneouslypresstwoormorenotes,
theywillbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingplayedas
arpeggiatednotes.
Off(unchecked):Onlythearpeggiatednoteswillbeheard.
Note:YoucanusethemenucommandCopyArpeggiatorto
copyarpeggiatorsettingsfromanotherprogramor
combination(seepage 66).

Thisshowsagraphicofthestepsoftheuserarpeggio
pattern.
71: Menu Command
50
Swing
54
25
+25
+50
Commandonpage 64.
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 72: ARP Scan Zone
72: ARP Scan Zone
72
Menu
72a
Commandonpage 64.
72b
74: Drum Track Pattern
72c
74
Menu
74a
74b
72a: Arpeggiator Tempo

(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)*onpage 53.
Hereyoucanselectadrumtrackpatternandspecifyhowit
willsound.
72b: Zone Map

ThisshowstheScanZone.
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator
Key zone of arpeggiator
C1
G9
72c: Scan Zone

ThisshowstheScanZonesetting.
Top Key
[C1G9]
Bottom Key
[C1G9]
Theseparametersspecifytherangeofnotes(keys)forwhich
thearpeggiatorwillfunction.TopKeyistheupperlimit,
andBottomKeyisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaykeyswithinthe
specifiedrange.Keysoutsideofthisrangecanbeplayedin
thenormalmanner,andwillnotbeaffectedbythe
arpeggiatoron/off.
InProgrammode,thedrumtrackpatternsare
triggeredontheGlobalMIDIchannel.TheMIDI
transmitchannelisspecifiedbytheDrumTrackProg
MIDICh(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasic).Usethe
DrumTrackProgMIDIOut(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDI
Basic)settingtospecifywhetherthepatternwill
transmitMIDInotedata.Thedefaultsettingischannel
10.
Thedrumtrackprogramwillnottransmitorreceive
MIDIprogramchanges.
74a: Drum Pattern

Pattern
[Preset, User]
[(Preset): P000...605, (User): U000...U999]
Thisselectsthedrumpattern.
Preset/User No.
P000
Contents
Off
P000...P605
Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999
Foruser/preloadeddrumpatterns
ForexampleifyousetPatterntoP0:UP,checkLatch,set
TopKeytoB3,andBottomKeytoC1,playinganoteB3or
lowerwilltriggerthearpeggiator.SinceLatchison,the
arpeggiowillcontinueevenafteryoureleasethekeys.You
canusetheC4andhigherkeystoplayconventionallyalong
withthearpeggiosoundedbytheB3andlowerkeys.To
changethearpeggio,playkeysintherangeofB3andbelow.
U000U999canbewritten.Patternsyoucreatein
Sequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns.(Seepage 188)
Top Velocity
[001127]
Thistransposesthedrumpatterninsemitonesteps.This
meansthattheinstrumentsofthedrumkitwillchange.
Bottom Velocity
[001127]
Shift
[24...+00...+24]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesforwhichthearpeggiator
willfunction.TopVelocityistheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaynoteswitha
velocity(playingstrength)thatiswithinthespecifiedrange.
Notesplayedwithavelocityoutsidethisrangewillbe
soundednormally,withoutregardtothearpeggiatoron/off.
72: Menu Command
55
Program mode
74b: Trigger
75: Drum Track Program
Trigger Mode [Start Immediately, Wait KBD Trig]

StartImmediately:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumtrackpatternwill
startaccordingtotheSyncsetting.Whenyouturniton,the
drumtrackpatternwillstop.
75a
75
Menu
75b
75c
WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,orwhenaMIDInoteonis
received,thedrumpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.
IfyouveselectedStartImmediately,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillalwaysbesavedintheOFFstate.
Sync
[Off, On]
Off:Thedrumpatternwillnotsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator,butwillstartimmediately.
On:Thedrumpatternwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP71:ArpeggiatorSetupKeySynctospecify
whetherthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningdrumpattern.
75a: Drum Track Parameters

Program Select
[Drum Category Programs]
Hereyoucanselectthedrumprogramthatwillbeusedby
thedrumtrack.
Note:OnlyprogramsoftheDrumcategorycanbeselected.
[Off, On]
Ifdataisloadedorasystemexclusivemessageis
receivedsothattheselectedprogramisnolongera
Drumcategoryprogram,itwillbereplacedwiththe
firstprogramoftheDrumcategory.
Thisspecifieswhetherthedrumtrackwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard.
Thedrumtrackprogramwillnottransmitorreceive
MIDIprogramchanges.
Latch
ThissettingisavailableifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBD
Trig.
Volume
Off:Thepatternwillstopwhenyoutakeyourhandoffthe
keyboard(i.e.,whenallnotesareoff).
Play/Mute
On:ThepatternwillcontinueplayinguntiltheDRUM
TRACKbuttonisturnedoff(LEDunlit),regardlessof
whetheryouareperformingviathekeyboardorviaMIDI.
[000...127]
Thisadjuststhevolumeofthedrumtrackprogram.
[Mute, Play]
Thismutesthedrumtrackprogram.Thesettingwill
alternateeachtimeyoupressthePlay/Mutebutton.
Mute:Thedrumtrackprogramwillnotbeheard(Mute).
Play:Thedrumtrackprogramwillbeheard(Play).
Zone:
Using the Mixer & Drum Track page to make Drum

Track settings
Keyboard
Bottom
[C1...G9]
Top
[C1...G9]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofkeysthatwillstartthedrumpattern.
Velocity
Bottom
[001...127]
Top
[001...127]
YoucanusetheP03:Mixer&DrumTrackpagetoeditthe
Play/Mute,SoloOn/Off,andVolumesettingsofthedrum
track.(See03a:OSC/DrumTrackMixeronpage 5.)
Detune
[1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentsteps.Onecentis1/100th
ofasemitone.
ThepitchofeachdrumkitisspecifiedinGlobalP5:Drum
Kit.
YoucancontrolthisusingRPNs.
Itspecifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwillstartthedrum
pattern.
74: Menu Command
3:CopyDrumTrackseep.65
4:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.66
Commandonpage 64.
56
75b: EQ
Auto Load Program EQ
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchthedrumtrackprogram,
the3bandEQvaluesspecifiedfortheprogramwill
automaticallybeloaded.Normallyyouwillleavethis
checked.
Youarefreetoeditthe3bandEQvaluesthatare
automaticallyloaded.Youwillbemakingchangesbasedon
thesettingsoftheoriginalprogram.
Off(unchecked):The3bandEQvaluesspecifiedforthe
programwillnotbeloadedwhenyouswitchthedrumtrack
program.
Bypass
[On, Off]
WhenBypassischecked,alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingtheInputTrim.
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 75: Drum Track Program
Bypasscanbeconvenientforcomparingtheresultsofthe
EQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.This
settingcorrespondstothevolume;avalueof50corresponds
to6dB,andasettingof25correspondsto12 dB.
High Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Frequency
[100Hz...10k(Hz)]
Mid Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
0.5 dB.
Low Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
75c: Bus
Bus Select
[Dkit, L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiesthebusthatwilloutputthedrumtrack
program.
Dkit:TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1
(toMFX1),andSend2(toMFX2)settings(Global55b)for
eachkeyofthedrumkitusedbytheselecteddrumtrack
programwillbevalid.Choosethissettingifyouwantto
applyseparateinserteffectstoeachdruminstrument.
Note:WhenmakingDkitsettings,youwillnormallyuse
IFX.Patchtospecifytheoutputdestination.
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
IFX1
[L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
IFX2
IFX3
IFX4
IFX5
Here,youcanpatchtheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsetting
specifiedforeachkeyofthedrumkit,temporarilychanging
itsconnectiondestinationfromtheoriginallyspecified
inserteffecttosomeotherdestination.Thiscanbeexecuted
onlyifthedrumtrackprogramsBus(IFX/Output)Selectis
settoDKitandtheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)
foreachkeyofthedrumkitissettoIFX15.
Asthepatchdestination,chooseaninserteffectorL/R,
IFX15,orOffastheoutputbus.
Note:Ifyouwanttoreturnthedrumkittoitspreviousstate,
changethesesettingstoIFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,
IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Forthepreloadedkits,snaresoundsarenormallysentto
IFX1,kicksoundstoIFX2,andothersoundstoIFX3.Insuch
casesifyousetBusSelecttoDkit,thesesoundswillbesent
toIFX1,IFX2,andIFX3,butIFX1andIFX2aresetfornormal
(nondrum)programs.Insuchcases,youcanuseIFX.Patch
toroutethesedrumsoundstounusedIFX;forexample,you
mightsendthesnaresoundstoIFX3,kicksoundstoIFX4,
andothersoundstoIFX5.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
EffectGuideonpage 235.
75: Menu Command
IFX1,2,3,4,5:OutputtotheIFX15bus.
Off:ThesoundwillnotbeoutputtotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
bus.UsetheOffsettingifyouhaveconnectedthedrum
trackprogramoutputinseriestoamastereffect.UseSend1
(toMFX1)orSend2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
FX Control Bus
IFX. Patch:
Commandonpage 64.
[Off, 1, 2]
ThissendstheoutputofthedrumtrackprogramtotheFX
Controlbus(twomonochannelsFXCtrl1,2).
TheFXControlbusisusedwhenyouwanttouseanother
audiosignaltocontroltheinputofaneffect.Youcanusethe
twoFXControlbuses(twomonochannels)tofreelycontrol
theeffectsinavarietyofways.Formoreinformation,please
seeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
Send 1
[000...127]
Send 2
[000...127]
Thesespecifythesendlevelatwhichtheoutputofthedrum
trackprogramwillbesenttoeachmastereffect.
Send1:Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.
Send2:Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thesendlevelsto
themastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX15Send1and
Send2(Prog82a).
YoucanuseCC#93tocontrolSend1,andCC#91to
controlSend2.
57
Program mode
PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect)

Here,youcanmakesettingsfortheinserteffects.For
instance,youcan:
On(checked):TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControl
Bus,Send1,andSend2settings(Global55b)foreachkey
oftheselecteddrumkitwillbeused.Checkthisifyouwant
toapplyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
Sendtheoutputofaoscillatortoaninserteffect
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstrumentshave
thesameBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsaccordingtotheir
type,asfollows.
Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
81: Routing
81
Menu
81a
81c
81b
Off(unchecked):TheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b),
FXControlBus(Prog81b),OSCMFXSend(Prog81d)
settingswillbeused.Alldruminstrumentswillbesentto
thespecifiedbus.
81d: OSC MFX Send

OSC1:
OSC1 Send1 (to MFX1)
81d
[000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect1.ThisappliesonlywhenBus
(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)issettoL/RorOff.
81a: Routing Map

Thisgraphicshowsanoverviewoftheinserteffects.
Hereyoucanviewthestatusoftheinputbustotheinsert
effectBus(IFX/Output)Select,theeffectyoureediting,and
itson/offstatusandchainstatus.
Thispageletsyouadjusttheroutingoftheoscillatorstothe
inserteffects.Toadjusttheothersettingsshowninthis
graphic,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetuponpage 59.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX1IFX5,thesend
levelstomastereffects1and2aresetbySend1andSend2
(Prog82a)afterpassingthroughIFX15.
OSC2:
81b: Bus Select (All OSCs to)
[000...127]
Bus (IFX/Output) Select
[000...127]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2.
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus.Normally
youwillchooseL/R.
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofOSC2
willbesenttomastereffects1and2.Theseparameterswill
bevalidwhenOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
DrumsandBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.
IFX15:OutputtotheIFX15busses.
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91
controlstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Theactualsend
levelisdeterminedbymultiplyingthesevalueswith
thesendlevelsofeachoscillator.
Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15busses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthe
programoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
FX Control Bus
[Off, 1, 2]
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControlbus
(twochannelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
tocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.YoucanusetwoFX
Controlbusses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson
page 238.
81c: Use Dkit Setting

Use DKit Setting
[Off, On]
ThisisshownifOscillatorMode(Prog11a)issettoDrums
orDoubleDrums.IfOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Double,thissettingisignored.
58
[000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect2.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeOSC1Send1(toMFX1)onpage 58.
81: Menu Command
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
Commandonpage 64.
PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 82: Insert FX Setup
Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
chainedtoIFX5.
82: Insert FX Setup

82
Menu
82a
Effectscanalsojoinachaininthemiddle.Forinstance,you
canchainIFX3toIFX4toIFX5,andthenchainIFX2toIFX5
aswell.
ThePan:#8,Bus(BusSelect),Ctrl(FXControlBus),and
Send1/2settingsapplyonlytothelasteffectinthechain.
However,anyeffectinthechaincanbesenttotheFX
Controlbuses.
IFX1: Chain
[Off, On]
IFX2: Chain
[Off, On]
IFX3: Chain
[Off, On]
82a: Insert Effect
IFX4: Chain
[Off, On]
Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
5,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixer
settings.
Thisenablesthechain,assetupbytheChaintoparameter,
above.
Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereoin
andout.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 240.
Pan:#8:
Pan: #8 (Post IFX PanCC#8)
[L000...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
Bus Sel.:
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4
[000...193]
Bus Sel. (Bus Select)
IFX5
[000...171]
Specifiesthebustowhichthesignalwillbesent
immediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect.
IFX5cannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).Ifyouusea
doublesizeeffect,thenextinserteffectwillbeunavailable.
ForexampleifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,you
wontbeabletouseIFX2.
Category/IFX Select menu

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/IFXSelect
menuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsbycategory.Use
thetabstoselectacategory,andthenselectaneffectwithin
thatcategory.PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteyourselection,
orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
IFX1...5: IFX On/Off
[Off, On]
Switchestheinserteffecton/off.
Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtotheoutput.
(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresnodifference
betweenOnandOff.)
Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeyou
pressthebutton.
Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC#92
(ontheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a))toturnall
inserteffectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvalues
of1127restoretheoriginalsetting.
Chain:
IFX1: Chain to
[IFX2...IFX5]
IFX2: Chain to
[IFX3...IFX5]
IFX3: Chain to
[IFX4...IFX5]
Youcanchainuptofiveinserteffectstogetherinseries,to
createmorecomplexeffects.Setupthechainusingthis
parameter,andthenenableitusingtheChaincheckbox,
below.
[Off, L/R]
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,whichpasses
throughTFXandthengoestotheAUDIOOUTPUTL/R
outputs.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheL/Routputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto:
UseSend1or2toroutethesignalentirelythroughthe
mastereffects,withoutsendingthedrysignaltothe
outputs.
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoaneffectsside
chain,suchasagateorvocoder,withoutbeingheard
directlyattheoutputs.
FX Ctrl:
FX Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
[Off, 1, 2]
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControlbusses.Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusonpage 58.
IfyoureusingCtrl(FXControlBus)asaninputsignal
forVocoderetc.,afeedbackloopwilloccurifyou
outputtothesamebusasspecifiedhere,andoscillation
willoccur.Setthiswithcaretoavoidcreatingaloop.
Send1/2:
Send1
[000...127]
Send2
[000...127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalissentto
mastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBus(BusSelect)isset
toL/RorOff.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)is
usedforthesemessages.
Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.For
example,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2throughIFX5,
andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3throughIFX5.
59
Program mode
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
82: Menu Command
Using Effect Presets
1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXSetuppage.
2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled.
P(EffectPreset)willindicate.
3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset:P00
P15orU00U15.
Commandonpage 64.
Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethatthiswill
overwriteallparametersoftheeffect.
4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.
83: IFX1
83
Menu
83a
5. Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwantto
savethemasanewpreset,usetheWriteFXPreset
menucommand.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX1 Parameters
ThistabshowstheparametersforIFX1,asselectedonthe
InsertFXSetuppage.
Fordetailsonthespecificparametersofeacheffect,please
seeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX5)onpage 240.
83a: Insert Effect 1 (IFX1)
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffectyou
selectedintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSource
Listonpage 346.
IFX1 On/Off
83: Menu Command
[Off, On]
5:WriteFXPresetseep.67
Commandonpage 64.
Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.Itislinkedwiththe
on/offsettingintheInsertFXSetuppage.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,andSequencer).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethemasan
EffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularProgram,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFXSetup
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.Selectingthis
settingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
dontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyou
60
84: IFX2, 85: IFX3, 86: IFX4,

87: IFX5
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersfortheinserteffects
selectedintheInsertFXSetuppage.
TheparametersforIFX2IFX5arethesameasforIFX1.
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 91: Routing
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO)

Here,youcanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsandtotal
effect.Forinstance,youcan:
0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedby
MIDIChannel(Global11a)isusedforthismessage.
Routeasoundtoanmastereffectsandtotaleffect
MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Return 1
Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotaleffect
ThisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffecttotheL/
Rbus.
page 235.
[000...127]
Note:TheL/RbusissenttoTFX,andthenoutputtothe
mainL/MONOandRoutputjacks.
MFX2:
91: Routing
MFX2
91
Menu
[000...171]
MFX2 On/Off
[Off, On]
Return 2
91a
[000...127]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformastereffect2,
itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrommastereffect2to
theL/Rbus.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMFX1:
above.
MFX2cannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).
Additionally,ifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,you
wontbeabletouseMFX2.
91b
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemon/off.
Chain:
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffectis
insertedintotheL/Rbus.
Chain On/Off
91a: MFX1, 2
[Off, On]
On(checked):Chain(seriesconnection)willbeturnedon
forMFX1andMFX2.
Chain Direction
[MFX1...MFX2, MFX2...MFX1]
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound(Dry).
AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2returnlevelstoreturnthe
signaltotheL/RbusandmixitwiththeL/Rbussignal.
SpecifiesthedirectionoftheconnectionwhenMFX1and
MFX2arechained.
Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingonthe
selectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural.Formore
information,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 240.
MFX2MFX1:ConnectfromMFX2toMFX1.
[000...127]
Ifyouselectadoublesizeeffect,theChainsettingswill
beignored.
[000...193]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.Youcanuse
anyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.Ifyouchoose
000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemastereffectismuted.
Category/MFX Select menu

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/MFXSelect
menuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsbycategory.Use
thetabstoselectacategoryinthemenu,andthenselectan
effectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOKbuttontoexecute
yourselection,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
MFX1 On/Off
Chain Level
WhenchainisOn,thissetsthelevelatwhichthesoundis
sentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenextmastereffect.
MFX1:
MFX1
MFX1MFX2:ConnectfromMFX1toMFX2.
[Off, On]
Switchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,theoutputwill
bemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeit
ispressed.
Tip:Aneasywaytodisablethemastereffectsistoturnoff
thefrontpanelMASTERFXbutton.MFX1/2willbe
temporarilydisabled,andwillstayoffevenifyouswitch
programsormodes.Whenyouturntheswitchon,the
mastereffectswillbeenabled,andyouwillobtainthe
effectsspecifiedbytheprogramorcombination.
Note:TheMASTERFXbuttonislinkedwithGlobalP01
EffectGlobalSWEnableMFX1&2(seep.5).
Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanusecontrol
change#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.Avalueof
91b: TFX
Thesearetheparametersforthetotaleffect,whichisplaced
atthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.Afterpassingthroughthe
totaleffect,thesoundisoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandR.
Forthetotaleffect,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereo
in/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffecttype.
Thetotaleffectisstereoinandstereoout,buttheoutput
maybemonauraldependingonthetypeofeffectyouselect.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 240.
TFX:
TFX
[000...171]
Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect.]
TFXcannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).
Category/TFX Select menu

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/TFXSelect
menuwillappear,lettingyouchooseeffecttypesby
category.Usethetabstoselectaneffectcategoryinthe
61
Program mode
menu,andthenchooseaneffectwithinthatcategory.Press
theOKbuttontoexecuteyourchoice,orpresstheCancel
buttontocancel.
TFX On/Off
92: MFX1
92
Menu
[Off, On]
Thisturnstotaleffecton/off.Ifthisisoff,theinputwillbe
passeddirectlythrough.Thesettingwillalternatebetween
on/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
92a
Tip:Aneasywaytodisablethetotaleffectistoturnoffthe
frontpanelTOTALFXbutton.TFXwillbetemporarily
disabled,andwillstayoffevenifyouswitchprogramsor
modes.Whenyouturntheswitchon,thetotaleffectwillbe
enabled,andyouwillobtaintheeffectspecifiedbythe
programorcombination.
Note:TheTOTALFXbuttonislinkedwithGlobalP01
EffectGlobalSWEnableTFX(seep.5).
Alternatively,youcansendcontrolchange#95toturn
thetotaleffectoff.Avalueof0turnsthetotaleffectoff,
andvaluesof1127restoretheoriginalsetting.The
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel
(Global11a)isusedforthismessage.
91c: Master Volume

Master Volume
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouchoosefor
MFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSource
Listonpage 346.
MFX1 On/Off
[000...127]
Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthathas
passedthroughtotaleffect,andoutputfromAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandR.
92a: MFX1
ThesettingwillalternatebetweenOnandOffeachtimeyou
pressthis.
Alternatively,youcanuseCC#94toturnMastereffects
1/2off.CC#95willturntheTotaleffectoff.Avalueof0
isOff,andavalueof1127selectstheoriginalsetting.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
byMIDIChannel(Global11a).
91: Menu Command
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
Commandonpage 64.
[Off, On]
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Itislinkedwiththeon/off
settingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
Thisselectstheeffectpreset.Formoreinformation,please
seeP(EffectPreset)onpage 60.
MFX1 Parameters
Here,youcanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
selectedintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseeMasterEffects
(MFX1,2)onpage 245.
92: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
93: MFX2, 94: TFX

ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMasterEffect2
andTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheP9:
MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFXisthesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
62
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 95: Common FX LFO
BPM
95: Common FX LFO
Base Note
95
Menu
95a
95b
[MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
[ , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Times
[01...32]
ThefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFOwillbethelengthof
theBaseNotenotevaluemultipliedbytheTimesvalue,
relativetothetempospecifiedbytheBPMvalue.IfBPMis
settoMIDI,thiswilloperateaccordingtothe (Tempo)
(Prog01a)setting.IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issetto
External,thiswillfollowtheMIDIclockofthemaster
device.
95b: Common FX LFO2

ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronizeLFO
basedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
flangers,filters,andsoon.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforCommonFXLFO1,
asdescribedunder95a:CommonFXLFO1above.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividualeffect
stillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveformandphase.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhethertouse
oneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousetheindividualeffects
frequency,sync,and/orresetsettingsinstead.Thisisdone
viatheeffectsLFOTypeparameter;selectIndividualtouse
theeffectssettings,orCommon1or2tousetheCommon
LFOs.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1
Frequency[Hz]
Reset
95: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Stereo Flanger
Waveforem = Triangle
Generate original LFO waveform
Stereo Phaser
Waveforem = Sine
Stereo Auto Pan

Waveforem = Sine
Dmod(DynamicModulation)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedinGlobalmodeP1.
95a: Common FX LFO1

Sync (Reset)
[Off, On]
ThisspecifieswhethertheCommonFXLFOwillbereset.
Ifthisison,operatingtheSource(below)willresetthe
phaseoftheLFO.
Source (Dmod Source)
[List of Dmod Sources]
IfSync(Reset)ison,thisselectstheDmodsourcethatwill
resettheCommonLFO.ForacompletelistofDmod
sources,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSourceListon
page 346.
Thiswillbeoffwhenthemodulationsourcespecified
bySourcehasavaluebelow64,andonwhenthevalue
isabove64.TheLFOwillberesetwhenthisvaluerises
fromalevelbelow64toalevelhigherthan64.
Frequency
[0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
ThisspecifiesthefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFO.Higher
valuesmaketheLFOfaster.
MIDI/Tempo Sync
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):ThespeedoftheCommonFXLFOwillbe
determinedbytheFrequencysetting.
On(checked):ThespeedoftheCommonFXLFOwillbe
determinedbytheBPM,BaseNote,andTimessettings(see
below).
63
Program mode
Program: Menu Command

ENTER + 09: shortcuts for menu commands
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,whichprovide
accesstodifferentutilities,commands,andoptions,
dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon.Youcanusethe
menucommandsentirelyfromthetouchscreen,by
pressingthemenubuttonintheupperrighthandcornerof
thescreenandthenselectinganoptionfromthemenuthat
appears.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownuniquemenu
commands,themenusarestandardizedasmuchas
possible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthefirst
menuiteminProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationbyusinga
shortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenuitems:
1. TheupperlineofthedialogshowstheBank,number,
andProgramname.
1. HolddowntheENTERbutton.
Ifyouwishtomodifytheprogramname,pressthetextedit
buttontomovetothetexteditdialogbox,andenterthe
desiredprogramname.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadtoselect
thedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
2. InCategoryandSubCategory,specifythecategoryof
theprogramthatyouarewriting.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1forthe
second,andsoon.
ThecategorycanbeusedtofindthisProgramwhen
selectingaprograminProgram,Combination,orSequencer
modes.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthecommand
callsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappearonthedisplay,
andyoucanproceedjustasifyoudselectedthecommand
fromthetouchscreen.
Tip:Whilethiscommandisopen,theENTERbuttonwill
operateastheOKbuttonandtheEXITbuttonwilloperate
astheCancelbutton.
Procedure for menu commands

1. Selectthemenucommand.
Note:YoucaneditthesecategorynamesintheGlobalP4:
Categorypage.Formoreinformation,pleasesee41:
ProgramMainand42:ProgramSubonpage 204.
3. PressToProgramtospecifythedestinationBankand
number.
YoucanalsousetheBANKAFbuttonstoselectabank.
YoucannotsavetobanksGg(d).Ifyouveeditedaprogram
frombanksGg(d)andwanttosaveit,savetheedited
programtoabankAF.
2. Makesettingsinthedialogbox.
Fordetailsonthecontentofeachdialogbox,refertothe
explanationofeachcommand.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexe
cuting,presstheCancelbutton.
Exclusive Solo
ThebehavioroftheSolofunctionwillalternateeachtime
youselectExclusiveSolo.
TheSolofunctioncanoperateinoneofthefollowingtwo
ways.
Write Program
MultipleSolo
ThiscommandwritesaneditedProgramintotheKROME
internalmemory.ItisavailableoneverypageinProgram
mode.
ThespecifiedOSC1,OSC2,ordrumtrackwillbesoloed.The
soloon/offsettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
WriteProgramletsyou:
ExclusiveSolo
Saveyouredits
OnlyonesourceOSC1,OSC2,orthedrumtrackwillbe
soloed.
RenametheProgram
AssigntheProgramtoaCategory
CopytheProgramtoadifferentBankandnumber
BesuretoWriteanyProgramthatyouwishtokeep.An
editedProgramcannotberecoveredifyoudonotwrite
itbeforeturningoffthepowerorselectinganother
Program.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheWRITEbutton.
Note:SolooperationscanbeperformedintheP03:Mixer&
DrumTrackpageofeachmode.
Note:TheSolofunctionappliestoeachmode.Allsources
arehandledasasinglegroup.InthecaseofExclusiveSolo,
allothersourceswillbeoffifevenonesourceisbeing
soloed.
1. UsethemenutoselectExclusiveSolo.
Whenyouselectthisitem,acheckmarkwillbeaddedatthe
leftofExclusiveSolointhemenu.Thecheckmarkwill
appearordisappeareachtimeyouselectthisitem.
Nocheckmark:MultipleSolo
Checkmark:ExclusiveSolo
Alternatively,youcanturnthissettingon/offbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandpressingnumerickey1.
64
Program: Menu Command Auto Song Setup
Auto Song Setup
Copy Oscillator
Thiscommandautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofthe
programorcombinationtoasong,andenablestherecord
standbycondition(SeeTip:AutoSongSetuponpage 2.).
CopyOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,AMS/CommonKeyTrackpages.
pressingtheREC()button.
Thiscommandisusedtocopythesettingsfromone
oscillatortoanother.
Copy Tone Adjust

ToneAdjusttaboftheplaypage.
ThiscommandreplacesthecurrentToneAdjustsettings
withthoseofanyotherProgram,CombinationTimbre,or
SongTrack.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheoscillatorthatyouwant
tocopy.
2. UseProgramtoselectthebankandnumberofthe
copysourceprogram.
YoucanpressaBANKSELECTbuttontoselectthedesired
bank.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationoscillator.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,
bank,andnumber.
YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKbuttonstoselectthe
desiredbank.
Swap Oscillator
SwapOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,AMS/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsofoscillators1and2.
2. IntheTimbrefield(ifyouveselectedaCombination)
orTrackfield(ifyouveselectedaSong),selectthe
TimbreorTracktocopyfrom.
Note:ThiscanbeselectedonlyifOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)isDoubleorDoubleDrums.
3. SelecteitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytospecifythe
ToneAdjustparametersyouwanttocopy.
Copy Drum Track
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
assignmentsandvalues.
CopyDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTrkPatterntab
orDrumTrkProgramtaboftheARP/DTpage.
AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheToneAdjust
parameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromthespecifiedprogram,
combination/timbre,orsong.
Reset Tone Adjust

ToneAdjusttaboftheplaypage.
ThiscommandresetstheToneAdjustsettingsforallofthe
displayedSwitchesandSliderstotheirdefaultvalues.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,andnum
berofthedesiredcopysource.YoucanpressaBANK
buttontoselectthedesiredbank.
1. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheSwitches18and
Sliders18parameterswillbereset.
AllOff:AllwillberesettoOff.
DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothedefault
values.
2. IfyouexecutethiscommandinProgrammode,and
selectPrograminFrom,theadditionalfieldProgram
Settingstoowillappear.
On(checked):TheparametersettingsoftheDrumTrack
PatternpageandDrumTrackProgrampagewillbecopied.
Off(unchecked):TheparametersettingsoftheDrumTrack
Patternpagewillbecopied.
IfyouexecutethiscommandinCombinationorSequencer
mode,theparametersettingsoftheDrumTrackProgram
pagewillbecopied.However,theMIDIChannelsetting
willnotbecopied.
65
Program mode
Erase Drum Track Pattern

EraseDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTrkPatterntab
orDrumTrkProgramtaboftheARP/DT.
Thiserasesthedrumtrackpatternyouspecify.
1. UsetheFromfieldspecifythesourceofthearpeggio
settings(mode,bank,number)thatyouwishtocopy.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromCombination,orSong,specify
whetheryouwishtocopyfromAorB.
1. Selecttheuserdrumtrackpatternyouwanttoerase.
2. IfyoucheckAllDrumTrackPatterns,alluserdrum
trackpatternswillbeerased.
Sync Both EGs

SyncBothEGsisavailableontheFilter1/2EGandAmp1/2
EGpages.
ThisoptionallowsyoutoedittheEGsofOscillator1and
Oscillator2together.Whenitischecked,editingtheFilter
EGofeitherOscillator1or2willchangebothFilterEGs
simultaneously.Similarly,editingtheAmpEGofeither
OscillatorwillchangebothAmpEGs.
Copy Insert Effect

CopyInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
Thiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromwithinthe
currentProgram,fromotherPrograms,Combinations,or
Songs.
ToexecutetheCopyInsertEffectcommand,presstheOK
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Ifyourecopyingfromamastereffect,theresultwill
notbeidenticalduetodifferencesintheroutingand
levelsettingsofthemastereffects.
ThisoptionisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums.
1. SelectSyncBothEGs.
ThedisplaywillindicateSYNCBOTHEGsandthetwo
EGswillbesynchronized.
2. IfyounolongerwanttheEGstobesynchronized,
selectSyncBothEGsonceagain.
From (Mode)
[Program, Combination, Song]
Theindicationwilldisappearfromthedisplay.
ThisselectswhetheryoullcopyfromaProgram,a
Combination,oraSong.
Swap LFO 1&2
From (Bank and Number)
SwapLFO1&2isavailableonalloftheLFOpages,except
fortheCommonLFOtab.
ForProgramsandCombinations,thisselectstheBankand
Numberfromwhichtocopy.Whenthisparameteris
selected,youcanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonsto
selectBanks.
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofLFO1toLFO2,and
viceversa.
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,this
commandwillerasethatmodulationrouting.
(Effects slot select)
[Bank and Number]
[IFX 15, MFX 1&2, TFX]
Selectwhichoftheeffectsyouwishtocopy.
Youcanalsocopyfromamastereffectandtotaleffect.
Copy Arpeggiator
All
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheArpAtabandArpB
tabofPlay/RECControlpageorSetuptab,ArpAtab,ArpB
tab,ScanZonetaboftheARP/DTpage.
Whenthisisenabled,thesettingsofallinserteffects(the
contentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheeffectparametersof
IFX15,butnotCtrlCh)willbecopied.
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
To
[check-box]
[IFX 15]
Thisselectstheinserteffectcopydestination.
Post IFX Mixer Settings
[check-box]
Whenthisischecked,thePan,Bus(BusSelect),Ctrl(FX
ControlBus),andSends1and2settingsthatfollowthe
copysourceinserteffectwillalsobecopied.
Whenthisisnotchecked,onlytheeffecttypeandits
parameterswillbecopied.
66
Program: Menu Command Swap Insert Effect
Copying 000: No Effect

Copyingasingleeffectsetto000:NoEffectwillnotwork:
nodatawillbecopied.
IfeitherAllorAllusedisselected,and000:NoEffect
existswithinachain,itwillbecopied.However,iftheentire
chainconsistsof000:NoEffect,nothingwillbecopied.
Swap MFX/TFX
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)settingsbetweenMFX1,
MFX2,TFX.
Swap Insert Effect

SwapInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
Thiscommandexchangestheeffects,andtheirinternal
parameters,betweentwoIFXslots.
AlloftheparametersshownontheIFX15pageswillbe
copied.
OtherIFXslotparameterswillnotbeaffected,including
Pan,Sends1and2,Chain,AUXBus,andFXControlBus.
1. UseSource1andSource2toselectthemastereffect(s)
ortotaleffect(s)thatyouwanttoswap.
Write FX Preset
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffectsparameter
editingpages,includingIFX15,MFX1and2,andTFX.
ThiscommandsavestheeditedeffectintotheKROMEs
internalmemory.
1. InSource1andSource2,selecteachoftheinsert
effectsthatyouwishtoswap.
Copy MFX/TFX
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Thiscommandletsyoucopyanydesiredeffectsettingsfrom
Program,Combination,orSong.
1. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialog
box,andinputanamefortheeffectpreset.
2. UsetheTofieldtoselectthewritingdestination.We
recommendthatyouuseU00U15.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,
bank,andnumber.
YoucanalsousetheBANKbuttonstoselectthedesired
bank.
2. Selecttheeffectthatyouwanttocopy.
YoucancopyfromaninserteffectbyselectingIFX15.
Ifyoucopyfromaninserteffect,theresultmaynotbe
exactlythesame,duetodifferencesinroutingandlevel
settings.
IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturnlevelwillbecopied
atthesametime.
YoucancopysettingsfromatotaleffectbyselectingTFX.
IfyoucheckAllMFXs,allmastereffectsettingswillbe
copied.
IfyoucheckTFX,alltotaleffectsettingswillbecopied.
MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationmastereffectsor
totaleffect.
67
Program mode
68
Combination mode
COMBI Page Select
Youcanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesin
Combinationmode.
Page
P0:Play
P1:Controllers
SW1,2,andknobfunctionsettings.(see
p.78)
P2:EQ
EQsettingsforeachtimbre.(seep.79)
P3:TimbreParam
Variousparametersettingsforeach
timbre(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,
Pitchsetting,etc.)(seep.81)
P4:Zone/Delay
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(seep.84)
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.(seep.86)
P5:MIDIFilter
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(see
p.87)
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
P8:Routing/IFX
settings.(seep.97)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
settings.(seep.99)
p.100)
PLAY
1. PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect.
Alternatively,pressthemodebuttonontheupperleftside
ofthedisplay,andthenpresstherightsideofthemenu.

HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressanumerickeys,
09,tospecifyapagenumber;youwillmovetothe
correspondingpage.
ForexampleifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:TimbreParam
page,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumeric
key3.
PressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutotheP0:Play
page.IfapageotherthantheProgramT0108pageis
selected,pressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutothe
ProgramT0108page.
EFFECT
ARP&DRUMTRACK
EDIT
ThepageinwhichyouwerepriortopressingthePAGE
buttonisshowninlightblue.
Main content
Selectandplaycombinations.(seep.70)
Programselectionforeachtimbre.(see
p.71)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
timbre.(seep.73)
EditingfromtheToneAdjust(seep.75)
69
Combination mode
COMBI P0: Play

ThisisthemainpageofCombinationmode.Amongother
things,youcan:
Selectcombinations
Mode
Category Popup
Page Menu Stop Watch

Tempo
Bank
Selectaprogramforeachtimbre,andspecifyitsPlay/
MuteandSoloOn/Offstatus.
Combination Select Popup
EdittheArpeggiatorinsimpleways
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters
Tip: Auto Song Setup

TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrentProgramor
CombinationintoaSong,andthenputstheKROMEin
recordreadymode.
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhileyoure
playing,youcanusethisfunctiontostartrecording
immediately.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSongSetupon
page 106.
Combination Select
Combination Select
[000...127]
HereyoucanselectthedesiredCombination.
To switch combinations
ChooseCombinationSelect,usenumerickeys09to
inputthedesiredcombinationnumber,andpressthe
ENTERbutton.
ChooseCombinationSelectandturntheVALUEdialor
usetheINC/DECbuttons.
Ifthe01a:CombinationSelectparameterisselected,
theBANKADbuttonswillswitchcombinationbanks.
PresstheCombinationSelectPopuptoviewandselect
fromtheBank/CombinationSelectmenuorganizedby
bank.
01: Program T0108,

02: Program T0916
PresstheCategoryPopuptoviewandselectfromthe
Category/CombinationSelectmenuorganizedby
category.
01
Menu
01a
01b
Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectcombinations.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseetheGlobalparameter
FootSwitchAssignonpage 202.Foralistofthe
functionsthatcanbeassignedtothefootswitch,please
seeFootSwitchAssignmentsonpage 349.
YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice.
Bank/Combination Select menu:

Thisisthemainpageforselectingandplaying
Combinations.YoucanalsosettheProgram,Play/Mute,and
SoloOn/OffforeachoftheTimbres18and916.
2. Pressoneofthetabsatleftorrighttoselectabank.
3. Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusetheINC/DEC
buttons.
01(2)a:Combination Select
Bank
1. PressthepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofCombina
tionSelecttoaccesstheBank/CombinationSelect
menu.
[A...D]
Thisindicatesthecurrentlyselectedcombinationbank.
Ifthescreencannotdisplayalloftheavailableitems,usethe
scrollbar.
PressoneoftheBANKADbuttonstoselectthedesired
bank.
Note:Ifyouwanttosearchforasoundbyitscombination
name,usetheFindfunction(seep.2).
Eachbankcontainsrewritablecombinationprogramareas
for128combinations(atotalof512).
Bank
No.
Description
A,B,C
000127
Preloadedcombinations
000127
Usercombinations
Bank/Combination Select menu

Tab
Note:PressingoneoftheBANKAFbuttonswhilethe
ProgramSelectparameterisselectedwillchangethetimbre
programbank(ratherthanthecombinationbank).
Scroll bar
70
COMBI P0: Play 01: Program T0108, 02: Program T0916
Category
[00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectthecombinationcategory.
Allprogramsareclassifiedusingeighteenmaincategories
andeightsubcategories.Youcanselectacategory,andthen
selectacombinationwithinthatcategory.Whenyoupress
thepopupbutton,theCategory/CombinationSelectmenu
willappear.
Category/Combination Select menu:

Youcanselectcombinationsbycategoryandsubcategory.
Allcombinationsareorganizedintouptoeighteen
categories,andeachcategoryisfurtherorganizedintoeight
subcategories.Youcanusethesecategoriesandsub
categoriestoselectcombinations.
1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton(abovetheCombina
tionSelectparameter)toopentheCategory/Combina
tionSelectmenu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsontheleftandrighttoselectthe
desiredcategory.
Note:Youcannotselectthecategorytabofacategoryto
whichnocombinationshavebeenassigned.
3. Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusetheINC/DEC
buttons.
Iftherearemorecombinationsthancanbeshowninthe
screen,usethescrollbartoseetheremainingcombinations.
Note:Ifyouwanttosearchforasoundbyitscombination
name,usetheFindfunction(seep.2).
Category/Combination Select menu
Category
tab
Sub-category
tab
(Tempo)
[40.00... 300.00, EXT]
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandeffects,arpeggiator,and
temposyncedeffects.
040.00300.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoinBPM,
with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousingthestandard
dataentrycontrols,youcanusetheTEMPOknobtoadjust
thebpm,orjustplayafewquarternotesontheTAPbutton.
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB,EXTisshown.ThisisalsoshownifMIDI
ClockisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfroman
externaldevice.IftempoisEXT,arpeggiatoretc.will
synchronizetoMIDIclockdatafromanexternalMIDI
device.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock(MIDI
ClockSource)onpage 199.
Mode, Stop Watch

Seea:Modebuttononpage 4oftheOperationguide.
Seel:Stopwatchbuttononpage 5oftheOperationguide.
01(2)b: Timbre Program Select

Selected Timbre Info
Thisareashowsinformationonthetimbreselectedfor
editing.T:Timbrenumber/programbank/number/name,
Ch:MIDIchannel/number.
Select Timbre Info
Timbre No.
Category/Timbre
Program Select
Bank/Timbre
Program Select
Program Select
Play/Mute
Solo On/Off
Timbre Number
Scroll bar
4. Toselectfromasubcategory,presstheJumptoSub
buttontoaccessSubCategory/ProgramSelect.
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Beloweachtimbre
numberareshownvariousparameterswhichyoucanedit
forthattimbre.
Pressoneofthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number):
Note:Subcategoriesnotassignedtoanyprogramscannot
beselectedfromthetabs.
Category (Timbre Program)
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,orpressthe
Cancelbuttontocancelit.Youwillreturntothemain
categories.
Here,youcanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbreby
programcategoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsare
organizedintouptoeighteencategoriesandeightsub
categories.
[00...17/00...07]
PressthispopupbuttontogettheCategory/Timbere
ProgramSelectmenu,thenselectthedesiredcategoryand
subcategory,andfinallyselectthedesiredprogram.
Category/Timbre Program Select menu:

Hereyoucanselecttheprogramforeachtimbrebymain
categoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoa
maximumofeighteenmaincategories,andeachcategoryis
classifiedintoeightsubcategories.Youcanselectprograms
usingthesemaincategoriesandsubcategories.
Note:Thecategoryofeachcombinationcanbespecifiedin
theWriteCombinationdialogbox.
PressCategoryandusetheCategory/TimbreProgram
Selectmenutoselectaprogram.
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeCategory/CombinationSelect
menu:above.
71
Combination mode
Program Select
[A...F: 000...127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001...128]
Here,youcanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbre.The
lowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
To switch the program of a timbre

ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09toinputthe
programnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
ChooseProgramSelectandturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
IftheProgramSelectparameterischosen,theBANKAF
buttonswillswitchprogrambanks.(IfTimbreProgram
Selectisselected,theBANKbuttonLEDoftheprogram
bankselectedforthattimbrewilllightup.)
YoucanusethenumerickeystoswitchtheGMbank(see
p.2).
FromtheBank/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanviewand
selectprogramsarrangedbybank.
FromtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanview
andselectprogramsbycategory.
YoucanchooseaprogrambytransmittingMIDIprogram
changesfromaconnectedexternalMIDIdevice.
TheKROMEscombinationsandtimbreprogramscan
beswitchedfromanexternalMIDIdevicebyusing
MIDIbankselectandMIDIprogramchangemessages.
Bydefault,thecombinationbankandnumberwill
changewhenabankselectorprogramchangemessage
thatmatchestheKROMEsglobalMIDIchannelis
received.(GlobalMIDIchannel;seep.198Global11a
MIDIChannel(GlobalMIDIChannel))
However,ifthechanneloftheincomingmessageis
differentthantheKROMEsglobalMIDIchannel,the
programbankandnumberwillchangeonlyfortimbres
thatmatchtheMIDIchannelofthemessage.
Tip:EvenfortheglobalMIDIchannel,youcanchangethe
settingfromthedefaultsothatthetimbreprogram
ratherthanthecombinationwillbeswitched.(see
p.201Global12bMIDIFilterCombinationChange)
Tip:SwitchingthetimbreprograminresponsetoMIDI
receptioncanbedisabledforspecifictimbres.(seep.87
MIDIFilter51c/52cEnableProgramChange)
Whenyouswitchcombinationsbyoperatingthe
KROME,thebankandnumberofthecombinationyou
selectaretransmittedasbankselectandprogram
changemessagesontheglobalMIDIchannel.
Atthistime,ifanyofthetimbreshavethetimbrestatus
EXTorEX2,thebankandnumberoftheirtimbre
programswillbetransmittedasbankselectandprogram
changemessagesonthetimbrechannel.(TimbreStatus;
seep.81TimbreParam31c/32cStatus)
Bank/Timbre Program Select menu:

PressthepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofProgram
Select,andchooseaprogramfromtheBank/Program
Selectmenu.
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeBank/ProgramSelectmenu:
onpage 2.
Play/Mute
[Play, Mute]
Thissettingmutesatimbre.
Play:Thetimbrewillproducesound.
Mute:Thetimbrewillbemuted(silent).
Solo On/Off
[On, Off]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtimbre.
TheSolofunctionoperatesdifferentlydependingonthe
settingoftheExclusiveSolomenucommand.
72
IfExclusiveSoloisoff,youcanturnSoloonformorethan
onetimbre.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupress
theSoloOn/Offbutton.
IfExclusiveSoloison,pressingaSolobuttonwillturnSolo
onforonlythattimbre.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offstatusisnotpreservedwhenyou
writethecombination.
Exclusive Solo
thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff(unchecked),
youcansolomultipleTimbresatonce.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneTimbrecan
besoloedatatime.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
Tip:YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
andpressing1onthenumerickeypad.
Velocity Meter
ThisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheMIDI
channelofeachtimbre,producedbythekeyboard,MIDI
IN,arpeggiator,ordrumtrack.(Ifmultiplenoteon
messagesarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest
velocitywillbedisplayed.)
Timbre 02...08, 09...16 (Timbre Number):

Hereyoucanspecifytheprogram,Play/Mutestatus,and
SoloOn/Offstatusfortimbres28and916.Thesearethe
sameasfortimbre01.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Timbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
01(2): Menu Command
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P0: Play 03: Mixer T0108, 04: Mixer T0916
Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanningof
thesoundaftertheinserteffect(Mixeronpage 243).
03: Mixer T0108,

04: Mixer T0916
RND:Theoscillatorpanwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)issettoINT,CC#10(pan)
messagescanbereceivedtocontrolthesetting.CC#10
valuesof0or1willplacethesoundatfarleft,64at
center,and127atfarright.(excludeRND)Pancanbe
controlledbymessagesreceivedontheMIDIChannel
(Combi31(2)c).
03
Menu
03a
03b
Volume
[000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbre18.
Thevolumeofeachtimbreisdeterminedby
multiplyingthisvolumevaluewiththeMIDIvolume
(CC#7)andexpression(CC#11).
Thisisthemainpageforselectingandplaying
Combinations.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)hasbeensettoINT,incoming
MIDICC#7orCC#11messageswillcontrolthevolume
ofatimbre.(Howeverthesemessageswillnotaffectthe
settingofthisparameter.)
Youcanalsosetthepan,andvolumeforeachoftheTimbres
18and916.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01:
ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916onpage 70.
IfStatusisEXTorEX2,thevalueofthisparameterwill
betransmittedasMIDICC#7whenthecombinationis
changed.Howeverthiswillnotbetransmittedbya
timbrethatissettothesameMIDIchannelastheglobal
MIDIchannel.ThismessageistransmittedontheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)specifiedforeachtimbre.
03(4)a: Combination Select

Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Combination
Selectonpage 70.
Hold Balance
03(4)b: Pan, Volume

Thisareashowsinformationonthetimbreselectedfor
editing.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenanyoneofthevolumeslidersis
moved,thevolumeoftheothertimbreswillchangeaswell.
Thevolumebalanceoftimbres116willbemaintained.This
isusefulwhenyouwishtoadjusttheoverallvolume.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TimbreProgram
Selectonpage 71.
Timbre 02...08 (Timbre Number):
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogrametc.foreachTimbre2
through8.Thesearethesameasfortimbre01.Formore
information,pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):
above.
Category
[Category Name]
Thisindicatesthecategory.
Pan
[RND, L001...C064...R127]
03(4): Menu Command
Thisspecifiesthepanofeachtimbre.
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducethepansettingof
theProgrammode.
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127
Right
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
Right
Pan (CC#10)
Pan (CC#10)
C064
C064
L032
L032
L001
L001
R096
R096
Center
Right
Center
Right
OSC1
Left
Commandonpage 101.
R127
R127
Left
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Left
Center
Right
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064
OSC2
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left
Center
Right
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinP8:
73
Combination mode
05(6)c: Arpeggiator Run A/B,

Timbre assign
05: ARPEGGIATOR A,
06: ARPEGGIATOR B
Arpeggiator Run A, B
05
Menu
05a
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)youchecked
herewillruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
05b
Whenthearpeggiatorison,thesecheckboxesletyouturnA
andBon/off.
05c
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP7:Arpeggiator/Drum
TrackpageArpeggiatorRunA,B.
Timbre assign
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthe
combination.Acombinationcanruntwoarpeggiators
simultaneously.
ArpeggiatorparameterscanbeeditedinP7:ARP/DT,but
certainmajorparameterscanbeeditedinthesepagesas
well.Youcanedittheseparametersinrealtime,forexample,
bychangingthearpeggiopatternwhileplayinginCombi
P0:Play.
YoucanalsousetheTEMPOknobandthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob,VELOCITYknob,SWINGknob,and
STEPknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
ThisindicatesthearpeggiatorAandBassignmentstatusfor
eachtimbre18.ThesesettingsaremadeinArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
05(6)d: Arpeggiator A (B)

Pat (Pattern)
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave
Resolution
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[ , , , , , , , ]
Sort
[Off, On]
Latch
[Off, On]
05(6)a: Combination Select, Tempo
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Bank, Combination Number & Name
Keyboard
[Off, On]
Tosavetheeditsyoumake,useWriteCombination.
Thesearethebank,number,andnameofthecurrent
Combination.Here,youcanalsoselectacombination.
Selectonpage 70.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Setthevariousparametersofthecombinationarpeggiator.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCOMBIP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)onpage 91.
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom73(4):Arpeggiator
A(B)Setup.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
05(6)b: ARP Controls
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLSknobs.
[GATE]
[64...+00...+63]
[VEL. (Velocity)]
[64...+00...+63]
[SWING]
[64...+00...+63]
seep.6,p.54
[STEP]
seep.6
74
05(6): Menu Command
[64...+00...+63]
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P0: Play 07: Tone Adjust
thedifferenttimbresasmuchasyoulike,withoutlosing
youredits.
07: Tone Adjust

07
Menu
07a
07b
07c
Auto Load (Auto Load PRG)
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsToneAdjust
settingswillbeloadedaswell.
Theparametersettingsassignedtotheslidersandswitches
inthedisplayandtheon/offsettingsassignedtothe
Absoluteparameterswillbeloaded.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchangeanyor
alloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired,includingboth
assignmentsandvalues.Allsucheditsarestoredinthe
Combination,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures
simultaneously:
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram.
YoucanusetheToneAdjustparameterstoeditthemost
importantprogramparameters.
ItletsyoumodifyProgramsforusewithinaspecific
Combinationincludingeverythingfromsubtletweaks
(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramaticchanges(suchas
selectingadifferentMultisample).Anychangesthatyou
makearestoredwiththeCombination,anddonotalter
theoriginalProgram.
EachofthesixteenTimbreshasitsownsetoftoneadjust
parameters.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,theToneAdjustsettingsofthe
replacementprogramwillnotbeloaded;theprogram
settingspriortoreplacementwillremain.

Control
Assignment
Value
Type Stored Value
Formoreinformation,see:
Absolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameteron
page 7
Control
[SW18, SL18]
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 7
Thisistheswitchorsliderinthedisplaythatisassignedto
ToneAdjustparameters.
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCson
page 8
Assignment
Thisisthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtotheswitch
orsliderinthedisplay.Youcanchangethisusingthe
Assignparameter,below.
InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaToneAdjust
andthensavetheresults,theProgramdataischangedjust
asifyoudeditedtheinternalparametersdirectly.Formore
information,pleaseseeSavingToneAdjustEditson
page 7.
InCombinationmode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare
storedwithintheCombination;theProgramitselfisnot
changed.ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgramsounds
inonespecificCombiwithoutaffectingthewaythatit
soundsinProgrammode,orinanyotherCombinationsor
Songs.
[List of Tone Adjust assignments]
Value
switchorslider.
Type
[Rel, Abs, Meta]
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatestohow
editstotheparameteraresaved.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameter
onpage 7.
07a: Combination Select, Tempo
Stored Value
Combination.Hereyoucanalsoselectacombination.
Selectonpage 70.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
07b: Timbre select, Selected parameter

information
Timbre select
Timbre
[116]
ThisselectsthetimbrethatwillbecontrolledviatheTone
Adjustparameters.Youcanswitchbackandforthbetween
Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwillrevertto
thisvalue.
07c: Tone Adjust

Here,youcanassignToneAdjustparameterstotheswitches
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanswitchesin
thedisplay.
75
Combination mode
theparametervalue:
Controls
REALTIMECONTROLSletsyouuseknobs[1][4]to
modifytheparametersofthecombinationortheeffects.You
canalsousetheseknobstocontrolthearpeggiators.When
youuseaknob,thedisplaywillshowthecontrollers
functionandvalue.UsetheSELECTbuttontochangethe
knobfunctions.
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
Assign
On/Off
InTONE,thefunctionsassignedtoknobs14arefixed.
Value
InUSER,youcanassignavarietyofmodulationfunctions
toknobs14.Toassignfunctions,usetheP1:Controllers
Setuppage(page 78).
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheswitchesinthe
display.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 9andTone
AdjustParametersonpage 10.
On Value
Realtime Controls
TheRealtimeControlsTONEknobfunctions(CUTOFFEG
RELEASE)arefixed.Youcanassignavarietyoffunctionsto
RealtimeControlsUSERknobs14(USER[1]USER[4]).
MIDIcontrolchangesareassignedforeachfunction.
MIDICC.
Switch Status
Mostofthesefunctionsadjust(scale)theparametersettings
ofthetimbreprograms.Unlessotherwisenoted,scaling
meansthattheparametersareattheirprogrammedvalues
whenthecontrollerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontroller
isat127.Foranotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagram
below.
[Off, On]
Sliders 18
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheslidersinthe
Assignments are exclusive

thenewslider.
ThiswillcontroltimbresontheglobalMIDIchannel.
CC parameter scaling
99
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
00
0
Value
slider.
07: Menu Command
64
127
CC Value
TONE [Cut Off]: Flt Fc (Cutoff)
[000...127]
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
TONE [RESONANCE]: Flt Reso (Resonance)

[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
TONE [EG INTENSITY]: Flt EG (Filter EG Intensity)
[000...127]
5ResetToneAdjustseep.103
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
MIDICC#79.
Commandonpage 101.
TONE [RELEASE]: EG Rel (EG Release) [000...127]

ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
USER [1][4]
[000...127]
Thesearethecurrentvaluesandassignedfunctions(MIDI
CC)fortheRealtimeControlsUSERknobs.
76
COMBI P0: Play Controls
IntheP1:ControllersControllersSetuppageyoucan
assignavarietyofmodulationfunctionstoRealtime
ControlsUSERknobs14.
messagesusuallyCCs.
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiocontrolletsyouusethefourknobstocontrolthe
twoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
pitchrange,andthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.
ARP [GATE]
[64...+00...+64]
(SeeGateonpage 54).
ARP [VELOCITY]
[64...+00...+64]
onpage 54).
ARP [SWINGH]
[64...+00...+64]
Swingonpage 54).
ARP [STEP]
[64...+00...+64]
Thisaffectsthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
77
Combination mode
COMBI P1: Controllers

11c: Realtime Controls Knob Assign
11: Controllers Setup

11
Menu
11a
11b
USER [1]
USER [2]
USER [3]
USER [4]
11c
Here,youcanassignthefunctionsperformedbySW1and
SW2,andbyknobs14whenRealtimeControlsUSERis
selected.
Note:ThePanelSwitchAssignsettingoftheprogram
assignedtoeachtimbrewillhavenoeffect.
11a: Combination, Tempo

Combination.
Selectonpage 70.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
11b: Panel Switch 1/2 Assign

SW (SW1 Assign)
off.
Note:Iftheon/offstatusofthefrontpanelSW1,SW2
switchesismemorizedwhenyousavethecombination.
Mode (SW1 Mode)
[Toggle, Momentary]
switch.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOffeach
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
SW2 (SW2 Assign)

Mode (SW2 Mode)

[Toggle, Momentary]
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthe
substitutionofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1
Mod.(CC#80).
78
Hereyoucanselectthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whentheSELECT
buttonhasselectedUSER(SeeRealtimeControlsKnobs1
4Assignmentsonpage 348)
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]

[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
11: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P2: EQ 21: EQ Trim T0108, 22: EQ Trim T0916
COMBI P2: EQ
21(2)c: Trim
21: EQ Trim T0108,

22: EQ Trim T0916

21
Menu
21a
21b
Auto Load Prog EQ
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsEQsettingswillbe
loadedaswell.
alloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsarestoredin
theCombination,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
21c
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothePrograms
EQinProgrammodewillnotaffecttheCombination.
Here,youcansetthesignallevelthatenterstheEQof
timbres18and916.
21(2)a: Combination Name, Tempo

Combination.
Selectonpage 70.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchthetimbresprogram,the
currentEQsettingswillbecleared,andthe3bandEQ
valuesspecifiedbytheprogramwillbeloaded
automatically.Normallyyouwillleavethischecked.The
timbresprogramcanbeswitchedbyusingProgramSelect
(Combi01(2)b)orbyreceivingaMIDIprogramchange.
Youarefreetoeditthe3bandEQsettingsthathavebeen
automaticallyloaded.Makeadjustmentsforeachtimbre
relativetothesettingsoftheprogram,andthensavethe
combination.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramsEQsettingswontbe
loaded.UsethisifyouvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,
andthenwantittostayunchangedwhileyoutryout
differentPrograms.
Bypass
21(2)b: Timbre Info

Select Timbre Info
Timbre Number
Timbre Category
[On, Off]
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypassisusefulforcomparingthe
resultsoftheEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim
[0099]
Selected Timbre Info:
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Notethat
thisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalentto6 dB,
25isthesameas12 dB,andsoon.
Thisareadisplaysinformationaboutthetimbreselectedfor
editingT:timbrenumber/programbank/number/name,
Ch:MIDIchannelnumber.
Timbre Number:
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Thevariousparameters
beloweachtimbrenumbermakesettingsforthe
correspondingtimbre.

Here,youcanmakesettingsfortimbres28and916.They
arethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,please
seeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
Timbre Category:
ThisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameoftheProgram
assignedtotheTimbre.
21(2): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
79
Combination mode
23: EQ Gain T0108,

24: EQ Gain T0916
23
Menu
23a
23b
23c
TheseparametersadjustthethreebandEQ(withsweepable
midrange)fortimbres18and916.

23(4)b: Timbre Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:EQTrimT0108,22:
EQTrimT0916onpage 79.
23(4)c: 3 Band Parametric EQ

High Gain [dB]
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Freq [Hz] (Mid Frequency)
[10010k]
Mid Gain [dB]
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
0.5 dB.
Low Gain [dB]
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.

midrange)fortimbres28and916.Theyarethesameas
fortimbre1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTimbre01
(TimbreNumber):above.
23(4): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
80
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) 31: MIDI T0108, 32: MIDI T0916
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters)

MIDI Channel
31: MIDI T0108,

32: MIDI T0916
[01...16, Gch]
SetstheMIDItransmit/receivechannelforeachtimbre.
Gch:Thetimbrewillusethechannelthathasbeenselected
astheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).
31
Menu
31a
31b
31c
WhenStatusisINT,MIDImessageswillbereceivedonthe
channelyouspecifyhere.Ifthissettingisthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel,theinternaltonegeneratorwillsound
accordingtotheinternalsettings.IfthisissettoEXTorEX2,
playingtheKROMEwilltransmitMIDImessagesonthe
MIDIchannelspecifiedhere.(Messageswillalsobe
transmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchannel.)
Bank Select (When Status = EX2) MSB [000...127]

Bank Select (When Status = EX2) LSB [000...127]
Here,youcanmakeMIDIsettingsfortimbres18and916.

31(2)b: Timbre Info
31(2)c: MIDI
Specifiesthebanknumberthatwillbetransmittedwhen
StatusissettoEX2.TheupperlineistheMSB,andthe
lowerlineistheLSB.ThissettinghasnoeffectifStatusis
otherthanEX2.

ThesearetheMIDIrelatedsettingsfortimbres28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
31(2): Menu Command
Status
[Off, INT, EXT, EX2]
ThissetswhethertheTimbrecontrolstheinternalsounds,or
externalMIDIdevices.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,youcanchoose
betweenusingtheinternalBankSelectnumbers(assetby
thefrontpanelbuttons),orusingcustomBankSelect
settingstomatchtheexternaldevice.
Commandonpage 101.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTimbre.Withthissetting,the
TimbresProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbe
transmitted.
33: OSC T0108,

34: OSC T0916
INT:Thetimbrewillsound,andwillalsosoundinresponse
toMIDImessagesfromanexternalMIDIdevice.MIDIdata
willnotbetransmitted.
EXT:Thetimbrewillnotsoundevenifitreceivesmessages
fromacontroller,butMIDIdatawillbetransmittedto
externaldevices.
EX2:UsethistoplayanexternalMIDIdevice,withcustom
setBankSelectviatheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)LSB
andMSBparameters,ontheMIDItaboftheTimbre
Parameterspage.Inallotherways,thisisthesameasEXT.
INT
33a
33
Menu
33b
33c
MIDI IN/
USB B
Tone
generator
EXT, EX2
MIDI OUT/
USB B
Thesesettingsspecifyhowtimbres18and916willbe
played.

33(4)b: Timbre Info
81
Combination mode
33(4)c: OSC
35: Pitch T0108,

36: Pitch T0916

Force OSC Mode
[PRG, Poly, MN, LGT]
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicVoiceAssignModesettingswillbeused.
35
Menu
35a
35b
35c
Poly:Thetimbrewillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
MN(Mono):Thetimbrewillplaymonophonically,
regardlessoftheProgramssettings.
LGT(Legato):Thetimbrewillsoundmonophonically,and
willplaylegatoaccordingtotheProgramsModesetting
(Prog11b).
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPrioritysetting
(Prog11b)willdeterminethepriorityofthenotethat
soundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes.
OSC Select
[BTH, OS1, OS2]
SpecifieswhetherthetimbresprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(Prog11a)isDouble
orDoubleDrums,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbythe
settingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.Programswillnotsoundif
OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Portamento
[PRG, Off, 001...127]
Makeportamentosettingsforeachtimbre.
PRG:Portamentowillbeappliedasspecifiedbythe
programsettings.
Off:Portamentowillbeoff,eveniftheoriginalprogram
settingsspecifiedPortamentotobeon.
001127:Portamentowillbeappliedwiththeportamento
timeyouspecifyhere,evenifitisturnedoffbytheprogram
settings.
IftheStatus(Combi31(2)c)issettoINT,CC#05
(portamentotime)andCC#65(portamentoswitch)
messageswillbereceivedandwillcontrolandchange
thesesettings.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05,portamento
timewillnotbereceived.)Thesemessageswillbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre
byMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c).

Hereyoucanmakevoiceassignmentsettingsfortimbres2
8and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeTimbre01(Timbre
Number):above.
33(4): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
82
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsfortimbres18
and916.

35(6)b: Timbre Info
35(6)c: Pitch
Transpose
[60+00+60]
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
WhenStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,thisparameter
willaffectthepitchessoundedbytheKROME.When
StatusisEXT,thisparameterwillaffectthenote
numbersoftheMIDInotemessagesthatare
transmitted.
Forexampleifyoumakesettingsof+04and+07
respectivelyfortwotimbresthataresettoEXT,playing
theCkeywilltransmitaCnotenumberontheglobal
MIDIchannel,andatthesametimewillalsotransmitE
andGnotenumbersontheMIDIchannelsofthose
timbres.
Detune (Use BPM Adjust in Menu)

[1200...+0000...+1200]
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinonecentunits.
+0000:Normalpitch.
Note:YoucanalsousetheDetuneBPMAdjustmenu
commandtoalteraloopstempoviadetuning.Sincethis
willalterthepitchoftheloopalongwiththetempo,its
generallysuitedonlytounpitchedpercussiveloops.
TransposeandDetunecanbecontrolledviaMIDIRPN
messages.Thewaythatthisworksdependsonwhether
ornottheTimbreusesaDrumProgram.
IftheTimbredoesnotuseaDrumProgramfor
example,ifitusesaSingleorDoubleProgramthen
MIDIRPNCoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,and
RPNFineTunewillcontrolDetune.
IftheTimbreusesaDrumProgram,MIDIRPNCoarse
TuneandFineTunewillbecombinedtocontrol
Detune.Theoverallrangeis1octaveforcoarsetune
andfinetunetogether.
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) 37: Scale T0108, 38: Scale T0916
Bend Range
[PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiesthemaximumamountofpitchchange(in
semitones)thatwilloccurwhenthepitchbenderis
operated.
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
TheMIDIRPNPitchBendChangemessagecanbe
receivedtocontrolthisandchangethesetting.
(Howeveritwillnotbereceivedifthisparameterisset
toPRG.)ThismessageisreceivedontheMIDIchannel
foreachtimbresetbyMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c).

Thesearethepitchrelatedsettingsfortimbres28and916.
Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.Formore
above.
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyType(Combis
Scale)(Combi37(8)c)willbeused.
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthescaleofeachtimbre28
and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.Formore
above.
Scale:
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthecombinationwilluse.For
moreinformation,pleasesee12d:Scaleonpage 15.
Type (Combis Scale)

[Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale15]
Selectsthescale.
Key
[CB]
Selectsthetonickeyoftheselectedscale.
Random
35(6): Menu Command
[07]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,thissettingwillaffect
thepitchproducedbytheKROME.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
4:DetuneBPMAdjustseep.103
Commandonpage 101.
37(8): Menu Command
37: Scale T0108,

38: Scale T0916
37
Menu
37a
Commandonpage 101.
37b
37c
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthescaleoftimbres18and
916.

37(8)b: Timbre Info
37(8)c: Scale
Use Programs Scale
[Off, On]
TimbrecanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(Prog1
2b).
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
83
Combination mode
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay

41: Key Zone T0108,
42: Key Zone T0916
(Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
41
Menu
41a
41(2)d:Keyboard Zones
Top Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
Top Slope
41b
41c
[00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,

12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
41d
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
belowthetopkey.
Thesesettingsspecifythekeyboardrangeinwhichtimbres
18and916willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeyparametersspecifytherangeofnotesin
whichtimbres18and916willsound,andthetop/bottom
slopeparametersspecifytherangeoverwhichtheoriginal
volumewillbereached.
KeySplit:Bysettingtimbresofdifferentsoundstoranges
thatdonotoverlap,youcanplaydifferentsoundsin
differentrangesofthekeyboard.
Layer:Bysettingtherangestooverlap,youcanplaytwoor
moresoundswithasinglenote.
PositionalCrossfade:Ifyousettheslopes(thegrayed
portion)tooverlap,thesoundswilloverlap,andthe
proportionoftheoverlapwillchangeaccordingtothe
keyboardlocation.
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
belowthetopkey.
Bottom Slope
[00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,

12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethe
bottomkey.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethe
bottomkey.
Bottom Key
41(2)a:Zone Map
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesinwhich
eachtimbrewillsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportion.
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
How volume will change according to keyboard location
Volume
41(2)b: Combination Name, Tempo

41(2)c: Timbre Info
Key
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Key
Top Key
Zone Map
Key zone display
Bottom Slope
Bottom Key
Top Slope
Velocity zone display
Top Key
Top
Velocity
Top
Slope
Timbre 1
Timbre 16
84
Bottom
Slope
C1
E1
G9
16
Timbre
Bottom
Velocity
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay 43: Vel Zone T0108, 44: Vel Zone T0916 (Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
akey(seeOGp.10).
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetopkey
ofthesametimbre.Norisitpossibleforthetopand
bottomslopestooverlap.
43(4)b: Combination Name, Tempo

43(4)c: Timbre Info
43(4)d: Velocity Zones
Thesearethekeyzonesettingsfortimbres28and916.
Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
Top Velocity
[001127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
41(2): Menu Command
Top Slope
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity.
Commandonpage 101.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
[000120]
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproachesthe
topvelocity.
43: Vel Zone T0108,

44: Vel Zone T0916
(Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
43
Menu
43a
Bottom Slope
[000120]
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottom
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebottom
velocity.
bottomvelocity.
Bottom Velocity
43b
43c
[001127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
43d

Volume
SetstheTop/BottomVelocityparameterstospecifythe
rangeofvelocitiesthatwillsoundforeachtimbre18and9
16,andsettheTop/BottomSlopeparameterstospecifythe
rangeoverwhichthevolumewillchange.
Velocityswitch:Ifyousetdifferentvelocityzonesfor
multipletimbressothattheydonotsoundtogether,youcan
playseparatesoundsbyvaryingplayingdynamics.
Velocity
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Velocity
Top Velocity
Layer:Ifyousettwoormoretimbrestovelocityzonesthat
overlap,thesoundswillbeheardtogether.
akey(seeOGp.10).
VelocityCrossfade:Ifthesloperanges(grayline)overlap,
differentsoundswillbesoundedtogether,andyourplaying
dynamicswilldeterminetheproportionofeachsound.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametimbre,norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
43(4)a: Zone Map

eachtimbrewillsound.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41(2)a:ZoneMapon
page 84.
Thesearethevelocityzonesettingsfortimbres28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
43(4): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
85
Combination mode
45: Delay T0108,

46: Delay T0916
Thesearethedelaytimesettingsfortimbres28and916.
45
Menu
45a
45b
45(6): Menu Command
45c
Commandonpage 101.
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhenthetimbres18
and916receiveanoteonuntilthesoundbegins.

45(6)b: Timbre Info
45(6)c: Delay
Delay Time [ms]
[00005000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbre
beginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
[Off, On]
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbre
producessoundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunits
relativetothe (Tempo).
On(checked):SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBase
NoteandTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytime
willbeequivalentto1000ms.
Off(unchecked):ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelay
Timesetting.
Base Note
Times
[ , , , , , , , , , ]
[01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthe
timbrebeginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevalue
relativetothe (Tempo)(Combi01(2)a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( )and
Timesto02,thattimbrewillsoundwithadelayofahalf
note( ).Evenifyouchange (Tempo)(Combi01(2)a),the
delaytimewillalwaysbeahalfnote( ).Ifyouusethese
parameterstospecifyadelayofahalfnote( ).Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
86
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter 51: <1> T0108, 52: <1> T0916
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter

ThesesettingsallowyoutoapplyfilterstotheMIDIdata
thatwillbetransmittedandreceivedbyeachtimbre116.
Forexampleeveniftwotimbresarebeingplayedbythe
sameMIDIchannel,youcanmakesettingssothatthe
damperpedalwillapplytoonebutnottheother.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
On(checked):Transmissionandreceptionorreception
(AfterTouch)ofMIDIdataisenabled.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,theeffectsofthechecked
itemswillbeappliedtothetimbresprogramwhenthe
controllersoftheKROMEareoperatedorwhenMIDIdata
isreceived.(EffectDynamicModulationisnotaffectedby
thesesettings.)
InthecaseofEXTorEX2,operatingacontrolleronthe
KROMEwilltransmitMIDIdataonthechannelofthat
timbre.MIDItransmission/receptionsettingsfortheentire
KROMEcanbemadeinMIDIFilter(Global12b).
TheMIDIFilter<4>and<5>containMIDIfiltersfor
assignablecontrollers(whosefunctioncanbesetbythe
user),andiftheseareassignedtoMIDIcontrolchanges,the
filtersettingswillaffectthosecontrolchanges.Inthiscase,if
thesamecontrolchangehasbeenassignedinMIDIFilter
pages<1><3>,thesettingsinMIDIFilterpages<1>through
<3>willtakepriority.Also,ifthesamecontrolchangeis
assignedtotwoormorecontrollersintheMIDIFilterpages
<4>and<5>,checkinganyoneofthemwillenablethat
controlchange.
Enable Damper
Enable Portamento SW
[Off, On]
[Off, On]

ThesearetheMIDIFilter1settingsfortimbres28and916.
51(2): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
Off(unchecked):TransmissionandreceptionofMIDIdata
isdisabled.
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
51: <1> T0108,

52: <1> T0916
51
Menu
51a
51b
51c

51(2)b: Timbre Info
51(2)c: MIDI Filter1

Enable Program Change
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbetransmittedandreceived.
Enable After Touch
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
87
Combination mode
53: <2> T0108,

54: <2> T0916
55: <3> T0108,

56: <3> T0916
53
Menu
53a
53b
55b
53c
55c

53(4)b: Timbre Info
55
Menu
55a
Here,youcanspecifywhethertheeffectofknobs14(when
theSELECTbuttonselectionisRealtimeControlsTONE)
willbetransmittedandreceived.TheMIDIcontrol
messagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtimeControls
TONEisselectedarefixed.

55(6)b: Timbre Info
Enable JS X as AMS
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339.
Enable JS+Y
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthejoystick,or
aRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
Enable JSY
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthejoystick,or
aRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
Enable Ribbon CC#16
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofaRealtimeControlsknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.

53(4): Menu Command

Enable Realtime ControlsCUTOFF
[Off, On]
EnablesordisablestransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
CC#74(theKROMEsfiltercutofffrequency).Thisis
assignedtoknob1whenRealtimeControlsTONEis
selected.
Enable Realtime ControlsRESONANCE [Off, On]

CC#71(theKROMEsfilterresonancelevel).Thisisassigned
toknob2whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
Enable Realtime ControlsEG INTENSITY [Off, On]

CC#79(theKROMEsfilterEGintensity).Thisisassignedto
knob3whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
Enable Realtime ControlsRELEASE
[Off, On]
CC#72(theKROMEsfilter/ampEGreleasetime).Thisis
assignedtoknob4whenRealtimeControlsTONEis
selected.

55(6): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
Commandonpage 101.
88
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter 57: <4> T0108, 58: <4> T0916
57: <4> T0108,

58: <4> T0916
59: <5> T0108,

510: <5> T0916
57
Menu
57a
57b
59a
59
Menu
59b
59c
57c
Here,youcanenableordisabletransmissionandreception
forthefunctionsofknobs14whentheSELECTbuttonis
settoRealtimeControlsUSER.UsetheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppagetoassignthefunctionsthatknobs1
4willperformwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.

59(10)b: Timbre Info

57(8)b: Timbre Info
Enable SW1
Enable SW2
ThesesettingsspecifywhetherSW1Mod(CC#80)andSW2
Mod(CC#81)willbetransmittedandreceivediftheyare
assignedtotheSW1andSW2buttons.
Enable Realtime Controls USER 1

[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Thesesettingsenableordisabletransmissionandreception
oftheMIDImessagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtime
ControlsUSERisselected.

57(8): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Note:IfPortamentoSW(CC#65)isassignedtoSW1orSW2,
theEnablePortamentoSWsettingontheMIDI<1>pagewill
takepriority.
Note:ThefunctionsofSW1andSW2areassignedontheP1:
ControllersSetuppage(seep.78).
Enable Foot Switch
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
SWITCHwillbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionis
assignedinGlobalP2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
Enable Foot Pedal
[Off, On]
PEDALwillbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionis
assignedinGlobalP2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
assigned.

59(10): Menu Command

Commandonpage 101.
89
Combination mode
511: <6> T0108,

512: <6> T0916
511a
511
Menu
511b
511a

511(12)b: Timbre Info

Enable Other Control Change Messages [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnotcovered
intheprecedingitemsMIDIFilterwillbetransmittedand
received.
Enable Waveform SysEx
[Off, On]
ThisenablesordisablesreceptionofMIDIsystemexclusive
messagesthatfreelyswitchthemultisampleusedbyan
oscillatorwhiletheprogramissounding.

Commandonpage 101.
90
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 71: Setup T0108, 72: Setup T0916
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)

Theseparametersspecifyhowthearpeggiatorwillfunction
withinthecombination.Twoarpeggiatorscanrun
simultaneously.
Channelparameterofanytimbre116assignedto
arpeggiatorAorB.
IfLocalControl(LocalControlOn,GlobalP1:11a)is
OFF,thekeyboardwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.The
arpeggiatorwillbetriggeredviaMIDIIN.TurnLocal
ControlOFFifyouhaverecordedonlythetriggernotes
onanexternalsequencer,andwishtoplaybackthe
externalsequencertotriggertheKROMEsarpeggiator.
Thisoffersavarietyofpossibilities,suchasapplying
separatearpeggiopatternstotwosoundsthathavebeen
assignedasakeyboardsplit,orusingvelocitytoswitch
betweentwoarpeggiopatterns.
Ifyouwanttorecordthenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatortoanexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionon
yourexternalsequencer.
71: Setup T0108,

72: Setup T0916
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,oruseanexternalsequencertorecord
arpeggionotedata.(Seepage 367)
71
Menu
71a
Example1)
71b
SettheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)oftimbres1and2
toGch,andsetStatus(Combi31(2)c)toINT.Assign
arpeggiatorAtotimbre1andarpeggiatorBtotimbre2,
andcheckArpeggiatorRunA,B(Combi05(6)a).
71c
WhentheARPbuttonisoff,timbres1and2willsound
simultaneously(layered)whenyouplaythekeyboard.
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Gch
Combination Name
Name,Tempoonpage 79.
(Tempo)
WhentheARPbuttonisturnedon,timbre1willbe
playedbyarpeggiatorA,andtimbre2willbeplayedby
arpeggiatorB.
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
71(2)b: Timbre Info

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectedTimbreInfoon
page 71.
71(2)c: Arpeggiator Assign,

Arpeggiator Run
Arpeggiator Assign
[Off, A, B]
AssignsarpeggiatorAorBtoeachtimbre18and916.
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiatorspecifiedfor
eachtimbrewilloperateaccordingtoArpeggiatorRunA,B
andthesesettings.
Off:Thearpeggiatorwillnotoperate.
A:ArpeggiatorAwilloperate.Usethesettingsinthe
ArpeggiatorApagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtoset
parameters.
B:ArpeggiatorBwilloperate.Usethesettingsinthe
ArpeggiatorBpagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtoset
parameters.
IftheStatus(Combi31(2)c)ofthetimbreisINT,each
timbre116willbesoundedbythenotedatagenerated
bytheassignedarpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)settingofthetimbre.Ifa
timbreissettoEXTorEX2,MIDInotedatawillbe
transmittedontheMIDIChannelofthattimbre.
Trigger
= Gch
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - A
Timbre 1
MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Pattern - A
Timbre 2
MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Pattern - B
Pattern - B
Example2)
TheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)oftimbres1,2,3,4,
and5aresetrespectivelytoGch,Gch,02,Gch,and03.
TheirStatus(Combi31(2)c)issetrespectivelytoINT,
Off,INT,Off,andINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotimbres
2and3,assignarpeggiatorBtotimbres4and5,and
checkArpeggiatorRunA,B(Combi05(6)a).
WhentheARPbuttonisoff,playingthekeyboardwill
soundonlytimbre1.(Timbres2and4arereceivingthe
Gch,buttheywillnotsoundsincetheirStatusisOff.)
WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiatorAwill
playtimbres2and3,andarpeggiatorBwill
independentlyplaytimbres4and5.(ArpeggiatorsAand
BaretriggeredbynotedatareceivedfromanyMIDI
channelofanassignedtimbre.However,inthisexample,
theyarebeingtriggeredfromtheGch.)
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,arpeggiatorAwillplay
timbres2and3,butonlytimbre3,whoseStatusisINT
willsoundfromthekeyboard.Similarly,arpeggiatorB
willplaytimbres4and5,butonlytimbre5,whoseSta
tusisINTwillsoundfromthekeyboard.
Inthisway,youcanmakesettingssothatatimbreis
silentwhenthearpeggiatorisoff,andsoundsonlywhen
thearpeggiatorison.
Thistypeofsettingisusedinpreloadedcombinations
whichsoundthedrumsonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Gch, Ch2
Trigger
= Gch, Ch3
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Off
Timbre 1
MIDI Ch=Gch
Status=INT
Timbre 2
MIDI Ch=Gch
Status=Off
Does not sound
Timbre 3
MIDI Ch=2ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Sounded by normal
keyboard playing
Timbre 4
MIDI Ch=Gch
Status=Off
Does not sound
Timbre 5
MIDI Ch=3ch
Status=INT
Pattern - B
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorA(orB)willbetriggered
(operated)byallMIDIchannelsspecifiedfortheMIDI
91
Combination mode
[Off, On]
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)checkedhere
willruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign.
71(2): Menu Command
73: Arpeggiator A,
74: Arpeggiator B
73
Menu
73a
73b
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
Commandonpage 101.

73(4)b: Arpeggiator-A(B) Setup

Pattern*
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave*
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution*
[ , , , , , , , ]
Gate
Velocity
[000...100%, Step]
[001...127, Key, Step]
Swing
[100...+100%]
Sort*
[Off, On]
Latch*
[Off, On]
Key Sync.*
[Off, On]
Keyboard*
[Off, On]
Theseparametersarethearpeggiatorsettingsforthe
combination.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT
*
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom05(6)d:
ArpeggiatorA(B).
73(4): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
92
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 75: ARP Scan Zone
75: ARP Scan Zone
77: Drum Track
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorsAandB.
75
Menu
75a
77
Menu
77a
75b
77b
75c
Here,youcanselectadrumtrackpatternandspecifyhowit
willsound.
75a: Combination Name, Tempo

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombinationSelecton
page 70.
Note:InCombinationmode(unlikeProgrammode)thereis
nodedicatedtimbreforthedrumtrack.Youcanassignthe
drumtrackprogramtobeanytimbre116.Thedrumtrack
programwillbeplayedwhenthedrumtracksMIDI
channelOutputmatchesthetimbresMIDIChannel.
InCombinationmode,thedrumtrackpatternsaretriggered
ontheGlobalMIDIchannel.
75b: Zone Map
MIDI transmission and reception for the drum

track
ThisshowstheScanZoneforeacharpeggiator,AandB.
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator A
Key zone of arpeggiator B

Key zone of arpeggiator A
C1
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator B
G9
InCombinationmode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits
andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:Ifyourecontrollingthetriggeringbyplayingthe
keyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobalMIDI
channel.
Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeach
combination.
75c: Scan Zone A/B
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyouve
specifiedforthedrumprogram.
A: , B:
Top Key
[C1...G9]
Bottom Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilltrigger
arpeggiatorA/B.TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,and
BottomKeyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Top Velocity
[001...127]
Bottom Velocity
[001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilltriggerarpeggiator
A/B.TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitiesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorA/B.
akey(seeOGp.10).
IfthetimbresStatusisEXTorEX2,thenotedataetc.ofthe
DrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Iflocalcontrol(LocalControlOnGlobalP1:11a)ison,
playingtheKROMEskeyboardwillnotmaketheinternal
soundgeneratorproducesound,norcanthekeyboard
triggerthearpeggiatorordrumtrack.However,theycanbe
triggeredbynoteonmessagesfromMIDIIN.
77a: Drum Pattern

Pattern
[Preset, User]
[(Preset): P000...P605, (User): U000...U999]
Preset/User No.
Contents
P000
Off
P000...P605
Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999
U000U999canbewritten.Patternsyoucreatein
Sequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns(seepage 188).
Shift
meansthattheinstrumentsofthedrumkitwillchange.
75: Menu Command
[24...+00...+24]
Commandonpage 101.
93
Combination mode
MIDI Channel
Output
[01...16, Gch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltransmittheMIDI
dataofthedrumpattern.Thedrumpatternwilltriggerthe
programofthetimbrethatissettothissameMIDIchannel.
Gch:Thedatawillbesenttothechannelspecifiedbythe
globalMIDIchannelMIDIChannelsetting(Global11a).
Whetherthepatterndatawillbeoutputtoanexternal
devicewilldependontheStatussettingofthetimbrethat
matchestheOutputMIDIchannel.
77b: Trigger
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillstart
accordingtotheSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff(LED
dark),thedrumpatternwillstop.
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,orwhenaMIDInoteonis
received,thedrumpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.
Sync
[Off, On]
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP73(4)c:ArpeggiatorA(B)SetupKeySyncto
specifywhetherthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningdrumpattern.
Latch
[Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherthedrumtrackwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard.
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig.
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboard(noteon).The
patternwillstopwhenyoureleasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillcontinuewhenyoureleasethekeyboard(note
off).ThepatternwillstopwhenyouturntheDRUM
TRACKbuttonoff(LEDdark).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom
Top
[C1...G9]
[C1...G9]
Velocity:
Bottom
Top
[001...127]
[001...127]
pattern.
94
77: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 81: Routing1 T0108, 82: Routing1 T0916
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect)

Youcanalsospecifythebusroutingfortheprogramused
byeachofthetimbres,116.Forinstance,youcan:
Example: Inserting a single IFX into multiple timbre
Sendtheoutputofatimbretoaninserteffect
FormoredetailsontheInsertEffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
81: Routing1 T0108,

82: Routing1 T0916
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and then inserting an IFX at the final stage
Example: Sharing a portion of a timbres IFX chain with another

timbre
81
Menu
81a
81b
81c
DKit:Thiscanbeselectedonlyifthetimbresprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrumsorDoubleDrums).
81d
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
timbres18and916willbesent.Youcanalsosetthesend
levelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
81(2)a: Routing Map

Thisshowsthestatusoftheinserteffects.
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(Bus(IFX/Output)
Select),thenameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,
chaining,andtheoutputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.
Thetypeofinserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechain
settingscanbeeditedinthe83:InsertFXSetuppage.
TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2(Global55b)settingsforeachkeyoftheselected
Dkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwanttoapplyan
individualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
type,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
81(2)b: Combination Name

81(2)c: Timbre Info
OtherIFX3
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumkitIFX
Patchmenucommand.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 104.
81(2)d: Routing
[DKit, L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
oscillator.
IFX15:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Off:ThetimbrewillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthe
programoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
timbresBus(IFX/Output)SelectandtheChaintoand
Chainsettings(Combi83b)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
95
Combination mode
Send1 (MFX1)
Send2 (MFX2)
[000...127]
[000...127]
Foreachtimbre,theseparameterssetthesendlevelto
mastereffects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus
(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX15are
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2aresetby
theSend1andSend2parametersoftheInsertFXSetup
page,afterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX15.
ControlchangeCC#93canbeusedtocontroltheSend1
level,andCC#91tocontroltheSend2,andmodifytheir
respectivesettings.Thesemessageswillbereceivedon
theMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbreintheP2:
MIDIchannelpage.
Theactualsendlevelsaredeterminedbymultiplying
thisvaluewiththesendlevelSend1andSend2(Prog
81d)foreachoscillatoroftheprogramselectedforthe
timbre.
81(2): Menu Command
MIDIchannel,usetheChparameterontheIFX15page
(Combi84a).
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4
IFX5
[000...193]
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Chain:
IFX1: Chain to
IFX2: Chain to
IFX3: Chain to
[IFX2...IFX5]
[IFX3...IFX5]
[IFX4...IFX5]
IFX1: Chain
IFX2: Chain
IFX3: Chain
IFX4: Chain
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Pan:#8:
[L000...C064...R127]
Bus:
5:DrumKitIFXPatchseep.104
Commandonpage 101.
Bus (Bus Select)

Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
[Off, L/R]
[Off, 1, 2]
Send1/2:
83: Insert FX Setup

83a
83
Menu
83b
Send1
Send2
[000...127]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetupon
page 59.
83: Menu Command
83a: Combination Name

83b: Insert Effect

Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
settings.Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoinandout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effectsound(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Fordetailedexplanationsoftheindividualeffects,please
seetheEffectGuideonpage 235.
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
page 59.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,youcanuseadifferent
MIDIchanneltomodulateeacheffect,ifdesired.This
includesthepostIFXPan:#8,Send1,andSend2settings,as
wellastheeffectsdynamicmodulation(Dmod).Tosetthe
96
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 84: IFX1
84: IFX1
81
4
Menu
81
4a
settings.
writtenacombination,orselectedanewCombination.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combissavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheCombination,the
EffectPresetsettingwillrevertto.
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthefive
inserteffects.UsethetabsatlefttoselectIFX1throughIFX5.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXSetup
page.Formoreinformation,pleasesee83:InsertFX
Setuponpage 96.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX1 Parameters
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheInsertFXSetuppage.

IFX1 On/Off
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
[Off, On]
Formoredetails,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX5)on
page 240.
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/off
settingintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Ch (Control Channel)
[Ch01...16, G ch, All-R]
ThisparameterspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillbeused
tocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod),pan
followingtheinserteffect(CC#8),Send1,andSend2.
ThechannelnumberofthetimbreroutedthroughthisIFX
willbefollowedbya*displayedattherightofCh0116.
IftwoortimbreswithdifferentMIDIchannelsettingsare
routedthroughthesameIFX,thisparameterspecifieswhich
ofthesechannelswillbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
84: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbeused
tocontroltheeffect.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.
AllR(AllRouted):Thechannelofanytimbrerouted
throughthiseffectcanbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
(Channelsofeachroutedtimbrewillbeindicatedby*.)
Drum Kits and the MIDI Control Channel

IfaTimbreisusingaDrumKit,andtheTimbresBus(IFX/
Output)Select(Combi81(2)d)isDKit,thiseffectsthe
MIDIControlChannelaswell.Inthiscase,theTimbres
MIDIchannelwillbeusedtocontrolanyeffectwhoseChis
settoAllR,regardlessoftheBus(IFX/Output)Select
(Global55b)settingsorthesettingsoftheDrumkitIFX
Patchmenucommand.
85: IFX2, 86: IFX3, 87: IFX4,

88: IFX5
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects25
Formoreinformation,pleasesee84:IFX1above.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
presets.
Combination,Sequencer).
storedwiththeCombiyoudontneedtostorethemasan
favoritesettings.
aparticularCombination,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
97
Combination mode
89: FX Control T0108,

810: FX Control T0916
89
Menu
89a
89b
89c
89d
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutputbus,and
effectcontrolbusfortimbres18and916.
89(10)a: Routing Map,

89(10)b: Combination Name,
89(10)c: Timbre Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee81:Routing1T0108,8
2:Routing1T0916onpage 95.
89(10)d: Routing2
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
oscillator.Thisisthesameparameterasinthe81:IFX
Routing1T0108andT0916pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(IFX/Output)Select
onpage 95.
FX Control Bus
[Off, 1, 2]
SendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
page 238.
Commandonpage 101.
98
COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 91: Routing
COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO)

Here,youcanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsandthe
totaleffect.Forinstance,youcan:
Routeasoundtothemastereffectsandthetotaleffect
Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotaleffect
91c: TFX
TFX:
TFX
TFX On/Off
page 235.
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP9:MFX/TFX/LFO
(Master/TotalEffect/LFO)onpage 61.
91: Routing
91
Menu
91a
91d: Master Volume

Master Volume
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91c:MasterVolumeon
page 62.
91b
V
91c
91d
91: Menu Command
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffects1,2and
totaleffect,andturnthemon/off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffect
isinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.For
moreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingonpage 61.
Commandonpage 101.
92: MFX1
91a: Combination Name

Combination.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:
CombinationSelectonpage 70.
92
Menu
92a
91b: MFX1, 2
MFX1:
MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
Return 1
[000...193]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouselected
forMFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
MFX2:
MFX2
MFX2 On/Off
Return 2
[000...171]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
92a: MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/
offsettingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Chain:
Chain On/Off
Chain Direction
Chain Level
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
[Off, On]
[MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
[Ch01...16, G ch]
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
forcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
WithEffectPresets,youcaneasilystoreandrecallallofthe
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16user
presetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritable
factorypresets.
99
Combination mode
Combination,Sequence).
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostorethemas
anEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
95: Common FX LFO

95
Menu
95a
95b
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheP9:MFX/TFX/
LFORoutingpage.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
settings.
writtenaCombination,orselectedanewCombination.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combinationssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
theydontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.If
youselectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheCombination,
theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
MFX1 Parameters
youchoseintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
92: Menu Command
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronizeLFO
basedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
LFOs.
95a: Common FX LFO1

Ctrl Ch (Control Channel)
[Ch01...Ch16, G ch]
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.Thisisthedefault.
Sync (Reset)
[Off, On]
Frequency
[0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
MIDI/Tempo Sync
[Off, On]
BPM
[MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note
[ , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Times
[01...32]
Commandonpage 101.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.For
moreinformation,pleasesee95:CommonFXLFOon
page 100.
93: MFX2, 94: TFX
95b: Common FX LFO2
andtheTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usethe
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFXLFO1.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFXisthesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1above.
95: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
100
Combination: Menu Command Write Combination
Combination: Menu Command

ENTER + 09: shortcuts for menu commands
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,whichprovide
accesstodifferentutilities,commands,andoptions,
dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon.Youcanusethe
menucommandsentirelyfromthetouchscreen,by
pressingthemenubuttonintheupperrighthandcornerof
thescreenandthenselectinganoptionfromthemenuthat
appears.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownuniquemenu
commands,themenusarestandardizedasmuchas
possible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthefirst
menuiteminProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationbyusinga
shortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenuitems:
1. HolddowntheENTERbutton.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadtoselect
thedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
IfyouuseCategory,orSubCategorytospecifyacategory
forthecombinationyouarewriting,youwillbeableto
selectthatcombinationbyitscategoryorsubcategoryin
CombiP0:Play.
ThenamesofthecombinationcategoriescanbeeditedinP4:
CategoryCombinationMainandCombinationSubpage.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1forthe
second,andsoon.
Exclusive Solo
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthecommand
callsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappearonthedisplay,
andyoucanproceedjustasifyoudselectedthecommand
fromthetouchscreen.
ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinCombination
mode.WhenExclusiveSoloisOn,onlyoneTimbreis
soloedatatime;whenitisOff,multipleTimbrescanbe
soloedtogether.
astheCancelbutton.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeExclusiveSoloon
page 64.
Auto Setup Song
Thiscommandautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofthe
programorcombinationtoasong,andenablestherecord
standbystatus(SeeTip:AutoSongSetuponpage 70.).
Copy from Program
Write Combination
ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinCombination
mode.ItcopiesEffectssettingsfromaselectedProgramto
thecurrentCombination.ThisletstheProgramsoundthe
sameasitdidinProgrammode.
ThiscommandwritesaneditedCombinationintothe
KROMEinternalmemory.Itisavailableoneverypagein
Combinationmode.
Thisletsyou:
Saveyouredits
RenametheCombination
AssigntheCombinationtoaCategory
MarktheCombinationasaFavorite
CopytheCombinationtoadifferentBankandnumber
BesuretoWriteanyCombinationthatyouwishtokeep.If
youturnoffthepower,orselectanotherCombination
beforewritinganeditedCombination,itcannotbe
recovered.
1. UseProgramtoselectthecopysourceprogram.
2. SelecttheIFXsused,MFXs,andTFXoptionstospecify
which,ifany,oftheProgramseffectssettingstocopy.
IFXs:Thesettingsofallinserteffectsettings(thecontentsof
theInsertFXsetuppageandtheIFX15effectparameters)
ofthecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysourceprogram
willbecopied.
TFX:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysourceprogramwill
becopied.
101
Combination mode
AbouttheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Combi81(2)d,83b)
setting
Copy Tone Adjust
RegardlessoftheIFXsused,MFXs,andTFXsettings,will
besettoDKitifthecopysourceprogramsUseDKit
Settingischecked.Inconjunctionwiththis,theDrumKit
IFXPatchsettingwillberesettothedefaultsetting.
ThiscommandreplacestheToneAdjustsettingsofthe
selectedTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack(Sequencer
mode)withthoseofanyotherProgram,Timbre,orTrack.
IfIFXsischecked,theBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.Ifthecopy
destinationtimbreBus(IFX/Output)Selectwassetto
IFX1IFX5,itwillautomaticallybesettoL/R.Ifyoucheck
IFXAllused,theroutingwillbeautomaticallysetto
matchthecopysourceprogram.
IfIFXsusedisunchecked,thenthecopysourceBus(IFX/
Output)Selectsettingwillbeignored.oriftheBus(IFX/
Output)Selectofthecopysourceprogramandcopy
destinationtimbreissettoIFX1IFX5,itwill
automaticallybesettoL/R.
3. IfyoucheckArp,theProgramsarpeggiatorsettings
willalsobecopied.
IfthisisOn(checked),thearpeggiatorsettingsofthecopy
sourceprogramwillbecopiedtotheArpyouspecifyin
step8,andthatarpeggiatorsArpeggiatorRunsettingwill
beturnedonandassignedtothecopydestinationtimbre
(ArpeggiatorAssign).
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
(Sequencermode)whoseToneAdjustsettingsyou
wanttoreplace.
Foratimbre,accesstheCombiP0:PlayToneAdjustpage,
andselecttheTimbre.
Foratrack,accesstheSeqP02:Play/RECToneAdjust
page,andselecttheTrack.
2. SelectCopyToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
4. IfyoucheckwithDrumTrack,theDrumTrackPat
ternsettingsofthecopysourceprogramwillalsobe
copied.
IfthisisOn(checked),theDrumTrackPatternsettingsof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopiedtotheDrum
Trackyouspecifyinstep9.
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedfortheDrumTrackcopy
destinationtimbrewillbeused.
5. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestinationtimbre.
Theparametersforeachtimbrewillbeinitialized.Thecopy
sourceprogramwillbeassignedtoProgram(see01(2)b:
ProgramSelectonpage 72).
TheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)settingwillnot
changeifArpischecked.IfArpisunchecked,MIDI
ChannelwillbeautomaticallysettoGch.
TheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)(Combi31(2)c)
settingwillnotchange.
TheStatus(Combi31(2)c)settingwillautomaticallybe
settoINT.
TheP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetupsettingsof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.
6. UsetheArpfieldtoselectthecopydestination
arpeggiator;eitherA,B,C,orD.
7. UsetheDrumTracktospecifythedestinationtimbre
towhichthedrumtrackprogramwillbecopied.
102
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheProgram,Combination,
orSongfromwhichtocopy.
YoucanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonstoselectthe
desiredbank.
4. IfyouveselectedaCombinationorSong,selectaspe
cificTimbreorTrackaswell.
5. ChooseeitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytoselectthe
ToneAdjustparametersthatyouwanttocopy.
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
assignmentsandvalues.
AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheToneAdjust
parameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Combination: Menu Command Reset Tone Adjust
Reset Tone Adjust
Copy Arpeggiator
ResetToneAdjustisavailableontheToneAdjusttabofthe
playpage.
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheARPSetupT0108
ScanZonetabsoftheARP/DTpage.
ThiscommandaffectsonlytheselectedTimbreorTrack,as
opposedtotheentireCombinationorSong.Itresetsthe
ToneAdjustsettingsforalloftheTrack/Timbres,Switches,
andSliderstotheirdefaultvalues.
Thiscommandcancopyarpeggiatorsettingsfromanother
locationtothecurrentCombi.
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
(Sequencermode)toreset.
Foratimbre,accesstheCombiP0:PlayToneAdjustpage,
andselecttheTimbre.
Foratrack,accesstheSeqP02:Play/RECToneAdjust
page,andselecttheTrack.
2. SelectResetToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
1. InFrom,selectthesource(mode,bank,number)ofthe
arpeggiatoryouwishtocopy.
IfyouarecopyingfromaCombinationorSong,selecteither
AorB,ifyouwishtocopysettingsfromonlyone
arpeggiator,orselectA&Bifyouwishtocopythesettingsof
botharpeggiators.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromaProgram,orarecopying
eitherAorBfromaCombination,orSong,selecteither
AorBastheTocopydestination.
Detune BPM Adjust

DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonthePitchtabofthe
TimbreParameterspage.
3. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheToneAdjustparam
eterswillbereset.
AllOff:AllparameterswillberesettoOff.
DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothedefault
settingsforthecorrespondingprogramtype.
Copy Drum Track

Thiscommandcopiesthedrumtracksettingsofthe
specifiedProgram,Combination,orSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyDrumTrackon
page 65.
Thiscommandchangesaloopstempobychangingthe
TimbresDetuneparameter.Themultisampledataitselfis
notaltered.Sincethisaltersthepitchoftheloopalongwith
thetempo,itsgenerallyintendedforunpitchedpercussive
loops.
Note:UsingDetuneBPMAdjustwilloverwriteany
previousDetunesettings.
1. GotothePitchtaboftheTimbreParameterspage.
2. SelecttheDetuneparameterforthedesiredTimbre.
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonlywhentheDetune
parameterhasbeenselected.Otherwise,themenuselection
willbegrayedout.

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEraseDrumTrack
Patternonpage 66.
3. InFrom,specifytheloopsoriginalBPMvalue.
IgnoreanypreviouschangesfromusingDetuneBPM
adjust.
4. InTo,specifythedesiredBPMvalue.
TheappropriateDetunevaluewillbecalculated
automaticallyfromthesetwovalues.
Forexample,ifyousetFromto60bpmandToto120bpm,
Detunewillbesetto+1200(oneoctaveup).
Note:Sincethiscommanddoesnotaffectthemultisample
dataitself,andalwaysoverwritesthepreviousDetune
amount,usingitrepeatedlyhasnocumulativeeffect.
103
Combination mode
Copy Insert Effect
Swap MFX/TFX
pages.
ThiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromProgram,
Combination,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CopyInsertEffectonpage 66.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXonpage 67.
Note:TheslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedbytheCh
parameterontheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pages,willnotbe
copied.
parameterontheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1andTFXpage,
willnotbecopied.
Swap Insert Effect
Write FX Preset
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffecton
page 67.
parameterontheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pages,willnotbe
swapped.
DrumKit IFX Patch

ThispatchestheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsforeach
keyofadrumkit,temporarilychangingtheinserteffect
connectiondestinations.
Youcanexecutethiscommandiftheprogramassignedto
thetimbreisadrumprogramandBus(IFX/Output)Select
issettoDKit.TheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsetting(Global
55b)ofeachkeyinthedrumkitmustbesettooneofIFX1
5.
1. IntheRouting1pageorRouting2page,selectthetim
breforwhichyouwanttomakesettings.(Selectatim
breparameterorTimbreNumber.)
2. SelectDrumKitIFXPatchtoopenthedialogbox.
3. IntheDrumKitIFXpopup,selecttheoutputbusto
whichyouwanttopatchthesignal:aninserteffector
L/RorOff.
Note:Torestoretheconditionofthedrumkit,execute
IFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,
IFX5IFX5(seepage 95).
Copy MFX/TFX
pages.
ThiscommandcopieseffectsettingsfromProgram,
Combination,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CopyMFX/TFXonpage 67.
parameterontheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1andTFXpage,
willnotbecopied.
104
ThiscommandsavestheeditedeffectintotheKROMEs
internalmemory.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 67.
Sequencer mode
An overview of Sequencer mode
SequencerModeletsyourecordandplaybackMIDIdataon
sixteenMIDItracksandonemastertrack(containingtempo
data,etc.),usingtheinternalsoundgeneratororexternal
soundmodules.
Thedualarpeggiator,drumtrackfunction,RPPRfunction;
thesophisticatedeffects,controllers,andthenumerous
otherfunctionsoftheKROMEcanbeusedtogethertogive
youawiderangeofpossibilitiesformusicproductionor
liveperformance.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode
settings,thesongsyouverecorded,thecuelist,andthe
userpatterndatawilldisappear.Ifyouneedtokeep
thisdata,youmustsaveittoanSDcardoradatafiler
(viaMIDIDataDump)beforepoweringoff.
Ifyouwishtosavetheprograms,trackparameters,and
effects,settingsetc.selectedforasongasatemplate
song,usethemenucommandSaveTemplateSong.
WhenyouinitiallypoweruptheKROME,itwillnot
containanycuelistandsongdata,soifyouwishto
playbackasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload
data(SeeLoadPreload/DemoDataonpage 216.).
MIDI sequencer
Thesequencercanrecordamaximumof210,000MIDI
events,upto128songs,andasmanyas999measuresper
song.
Upto20cuelistscanbecreated.
Acuelistisanarrangementofupto99songsthatwillbe
playedasachain.Youcanspecifythenumberoftimes
thateachsongwillrepeat.Acuelistcanalsobeconverted
intoasinglesong.
Timingresolutionisamaximumof/480.
TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata,anda
mastertrackthatcontrolsthetimesignatureandtempo.
Thearpeggiatorcanbeusedduringplaybackor
recording.
YoucanperformorrecordusingtheDrumTrack
function.
TheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording)functioncan
beusedduringplaybackorrecording.
AthreebandEQisprovidedoneachMIDItrack.
Foreachsong,youcanusefivestereoinserteffects,two
stereomastereffects,andonestereototaleffect.
Sixteendifferenttemplatesongsarebuiltin,andcontain
programandeffectsettingssuitableforvariousmusical
styles.Uptosixteenoriginaltemplatesthatyoucreatecan
besavedasusertemplatesongs.
Atrackplayloopfunctionletsyouloopspecified
measuresindependentlyforeachtrack.
Presetpatternsidealfordrumsarebuiltin.Inaddition,
youcancreateupto100userpatternsforeachsong.
Thesepatternscanbeusedasmusicaldatawithinasong,
orcanbeplayedbythedrumtrackorthedrumtrack
and/orRPPRfunction.
MIDI recording features

Variousmethodsofrecordingaresupported,including
realtimerecording,inwhichyourperformanceonthe
keyboardandcontrollers(includingMIDIcontrolevents)
isrecordedasyouplay,andsteprecording,inwhichthe
timing,length,andvelocityofeachnotecanbespecified
inthedisplayasyouinputthepitchesfromthekeyboard.
Themusicaldataandcontroleventsthatyourecorded
canbeeditedinvariousways(includingeventediting
andmanyothereditcommands).
MIDISystemExclusive(SysEx)messagescanberecorded
andplayedback.SysExmessagesreceivedfroman
externalMIDIdeviceorparameterchangesproducedby
editingtrackparametersoreffectparameterscanbe
recordedinrealtimeonanydesiredtrack.
Parameter-related features
WhentheStatusofatrackissettoINTorBTH,an
externalsequencercanbeusedtoplaytheKROMEasa
multitimbraltonegenerator.WhentheStatusofatrack
issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2,thesequencerofKROMEcan
playexternaltonegenerators.
ToneAdjustparametersletyoumaketemporary
adjustmentstothesoundoftheprogramusedbyatrack,
whileleavingtheoriginalprogramunchanged.While
creatingasong,youcanusethiscapabilitytomake
changesinrealtimeby(forexample)softeningthetoneof
thebasssoundorsharpeningtheattackofthestrings
withouthavingtoreturntoProgrammodetoeditthe
programitself.
KROMEsAMS(AlternateModulation)capabilitylets
youusecontrolchangesforRealtimeControlsofthe
parametersoftheprogramsusedinaprogram.ItsMIDI
SyncabilitiesletyousynchronizetheLFOspeedto
changesinthetempo.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)functionalityletsyou
controleffectparametersinrealtime.Youcanalsouse
MIDISynctosynchronizetheLFOspeedordelaytimeto
changesinthetempo.
TheMIDIclockmastercanbesettoInternal,External,or
Auto,allowingsynchronizedperformancewithan
externalMIDIdevice.
Editing and operation features

TheAutoSongSetupfunctionletsyouinstantlysetup
programorcombinationsettingsofProgrammodeor
Combinationmodeasasong,sothatyoucanstart
recordingsimplybypressingtheSTART/STOP(
)
button.SinceperformancesusingtheDrumTrack
functionorArpeggiatorinProgramorCombination
modeareseamlesslyintegratedwithsongproduction,
anyinspirationorideasforphrasesandsongsthatoccur
toyouwhileplayingcanbeimmediatelybeturnedintoa
song.
ProgramandCombinationsettingscanbecopiedtoa
song.
Sequencerdatasuchasasongthatyoucreatecanbe
savedintheKROMEsnativeformat,ortransmittedasa
MIDIdatadump.
AsongyoucreatedcanbeconvertedintoSMF(Standard
MIDIFile)data.SMFsongscanalsobeloaded.
ThePlay/Rec/MuteandSoloOn/Offbuttonsletyou
instantlyplay/muteanydesiredtrackonthefly.
YoucanrewindorfastforwardMIDITrackswhile
listeningtothesound.
105
Sequencer mode
Youcanassignnamesnotonlytothesong,butalsoto
eachpatternandtrack.
TheLOCATEbuttonletsyoumovequicklytoadesired
location.
Youcanconvertuserpatterndataforuseinthedrum
track.Theconvertedpatterncanbeusedasadrumtrack
patternineachmode.Thisdatawillremainevenafterthe
poweristurnedoff(unlikeuserpatternsinSequencer
mode).
Youcandragwithinthedisplaytospecifyarangeof
measures,ortomove,copy,ordelete.Thisletsyoueditin
amoreintuitiveway(TrackViewediting).
Inthepianorollscreen,youcannoweditdatasuchas
note,velocity,andcontrolchange.Byselectinganevent
anddraggingityoucanmodifythepitchortiming,delete
it,oraddanewevent(PianoRollediting).
YoucaneditMIDIsystemexclusivedata.
Noteonvelocityvaluesareshowninrealtimeusinga
meter.Thisisaconvenientwaytoverifythetimbreor
trackthatiscurrentlysounding.
Setup parameters & Musical data

EachsongconsistsofMIDItracks116,amastertrack,
varioussongparameterssuchasthesongname,settingsfor
thearpeggiator,drumtrackfunction,effectsettings,RPPR
functionparameters,and100userpatterns.
Upto128suchsongscanbecreatedintheKROME.
MIDItracks116eachconsistoftrackparametersthat
specifythestartingstateofthetrack,andplaybackdata.
Themastertrackconsistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata.
MIDI tracks 116

Setup parameters
Bank/ProgramNo.*,Play/Rec/Mute,Pan*,Volume*
FordetailsonControlChangemessagesandRPN,please
seeControlchangeonpage 361,andUsingRPN
(RegisteredParameterNumbers)onpage 365.
FordetailsonMIDISystemExclusivemessages,please
seeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 191.
The Global mode SEQ Mode setting

InSequencermode,youwillnormallyusetheinternal
sequencerasthemasterthatcontrolstheinternalsound
generatororexternalMIDIsoundmodules.However,you
canalsousetheKROMEasamultitimbralsoundmodule
thatcansimultaneouslyplaymultipletracksofperformance
datafromanexternalMIDIsequencer.(Normally,youlluse
CombinationmodeifyouwanttousetheKROMEasa
masterkeyboard.)
YoucanswitchtheKROMEssettingasappropriateforthese
twopurposes.ThissettingismadeinGlobalP1:MIDI
MIDIBasicpageSEQModeTrackMIDIOut.
forMasteristheappropriatesettingifyouwanttousethe
KROMEsinternalsequencertocontrolanexternalsound
module,orusetheKROMEinSequencermodeasamaster
keyboard.Inthiscasewhenyouswitchsongsonthe
KROME,trackswhoseStatusissettoEXTorBTHcan
transmitMIDImessagessuchasprogramchangestosetup
yourexternalMIDIsoundmodule.
forExternalSequenceristheappropriatesettingifyou
wanttousetheKROMEasamultitimbralsoundmodule
foryourexternalsequencer.Whenyouswitchsongsonthe
KROME,MIDImessagessuchasprogramchangeswillnot
betransmitted(bytrackswhoseStatusisEXTorBTH).This
ensuresthatechobackfromyourexternalMIDIsequencer
willnotcauseKROMEtracksofthecorrespondingMIDI
channeltoswitchtheirprogram,pan,orvolumesettings.
Auto Song Setup
TrackPlayLoop,LoopStartMeasure,LoopEndMeasure,
PlayIntro,EQ(Bypass,LowGain,MidFrequency,Mid
Gain,HighGain)Status,MIDIChannel,BankSelect(When
Status=EX2),ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento*,
Transpose**,Detune**,BendRange**,UseProgramsScale,
Delay(Mode,Time,BaseNote,Times),MIDIFilter,
KeyboardZone,VelocityZone,TrackName,Bus(IFX/
Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1(MFX1)*,
Send2(MFX2)*,DrumKitIFXPatch
TheAutoSongSetupfunctioncopiesthesettingsofa
programorcombinationtoasong,andputsyouinrecord
readymode.ThenyoucansimplypresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobeginrecordingimmediately.Thislets
youseamlesslymovefromplayingaprogramor
combinationtoproducingasong.Forexample,ifyouve
beenusingthedrumtrackorarpeggiatorandhavecomeup
withaphraseoranidea,thisfunctionletsyoueasilyturn
yourinspirationintoasong.
Musical data
NoteOn/Off
ProgramChange(includingBankSelect)
PitchBend
AfterTouch
ControlChange
PatternNo.
ExclusiveMessage
Procedure (example: Combination mode)

1. EnterCombinationmode.
Master track
Setup parameters/Musical data
Timesignature*,Tempo*
2. InP0:Playpage,selectthedesiredcombinationand
edittheArpeggiatoretc.asdesired.
Note:Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstateofthecombination,
usetheWriteCombinationmenucommands.
3. PresstheREC()button.Alternatively,selectthepage
menucommandAutoSongSetup.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
* Whenyouchangethesettingduringrealtimerecording,
thiswillberecordedasmusicaldata(Programchange
andControlchangemessages).Thisallowsthestarting
settingstobemodifiedduringtheplayback.
** Musicaldata(MIDIRPNdata)canbeusedtochangethe
startingsettingsduringplayback.
Otherparameters:Youcanadjustparametersduring
realtimerecordingandrecordthesechangesasMIDI
SystemExclusivemessages.Thismeansthatthesettings
atthestartofplaybackcanchangeasthesongpro
gresses.
4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe
REC()buttonortheOKbutton.Ifyoudecidenotto
execute,presstheCancelbutton.
YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,andthe
settingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtothesong.
Thefirstunusedsongwillbethecopydestinationsong.
106
An overview of Sequencer mode
Contents automatically copied from a combination

Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyouexecute
themenucommandCopyFromCombiwiththefollowing
settingsinthedialogbox.(seep.166)
IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked
AutoAdjustArpsettingforMultiRECchecked
Contents automatically copied from a program

Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyouexecute
themenucommandCopyFromProgramwiththefollowing
settingsinthedialogbox.(seep.101)
IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked
Arpchecked
TosettoTrack01
ArpsettoA
withDrumTrackchecked
To:DrumTracksettoTrack10
CheckRecordingSetupMultiREC
SetthePlay/Rec/MutesettingtoRECfortracks01and10
(seep.112).
5. TheKROMEwillautomaticallyenterrecordready
mode,andthemetronomewillsoundaccordingtothe
Metronomesetting(Seq08c).
6. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobeginreal
timerecording.Tostoprecording,presstheSTART/
STOP(
)buttononceagain.
The Compare function

Whenyouperformrealtimerecording,steprecording,or
trackediting,thisfunctionallowsyoutomakebeforeand
aftercomparisons.
IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPAREbuttonislit,
theswitchwillgodark.Thisnowbecomesthemusicaldata
thatwillbeselectedwhentheCOMPAREbuttonisdark.
Operations for which Compare is available

Ingeneral,trackandpatterneventdatacannotbereturned
toitsoriginalstate.
Comparingsongparametersispossibleonlyduringsong
editing(whenexecutingamenucommand).
RecordingtoaMIDItrack
TrackEdit
AllcommandsexceptforthemenucommandsMemory
Status,ExclusiveSolo,FF/REWSpeedandSetLocation
oftheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpage.
Recordingtoapattern
PatternEdit
AllcommandsexceptforthemenucommandsMemory
Status,ExclusiveSolo,ConverttoDrumTrkPattern,
EraseDrumTrackPattern,andFF/REWSpeedofthe
P10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
SongEdit
P0P5pages:menucommandsDeleteSongandCopy
FromSong
TheprogramwillnotbeaffectedbytheCompare,and
willnotreturntoitspriorstate.
Operations for which Compare is not available

Editingsongparameters
Menucommandsotherthanthoselistedunder
OperationsforwhichCompareisavailableabove.
107
Sequencer mode
SEQ Page Select

Youcanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesin
Sequencermode.
Page
EDIT
Thepageshowningreyisthepageselectedjustpriorto
pressingthePAGEbutton.
PLAY
1. PresstheSEQbutton,andthenpresstheMENUbutton
toaccessPageSelect.
P0:Play/REC
P1:Controllers
SW1,2,andknobsettings.(seep.122)
P2:EQ
EQsettingsforeachtrack.(seep.141)
P3:TrackParam
Variousparametersettingsforeachtrack
(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,Pitch
setting,etc.)(seep.125)
P4:Zone/Delay
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(seep.129)
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.(seep.131)
P5:MIDIFilter
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(see
p.133)
P6:TrackEdit
Steprecording.
Pianorolledit.
Eventrecording.
Copy,delete,andothertrackediting.(see
p.137)
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
P8:Routing/IFX
settings.(sseep.148)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
settings.(seep.152)
p.152)
P10:Pattern/
RPPR
Patternrecordingandediting.(seep.155
RPPRsettings.(seep.158)
Convertingapatterntoadrumtrack
pattern.(seep.188)
P11:CueList
Cuelistsettings.
Consecutiveplaybackofmultiplesongs.
Convertingtoasong.(seep.160)
PATTERN&CUE
PressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutotheP01:Play/
RECpage.IfapageotherthantheProgramT0108page
isselected,pressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutothe
ProgramT0108page.
EFFECT
Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:TrackParam
page,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumeric
key3.
ARP&DRUMTRACK

HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressoneofthe
numerickeys,09,tospecifyapagenumberandtoaccess
thecorrespondingpage.
108
Main content
Songselection,playback,andrecording.
(seep.109)
Programselectionforeachtrack.(see
p.111)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
track.(seep.113)
ToneAdjustediting.(seep.115)
Recordingmethodselection.(seep.116)
Trackplaybackloopsettings.(seep.119)
SEQ P0: Play/REC 01: Program T0108, 02: Program T0916
SEQ P0: Play/REC

Meter
01: Program T0108,

02: Program T0916
[**/**, 1/416/4, 1/8...16/8, 1/16...16/16]
Thisisthetimesignatureatthecurrentlocationofthesong.
Thetimesignaturecanbechangedateachmeasure.
01
Menu
01a
**/**:ThiswillbedisplayedwhenyoupresstheREC( )
button.Specifythiswhenyouwishtousethetimesignature
thatisalreadyrecordedforthatmeasure,andwishtorecord
withoutchangingthetimesignature.
SetTrackSelecttoaTrackfrom0116,presstheREC(
button,andspecifythetimesignaturehere.
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobegin
recording,thetimesignatureyouspecifywillberecorded
ontheMasterTrackandonpreviouslyrecordedtracks.
01b
Transport Popup
Here,youcanmakebasicsettingsforMIDItrackrecording
andplayback,andcanselecttheprogramthatwillbeused
byeachtrack.
BeawarethatifyoupresstheSTART/STOP(
)button
duringtheprecounttostoprecording,thetimesignature
willnotberecorded.
Normally,youwillspecifythetimesignaturewhenyou
recordthefirsttrack,andselect**/**whenrecording
subsequenttracks.
Recording from measure 2 of track 2
when Meter = **/**
01(2)a: Location, Meter, Tempo, Tempo

Mode, Song Select, Track Select,
Reso, RPPR
Location
[001:01.000999:16.479]
Thisdisplayshowsthecurrentpositioninthesong.
Fromtheleft,thenumbersarethemeasure(001999),beat
(0116),andclock(000479).Whenyoumodifythesevalues,
thecurrentlocationwillchange.
Duringplaybackandrecording,thenumberofremaining
measureswillbedisplayedwhenyouapproachtheendof
thesong(thelast9measuresorfewer).
Thesongpositionbarwillshowthepositionofthecurrent
measure.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal(or
Auto,ifnoMIDIclocksarebeingreceived),the
KROMEwilltransmitSongPositionPointermessages
whentheLocationischanged.
Also,iftheMIDIClockparameterissettoExternal
MIDI(orAuto,ifMIDIclocksarecurrentlybeing
received),andReceiveExt.RealtimeCommands
(Global11a)ison,theLocationwillchangein
responsetoreceivedSongPositionPointermessages.
Therangeinwhichthebeatandclockcanbemodified
willdependonthecurrentlyspecifiedtimesignature.
Location
Song
Select
Popup
Meter
Tempo
when Meter =7/8
3 (4/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
Recording
Track 2
1 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (7/8)
3 (4/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (7/8)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
2 (3/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
Recording
Changing the time signature in the middle of a

song
Changingthetimesignaturebeforedataisrecorded:
Ifyouknowthelocationatwhichyouwishtochangetime
signatures,usetheInsertMeasuremenucommandto
specifyandinsertthetimesignaturewhereverdesired,and
thenrecordyourmusicaldata.
Changingthetimesignatureafterdatahasbeenrecorded:
Ifyouwishtochangethetimesignatureinthemiddleofa
songwhichalreadycontainsmusicaldata,useTrackSelect
tospecifytheMasterTrack(oranyTrack0116which
containsdata),andusetheEventEditmenucommandto
modifythetimesignatureoftheBarevent.
Ifthenumberofbeatsinameasureincreaseswhenyou
modifythetimesignature,restswillbeinsertedinthe
portionthatwasadded.Converselyifthenumberofbeats
decreases,thatportionwillnotbeplayed.Howeverifyou
returntotheoriginaltimesignature,thedatathathadbeen
hiddenwillonceagainbeplayed.(Thedataitselfwillnotbe
erased.)
Tempo Mode
Song Select
Rest is inserted
Track Select
Song Position
Resolution RPPR
Not played
109
Sequencer mode
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.Thistempoappliesto
songplayback,arpeggiatoranddrumtrackfunction,etc.
040.00300.00:WhentheTempoModeisManu(Manual),
thistempowillbeusedforrecordingandplayback.When
TempoModeisREC,thistempowillberecordedonthe
mastertrack.
EXT:ThiswillappearwhenMIDIClock(Global11a)isset
toeitherExternalMIDI,ExternalUSBorAuto.Thetempoof
theinternalsequencerwillsynchronizewithMIDIClock
messagesreceivedfromanexternalsequencerorotherMIDI
device.
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal,theabove
temposetting(040.00300.00)isused.Ifyouveselected
Auto,operationwillautomaticallyswitchfromInternalto
ExternalifMIDIClockdataisreceivedfromanexternal
MIDIdevice.Thisindicationwillappear.
Note:YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningtheTEMPOknob.
Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressingtheTAP
buttonatthedesiredinterval.
Note:IfTempoisselectedasanalternatemodulationsource,
=120.00willbethebasevalue.
To record tempo changes

First,setTrackSelecttoaMIDITrack.
PresstheREC( )buttontoenterrecordingstandby
mode,youwillbeabletoselectREC.
SetTempoModetoREC,startrecording,andchangethe
(Tempo)valueeitherbyturningtheTEMPOknob,orusing
numerickeys09toenteravalueandthenpressingthe
ENTERbutton.Youcanalsovarythetempobyhittingthe
TAPbuttonatthedesiredtiming.
ThiscannotbeselectedwhenthePreferencespageitem
RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
Whenyouchangethe(Tempo)valuewhilerecording,the
tempochangeswillberecorded,causingthetempoto
changeasthesongprogresses.
TempochangescanalsobecreatedusingtheEventEditor
CreateControlDatamenucommands.
Note:Ifyouwishtorecordonlythetempochanges,set
RecordingSetup(Seq08b)toOverdub,andthetempowill
berecordedonthemastertrackwithoutbeingaffectedby
themusicaldataofTrackSelect.
Tempo Mode
[Auto, Manual, REC]
Auto:ThetempowillfollowthetempooftheMasterTrack.
Thetempoofthemastertrackcanbespecifiedbyusingthe
EventEditmenucommand,withtheMasterTrackchosenin
TrackSelect,orbytheRECoperationdescribedbelow.
WhenAutoisselected,itwillnotbepossibletomodifythe
(Tempo)settingwhileasongisplayingorrecording(or
duringstandby).
Note:Ifyouwanttochangethelengthofasongafter
creatingit,usethemenucommandSetSongLength.When
creatinganewsong,youcanspecifythelengthtobe
somewhatlongerthannecessary,andafteryouhave
finishedrecordingandediting,useSetSongLengthto
specifythecorrectlength.
ASongSelectmessageistransmittedwhenyouswitch
songsontheKROME.Youcanswitchsongsonthe
KROMEremotely,bysendingaSongSelectmessage
fromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfTrackMIDIOut(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasic)isset
toforMaster,andthesongisswitched,trackswhose
trackstatus(Status31(2)a)isEXT,EX2,orBOTHwill
transmitBankSelect,ProgramChange,Volume,
Panpot,Portamento,Send1/2,PostIFXPan,andPost
IFXSend1/2messagesontheMIDIchannelofthat
track.ThesemessageswillnotbetransmittedifTrack
MIDIOutissettoforExternalSequencer.
Track Select
WhenMultiRECisoff,thisalsoselectstherecordenabled
track.
WhenMultiREC(Seq08b)ison,thePlay/Rec/Mute
buttons(Seq01(2)b)selecttherecordenabledtracks,
regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.
UseTrackName(Seq62)togivethetrackadescriptive
name.
IfothertracksaresettothesameMIDIchannelasthe
selectedtrack,andtheirStatusissettoINTorBTH,
theyllbecontrolledbythekeyboardaswell.
Additionally,othertrackssettothesameMIDIchannel
astheselectedtrack,andtheirStatussettoEXT,EX2,or
BTH,willtransmitMIDItoexternaldevices.For
anotherlookatthis,pleaseseethetablebelow.
MIDI Channel
Sameasthe
selectedMIDI
Track
Manu(Manual):The (Tempo)settingwillbeused.
REC:TempochangeswillberecordedontheMasterTrack.
Song Select
[000127]
[Track01Track16, Master Track]
Track01Track16:SelecttheMIDItrackthatyouwantto
record.Thisisalsowhereyoumakeyourselectionwhen
editingaMIDItrackinP6:TrackEdit.
Different
fromthe
selectedMIDI
Track
Keyboard
plays Internal
Sounds
Keyboard
Transmits MIDI
Out
OFF
No
No
INT
Yes
No
EXT
No
Yes
Status
EX2
No
Yes
BTH
Yes
Yes
Any
setting
No
No
Selectthesongthatyouwanttorecordorplayback.
Eitherselectthesongnamefromthepopupmenu,oruse
numerickeys09tospecifythesongnumberandthenpress
theENTERbutton.
Creating a new song

Chooseanumberfromthepopupmenuwhosesongname
isblank,orusethenumerickeys09tospecifythesong
numberandpresstheENTERbuttontoopenthedialogbox.
ThenselectSetLengthtospecifythenumberofmeasuresin
thesong,andpresstheOKbutton.
110
IfyouveselectedMasterTrack,thesettingsofthemost
recentlyselectedMIDItrackwillbeused.
MasterTrack:Selectthemastertrackifyouwanttousethe
P6:TrackEditmenucommandstoeditthemastertrack.You
cannotperformrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingonthe
mastertrackbyitself.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 01: Program T0108, 02: Program T0916
Resolution (Realtime REC Quantize Resolution)

[Hi, 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Withrealtimerecording,thetimingoftheMIDIdatayou
playcanbecorrected.
Hi(HighResolution):Timingwillnotbecorrected.Data
willberecordedatthemaximumresolution(/480).
3:Datawillbecorrectedtothenearestintervalofthe
specifiedtimingasitisrecorded.Forexampleifyouselect
3,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest32ndnotetriplet
interval.Ifyouselect,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest
quarternoteinterval.
With a setting of

01(2)b: Track Program Select

Select Track Info
Track No.
Category/Track
Program Select
Bank/Track
Program Select
Program Select
Play/Mute
Velocity Meter
Solo On/Off
Selected Track Info

BecausealltheMIDIdatabeingrecordedwillbecorrected
tothespecifiedtimingresolution,coarsesettingsofthis
parameterwillcausecontinuouscontrollerssuchaspitch
bendtoberecordedinstairstepfashion.
Thispagedisplaysinformationaboutthetrackyoure
editing.T:indicatestheMIDItracknumber/programbank/
number/name.Ch:indicatestheMIDIchannelnumber,and
RPPR(Assign):indicatesthekeynumberthatwillstartthe
RPPRassignedtothetrack.
RPPR(Assign)willnotshowalloftheassignmentsifthere
aremanyRPPRassignments.TheP10:Pattern/RPPR
PatternEditpageletsyouseealloftheassignments.
Insuchcases,useasettingofHitorecord,andthenusethe
Quantizemenucommandtocorrectonlythedesiredtypeof
data(notesetc.).Toavoidastifffeel,avoidrecordingata
lowresolutiontobeginwith.
Track Number:
RPPR
Track Category:
[Off, On]
Asexpected,thisindicatesthetracknumber.Beloweach
tracknumberareitscorrespondingtrackparameters.
ThisturnstheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording)
functionon/off.RPPRletsyouassignapatterntoeachnote
ofthekeyboard,sothatthepatternwillplayback(orbe
recorded)whenyoupresstheappropriatekey.
ThisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameoftheProgram
assignedtothetrack.
On(checked):TheRPPRfunctionwillbeon.Ifapatternhas
beenassignedtoeachkeyintheP5:RPPRSetuppage,
pressingthatkeywillperformtheassignedpattern.For
moreinformation,pleasesee103:RPPRSetupon
page 157.
ThisshowstheMIDItracknumber.Theparametersbelow
thisletyousettheparametersforthetrack.
Mode, Stop Watch

Transport
Thetransportpanelwillappearwhenyouslidethe<
popupbutton(locatedonthelowerrightsideofthedisplay)
towardtheleft.Thisletsyoucontroltransportoperations
suchasplaybackandrecordingfromwithinthedisplay.To
hidethetransportpanel,pressandmovethe>popup
buttontowardtheright.
Track 01 (Track Number):
Category (Track Program)
[00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectacategoryandsubcategorytochoose
theMIDItracksprogram.Allprogramsareorganizedinto
upto18categoriesand8subcategories.Choosethedesired
categoryandsubcategorytoselecttheprogramyoudesire.
PressthispopupbuttontoaccesstheCategory/Program
Selectmenu,andchooseaprogram.
Category/Track Program Select menu:

Here,youcanselecttheprogramforeachtrackbymain
categoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoa
maximumofeighteenmaincategories,andeachcategoryis
classifiedintoeightsubcategories.Youcanselectprograms
usingthesemaincategoriesandsubcategories.
PressCategoryandusetheCategory/TrackProgram
Selectmenutoselectaprogram.
Set Location
REC
LOCATE
PAUSE
START/STOP
<<REW
FF>>
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeCategory/ProgramSelect
menu:onpage 3.
111
Sequencer mode
Program Select
[A...F: 000...127
GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001...128]
SelectstheprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachMIDItrack.
Thelowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
Theprogramyouselectherewillbeusedwhenthesongis
playedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Iftheprogramis
changedwhilerecording,theprogramchangewillbe
recordedasMIDIdata,andtheprogramwillchangeduring
playback.Youcanalsochangetheprogrammanually
duringplayback.However,theprogramwillchangeatany
pointwhereprogramchangedataisalreadyrecorded.
IftheStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,
programscanbeselectedbyreceivingMIDIprogram
changemessages.Also,whenthesongischangedor
whenthesongreturnstothebeginning,trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthebankand
programnumbersviaMIDI.TrackswhoseStatusis
EX2willshowBankasandwilltransmitthebank
numberthatwasselectedintheBankSelect(Seq3
1(2)c)parameter.(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQMode
TrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Various ways to change the program for a track

ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09toinputa
programnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
ChooseProgramSelect,andturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
IfyouvechosenProgramSelect,thefrontpanelBANK
AFbuttonswillchangetheprogrambankforthe
selectedtrack.TheBANKbuttonforthebankcontaining
theselectedprogramwilllightup.
YoucanusethenumerickeystoswitchtheGMbank(see
p.2).
Thesettingwillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
TheoperationwilldependontheExclusiveSolosetting.
ExclusiveSolooff:Multipletrackscanbesoloed.Thesolo
settingofeachtrackwillchangeeachtimeyoupressitsSolo
On/Offbutton.
ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Offbutton,
onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
IfMIDItrackswhoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isBTH,EXT,
orEX2aremutedbyMuteorbytheSolofunction,note
on/offmessageswillnotbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedforthosetracks.
Solosettingsarenotsavedwiththesong.
Exclusive Solo
thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff(unchecked),
youcansolomultipleTracksatonce.Thesolosettingofeach
trackwillchangeeachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneTrackcanbe
soloedatatime.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
Tip:Onmostpages,youcanalsotoggleExclusiveSoloon/
offbyholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressing
numerickey1.
Velocity Meter
UsetheBank/ProgramSelectmenutoviewandselect
programsbybank.
ThisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheMIDI
channelofeachtrack,producedbythekeyboard,MIDI
IN,arpeggiator,drumtrack,orsequencer.(Ifmultiple
noteonmessagesarereceivedsimultaneously,the
highestvelocitywillbedisplayed.)
UsetheCategory/ProgramSelectmenutoviewandselect
programsbycategory.
TransmitMIDIprogramchangemessagesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice(ifthetrackStatusisINT
orBTH).
Youcanalsousetheabovemethodstoswitchprograms
whileasongisplaying.Ifyouswitchprogramswhile
recording,theprogramchangedatawillberecorded,and
theprogramwillswitchatthatpointinthesongduring
playback.YoucanalsousethemenucommandEvent
Edittoaddprogramchangedatatoatrack.
Play/Rec/Mute
[Play, Rec, Mute]
UsethistomuteaMIDItrack,ortoselecttherecording
tracksformultitrackrecording.
Track 02...08, 09...16 (Track Number):

Here,youcanspecifytheprogram,Play/Mutestatus,and
SoloOn/OffstatusforTracks28and916.Thesearethe
sameasforTrack01.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Track01(TrackNumber):above.
01(2): Menu Command
Duringplayback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal
recording),youcanonlyselectPlayorMutefortracks
withtheexceptionoftherecordingtrack.Formultitrack
recording,trackscanbesettoPlay,Rec,orMute.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
EachtimeyoupressthePlay/Rec/Mutebutton,itwilltoggle
betweenthosefunctions.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
Play:Thetrackwillplay.
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
Rec:Forsingletrackrecording,theselectedtrackwillbeset
toRECwhenyoupresstheREC( )button.RECcannot
bemanuallyselected.
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
Formultitrackrecording(thePreferencespageMultiREC
ison),selectRECforthetracksthatyouwishtorecord.
Solo On/Off
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtrack.
2:RenameSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
Mute:Thetrackwillbemuted(silent).
112
OnlytrackswithSoloOnwillsound.Othertrackswillbe
muted.
[On, Off]
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 03: Mixer T0108, 04: Mixer T0916
OSC1
03: Mixer T0108,

04: Mixer T0916
Left
OSC2
Center
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127
Right
03
Menu
03a
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
Right
Pan (CC#10)
Pan (CC#10)
C064
C064
L032
L032
L001
L001
R096
R096
R127
R127
Left
Center
Right
Center
Right
OSC1
03b
Left
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Left
Center
Right
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064
OSC2
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
Here,youcansetthepanandvolumeofeachMIDItrack.
L001
R096
03(4)a:Location, Meter, Tempo, Tempo

Reso, RPPR
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01:ProgramT0108,02:
ProgramT0916onpage 109.
Selected Track Info
Track Number
R127
Left
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinP8:
Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanning
ofthesoundaftertheInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeMixeronpage 243..
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,CC#10Pancanbe
receivedtocontrolthepanning.WhenreceivingCC#10,
avalueof0or1isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right.Whenyouchangethesongorreturntothe
beginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2
orBTHwilltransmitthepanyouspecifyhereasaMIDI
message(exceptforRND).(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQ
ModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
03(4)b: Pan, Volume

Thepanandvolumethatyouspecifyherewillbeused
whenyouplaybackorrecordfromthebeginningofthe
song.Ifyouchangethesettingsduringrecording,the
changeswillberecordedasMIDIdata,andpanandvolume
willchangeduringplayback.Youcanalsochangethe
settingsduringplayback.However,whenthesongreachesa
locationwherepanorvolumedatawasrecorded,the
settingswillchangeaccordingly.
Volume
WhenStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,CC#7Volume
canbereceivedtocontrolthevolume.Thevolumeofa
trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingtheMIDIVolume
(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11)values.Whenyou
changethesongorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmit
thevolumeyouspecifyhereasaMIDIVolume
message.(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDI
Outonpage 200)
ThisareashowsinformationontheMIDItrackselectedfor
editing.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TrackProgram
Selectonpage 111.

[Category Name]
Thisindicatesthecategory.
[RND, L001...C064...R127]

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(Track
Number):above.
Here,youcansetthepanofeachMIDItrack.
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducetheoscillatorpan
settingoftheProgrammode.
[000...127]
Here,youcansetthevolumeofeachMIDItrack.
Selected Track Info
Pan
Right
RND:Thepanpositionwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
Track Category
Category
Center
03(4): Menu Command
seep.164
113
Sequencer mode
05(6)c: Arpeggiator Run, Track assign

Commandonpage 163.
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)youchecked
herewillruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
Whenthearpeggiatorison,thesecheckboxesletyouturnA
andBon/off.
05: Arpeggiator A,
06: Arpeggiator B
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DTpage
ArpeggiatorRunA,B.
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthesong.A
songcanruntwoarpeggiatorssimultaneously.
ArpeggiatorparameterscanbeeditedinP7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack,butcertainmajorparameterscanbeeditedin
thesepagesaswell.Youcanedittheseparametersin
realtime,forexamplebychangingthearpeggiopattern
whileplayinginSequencerP01:Play/REC.
YoucanalsousetheTEMPOknobandthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob,VELOCITYknob,SWINGknob,and
STEPknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
05
Menu
05a
Track assign
ThisindicatesthearpeggiatorAandBassignmentstatusfor
eachtrack18.ThesesettingsaremadeinArpeggiator
Assign(Seq71(2)c).
05(6)d: Arpeggiator A (B)

Pat (Pattern)
Octave
Reso (Resolution)
05b
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[ , , , , , , , ]
Sort
[Off, On]
Latch
[Off, On]
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
05c
05d
05(6)a: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR

Track Select
(Tempo)
RPPR
[Track0116, Master Track]

[040.00300.00, EXT]
[Off, On]
Here,youcanselectthetrack,specifythetempothatwill
controlthesongorarpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Setthevariousparametersofthecombinationarpeggiator.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCOMBIP7:ARP/DT
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom73(4):Arpeggiator
A(B)Setup.
05(6): Menu Command
05(6)b: Arp Controls

assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLknobs.The
arpeggiocontrolsallowyoutousethefourknobstocontrol
thetwoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
[GATE]Knob 1: Gate
[64...+00...+63]
[VEL.]Knob 2: Velocity (Velocity) [64...+00...+63]

[SWING]Knob 3: Length
[64...+00...+63]
seep.6,p.54
[STEP]Knob 4: Octave64...+00...+63]
seep.6
114
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 07: Tone Adjust
07: Tone Adjust

07a
07
Menu
TheresultingeffectofToneAdjustsettingsthatweresaved
inProgrammodeissavedwiththeprogram,regardlessof
theAutoLoadPCGsetting.Theprogramwillsound
accordingtoitssettings,regardlessofwhetherToneAdjust
settingsweresaved.
alloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsare
storedintheSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
07b
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram.
07c
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,theToneAdjustsettingsofthe
programwillnotbeloaded;theprogramsettingspriorto
editingtheToneAdjustsettingswillremain.
ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures:
TheToneAdjustparameterletsyouedittheprincipal
Programparameters.
ItletsyoumodifyPrograms,includingeverythingfrom
subtletweaks(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramatic
changes(suchasselectingadifferentMultisample).Any
changesthatyoumakearestoredwiththeSong,anddo
notaltertheoriginalProgram.
Eachofthesixteentrackshasitsownsetoftoneadjust
parameters.
Absolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameteron
page 7
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 7
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCson
page 8

InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaToneAdjust
andthensavetheresults,theProgramdataischangedjust
asifyoudeditedtheinternalparametersdirectly.Formore
information,pleaseseeSavingToneAdjustEditson
page 7.
InSequencermode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare
storedwithintheSong;theProgramitselfisnotchanged.
ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgramsoundsinone
specificSongwithoutaffectingthewaythatitsoundsin
Programmode,orinanyotherCombisorSongs.
07a: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR

07b: Track Select, Selected parameter

information
Track select
Track

Control
Assignment
Value
Control
Type Stored Value
[SW18, SL18]
Thisistheswitchorsliderinthedisplaythatisassignedto
ToneAdjustparameters.
Assignment
[List of Tone Adjust assignments]
Thisisthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtotheswitch
orsliderinthedisplay.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign
parameter,below.
Value
switchorslider.
Type
[Rel, Abs, Meta]
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatestohow
editstotheparameteraresaved.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameter
onpage 7.
Stored Value
Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwillrevertto
thisvalue.
07c: Tone Adjust

Here,youcanassignToneAdjustparameterstotheswitches
Switches 1...8
[116]
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanslidersin
thedisplay.
ThisselectsthetrackwhoseToneAdjustparametersyou
wishtoadjust.Youcanswitchbackandforthbetweenthe
differenttracksasmuchasyoulike,withoutlosingyour
edits.
Auto Load (Auto Load PRG)
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoatrack,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsToneAdjust
settingswillbeloadedaswell.
theparametervalue:
Thesesettingsincludetheparametersassignedtoeach
sliderandswitchinthedisplay,alongwiththeon/offstate
assignedtoAbsoluteparameters.
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
115
Sequencer mode
08: Preferences
Assign
On/Off
08
Menu
Value
08a
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheswitchesinthe
On Value
08c
Switch Status
[Off, On]
Sliders 18
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheslidersinthe
Assignments are exclusive

thenewslider.
Value
control.
08b
07: Menu Command
Here,youcanspecifytherealtimerecordingmethod,adjust
levelsandmakeothersettingsforaudiorecording,and
adjustthemetronomesettings.
08a: Location, Meter, Tempo, Tempo

Reso, RPPR
Selected Track Info:

ThisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselectedMIDI
track.(See01(2)a)
08b: Recording Setup

Selectsthemethodofrealtimerecording.
Overwrite
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormallyselect
thismethod.
Ifyouusethismethodtorecordonatrackonwhichdata
hasalreadybeenrecorded,allpreviousdatawillbereplaced
fromthemeasureatwhichyoubeganrecordingthroughall
subsequentmeasures.
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordeddataoverwrites
musicaldatapreviouslyrecordedonthattrack.
Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen
modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime
recordingorMIDIeventediting.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwantto
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
seep.164
13:ResetToneAdjustseep.167
Commandonpage 163.
116
3. InLocation,specifythelocationatwhichyouwishto
beginrecording.
4. PresstheREC( )button,andthenpresstheSTART/
STOP(
)button.
IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefaultsettings,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasureprecount,and
thenrecordingwillbegin.
Playthekeyboardandmovethecontrollers(suchasthe
joystick)torecordyourperformance.
5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSTART/STOP(
button.
Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturntothepoint
atwhichyoubeginrecording.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 08: Preferences
IfyoupressthePAUSE( )buttoninsteadoftheSTART/
STOP(
)button,recordingwillpause.Whenyou
pressthePAUSE( )buttononceagain,recordingwill
resume.Whenyouarefinished,presstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontostoprecording.
Overdub
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoadddatatoa
previouslyrecordedtrack.
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordedmusicaldataisadded
totheexistingdata.
Whenyouperformoverdubrecordingonapreviously
recordedtrack,thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedtothe
previouslyrecordeddata.
Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwillberecording
additionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpattern,or
recordingthetempointhemastertrack.Withthismode,
datacanbeaddedwithouterasingtheexistingperformance
data.
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverdub.
Auto Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecordedtrack.
Recordingwilloccuronlyoverthespecifiedarea,rewriting
itwiththenewlyrecordeddata.
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded.
Thenrecordingwillautomaticallystartandendwithinthe
specifiedarea.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecorded
data.
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn.
3. InM(AutoPunchInStartMeasure),M(AutoPunch
InEndMeasure)specifytheareathatyouwishto
record.
Forexample,ifyouspecifyM005M008,recordingwill
occuronlyfrommeasure5tomeasure8.
4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures
beforethepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording.
3. Fortherestoftheprocedure,pleaseseesteps35of
Overwrite.
Manual Punch In
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtousetheREC( )
buttonorafootswitchtorerecordselectedportionsofa
previouslyrecordedtrack.
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpresstheREC( )
buttonoraconnectedpedalswitchatthedesiredlocationto
startorstoprecording.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecorded
data.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwantto
record.
STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillbegin.
Whenyoureachthestartinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardandoperate
controllerssuchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
recordingwillend.(Playbackwillcontinue.)
)button.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocationyou
specifiedinstep4.
Auto Punch In Start Measure

Auto Punch In End Measure
[M001M999]
[M001M999]
WhenRecordingSetupissettoAutoPunchIn,specifythe
measuresatwhichrecordingwillstartandend.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn.
Loop All Tracks
3. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasuresear
lierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecord
ing.
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtorepeatedlyrecorda
specifiedareaofatrack,andcontinueaddingdata.Thisis
suitableforcreatingdrumpatterns,etc.
IfMultiRECischecked,thisparameterwillnotbe
available.
Playbackwillbegin.
Thismethodletsyoucontinuerecordingasyouaddmusical
data.
5. Atthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording,
presstheREC( )button.
Thespecifiedregioncanberecordedrepeatedly.Thisis
idealwhenrecordingdrumphrases,etc.
Recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardandoperate
controllerssuchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
1. SettheRecordingSetuptoLoopAllTracks.
)button.
6. Whenyoufinishrecording,presstheREC(
)button.
Recordingwillend(playbackwillcontinue).
UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwanttorecord.
2. IfMultiRECischecked,itwillnotbepossibletoselect
LoopAllTracks.
Note:InsteadofpressingtheREC( )buttoninsteps5
and6,youcanuseafootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
SettheGlobalP2:ControllerspageFootSwitchAssignto
SongPunchIn/Out.
)button.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocationthat
youspecifiedinstep3.
3. InM(LoopStartMeasure),M(LoopEndMeasure)
specifytheareathatyouwishtorecord.
Forexample,ifyouspecifyM004M008,recordingwill
occurrepeatedly(asaloop)frommeasure4tomeasure8.
117
Sequencer mode
4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasuresear
lierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecord
ing.
STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillbegin.Whenyoureachthestartinglocation
youspecifiedinstep3,recordingwillbegin.Playthe
keyboardandoperatecontrollerssuchasthejoystickto
recordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
youwillreturntothestartinglocation,andcontinue
recording.
6. Themusicaldatathatislooprecordedwillbeaddedto
thepreviouslyrecordeddata.
Youcanalsoerasespecificdatawhileyoucontinueloop
recording.Thisisusefulif,forexample,youneedtodeletea
mistakewithoutinterruptingtheflowoftherecording.
IfyoupresstheREC( )buttonduringlooprecording,all
musicaldatawillberemovedfromthecurrentlyselected
trackaslongasyoucontinuepressingtheswitch.
BycheckingtheRemoveDatacheckboxyoucaneraseonly
thespecifieddata.Duringlooprecording,pressthenote
thatyouwishtodelete,andonlythedataofthatnote
numberwillbedeletedfromthekeyboardaslongasyou
continuepressingthatnote.
Similarly,benderdatawillbedeletedaslongasyoutiltthe
joystickintheX(horizontal)direction,andaftertouchdata
willbedeletedaslongasyouapplypressuretothe
keyboard.
track,arpeggiatororRPPRfunctions,orwhenrecordingthe
outputofanexternalmultitracksequencer.
IftheMultiRECboxischecked,thePlay/Rec/Mutestatusof
thetrackyouselectinTrackSelectwillbesettoREC;press
thePlay/Rec/Mutebuttonofthetrack(s)youwanttorecord
sothattheyindicateREC.(Thebuttonindicationwill
changeintheorderofPlayRecMute.)
RegardlessoftheTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)setting,data
willberecordedontheMIDItracksthataresettoREC.
MIDIdatawillberoutedtothetrackswithacorresponding
MIDIchannel.
Fordetailsonhowtorecordfromthearpeggiatororan
externalmultitracksequencerontomultipletracksof
differentMIDIchannels,pleaseseeSynchronizingthe
playbackoftheArpeggiator,DrumTrackfunctionor
sequenceronpage 367.
Note:Ifyourerecordingdatafromanexternalmultitrack
sequencer,setMIDIClock(Global11a)toExternalMIDI
sothattheKROMEwillsynchronizetoyourexternal
sequencer.Tempochangescannotberecorded.
Off(unchecked):Singletrackrecordingsetupwillbe
selected.RecordingwilloccuronthetrackselectedbyTrack
Select.
MultiREC.cannotbeselectedifRecordingSetupisset
toLoopAllTracks.
1. MakethedesiredRecordingSetupsettings.
YoucanrecordusingOverwrite,Overdub,ManualPunch
In,orAutoPunchIn.
2. InRecordingSetup,checkMultiREC.
Whenyouareonceagainreadytorecordmusicaldata,
unchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox.
)button.
Playbackwillend,andyouwillreturntotherecordingstart
locationthatyouspecifiedinstep4.
IfLoopAllTracksisselected,normalplaybackwillbe
loopedaswell.
Loop Start Measure

Loop End Measure
[M001M999]
[M001M999]
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresoverwhichrecordingwill
repeatwhenRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
Remove Data
[Off, On]
UsethistodeleteunwantedMIDIdatathatyourecorded
whileusingLoopAllTracks.Thisisavailablewhen
RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
On(checked):YoucandeleteunwantedMIDIdatawhile
recordingwithLoopAllTracks.Duringrecording,pressthe
key(notenumber)thatcorrespondstotheMIDInotedata
youwishtodelete.Alloccurrencesofthatnotenumberwill
bedeletedforthetimethatyoucontinueholdingdownthe
key.
Controllerdatacanalsobeerasedinasimilarway.For
examplewhileyoumoveandholdthejoystickintheX
(horizontal)direction,benderdatawillbeerased.This
appliestoJoystick+Y(CC#01)/Y(CC#02),JoystickX(Pitch
Bend),andDamper(CC#64).
Also,youcanpressandholddowntheREC( )buttonto
deleteallMIDIdataforaslongasthekeyisheld.
Multi REC
[Off, On]
On(checked):Multitrackrecordingsetupisenabled.Select
thisifyouwanttorecordtwoormoretracks
simultaneously.
UseMIDImultitrackrecordingifyouwantto
simultaneouslyrecordmultipleMIDItracksofdifferent
channels,suchaswhenrecordingtheoutputofthedrum
118
3. UseLocationtospecifythemeasureatwhichrecord
ingwillbegin.
4. PresstheREC(
)button.
5. Forthetrackyouwanttorecord,pressPlay/Rec/Muteto
makeitindicateRec.
)button.
WiththedefaultsettingsforMetronomeSetup,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasureprecount,and
thenrecordingwillbegin.Nowyoucanperformonthe
keyboardandcontrollers,andusethearpeggiatororRPPR
functionsifdesired.
)button.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocation
specifiedinstep3.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 09: Play Loop T0108, 010: Play Loop T0916
08c: Metronome Setup

Here,youcanmakemetronomesettings.
Sound
[Only REC, REC & Play, Off]
09: Play Loop T0108,

010: Play Loop T0916
09
Menu
OnlyREC:Themetronomewillsoundonlyduring
recording.
09a
REC&Play:Themetronomewillsoundduringrecording
andplayback.
Off:Themetronomewillnotsoundduringplaybackor
recording.However,theprecountmetronomewillsound
beforerecordingbegins.
Level
09b
[000127]
Setsthevolumeofthemetronome.
Bus (Output) Select
[L/R, L, R]
Selectstheoutputdestinationofthemetronomesound.
L/R:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTL/MonoandR.
L:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTL/Mono.
R:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTR.
Precount [Measure]
[02]
Whenplayingorrecordingasong,youcanindependently
looptheMIDItracks.

Mode, Song Select, Track
Select, Reso, RPPR
Specifiestheprecountthatwilloccurbeforerecording
begins.
Withasettingof0,recordingwillbegintheinstantyou
presstheSTART/STOP(
)button(afterfirstpressing
theREC( )button).
09(10)b: Play Loop

Selected Track Info
08: Menu Command
ThisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselectedMIDI
track.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:Track
ProgramSelectonpage 111.
Category
Indicatesthecategory.
Track Play Loop
seep.164
[Category Name]
[Off, On]
SpecifiesloopingforaMIDItrack.
On(checked):ThattrackwillloopbetweenLoopStart
MeasureandLoopEndMeasure.
Loop Start Measure
[001...999]
Specifiesthefirstmeasureoftheloop.
Loop End Measure
Commandonpage 163.
Specifiesthelastmeasureoftheloop.
Play Intro
[001...999]
[Off, On]
On(checked):AfterthemeasuresbeforethespecifiedLoop
StartMeasureareplayedonce,theregionofLoopStart
MeasureLoopEndMeasurewillbeplayedrepeatedly.
Forexample,youcanusethisonadrumtracktomakeit
playafillinandthenbeginlooping.
Off(unchecked):PlaybackwillbeginfromtheLoopStart
Measure,andwillbeginloopingimmediately.
ThiswillbevalidifTrackPlayLoopischeckedand
LoopStartMeasureissettootherthan001.
119
Sequencer mode
Example)
When Play Intro is checked
Controls
REALTIMECONTROLSletsyouuseknobs[1][4]to
modifytheparametersofthetracksprogramortheeffects.
Youcanalsousetheseknobstocontrolthearpeggiators.
Whenyouuseaknob,thedisplaywillshowthecontrollers
functionandvalue.UsetheSELECTbuttontochangethe
knobfunctions.
InTONE,thefunctionsassignedtoknobs14arefixed.
Track1willloopasfollows.
M001M002M003M004M003M004M003
M004
InUSER,youcanassignavarietyofmodulationfunctions
toknobs14.Toassignfunctions,usetheP1:Controllers
Setuppage(seep.122).
When Play Intro is not checked
Realtime Controls
TheRealtimeControlsTONEknobfunctions(TONE
[CUTOFF]TONE[RELEASE])arefixed.Youcanassigna
varietyoffunctionstoRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14
(USER[1]USER[4]).MIDIcontrolchangesareassignedfor
eachfunction.
Track1willloopasfollows.
M003M004M003M004M003M004M003
M004
Inthisway,youcanuseTrackPlayLooptomakethe
realtimerecordingprocessmoreefficient.

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(Track
Number):above.
MIDICC.
Whenyouoperateaknob,thecorrespondingMIDIcontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheTrackSelect
MIDIchannel.
Mostofthesefunctionsadjust(scale)theparametersettings
ofthetrackprograms.Unlessotherwisenoted,scaling
meansthattheparametersareattheirprogrammedvalues
whenthecontrollerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontroller
isat127.Foranotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagram
below.
CC scaling of parameters
99
Parameter
Value
seep.164
As Programmed
Commandonpage 163.
00
0
64
127
CC Value
TONE [CUTOFF]: Flt Fc (Cutoff )
[000127]
ThissliderscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
TONE [RESONANCE]: Flt Reso (Resonance)

[000127]
ThissliderscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
TONE [EG INT]: Flt EG (Filter EG Intensity)

[000127]
ThissliderscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
MIDICC#79.
TONE [RELEASE]: EG Rel (EG Release) [000127]

ThissliderscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
120
SEQ P0: Play/REC Controls
USER [1]...USER[4]
[000...127]
YoucansetRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14toawide
varietyofmodulationfunctions,usingtheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppage.
messagesusuallyCCs.
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiocontrolletsyouusethefourknobstocontrolthe
twoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
swing,andthestep.
ARP [GATE]
[64...+00...+63]
(SeeGateonpage 54).
ARP [VELOCITY]
[64...+00...+63]
onpage 54).
ARP [SWING]
[64...+00...+63]
Swingonpage 54).
ARP [STEP]
[64...+00...+63]
Thisaffectsthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
121
Sequencer mode
SEQ P1: Controllers

SW2 (SW2 Assign)
Mode (SW2 Mode)
11: Setup
11
Menu
11a

[Toggle, Momentary]
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthe
substitutionofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1
Mod.(CC#80).
11b
11c: Realtime Controls Knob Assign

11c
Here,youcanassignthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatknobs14willhavewhenRealTimeControls
USER.(SeeRealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentson
page 348.)
Here,youcanassignthefunctionsperformedbySW1and
SW2,andbyknobs14whenRealtimeControlsUSERis
selected.
Whenyouoperatetheseknobsduringrecording,theMIDI
messagesassignedtothemwillberecorded.
Note:ThePanelSwitchAssignsettingoftheprogram
assignedtoeachtrackwillhavenoeffect.
11a: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR, Track

Info, Selected Track Info
Track Select
(Tempo)
RPPR

[040.00300.00, EXT]
[Off, On]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]

[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
[Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
11: Menu Command
controlthearpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
onpage 109.
seep.164
Selected Track Info
Thisareashowsdetailedinformationaboutitstrack
assignments.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectedTrackInfoon
page 111.
11b: Panel Switch 1/2 Assign

SW (SW1 Assign)
off.
Note:Iftheon/offstatusoftheSW1,SW2switchesis
memorizedwhenyousaveit.
Mode (SW1 Mode)
[Toggle, Momentary]
switch.
Toggle:Thefunctionwillalternatebetweenonandoffeach
Momentary:Thefunctionwillbeononlywhileyou
122
USER [1]
USER [2]
USER [3]
USER [4]
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P2: EQ 21: Trim T0108, 22: Trim T0916
SEQ P2: EQ
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGain(Seq23(4)a)
controlscancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.
Youcancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
21: Trim T0108,

22: Trim T0916

21
Menu
21a
21b
Here,youcansettheparametersforMIDItracks28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
21c
21(2): Menu Command
Here,youcansetthesignallevelthatenterstheEQoftracks
18and916.
seep.164
Track Select
(Tempo)
RPPR

[040.00300.00, EXT]
[Off, On]
controlthearpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
onpage 109.
Commandonpage 163.
21(2)b: Track Info

Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TrackProgram
Selectonpage 111.
21(2)c: Trim
Auto Load Prog EQ
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTrack,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsEQsettingswillbe
loadedaswell.
alloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsarestoredin
theSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothePrograms
EQinProgrammodewillnotaffecttheSong.
On:theProgramsEQsettingswillbeloadedautomatically
alongwiththeProgram.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:theProgramsEQsettingswontbeloaded.Usethisif
youvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,andthenwantitto
stayunchangedwhileyoutryoutdifferentPrograms.
Bypass
[Off, On]
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypasscanbeconvenientfor
comparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim
[0099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Notethat
thisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalentto6 dB,
25isthesameas12 dB,andsoon.
123
Sequencer mode
Commandonpage 163.
23: EQ T0108,
24: EQ T0916
23
Menu
23a
23b
23c
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthemidsweepable
threebandEQforeachMIDItrack.

23(4)b: Track Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:TrimT0108,22:
TrimT0916onpage 123.
23(4)c: 3 Band Parametric EQ

High Gain [dB]
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Freq [Hz] (Mid Frequency)
[10010k]
Mid Gain [dB]
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
0.5 dB.
Low Gain [dB]
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.

midrange)forMIDItracks28and916.Theyarethesame
asfortrack1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01
(TrackNumber):above.
23(4): Menu Command
seep.164
124
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) 31: MIDI T0108, 32: MIDI T0916
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters)

(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOuton
page 200)
31: MIDI T0108,

32: MIDI T0916
31
Menu
31a
EX2:ThisenablesyoutospecifyaparticularMIDIBank
SelectmessagefortheTrack,insteadofautomaticallyusing
theBankoftheselectedKROMEProgram.Usethe
parametersbelow,labeledBankSelectMSB(WhenStatus
=EX2),tosettheBankSelectmessageasdesired.Inother
respectsthisisthesameasEXT,describedabove.
MIDIdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelthatisspecifiedseparatelyforeachMIDItrack
bytheMIDIChannel.
31b
31c
Status
Here,youcanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsforeachMIDItrack.

Reso, RPPR
31(2)b:Track Info
Keyboard & Sequencer Transmit

MIDI Out
OFF
No
No
INT
Yes
No
EXT
No
Yes(usingtheBankSelect
messageofthetracksProgram)
EX2
No
Yes(usingtheBankSelect
messagespecifiedontheMIDI
taboftheTrackParampage)
BTH
Yes
Yes
MIDI Channel
onpage 109.
31(2)c: MIDI
Status
Keyboard,
Sequencer, & MIDI In
play Internal Sounds
[Off, INT, BTH, EXT, EX2]
ThissetswhethertheTrackcontrolstheinternalsounds,
externalMIDIdevices,orboth.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,italsoallowsyou
tochoosetheinternalBankSelectnumbers(assetbythe
frontpanelbuttons),orusecustomBankSelectsettingsto
matchtheexternaldevice.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTrack.Withthissetting,theTracks
Programwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbetransmitted.
INT:Thetrackwillsoundwhenyouplaybackthe
performancedatarecordedontheMIDItrack.Ifyouuse
TrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)toselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
INT,theKROMEssoundgeneratorwillproducesound
whenplayed.MIDIdatawillnotbetransmittedtoan
externaldevice.
BTH:BothINTandEXTareoperative.Whenthemusicaldata
recordedintheMIDItrackisplayedback,orwhenyouselecta
MIDItrackthatissettoBTHandplaythecontrollersofthe
KROME,theinternaltonegeneratoroftheKROMEwillsound,
andMIDIdatawillalsobetransmittedtoanexternaldevice.
EXT:WhenthemusicaldatarecordedintheMIDItrackis
playedback,orwhenyouselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
EXTandplaythecontrollersoftheKROME,MIDIdatawill
betransmittedtoanexternaldevice,buttheinternaltone
generatoroftheKROMEwillnotsound.
Whenyouselectanothersongorreturntothebeginningof
thesong,theprogramchange,volume,panpot,portamento,
sends1and2,postIFXpan,andpostIFXsends1and2of
eachMIDItracksettoEXTwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
[0116]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthattheMIDItrackwilluseto
transmitandreceivemusicaldata.TheMIDIchannelyou
specifyherewillbethereceivechannelwhenStatusisINT,
thetransmitchannelwhenitisEXTorEX2,andthereceive/
transmitchannelwhenitisBTH.TrackssettoINTwhich
havethesameMIDIchannelwillsoundandbecontrolled
identicallywhentheyreceiveMIDIdataordatafromthe
sequencertracks.
Bank Select MSB (When Status=EX2) [000...127]

Bank Select LSB (When Status=EX2) [000...127]
WhenStatusissettoEX2,thissetsthebanknumberthat
willbetransmitted.WhenStatusisotherthanEX2,this
settinghasnoeffect.

ThesearetheMIDIrelatedsettingsforMIDItracks28and
31(2): Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
125
Sequencer mode
33: OSC T0108,

34: OSC T0916
33
Menu
33a
Theportamentosettingyoumakeherewillbeusedwhen
thesongisplayedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Ifyou
changethesettingwhilerecording,itwillberecordedas
partofthemusicaldata.(HoweverifyousetthistoPRG,it
willnotberecorded.)Youcanchangethissettingduring
playback.HoweverifyouplaybackanyPortamentoOn/Off
dataorPortamentoTimedatathatwaspreviouslyrecorded,
thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
WhenthetrackwhoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,
MIDIcontrolchangeCC#05(PortamentoTime)andCC#65
(PortamentoSwitch)canbereceivedtocontrolthisand
changethesetting.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05Portamento
Timewillnotbereceived.)
33b
33c
TheseparametersspecifyhoweachMIDItrackwillbe
sounded.
Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthe
song,trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willtransmit
thissettingviaMIDI.IfthisisOff,CC#65withavalueof0
willbetransmitted.Ifthisis001127,aCC#65of127and
CC#05of1127willbetransmitted.
IfthisissettoPRG,nothingwillbetransmitted.

Reso, RPPR
ThisdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDIchannel
specifiedforeachtrackbyMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).(See
GlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
33(4)b:Track Info
onpage 109.
Here,youcanmakeOSCsettingsforMIDItracks28and9
33(4): Menu Command
33(4)c: OSC

Force OSC Mode
[PRG, Poly, MN, LGT]
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicVoiceAssignModesettingswillbeused.
Poly:Thetrackwillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
MN(Mono):Thetrackwillplaymonophonically,regardless
oftheProgramssettings.
LGT(Legato):Thetrackprogramwillsound
monophonically,andwillplaylegatoaccordingtothe
ProgramsModesetting(Prog11b).
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPrioritysetting
(Prog11b)willdeterminethepriorityofthenotethat
soundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes.
OSC Select
[BTH, OS1, OS2]
SpecifieswhethertheMIDItracksprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(Prog11a)isDouble
orDoubleDrums,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbythe
settingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.PCMprogramswillnotsound
ifOscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Portamento
[PRG, Off, 001...127]
MakeportamentosettingsforeachMIDItrack.
126
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) 35: Pitch T0108, 36: Pitch T0916
AslongasthissettosomethingotherthanPRG,you
cancontroltheBendRangeusingMIDIRPNPitch
BendChangemessages.
35: Pitch T0108,

36: Pitch T0916
35
Menu
35a

Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforMIDItracks2
8and916.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formore
information,pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
35b
35c
35(6): Menu Command
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforeachMIDI
track.

Mode, Song Select, Track Select, Reso,
RPPR
35(6)b: Track Info
seep.164
onpage 109.
12:DetuneBPMAdjustseep.103
Commandonpage 163.
35(6)c: Pitch
Transpose
[60...+00...+60]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
Detune (Use BPM Adjust in Menu)

[1200...+0000... +1200]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinonecentunits.
+0000:Normalpitch.
Note:YoucanalsousetheDetuneBPMAdjustmenu
command(seepage 103)toautomaticallymakeadetune
settingfromacalculationinBPMunits.
TransposeandDetunedonotaffectthenotes
transmittedviaMIDIOut.TransposeandDetunecan
becontrolledviaMIDIRPNmessagesreceivedonthe
TracksMIDIchannel.Thewaythatthisworksdepends
onwhetherornottheTrackusesaDrumProgram.
IftheTrackdoesnotuseaDrumProgramforexample,
ifitusesaSingleorDoubleProgramthenMIDIRPN
CoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,andRPNFine
TunewillcontrolDetune.
IftheTrackusesanDrumProgram,MIDIRPNCoarse
TuneandFineTunewillbecombinedtocontrol
Detune.Theoverallrangeis1octaveforcoarsetune
andfinetunetogether.
Bend Range
[PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccurwhen
thepitchbenderisoperated,insemitoneunits.
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
127
Sequencer mode
37: Scale T0108,

38: Scale T0916
37(8): Menu Command
37
Menu
37a
37b
seep.164
37c
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthescaleforeachMIDI
track.

RPPR
37(8)b: Track Info
onpage 109.
37(8)c: Scale
Use Programs Scale
[Off, On]
MIDItrackcanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(Prog
12b).
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyScalewillbeused.

Here,youcansettheparametersforthescaleofeachtrack
28and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortrack1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):
above.
Scale:
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthesongwilluse.Formore
information,pleasesee12d:Scaleonpage 15.
Type (Songs Scale)

[Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale15]
Selectsthescale.
Key
Random
[CB]
[07]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINT,thissettingwillaffectthe
pitchproducedbytheKROME.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
128
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay 41: Key Zone T0108, 42: Key Zone T0916 (Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay

41: Key Zone T0108,
42: Key Zone T0916
(Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
41
Menu
41a
41(2)d: Keyboard Zones

Top Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundforeachMIDItrack.
Top Slope
41b
41c
[00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,

12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
41d
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
belowthetopkey.
Here,youcanspecifythekeyzonesinwhichMIDItracks1
8and916willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeysettingsspecifythezoneinwhichMIDI
tracks18and916willsound,andthetop/bottomslope
settingsspecifythekeyrangeoverwhichthevolumewill
changestartingfromthetop/bottomkey.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41:KeyZoneT0108,4
2:KeyZoneT0916(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916)on
page 129.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecorded
intotheinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromthe
internalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.
41(2)a: Zone Map

eachMIDItrack(116)willsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportionina
differentcolor.
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
belowthetopkey.
Bottom Slope
[00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,

12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethe
bottomkey.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethe
bottomkey.
Bottom Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundforeachMIDItrack.
Volume
41(2)b: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR

41(2)c: Track Info
Key
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Key
Top Key
Zone Map
Key zone display
Bottom Slope
Bottom Key
Top Slope
Velocity zone display
Top Key
Top Velocity
MIDI
Track 1
Top Slope
Bottom Slope
MIDI
Track16
C1
E1
G9
Bottom Velocity
1
16
MIDI Track
129
Sequencer mode
akey(seeOGp.10).
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetopkey
ofthesametrack.Norisitpossibleforthetopand
bottomslopestooverlap.

ThesearethekeyzonesettingsforMIDItracks28and9
41(2): Menu Command
43: Vel Zone T0108,

44: Vel Zone T0916
(Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
43
Menu
43a
43b
43c
43d
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
Here,youcansettheTop/BottomVelocityparametersto
specifytherangeofvelocitiesthatwillbesoundedbyMIDI
tracks18and916,andTop/BottomSlopespecifytherange
overwhichthevolumewillbeadjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee43:VelZoneT0108,44:
VelZoneT0916(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916)on
page 130.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecorded
intotheinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromthe
internalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametrack.Norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
43(4)a: Zone Map

eachMIDItrackwillsound.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41(2)a:ZoneMapon
page 129.

43(4)c: Track Info
43(4)d: Velocity Zones

Top Velocity
[1127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
track.
Top Slope
[0120]
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
topvelocity.
Bottom Slope
[0120]
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottom
Velocity.
130
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay 45: Delay T0108, 46: Delay T0916
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebottom
velocity.
bottomvelocity.
Bottom Velocity
45: Delay T0108,

46: Delay T0916
[1127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocitythatwillbesoundedbyeach
MIDItrack116.
45
Menu
45a
45b

45c
Volume
Velocity
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Velocity
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhentheMIDItracks1
8and916receiveanoteonmessageuntilthesoundbegins.
Top Velocity
akey(seeOGp.10).

45(6)b: Track Info
ThesearethevelocityzonesettingsforMIDItracks28and
45(6)c: Delay
43(4): Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.

Delay Time [ms]
[00005000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntiltheMIDI
trackbeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
[Off, On]
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrackproduces
soundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunitsrelativetothe
(Tempo).
On(checked):SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBase
NoteandTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytime
willbeequivalentto1000ms.
Off(unchecked):ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelay
Timesetting.
Base Note
Times
[ , , , , , , , , , ]
[01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrack
beginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevaluerelativeto
the (Tempo)(Seq01(2)a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( )and
Timesto02,thattrackwillsoundwithadelayofahalfnote
( ).Evenifyouchange (Tempo)(Seq01(2)a),thedelay
timewillalwaysbeahalfnote( ).Ifyouusethese
parameterstospecifyadelayofahalfnote( ).Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
131
Sequencer mode

ThesearethedelaytimesettingsforMIDItracks28and9
45(6): Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
132
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter 51: <1> T0108, 52: <1> T0916
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter

Here,youcanselectwhetherornottoapplyfilteringtothe
MIDIdatareceivedbyMIDItracks116.Forexampleeven
iftwotracksarereceivingthesameMIDIchannel,onecan
besettorespondtodamperpedalactivitywhiletheother
doesnot.
Enable After Touch
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
Enable Damper
[Off, On]
TheseMIDIfiltersettingshavenoeffectontheMIDI
messagesthathavealreadybeenrecorded.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbereceived.
ThesesettingsaffecttheMIDImessagesthatare
transmittedwhenyouadjustprogram,pan,volume,
portamentoandsend1/2parametersofatrackwhose
Status(Seq31(2)c)issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Enable Portamento SW
On(checked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisenabled.Tracks
whoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTHwillreceivethese
typesofMIDImessagesontheirrespectivechannels.The
typeofeffectsthatarecheckedwillbeappliedtothe
programofeachtrackwhentheKROMEscontrollersare
operatedorwhenMIDIdataisreceived.(Theeffect
dynamicmodulationfunctionisnotaffectedbythese
settings.)
SettingsthatregulateMIDItransmission/receptionofthe
KROMEitselfaremadeinMIDIFilter(Global12b).
Iftheuserassignablecontrollersthatcanbefilteredinthe
MIDIFilter14and25pagesaresettoMIDIcontrol
changes,filteringwillbeperformedforthesecontrol
changes.Inthiscase,anycontrolchangefilteringthatis
beingperformedintheMIDIFilter11to13pageswillbe
givenpriority.Furthermore,ifthesamecontrolchangeis
assignedtomultiplecontrollersforwhichtherearefilter
settingsintheMIDIFilter14and25pages,checkingany
oneofthesewillenablethatcontrolchange.
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
messageswillbereceived.

ThesearetheMIDIFilter1settingsforMIDItracks28and
51(2): Menu Command
seep.164
Off(unchecked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisdisabled.
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
51: <1> T0108,

52: <1> T0916
Commandonpage 163.
51
Menu
51a
51b
51c

51(2)b: Track Info
51(2)c: MIDI Filter 1

[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbereceived.
133
Sequencer mode
53: <2> T0108,

54: <2> T0916
53(4): Menu Command
53
Menu
53a
53b
seep.164
53c

53(4)b: Track Info

[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339.
Enable JS+Y
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthe
joystick,oraRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Enable Ribbon
55
Menu
55a
55b
55c
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthe
joystick,oraRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Enable JSY
Commandonpage 163.
55: <3> T0108,

56: <3> T0916
Enable JS X as AMS
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofaRealtimeControlsknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.

Here,youcanspecifywhethertheeffectofknobs14when
theSELECTbuttonhasselectedRealtimeControlsTONE
willbetransmittedandreceived.TheMIDIcontrol
TONEisselectedarefixed.

55(6)b: Track Info

Enable Realtime ControlsCUTOFF
[Off, On]
EnablesordisablesreceptionofMIDICC#74(theKROMEs
filtercutofffrequency),whichisassignedtoknob1when
RealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
Enable Realtime ControlsRESONANCE [Off, On]

filterresonancelevel),whichisassignedtoknob2when
Enable Realtime ControlsEG INTENSITY [Off, On]

filterEGintensity),whichisassignedtoknob3when
134
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter 57: <4> T0108, 58: <4> T0916
Enable Realtime ControlsRELEASE
[Off, On]
filter/ampEGreleasetime),whichisassignedtoknob4
whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.


Enable Realtime ControlsUSER [1]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
ThesesettingsenableordisablereceptionoftheMIDI
USERisselected.
55(6): Menu Command
seep.164
57(8): Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
seep.164
57: <4> T0108,

58: <4> T0916
57a
57
Menu
Commandonpage 163.
57b
57c
59: <5> T0108,

510: <5> T0916
59a
Here,youcanenableordisabletransmissionandreception
forthefunctionsofknobs14whentheSELECTbuttonis
settoRealtimeControlsUSER.UsetheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppagetoassignthefunctionsthatknobs1
4willperformwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
59
Menu
59b
59c

57(8)b: Track Info

59(10)b: Track Info
135
Sequencer mode
59(10)c: MIDI Filter
511: <6> T0108,

512: <6> T0916

Enable SW1
Enable SW2
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
ThesesettingsspecifywhetherSW1Mod(CC#80)andSW2
Mod(CC#81)willbetransmittedandreceivediftheyare
assignedtotheSW1andSW2buttons.
5-11
Menu
5-11a
5-11b
5-11c
Note:IfPortamentoSW(CC#65)isassignedtoSW1orSW2,
theEnablePortamentoSWsettingontheMIDI<1>pagewill
takepriority.
Note:ThefunctionsofSW1andSW2areassignedontheP1:
ControllersSetuppage(seep.122).
Enable Foot Switch
[Off, On]
SWITCHwillbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal
P2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
assigned.
Enable Foot Pedal
[Off, On]
PEDALwillbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal
P2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
assigned.


511(12)b: Track Info

Enable Other Control Change Messages [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnotcovered
intheprecedingMIDIFilteritemswillbereceived.
Enable Waveform SysEx
[Off, On]
ThisenablesordisablesreceptionofMIDIsystemexclusive
messagesthatfreelyswitchthemultisampleusedbyan
oscillatorwhiletheprogramissounding.

seep.164
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
Commandonpage 163.
136
SEQ P6: Track Edit 61: Track Edit
SEQ P6: Track Edit

UseFromMeasuretospecifythestartingmeasure,andTo
EndofMeasuretospecifytheendingmeasure.
61: Track Edit

61
Menu
61a
61b
61c
Link From Measure current location
[Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,theFromMeasuresettingwill
belinkedtothecurrentlocation,andthelocationofthe
displayedtrackwillalsochange.Thelocationwillchangeto
followthisevenduringplaybackorrecording.
61: Menu Command
Here,youcaneditMIDItracks116,andthemastertrack.
WheneditingaMIDItrack,youcanmove,insert,anddelete
individualnoteeventsorcontrolchangedata,orcopy,
move,insert,anddeletemeasuresortracks.Youcanalso
performStepRecordinginthispage.
Wheneditingthemastertrack,youcaneditthetempoand
thetimesignature.
Note:Toperformtrackediting(orstepediting),useTrack
Selecttoselectthetrackyouwanttoedit,anduseFrom
MeasureandToEndofMeasureparameterstospecifythe
regionthatyouwanttoedit.Thenchooseacommandfrom
themenu,andexecutetheedit.Fordetailsonthespecific
commands,pleaseseeSequencer:MenuCommandon
page 163.
2:StepRecordingseep.167
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
5:SetSongLengthseep.176
6:EraseTrackseep.176
7:CopyTrackseep.176
8:BounceTrackseep.177
9:EraseMeasureseep.177
10:DeleteMeasureseep.177
11:InsertMeasureseep.178
12:RepeatMeasureseep.178
13:CopyMeasureseep.179
14:MoveMeasureseep.179
15:CreateControlDataseep.180

Reso, RPPR
16:EraseControlDataseep.181
17:Quantizeseep.181
18:Shift/EraseNoteseep.182
61b: Track Info
19:ModifyVelocityseep.183
(01(2)a:Location,Meter,Tempo,TempoMode,Song
Select,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPRonpage 109)
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.
164
(23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916onpage 124)
22:CreateExclusiveDataseep.183
61c: Track data Map, From Measure, To

End of Measure
23:EraseExclusiveDataseep.184
Commandonpage 163.
Track data Map

Thisareashowsthepresenceorabsenceofperformance
data,andindicatestheeditrange,etc.Thecurrentlyselected
Trackwillbehighlighted.
From Measure
To End of Measure
[001999]
[001999]
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresthatyouwishtoedit(or
copyfrom)orsteprecord.
Locations move in synchronization
Measure no.
MIDI Track
MIDI data
Patterns used
Master Track
Master track data
From Measure
To End of Measure
137
Sequencer mode
62c: Track View Area
62: Track View
Track View Area
62
Menu
Thisshowseventinformationforeachtrack,suchasnote,
velocity,andcontrolchangedata.(seeillustrationbelow)
62a
Thehighlightedmeasuresarethosethatwillbeedited.The
regionisindicatedbytheFROMMEASUREandTOENDof
MEASUREfieldsintheupperpartofthescreen.
62b
62c
Youcanmove,copy,ordeletemeasuresandtracksinunits
ofonemeasure.
Note:Youcantspecifyarangeofmeasuresunlessatoolin
theboxtoolisselected.
HereyoucaneditMIDItracks116andthemastertrack.
Thispageprovidesanoverallviewofeachtracksdatasuch
asnote,velocity,andcontrolchangedata.
Track View Area Select

Thisshowstrackinformationforthetrackviewarea.The
barattheleftindicatesthefourtracksshowninthetrack
viewarea.Thehighlightedtracknumberisthetrackthat
willbeedited.
Inthetrackviewareayoucandragtoselecttrackand
measureregions,andmove,copy,orerasetracks.Youcan
alsoeditinmeasureunits.
Thetrackdisplayregionwillchangewhenyoutouchthe
tracknumber.
Youcanalsousevariousmenucommandstoedittheregion
youselectedbydragging.
IntheTrackViewSetupdialogboxyoucanchangetheorder
ofthetracks.

Reso, RPPR
Scroll buttons
Thesescrollthetracksormeasuresshowninthetrack
viewarea.Pressthescrollbuttoninthedirectionthatyou
wanttomove.Youcanalsoscrollbypressinginsidethe
trackviewareaanddraggingtowardtheouteredgeof
thebutton.
62b: Track Info

(01(2)a:Location,Meter,Tempo,TempoMode,Song
Select,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPRonpage 109)
Tool box
(23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916onpage 124)
Track Select
Start point select tool
[Track01...Track16, Master Track]
Hereyoucanselectthetracktoedit.ThisTrackSelect
settingwillchangewhenyoupressthetrackviewarea.
Whenthetrackchanges,thedisplaywillbrieflyturnblue.
Thehighlightedportionthatshowstheselectedregionof
thetrackviewareawillalsochangewhenyouchangethe
trackhere.
Usethistospecifythestartingmeasure(FROMMEASURE)
oftherangeofmeasuresyouwanttoedit.
Choosethistool,andthenpressameasureinatrackto
specifythestartingmeasure(andthetrack).Continue
holdingdownthestartingmeasure,dragtotheright,and
releaseattheendofthedesiredselection.Whiledragging,
youcandragacrossascrollbuttontoscrollthroughthe
measureswhilemaintainingtheselection.
Ifmorethanonemeasureisselectedeventhoughyou
actuallywantedtoselectonlyonemeasure,simplycontinue
pressingforapproximatelyonesecond;thesinglemeasure
yourepressingwillbeselected.
Location bar
Track name indication
Control message name indication
( Track View Setup)
Note events
Indicate the selected region. Linked

with the identically-named parameter
of the Track Edit page.
Scroll button
Track View area select

The bar at left indicates the four
tracks shown in the track view
area (in this example, tracks 14).
Tool box
Scroll button
Setup
Press this button to open
the Track View Setup dialog
box.
( Track View Setup)
Displays note events
in a one-octave range
( Track View Setup)
Pattern
Selected region
Velocity indication
( Track View Setup)
138
Scroll button
Track view area
Displays the values for the

control message name
indicated in the left of the
screen ( Track View Setup)
SEQ P6: Track Edit 62: Track View
Note:Whenselecting,theupperlineFROMMEASUREor
ToENDofMEASUREwillbrieflyturnblue,andwill
indicatetheselectedmeasurenumber.
End point select tool
Youcanscrollthemeasuredisplaybydraggingyourfinger
ontooracrossascrollbar.
Theeditregionwillbeselectedandhighlighted.
Move tool
Usethistospecifythelastmeasure(ToENDofMEASURE)
oftherangeofmeasuresthatyouwanttoedit.
Choosethistool,andthenpressameasureinatrackto
specifytheendingmeasure(andthetrack).Continue
holdingdownthestartingmeasure,dragtotheleft,and
releaseattheendofthedesiredselection.Whiledragging,
youcandragacrossascrollbuttontoscrollthroughthe
measureswhilemaintainingtheselection.
Ifmorethanonemeasureisselectedeventhoughyou
actuallywantedtoselectonlyonemeasure,simplycontinue
pressingforapproximatelyonesecond;thesinglemeasure
yourepressingwillbeselected.
Note:Whenselecting,theupperlineFROMMEASUREor
ToENDofMEASUREwillbrieflyturnblue,andwill
indicatetheselectedmeasurenumber.
Usethistomovethemeasuresoftheregionyouvespecified.
or
tooltoselecttheregionthatyouwantto
Usethe
move,andthenchoosethistool.Pressthemovedestination
measureordragtheselectedregionofmeasurestomovethem.
Ifdataexistsatthemovedestination,theDragMovedialog
boxwillappear,allowingyoutoselectwhethertooverwrite
orkeepthedataatthedestination.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheMove
MeasuremenucommandwithModesettoStay(seep.179).
Example)
Moving the events of measures 12 to measures 56
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
1
Example)
Using the Start Point Select tool to specify a region
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressthedesiredstartingmeasureforthetrackin
whichyouwanttoselectaregion.
1
2
3. Pressthe
tool.
4. Pressmeasure5(themovedestinationmeasure).Alter
natively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure5.
Scroll button
3. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothelastmeasureof
thedesiredrange,andreleaseyourfinger.
Youcanscrollthemeasuredisplaybydraggingyourfinger
ontooracrossascrollbar.
Theeditregionwillbeselectedandhighlighted.
5. Inthisexample,aneventexistsinthemovedestination
measure,sotheDragMovedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthedestination
data(replacingthedestinationdatawiththesourcedata).
Mergewillcombinethesourceanddestinationdata.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestinationmeasures,this
dialogboxwillnotappear;themovewilloccurimmediately.
Scroll button
Example)
Using the End Point Select tool to specify a region
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressthedesiredendingmeasureforthetrackinwhich
youwanttoselectaregion.
3. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothefirstmeasureof
thedesiredrange,andreleaseyourfinger.
139
Sequencer mode
If you choose Overwrite
Copy tool
The destination is overwritten

by the source data
Usethistocopytheeventsoftheselectedmeasures.
Usethe
or
tooltoselecttheregionthatyouwantto
copy,andthenchoosethistool.Pressthecopydestination
measureordragtheselectedregionofmeasurestothe
desiredcopydestination.Thedataatthecopydestination
willalwaysbeoverwritten.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheCopy
Measuremenucommand(seep.179).
If you choose Merge
The two sets of data are combined
Example)
Copying the events of measures 12 to measures 34
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
1
Example)
Moving the data of an entire track
1. Returnthelocationtothebeginning.
2. Pressthe
tool.
3. Presstheleftsideofmeasure1inthetrackyouwantto
move.
2
3. Pressthe
tool.
4. Pressmeasure3(thecopydestinationmeasure).Alter
natively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure3.
4. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothemovedestina
tiontrack,andrelease.
Thecopywillbeexecuted.
Ifthemovedestinationmeasurescontainevents,theDrag
Movedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe
destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawiththe
sourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceanddestination
data.PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestinationmeasures,this
dialogboxwillnotappear;themovewilloccurimmediately.
5. Ifdesired,youcanpressanothercopydestinationto
copythedatarepeatedly.
Example) Copying the data of an entire track

Youcancopythedataofanentiretracktoanothertrack.
RefertoExample)Movingthedataofanentiretrack.In
step2,choosethe
tool.
Erase tool
Usethistoerasetheeventsfromtheselectedmeasures.
Choosethistool,andpressthemeasuresyouwanttoerase.
Theeventsofthosemeasureswillbeerased.
ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheEraseMeasure
commandwithKindsettoAll(SeeEraseMeasureon
page 177.).
Example) Erasing events

1. Pressthe
tool.
140
SEQ P6: Track Edit 62: Track View
2. Pressthefirstmeasurecontainingtheeventsyouwant
toerase,anddragtothelastmeasure.Ifdesired,you
canselectmeasuresinadjacenttracksforerasure(See
TrackNo.).Alternatively,youcanpressindividual
measuresoneatatimeanderasethem.
C4,C5,andC6(differentoctaves)willbeshownonthesame
dotline(attheCposition).
Example) Erasing all data from a track

Youcanerasealldatafromanentiretrack.
C1~...G#8~:Onlythenoteeventsoftheselectedoctavewill
beshown.Eachdotlinewillshowonenote.
Pressthe
tool,andthenpresstheleftsideofthefirst
measureofthetrackyouwanttoerase.Thedatawillbe
erased.
Auto:Ifmostofthedisplayednoteeventsarewithinone
octave,theywillbedisplayedusingonedotlinepernote.If
thenotesextendmorethanoneoctave,theywillbe
displayedusingAllNotes.
Piano Roll jump
AllNotes:Onedotlinewillbeshownasoneoctave.For
example,noteeventsC4,E4,andG4(allinthesameoctave)
willbeshownonthesamedotline.
shows:
YoucanjumptoPianoRolleditingbypressingthisbutton
whenatrack116isselected.
Specifiesthetrackinformationthatisshownattheleftedge
andbottomofeachtrackviewarea.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoselectingthePiano
Rollmenucommand(SeePianoRollonpage 171.).
Names
Note:IfyoupressthisbuttonorselectthePianoRollmenu
commandtoopenthePianoRoledialogboxforatrackthat
containsnoevents,atrackofthesamelengthasthesong(64
measuresbydefault)willbecreatedbeforethePianoRoll
dialogboxopens.
[Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,tracknamesandthetypeof
selectedcontroleventwillbeshownattheleftofthetrack
viewscreen.
Velocity
[Off, On]
Ifyouveselectedthemastertrack,thisbuttonwilltakeyou
toeventediting.
Ifthischeckboxisselected,thevelocityvaluesofnote
eventswillbeshown.Inthecaseofachord,thehighest
valuewillbeshown.
Scroll buttons
and
Bypressingthesebuttonsyoucanmovetotracksor
measuresthatarenotcurrentlydisplayed.Evenwithout
pressingdirectlyononeofthesebuttons,youcanscrollthe
displaybydraggingacrossascrollbuttonfrominsidethe
trackviewarea.
Thisselectstheinformation(suchascontrolchanges)that
willbeshown.Ifyoudontwantanyofthesetobeshown,
choosenone.
Thehorizontaldirectioninwhichthescrollbuttonsoperate
willdependonthePlayScrollsettingintheTrackView
Setupdialogbox.
Setup button
WhenyoupresstheSetupbutton,theTrackViewSetup
dialogboxwillappear,allowingyoutospecifyhow
informationwillbedisplayedinthetrackviewarea.
[none, PolyAfter, CC#000...CC#119 (*Y),

Program, AfterT, Bend, Exclusive]
Green:ControlChange,PolyAfter,AfterTouch
Thelocationofaneventisindicatedbyasolidlineorsolid
color,andbyashadedareaforthedurationthattheeffect
continues.Theshadedareaisnotshownifthelocation
containingtheeventisnotdisplayedinthetrackviewarea.
Yellow:Pitchbend
:Systemexclusivemessage
Red:Programchange
Track View Setup dialog box
Data exists
Time Scale
No data
[Close, Wide]
Thisspecifiesthescaleforthetimeaxisofthetrackview
area.
Close:Forexample,thescreenwillshow4or5measuresof
a4/4timesignature.
Thesettingsinthisdialogboxwillbeinitializedwhen
youturnoffthepower.
Wide:Forexample,thescreenwillshow8or9measuresof
a4/4timesignature.
Track No.
Play Scroll
Thisspecifiestheorderofthedisplayedtracks.Normally,
Track01Track16areshownfor0116.Youcanusethisto
changetheorderifthetracksyouwanttoseearefarapart.
Thisspecifieshowthetrackviewareawillscrollduring
playback.
Note Display
[oct.Layer, All Notes, C-1~...G#8~, Auto]
Thisspecifieshownoteeventswillbedisplayed.
[Sweep, Crawl]
Sweep:Whenthelocationbar(theverticalyellowline)
reachestheendofthetrackviewarea,thenextmeasureand
thelocationbarwillmovetotheleft.
Crawl:Thetrackviewareawillmovemeasurebymeasure.
Thelocationbarwillstayinafixedlocation.
octLayer:Noteeventsofalloctaveswillbedisplayed
togetherinaoneoctaveregion.Forexample,noteevents
141
Sequencer mode
Note:Thissettingalsospecifieshowmovementwilloccur
whenyoupressthedisplayscrollbuttonsintheleft/right
directionwhileediting.
63c: Track Names

T01...T16
[Track name]
Here,youcanrenametheMIDItracks.
62: Menu Command
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthedialogbox,andinput
thedesiredcharacters.Youcanenterupto24characters.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEditingnameson
page 91oftheOperationguide.
3:EventEditseep.169
63: Menu Command
4:PianoRollseep.171
7:CopyTrackseep.176
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
7:CopyTrackseep.176
17:Quantizeseep.181
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.
164
Commandonpage 163.
17:Quantizeseep.181
63: Track Name

62
Menu
62a
62b
62c
Here,youcanassignanametoeachtrack.

Reso, RPPR
63b: Track Info
onpage 109.
142
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) 71: ARP Setup T0108, 72: ARP Setup T0916
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)

Here,youcanspecifyhowthearpeggiatorwilloperatein
Sequencermode.Thesesettingscanbemadeforeachsong.
InSequencermode(asinCombinationmode),youcanrun
thetwoarpeggiatorssimultaneously.
Thisallowsyoutoapplydifferentarpeggiopatternstotwo
soundsthathavebeensplitacrossthekeyboard,oruse
velocitytoswitchbetweentwodifferentarpeggiopatterns,
etc.
InSequencermode,themusicaldatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatorduringsongtrackorpatternrealtimerecording
canberecorded.
Whendoingso,youcanmodifythearpeggiopatternor
parameterswhileyourecord,orusetheREALTIME
CONTROLSSELECTbuttontoselectARPandusethe
knobstovarythearpeggiopattern.
Itisnotpossibletosetindependenttemposforthe
arpeggiatorandthesequencer.
WhenMIDIClock(GlobalP1:11a)isInternal,the
arpeggiatorcanbesynchronizedtotheinternalsequencer.
WhenyouturnonthearpeggiatorandpresstheSTART/
)button,thearpeggiatorwillsynchronize
STOP(
withthesequencer.
)button,the
arpeggiatorandsequencerwillbothstop.Ifyouwishto
stoponlythearpeggiator,presstheARPbuttontoturn
off.
71(2)c: Arpeggiator Assign, Arpeggiator

Run A, B
Arpeggiator Assign
[Off, A, B]
ThisindividuallyassignsarpeggiatorAorarpeggiatorBto
eachtrack18,916.WhentheARPbuttonisturnedon,the
arpeggiatorspecifiedforeachtrackwillrun,subjecttothe
ArpeggiatorRunA,Bsettingsandthesettingsmadehere.
Off:Neitherarpeggiatorwilloperate.
A:EnablesArpeggiatorA.UsetheArpeggiatorApageto
selectthearpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
B:EnablesArpeggiatorB.UsetheArpeggiatorBpageto
selectthearpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
Fortracksthatyouwishtorecordinrealtime,selecteither
arpeggiatorAorB.Ifyouspecifyanarpeggiatorfortwoor
moretracks,thearpeggiatorwillplayeachofthetracksyou
specify.
YoucansetAandBtotwodifferentMIDIchannels,and
controlonefromthekeyboardandtheotherfroman
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIIN.Youcanalso
usemultitrackrecording(MultiREC)tosimultaneously
recordthenotedatathatisgeneratedfromthetwo
arpeggiators.
Example 1)
Ontracks1and2,setMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c)to01and
Status(Seq31(2)c)toINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotrack1
andarpeggiatorBtotrack2,andcheckArpeggiatorRunA,
B.InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
WhenthearpeggiatorKeySyncisoff,youcanturnonthe
ARPbuttonandplaythekeyboardtostartthearpeggiator
duringtheprecountbeforerealtimerecordingbegins.That
way,thearpeggiatorperformancewillberecordedfromthe
beginningofthepatternwhenrecordingstarts.
WiththeARPbuttonoff,playthekeyboardandtracks1and
2willsoundsimultaneously.
WhenMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternal
USB,clockmessagestransmittedfromanexternalMIDI
devicecanperformthesametypeofcontrol.
WhenyouturnontheARPbuttonandplaythekeyboard,
arpeggiatorAwilloperatefortrack1andarpeggiatorBwill
operatefortrack2.
Eveninthiscase,youcanstart/stopusingtheKROMEs
START/STOP(
)button.
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Ch1
Trigger
= Ch1
71: ARP Setup T0108,

72: ARP Setup T0916
71a
71
Menu
71b
71c
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - A
Track1
MIDI Ch=1ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Track2
MIDI Ch=1ch
Status=INT
Pattern - B
Pattern - B
Example 2)
Fortracks1,2and3,settheMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c)to
01,02,and03respectively,andsetStatus(Seq31(2)c)to
INT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotracks1and2,andarpeggiator
Btotrack3.ChecktheArpeggiatorRunA,Bsetting.
InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisoffwill
playthesoundassignedtotrack1.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisonwill
causearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,and
producesoundforbothtracks.

Reso, RPPR
causearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,and
producesoundforbothtracks.
71(2)b: Track Info
onpage 109.
causearpeggiatorBtooperatefortrack3,andplaythe
soundassignedtotrack3.
143
Sequencer mode
Alternatively,youcouldchooseTrack01inTrackSelect
torunarpeggiatorAfortracks1and2,andusean
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheKROMEsMIDIIN
tosendnotedatatoMIDIchannel3toplayarpeggiatorB.
73: ArpeggiatorA,
74: ArpeggiatorB
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Ch1, Ch2
Arpeggiator
A
Pattern - A
Trigger
= Ch3
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - B
Track1
MIDI Ch=1ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Track2
MIDI Ch=2ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Track3
MIDI Ch=3ch
Status=INT
Pattern - B
73
Menu
73a
Thearpeggiatorcannotbetriggeredbythenotes
playedbythesequencer.
73b
IfthetrackStatus(Seq31(2)c)issettoINTorBTH,
tracks116towhicharpeggiatorAorBareassigned
willbesoundedbythenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDIChannel(Seq3
1(2)c)settingofthattrack.IfthetrackStatusissetto
BTH,EXT,orEX2,thetrackwilltransmitMIDInote
dataontheMIDIChannelofthattrack.
73c
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorAorBwillbetriggeredbythe
MIDIChannelofanytrack116towhichthe
correspondingarpeggiatorisassigned.

RPPR
73(4)b: Track Info
IftheLocalControlOn(GlobalP1:11a)isturnedOFF,
thearpeggiatorwillnotbetriggeredbynotedatafrom
thekeyboard.Itwillbetriggeredbynotedatareceived
atMIDIIN.Ifyouwishtorecordjustthetriggernotes
onanexternalsequencerandruntheKROMEs
arpeggiatorinthisway,turnLocalControlOFF.
onpage 109.
Ifyouwantthenotedatageneratedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionofthe
externalsequencer.(seep.368)
Pattern*
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave*
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[Off, On]
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)thatare
checkedherewillfunctionforthetrack(s)towhichtheyare
assignedbyArpeggiatorAssign.
Whenthearpeggiatorison,AandBcanbeturnedon/off
independently.
73(4)c: ArpeggiatorA(B) Setup
Resolution*
[ , , , , , , , ]
Gate
Velocity
[000...100%, Step]
[001...127, Key, Step]
Swing
V
71(2): Menu Command
[100...+100%]
Sort*
[Off, On]
Latch*
[Off, On]
Key Sync.*
[Off, On]
Keyboard*
[Off, On]
Thesearethearpeggiatorparametersforthesong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT
seep.164
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom05(6)c:
ArpeggiatorA(B).
73(4): Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
seep.164
144
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) 75: ARP Scan Zone
75: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
75: ARP Scan Zone
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
operatearpeggiatorsAandB.
75
Menu
seep.164
75a
75b
75c
75d
Commandonpage 163.

Reso, RPPR
77: Drum Track

11a
75b: Track Info
11b
onpage 109.
11c
11
Menu
75c: Zone Map

ThisshowstheScanZoneforeacharpeggiator,AandB.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee75b:ZoneMapon
page 93.
TheparametersfortheDrumTrackfunctionarestructured
inthesamewayasinCombinationmode.AssigntheDrum
Trackprogramtothedesiredtrack116.
However,whileacombinationtriggerstheDrumTrack
patternontheglobalMIDIchannel,asongtriggersthe
DrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyDrum
PatternInput.NormallyyoullsetthistoTch.WiththeTch
setting,theMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrack
Selectwillautomaticallybeusedasthetriggerchannel.
75d: Scan Zone

A:, B:
Top Key
[C1...G9]
Bottom Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilloperate
arpeggiatorA(B).TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,and
BottomKeyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Top Velocity
[001...127]
Bottom Velocity
[001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilloperatearpeggiator
A(B).TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitiesthatwill
operatearpeggiatorA/B.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenoteandvelocityvaluesby
akey(seeOGp.10).
InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrackfunction
whilerealtimerecordingasongtrackorpattern.
Thenoteon/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrackpattern
canberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.
Youcantusenotedatafromtheinternalsequencerasa
triggertostartpatternsfortheDrumTrackfunction.
WhenyouveusedtheDrumTrackfunctionwithaprogram
orcombinationtocomeupwithanideaforasong,youcan
thenusetheAutoSongSetupfunctiontoimmediatelystart
realtimerecording(seep.106).
MIDI transmission and reception for the drum

track
InSequencermode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmitsand
receivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:ThedrumtrackwillreceiveontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternInputsettingofeachsong.
NormallyyoullsetthistoTchandusetheKROMEs
keyboardtocontrolthetriggering.
Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeachsong.
145
Sequencer mode
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItrackfor
whichyouveassignedthedrumprogram.
MIDInoteononthesameMIDIchannel,thedrumpattern
willstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting.
IfthetracksStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc.ofthe
DrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Iflocalcontrol(LocalControlOnGlobalP1:11a)ison,
playingtheKROMEskeyboardwillnotmaketheinternal
soundgeneratorproducesound,norcanthekeyboard
triggerthearpeggiatorordrumtrack.However,theycanbe
triggeredbynoteonmessagesfromMIDIIN.
77a: Drum Pattern

Pattern
[Preset, User]
[(Preset): P000...605, (User): U000...U999]
Contents
P000
Off
P000...605
Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999
U000U999canbestoreuserpatterns.Patternsyoucreate
inSequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns.(seep.188)
Shift
[24...+00...+24]
meansthattheinstrumentsplayedbythepatternwill
change.
MIDI Channel
Input
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP73(4)c:ArpeggiatorA(B)SetupKeySyncto
specifywhetherarpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningdrumpattern.
Latch
[Off, On]
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstopwhenyoureleasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillcontinuewhenyoureleasethekeyboard(note
off).ThepatternwillstopwhenyouturntheDRUM
TRACKbuttonoff(LEDdark).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom
Top
[C1...G9]
[C1...G9]
[01...16, Tch]
Velocity:
Tch:TheMIDIchannelthattriggersthedrumpatternwill
automaticallybesettotheMIDIchannel(Seq31(2)c)ofthe
trackchoseninTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
Bottom
Top
IfTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig,andyousetTrackSelect
toatrackforwhichtheMIDIchannelyouspecifyhereis
selected,thekeyboardwilltriggerthedrumpattern.MIDI
INmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannelwillalsotrigger
thedrumtrack.
[01...16, Tch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltransmittheMIDI
dataofthedrumpattern.Thedrumpatternwillsound
usingtheprogramofthetrackthatisassignedtothisMIDI
channel.
Tch:TheMIDIchanneloutputwillautomaticallybesetto
matchtheMIDIchannel(Seq31(2)c)ofthetrackselected
byTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
Whetherthepatterndatawillbeoutputtoanexternal
devicewilldependontheStatussettingofthetrackthat
matchestheOutputMIDIchannel.
77b: Trigger
[001...127]
[001...127]
pattern.
akey(seeOGp.10).
77: Menu Command
seep.164
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillstart
accordingtotheSyncsetting.WhenyoupressON/OFF
again,thedrumpatternwillstop.
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.If
yousetTrackSelecttoatrackthatmatchestheMIDI
ChannelInputsetting,andplaythekeyboard,orreceivea
146
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltriggerthedrum
pattern.
Output
[Off, On]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig.
Preset/User No.
Sync
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) Synchronizing the Drum Track function
Synchronizing the Drum Track function

The Trigger Sync parameter
Thetriggertimingofadrumtrackwilldependonthe
settingofitsTriggerSyncparameter.
On(checked):Thetriggertimingwillbequantizedtothe
nearestbeatrelativetothebasetempo.
Off(unchecked):IfTriggerModeisStartImmediately,
triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyoupresstheDRUM
TRACKbutton.IfthisissettoWaitKBDTrig,triggeringwill
occuratthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.
Synchronizing the drum track with the arpeggiator function, Sequencer mode songs, patterns,
and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayorberecordedin
synchronizationwiththecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiator
function,currentlyplayingsong,pattern,orRPPR
performance,turnTriggerSyncon.
TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart
Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggeredthe
momentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.Ifthisissetto
WaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggeredthe
momentyouplaythekeyboard.Itwillnotsynchronizeto
thecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiatorfunctionortothe
currentlyplayingsong,pattern,orRPPR.
TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyplayingsong,patternorRPPRperformanceatthe
beginningofthenextmeasure.Triggeringwillsynchronize
tothecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiator(inSequencermodeif
thesongorpatternisstopped)onthenextbeat.
Note:Ifyouwanttosynchronizethearpeggiatortothe
currentlyrunningDrumTrackfunction,settheKeySync
parameter(Prog/Combi/SeqP7).
Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern
performancetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrackfunction,
settheSyncparameter(SeqP10:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetup
page)toBeatorMeasure.
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackfunctiontostart
simultaneouslywiththebeginningofrecording,pressthe
DRUMTRACKbuttonduringtheprecountbefore
recording(iftheTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately)
orplaythekeyboard(ifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig).
TheDrumTrackswillnotbetriggeredimmediately,but
willbetriggeredinsynchronizationwiththesequencer
themomentrecordingstarts.
Slave operation
TheKROMEssequencercanbemadetorunin
synchronizationwiththeclockandrealtimecommands
receivedfromanexternalsequencer.ConnecttheMIDIOUT
ofyourexternalMIDIdevicetotheKROMEsMIDIIN,or
connecttheKROMEsUSBporttoyourcomputersUSB
port.
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBconnector
toyourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(Global,seep.199)toExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB.TheKROMEwillsynchronizetoMIDIClock
andrealtimecommandmessagesitreceivesfromthe
connectedMIDIdevice.
Note:IftheKROMEissettoMIDIClock=Auto,itwillalso
synchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthesamewayif
MIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeingreceivedfromthe
externaldevice.
Synchronization to MIDI clock

Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothetempocomingfrom
anexternalMIDIclocksource.
Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands

InSequencermode,theKROMEwillrespondtoSongStart,
Continue,andStopmessagesthatitreceivesjustasitdoes
whenusingthefrontpanelSTART/STOP(
)button
tocontrolsongplaybackandrecording.Thearpeggiator
alsowillbecontrolledinthesameway.(See
Synchronizationwithsongstopabove)
Sync settings
Key 1 on
Key 2 on
Key 1 off
Song
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Sync: Off
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Beat
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Measure
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Master operation
TheKROMEsequencersclockdataandstart/stop
operationscanbeusedtosynchronizeandcontrolan
externalsequencer.
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIIN,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBconnectorto
yourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal.Theconnected
externalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheKROMEs
MIDIClock.
Note:ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI
Clockmessagesarebeingtransmitted.Fordetails,pleasesee
MIDIClock(MIDIClockSource)onpage 199.
Synchronization via MIDI clock

TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetothe
MIDIclockoftheKROME.
Synchronization with song stop

Synchronization with a song in Sequencer mode
)button,the
DrumTrackfunctionandthesequencerwillstop.
147
Sequencer mode
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect)

Youcanalsospecifythebusroutingfortheprogramused
byeachMIDItrack116.Forinstance,youcan:
Sendtheoutputofatracktoaninserteffect
type,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
FordetailsonInsertEffects,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumKitIFX
Patchmenucommand.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 104.
Send1 (MFX1)
Send2 (MFX2)
81: Routing1 T0108,

82: Routing1 T0916
81
Menu
81a
81b
81c
81d
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
MIDItracks18and916willbesent.Youcanalsosetthe
sendlevelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
Foreachtrack,theseparameterssetthesendleveltomaster
effects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/
Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX15are
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2aresetby
theSend1andSend2parametersoftheIFXpage,andare
appliedafterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX15.
TheSend1and2settingyouspecifyhereareusedduring
playbackorrecordingfromthebeginningofthesong.Ifyou
modifythesesettingsduringrecording,yourchangeswill
berecordedasperformancedata;thesendamountswill
changeaccordinglyduringplayback.Youcanalsomodify
thesesettingsduringplayback.HoweverifSend1and2
datahasbeenrecorded,thesettingswillchangeaccording
totherecordeddata.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#93and
CC#91cancontrolsend1and2respectivelyandchange
theirsettings.Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothe
beginningofasong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2or
BTHwilltransmitthesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawill
betransmittedontheMIDIchannelofeachtrackasset
byMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).Theactualsendlevelis
determinedbymultiplyingthevalueoftheseparameters
withthesendlevelsettingsoftheprogramusedbythe
track(Send1andSend2,Prog81d).(SeeGlobalP1:
MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
81(2)a: Routing Map

Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(BusSelect),the
nameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,chaining,and
theoutputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.Thetypeof
inserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechainsettingscanbe
editedinthe83:InsertFXSetuppage.

81(2)c: Track Info
[000...127]
[000...127]
81(2): Menu Command
81(2)d: Routing1
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetrackprograms
oscillator(s).
7:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
IFX1,2,3,4,5:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Commandonpage 163.
Off:ThetrackwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,orIFX1
5buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttheprograms
oscillatoroutputofthetracktobeconnectedinseriestoa
mastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)to
specifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
tracksBus(IFX/Output)SelectandtheChaintoandChain
settings(Seq83b)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
DKit:Youcanselectthisonlyifthespecifiedprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrumsorDoubleDrums).
TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2settings(Global55b)foreachkeyoftheselected
drumkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwantto
applyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
148
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 83: Insert FX Setup
Insert Effect:
83: Insert FX Setup

83
Menu
83a
IFX1...4
IFX5
[000...193]
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Chain:
83b
IFX1: Chain to
IFX2: Chain to
IFX3: Chain to
83a: Track Select

[IFX2...IFX5]
[IFX3...IFX5]
[IFX4...IFX5]
IFX1: Chain
IFX2: Chain
IFX3: Chain
IFX4: Chain
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Pan:#8:
83b: Insert Effect
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
settings.Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoinandout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effectsound(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.For
descriptionsoftheindividualeffects,pleaseseeEffect
Guide,beginningonpage 235.
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
page 592.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,inserteffectdynamic
modulation(Dmod)andthepostIFXPan:#8,Send1,and
Send2arecontrolledontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyCh
(Seq84(5)(6)(7)(8)a).Thecontrolchangesusedarethesame
asinProgrammode.
Thepan(CC#8),send1and2settingsyoumakeherewillbe
usedwhenthesongisplayedorrecordedfromthe
beginning.Ifyouchangethesettingswhilerecordinga
MIDItrack,thechangeswillberecordedaspartofthe
musicaldata,andthesettingswillchangewhenthedatais
playedback.Youcanalsochangethesesettingsduring
playback.Howeverifpan(CC#8),send1,or2datahasbeen
recorded,thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#8,
CC#93,andCC#91canbereceivedtocontrolthepan
followingtheinserteffect,send1,orsend2
respectively,andchangetheirsettings.Whenyou
switchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willtransmit
thesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawillbetransmitted
ontheMIDIchannelsspecifiedintheIFX15pages
(Seq84(5)(6)(7)(8)a).(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQMode
TrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
[L000...C064...R127]
Bus:
Bus (Bus Select)
Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
[Off, L/R]
[Off, 1, 2]
Send1/2:
Send1
Send2
[000...127]
[000...127]
page 59.
83: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
149
Sequencer mode
84: IFX1
84
Menu
Note:Songssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
selectanEffectPreset,savetheSongtomedia,andthenre
loadtheSong,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
.
page 60.
84a
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX Parameters
youchoseintheP83:InsertFXSetuppage.
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheinserteffect1you
selectedintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 240.
IFX On/Off
[Off, On]
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.ThisislinkedwiththeOn/Off
settingintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
[Ch01...16, All-R]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)fortheinserteffect.
84: Menu Command
Ch01...Ch16:Theinserteffectwillbecontrolledonthe
specifiedMIDIchannel.
AllR:Thechannelofanytrackroutedthroughthiseffect
canbeusedtocontroltheeffect.(Channelsofeachrouted
trackwillbeindicatedby*.)
Commandonpage 163.
Drum Kits and the MIDI Control Channel

IfaTrackisusingaDrumKit,andtheTracksBus(IFX/
Output)Select(Seq81(2)d)isDKit,thisaffectstheMIDI
ControlChannelaswell.Inthiscase,theTracksMIDI
channelwillbeusedtocontrolanyeffectwhoseChissetto
AllR,regardlessoftheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global5
5b)settingsorthesettingsoftheDrumKitIFXPatchmenu
command.
85: IFX2, 86: IFX3, 87: IFX4,

88: IFX5
Here,youcanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects25
Formoreinformation,pleasesee84:IFX1above.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
presets.
Combination,Sequencer).
storedwiththeSongyoudontneedtostorethemasan
favoritesettings.
aparticularSong,andthenlaterusethesameEffectPreset
inadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
settings.
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffector
selectedanewSong.Selectingthissettingfromthemenu
willnothaveanyeffect.
150
89: FX Control T0108,

810: FX Control T0916
89a
89
Menu
89b
89c
89d
Here,youcanspecifythebuses,andeffectcontrolbus,for
theoutputsoftracks18and916.
89(10)a: Routing Map

89(10)c: Track Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee81(2)a:RoutingMapon
page 148and21:TrimT0108,22:TrimT0916on
page 123.
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 89: FX Control T0108, 810: FX Control T0916
89(10)d: Routing2
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthe
oscillator(s).Thisisthesameparameterasinthe81:IFX
Routing1T0108andT0916pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(IFX/Output)Select
onpage 148.
FX Control Bus
[Off, 1, 2]
SendstheoutputofthetracktoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
page 238.
Commandonpage 163.
151
Sequencer mode
SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO)

Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthemastereffectsand
thetotaleffect.Forinstance,youcan:
Routeasoundtothemastereffectsandthetotaleffect
Makedetailedsettingsforthemastereffectsandthetotal
effect
page 235.
91c: TFX
TFX:
TFX
TFX On/Off
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP9:MFX/TFX/LFO
(Master/TotalEffect/LFO)onpage 61.
91: Routing
91d: Master Volume

9-1
Menu
9-1a
9-1b
9-1b
Master Volume
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91c:MasterVolumeon
page 62.
91: Menu Command
9-1c
9-1d
Here,youcanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemOn/Off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffect
isinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Commandonpage 163.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingonpage 61.
91a: Track Select

91b: MFX1, 2
MFX1:
MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
Return 1
[000...193]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
MFX2:
MFX2
MFX2 On/Off
Return 2
[000...171]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
Chain:
Chain On/Off
Chain Direction
Chain Level
[Off, On]
[MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
152
SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 92: MFX1
MFX1 Parameters
92: MFX1
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheeffectyou
choseintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
92
Menu
92a
92b
Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
92: Menu Command
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouselected
forMFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1page.
92a: MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/
offsettingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
[Ch01...16, G ch]
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
Commandonpage 163.
93: MFX2, 94: TFX
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
andtheTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usethe
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
forcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
TheparametersofMFX2,TFXarethesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1above.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
presets.
Combination,Sequence).
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostorethem
asanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheP9:MFX/TFX/
LFORoutingpage.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
settings.
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffector
selectedanewSong.Selectingthissettingfromthemenu
willnothaveanyeffect.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
153
Sequencer mode
95: Common FX LFO

82
8
Menu
82
8a
82
8b
ThetwoCommonFXLFO1,2allowyoutosynchronize
LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
LFOs.
95a: Common FX LFO1

Ctrl Ch (Control Channel)
[Ch01...Ch16, Gch]
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Sync (Reset)
[Off, On]
Frequency
[0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
MIDI/Tempo Sync
[Off, On]
BPM
[MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note
[ , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Times
[01...32]
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee95a:CommonFXLFO1
onpage 63.
95b: Common FX LFO2

TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFXLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee95a:CommonFXLFO1
above.
95: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
154
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR 101: Pattern Edit
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR

Here,youcanrecordandeditpatterns,assignpatternsto
tracksofasong,andmakeRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/
Recording)settings.Youcanalsoconvertdrumtrack
patternsforuseinProgram,orothermodes.
Song Select
Youcanusepresetpatterns,anduserpatterns.
Presetpatternsprovidepatternsthataresuitablefor
drumtracks;youcanselectthesepatternsfromanysong.
Thereareonehundreduserpatternsforeachsong;you
cancreateandstoreyourownpatternsasdesired.
Track Select
Youcancreatethedesiredperformancedataforatrack
byusingthemenucommandsPutToTrackorCopyTo
Tracktoplaceorcopypatternsintoatrack.Formore
information,pleaseseePutToTrackonpage 187.
TheRPPRfunctionletsyouassignpatternstodifferent
keysandthentriggerthesepatternsbypressingnoteson
thekeyboardandrecordtheresultontothetrackin
realtime.Formoreinformation,pleasesee103:RPPR
Setuponpage 157.
Youcancreateuserdrumtrackpatterns.
UserpatternsinSequencermodecanbeconvertedusing
themenucommandConverttoDrumTrkPattern.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeConverttoDrumTrk
Patternonpage 188.
Note:UserpatternsinSequencermodearenotsaved
internally;youmustsavethemonanSDcard,andload
themeachtimeafterpoweringon.Ifyouconvertuser
patternstouserdrumtrackpatterns,theywillbepreserved
ininternalmemoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,
meaningthatyoucanmanagethemalongwithprograms
andcombinations.
[000...127: name]
Selectsasong.
Theuserpatternwillbecreatedinthesongyouselect.
[Track01...16, Master Track]
Selectsthetrackthatwillbeusedtorecord/playthepattern
data.Thepatterndatawillberecorded/playedusingthe
settingsofthetrackyouselect.Theareaattherightdisplays
theprogrambank,number,andnamefortheselectedtrack.
SettingsoftheMasterTrackwillbeignored.Themost
recentlyselectedTrack0116willbeused.
101b: Pattern (Pattern Bank), Pattern

Select, Tempo, Metronome, Reso,
Remove Data
Location
Popup
Song Select
Track
Select
Pattern
Bank
Resolution
Tempo Metronome
Pattern Select
Remove
Data
How to record a user pattern

1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesonginwhichyouwantto
createauserpattern.
2. UseTrackSelecttochoosethesoundthatyouwill
record.
Thepatternyourecordwillplaybackaccordingtothe
soundyouchoseinTrackSelect.
101: Pattern Edit

10-1
Menu
10-1a
3. UsePatternBankandPatternSelecttoselecttheUser
patternandthedesiredpatternnumber.
4. SelectthemenucommandPatternParameter,andin
thedialogbox,specifythenumberofmeasuresandthe
timesignatureofthepattern.
10-1b
5. Checkthetempoin .
10-1c
6. Ifyouwanttorecordinrealtime,setResotospecifythe
resolution,andpresstheREC( )buttonandthenthe
START/STOP(
)buttontobeginrecording.
Here,youcanrecordandeditpatterns,andassignthemto
tracksofasong.Thefollowingtypesofpatternoperations
areavailable.
Userpatternscanberecordedinrealtime(aswellas
recordedfromperformancesgeneratedbythe
arpeggiator),steprecorded,orcreatedusingtheGet
FromMIDITrackcommandorCopyPatterncommand.
Youcanalsocopyapresetpatterntoauserpatternand
editit.(Youcantdirectlyeditapresetpattern.)
Presetpatternsanduserpatternscanbeplacedinor
copiedintoatrack.
Whenyoufinishrecordingtotheendofthemeasures
specifiedbythePatternParameter,youwillreturntothe
firstmeasure,andcancontinuerecordingwhileadding
morematerial.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLoopAll
Tracksonpage 117.
Ifyouwanttoperformsteprecording,selectthemenu
commandStepRecording(LoopType)toopenthedialog
box,andrecord.Formoreinformationonsteprecording
procedure,pleaseseeStepRecordingonpage 167and
StepRecording(LoopType)onpage 186.
7. Afterrecording,usethemenucommandsasdesiredto
editthepatternortheeventsinthepattern.
Youcanconvertuserpatternstodrumtrackpatterns.
101a: Location, Song Select, Track

Select
Location
[01...99]
Displaysthecurrentmeasurelocationoftheselected
pattern.
155
Sequencer mode
Control data in pattern recording

Torecordcontroldatainapattern,youshouldrestore
thecontroldatatoitsnormalvaluewithinthepattern.
Ifyoufailtorestorethenormalvalue,unnecessary
controldatamayremaininastuckpositionwhen
youplacethepatterninasongorusetheRPPR
functiontoplaythepattern.However,thefollowing
controldatawillbeautomaticallyresettothefollowing
valueswhenthesongorRPPRfunctionfinishes
playingthepattern,orwhenplaybackishalted.
Controller
USED IN SONG TRACK

Thisareaindicatesthepatternusagestatusforthepatterns
selectedforthetrack.
USED IN RPPR
ThisareaindicatestheRPPRinwhichtheselectedpatternis
used.Theassignedkeyandthespecifiedtrackareshown.
Reset value
Modulation1(CC#01)
00(zero)
Modulation2(CC#02)
00(zero)
Expression(CC#11)
127(max)
Ribboncontroller(CC#16)
64(center)
Damperswitch(CC#64)
00(zero)
Sostenutoswitch(CC#66)
00(zero)
Softswitch(CC#67)
00(zero)
3:EventEditseep.169
EGsustainlevel(CC#70)
64(center)
4:PianoRollseep.186
Resonancelevel(CC#71)
64(center)
5:PatternParameterseep.186
EGreleasetime(CC#72)
64(center)
6:ErasePatternseep.186
EGattacktime(CC#73)
64(center)
Lowpassfiltercutoff(CC#74)
64(center)
7:CopyPatternseep.186
EGdecaytime(CC#75)
64(center)
LFO1speed(CC#76)
64(center)
10:PutToTrackseep.187
LFO1depth(pitch)(CC#77)
64(center)
11:CopyToTrackseep.188
LFO1delay(CC#78)
64(center)
12:ConverttoDrumTrkPatternseep.188
FilterEGintensity(CC#79)
64(center)
13:LoadDrumTrackPatternseep.188
SW1modulation(CC#80)
00(zero)
SW2modulation(CC#81)
00(zero)
Channelaftertouch
00(zero)
Pitchbender
00(zero)
Pattern (Pattern Bank)
[Preset, User]
Selectsthetypeofpattern.
IfPresetisselected,itwillnotbepossibletorecord.Youwill
beabletoselectandexecutetheCopyPattern,Bounce
Pattern,PutToTrack,andCopyToTrackmenucommands.
Pattern Select
[P000...605, U00...U99]
Selectsapattern.
UserpatternscanberenamedintheP10:Pattern/RPPR
PatternNamepage.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepattern.Formore
information,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 110.
Metronome
[Only REC, REC & Play, Off]
Specifieswhetherthemetronomewillsoundduring
recordingorplayback.Formoreinformation,pleasesee0
8c:MetronomeSetuponpage 119.
Reso (Realtime REC Quantize Resolution)

[Hi, 3 ]
Specifieshowthetimingofthedatabeingrecordedintothe
patternwillbecorrected.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Resolution(RealtimeRECQuantizeResolution)on
page 111.
Remove Data
[Off, On]
On(checked):Unwantedperformancedatacanberemoved
duringpatternrecording.Theprocedureisthesameas
explainedinRemoveDataofLoopAllTracks.Formore
information,pleaseseeRemoveDataonpage 118.
156
101c: USED IN SONG TRACK,

USED IN RPPR
101: Menu Command
2:StepRecording(LoopType)seep.186
8:BouncePatternseep.187
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR 102: Pattern Name
102: Pattern Name
103: RPPR Setup

10-2
Menu
10-3
Menu
10-3a
10-3b
10-2a
102a: Location, Song Select, Track

Select
102b: Pattern, Pattern Select, Tempo,
Metronome, Reso, Remove Data
Formoreinformation,pleasesee101a:Location,Song
Select,TrackSelectonpage 155and101b:Pattern
(PatternBank),PatternSelect,Tempo,Metronome,Reso,
RemoveDataonpage 155.
102c: User Pattern Names

Pattern name
[U00...U99]
Here,youcanrenamethepattern.Pressthetexteditbutton
toopenthedialogbox,andinputthename.Youcanenter
upto24characters.SeeEditingnamesonpage 117ofthe
Operationguide.
102: Menu Command
2:StepRecording(LoopType)seep.186
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.186
5:PatternParameterseep.186
6:ErasePatternseep.186
7:CopyPatternseep.186
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsfortheRPPR(Realtime
PatternPlay/Recording)function.RPPRletsyouassign
patternstoindividualkeys,andthenplaybackpatterns
simplybypressingindividualnotesonthekeyboard.This
performancecanberecordedinrealtime.
Foreachsong,youcanassigneitherapresetpatternora
userpatterntoeachofthe72keysintherangeC#2C8.For
eachkey,youcanspecifythepattern,tracknumber,and
howthepatternwillbeplayed.
KeysusedtoplaypatternsviaRPPRcannotbeusedfor
thearpeggiator.IfRPPRison,keystowhichapatternis
notassignedwillplaytheprogramofthetrackthats
selectedinTrackSelect.Inthiscase,thearpeggiator
willoperateifArpeggiatorA,orBisactive,and
assignedtothetrack.Notesgeneratedbythe
arpeggiatorwillnottriggertheRPPRfunction.
WhenLocalControlisOFF(LocalControlOnGlobal
11a),thekeyboardwillnottriggerRPPRpattern
playback,exceptvianotesreceivedattheMIDIINthat
matchthecurrentlyselectedtrackschannel.Ifyouhave
recordedonlythetriggernotesonanexternal
sequencerandwishtousetheplaybackfromthe
externalsequencertotriggerRPPRpatternson
KROME,setLocalControlOFF.
IfyouwantthenotedatageneratedbyRPPRtobe
recordedbytheexternalsequencer,setLocalControl
ON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionoftheexternal
sequencer.SeeLocalControlOnsettingsonpage 359.
IntheRPPRSetuppage,RPPRisturnedon
automatically.Thiswillbethesameresultaswhenthe
RPPRcheckbox(Seq01(2)a)ineachpageischecked.
8:BouncePatternseep.187
103a: Song Select, Track Select, Tempo
9:GetFromTrackseep.187
Song Select
10:PutToTrackseep.187
11:CopyToTrackseep.188
Selectsthedesiredsong.TheRPPRsettingswillbeassigned
tothesongyouselecthere.
12:ConverttoDrumTrkPatternseep.188
(Tempo)
13:LoadDrumTrackPatternseep.188
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepatterns.(Seq01(2)a)
Commandonpage 163.
Track Select
[000...127: name]
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
[Track01...16, Master Track]
WhenyouplayakeythatisnotassignedtoRPPR,itwill
soundusingthesettingsofthetrackthatsselectedinTrack
Select.Usethistoselectthetrackthatyouwanttoplay
togetherwithRPPR,ortoauditionapatternbeforeyou
assignit.Theprogrambank,number,andnameofthe
selectedtrackisshownattheright.
EachRPPRpatternwillbeginplayingwhenyoupressthe
assignedkey,regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.Itwill
soundusingthesettingsofthetrackselectedinTrack
Name.
TheMasterTracksettingisignored.Thelastselected
Track0116willbeused.
157
Sequencer mode
Keyboard & Assigned Graphics

Thisshowstheselectedkey,andthekeystowhichapattern
hasbeenassignedbytheRPPRfunction.Seediagrambelow.
Non-assignable keys
SEQ:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresofthe
sequencersong.
Sync settings
Key 1 on
Not assigned keys
Assigned keys
Key 2 on
Key 1 off
Song
Selected key
C4
Key range
Key range
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to

Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Sync: Off
Pattern 1
103b: RPPR Setup

KEY (Key Select)
Pattern 2
[C#2...C8]
SpecifiesthekeytowhichyouwanttoassignanRPPR
pattern.
Thefollowingparameterswillapplytothekeythatyou
selecthere.
akey(seeOGp.10).
Assign
Off(unchecked):Thatkeywillsoundthecurrentlyselected
trackatthecorrespondingpitch,justasinnormalSequencer
mode.
Mode
[Once, Manual, Endless]
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternassignedtothe
specifiedKEYwillbeplayed.
Once:Whenyoupressthekey,thecompletepatternwill
playoncetotheendandthenstop.
Manual:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingaslongasyou
continueholdingthekey,andwillstopassoonasyou
releasethekey.
Endless:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingevenafteryou
releasethekey.Tostopthepatternplayback,pressanynote
belowC2,orpressthesamekeyonceagain.
Same key, or C2
Key-on
Key-off
START
STOP
Once
START
STOP
Endless
Shift
[12...+12]
Adjuststheplaybackpitchofthepatternforthespecified
KEYinsemitonestepsoverarangeof1octave.
Withasettingof0,thepatternwillbeplayedatitsoriginal
pitch.
Sync
[Off, Beat, Measure, SEQ]
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternplaybackwillbe
synchronizedwhenyoupressthespecifiedKEY.
Off:Thepatternwillbeginplayingatthemomentyoupress
thenote.
Beat:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothebeatoftheother
patternsthatarealreadyinplay.Thissettingissuitable
whenyouwishtoplayphrasepatternsinunison.
Measure:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresof
thepatternthatwasstartedbythefirstkey.Thissettingis
suitableforrhythm,bassordrumpatterns.
158
Sync: Measure
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: SEQ
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
WhenBeatorMeasureareselected,patternplaybackwill
beginwhenyoupressthefirstkey.Thesecondand
subsequentpatternsthataretriggeredfromthekeyboard
willsynchronizetothepatternthatwasstartedbythe
firstkey;withasettingofBeattheywillsynchronizein
stepsofabeat,andwithasettingofMeasuretheywill
synchronizeinstepsofameasure.
WhenSEQisselected,thepatternwillplaybackin
synchronizationwiththemeasuresofthesequencersong.
Thepatternwillsynchronizewiththecurrentlyplaying
song,soyoumuststartthesongbeforeyouplaynoteson
thekeyboard.
Beat,Measure,andSEQwillcausethepatterntostart
immediatelyifyouplaythekeywithinathirtysecond
noteofthetimingoftherespectivebeatormeasure,butif
youplaythekeylaterthanthis,thestartofthepattern
willbedelayedbyabeat.
SetthistoSEQifyouwantpatternplaybackbyRPPRto
besynchronizedtothecurrentlyrunningarpeggiator.
STOP
Manual
START
Pattern 2
[Off, On]
On(checked):WhenyouplaythekeyspecifiedbyKEY,the
patternselectedinPatternwillbetriggered.
Key-on
Sync: Beat
Pattern 1
Note:Ifyouwantthearpeggiatorperformanceto
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningRPPRplayback,turn
OffthearpeggiatorsKeySync.Thearpeggiatorwill
synchronizetothebeatbasedontheRPPRplaybacktiming.
Note:Ifyouwantthedrumtrackpatternperformanceto
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningRPPRplayback,turn
OnthedrumtrackfunctionsSync(ineachmode,theDrum
TrackpageTrigger).Thedrumtrackwillbetriggeredat
intervalsofonemeasureattheRPPRplaybacktiming.
Stopping RPPR pattern playback

YoucanstopallcurrentlyrunningRPPRpatternplayback
bypressingC2oranylowerkey.
PatternplaybackwillstopimmediatelyforkeyswhoseSync
parameterissettoOff,butpatternplaybackforotherkeys
willstopatthebeginningofthebeatormeasure.Youcan
immediatelystoppatternplaybackforkeyswhoseSyncis
OnbypressingC2oralowerkeytwiceinrapidsuccession.
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR 103: RPPR Setup
Pattern Bank
Pattern
[Preset, User]
[P000...605, U00...99]
SelectstheRPPRpatternforthekeyselectedinKEY.Ifthe
selecteduserpatterncontainsnomusicaldata,therewillbe
nosoundwhenyoupressthatkey.
Track
[Track 01...16]
SelectsthetrackthatwillbeusedfortheRPPRpattern
selectedfortheKEY.Whenyouplaythekey,thepatternwill
beplayedaccordingtothesettingsofthetrackyouselect
here.YoucanmaketracksettingsintheP0:Play/RECP5:
MIDIFilterpages.
WhenyourecordinrealtimewiththeRPPNfunction
turnedon,thedatawillberecordedonthetrackyouselect
here.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRecordinganRPPR
performance.
Informationshowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforTrack.
Information
Thisareashowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforthetrack.
Revert
Whenyoupressthisbutton,thePattern(PatternBank),
PatternSelect,andTracksettingsofthelasteditedKEYfor
whichAssignwascheckedwillbecopiedtothese
parametersofthecurrentlyselectedKEY.
103: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
159
Sequencer mode
SEQ P11: Cue List

Thecuelistallowsplaybackofmultiplesongsinsuccession.
Youcanspecifyanumberofrepetitionsforeachsong.
Tempo Mode
[Auto, Manu]
TheKROMEallowsyoutocreatetwentycuelists.Asingle
cuelistcanholdupto99songs.
Auto:Playbackwillfollowthetempospecifiedbyeachsong
inthecuelist.Itwillnotbepossibletochangethe (Tempo)
settingduringplayback.
Eachunitinacuelistiscalledastep,andyoucanspecify
asongnumberandarepeat(numberofrepetitions)foreach
step.
Manu(Manual):Tempospecifiedinthesongwillbe
ignored,andplaybackwillusethetempospecifiedabove
for (Tempo).
Forexampleyoucouldcreateeachpartofasong(intro,
melodyA,melodyB,break,solobacking,endingetc.)asan
individualsong,anduseacuelisttoplaytheintrotwice,
melodyAfourtimes,melodyBfourtimes,thebreaktwice,
melodyAfourtimes...etc.toproducetheentiresong.In
caseswhenyouwishtochangethestructureofthesong,
thisCueListfunctioncanhelpyouworkmoreefficiently.
Cue List Select
ThemenucommandConverttoSongletsyoutransformthe
songsinacuelistintoasinglesong.
Forexample,youcanuseacuelisttocreatethebacking,
convertthecuelisttoasong,andthenaddsolophraseson
unusedtracks.
[C00...C19: name]
Selectsthecuelistthatyouwishtoplay.
Whenusingacuelisttoplaysongs,youmustfirstloadthe
necessarydataintointernalmemory,eitherfrommedia,or
byaMIDIdatadumpfromanexternalsequencer.
SelectingacuelistinthispagewillcauseaSongSelect
message(correspondingtothecuelistnumber)and
SongPositionPointermessagetobetransmitted.When
aSongSelectmessageisreceivedfromthespecified
source,thecuelistwillbeswitched.
Track Select
[Track01...Track16: name]
Selectsthetrackthatyouwishtoplaymanuallyfromthe
keyboardalongwiththeplaybackofthecuelist.
111: Cue List

11-1
Menu
11-1a
Whileacuelistisplaying,youcanplayalongusingthe
tracksettingsandmusicaldataofthesongselectedbythe
currentStep(Seq111b).
Thetrackselectedherecanbespecifiedindependentlyfor
eachsonginthecuelist.
Whenyouareplayingbackdifferentsongsinsuccession,
andwanttoplayalongusingthesameprogramonthe
keyboard,setTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)tothesametrack
andprogramforeachstep.
11-1b
Attherightyoucanviewtheprogrambank,program
number,andnameoftheprogramselectedforTrackSelect.
11-1c
Location
111a: Location, Meter, , Tempo Mode,

Cue List Select, Track Select
Location
[0001:01.0009999:16.191]
Thisdisplaysthecurrentlocationwithintheselectedcue
list.
STEP/
SONG/
Length Step [Measure] Song (Cue Edit-Song)
111b: Cue List
Therangeofthebeatandclockwilldependonthetime
signatureofthecorrespondingsong.
Selected Step Information
Meter (Time Signature)
[1/4...16/16]
Thisdisplaysthetimesignatureofthecurrentlyplaying
song.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00]
Specifiesthetempoatwhichthesonginthecuelistwillbe
played).Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)on
page 110.
Tempo Mode
Tempo
Cue List
Select
Track
Select
Fromtheleft,thenumbersindicatethemeasure,beat,and
clock.Eachcanbesetseparately,andthiswillchangethe
currentlocationwithinthecuelist.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)isInternal,aSong
PositionPointermessagewillbetransmittedeachtime
youchangethelocationwithinthecuelist.IfMIDI
ClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,Song
PositionPointermessagesfromthespecifiedsource
willcausethelocationtochange.
160
Meter
Repeat Load FX?
Thisshowsinformationonthecurrentlyselectedorplaying
Step.
Step
[01...99/01...99]
Theselectedstepnumberisshownattheleft,andthetotal
numberofsteps(notincludingthelaststep)isshownatthe
right.
Song
[000...127]
Thisshowsthenumberandnameofthesongforthe
currentlyselectedstep.
Length
[000...999]
Thisshowsthenumberofmeasuresinthesongforthe
currentlyselectedstep.
SEQ P11: Cue List What to do when playing back a cue list and the songs do not transition smoothly
Step, Song, Repeat, Load FX?

Step [Measure]
111c: Insert, Cut, Copy, Current Step
[01...100 (M0001...M9999)]
Thisdisplaysthestepnumberanditsstartingmeasure.
Stepindicateseachstepnumber.TheStepindicatedbythe
symbolisthecurrentlyselectedorcurrentlyplayingstep.
ThiscanbedirectlyselectedbySong(Seq111b)orCurrent
Step(Seq111c).Whenstopped,pressingtheSTART/STOP
(
)buttonwillcauseplaybacktobeginfromthisstep.
Measureindicatesthestartingmeasureofeachstep.This
cannotbeedited.
Song (Cue Edit-Song)

[S000...S127: name/End, Continue to Step01]
S000...S127:Specifiesasongforeachstep.Thiscannotbe
editedduringplayback.
EndandContinuetoStep01canbespecifiedonlyforthe
laststepofthecuelist.
End:Playbackwillstopatthelaststepofthecuelist.
ContinuetoStep01:Atthelaststepofthecuelist,playback
willreturntoStep01andthecuelistwillcontinueplaying
endlessly.Tostop,presstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
Thesongpositionbaratthebottomindicatesthelocationof
thecurrentmeasurewithinthesongofthisstep.
Repeat
[01...64, FS]
Specifiesthenumberoftimesthatthesongofthisstepwill
berepeated.
FS:Afootswitchconnectedtotherearpanelcanbeusedto
specifythepointatwhichthesongwillstoprepeating.When
youpressthefootswitch,thecurrentrepetitionofthesongwill
finishplaying.Playbackwillthenadvancetothenextstep.Set
FootSwitchAssign(Global21a)toCueRepeatControl.
Load FX? (Cue Edit-Load Fx)
[Off, On]
Specifieswhethertheeffectsspecifiedbythesongassigned
toeachstepwillbeused.
On(checked):Theeffectsettingsofthesongspecifiedfor
thecurrentstepwillbeused.Whenplaybackmovestothe
nextstep,theeffectsettingswillalsochange.
Off(unchecked):Theeffectsettingswillnotchange.
Dependingontheeffectsettings,acertainamountof
timemayberequiredtoswitcheffects.Inthiscase,
playbackwillnotbesmoothfromsongtosong.
Ifyouwanttotransitionsmoothlyfromsongtosong
insideofacuelist,checkLoadFX?inStep01.Forthe
remainingsteps,donotcheckLoadFX?
Withthesesettings,theeffectswillbesetbefore
playbackbegins,sotherewillbenotimelagto
interruptthesmoothtransitionbetweensongs.
Althoughitisnotpossibletochangetheeffecttypesin
themiddleofacuelist,youcanusethedynamic
modulationfunctionorMIDIcontrolchanges(effect
control)toapplyreverbmoredeeplytocertainsongs,
orraisetheLFOspeedforothersongs,etc.
Whenusingacuelisttoconstructasong,we
recommendthismethod.Whenyouexecutethe
ConverttoSongmenucommand,theeffectsettingsof
theStep01songwillbespecifiedatthebeginningof
thesongthatiscreatedbytheconversion.
EvenwhenLoadFX?isnotchecked,theremaybeatime
laginthetransitionfromonesongtothenext,depending
onthemusicaldatainthesong.Theremayalsobecasesin
whichthemusicaldataatthetransitionbetweensongs
doesnotplayatthecorrecttiming.Tofixthis,youcanedit
themusicaldataofthesong,orconvertthecuelisttoa
singlesong.IfyouuseConverttoSongtoconvertthecue
listtoasong,therewillbenotimelagatthetransition,and
themusicaldatawillplayatthecorrecttiming.
Insert
WhenyoupresstheInsertbutton,thestepdatathatwas
temporarilysavedinthebufferbytheCopybuttonorCut
buttonwillbeinsertedattheCurrentStep.(Ifcopyorcut
hasnotbeenexecuted,defaultdatawillbeinserted.)
Cut
WhenyoupresstheCutbutton,theCurrentStepwillbe
cut,anditsdatawillbesavedtemporarilyinthebuffer.If
youInsertimmediatelyafteryoucut,thedatawillreturn
thestateinwhichitwasbeforeyoucut.
Copy
WhenyoupresstheCopybutton,thedataoftheCurrent
Stepwillbesavedtemporarilyinthebuffer.
PresstheInsertbuttontoinsertthecopiedstepintothe
CurrentStep.
Current Step
[01...100]
Selectsthestepthatwillbeinserted,cutorcopied.
Ifyouwishtoplaybackfromastepinthemiddleofthecue
list,selectthedesiredstephere,andpresstheSTART/STOP
(
)button.
SeeCreatingandplayingaCueListonpage 74ofthe
Operationguide.
What to do when playing back a cue list

and the songs do not transition smoothly
Differenteffectsettingsfromsongtosong,anddense
amountsofplaybackdatawithinthesong,maycauseatime
lagbetweensongsorcreatetimingproblemsduring
transitionsincuelistplayback.Insuchcases,useConvertto
Songtotransformthecuelistintoasinglesong.Whenyou
playbackthissong,therewillbenotimelagatthe
transition,andthedatawillplayatthecorrecttiming.
Iftheeffectsettingsdifferbetweensongs,andyouwantto
smooththetransitionbetweensongs,checkFXforStep01.
Thisway,theeffectsettingswillbemadebeforeplayback
begins,andtherewillbenotimelagwhencuelistplayback
isstartedorwhenswitchingfromsongtosong.Althoughit
willnotbepossibletochangeeffecttypeswithinthecuelist,
youcanusedynamicmodulationorMIDIcontrolchanges
suchasEffectControltocontroltheeffectswithinthecue
list,forexampleapplyingreverbmoredeeplyoncertain
songs,orraisingtheLFOspeedforaspecificsong.We
recommendthismethodifyouwillbeusingacuelistto
constructthesong.
WhenyouexecutethemenucommandConverttoSong,the
effectsettingsoftheStep01songwillbespecifiedforthe
songthatresultsfromtheconversion.
EvenifFXisnotchecked,theremaybecasesinwhichatime
laginthetransitionbetweensongs,dependingonthe
musicaldataofthesong.Also,theremaybecasesinwhich
themusicaldataisnotplayedatthecorrecttimingatsong
transitions.Ifthisoccurs,youcaneditthemusicaldataof
thesong,orconvertthecuelisttoasongforplayback.Ifyou
useConverttoSongtoconvertthecuelisttoasong,there
willbenotimelagduringplaybackatthetransitions,and
themusicaldatawillbeplayedatthecorrecttiming.
Whenyoucompleteacuelistandconvertitintoasong,
thetracksettings(e.g.,program,pan,volume)ofeach
songwillbeconvertedintoperformancedatasothat
theywillbereproducedcorrectly.However,itmaynot
bepossiblefortheplaybackresultofacuelisttobe
161
Sequencer mode
convertedtoasongifsettingssuchastheMIDIchannel
donotmatch.
111: Menu Command
Using a foot switch to switch the Step
YoucanuseafootswitchtoswitchtheStep.
IfyousetRepeattoFS,afootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjackwillcontrolthetimingat
whichthesongstopsrepeating.SetFootSwitchAssign
(GlobalP2:Controllerspage)toCueRepeatControl.
Converting a cue list into a song
6:CopySongseep.190
Althoughitisnotpossibletorecordadditionalmaterial
ontotracksinacuelist,youcanconvertacuelisttoasong,
andthenrecordsolosetc.onvacanttracks.Youwillalso
needtoconvertacuelisttoasongifyouwishtosaveitto
externalmediaasSMFdata.
1. SelectthemenucommandConverttoSong.
Adialogboxwillappear.
2. InToSong,specifythedestinationsongnumberfor
theconverteddata.
Thecuelistnamewillautomaticallybeassignedasthesong
nameoftheconverteddata.(Fordetailsandcautions
regardingConverttoSong,pleaseseeConverttoSong
(ConvertCueListtoSong)onpage 189.)
Inthedialogboxthatappears,itisnotnecessarytospecify
SetLengthwhenselectinganewsongastheconversion
destination.Thenumberofmeasuresintheconvertedsong
willbeused.PresstheOKbutton,andtheConvertCueList
dialogboxwillappear.
3. PresstheOKbutton.
Thecuelistwillbeconvertedintoasong.AccesstheP01:
Play/RECpage,selectthesongnumberthatyouspecifiedas
theconversiondestination,andchecktheresults.
162
2:RenameCueListseep.189
3:DeleteCueListseep.189
4:CopyCueListseep.189
5:ConverttoSong(ConvertCueListtoSong)seep.
189
Commandonpage 163.
Sequencer: Menu Command Memory Status
Sequencer: Menu Command

Tip:Whilethiscommandisactive,theENTERbuttonwill
astheCancelbutton.

Copy From Song

CopyFromSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Play/REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
Thiscommandcopiesallofthesettingdataandmusical
datafromthespecifiedsongtothecurrentlyselectedsong.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Toexitwithout
executing,presstheCancelbutton.
Memory Status
Thisdisplaystheremainingamountofsequencermemory.
ItisavailableoneverypageinSequencermode.
Exclusive Solo
ThisspecifieshowtheSolofunctionwilloperate.Eachtime
youselectExclusiveSolo,thesettingwillalternatebetween
multiplesoloandexclusivesolo.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeExclusiveSoloonpage 64.
ItisavailableoneverypageinSequencermode.
Rename Song
RenameSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
pages.
Here,youcanrenametheselectedsong.Anameofupto24
characterscanbeinput.
page 91oftheOwnersmanual.
1. InFrom,specifythecopysourcesongnumber.
2. Selectthedatathatyouwishtocopy.
All:willcopyallsettingdataandmusicaldata(trackevents
andpatterns,etc.).
WithoutTrack/PatternEvents:willcopyonlythesetting
dataofsongs,exceptforPlayLoopandRPPRdata.
BeawarethatifyouexecuteAll,allsettingdataandmusical
dataofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbeerasedand
rewrittenbythedatafromthecopysourcesong.Ifyou
executeWithoutTrack/PatternEvents,songsettingdata
(butnotPlayLoopandRPPR)willberewritten.
Load Template Song

LoadTemplateSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandloadsatemplatesong.
Thebuiltinsequencercontainssixteendifferentpreset
templatesongs(P0015)thatcontainsettingsforprograms
andeffectsappropriateforvariousmusicalstyles.Youare
alsofreetocreateyourownfavoritesettingsforprograms,
trackparameters,andeffects,andsavethemasoneof
sixteenusertemplatesongs(U0015).Formore
information,pleaseseeSaveTemplateSong(SaveasUser
TemplateSong)onpage 164.
Delete Song
DeleteSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
pages.
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedsong.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,themusicaldata,setting
data,andpatternsetc.ofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbe
erased,andthememoryareaallocatedtothatsongwillbe
freed.
1. InFrom,specifythetemplatesongthatyouwishto
load.
2. IfyoucheckCopyPatterntoTracktoo?,theCopyPat
ternToTrackdialogboxwillappearautomaticallyafter
LoadTemplateSonghasbeenexecuted.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthis,onlythetemplate
songyouspecifiedinstep2willbeloaded.
Whenyouexecute,songsettingsotherthanPlayLoopand
RPPRwillbecopied.
163
Sequencer mode
Ifinstep2youcheckedCopyPatterntoTracktoo?and
pressedtheOKbutton,theCopyPatternToTrackdialog
boxwillappear.
FF/REW Speed
FF/REWSpeedisavailableoneverypages,exceptforthe
Pattern/RPPRpageRPPRSetuptab.
Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedatwhichfastforwardor
rewindwilloccurwhenyoupresstheFFbuttonorREW
button.
ThisdialogboxisthesameasinthemenucommandCopy
ToTrack.
3. InToTrack,selectthecopydestinationtrack.
InMeasure,specifythebeginningmeasureofthecopy
destination.
Note:Track1ofallsixteenpresettemplatecontainsadrum
categoryprogram.(InpresettemplatesongsP02,P04,P08,
andP15drumcategoryprogramsarespecifiedformultiple
tracks.)
Thepatternnamesofthepresetpatternsindicatethe
musicalgenreandpartoftheoptimaldrumcategory
program.
Byloadingthedrumtrackforthesepresettemplatesongs
andthecorrespondingpresetpatterns,youcanefficiently
setupadrumtrackthatissuitedtoeachpresettemplate
song.
Whenyouexecute,Measurewillcountupautomatically.
Youmaythencopypatternsaswell.Toexitthecommand,
presstheExitbutton.
Fordetailsonhowtocopypresetpatternstoasongalong
withthepresettemplatesong,pleaseseeUsingtemplate
songsonpage 58oftheOperationguide.
Save Template Song

(Save as User Template Song)
1. InSpeed,specifythespeed(relativetotheplayback
tempo)atwhichfastforwardandrewindwilloccur.
TheSpeedsettingisinmultiplesoftheplaybacktempo.A
settingof1isthesamespeedastheplaybacktempo.
Settingsof24respectivelycorrespondtodouble,triple,or
quadruplespeedoftheplaybacktempo.
Note:Fastforwardandrewindspeedsmaybeslowerin
regionswithdenseperformancedata.Fastforwardand
rewindspeedswilldifferbetweenregionswherethe
performancedataisdenseorsparse.
2. IfIgnoreTempoischecked,theplaybacktempoand
notelengthwillbeignored,andfastforwardand
rewindoccurs.
Ifthisitemisunchecked,fastforwardandrewindwillbe
performedatthespeedyouspecifyforSpeed.
Set Location
(Set Location for Locate Key)
SetLocationisavailableoneverypages,exceptforthe
PatternRPPRpage.
WhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton,youwillmovetothe
locationspecifiedhere.
SaveTemplateSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandsavestheprogramselections,track
parameters,andeffectsettingsetc.ofthecurrentsongasa
usertemplatesongU0015.Thesettingsyousaveherecan
alsobeloadedinSongPlaymode.
1. InLocation,specifythelocationtowhichyouwill
movewhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton.
Fromtheleft,thevaluesareMeasure(001999),Beat(01
16),andTick(000479).
Ifyouspecify001:01.000,youwillmovetothebeginningof
thesongwhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton.
Note:Whenthisdialogboxisnotopen,youcanholddown
theENTERbuttonandpresstheLOCATEbuttontosetthe
currentlocationastheSetLocationvalue.
1. InTo,specifytheusertemplatesong(U0015)inwhich
thedatawillbesaved.
Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,allsettings
ofthedestinationTemplatewillbeerasedandrewritten
withthecurrentsettings.
Note:ThePlayLoopandRPPRsettingsarenotsaved.Ifyou
wanttosavethesesettingsandtheuserpatterns,execute
SaveSEQinMediamodeandsavethemtoanSDcard.
164
Sequencer: Menu Command GM Initialize
InSequencermode,whenaGMSystemOnmessageis
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifaGMSystemOn
messageisrecordedinthesequencedata,theKROME
willberesettosettingsappropriateforGMjustasif
youhadexecutedthiscommand.However,inthese
cases,thevariousP9:MFX/TFX/LFOparameterswill
notbereset.
GM Initialize
GMInitializeisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
pages.
ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystemOnmessagetothe
Sequencermode,resettingalltrackstotheGMsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeonpage 165.
GM Initialize List
Page
ProgramT0108,T0916
P0
MixerT0108,0916
Parameter
ProgramSelect
Play/Mute,Solo
Pan
C064
C064
Volume
100
100
AutoLoadProgEQ
On
On
InputTrim
EQGainT0108,T0916
MIDIT0108,T0916
P3
OSCT0108,T0916
PitchT0108,T0916
ScaleT0108,T0916
P5
P7
+00.0
+00.0
3.20k
3.20k
MidGain[dB]
+00.0
+00.0
Settingremainsunchanged
LowGain[dB]
+00.0
+00.0
Status
MIDIChannel
BankSelectMSB/LSB
000
000
ForceOSCMode
OSCSelect
Portamento
Off
Off
Transpose
+00
+00
Detune
+0000
+0000
BendRange
+02
+02
UseProgramsScale
C1G9(Slope=000)
C1G9
MIDITempoSync.
Time
MIDIFilter1,2
001127(Slope=000)
001127
Off
Off
0000
0000
On
On
Arpeggiator
Variousparameters
DrumTrack
Variousparameters
Routing1T0108,T09
16
P8
Off
99
HighGain[dB]
VelZoneT0108,T0916
DelayT0108,T0916
Off
99
MidFrequency[Hz]
KeyZoneT0108,T0916
P4
Track 10
g(d)001
EQTrimT0108,T0916 Bypass
P2
Track 19, 1116

G001
InsertFXSetup
Bus(IFX/Output)Select
L/R
L/R
Send1(MFX1)
Send2(MFX2)
40
40
IFX15
Pan:#8
FXControlBus
Send1/2
Otherparameter
Routing2T0108,T09
16
FXControlBus
Off
Off
CommonFXLFO
Otherparameters
MFX1
StereoChorus
MFX2
ReverbSmoothHall
Chain
Off
ChainDirection
12
Level
127
Return1
127
Return2
50
Routing
P9
OtherMFXparameters
TFX
MasterLevel
165
Sequencer mode
Copy From Combi (Copy from

Combination)
CopyFromCombiisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandcopiestheparametersofthespecified
combinationtothesettingdataofthecurrentlyselected
song.
Note:Onlythetimbresusedbythecombinationwillbe
copied.TimbresinthecombinationwhoseStatusisOffwill
notbecopied.IfanytimbresaresettoMute,the
correspondingtracksofthesongwillbesettoaStatusof
Off.
If the recorded performance is not reproduced

correctly during playback
IfyouusethemenucommandCopyFromCombitocopy
thesettingsofacombination,andthenperformmultitrack
recordingwiththearpeggiatorturnedon,theremaybe
casesinwhichtheperformanceduringrecordingisnot
reproducedcorrectlyduringplayback.
MultipletracksthataresettothesameMIDIchannelare
combinedintoasinglestreamofperformancedataduring
recording.IfthereisatrackwiththesameMIDIchannelas
thetrackbeingplayedbythearpeggiator,thedataplayed
bythearpeggiatorwillbecombinedwiththeperformance
datathatwasplayedmanually,andallofthisdatawillbe
soundedbyeachtrackofthesamechannel(ifStatusisINT).
Insuchcases,youcansolvetheproblembycreatingatrack
thatwilldrivethearpeggiatoronadifferentMIDIChannel.
Iftherecordedperformanceisnotreproducedbythe
playback,checkthefollowingconditions.
Thesesettingscanbeexecutedautomaticallyifyoucheck
AutoadjustArpsettingforMultiRECinthemenu
commandCopyFromCombi.Normally,youwillcheckthis
toexecutethesettings.Inthiscase,theseadjustmentswill
notbenecessary,butyoucanverifyherethattheautomatic
adjustmentshavebeenmade.
SEQP7:ARP/DTARPSetupT0108page
1. InCombination,selectthecopysourcedestination.
ArpeggiatorRunA,B,andArpeggiatorAssignsettings
2. UsetheIFXs,MFXsandTFXcheckboxestospecify
whetheryouwanttheeffectsettingsofthecombina
tiontobecopiedaswell.
IFXs:Allinserteffectsettingsofthecopysource
combination(thecontentsoftheInsertFXSetuppageand
theIFX15effectparameters)willbecopied.
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysource
combinationwillbecopied.
TFX:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysourcecombination
willbecopied.
SEQP3:TrackParamMIDIChT0108page
MIDIChannelsettings
3. SpecifythedesiredAutoadjustArpsettingforMulti
RECsetting.
YouhavetheoptionofcheckingtheAutoadjustArpsetting
forMultiREC.Asnecessary,thisfunctionwilladjustthe
MIDIchanneletc.ofanytracksthatneedtobechanged,
and/oraddnewtracks,inordertoensurethatwhenyou
performmultirecordingwiththearpeggiatoron,thesame
soundwillbereproducedduringrecordingasduring
playback.
Note:Thisfunctionmakesadjustmentsdependingonthe
ARPstateofthecombination.Whenyoucopya
combinationthatwaswrittenwiththearpeggiatorturned
off,itisassumedthatyouwillleavethearpeggiatoroffin
thesong.Ifyouwanttousethearpeggiatorinthesong,you
shouldwritethecombinationwiththearpeggiatorturned
on,andthencopyittothesong.
Ifthisischecked,theMIDIchannelsetc.ofthetrackswillbe
corrected.MultiREC(Seq08b)andPLAY/MUTE/REC
(Seq01(2)a)willalsobesetautomatically.
Inaddition,RecordingSetup,Overwrite(Seq08b)willbe
selected.(NotethattheautomaticallysetMultiRECand
PLAY/MUTE/RECwillberesetwhenyoureselectthe
song.)
Note:Fordetailsonthedatathatwillbeadjusted,seebelow.
Thecontentdescribedherewillbecorrectedautomatically.
Dependingonthesettingsofthecombination,itmaybe
necessarytomakeadditionalchangestothetracksettingsin
additiontothesettingshere.
166
IfArpeggiatorRunAandBarechecked,andthe
arpeggiatorisassignedtoatrack,makesurethatMIDI
Channel(GlobalP1:MIDI)issettootherthan01.
MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel(GlobalP1:MIDI,
MIDIChannel)issetto01.
ArpeggiatorRun
MIDIChannela
IfeitherAorB
arechecked
01only
Correctionrequired
0102,0103,etc.
Nocorrectionrequired
01only
IfbothAandB 0102,0103,etc.
arechecked
010203,etc.
Correction
Correctionrequired
Correctionrequiredfor
onlyone
Nocorrectionrequired/
Correctionrequiredb
a. IftheMIDIChannelofmultipletracksoperatedbythe
arpeggiatorissetonlyto01,refertothelinesfor01
only.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01andoneother
channel,suchas01and02,thenrefertothelinesfor01
02,etc.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01and
multipleotherMIDIchannels,suchas01and02and03,
thenrefertothelinefor010203,etc.
Sequencer: Menu Command Copy from Program
b. Correctionisnecessaryonlyifthetracksoperatedbya
singlearpeggiatorareusingonlyMIDIChannel01.In
somecases,correctionmayalsobenecessaryifthetwo
arpeggiatorsusethesameMIDIchannel.
Dependingonthecombinationsettings,itmayalsobe
necessarytochangethetracksettingsaswell.
Theprecedingillustrationshowstheexampleofcopyingthe
combinationB103:EchoJammwithAutoadjustArp
settingforMultiRECuncheckedinCopyFromCombi.
Selectanewsong,andexecutethecopytoseetheresult.
(Formoreaboutthearpeggiatorsettingsinthis
combination,seepage 91.)
Usingthesesettingsasanexample,determinewhether
correctionisnecessary,andifso,whatneedstobecorrected.
ArpeggiatorRunAandBarechecked,andMIDIChannel
01and02areselected.Correctionisnecessaryforoneofthe
arpeggiators.Ifyouperformmultitrackrecordingwith
thesesettings,theMIDIchannelsofT01,02,and03arethe
same,sothehighregisterguitar/piano/pad(T02,T03,and
T05),thelowregisterbass(T01),andthegutarriffplayedby
arpeggiatorB(T02)willhavetheirperformancedata
combinedintoonestream,andtheperformancewillnotbe
reproducedatplayback.(T06isadummytrackusedto
triggerarpeggiatorA.)
1. SothatthebassplayedbyarpeggiatorBcanbe
recordedseparately,changetheMIDIchannelofT02.
SelecttheSEQP3:TrackParamMIDIT0108page,and
changetheT02MIDIChannelto03.
2. AddsettingsfortriggeringarpeggiatorB.
SelecttheSEQP3:TrackParamMIDIT0916page,andfor
track8(oranyunusedtrack),turnStatusOff,andsetthe
MIDIChannelto01.(T08willbeadummytrackusedto
triggerarpeggiatorA.)
3. SelecttheSEQP7:ARP/DTARPSetupT0916page.
Setthetrack8AssigntoB.
Thiswillproducethefollowingsettings.
T01
T02
T03
T04
T05
T06
T07
T08
Assign
Track
Off
Off
Off
Off
Status
INT INT INT INT INT INT
Off
Off
10
01
MIDICh.
01
03
01
02
01
01
Thiscompletesthecorrections.IntheSequencerP0:Play/
RECPreferencepage,setTrackSelecttoanytrackwhose
MIDIchannelis01.ChecktheMultiRECcheckboxand
performmultitrackrecording.
Copy from Program

CopyfromProgramisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyToneAdjuston
page 65.
Reset Tone Adjust

ToneAdjusttabofthePLAY/RECpage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeResetToneAdjuston
page 65.
Copy Drum Track

CopyDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTracktabofthe
ARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthedrumtracksettingsofthe
specifiedProgram,Combination,orSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyDrumTrackon
page 65.

EraseDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTracktabofthe
ARP/DTpage.
Patternonpage 66.
Detune BPM Adjust

DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonthePitchtabofTrack
Prampage.
Whentheprogramselectedforatrackusesaphrase,or
rhythmloopmultisample,youcanusethiscommandto
changetheBPMofthephraseorrhythm.TheBPMcanbe
adjustedbymodifyingthepitch.Thiscommandisavailable
whentheDetunesettingofthattrackisselected.Whenyou
executethiscommand,theselectedDetunevaluewillbe
adjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDetuneBPMAdjuston
page 103.
Copy Arpeggiator
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheArpAtabandArpB
tabofPlay/RECControlpageorSetuptab,ArpAtab,ArpB
tab,ScanZonetaboftheARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyArpeggiatoron
page 66.
Step Recording
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromtheprogramyouspecify
tothecurrentlyselectedsong.
StepRecordingisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
ThisisthesamefunctionasinCombinationmode;for
details,pleaseseeCopyfromProgramonpage 101.
Steprecordingallowsyoutospecifythelengthandvelocity
ofeachnotenumerically,andtoinputthepitchesfromthe
keyboard.YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonto
inputarestortie.
ThiscommandinSequencermodediffersfromitsbehavior
inCombinationmodeinthatthechannelsassignedtothe
tracksofthesongwillbepreservedregardlessofthewith
ArpsettingofthecopydestinationtracksMIDIChannel.
(Seestep4.)
Copy Tone Adjust

ToneAdjusttaboftheplay/RECpage.
Ifyouusesteprecordingtoinputdataintoatrackthat
alreadycontainssequencedata,alldatawillbeerased
fromtheFromMeasureandsubsequentmeasures.If
afterinputting,youdecidetoreverttothepriordata,
usetheComparefunction.
Toinputdatawithacontinuouslychangingvaluesuchas
pitchbend,itisbesttouseCreateControlData.Toinput
167
Sequencer mode
individualdataeventssuchasprogramchanges,useEvent
Edit.
thenoteswillbeinputasachordeveniftheyareactually
playedatdifferenttimes.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackintowhichyouwish
toinputdata,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)tospec
ifythemeasureatwhichyouwishtobegininput.
Eachtimeyoupressandreleasethekeyboard,thelocation
willadvancebythelengthspecifiedinstep4.
2. SelectStepRecordingtoopenthedialogbox.
Time
signature
Inputting rests
PresstheRestbuttontoinputarestofthelengthspecified
instep4.
Inputting a tie
IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwithoutpressingthekeyboard,
thepreviouslyinputnotewillbetied,andlengthenedby
theamountspecifiedinstep4.
IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwhileholdingdownanote,the
noteyouareplayingwillbetied,andlengthenedbythe
amountspecifiedinstep4.
Youcaneveninputnotesasshowninthefollowing
diagram.
3. InMeter,setthetimesignature.
Thiswillshowthetimesignaturethathasalreadybeenset
forthemeasure.
Ifyouchangethetimesignaturesetting,thetimesignature
dataofthemeasuresyourecordwillchange,andalltracks
willchangetothetimesignatureyouspecified.
4. InStepTime,specifythelength(intermsofanote
value)ofthebasicintervalatwhichyouwillinput
data.
Fromthepopupmenuattheleft,selectthenotelengthina
rangeof(wholenote)through(32ndnote).
Ifyouwanttheselectednotevaluetobeadottednoteora
triplet,usethepopupmenuattherighttoselectadot
. (Dot)ortriplet3(Triplet).Tousetheunmodified
valueoftheselectednote,choose(Normal).
Thefollowingtableshowsthenumberofclocksrepresented
byeachStepTimeselection.
(0:060)
(0:120)
(0:240)
(1:000)
(2:000)
(4:000)
Step Time =

Length (beats, clocks)
Location within the

Velocity
measure (beat, clock) Note number
Step Time =
Step Time =
Tie
On
Press E and C
Off
Release E (continue holding C)
ON
Press G
Deleting a note or rest

Todeleteanoteorrest,presstheStepBackbutton.The
locationwillmovebackwardbytheamountspecifiedin
step4,andthedatainthatintervalwillbedeleted.
Auditioning the next note before input
Ifyouwishtomakesureofthenextnotebeforeyouactually
inputit,pressthePAUSE( )button(theLEDwilllight
up).Nowwhenyoupressakey,youwillhearsoundbutthe
notewillnotbeinput.PressthePAUSE( )buttononce
again(theLEDwillgodark)tocancelthepausemodeand
resumeinput.
8. Whenyouarefinishedwithsteprecording,pressthe
Donebutton.
IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton,youwillreturntothe
conditionofbeforeyoubegansteprecording.
(0:090)
(0:180)
(0:360)
(1:240)
(3:000)
(6:000)
(0:040)
(0:080)
(0:160)
(0:320)
(1:160)
(2:320)
5. InNoteDuration,specifythelengththatthenotewill
actuallybeheld,relativetotheStepTime.
Ingeneral,100%willbetenuto,85%willbenormal,and
50%willbestaccato.
6. UseNoteVelocitytospecifythevelocityvalue(key
boardplayingstrength)ofthenotedata.
WiththePAUSE( )buttonpressed,youcanholddown
theENTERbuttonandplayanoteonthekeyboardto
specifythevelocityvalue.IfyousetNoteVelocitytoKey,
theactualvelocityatwhichyouplayedthekeywillbe
input.
7. Inputthenoteeventsdescribedbelowbyplayingnotes
onthekeyboardorbypressingthebuttonsinthelower
partofthedialogbox.
Inputting notes
Whenyoupressakeyonthekeyboard,thatnotenumber
willbeinputasanoteofthelengthspecifiedinstep4.
Whenyoupressachordonthekeyboard,thosenote
numberswillbeinputaschordsofthelengthspecifiedin
step4.Sinceeachofthenotenumbersyoupressbefore
releasingallofthekeyswillbeinputatthesamelocation,
168
Sequencer: Menu Command Event Edit
Event Edit
EventEditisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Inserting an event
SelectthelocationBeatTickatwhichyouwishtoinsertan
event,andpresstheInsertbuttontoinsertanevent.
Here,youcaneditindividualeventsofMIDIdatathatwere
input.
Deleting an event
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtodelete,andpresstheCut
buttontodeletetheevent.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwishto
edit,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)fieldtospecify
themeasureatwhichyouwishtobeginediting.
Moving an event
YoucanusetheCutbuttonandInsertbuttontomovean
event(asincutandpaste).
IfyouselectedTrack0116inEventEdit,selectingthis
commandwillopentheSetEventFiltersdialogbox.
UsetheCutbuttontodeletetheeventthatyouwishto
move,thenusetheInsertbuttontoinsertitatthedesired
location.
IfyouselectedMasterTrackinTrackSelect,thisdialogbox
willnotappear.
YoucanalsomoveaneventbymodifyingitsBeatTick
value.
Copying an event
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtocopy,andpresstheCopy
button.ThenselectthecopydestinationandpresstheInsert
buttontoinserttheeventatthatlocation.
Playing back an event
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwillopenand
thesongwillbeginplaying.Usethistoauditiontheedits
youvemadeinEventEdit.
IntheSetEventFiltersdialogboxyoucanselectthetypes
ofevents(musicaldata)thatwillappearandcanbeedited
intheeventeditwindow.
ForNoteyoucansetBottomandToptospecifytherangeof
notesavailableforediting.Normallyyouwillleavetheseset
atC1andG9.
ControlChangeletsyouspecifythecontrolchangenumber.
NormallyyouwillleavethissetatAll.
Youcanalsocheckvariousotherevents(PitchBend,
ProgramChange,AfterTouch,PolyAfterTouch,and
Exclusive).
2. PresstheOKbuttontoopentheEventEditdialogbox.
Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby
Measure.
Playbackwilloccuraccordingtothesettingsofthesong.
(ThesongwillplaybackinthesamewayasintheP011:
Play/RECpage,etc.)
Ifyouwanttoplaybackonlythetrackyoureediting,exit
EventEditandsolothedesiredtrack.Alternatively,
mutetheothertracks.Thetrackbeingeditedisindicated
byabluerectangle.
IfyoupresstheExcl.Solobutton,theexclusivesolo
functionwillturnon.
Off:Multiplesolooperation
Thesoloon/offstatewillchangeeachtimeyoupressa
solobutton.Youcanturnsoloonformultipletracks.
On:Exclusivesolooperation
Solowillbeonforonlyoneofthesixteentracks.
ThissettingislinkedwiththeExclusiveSolomenucom
mand.
IfthemenucommandPanelSWSoloModeOnis
checked,switches18willcontrolsoloon/offifyouve
selectedControlAssignMIXERT18orT916,evenwhile
usingEventEditPlay.
3. Intheupperpartofthedialogbox,MeasureandIndex
showthemeasurethatyouareeditingandtheeventsof
theindexnumberswithinthemeasure.
IfyouveeditedtheMeter,thechangewillnotbe
reflectedintheplaybackuntilyouexitEventEdit.
Youcantouchthescrollbarlocatedattherighttomoveto
theeventthatyouwishtoedit.
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstopand
youwillreturntotheEventEditdialogbox.
4. Selecttheeventthatyouwishtoedit,andusethe
VALUEcontrolleretc.tomodifyitsvalue(s).
Editingsystemexclusivemessages
BymodifyingthevalueoftheBeatTicklocationwithin
themeasure,youcanmovetheeventwithinthemeasure.
Youcanediteacheventbymodifyingitsdatavalue(s).
Whenyouselectanoteevent,itwillsound.
5. Youcanpressthebuttonslocatedatthebottomofthe
dialogboxtoediteventsasfollows.
YoucaneditKROMEparameterchangemessagesand
universalsystemexclusivemessages.
Fortheapplicableparameters,refertothetableonp.634.
*Dump/Ext*isshowninthefollowingcases.
Exclusivedumpdata
Parameterchangemessagesnotsupportedbythe
KROME,suchasmessagesfromanexternalMIDI
device
169
Sequencer mode
ParameterchangemessagesofotherthanSequencer
mode
*Unavailable*isshowninthefollowingcases.
KROMEparameterchangemessagesthatcannotbe
realtimerecordedbytheKROME,suchasMIDIChannel,
Status,orKey/VelZone.(Thiscorrespondstoparameters
notinthetableonpage 191.Suchcasesmayarisewhen
theparametercannotberealtimerecordedbyoperatinga
parameterontheKROME,butcanberecordedwhen
receivedviaMIDI.)
KROMEparameterchangemessagesforwhichthereisno
supportedparameter,duetoaninputmistakeorsome
otherreason
Note:
IFX1,2,3,4,5,MFX1,MFX2,andTFXeffectparameters
Toneadjust
Theseparameternamesanddisplayedvaluesarethe
parameternamesandvaluesforthecorrespondingeffect.
(EffectparametersconsistingofParameteranda
numeral(e.g.,Parameter71)areparametersnotusedby
thecurrentlyselectedeffect.)
Ifyourerecordingparameterchangemessagestoswitchthe
effecttype,theparameternameswillnotbethe
correspondingparameternamesfortheeffectthatis
originallyselectedatsongplayback;rather,thedisplaywill
showtheparametersforthecurrentlyselectedeffect.Be
awareofthiswhenswitchingeffects,andwhencontrolling
theirparameters.
TheBinEditbuttonwillbeavailablewhenanexclusive
messageisselected.Pressingthisbuttonwillopenthe
BinaryEditordialogbox.
Here,asystemexclusivemessagestartingwithF0canbe
editedinhexadecimalform.Usethiswhenyouwantto
enterandeditasystemexclusivemessageforanexternal
device.
fromthebeginningofthemessage.TakingthestartingF0
aszero,thisisshownas1,2,3,...etc.(adecimalvalue).
Size[D]isadecimalvalueindicatingthenumberofbytes
inthecurrentlyeditedsystemexclusive.16[D]indicates
thatthemessageissixteenbytes.
PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettings.
Usethedataentrybuttonstoenterdataashexadecimal
values.Thevalues8,9,A,B,C,D,E,andFarevalidonly
whenenteringthelowerdigit,wherethesevaluesare
permitted.
YoucanusetheInsertbuttonandCutbuttontoinsertor
deletebytedata.
PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsandreturnto
theeventeditpage.
6. Whenyouarefinishedeventediting,presstheDone
button.IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbuttonyouwill
returnthedatatotheconditioninwhichitwasbefore
youbeganeventediting.
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofmusicaldatathatcan
beeditedbyEventEditandtherangeoftheirvalues.
BAR (displayed only)
(Measure line)
C1...G9*2
(Notedata)
V:1...127*2
(Velocity)
PAFT
C1...G9
(Polyphonicafter
(Notenumber)
touch)
CTRL
(Controlchange)
C:0...119
(Controlchange
number)
PROG
(Program
change)
Bank:A...E
000...127,
GM,g(1)..g(9)g(d),
,
(Programbank)
AFTT
(AfterTouch)
0...127
(value)
BEND
(Pitchbend)
8192...+8191
(value)
Meter: 1/4...16/16 *1
(Time signature)
L:000.000...15984.000
(Length:beats,clocks)
0...127
(Value)
0...127
(Value)
P:0...127,
1...128(GM,
g(1)...g(d))
(Programnumber)
EXCL*3
(Exclusive)
*1:Beawarethatbecausethetimesignatureisrecorded
inthemastertrack,modifyingitwithinanytrackwill
affectalltracksatthesamemeasure,causingthemallto
playbackwiththemodifiedtimesignature.
Note:*2:Youcanalsoenterthenotedataandvelocityvalues
byholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandplayingakey.
TheKROMEssystemexclusivemessageshavethe
followingformat.
F0:Exclusivestatus
42:KorgID
3n:n=0...FGlobalMIDIchannel
00:ModelIDbyte1
01:ModelIDbytes2
15:ModelIDbytes3
ff:functionID
([41][04]:Sequencermodeparameterchange)
...
F7:Endofexclusive
WhenyoupresstheTestbutton,thecurrentlyedited
systemexclusivemessagewillbetransmittedfromthe
MIDIOUTconnector,USBMIDIconnector,andEXFW
connector(ifoptionallyinstalled).Usethiswhenyou
wanttochecktheoperationofanexternaldevice.
Index[D]intheinformationboxindicatesthepositionof
theselecteddatawithinthemessageasanumberofbytes
170
*3:YoucannotchangeExclusiveeventsintoadifferent
typeofevent(e.g.,aNoteorControlChangeevent).
Norcanyouchangeanyothertypeofeventintoan
Exclusiveevent.
Patternnumberswillbedisplayedinlocationsinwhicha
patternhasbeenput(placed).Attheendofthetrackthere
willbeanindicationofTrackEnd.
Sequencer: Menu Command Piano Roll
Piano Roll
ThePianoRolldialogboxprovidesadetailedgraphicview
ofeventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
Hereyoucanalsomodify,delete,orcreatetheseevents.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwantto
edit,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)tospecifythe
startingmeasurethatyouwanttoedit.Alternatively,
usetheTrackViewpage(Seq62)tospecifythetrack
andmeasuresforediting.
2. Fromthemenucommands,choosePianoRollor
choosethe
toolintheTrackViewpage;thePiano
Rollwindowwillappear.(Seeillustrationbelow.)
Theverticalaxisofthegridindicatespitch,andthe
horizontalaxisisthelocation(ofthemeasures).Thegrid
intervalforthehorizontalaxisisspecifiedbythePianoRoll
SetupGridResolutionparameter.
Fornoteevents,theverticalaxisindicatesthepitch,andthe
lengthofthebarindicatesthedurationofthenote.Theleft
edgeofthebaristhebeginningoftheevent.
Measuresinwhichapatternhasbeenputareshadedin
purple.
Note view area select

Hereyoucanchangetherangeofpitchesthataredisplayed.
3. Thenoteviewareaintheupperpartofthedialogbox
andthecontrolviewareainthelowerpartwillshow
theeventsthatcanbeedited.
PressthisobjectandoperatetheVALUEcontrollers(VALUE
dial,IND/DECbuttons,etc.)changetherangeofdisplayed
pitches.Youcanalsomovethebarbydraggingitupor
down.
Theeventsareshowninoneofthefollowingways.For
details,refertotheexplanationofeachitem.
Thiswillbereleasedwhenyouselectaneventlistitemor
thecontrolviewselectsection.
Pressnoteviewareaselect,andusetheVALUE
controllerstooperateit.
Control view area
Choosethe
Thisshowsvelocityorcontroldata,andallowsyoutoedit,
delete,oraddthisdata.
toolanddrag.
EnterMeasand#intheeventlist.
Control view area select
UsetheZoombuttonstozoomthedisplayin/out.
4. Choosethedesirededitingtoolfromthetoolbox,and
editthedata.Fordetails,refertoEditingnotesor
Editingcontroldata.
Note:Ifyoudecidetocancelaneditingoperation,pressthe
Undobutton.Thistakesyoubacktothestatepriortothe
mostrecentoperation.TheRedooperationcancelstheUndo
operation.Ifyouwanttoreturntothestatepriortoentering
thepianorolldialogbox,presstheDonebuttontostop
editing,andthenpresstheCOMPAREbutton.
5. Toplaybacktheevents,pressthePlaybutton.Adialog
boxwillopen,andthesongwillbeginplaying.Usethis
toheartheresultsofyourediting.
Thisselectsthedatashowninthecontrolviewarea.Choose
fromthefollowing.
Vel:Velocity
PAft:Polyphonicaftertouch
CC#000...119:Controlchange000119
Aft:Aftertouch
Bnd:Pitchbend
Ifyouselectanoteinthenoteviewarea,velocitywillbe
shownautomatically.
*Programchangesandexclusiveeventsarenotshown.
6. PresstheDonebuttonwhenyourefinishedediting.
Note view area

Hereyoucanedit,delete,oraddnoteevents.
The selected note event
Note events
Note view area

Tool
box
Note view
area select
View area
height select
Control view select
Style
select
Control view area
Zoom
Event list
Press the Setup button to open

the Piano Roll Setup dialog box.
(Piano Roll Setup)
Plays back the song. Pressing

this button will open the Piano
Roll Edit Play dialog box.
(Piano Roll Edit Play)
Press when youre finished

Piano Roll editing.
171
Sequencer mode
Toolbox
View area height select
Select Event tool

Usethistoselectaneventinthenoteviewareaorcontrol
viewarea.Youcanmoveaneventbydraggingit.
Length Edit tool: Only for Note view

Usethistooltomodifythelengthofanote;presstheevent
anddragit.
Pressingthesebuttonswillchangethedisplayedsizeofthe
noteviewareaandthecontrolviewarea.
Editing notes
Note:Ifyoudecidetocancelachange,presstheDone
buttontofinishediting,andthenpresstheCOMPARE
button.Youwillreturntothestatepriortoopeningthe
PianoRolldialogbox.
Moving a note
1. Pressthe tool.
Put Event tool

Usethistocreateanevent.
2. Pressthenoteeventthatyouwanttomove.
Ifyoupressinsidethenoteviewarea,anotewillbeadded.
TheGridResolutionsettinginPianoRollSetupspecifies
thelengthoftheinsertednote.Thenotewillbeinserted
withavelocityof100.
Thenotewilllightblue.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft(orupper
right).
2
Ifyoupressinsidethecontrolviewarea,acontrolevent
specifiedbythecontrolviewselectCtrlsettingwillbe
created.Youcancreatecontinuousdatabydragging.
However,PAft(polyphonicaftertouchevents)cannotbe
created.
Youcantcreateeventsinameasurewhereapatternhas
alreadybeenplaced.
Erase Event tool

Usethistoeraseanevent.
Ifyoupressinsidethenoteviewarea,thenotewillbe
erased.
Ifyoupresscontroldatainthecontrolviewarea,thatdata
willbeerased.Ifvelocityisdisplayed,thenoteeventwillbe
deletedatthesametime.
LimitedtoErase,youcanerasemultipleeventsinasingle
operation.Dragtoenclosetheeventsyouwanttoerase
(theywilllightblue),andthenrelease;theeventsinthe
specifiedregionwillbeerased.However,PAft(polyphonic
aftertouchevents)cannotbeerased.
3. Continuingtopressthenote,dragitup/down/left/
right.
Draggingverticallywillchangethenotespitch,and
dragginghorizontallywillchangeitslocation.
3
Grab tool
Youcanmovethedisplayedregionbydraggingoverthe
noteviewareaorcontrolviewarea.
Style Select tool

Usethistoswitchthenoteeventdisplaybetween
theconventionaltypeandatypesuitableforadrum
kit.
View control
Zoom
Usethesebuttonstozoomin/outthedatashowninthenote
viewareaorcontrolviewarea.
Fromtheleft,thesebuttonszoomin(magnify)thevertical
axis,zoomout(shrink)theverticalaxis,zoomin(magnify)
thehorizontalaxis,andzoomout(shrink)thehorizontal
axis.
Verticalzoomin/outwillzoomcenteredontheselected
event.
Horizontalzoomin/outwillzoombasedonthemeasure
shownatthefarleft.
Scroll
Usethesebuttonstoscrollthenoteviewarea.
172
Movinganotetoapreciselocation
3. Continuingtopressthenote,dragitleft/right.
YoucanusethePianoRollSetupSnaptoGridorMove
NoteResolutionsettingstoeasilyspecifyaprecise
location.Forexampleifyouwanttomoveanotetoa
precisetimingintervalsuchas ,useGridResolution
tospecifytheunitandturnSnaptoGridon.Whenyou
draganoteevent,itwillsnaptothegrid.(SeePiano
RollSetupdialogboxonpage 175.)
Thenotelengthwillchange.
IfthePianoRollSetupSnaptoGridsettingison,thelength
willchangeinincrementsoftheGridResolutionwhenyou
dragit.
3
Editingavalueintheeventlist
Choosethe tool,andthenpressthenoteeventthat
youwanttomove.Intheeventlistbelow,usetheVALUE
controllerstoenterthedesiredvalue.
Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobeenteredbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
Entering a note
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressthelocationatwhichyouwanttoenterthenote.
Anotewillbeentered.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft;youcan
dragthenotetothedesiredlocation.Thenotewillbe
enteredwithavelocityof100.
Tospecifythelengthofthenotesthatareentered,setthe
desiredGridResolutioninthePianoRollSetupdialog
box.
Changingthelengthofanote
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressneartherightendofthenoteeventwhoselength
youwanttochange.
Thenotewillbehighlighted.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft(orupper
right).
2
Toalignthenotetoapreciselocation,setthedesired
GridResolutioninthePianoRollSetupdialogbox,and
turnSnaptoGridon.
2
Erasing a single note

1. Pressthe
tool.
Note:Ifyouselectanoteeventanditturnslightblue,a
squarewillbeshownattherightend.Thenotewillturn
greenifyoupressthissquare.
2. Pressthenotethatyouwanttoerase.Thedatawillbe
erased.
173
Sequencer mode
4. Dragup/downtochangethevalue.
Erasing multiple notes

LimitedtotheEraseoperation,youcanselectmultiple
eventsanderasetheminasingleoperation.
1. Pressthe
Alternatively,youcanenterthedesiredvalueintheevent
list.
tool.
2. Dragtoenclosetheregionofnotesthatyouwantto
erase.Thenotestobeerasedwillbehighlighted.
Whenyourelease,thedatawillbeerased.
2
Creating continuously changing data values

1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Choosethedatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.
3. Dragovertheregionwhosevaluesyouwanttochange.
Thepathonwhichyoudragisshownbyaline.When
yourelease,thevalueswillchangetofitthatline.
Editing control data

Editing a data value
1. Pressthe tool.
area.Ifyouveselectednoteevents,thisareawillshow
velocitydata.
2
1
3. Pressthesquareatthetopofthedatathatyouwantto
edit.
Theindicationwillbehighlighted.Continuepressing,and
eventinformationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft.
3
174
Entering data
1. Pressthe
tool.
area.
3. Dragovertheregioninwhichyouwanttoenterdata.
Thepathonwhichyoudragisshownbyaline.When
yourelease,valueswillbeenteredtofitthatline.
2
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofdataandthe
availablevaluesthatyoucaneditinPianoRoll:Event
Edit.
BAR(displayedonly)
(Measureline)
Meter:1/4...16/16
(Timesignature)
C1...G9*
(Notedata)
L:000.000...15984.000
(Length:beats,clocks)
V:1...127*
(Velocity)
PAFT
C1...G9
(Polyphonicafter
(Notenumber)
touch)
CTRL
(Controlchange)
C:0...119
(Controlchange
number)
AFTT
(AfterTouch)
0...127
(value)
BEND
(Pitchbend)
8192...+8191
(value)
0...127
(Value)
0...127
(Value)
*Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobeenteredby
holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
Undo, Redo button

YoucanpresstheUndobuttontocancelthemostrecent
edit.TheRedobuttonreturnstotheeditedstate.These
buttonsallowyoutoreturnonlytothestatepriortothe
singlemostrecentoperation.
Setup button
PresstheSetupbuttontoaccessthePianoRollSetupdialog
box,whereyoucanmakesettingssuchastheresolution
wheneditinginthenoteviewarea.
Piano Roll Setup dialog box
Erasing data
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Choosethatdatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.
3. Pressonthedatathatyouwanttoerase,ordragacross
theregionthatyouwanttoerase.Whenyourelease,the
datawillbeerased.
Event list
UseMeas(Measure)and#(Index)todisplaythemeasure
thatyouwanttoeditandthedesiredindexnumberwithin
thatmeasure.
Ifyouchange#tochoosecontroldatasuchasAFTTor
CC#01inthelowerarea,thecontrolviewselectvaluewill
alsochange,andthosevalueswillbeshowninthecontrol
viewarea.
Whenyouselectaneventinthenote/controlviewarea,the
eventwillturnlightblueandthatvaluewillbeshowninthe
eventlist.Ifyouuse#toselectadifferentevent,the
selectedeventwillbeshownindarkblue,andthelightblue
eventwillturnred.
Move Note Resolution
[Free, , , , , ]
Whenyoudraganoteeventhorizontally,itwillmovein
unitsoftheresolutionyouspecifyhere.Forexampleifyou
setthisto,dragginganeventatlocationBT:1.001toward
therightwillsuccessivelymoveittolocations2.01,3.001,
4.001,etc.Thisadjustmentwillnotoccurifyouchoosethe
Freesetting.
ThissettingisvalidifSnaptoGridisOff.
Snap to Grid
[Off, On]
ByeditingtheBT(BeatTick)locationwithinthemeasure,
youcanmoveaneventwithinthatmeasure.
On:Whenyoudraganoteeventhorizontally,itwillsnapto
theresolutionspecifiedbyGridResolution.Forexampleif
GridResolutionissetto,dragginganeventatlocation
BT:1.001towardtherightwillmoveittolocations2.000,
3.000,4.001,etc.Thelocationstowhichyoucanmoveanote
willbelimitedtoprecisequarternoteintervals.
Youcanediteachtypeofeventdata.Whenyouselecta
noteevent,itwillsound.
Adottedgridisdisplayedinthenote/controlviewarea
accordingtotheGridResolutionsetting.
Selecttheeventthatyouwanttoedit,andusetheVALUE
controllerstoenterthedesiredvalues.
Off:Noteswillnotsnaptothegrid.Theywillmoveatthe
resolutionspecifiedbyMoveNoteResolution.
175
Sequencer mode
Grid Resolution
[ , , , , ]
Thisspecifiestheresolutionofthegrid.IfSnaptoGridis
On,noteswillsnaptotheresolutionyouspecifyhere.
NoteeventscreatedbythePutEventtoolwillalsohavethe
resolutionandlengthspecifiedhere.
Play Scroll
[Sweep, Crawl]
Set Song Length

SetSongLengthisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandchangesthelengthofthespecifiedsong.
Whenitisexecuted,thelengthofthemastertrackwill
change,andthenumberofmeasuresplayedwillchange.
Thisspecifieshowthenote/controlviewareawillscroll
duringplayback.
Sweep:Whenthelocationbarreachestheendoftheview
area,thenextmeasureandthelocationbarwillmovetothe
leftedge.
Crawl:Theviewareawillscrollmeasurebymeasure.The
locationbarwillnotmove.
Play button
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwillopen,and
thesongwillbeginplayingback.
Playbackwillstartfromthebeginningofthemeasure
showninthenote/controlviewarea.
Piano Roll Edit Play
1. InLength,specifythelengthofthesong.
AlldatafollowingthemeasurespecifiedbyLengthwill
bedeleted.
Erase Track
EraseTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthespecifiedtrack.
However,itisnotpossibletoerasethemastertrackbyitself.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackthatyouwishtoerase.
Solo buttons
2. SelectEraseTracktoopenthedialogbox.
EachtrackwillplaybackaccordingtothePlay/Muteand
SolosettingsinP0ProgramT0108andT0916.Thesolo
track(s)canalsobeswitchedusingthesixteenSolobuttons
inthePianoRollEditPlaydialogbox.Theupperrow
controlstracks18andthelowerrowcontrolstracks916.
Thetrackbeingeditedisenclosedinaframe.
Excl.Solo button
ThisturnsExclusiveSoloon.
3. Selectthetrackwhosedatayouwanttoerase.
Off:MultipleSolooperation
IfyoudontcheckAllTracks,thedatawillbeerasedonly
fromthetracksyouspecifyinTrackSelect.
Eachtimeyoupressasolobutton,theSolosettingofthat
trackwillturnonoroff.YoucanturnSoloonformultiple
tracks.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themusicaldataofalltrackswillbe
erased.
On:ExclusiveSolooperation
Solocanbeturnedonforonlyoneofthe16tracksatatime.
Copy Track
ThissettingislinkedwiththeExclusiveSolomenu
command.
CopyTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Play button
Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafromthecopysource
tracktothespecifiedtrack.
WhenyoupresstheStopbutton,playbackwillstopand
PianoRollEditPlaywillclose.Thenote/controlviewarea
willshowthebeginningofthemeasureatwhichyou
stopped.
Exit button
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstopand
PianoRollEditPlaywillclose.Youwillreturntothe
measureinthenote/controlviewareawhereyoustarted
playback.
Beawarethatthetrackdataofthecopydestinationwillbe
erasedwhenyouexecutetheCopyTrackoperation.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttocopy.
2. SelectCopyTracktoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcetrack,and
Totoselectthecopydestination.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelectwillbe
specifiedforFrom.)
176
Sequencer: Menu Command Bounce Track
Bounce Track
BounceTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofthesourceand
destinationtracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthe
bouncedestination.Allmusicaldatainthesourcetrackwill
beerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistsinboththesourcetrackand
destinationtrack,unexpectedresultsmayoccurduring
playbackafterthebouncecommandisexecuted.Toprevent
thisfromhappening,useEventEditorEraseControlData
toedittheMIDIcontroldataofthetwotracksbeforeyou
useBounceTrack.
thatyouwanttobounce.
AfterTouchwillerasebothchannelpressureandpolykey
pressuredata,PitchBendwillerasepitchbenddata,
ProgramChangewilleraseprogramchangedata,and
Exclusivewilleraseexclusivedata.
5. Specifythetrack(s)onwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,thecommand
willbeexecutedonlyonthedataofthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSelect
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thecommandwillbeexecutedon
thedataofalltracks.
Example: If measures 23 are erased, measures 23 will be blank.
Before Erase
After Erase
2. SelectBounceTracktoopenthedialogbox.
No data
Ifcontroldataextendsacrossmeasuresthatwere
erasedandmeasuresthatwerenoterased,onlythe
datawithinthespecifiedrangewillberemoved.
Howeverifnotedataextendsacrosstwoormore
measures,deletinganyoftheinterveningmeasureswill
deletethatnotedatafromthefollowingmeasuresas
well.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthesourcetrack,andToto
selectthedestinationtrack.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelectwillbe
specifiedforFrom.)
InthecaseofBounceTrack,thesourcetrackdatawillbeset
tozero.
Erase Measure
EraseMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesthespecifiedtype(s)ofmusicaldata
fromthespecifiedrangeofmeasures.
TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobeusedtoremove
onlyaspecifictypeofdata.UnliketheDeleteMeasure
command,executingtheEraseMeasurecommanddoesnot
causethesubsequentmeasuresofmusicaldatatobemoved
forward.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116),
mastertrackthatcontainsthemeasuresofdatayou
wanttoerase.
Note:NotedatacanalsobeerasedusingShift/EraseNote.
Usethiscommandwhenyouwishtoeraseaspecificrange
ofnotes,ortoerasenotesfromaspecificBeat.Tick.
Note:ControlChangedatacanalsobeerasedusingErase
ControlData.Usethiswhenyouwishtoeraseaspecific
typeofcontrolchange,ortoerasecontrolchangedatafrom
aspecificBeat.Tickrange.
Delete Measure
DeleteMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommanddeletesthespecifiedmeasures.
WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandisexecuted,the
musicaldatafollowingthedeletedmeasureswillbemoved
towardsthebeginningofthesequence.
thatcontainsthemeasuresyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeleteMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
2. SelectEraseMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFromMeasure,selectthefirstmeasurethatyouwish
todelete,andinToEndofMeasure,selectthelastmea
surethatyouwishtodelete.
3. InFromMeasureselectthefirstmeasuretobeerased,
andinToEndofMeasureselectthelastmeasuretobe
erased.
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
settotherangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
therangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
command.
4. IfyouareerasingMIDIdata,useKindtospecifythe
typeofdatathatwillbeerased.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,thecommand
willbeexecutedonlyonthedataofthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSelect.
Allwillerasealltypesofdatainthattrack,Notewillerase
notedata,ControlChangewillerasecontrolchangedata,
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thecommandwillbeexecutedon
thedataofalltracks.
177
Sequencer mode
Example: When measures 35 are deleted, measures 68 are moved forward.

Before
Delete
After
Delete
6. Specifythetrack(s)forwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
2
Ifinstep4youuncheckAllTracksandexecutethis
operation,themeasureswillnotbedeletedfromthe
mastertrack.Timesignatureandtempodatawill
remainunchanged,andthetimesignatureandtempo
ofthemeasuresthatweremovedforwardasaresultof
theDeleteoperationwillchange.
Example:
timesignatureoftheinsertedmeasureswillchange,andthe
specifiedtimesignaturewillapplytoalltracksforthose
measures.
When measures 2 and 3 (3/4 time) of track 2 are deleted, the measures that were
at 4 and 5 are moved forward, and their time signature will change to 3/4.
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (4/4)
5 (4/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (4/4)
5 (4/4)
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,themeasureswill
beinsertedintothetrackthatsselectedinTrackSelect.Be
awarethatatthistime,theplaybackdatathatfollowsthe
insertlocationwillmovetowardtheendofthesong
accordingtothenumberofinsertedmeasures,butthetime
signatureandtempowillnotmove.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themeasureswillbeinsertedinto
alltracksincludingtheMasterTrack.Theplaybackdatain
subsequentmeasureswillplayjustasitdidbeforethis
commandwasexecuted.
Before Delete
Time signature = **/**

Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Before Insert
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
After Delete
4 (4/4)
5 (4/4)
Ifinstep4youcheckAllTracksandexecutethis
operation,thespecifiedmeasuresofmusicaldatawill
bedeletedfromalltracksincludingthemastertrack,
andthetimesignatureandtempowillalsomove
forwardbythenumberofmeasuresthatweredeleted.
Ifcontroldataextendsacrossalinebetweenmeasures
thatweredeletedandmeasuresthatwerenotdeleted,
onlythedatawithintherangebeingdeletedwillbe
erased.
Insert two measures

Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
After Insert
Measures 4 and 5 will use the previously specified
time signature.
Time signature = 7/8
Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Before Insert
Insert two measures
Insert Measure
InsertMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandinsertsthespecifiednumberofmeasures
intothespecifiedtrack.
WhenyouexecutetheInsertMeasurecommand,the
musicaldatafollowingtheinsertlocationwillbemoved
backward.
Ifyouinsertmeasuresbetweennoteeventsthatare
connectedbyatie,anoteoffwillbecreatedimmediately
beforetheinsertedmeasure,andthesubsequentportion
willbedeleted.
inwhichyouwanttoinsertdata.
2. SelectInsertMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
After Insert
Measures 2 and 3 will be 7/8, and measures 4 and 5
will be the previously specified time signature.
Repeat Measure
RepeatMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthespecifiedmeasuresfor
thespecifiednumberoftimes.
WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the
measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasurespecified
byToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldatafollowingthe
inserteddatawillbemovedbackward.Itisconvenientto
usethiscommandwhenyouhaveasongthatyouplayback
withTrackPlayLoop(SeqP09(10)b)turnedon,andwish
toexpanditintomusicaldata.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosetheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttoinsertdatainto.
2. SelectRepeatMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InAtMeasure,specifythemeasurelocationatwhich
thedatawillbeinserted.
(ThemeasureyouspecifiedinTrackEditpageFrom
Measurewillbesetasadefault.)
4. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresthatwillbe
inserted.
178
5. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthemeasures
thatwillbeinserted.
3. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
rangeofmeasuresthatwillberepeated.
Ifyouwanttheinsertedmeasurestomatchtheexistingtime
signature,specify**/**.Withanysettingotherthan**/**,the
settotherangeyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
Sequencer: Menu Command Copy Measure
4. InTimes,specifythenumberofrepetitions.
ForexampleifyousetFromMeasureto001,ToEndof
Measureto004,andTimesto2,themusicaldataof
measures14willbeinsertedintomeasures58.Theresult
willbethatmeasures14willbeplayedtwice.
Move Measure
Thiscommandmovesthespecifiedmeasuresof
performancedatatoanothermeasure.
1. SelectMoveMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,theperformance
datawillbeinsertedintothetrackyouspecifiedinTrack
Select.Beawarethatinthiscase,theperformancedata
followingtheinsertpositionwillmovebackward(i.e.,
towardtheendofthesong)bythenumberofinserted
measures,butthetimesignatureandtempowillnotmove.
IfyouexecutewithAllTrackschecked,theperformance
datawillbeinsertedintoalltracks,includingthemaster
track.Theperformancedatafollowingtheinserted
measureswillplaybackinthesamewayasitdidbefore.
Copy Measure
2. InFrom:Trackselectthemovesourcetrack.
CopyMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethetrackyouselectedinTrack
Select.)
Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresofmusicaldata
specifiedastheFromsourcetothebeginningofthemeasure
specifiedastheTolocation.
IfAllTracksunchecked,onlydatafromtheselectedtrack
willbemoved.
WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasurecommand,theexisting
trackdataatthecopydestinationwillberewritten.
1. Selectthecopysourcesong.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,musicaldataofalltracksincluding
themastertrackwillbemoved.
rangeofmeasuresthatwillbemoved.
2. SelectCopyMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
4. InTo:Track(ifAllTracksisunchecked)tospecifythe
movedestinationtrack,andMeasuretospecifythe
measureatwhichthedatawillbeinserted.
IfyouexecutethiswithModeStay,playbackdatalocated
afterthemovesourcemeasuresandplaybackdatalocated
afterthemovedestinationmeasureswillnotmove;itwill
staywhereitis.
3. InFrom:Trackselectthecopysourcetrack.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethetrackyouselectedinTrack
Select.)
IfyouexecutethiswithModeShift,playbackdatalocated
afterthemovesourcemeasureswillmovetowardthe
beginningofthesongbythenumberofmeasuresthatwere
moved.Playbackdatalocatedafterthemovedestination
measureswillmovetowardtheendofthesongbythe
numberofmeasuresthatweremoved.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themusicaldataofalltracks
includingthemastertrackwillbecopied.
5. SetOverlaptospecifywhatwillhappenifthereis
datainthemovedestinationmeasuresandyouve
specifiedModeStay.IfyouchooseMerge,themove
sourcedataandmovedestinationdatawillbecom
bined.IfyouchooseOverwrite,themovesourcedata
willoverwrite(replace)themovedestinationdata.
rangeofcopysourcemeasures.
Beawarethattimesignatureandtempodatawillnotbe
moved.
6. ToexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,presstheOK
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,onlytheselected
trackwillbecopied.Notethatthetimesignatureandtempo
willnotbecopied.
5. UseTo:Songtospecifythecopydestinationsong,
Track(ifAllTracksisunchecked)tospecifythecopy
destinationtrack,andMeasuretospecifythestarting
measureatwhichthecopieddatawillbeinserted.
Example: When you copy measures 57 of track 1 to the third measure of track 2,
measures 35 of track 2 will be rewritten.
Track 1
(source)
1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
4 (3/4)
5 (3/4)
6 (3/4)
7 (4/4)
Track 2
(destination)
1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
4 (3/4)
5 (3/4)
6 (3/4)
7 (4/4)
179
Sequencer mode
Create Control Data
Example Move measures 3-4 of track 1 to measures 3-4 of track 2.

Mode: Stay
CreateControlDataisavailableonallofthetabsofthe
TrackEditpage.
Before Move
Track 1
1 (Tr1)
2 (Tr1)
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr1)
Track 2
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr2)
3 (Tr2)
4 (Tr2)
5 (Tr2)
Thiscommandcreatesthespecifiedtypeofdata(control
change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempo)intheselected
regionofatrack.
1. InTrackSelect,selecttheMIDItrackonwhichyou
wishtoperformtheCreateControlDatacommand.
After Move Overlap: Merge

Track 1
Track 2
1 (Tr1)
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr1)
2 (Tr2)
Ifyouwishtomodifytempodata,selectMasterTrackasthe
track.Inthiscase,thestep4itemKindwillbesettoTempo.
5 (Tr1)
No data
No data
3 (Tr1+2)
4 (Tr1+2)
No data
No data
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr2)
2. SelectCreateCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
After Move Overlap: Overwrite

Track 1
Track 2
1 (Tr1)
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr1)
2 (Tr2)
5 (Tr1)
5 (Tr2)
Mode: Shift
Before Move
Track 1
1 (Tr1)
2 (Tr1)
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr1)
Track 2
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr2)
3 (Tr2)
4 (Tr2)
5 (Tr2)
3. Specifytherangeintowhichthecontroldatawillbe
inserted.
After Move
Track 2
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr2)
3 (Tr1)
Track 1
1 (Tr1)
2 (Tr1)
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr2)
No data
No data
6 (Tr2)
7 (Tr2)
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
measures,andinBeat.Tick,specifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbesetto
therangeyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)thatyou
wishtocreate.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeinserted.Inthis
case,use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeinserted.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeinserted.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeinserted(ifyouveselectedthe
mastertrack).
5. InStartValue,selectthestartingvalueofthecontrol
data.InEndValue,selecttheendingvalueofthecon
troldata.
Bydefault,theStartValuewillbesettothevalueofthe
existingdataatthestartlocation.Ifyouwishtocreate
controldatathatchangessmoothlyfromthestarting
location,youcanleavetheStartValueunchanged,andset
onlytheEndValue.
Example:
The controller is aftertouch. Starting location is 3:48, ending location is

4:24, and end value is set to 100. This will cause the aftertouch value to begin
changing from 3:48, and reach a value of 100 at 4:24.
Start location
After touch
End location
127
100
End Value
Previous data
Start Value
default value
Location
0
3:00
3:24
3:48
3:72
4:00
4:24
4:48
WhenyouexecuteCreateControlData,alargeamountof
sequencermemorywillbeconsumed.Forthisreasonit
maynotbepossibletoexecutethiscommandifthereisa
limitedamountofmemoryremaining.Insuchcases,first
useQuantizetoquantizethedataandremoveunnecessary
controldata.Alternatively,youcouldquantizethedata
thatwasinsertedbytheCreateControlDatacommand.
180
Sequencer: Menu Command Erase Control Data
Erase Control Data
Quantize
EraseControlDataisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
QuantizeisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesdatasuchascontrolchanges,after
touch,pitchbend,ortempointhespecifiedrange.
ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDIdataofthetype
youspecify(notedata,controlchange,aftertouch,pitch
bend,programchange,etc.)inthetrack.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackfromwhichyouwishto
erasecontroldata.
Ifyouwishtoerasetempodata,selectMasterTrack.Inthis
case,theKinditeminstep4willbeTempo.
2. SelectEraseCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
WhenyouexecutetheQuantizeoperation,themusicaldata
willbeaffectedasfollows:
WhenyouexecuteQuantizeonnotedata,thetimingof
thenoteonwillbecorrected,butthelength(durationof
thenote)willnotbeaffected.
IftheQuantizeresolutionissettoHi,thetimingwillbe
adjustedtounitsofthebaseresolution(/480),sonote
datawillnotbeaffected.However,continuouscontroller
datasuchasjoystickoraftertouchwhichoccupiesalarge
amountofmemorywillbeprocessedsothattwoormore
dataeventsofanidenticaltypeexistingatasingle
intervalofthetimingresolutionwillbecombinedintoa
singleevent,thusconservingmemory.
Similarly,twoormoreidenticaldataeventsexistingatthe
exactsametimewillbecombinedintoone,alsoconserving
memory.
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrack.
3. Specifytherangefromwhichyouwishtoerasecontrol
data.
2. SelectQuantizetoopenthedialogbox.
InFromMeasuretoToEndofMeasurespecifythe
measures,andinBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbethe
rangethatwasspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)thatyou
wishtoerase.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeerased.Inthis
case,use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeerased.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeerased.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeerased.(Ifyouveselectedthe
mastertrack)
Note:Ifyouwishtoeraseallcontrolchangedatafrom
specifiedmeasures,youcanalsouseEraseMeasureandset
KindtoControlChange.However,thisEraseControlData
commandallowsyoutospecifytherangeusingBeat.Tick,
andalsotoeraseonlyspecifictypesofcontrolchangedata.
3. Specifytherangethatwillbequantized.
measures.InBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(By
rangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. InKind,selectthetypeofmusicaldata(events)that
youwishtoquantize.
All:QuantizationwillbeappliedtoallperformanceMIDI
data.
Note:Quantizationwillbeappliedonlytonotedata.Use
BottomandToptospecifytherangeofnotes.Bottom
specifiesthelowestnotethatwillbeaffected,andTop
specifiesthehighestnote.Youcanusethiswhenyouwant
toquantizeonlyaspecificnoteornotes(forexample,just
thesnaresoundsofadrumtrack).Ifyouwanttoquantize
allnotes,settheseparametersC1andG9respectively.
ControlChange:Quantizationwillbeappliedtocontrol
changes.Ifyouwanttoquantizeonlyaspecificcontrol
change,specifythenumber(No.).Ifyouwanttoquantizeall
controlchanges,selectAll.
AfterTouch:QuantizebothChannelPressureand
PolyphonicKeyPressuremessages.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbequantized.
ProgramChange:Programchangedatawillbequantized.
5. InResolution,specifythetimingresolutiontowhich
thedatawillbecorrected.
181
Sequencer mode
Bysettingalowerresolutionyoucansavemorememory,
butthetimingoftheplaybackmaynotbeacceptable.
Shift/Erase Note
6. InOffset,specifythenumberofclockticksbywhich
thedatawillbemovedforwardorbackwardrelativeto
thestandardtiming.
Shift/EraseNoteisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Asettingof240willbe,and120willbe.Positive(+)
settingswilladjustthedataforward,andnegative()
settingswilladjustthedatabackward.Thisallowsyouto
simulatepushingordraggingthebeat.
7. InIntensity,specifythedegreeofsensitivitytowhich
thetimingwillbecorrected;i.e.,howclosetotheloca
tionsspecifiedbysteps5and6thedatawillbemoved.
Thiscommandshifts(moves)orerasesspecifiednote
numbersinaselectedtrackandoverarangeofmeasures.
1. InTrackSelect,choosetheMIDItrackonwhichyou
wishtoexecutetheShift/EraseNotecommand.
2. SelectShift/EraseNotetoopenthedialogbox.
Withasettingof0,nocorrectionwilltakeplace.Witha
settingof100,thedatawillbemovedallthewaytothe
timingintervalsspecifiedbysteps5and6.
8. UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtotherhythm.For
example,thisprovidesaneasywaytogiveaslight
shufflegroovetoasquare16beatrhythm.
Settingsotherthan0%willaddasenseofswingby
adjustingthepositionofthenotesatevennumberedbeats
relativetothespecifiedResolution.Withasettingof+100%,
thesenoteswillbemovedonethirdofthewaytoward
intervalsofthespecifiedResolution.Withasettingof
+300%,notesofevennumberedbeatswillbemovedallthe
waytothenextevennumberedbeat.
*
ByvaryingtheOffsetandIntensitysettingsyoucan
createquantizeeffectssuchasthefollowing.

100%
100%
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = 0, Intensity = 100%
50%
+120
Offset = +120, Intensity = 75%
+120
NoteRange:Bottomspecifiesthelowerlimit,andTop
specifiestheupperlimit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,set
BottomtoC1andToptoG9.
50%
100%
Offset = +120, Intensity = 100%
+120
+120
75%
75%
+120
+120
100%
100%
60
100%
100%
75%
measures.InBeat.Tick,specifythebeatandclock.(By
rangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatyouwishtoshiftor
erase.
Original
3. Specifytherangeinwhichyouwishtoshiftorerase
notenumbers.
60
ByvaryingtheSwingsettingsyoucancreateeffectssuch
asthefollowing.
When Resolution =
beat 1
beat 2
beat 3
0%
Swing = 0%
Theamountofshiftissetinsemitonestepsoverarangeof
127to+127.+1willshiftthenoteasemitoneupward.
6. SelecteitherReplacetomovethenotenumbers,orCre
atetogenerateadditionalnotes.
100%
60
Shifting notes
5. InShiftNote,specifytheamountbywhichyouwishto
movethenote.
beat 4
Forexampleifyouareeditingatrackthatusesadrum
program,youcanuseReplacetoexchangethecurrentsnare
soundforadifferentsnaresoundassignedtoadifferentkey,
oruseCreatetoaddasoundeffectatadifferentnote#tothe
snaresound.Alternatively,youcanuseCreatetoaddan
octavedoublingtoanexistingguitarphrase,etc.
7. ToexecutetheShiftNotecommand,presstheOKbut
ton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
+100%
Swing = +100%
100%
Swing = 100%
+200%
Swing = +200%
Swing = +300%
+300%
182
Erasing notes
8. CheckEraseNote.
Ifyouwishtoeraseallnotedatainthespecifiedrangeof
measures,youcanalsousetheEraseMeasurecommand
andsetKindtoNote.However,thisShift/EraseNote
commandletsyouspecifytheBeat.Tickrange,andtoerase
onlyspecificrangesofnotedata.
Sequencer: Menu Command Modify Velocity
Modify Velocity
Create Exclusive Data
ModifyVelocityisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandcreatesuniversalsystemexclusivemessages
orKROMEparameterchangemessagesinthespecified
regionofaMIDItrack.
Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocityvaluesofnotesinthe
specifiedareasothattheywillchangeovertimeaccording
toaselectedcurve.
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrackwhosevelocitywillbe
modified.
1. UseTrackSelecttospecifytheMIDItrackinwhichyou
wanttocreateexclusivedata.
2. ChooseCreateExclDatatoopenthedialogbox.
2. SelectModifyVelocitytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangeinwhichnotevelocitywillbemodi
fied.
FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurespecifythemeasure,
andBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(Bydefault,From
MeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbesettotherange
thatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatwillbeaffectedbythe
ModifyVelocitycommand.
NoteRange:Bottomisthelowerlimit,andTopistheupper
limit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,setBottomtoC1andTop
toG9.
3. Specifytheregionintowhichyouwanttoinsertuni
versalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROMEparameter
changemessages.
UseFromMeasureandToMeasuretospecifythemeasures,
andBeat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclock.(Bydefault,
FromMeasureandToMeasurewillbesettotheregionyou
specifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. UseKindtospecifythetypeofuniversalsystemexclu
sivemessageorKROMEparameterchangemessage
thatyouwanttocreate.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUniversalsystem
exclusiveonpage 365.
5. InVelocityStartValue,specifythevalueatwhichthe
velocitydatawillstart,andinEndValue,specifythe
finalvelocityvalue.
5. UseStartValuetospecifythestartingvalueoftheuni
versalsystemexclusivemessageorKROMEparameter
changemessage,andEndValuetospecifytheending
value.
6. InIntensity,specifythedegreetowhichthevelocity
datawillbeadjustedtowardthecurveyouspecifyin
step7.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCreateExclusive
Dataoperation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Withasettingof0[%],thevelocitywillnotchange.Witha
settingof100[%],thevelocitywillbeexactlyasdescribedby
thecurve.
7. Curveletsyouselectfromsixtypesofcurvetospecify
howthevelocitywillchangeovertime.
*
Example: The parameter is EQ High Gain. Starting location is 3:48, ending location is 4:24,
and end value is set to +12.0. This will cause the EQ High Gain value to begin
changing from 3:48, and reach a value of +12.0 at 4:24.
Start location
EQ High Gain
End location
+18.0
End Value
+12.0
Thesixcurvesareasfollows.
0
For a Start Velocity of 1 and End Velocity of 127
Curve 1
Previous data
Curve 2
Curve 3
127
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Location
-18.0
3:00
1
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 4
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 5
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Start
Measure
3:24
3:48
3:72
4:00
4:24
4:48
End
Measure
Rndm
127
Start
Measure
Start Value
default value
End
Measure
RANDOM
Start
Measure
End
Measure
183
Sequencer mode
Erase Exclusive Data
Copy MFX/TFX
Thiscommanderases(deletes)universalsystemexclusive
messagesorKROMEparameterchangemessagesfromthe
specifiedregion.
pages.
1. UseTrackSelecttospecifytheMIDItrackfromwhich
youwanttoeraseexclusivedata.
2. ChooseEraseExclDatatoopenthedialogbox.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 67.
However,theMIDIcontrolchannelspecifiedinCtrlChof
theMFX1TFXpagewillnotbecopied.
Swap MFX/TFX
pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXon
page 67.
theMFX1TFXpagewillnotbeswapped.
Write FX Preset
3. Specifytheregionfromwhichyouwanttoeraseuni
versalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROMEparameter
changemessages.
Note:UseFromMeasureandToMeasuretospecifythe
measures,andBeat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToMeasurewillbesettothe
regionyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. UseKindtospecifythetypeofuniversalsystemexclu
sivemessageorKROMEparameterchangemessage
thatyouwanttoerase.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUniversalsystem
exclusiveonpage 365.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheEraseExclusiveData
operation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
button.
Ifyouwanttoerasealluniversalsystemexclusivemessages
orKROMEparameterchangemessagesfromspecified
measuresinasingleoperation,youcanuseEraseMeasure
withKindsettoExclusive;howeverinthatcase,youwont
beabletouseBeat.Tickwhenspecifyingtherangefor
erasure.
Copy Insert Effect

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyInsertEffecton
page 66.
theIFX15pagewillnotbecopied.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 67.
Put Effect Setting to Track

PutEffectSettingtoTrackisavailableonalloftheIFXand
MFX/TFX/LFOpages.
Thiscommandinsertseffectsettingsintoatrackasexclusive
events.Youcanusethistomaketheeffectsettingschange
duringasong.
WhenyouuseSystemExclusivemessagestochange
effectsettings,acertainamountoftimewillberequired
fortheeffecttoswitch.Also,ifanoteisplaying,the
soundmaynotchangesmoothly.Youshouldtakeinto
accountthetimingofthemusicaldatawhenchoosing
wheretoinsertSystemExclusivemessages.
Note:Ifyouswitcheffectsduringasong,youshouldalso
usethiscommandtoinsertaneffectchangeatthebeginning
ofthetrack(Measure001,Beat.Tick01.000)toselectthe
effectthatwillbeusedfromthebeginning.
1. UseP8:Routing/IFXorP9:MFX/TFX/LFOtoeditthe
effectsettingsthatyouwanttoinsert(IFX1IFX5,
MFX1,MFX2,TFX),anddeterminethesong,track,mea
sure,beat,andclockatwhichyouwillinserttheexclu
siveevent.
TheillustrationbelowshowstheexampleofswitchingIFX4
(usedbytrack2)atthebeginningofmeasure9.
Swap Insert Effect

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffecton
page 67.
theIFX15pagewillnotbeswapped.
DrumKit IFX Patch

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDrumKitIFXPatchon
page 104.
184
2. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthedialog
box.(Thevaluesinthedialogboxaresettingsforthe
exampledescribedinstep1.)
Sequencer: Menu Command Put Effect Setting to Track
5. IntheP8:Routing/IFXpage,selectthemenucommand
PutEffectSettingtoTracktoaccessthedialogbox.
6. Specifythelocationatwhichtheexclusivemessagefor
theeffectwillbeinserted.
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:001
Beat.Tick:01.000
3. UseEffecttoselectthedesiredeffect.
4. UseTo:Songtospecifythesongintowhichthesettings
willbeinserted,Tracktospecifytheinsertdestination
track,MeasuretospecifythemeasureandBeat.Tickto
specifythebeatandclockatwhichthesettingswillbe
inserted.
8. Specifytheeffectthatyouwanttouseformeasure9
andfollowing.
Theinsertedeventsareonlytheeffecttypeandeffect
parameters.Settingssuchaseffecton/offandbypass
mustberecordedinrealtime.
Note:TurnbacktheLocation,andplaythesongtoverify
thattheeffectisswitchedasyouintend.
YoucanalsousetheP6:TrackEditmenucommandEvent
EdittoverifythataparameterchangeSystemExclusive
message(Exclusive)hasbeeninserted.
Note:Ifapatternhadbeeninsertedatthesamelocation
(whereyouinsertedtheexclusivedata),thatpatternwillbe
expandedtonotedata.
Using Put Effect Setting to Track to switch effects

ThePutEffectSettingtoTrackmenucommandinserts
effectsettingsintoatrackasexclusiveeventdata.Well
explainthisusingtwomethodsasexamples.
1) Inserting effect settings at the beginning and in the middle of a song

WellsetthingssothatMIDItrack2usestheinserteffect
(IFX3)035:StereoPhaserfrommeasures1through8,and
switchesto032:StereoFlangerfrommeasure9.
UsethemenucommandPutEffectSettingtoTracktoinsert
aMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusivemessage.
1. InP01:Play/RECProgramT0108,selectthedesired
programforMIDItrack2.
IfyousetTrackSelecttoTrack02,youllbeabletomonitor
it.
2. InP8:Routing/IFXRoutingT0108,sendMIDItrack2
toIFX3.
3. Specifytheeffectthatyouwanttousefrommeasure1.
InP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup,select035:Stereo
PhaserforIFX3.PresstheOn/OffbuttontoturnontheIFX3.
InP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
GototheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXsetup,andchoose032:
StereoFlangerforIFX3.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
9. IntheP8:Routing/IFX,choosethePutEffectSettingto
Trackmenucommandtoopenthedialogbox.
10. Specifythelocationatwhichtheexclusivemessagefor
theeffectwillbeinserted.
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:009
Beat.Tick:01.000
12. Whenyouplaybackafterexecutingthesecommands,
theeffectontrack3willchangeto032:StereoFlanger
atmeasure9.
13. IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton(itwilllightup)and
playback,theplaybackwilloccurasitdidbeforeyou
executedPutEffectSettingtoTrack.
14. IntheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpage,setTrackSelect
toTrack03,andchoosetheEventEditmenucommand
toaccesstheeventeditscreen.(IntheSetEventFilters
dialogbox,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusive
messageisinsertedatthebeginningandatmeasure9of
track3.
2) Using the songs own effect settings from the beginning

of the song, and inserting effect settings from elsewhere
into the middle of the song
Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffect(IFX3)toMIDI
track3,andsetourparameterssothatituses035:Stereo
Phaserfromthebeginningofthesong.Atmeasure9,well
insertaMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusivemessage
tomakeIFX3switchtothe032:StereoFlangereffectsettings
thatwerecreatedforadifferentsong.
1. SelectadesiredprogramforMIDItrack3,andsendit
toIFX3.
MakethefollowingsettingsforMIDItrack3.
TrackSelect:Track03(P0)
Bus(IFX/Output)Select:IFX3(P8)
IntheP01:Play/RECProgramT0108page,assigna
programtotrack3.ThenusetheP8:InsertEffectpageto
routetrack3totheeffect,andmakeeffectsettings.
2. MakesurethatyouveselectedTrack03inTrackSelect,
andrecordonit.
3. Onaseparatesongyoucopied,maketheeffectsettings
thatyouwantstartusingatmeasure9.
4. MakesurethatyouveselectedTrack02inTrackSelect,
andrecordasdesired.
1)CreatesongS001.
185
Sequencer mode
2)UsetheCopyFromSongmenucommandtocopyfrom
S000.
Event Edit
Insong001,maketheeffectsettingsthatyouwanttouse
frommeasure9.GototheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup,
andchoose032:StereoFlangerforIFX3.
Here,youcaneditindividualeventsofthemusicaldataina
pattern.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
4. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthedialog
box.
5. Inserttheeffectsettingsyoucreatedinsong001into
song000.
UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern,and
thenselectthiscommand.
TheremainingstepsarethesameaswhenEventEditinga
track.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEventEditon
page 169.
Piano Roll
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:009
Beat.Tick:01.000
Thisisthepianorolldialogboxforenteringapattern.The
PianoRolldialogboxprovidesadetailedgraphicviewof
eventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
Hereyoucanalsomodify,delete,orcreatetheseevents.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.
7. Afterexecution,selectsong000andplayitback.The
effectfortrack3willchangeto032:StereoFlangerat
measure9.
8. Insong000,youcanpresstheCOMPAREbutton(it
willlightup)andplaybacktohearthesongasitwas
beforeyouexecutedPutEffectSettingtoTrack.
Pattern Parameter
Thiscommandspecifiesthenumberofmeasuresandthe
timesignatureoftheselectedpattern.
1. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern.
2. SelectPatternParametertoopenthedialogbox.
YoucanusetheCOMPAREbuttontocomparethestateof
thetrackbeforeandafterexecution.
Note:IntheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpageofsong000,set
TrackSelecttoTrack03andchoosetheEventEditmenu
commandtoaccesstheEventEditscreen.(IntheSetEvent
Filtersdialogbox,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusive
messageisinsertedatmeasure9oftrack3.
3. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresinthepat
tern.
4. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthepattern.
Step Recording (Loop Type)

Here,youcanperformsteprecordingintoapattern.
Thisisavailablewhenauserpatternisselected.
1. InPattern(PatternBank)andPatternSelect,specifythe
pattern.
Bydefault,thepatternlengthisonemeasure.Ifyouwishto
changethenumberofmeasuresinthepattern,setthe
PatternParameter.
2. SelectStepRecording(LoopType)toopenthedialog
box.
However,thistimesignatureisonlytemporary,andwhen
youputorcopythepatterninatrackofasong,the
patternwillplayaccordingtothetimesignatureofthat
measure.
Erase Pattern
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromtheselectedpattern.
2. SelectErasePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
Time
signature
3. IfyoucheckAllPatterns,alluserpatternsinthesong
willbeerased.
Location within the

Velocity
measure (beat, clock) Note number
Length
(beats, clocks)
3. Theremainingstepsarethesameaswhensteprecord
ingonatrack.
Refertosteps3andfollowinginStepRecording(seeStep
Recordingonpage 167).However,steprecordingapattern
differsfromsteprecordingatrackinthatwhenyoureach
theendofthepattern,youwillreturntothebeginningand
continuerecording,inthiswaycontinuingtoaddmore
data.
186
IfAllPatternsisnotchecked,onlythepatternspecifiedin
step1willbeerased.
Copy Pattern
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsandmusicaldataofthe
selectedpatterntoanotherpattern.
Userpatternsbelongtoaparticularsong,butyoucanuse
theCopyPatterncommandtousethesamepatternin
anothersong.
Althoughpresetpatternscannotbeedited,youcancopya
presetpatterntoauserpattern.There,youcaneditandsave
Sequencer: Menu Command Bounce Pattern
itasauserpattern.Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethe
CopyPatternoperation,thepatternsettingsandmusical
dataofthecopydestinationwillbeerased.
4. InSong,selectthegetsourcesong.
5. InTrack,selectthegetsourcetrack.
1. InFrom(Song***):Pattern,specifythecopysourcepat
tern.(Bydefault,thiswillbethesongandpatternthat
wasselectedinthePatternEditpage.)
2. InTo:SongandPattern,specifythecopydestination
songandpattern.
ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00U99canbespecified.
Bounce Pattern
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofasource
patternandadestinationpattern,andplacesthecombined
musicaldatainthedestination.Thetimesignatureand
lengthofthepatternfollowingexecutionwillbeaccording
tothesettingsofthedestinationpattern.UnliketheTrack
Bounceoperation,themusicaldataofthebouncesourcewill
notbeerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistsintheselectedpatternandinthe
bouncedestinationpattern,theresultingplaybackfollowing
thebounceoperationmayproduceunexpectedresults.We
recommendthatyouuseEventEdittopreparetheMIDI
controldataofthetwopatternsbeforeexecutingtheBounce
Patterncommand.
1. PatternandPatternSelecttospecifythebouncesource
pattern.
2. SelectBouncePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
6. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheget
source.
Put To Track
Thiscommandplacesapatternintoatrack.
UnliketheCopytoTrack,thiscommandonlyplacesthe
patternnumberinthesong,sothatwhenplaybackreaches
thatpoint,thepatternwillberecalled.Themusicaldataof
thepatternwillnotactuallyexistinthetrack.
Bycreatingpatternsthatcontainfrequentlyusedphrasesor
drumpatterns,andthenplacingthemonthetracks,youcan
conservememory.
Beawarethatwhenyoueditapattern,alllocationsinthe
songwherethatpatternhasbeenplacedwillbeaffected.
WhenyouexecutethePuttoTrackcommand,themusical
datawillbeaffectedasfollows.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistingattheputdestination
willbeerased.
Thepatternthatyouputwillplaybackaccordingtothe
timesignaturethatisspecifiedbythemeasuresofthe
putdestination.
Controldatasuchaspitchbendetc.previouslyexistingin
thetrackwillberesetimmediatelybeforethemeasureat
whichthepatternwasput.Ifyouwishtousecontrol
datasuchaspitchbendinthemeasuresinwhicha
patternisput,youmustfirstwritethecontroldatainto
thepattern(seeControldatainpatternrecordingon
page 156).
Todeleteapatternthathasbeenplacedinatrackyoucan
useEraseMeasure,specifyingtheareainwhichthepattern
wasput,andsettingKindtoAll.
Example: Pattern 20 has been Put at measures 2, 4, and 6 of track 10. When those
measures are reached, pattern 20 is called and its data is played.
3. InFrom(Song***)Pattern,selectthebouncesourcepat
tern.(Bydefault,thesongandpatternthatareselected
inthePatternEditpagewillbechosen.)
4. InTo:SongandPattern,selectthebouncedestination
songandpattern.ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00
U99canbespecified.
Track 10
(Drums)
Pattern 20
1. SelectPutToTracktoopenthedialogbox.
Get From Track

Thiscommandtakesmusicaldatafromatrackandloadsit
intothespecifiedpattern.
2. InPatternParameter,specifythepatternlengthofthe
getdestination.
3. SelectGetFromTracktoopenthedialogbox.
2. InPatternandPatternSelect,selecttheputsource
pattern.(Bydefault,thiswillbethepatternselectedin
thePatternEditpage)
3. InTo:Track,selecttheputdestinationtrack.
187
Sequencer mode
4. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheputdesti
nation.
Whenyouexecutethecommand,Measurewill
automaticallyupdate.Ifyouwishto,youcancontinue
puttingthepattern.Toexitthecommand,presstheExit
button.
Copy To Track
Thiscommandcopiesthespecifiedareaofmusicaldata
fromthespecifiedpatterntoatrackasmusicaldata.
UnlikethePutToTrackcommand,thiscommandactually
writesthemusicaldataofthepatternintothetrack,sothat
youcaneditthecopieddatainthetrack.Evenifyoulater
editthecopysourcepattern,themusicaldataofthesong
willnotbeaffected.
WhenyouexecutetheCopytoTrackcommand,themusical
datawillbeaffectedasfollows.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistinginthecopydestination
measureswillbeerased.
Themusicaldatathatiscopiedwillplaybackaccording
tothetimesignaturespecifiedatthecopydestination
measures.
Example: Copy the musical data of pattern 41 to measure 2.
Before Copy
Pattern 41
After Copy
5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldtospecify
thedestinationuserdrumtrackpatternnumber.When
youexecutethiscommand,thedatawillbeoverwritten
ontothecopydestinationnumber.
6. IfyouchecktheAllPatternsavailableinSong***item,
allpatternsinthesongthatcontainnoteeventswillbe
copied,startingatthenumberyouspecifiedinstep3.
7. IfyouexecutewithNoteOnlychecked,onlythenote
eventswillbecopied.
PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERbuttontoexecute.Ifyou
decidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbuttonortheEXIT
button.
AsdescribedinDrumTrackfunctionsettingsinProgram
modeonpage 100oftheOperationguide,settheDrum
TrackPatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.totheuser
DrumTrackpatternyouconverted.ThenplaytheDrum
Trackpattern.
Program
/Combination
Song
Drum Track
TheprocedureisthesameasforthePuttoTrackcommand.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePutToTrackon
page 1879.
Convert to Drum Trk Pattern

Thiscommandconvertsauserpatternintoauserdrum
trackpattern.Thisconversionletsyouuseauserpatternin
thedrumtrackofthevariousmodes.Thedrumtrack
patternyouconvertherewillbepreservedintheKROMEs
memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,soyoucan
manageittogetherwiththeprogramsandcombinations.
Preparing a user pattern

Youllfirstneedtopreparetheuserpatternthatyouwantto
converttoaDrumTrackpattern.
Tocreateauserpattern,youcanrealtimerecorditintheSeq
P10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage,orsteprecordit(see
OGp.71,andpage 198).
Alternatively,performancedatafromatrackcanbe
importedintoapattern,meaningthatperformancedata
youvecreatedinatrackorSMFdatayouveloadedin
Mediamodecanbeusedasauserpattern.Todothis,
executetheGetFromTrackmenucommandintheSeqP10:
Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage(seep.155).
Converting to a Drum Track pattern

1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode.
2. AccesstheSeqP10:Patern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
3. UsePatternandPatternSelecttoselecttheconversion
sourcepattern.
4. SelectConverttoDrumTrkPatterntoopenthedia
logbox.
188
Preset
Pattern
Track/RPPR
Drum Track
100
User
Pattern
User
Drum Track
Pattern
Convert to
Drum Track Pattern
Sequencer memory
(Not saved internally;
save on SD card.)
Internal memory (saved inside the M50)
Ifthereisinsufficientdrumpatternmemoryor
insufficientpatternlocations,anerrormessageofNot
enoughDrumTrackpatternmemoryorNotenough
DrumTrackpatternlocationsavailablewillappear,
andthecommandcannotbeexecuted.
Tip:Itsagoodideatoconvertdrumpatternsthatyouuse
frequently.UseLoadDrumTrackPatterntoloadthem.
Load Drum Track Pattern

Thiscommandloadsauserdrumtrackpatternintoauser
pattern.
Ifyouwanttoeditauserdrumtrackpattern,youmustfirst
loaditintoapatterninthesong,andtheneditit.After
editing,youcanuseConverttoDrumTrkPatterntosaveit
asauserdrumtrackpattern.
Sequencer: Menu Command Erase Drum Track Pattern
thetrackandeffectsettingsofthesongspecifiedforStep01
willbecopiedtothebeginningoftheresultingsong,andall
trackandeffectsettingsofsubsequentsongswillusetheset
tingsofthesongforStep01.
SettingsoftheToneAdjustfunctionwillnotbe
reflectedinthisconversion.
1. Selectthecuelist(C00C19)thatyouwanttoconvertto
asong.
2. SelectConverttoSongtoopenthedialogbox.
1. UseSelectRangeFrom(DrumTrack)andTo(Drum
Track)tospecifythecopysourceuserdrumtrackpat
tern.
TheuserdrumtrackpatternsbetweenFromandTowillbe
loaded.Ifyouwanttoloadonlyonepattern,setFromand
Totothesamepatternnumber.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thedatawillbe
overwrittenontothecopydestinationnumber.
2. UseLoadto(Song***)tospecifytheloaddestination
userpatternnumber.

Patternonpage 66.
Rename Cue List

Thiscommandrenamestheselectedcuelist.Anameofup
to24characterscanbeinput.Formoreinformation,please
seeEditingnamesonpage 91oftheOwnersmanual.
Delete Cue List

Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedcuelist.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thedataofthecurrently
selectedcuelistwillbedeleted.
Copy Cue List

Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanothercuelisttothe
currentlyselectedcuelist.
3. InToSong,specifytheconversiondestinationsong
number.
Ifyouselectanewsong,aconfirmationdialogboxwill
appear.
PresstheOKbuttontocreateanewsong,intowhichthecue
listwillbeconverted.
Ifyouselectedasongthatalreadycontainssettingsand
performancedata,executingthiscommandwillerasethe
dataofthatsongandreplaceitwiththedatathatwas
convertedfromthecuelist.Usethiscommandwithcaution.
Afterexecutingthiscommand,youcanpressthe
COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriortoexecution.
TheConverttoSongcommandconvertsacuelisttoasong
asdescribedbelow.
Song/TrackparametersettingsforStep01
Song/TrackparameterswillusethesettingsoftheStep
01song.
TheMIDIchannelofeachtrackwillbeassigned
accordingtothesettingsoftheStep01song.IfStep02
andfollowingsongshavedifferentsettings,itmaynot
bepossibletoachieveanacceptableplaybackresult
afterconversion.Asfaraspossible,trytokeepthe
MIDIchannelassignmentsconsistentbetweensongs
youintendtouseinaplaylistthatwillbeconverted
intoasong.
Thefollowingtrackparameterswillnotbereflectedinthe
conversion.AswiththeMIDIchannels,werecommendthat
youkeepthesesettingsconsistentbetweenallsongsinthe
cuelist.
SOLOON/OFF,Status,MIDIChannel,BankSelect(When
Status=EX2),ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,UseProgramsScale,
MIDIFilter,KeyZone,VelocityZone,Delay,andthetrackEQ
settings
ConvertingSong/Trackparametersintotrackevents
1. InFrom,specifythecopysourcecuelist.
Whenyouexecute,thesettingdataoftheselectedcuelist
willbedeleted,andreplacedbythecopysourcedata.
Convert to Song
(Convert Cue List to Song)
Thiscommandconvertsacuelistconsistingofmultiple
songstoasinglesong.Althoughitisnotpossibletorecord
additionaltracksintoacuelist,youcanconvertthecuelist
toasong,andthenrecordsolosetc.ontoopentracks.
Youwillneedtoconvertacuelisttoasongifyouwishto
writeittoanSDcardasSMFdata.Duringtheconversion,
SecondandsubsequentrepeatsoftheStep01song,and
thesettingsofStep02andfollowingsongswillallbe
convertedintotrackevents(musicaldata).
Thefollowingdatawillbeconverted.
Track116
ProgramSelect,Pan,Volume,Portamento,
Detune,BendRange
MasterTrack
Tempo,Meter
IfPan(Seq03(4)b)isRDN,itwillbeconvertedtoC064.
IfPortamento(Seq33(4)c)isPRG,orifBendRange
(Seq35(6)c)isPRGoranegativevalue,thesewillnotbe
reflectedintheconversion.
Inthecaseofadrumprogram,Detune(35(6)c)willbe
dividedintoRPNFineTuningandCoarseTuning,and
189
Sequencer mode
convertedtotheseevents.Forexample,iftheDetune
settingof+600,FineTuningwillbe00andCoarse
Tuningwillbe6.FineTuningwillmodifytheplayback
pitch(Detune).CoarseTuningwillchangethenotes
thatareplayedback(Transpose).Incasesotherthana
drumprogram,thepitchsettingwillbeappliedby
shiftingthenotenumbersinthetrackandaddingan
RPNFineTuningevent.
PLAY/MUTE(P01(2):ProgramT0108,T0916Play/Rec/
Mute)
ThePlay/Mutetrackparameterswillbereflectedinthe
song.SoloOn/Offwillnotbereflected.
TrackPlayLoop(P09(10):PlyLoopT0108,T0916
page)
IfTrackPlayLoopison,theareafromLoopStartto
LoopEndwillbeexpandedasfarasthelastmeasurein
themastertrack.
ordertoverifytheamountofmemorythatwillbe
requiredfortheconversion.
Acuelistthatislongerthan999measurescannotbecon
vertedintoasong.
Copy Song
Thiscommandcopiesaportion(anumberofmeasures)of
thesongspecifiedbyStep,andmakesitintoasong.Thisis
convenientwhenyouwanttomodifythestructureor
developmentofthesongsinacuelist.
Forexampleifyouhaveaneightmeasuresongandwantto
repeatmeasures58,youcanusethiscommandtocreatea
fourmeasuresongoutofthatportion.Thenyoucanassign
theresultingsongtoastepinacuelist,andrepeatit.
1. InCurrentStep,orSongselectthedesiredstep.
2. SelectCopySongtoopenthedialogbox.
(Example)
IfTrackPlayLoopisM005M008,andthemastertrack
contains10measures,thedatawillbeexpandedfromthe
beginningofthetrackasM005,6,7,8,M005,6,7,8,
M005,6.
PlayIntro(P09(10):PlyLoopT0108,T0916page)
IfTrackPlayLoopison,thedatawillbedeveloped
accordingtothePlayLoopsettinguntilthelastmeasure
ofthemastertrack.
IfPlayIntroischecked,thedatafromthebeginningof
thetrackuntilLoopEndwillbedeveloped,andthenthe
datafromLoopStartuntilLoopEndwillbedeveloped
untilthelastmeasureofthemastertrack.
ForexampleifTrackPlayLoopisM005M008andthe
mastertrackendsatmeasure10,checkingPlayIntrowill
causethedatatobedevelopedfromthebeginningofthe
trackasM001,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,M005,6,7,8,M005,6.
IfPlayIntroisnotchecked,pleaseseetheexamplein
TrackPlayLoop.
Patterns
PatternsintheStep01songwillbecopiedaspatternsof
theconvertedsong.
IfthereisasecondorsubsequentrepeatforStep01,orif
thetracksofStep02andsubsequentsongscontainpat
terns,theywillbeexpandedintotrackevents(musical
data).
Transpose
IftheTranspose(Seq35(6)c)ofthetracksinStep02and
subsequentsongsdifferfromthesettingsoftheStep01
song,thenotenumbersofthenotedatawillbeshifted.
Example)
IfStep01,Transpose=+1andStep02,Transpose1,the
actualnotenumbersoftheStep02tracknotedatawillbe
shifteddownwardby2.
RepeatFS(FootSwitch)Repeat1
IfRepeatissettoFS(FootSwitch),itwillbeconverted
asRepeat1.
WhenyouexecuteConverttoSongtoconvertacuelist
toasong,therepeatsettingswithinthecuelistandthe
patternandtrackplayloopsettingsofthesongsusedby
thecuelistwillallbeconvertedintoeventssuchasnote
data.Forthisreason,theamountofdatawillincrease
significantly,andinsomecasestheremaynotbeenough
internalmemorytoperformtheconversion.Inparticular
ifthecuelistuseslongsongs,orifnumerousrepeats
havebeenspecified,orifmanypatternsareusedbythe
songs,youshouldtryexecutingtheConverttoSong
commandfromtimetotimeasyoucreatethecuelist,in
190
3. InFromMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureinthecopy
sourcesong.InToEndofMeasure,specifythelast
measure.
4. InToSong,specifythesongintowhichthedatawillbe
converted.
Ifyouselectanewsong,adialogboxwillaskyoufor
confirmation.PresstheOKbuttontocreateanewsongand
copythedatatothatsong.
Ifyouselectanexistingsongthatalreadycontainssettings
and/ormusicaldata,executingthiscommandwillerasethe
dataofthatsongandrewriteitwiththedatafromthecopy
source.Beforeyouexecute,besurethatyouwillnotbe
losingimportantdata.
5. IfyoucheckReplacetooriginalSonginCueListand
executethiscommand,theCurrentStepsongwillbe
replacedbythenewlycreatedsong.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthisbox,thenewlycreated
songcanbeselectedlaterforthedesiredstepofthecuelist.
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode Copy Song
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode

YoucanrecordandplaybackSystemExclusiveevents,andedittracksthatcontainSystemExclusiveevents.
SysEx messages that can be recorded in real-time

Thefollowingexclusivemessagescanberecordedinrealtime:
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice
ParameterchangesinSequencermode(seetablebelow)
MasterVolumeuniversalexclusivemessagesassignedtothefootpedaloraRealtimeControlsknob
Parameter change messages that you can realtime-record in Sequencer mode

Front panel/Page
Frontpanel
Parameter
ARP
ARPbutton,SELECTbutton,REALTIMECONTROLS14knobs(GATE,VELOCITY,SWING,
STEP)
DrumTrack
DRUMTRACKbutton
RealtimeControls
SELECTbutton,REALTIMECONTROLS14knobs(TONE[CUTOFF],[RESONANCE],
[SWING],[STEP],USER[1],[2],[3],[4])
P0:Play/REC,Arp Program,Mixer
A/B
ToneAdjust
ProgramSelect,Pan,Volume,PLAY/MUTE,SoloOn/Off*1
P1:Controllers
AllPanelSwitchAssign,RealtimeControlsknobAssignparameters
P2:EQ
P3:TrackParam
P4:Zone/Delay
P7:ARP/DT
P8:Routing/IFX
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
ControllersSetup
AllToneAdjustparameters
EQTrim
AutoLoadProgEQ,Bypass,InputTrim,HighGain,MidFrequency,MidGain,LowGain
OSC
ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento
Pitch
Transpose,Detune,BendRange
Scale
UseProgramsscale,Type,key,Random
Delay
DelayTime[ms],MIDI/TempoSync.,BaseNote,Times
ARPSetup
Allparameters
ArpeggiatorA/B
Allparameters
ARPScanZone
Allparameters
DrumTrack
AllDrumTrackparameters
Routing1/2
Bus(IFX/Output)Select,Send1,Send2,FxControlBus
InsertFXSetup
IFX,IFXOn/Off,Chainto,Chain,Pan,BusSel,FXControlBus,Send1,Send2
IFX15
Alleffectparameters
CommonFXLFO
AllCommonFXLFO1,2parameters
Routing
MFX,MFXOn/Off,Chain,ChainDirection,ChainLevel,Return1,Return2,TFX,TFXOn/Off,
MasterVolume
MFX1/2
Alleffectparameters
TFX
Alleffectparameters
*1: SoloOn/Offisalwayscontrolledbyeventsinthetrack,
regardlessoftheplay/mutestatusofthattrack.
Themaximumamountofexclusivedatathatcanbe
recordedatonceisapproximately320Kbytes.Thissize
willdecreaseifothereventsexistwithinthesame
measure.
Youcannotsimultaneouslyrecordexclusivemessages
receivedfromanexternalMIDIdeviceandparameter
changesproducedbyediting.
Theeventsthatwillberecordedarecontrolledbythe
GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicsettingsSEQMode
Param.MIDIOut.ForControlChange,onlycontrol
changemessageswillberecorded.ForSysEXParam
Change,onlyparameterchangesandexclusive
messageswillberecorded(seeParam.MIDIOuton
page 200).
Realtimerecordingwillnotrecordparametereditsthat
youperformbyexecutingmenucommandsinthe
variouspages,norchangesyoumakebyusingthe
EffectPresetfunctiontorecalleffectparameters.
191
Sequencer mode
KROME sequencer file formats

TheKROMEsequencersupportsboththeproprietary
KROMESongformat,andStandardMIDIFiles.
Ifyoulike,youcanconvertdatabetweenthetwoformats,
simplybyloadingthedatainoneformatandthensavingit
intheother.
Fordetails,pleasesee22)LoadStandardMIDIFileon
page 230,andSaveSEQonpage 232.
KROME Song format

ThisisthenativeKROMEsequencerformat,whichis
requiredtoensurethatallKROMEspecificdataissaved
correctly.
Standard MIDI Files

YoucanalsoloadandsaveStandardMIDIFiles(SMF),for
compatibilitywithothersequencers.Notethatsome
KROMEspecificdatamaynotbemaintainedwheninSMF
files.
GM, XG, and GS System Exclusive Data

TheKROMEsequencercanrecordSystemExclusive
messages,includingXGorGSdata.Fordetails,pleasesee
SystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencermodeon
page 191.
NotethatGM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagesdonot
affecttheKROMEwhentheyareplayedback.
192
Global mode
IfyouwantthesettingsyoumakeinGlobalmodetobe
backedupwhenthepoweristurnedoff,youmust
writethemintomemory.FromP5:DrumKit,youllbe
abletoselectthemenucommandWriteDrumKits.
FromP6:ArpeggioPattern,youllbeabletoselect
WriteArpeggioPatterns.Fromtheotherpagesof
Globalmode,youllbeabletoselectWriteGlobal
Setting.
Thesecommandscanalsobeselectedbypressingthe
WRITEbutton.
Global Page Select
GLOBALPARAMETERS
Youcanalsoedituserscales,drumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternsetups.
Page
ARPPATTERN DRUMKIT
InGlobalmode,youcanmakesettingsthataffecttheentire
instrument,suchasmastertuning,MIDI,andmemory
protect.
Main content
P0:BasicSetup
Basicoverallsettings.(seep.194)
P1:MIDI
MIDIsettingsforKROME.(seep.198)
P2:Controllers
Controllersettingssuchasthepedals
connectedtotherearpanel.(seep.202)
CC#assignmentsforArpeggio
controllers.(seep.202)
P3:Scales
Scalesettingscreatedbytheuser.Youcan
specify16typesofoctavescale,andone
fullrangescale.(seep.203)
P4:Category
Editcategorynamesforprogramsand
combinations.(seep.204)
P5:DrumKit
Editdrumkits.(seep.205)
P6:Arpeggio
Pattern
CreatingArpeggiopattern.(seep.211)
PresstheGLOBALbuttontoaccessGlobalmode.
YoucanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesinGlobal
mode.
1. PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect.
ThepageaccessedpriortopressingthePAGEbuttonis
showningrey.

HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumerickeys06
tospecifyapagenumber;youwillaccessthe
correspondingpage.
Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:Scalespage,
holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumerickey3.
PresstheEXITbuttontoreturntotheP0:BasicSetup
page.IfsomethingotherthantheBasicpageisselected,
pressthe[EXIT]buttontoaccesstheBasicpage.
193
Global mode
Global P0: Basic Setup

MIDIRPNCoarseTunemessageswillmakerelative
adjustmentstothepitchspecifiedbytheKey
Transposesetting.InProgrammode,thesemessages
willbereceivedontheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
byMIDIChannel(Global11a),andinothermodes
theywillbereceivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedfor
eachtimbreortrack.(Transpose,Detune,Combi3
5(6)c,Seq35(6)c)
01: Basic
01
Menu
01a
Velocity Curve
01b
01c
Here,youcanmakemastertunesettings,turnalleffectson/
off,andmakeon/offsettingsforthearpeggiatoranddrum
track.
01a: Basic
Master Tune
[50cent (427.47Hz)...+50cent (452.89Hz)]
ThisadjuststheoveralltuningoftheentireKROMEinone
centunits(semitone=100cents),overarangeof50cents.
Withasettingof0,thefrequencyofA4willbe440Hz.
TheA4pitchgivenhereiswhenEqualTemperamentis
selectedasthescale.Ifadifferentscaleisselected,A4
maynotbe440Hz.
Key Transpose
[12...+00...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitonestepsovera1octave
range.
ThecurvesyoucanselectwilldependontheConvert
Position(Global11a)setting.IfthesettingisPreMIDI,the
curveisappliedimmediatelyafterthekeyboard.Ifthe
settingisPostMIDI,thecurveisappliedimmediatelybefore
thesoundgenerator.
InthecaseofPreMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamicsare
modifiedasshownbytransmissioncurves19(lowerleft
diagram),andreceptionisfixedatcurve4linear(diagramat
lowerright).
InthecaseofPostMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamics
aretransmittedaccordingtotransmissioncurve4linear
(lowerleftdiagram),andwillbeinterpretedaccordingto
receptioncurve19(lowerrightdiagram).
IfyoureusingtheKROMEasaMIDIsoundmodule,and
wanttoadjusttheoverallbrightnessofthesound,set
ConvertPosition(Global11a)toPostMIDIandselectthe
appropriatevelocitycurve.
For a setting of PreMIDI
For a setting of PostMIDI
Velocity (KBDMIDI Out)
Velocity (MIDI InTG)
127
MAX
Thissettingisappliedatthelocation(PreMIDIorPostMIDI)
specifiedbyConvertPosition(Global11a).
6
7
8
MIDI note number transmitted by the KROME

Keys\Transpose
61keys
73keys
88keys
12
2484
(C1C6)
1284
(C0C6)
996
(A1C7)
0
3696
(C2C7)
2496
(C1C7)
21108
(A0C8)
+12
48108
(C3C8)
36108
(C2C8))
33120
(A1C9)
Note:IfConvertPositionissettoPreMIDI,theMIDInote
numberstransmittedfromtheKROMEwillbeaffectedby
KeyTransposesetting.
MasterTunecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterFineTuning(F0,7F,
nn,04,03,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/mm=
value).
KeyTransposecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterCoarseTuning(F0,
7F,nn,04,04,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/
mm=value).
ThesemessagesarereceivedontheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a).
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,MIDI
RPNmessagescanbereceivedtocontrolthetuning
andtranspositionoftheprogramortimbre
(Combinationmode)ortrack(Sequencermode).
IncomingMIDIRPNFineTunemessageswillmake
relativeadjustmentstothetuningspecifiedbythe
MasterTunesetting.
194
[19]
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichthevolumeand/ortonewill
changeinresponsetovariationsinkeyboardplaying
dynamics(velocity).
Velocity
effect
4
3
2
5
4
1
Soft
Strong
Transmitted Table
KBD
3
2
127
Received Table
Curve 19
Curve 4
Curve 4
Curve 19
TG
MIDI
PreMIDI
PostMIDI
Global Convert Position
1,2,3:Stronglyplayednoteswillbeaffected.
4(Normal):Thenormalcurve
5,6:Producesaneffectevenifyoudonotplayverystrongly.
7:Thiscurveproducesarelativelyconsistenteffectforsoftly
playednotes.
8:Thiscurveproducesanevenmoreconsistenteffect.
Eachcurvehasitsowncharacteristics,soyoushouldselect
thecurvethatbestsuitsyourownplayingstyleandthe
resultsyouwanttoobtain.
9:Comparedwiththestandardcurve#4,thiscurvesoftens
theresponseofgentlyplayednotes.Thisallowsvelocity
controlwithbroaderdynamicsforsoundssuchasacoustic
piano.Thissettingisparticularlyrecommendedforthe
KROME88.
Global P0: Basic Setup 01: Basic
Aftertouch Curve (MIDI IN)
(effectcontrol5)willbetransmittedrespectively.The
transmitteddatawillbe0foroff,and127foron.
[18]
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichincomingaftertouchdata
willaffectthevolumeortonewhenConvertPosition
(Global11a)issettoPostMIDI.
ThissettinghasnoeffectwhenConvertPosition
(Global11a)issettoPreMIDI.
All ARP/DT Off
Thiscurveisappliedimmediatelybeforethetonegenerator.
TheaftertouchCurvesettingselectsthecurvethatis
appliedtotheincomingaftertouch.
After Touch (MIDI InTG)
5
4
7
3
6
[Off, On]
On(checked):AllarpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunctions
willbeoff.ThearpeggiatorwillnotoperateeveniftheARP
buttonison.TheDrumTrackfunctionwillnotoperateeven
iftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison.
Off(unchecked):ThearpeggiatorsettingsandARPbutton
settingsinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes
willbeused.TheDrumTrackfunctionwilloperate
accordingtothesettingsineachmodeandthestateofthe
DRUMTRACKbutton.
MAX
Aftertouch
effect
01c: ARP/Drum Track
8:RANDOM
Load ARP when changing:
127
1,2:Thiscurveproduceschangewhenstrongaftertouch
pressureisapplied.
3(Normal):Thenormalcurve.
4,5:Thiscurveproduceschangeevenwhenlightpressureis
applied.
6,7:Thesecurvesproducechangein24or12steps.Curve
number7allowschangeovertwelvesteps,sowhenusing
aftertouchtomodifythepitch,youcansettherangeof
modificationtooneoctave,anduseaftertouchtovarythe
pitchinsemitonesteps.
8:Thisisarandomcurve.Usethiswhenyouwishtocreate
specialeffects,ortouseaftertouchtoapplyunpredictable
modulation.
Withasettingofaftertouch,thesettingyoumakehere
willbeappliedimmediatelybeforetheKROMEs
internaltonegenerator,meaningthatitwillaffectthe
datareceivedviaMIDI,butwillnotaffectthe
transmitteddata.
Program
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchprograms,thearpeggiator
settingsstoredinthatprogramwillbeused.Normallyyou
willusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchange
evenifyouswitchprograms.Usethissettingifyouwantto
switchProgramsoundswithoutchangingthephrasesfrom
thearpeggiator.
Combination
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchcombinations,the
arpeggiatorsettingsstoredinthatcombinationwillbeused.
NormallyyouwillusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchange
evenifyouswitchcombinations.Usethissettingifyouwant
onlytoswitchcombinationsoundswithoutchangingthe
phrasesfromthearpeggiator.
Mode, Stop Watch

01b: Effect Global SW

Enable IFX 15
[Off, On]
01: Menu Command
Off(unchecked):AllinserteffectsIFX15willbeoff.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
On(checked):TheP8:InsertEffectsettingsforeachIFXOn/
OffinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswillbe
valid.
1:LoadPreload/DemoDataseep.216
Enable MFX1&2
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):MasterEffect1and2(MFX1,2)willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOsettingMFX1On/Off,
andMFX2On/Off,inProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodeswillbevalid.
Thison/offsettingislinkedwiththefrontpanelMASTER
FXbutton.
Enable TFX
2:Changeallbankreferencesseep.216
3:DisplaySetupseep.216
4:TouchPanelCalibrationseep.217
5:HalfDamperCalibrationseep.217
6:UpdateSystemSoftwareseep.218
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):Totaleffect(TFX)willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOsettingTFXOn/Off,
inProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswillbe
valid.
Thison/offsettingislinkedwiththefrontpanelTOTALFX
button.
Thesesettingswillalwaysbeturnedonwhenyou
powerontheKROME.
WhenEnableIFX,EnableMFX1&2,orEnableTFX
settingsareswitched,controlchangemessagesCC#92
(effectcontrol2),CC#94(effectcontrol4),andCC#95
195
Global mode
Hereyoucanspecifythetimewhenautopoweroffwill
occur.Youcanalsopreventthepowerfromturningoff.
02: System Preference

02
Menu
02a
Whenthepowerturnsoff,thesettingsyouhadbeen
editingwillbelost.Youshouldsaveanysettingsthat
youwanttokeep.
30minutes,anhour,4hours:Thepowerwillautomatically
turnoffifthespecifiedtimeelapseswithoutanyuserinput
beingperformedontheKROMEskeyboardorbuttons.The
availablesettingsare30minutes,1hour,and4hours.
Ifyouvechosenoneofthesesettings,adialogboxwill
appearwhenthesystemstartsup,informingyouofthe
lengthoftimeafterwhichautopoweroffwilloccur.
02b
Here,youcanmakeoverallsettingsfortheentiresystem
suchasbankmap,andmemoryprotect.
Ifyouwanttochangetheautopoweroffsetting,pressthe
ChangeSettingbuttoninthisdialogboxandchangethe
settingasdesired.
02a: System Preference

Bank Map
[KORG, GM(2)]
Thisspecifiesthemappingofprogramsandcombinations
relativetoBankSelectcontrolchangemessages(CC#0upper
byteandCC#32lowerbyte).
Thebankselectmessagesshowninthetablebelowwillbe
received(R)andtransmitted(T)forProgrambanksAF,
GM,g(1)g(9),g(d)andCombinationbanksAD.
Bank
A
Bank Map: KORG

00.00R/T
Map: GM(2)
63.00R/T
00.01R/T
63.01R/T
00.02R/T
63.02R/T
63.03R/T
00.03R/T
00.04R/T
63.04R/T
00.05R/T
63.05R/T
GM,
121.00R/T,56.00R
121.00R/T,56.00R,00.00R
g(1)...g(9)
121.01...09R/T
121.01...09R/T
g(d)
120.00R/T,62.00R
120.00R/T,62.00R
Power-On Mode
[Reset, Memorize]
Specifiestheconditionatpoweron.
Reset:TheKROMEwillbeinProgrammodeP0:Play,and
ProgramA000willbeselected.
Severalminutesbeforethepowerturnsoff,adialogboxwill
appearwithacountdownindicatingthetimeuntilthe
powerturnsoff.Ifyoudontwantthepowertoturnoff,
presstheKROMEsdisplayorkeyboard,oruseabuttonor
knob.Autopoweroffwillbereset,andthesamemessage
willappearonceagainifnouserinputisperformedforthe
specifiedlengthoftime.
Memorize:Thelocation(modeandpage)whichyoumost
recentlyaccessedwhenyoulastpoweredofftheKROME
willberecalled.IfyouwereinProgramorCombination
mode,theprogramorcombinationbank/numberatpower
offwillberecalled.
Beforeturningoffthepower,besuretowriteyourdata
orsaveitinMediamode.Thisfunctiondoesnot
memorizethecontentsofanyparametersthatwere
edited.
Auto Power-Off
[30 minutes, an hour, 4 hours, Disabled]
TheKROMEwillautomaticallyturnoffitsownpowera
certainlengthoftimeafteritskeyboard,display,buttons,or
knobswerelastused.(Withthefactorysettings,thepower
willturnoffinapproximatelyfourhours.)
*MovingtheVOLUMEknobisnotconsideredusagefor
thispurpose.Evenifyouusetheseknobs,thepowerwill
stillturnoffwhenthespecifiedtimehaselapsedifnoother
userinputhasbeenperformed.
Evenwhensongsordemosongsarebeingplayedback
consecutively,thepowerwillautomaticallyturnoffifthe
specifiedtimeelapseswithoutanysoundatallbeing
produced.
196
Disable:Autopoweroffwillbedisabled.Thepowerwill
notturnoffautomatically.
Changesyoumaketothissettingarealwayssaved.
ThereisnoneedtoexecuteWriteGlobalSetting.
Beep Enable
[Off, On]
On(checked):Abeepwillbeheardwhenyoupressan
objectinthedisplay.
Off(unchecked):Nobeepwillbeheard.
Animation
[Off, On]
On(checked):Enablesananimationeffectwhendisplaying
menus,pads,ordialogboxes.
Off(unchecked):Disablestheanimationeffect.
Global P0: Basic Setup 02: System Preference
Insomecases,theanimationwillbedisabled
automaticallywhenlargeamountsofperformancedata
isbeingprocessedbythedrumtrackorsequencer.
Value Entry Pop-up
[Off, On]
On(checked):Apopupwillappearwhenyouholddown
orpresstwiceonaneditcell,knob,orslider.
Off(unchecked):Apopupwillnotappear.
REALTIME CONTROLS Pop-up
[Off, On]
On(checked):Apopupwillappearwhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelREALTIMECONTROLSknob.
Arpeggio User Pattern
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
On(checked):Internaluserarpeggiopatternmemorywill
beprotected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
performed.
Writingauserarpeggiopattern
Loadingpreloadarpeggiopatterndata
Loadinguserarpeggiopatterndatafrommedia
Off(unchecked):Apopupwillnotappear.
Insomecases,popupdisplaywillbedisabled
automaticallywhenlargeamountsofperformancedata
isbeingprocessedbythedrumtrackorsequencer.
02b: Memory Protect

Program
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaldrumkit
memory.
ReceivinguserarpeggiopatterndataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaluser
arpeggiopatternmemory.
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalprogrammemory.
On(checked):Internalprogrammemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingaprogram
02: Menu Command
1:LoadPreload/DemoDataseep.216
2:Changeallbankreferencesseep.216
3:DisplaySetupseep.216
4:TouchPanelCalibrationseep.217
5:HalfDamperCalibrationseep.217
Loadingpreloadedprogramdata
6:UpdateSystemSoftwareseep.218
onpage 216.
Loadingprogramdatafrommedia
ReceivingprogramdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalprogram
memory.
Combination
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalcombinationmemory.
On(checked):Internalcombinationmemorywillbe
protected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
performed.
Writingacombination
Loadingpreloadedcombinationdata
Loadingcombinationdatafrommedia
ReceivingcombinationdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernal
combinationmemory.
Song
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalsongmemory.
However,whenthepoweristurnedoff,thesongdatain
songmemorywillbelostregardlessofthissetting.
On(checked):Internalsongmemorywillbeprotected,and
thefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Recordingtothesequencer
Loadingpreloadedsongdata
Loadingsongdatafrommedia
ReceivingsongdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalsong
memory.
Drum Kit
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaldrumkitmemory.
On(checked):Internaldrumkitmemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingadrumkit
Loadingpreloadeddrumkitdata
Loadingdrumkitdatafrommedia
ReceivingdrumkitdataviaMIDIdatadump
197
Global mode
Global P1: MIDI

Note Receive (Note Receive Filter) [All, Even, Odd]
11: MIDI Basic

11
Menu
11a
Thissettingspecifieswhetherevennumbered,odd
numbered,orallnotenumberswillbesoundedwhennote
dataisreceivedfromtheKROMEskeyboardorfroman
externalMIDIdevice.ByconnectingtheKROMEtoanother
KROMEandsettingoneinstrumenttoEvenandtheotherto
Odd,youcaneffectivelydoublethepolyphonybydividing
thenotesbetweenthetwoinstruments.
All:Allnotenumberswillbereceived.Normallyyouwill
leavethissettoAll.
Even:Evennumberednotes(C,D,E,F#,G#,A#)willsound.
Odd:Oddnumberednotes(C#,D#,F,G,A,B)willsound.
Here,youcanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsthataffectthe
entireKROME.
ThissettinghasnoeffectontheMIDIdatathatis
received.
Using a KROME to play another connected KROME unit
Note:TotransmitMIDIexclusivedumpdata,youllusethe
menucommandsofthisP1:MIDIpage.
11a: MIDI Setup
Another KROME
EVEN
Playing two connected KROME units from an external keyboard

MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedinthefollowingcases.
Whentransmittingandreceivingperformancedatain
Programmode(ProgP0:Play).
WhenselectingcombinationsviaMIDIinCombination
mode(CombiP0:Play).
Whentriggeringthedrumtrack(withTriggerModeset
toWaitKBDTrig)inProgramorCombinationmode.
Whencontrollingtimbresoreffectsthathavebeensetto
Gchinvariousmodes
WhentransmittingandreceivingSystemExclusive
messages
MIDI received
InProgrammode(P0:Play),MIDIdataisreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel,butinCombinationmode(P0:Play)or
Sequencermode,MIDIdataisreceivedontheMIDIchannel
specifiedforeachtimbreortrack.
InProgrammode,thisdatawillbetransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel.InCombinationmode,datawillbe
transmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchanneland
ontheMIDIchannelsoftimbreswhoseStatus(Combi3
1(2)c)issettoEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,musicaldatawillbetransmittedonthe
channelspecifiedforthecurrentlyselectedtrack(Seq3
1(2)c)(whoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2).
Another KROME
EVEN
Local Control On
[Off, On]
LocalControlOn(checked):TheKROMEsknobs,andthe
keyboard,joystick,SW1,andSW2willcontroltheKROMEs
soundgenerator.Leavethissettingcheckedifyoureplaying
theKROMEbyitself.
LocalControlOff(unchecked):TheKROMEsknobs,the
keyboard,joystick,SW1,andSW2willbedisconnectedfrom
theKROMEssoundgenerator.
ThismeansthatoperatingtheKROME(playingits
keyboardandusingthejoystick,orplayingbackthe
sequencer)willnotsounditsinternaltonegenerator.
TurnLocalControlOffifloopbackfromanexternal
sequencercausesduplicatenotes.
Sequencer
Local
Control
OFF
Record
ON
Arpeggiator
MIDI IN
UsetheglobalMIDIchanneltoswitchIFX15(CC#92),
MFX1&2(CC#94)andTFX(CC#95)on/off.
MIDI output when playing the KROME
MIDI IN
MIDI keyboard etc.
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),programchangesreceived
ontheglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchthecombination
(Global12b:MIDIFilter).
TocontrolthepanfollowingIFX,sends1/2,MFX1/2and
TFX,usetheglobalMIDIchannelwhenintheProgram
mode;whileintheCombination,orSequencermodes,use
thechannelspecifiedseparatelybyCtrlChforIFX15,
MFX1&2,andTFX.BysettingCtrlChtoGch,youcan
controltheseparametersfromtheglobalMIDIchannel.
KROME
ODD
MIDI Patchbay
[116]
SetstheglobalMIDIchannel.
198
MIDI IN
ODD
Basic:
MIDI Channel (Global MIDI Channel)
MIDI OUT
Trigger
Local
Control
Tone
generator
OFF
ON
MIDI OUT
IfLocalControlisOff,MIDItransmission/reception
willoccurnormally.Playingthekeyboardwillcause
thecorrespondingnotedatatobetransmitted,and
receivednotedatawillplaytheKROMEsinternal
sounds.
Note:EvenifLocalControlisOn,notesplayedbackbythe
internalsequencerwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.
Convert Position
[PreMIDI, PostMIDI]
ThissettingspecifiesthelocationatwhichtheTranspose
andVelocityCurvesettingswillbeapplied.Thissettingwill
affecttheMIDIdatathatistransmittedandreceived,and
thedatathatisrecordedontheinternalsequencer.
WhenusingtheKROMEskeyboardtoplaytheinternaltone
generator,theTranspose,VelocityCurve,andaftertouch
Global P1: MIDI 11: MIDI Basic
Curvesettingswillalwaystakeeffectregardlessofthis
setting.
MIDI Clock:
PreMIDI:VelocityCurve,andTransposewillbeappliedto
thedatathatistransmittedfromtheKROMEskeyboard.
MIDI Clock (MIDI Clock Source)

[Internal, External MIDI, External USB, Auto]
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,andTransposesettings
willaffectthedatathatistransmittedfromMIDIOUTwhen
theKROMEskeyboardisplayed,andthedatathatis
recordedontheinternalsequencer.
MIDIdatareceivedfromMIDIINorthedataplayedback
bytheinternalsequencerwillnotbeaffected.
UsethissettingtosynchronizetheKROMEsarpeggiator
andinternalsequencerwithanexternalMIDIdevice(e.g.,
sequencerorrhythmmachine)andcomputer.
Velocity
Curve
Velocity
Curve=4
MIDI IN
Record
Sequencer
Play
Aftertouch
Curve=3
Scale
Transpose
KROME
No
Transpose
Tone
generator
Note number
change
MIDI OUT
Transmitted Table
Received Table
PostMIDI:VelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,andTranspose
willbeappliedtodatabeforeitentersthetonegenerator.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,and
Transposesettingswillaffectthedatathatissenttothe
internaltonegeneratorwhenyouplaytheKROMEs
keyboard,whentheinternalsequencerisplayedback,or
whendataisreceivedfromMIDIIN.
Thissettingwillnotaffectthedatathatistransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTorrecordedontheinternalsequencerwhenyou
playtheKROMEskeyboardorplaybackthesequence.
Velocity
Curve
MIDI IN
Record
Sequencer
Play
Aftertouch
Curve
Velocity
Curve=4
No
Transpose
Scale
Transpose
Pitch change
KROME
Transmitted Table
MIDI OUT
Received Table
Tone
generator
Internal:Thearpeggiatorandtheinternalsequencerwill
operateaccordingtotheinternalclock.
SelecttheInternalsettingwhenusingtheKROMEbyitself,
orwhenyouwanttheKROMEtobethemaster(controlling
device)sothatconnectedexternalMIDIdeviceswill
synchronizetotheKROMEMIDIClock.
ExternalMIDI:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationtotheMIDIClockinputfroman
externalMIDIdevice.
ExternalUSB:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationwiththeMIDIClockfroma
computer(forexampleasequencerorDAWapplication),
connectedtotheUSBconnector.
Auto:Normallytheoperationwillbethesameasthe
Internalsetting.IfexternalMIDIClockmessagesare
receivedfromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,theKROME
willautomaticallyswitchtoExternalMIDIandExternal
USB.
Note:IfyouselectAutowhenanexternalMIDIsequencer
andcomputerisconnected,theKROMEwillautomatically
switchtoInternaloperationiftheexternalsequencerisnot
transmittingMIDIClockmessages,allowingthearpeggiator
tooperateandparametersforwhichMIDI/TempoSyncis
turnedontofunction.
Note:IfafterreceivingaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,nonewMIDI
Clockmessageisreceivedwithinanintervalof500ms,orif
youstarttheKROMEssequencerfromthefrontpanel
withouthavingreceivedaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINandUSBconnector,theKROME
willautomaticallyswitchtoInternaloperation.
Receive Ext. Realtime Commands
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):EvenifMIDIClockissettoExternal
MIDI,orifsettoAutoandtheKROMEissynchronizedto
externalMIDIClockmessages,MIDICommonmessages
andRealtimemessages(SongPositionPointer,Start,
Continue,Stop)willnotbereceived.(SongSelectmessages
willbereceived.)
Note:Usethissettingiftheabovemessagesfromanexternal
MIDIsequencerareinadvertentlyresettingtheKROMEs
songsettings.
On(checked):TheaboveCommonmessages(including
SongSelect)andRealtimemessageswillbereceived.
ThisparametercannotbesetifMIDIClockisInternal.
199
Global mode
SEQ Mode:
Prog MIDI Out
Track MIDI Out

[for Master, for External Sequencer]
ThissettingspecifieswhatwillbetransmittedviaMIDI
whenyouswitchsongsinSequencermode.
forMaster:NormallyinSequencermode,theinternal
sequencercanrecordorplaybackaperformanceonthe
KROMEskeyboard.Inthiscase,tracksthataresettoEXTor
BTHwillcontrolexternalMIDIsoundmodules.Youcan
makesettingsinasongsothatwhenyouselectthatsongon
theKROME,tracksthataresettoEXTorBTHwilltransmit
programchangesorotherMIDImessages*tosetupyour
externalMIDIsoundmodules.
forExternalSequencer:Choosethissettingifyouwantto
usetheKROMEinSequencermodeasamultitimbral
soundmoduledrivenbyanexternalsequencer.Withthis
setting,eventhetracksthataresettoEXTorBTHwillnot
transmitprogramchangesorotherMIDImessages*when
youswitchsongsontheKROME.Inthiscase,echoback
fromtheexternalMIDIsequencerwillnotswitchprograms
orotherparameterstotheidenticalsettingsoneachtrack
thatissettothesameMIDIchannel.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Thenotedataofthedrumtrackpatternwill
betransmittedonthechannelspecifiedbyProgMIDICh.
Off(unchecked):Thenotedataofthedrumtrackpattern
willnotbetransmitted.
11: Menu Command
1:DumpProgramseep.218
2:DumpCombinationseep.218
3:DumpDrumKitseep.218
4:DumpArpeggioPatternseep.218
5:DumpGlobalSettingseep.218
6:DumpSequencerseep.218
7:DumpDrumTrackPatternseep.218
onpage 216.
12: MIDI Routing
*Applicableparameters
ProgramSelect:CC#00bankselect(LSB),CC#32bank
select(MSB),programchange
Pan:CC#10pan
12
Menu
12a
Volume:CC#7volume
Portamento:CC#65portamentoOn/Off,CC#5portamento
time
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
12b
(PostFX)Pan:CC#8postinserteffectpan
Param. MIDI Out

[Control Change, SysEx-Param Change]
ThissettingspecifieswhethercontrolchangesorSystem
Exclusivemessageswillbetransmittedwhenyouedita
parameterinSequencermode.
ControlChange:Datafortheeditedparameterwillbe
transmittedasacontrolchange.
SysExParamChange:Datafortheeditedparameterwillbe
transmittedasaparameterchange.
Note:Forthesetooperate,EnableControlChangeor
EnableExclusive(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIRouting)mustbe
checkedrespectively.
*Applicableparameters
Pan:CC#10pan
Volume:CC#7volume
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
Drum Track:
DrumtrackprogramsinProgrammodewillbetriggeredon
theglobalMIDIchannelifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBD
Trig.TheMIDItransmitchannelisspecifiedbytheDrum
TrackProgMIDICh.UsetheDrumTrackProgMIDIOut
tospecifywhethertheMIDInotedataofthepatternwillbe
transmitted.
DrumtrackprogramsdonottransmitorreceiveMIDI
programchanges.
Prog MIDI Ch
[0116]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelfordrumtracktransmission
andreceptioninProgrammode.IfProgMIDIOutis
checked,drumpatternnotedatawillbetransmittedonthis
MIDIchannel.Thedefaultsettingischannel10.
200
Here,youcanmakeMIDIRoutingandMIDIFiltersettings
fortheentireKROME.
Note:TotransmitMIDIexclusivedumpdata,youllusethe
menucommandsoftheP1:MIDIpage.
12a: MIDI Routing

ARP Controllers MIDI Out
[Control Change, SysEx-Param Change]
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPbuttonorwhenyouoperate
knobs14withARPselectedbySELECTswtich.
ControlChange:OperatingtheARPbuttonorknobs14
willtransmittheMIDIcontrolchangemessagesthatare
assignedinGlobalP22:Controllers(SW)ARPON/OFF
and(ARPCONTROL)GATE(ARPCONTROL)STEP.
SysExParamChange:OperatingtheARPbuttonorknobs
14willtransmitMIDISystemExclusiveparameterchange
messagesfortheparameters(arpeggiatoron/off,Gate,
Velocity,Swing,Step)assignedtothebuttonandknobs.
12b: MIDI Filter

[Off, On]
On(checked):Programchangeswillbetransmittedand
received.
InProgrammode(P0:Play),theprogramwillbeswitched
whenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedontheglobal
MIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a).
Whenyouswitchprograms,aprogramchangemessagewill
betransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel.
Global P1: MIDI 12: MIDI Routing
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),thecombinationwillbe
switchedwhenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.However,itispossibletosetthe
EnableCombinationChangeparametersothatthe
combinationisnotswitched.Whenaprogramchangeis
receivedonthechannelspecifiedforeachtimbrebyMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c),theprogramofthattimbrewillbe
switched.However,theprogramchangesforeachtimbre
willbeaffectedbythesettingoftheEnableProgram
Changeparameter(Combi51(2)c).
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecorded
withcontrolchangedata;i.e.,thecontrolchanges
previouslyrecordedintothesequencerwillbetransmitted
viaMIDI.
Whenyouswitchcombinations,aprogramchangemessage
willbetransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel,andalso
transmittedsimultaneouslyonthechanneloftimbreswhose
Status(Combi31(2)c)issettoEXTorEX2.
CheckthisifyouwanttoedittheKROMEfromaconnected
computer,orifyouwanttoallowbidirectionalediting.
InSequencermode,incomingprogramchangemessageson
achannelthatcorrespondstoatrackwhoseStatus(Seq3
1(2)c)issettoINTorBTHwillswitchprogramsonthat
track.
Whenyouselectasongorplaybacksequencerdata,
programchangeswillbetransmittedonthechannelsof
trackswhoseStatusissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Off(unchecked):Programchangeswillnotbetransmitted
orreceived.
Bank Change
[Off, On]
On(checked):TheBankSelectcontrolchangemessagewill
betransmittedtogetherwithprogramchangemessages.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeischecked.
Off(unchecked):BankSelectmessageswillnotbe
transmittedorreceived.
Whenrecordingontheinternalsequencer,bankselect
messageswillberecordedregardlessofthissetting.
Howeverforplayback,thissettingwillapply.
Combination Change
Off(unchecked):Controlchangemessageswillneitherbe
transmittednorreceived.
Enable Exclusive
[Off, On]
On(checked):SystemExclusivedatawillbetransmitted
andreceived.
Off(unchecked):SystemExclusivedatawillnotbe
transmitted.Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked.
However,SystemExclusivedatawillbetransmittedand
receivedwhilethemenucommands(Dump Program
DumpDrumTrackPattern)ofthispagearedisplayed.
12: Menu Command
1:DumpProgramseep.218
2:DumpCombinationseep.218
3:DumpDrumKitseep.218
4:DumpArpeggioPatternseep.218
5:DumpGlobalSettingseep.218
6:DumpSequencerseep.218
7:DumpDrumTrackPatternseep.218
onpage 216.
[Off, On]
On(checked):WheninCombiP0:Play,anincoming
programchangemessageontheglobalMIDIchannelsetby
MIDIChannel(Global11a)willswitchcombinations.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeischecked.
Anincomingprogramchangeonachannelotherthanthe
globalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofanytimbre
thatmatchesthatMIDIchannel.
Off(unchecked):Anincomingprogramchangemessageon
theglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofany
timbrewhoseMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)matchesthe
globalMIDIchannel.Thecombinationwillnotbeswitched.
Theprogramchangesforeachtimbrewillbeaffectedbythe
settingoftheEnableProgramChangeparameter(Combi5
1(2)c).
Enable After Touch
[Off, On]
On(checked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillbetransmitted
andreceived.
Off(unchecked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillneitherbe
transmittednorreceived.
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecordedwith
aftertouchdata;i.e.,aftertouchwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
PerformingontheKROMEskeyboardwilltransmitneither
channelaftertouchnorpolyphonicaftertouch.However,
sincetheKROMEdoessupportaftertouchasanAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS),itcanreceiveaftertouchto
control.
Enable Control Change
[Off, On]
On(checked):Controlchangemessageswillbetransmitted
andreceived.
201
Global mode
Global P2: Controllers

21: Foot Controllers
22: MIDI CC# Assign

21
Menu
22
Menu
22a
21a
21a: Foot Switch & Pedal/Damper
22a: ARP Controllers
Foot Switch Assign
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPbuttonorwhenyouoperate
knobs14withARPselectedbySELECTbutton.
[List of Foot Switch Assign]
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyapedalswitch
(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1orPS3)connectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleaseseeFoot
SwitchAssignmentsonpage 349.
Foot Pedal Assign
[List of Foot Pedal Assign]
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyafootvolume
pedal(XVP10orEXP2option[soldseparately])connected
totheASSIGNABLEPEDALjack.
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleaseseeFoot
PedalAssignmentsonpage 350.
Damper Polarity
[() KORG Standard, (+)]
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthedamperpedalconnected
totheDAMPERjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnotmatch,
operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproducethecorrect
result.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,setthisto()KORG
Standard.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
damperpedals,suchastheoptionalKorgDS1H.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
Foot Switch Polarity
[() KORG Standard, (+)]
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthefootswitchconnectedto
theASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnot
match,operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproducethe
correctresult.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,setthisto()
KORGStandard.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
footswitches,suchastheoptionalKorgPS1orPS3.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
Here,youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothe
arpeggiatorswitchesandknobs14whenARPisselected
bytheSELECTbutton.
Whenyouoperateaswitchorknobs14whenARPis
selectedbytheSELECTbutton,theassignedcontrolchange
messagewillbetransmittedfromtheMIDIOUTconnector.
Theassignedcontrolchangemessagescanalsobereceived
fromanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheMIDIIN
connector,andusedtocontrolthecorresponding
arpeggiator.
Thedefaultsettingsofeachparameterareasshowninthe
displayabove.
(SW) ARP (ON/OFF)
(ARP CONTROL) GATE
21: Menu Command
onpage 216.
[Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob1when
ARPisselectedbytheSELECTswtich.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#22.
(ARP CONTROL) VELOCITY
[Off, 000...119]
CC#23.
(ARP CONTROL) SWING
[Off, 000...119]
CC#24.
(ARP CONTROL) STEP

V
[Off, 000...119]
AssignsacontrolchangemessagesentbytheARPbutton.
ThedefaultsettingisCC#14.
[Off, 000...119]
CC#25.
22: Menu Command
1:ResetControllerMIDIAssignseep.220
onpage 216.
202
Global P3: Scales 31: Scales
Global P3: Scales

31b: User All Notes Scale
31: Scales
31
Menu
Tune
[99+99]
Makesindependentpitchsettingsforeachofthe128notes.
Adjustthepitchofeachofthe128notes(C1G9)inone
centsteps.Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
31a
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
31b
Keyboard Lock
Usethehorizontalscrollbartomovetothekeyrangethat
youwanttoset,andselectthekeythatyouwanttospecify.
Here,youcanmakesettingsforsixteendifferentUser
OctaveScalesandoneUserAllNotesScale.
ByexecutingthemenucommandCopyScale,youcancopy
settingsfromapresetscale(includingStretch)oranother
userscale.
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeselectedfromthe
followingpages.
Keys Lock
ProgP1:Basic/ControllersNoteon/Scale
CombiP3:TimbreParamScaleT0108/T0916
SeqP3:TrackParamScaleT0108/T0916
Note:Toeditascale,usetheProgrammodepagelisted
abovetoselectthescalethatyouwanttoedit,andthen
movetothispage.
Note:Thekeycanalsobeselectedbyholdingdownthe
ENTERbuttonandplayinganote.Alternatively,youcan
presstheKeyboardLockbuttonandplayanotetoselectthe
key.Selectthescalethatyouwanttoedit.
[Off, On]
IfthisisOn,youcanusetheKROMEskeyboardtoselect
keysofthescale.SelectthekeyforUserOctaveScaleorUser
AllNotesScale,andthenusethekeyboardtomakeyour
selection.
31: Menu Command
1:CopyScaleseep.220
onpage 216.
Note:ByexecutingtheCopyScalemenucommand,youcan
copythesettingsofapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orof
anotheruserscale,andtheneditthesettingsofthecopied
scale.
Ifyouwishtokeepanediteduserscaleafterthepower
isturnedoff,besuretowrite(save)yoursettings.
PressthepagemenuortheWRITEbuttontoaccessthe
WriteGlobalSettingmenucommandandsaveyour
settings.
31a: User Octave Scale

User Octave Scale
[User Octave Scale 00...15]
SelectstheUserOctaveScalethatyouwanttoedit.
Tune
[99+99]
Makespitchsettingsforeachnoteintheoctave.
Whenyouadjustthepitchofeachnoteintheoctave(CB)
inonecentsteps,yoursettingswillbeappliedtoalloctaves.
Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
ByexecutingthemenucommandCopyScale,youcancopy
settingsfromapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orfrom
anotheruserscale.
203
Global mode
Global P4: Category

Programs,andCombinationsareorganizedintocategories
andsubcategories.
Categoriesmakeiteasytofindaparticulartypeof
instrument,suchaskeyboard,bass,ordrums,oraspecific
typeofsound,suchasarpeggiosorgatedpatterns.
Eachmaincategoryalsohasupto8subcategories,forfiner
degreesoforganization.Forinstance,theProgramkeyboard
categoryhassubcategoriesforacousticpianos,realelectric
pianos,synthelectricpianos,andclavsandharpsichords.
WhereveryoucanselectProgramsorCombinationsbybank
andnumber,youcanalsoselectthemfromthecategory
popup.
onpage 216.
42: Program Sub

42
Menu
42a
Whenshippedfromthefactory,thereare16presetProgram
andCombinationcategories,with2moreleftopenforyour
use(initiallynamedUser16andUser17).
Onthesepages,youcan:
Changethenamesofanyofthecategoriesandsub
categories,includingboththefactoryandusercategories
Addsubcategoriestothefactorycategories(uptothe
limitof8Percategory.
YoucanassignaProgramorCombinationtoacategoryand
subcategoryduringtheWriteprocess.Formore
information,pleaseseeWriteProgramonpage 64,and
WriteCombinationonpage 101.
Tosavechangestocategorynames,youllneedtowrite
theGlobalsettings.
WriteGlobalSettingmenucommandandsaveyour
settings.
Note:DrumtrackprogramsinProgrammodeareselected
fromprogramsassignedheretoprogrammaincategory
15(defaultsettingDrums).
42a: Program Sub

Main Category
[00...17]
Here,youcanselectthemaincategoryforwhichyouwill
editsubcategorynames.
00...07:
Sub Category Edit
[Text Editor]
Here,youcaneditthesubcategorynamesforprograms.
First,selectMainCategorytoaccessthecategorythat
includesthesubcategorynamethatyouwanttoedit.After
choosingthemaincategory,pressthetexteditbutton
adjacenttothesubcategorynamethatyouwanttoedit.The
texteditdialogboxwillopen,andyoucanenteraname.
Youcanenterupto24characters.(SeeOGp.117)
Youcannameeachoftheeightcategories.
41: Program Main

41
Menu
42: Menu Command
onpage 216.
41a
43: Combination Main,

44: Combination Sub
Thispageletsyouassignthemaincategoryandsub
categorynamestoCombinations.Formoreinformation,
pleasesee41:ProgramMain,42:ProgramSubabove.
41a: Program Main

00...17:
Main Category Edit
[Text Editor]
43, 4: Menu Command
Here,youcaneditthemaincategorynamesforprograms.
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialogbox,
andenteraname.Youcanenterupto24characters.(SeeOG
p.117)
onpage 216.
Youcannameeachoftheeighteencategories.
41: Menu Command
204
Global P5: Drum Kit 43: Combination Main, 44: Combination Sub
Global P5: Drum Kit

Here,youcancreatedrumkitsbyassigningadrum
instrument(drumsample)toeachkey.
Adrumkityoueditherecanbeusedinthesamewayasa
multisampleoscillator(whenOscillatorModeisSingleor
Double)andprocessedthroughthefilter,amp,andeffects
etc.Todothis,settheOscillatorModetoDrumsorDouble
DrumsintheProgrammodeP1:Basic/ControllersProgram
Basicpage,andselectingthedrumkitasanoscillatorinthe
P2:OSC/PitchOSC1SetuppageandOSC2Setuppage.
Editingadrumkitwillaffectallprogramsthatusethe
editeddrumkit.Wheneditingapreloadeddrumkit,
itsagoodideatocopythedrumkittoanemptyareain
theuserbankbeforeeditingit.
Getting ready to edit

MakesurethatintheGlobalP0:BasicSetupSystem
Preferencepage,MemoryProtectDrumKitisoff
(unchecked).Ifthisischecked,youwontbeabletosave.
Whenyouwishtoeditadrumkit,enterProgrammode,
selectaprogramthatusesadrumkit(i.e.,whose
OscillatorModeisDrumsorDoubleDrums),andthen
movetothispage.Aprogramthatusesadrumkitwill
alreadyhavefilter,amp,andeffectsettingsetc.suitable
fordrumsounds.
YoumustsetOctave(Prog21a)to+0[8].Withany
settingotherthan+0[8],thekeylocationsanddrum
soundswillnotcorrespondcorrectly.
Moving to the Global P5: Drum Kit page

IntheProgrammodeP2:OSC/PitchOSC1SetuporOSC2
Setuppage,presstheJumptoDrumKitEditbutton.
YouwilljumptoGlobalP5:DrumKit.Thedrumkit
selectedinDrumKitSelectofOSC1or2willbeselected.
IfOscillatorModeissettoDoubleDrums,onlythe
selecteddrumkitwillproducesound.IfaGMdrumkitis
selected,thelastselecteddrumkitwillbeselected.Use
CopyDrumkittocopytheGMdrumkittotheUSER
bankasnecessary.
IfyouwanttoeditadrumkitthatisassignedtoOSC2
ofDoubleDrums,usetheJumptoDrumKitEdit
buttonofOSC2toselectthispage.
Ifyoumovedfromanotherprogramormode,theOSC1
drumkitthatwasselectedmostrecentlyfortheprogram
willberecalled.
EvenifaprogramwithanOscillatorModeofSingleor
DoubleisselectedinProgrammode,theprogramwill
soundusingitsownfilterandampsettingsetc.
Effectswillsoundaccordingtothesettingsofthe
programyouselected.
Editing a Drum Kit

Fordetailedstepbystepinstructionsoncreatingdrumkits,
pleaseseeEditingaDrumKitonpage 106ofthe
Operationguide.
IfEnableExclusive(Global12b)ischecked,thedrum
kitcanbeeditedusingexclusivedata.
Saving Drum Kits

WriteDrumKitsdialogbox,andexecutethesave
operation;alldrumkitswillbesaved.
Unlikewheneditingaprogramorcombination,your
editedcontentwilltemporarilyremainevenifyou
selectadifferentdrumkit,butwillbelostwhenyou
turnoffthepower.
Ifyouwanttokeepthesettingsofanediteddrumkit
evenafterpoweroff,youmustexecuteWriteDrum
Kits.
205
Global mode
51b: Drumsample
51: Sample Setup
Youcanspecifyuptoeightdrumsamples.
51
Menu
51a
Bydraggingthesliderattheleft,youcanselectthevelocity
zonetobeedited.Youcanalsomakethisselectionby
directlypressingthedesiredzone.
1: (Drumsample1)
Thesearethesettingsforthefirst(High)velocityzone.
51b
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupusingonlyonedrum
sample,maketheappropriatesettingsinDrumsample1,
andthensetThresholdVelocityto1andXfdtoOff.
Velocity Split
Drumsample 1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Here,youcanselectadrumkitandspecifyDrumsample1
8asthedrumsamplesassignedtoeachkey.Here,youcan
alsoeditdrumsampleparametersforeachDrumsample.
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDrumsample1.
Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
51a: Drum Kit, Key Select, Assign
Note:Normally,youwillstartbyusingDrumsample1
(beforeusingDrumsample18).Ifyoudontwanttoswitch
drumsamplesbyvelocity,turnononlyDrumsample1.If
youreusingmultiplevelocityswitcheddrumsamples,
makesettingsasfollows.
Drum Kit Select
[00(INT)...47(USER)]
Selectsthedrumkitthatyouwishtoedit.
No. (Bank)
Contents
00(INT)...31(INT)
KROMEpreloadeddrumkits
32(USER)...47(USER)
Userdrumkits
KEY
Selectsthekeytowhichthedrumsample(anditssettings)
willbeassigned.
IfyoucheckAssignforthekeyyouselecthere,the
Drumsample18,VoiceAssignMode,andMixer
parameters(seebelow)willbeused.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Thedrumsamplesyouassignedfor
Drumsample18willsound.Normallyyouwillcheckthis
parameter.
Off(unchecked):Theselecteddrumsampleswillbe
invalid,andthedrumsamplesofthekeytotherightwill
sound.Atthistime,thepitchwillbeasemitonelowerthan
thepitchofthekeytotheright.Uncheckthisparameter
whenyouwishtoplayadrumsampleatdifferingpitches.
Drum Kit, Key Select, Assign
Drum Kit
Onevelocityzone
Drumsample1:On,Drumsample28:Off
Twovelocityzones
Drumsample1,2:On,Drumsample38:Off
[C1...G9]
Assign
Off(unchecked):Drumsample1willnotbeused.Thedrum
samplewillnotsound.
KEY Assign
C4 key
KEY: The selected key is shown in blue.
You can select a key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing
the desired note.
Eightvelocityzones
Drumsample18:On
Bank
[Mono, Stereo, XL.M, XL.St]
Drumsample Select
[List of installed Drumsample]
SpecifytheDrumsample1drumsamplebybankanddrum
samplenumber.
BankselectseitherMonoorStereodrumsamples.However,
stereodrumsampleswillusetwiceasmanyvoicesasmono
drumsamples.
Mono,Stereo:Conventionalmonauralorstereodrum
samples.
XL.M(eXtraLargeMono),XL.St(eXtraLargeStereo),
VM.M(VirtualMemoryMono),VM.St(VirtualMemory
Stereo):Highcapacitymonauralorstereodrumsamples.
WhenyoupresstheDrumsampleSelectpopupbuttona
drumsamplelistwillappear,allowingyoutochoosedrum
samplesfromthelist.
Usethetabstochooseacategory,andthenchooseadrum
samplefromwithinthecategory.PresstheOKbuttonto
execute,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
Itisnotpossibletoeditthecategorynamesofdrum
samples,ortoreassignthecategory.
IfyouchooseBankMono:
Monodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.TheLchannelorR
channelofthestereodrumsamplesselectableviaBank:
Stereocanalsobeselectedasmonodrumsamples.Inthese
cases,LorRisshownfollowingthedrumsampleofthe
samename.
IfyouchooseBankStereo:
Onlystereodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.
Rev (Reverse)
[Off, On]
Thisletsyouplaytheselecteddrumsamplebackwards,
withoutlooping.However,somepresetdrumsamples
cannotbereverseplayed,andconsequently,theycannotbe
selected.
206
Global P5: Drum Kit 52: Sample Parameters
On(checked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybackinreverse.
Thelocationatwhichreverseplaybackstartsandendsis
alreadyspecifiedforeachdrumsample.
Forunselectedvelocityzones(shownasasingleline),Rev
Onisindicatedas[R].
52: Sample Parameters

52
Menu
51a
Off(unchecked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybacknormally.
Start Offset
[Off, 1st8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
drumsamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.However,youcantselectdrum
samplesforwhichstartandoffsetarenotspecified.
Withdrumsamples,theStartOffsetspecifieswhethertouse
thenormalstartpoint(Off),ortouseoneofthealternate
startpoints(1st8th).
Somedrumsamplesmayhavefewerthan8pre
programmedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepoints
canbeselected.
L (Amp Level)
[99...+99]
Specifiesthevolume.
Keysforwhichavalueof+99isspecifiedwillsoundata
volumetwiceashighastheampleveloftheprogramwhich
usesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof0isspecified
willsoundatthevolumeoftheampleveloftheprogram
whichusesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof99is
specifiedwillnotsound.
2...8: (Drumsample2...8)
ThesearethesettingsfortheDrumsample28velocity
zones.
TheparametersforDrumsample8areexactlythesameas
thoseforDrumsample1,asdescribedabove.
TheparametersforDrumsample8arealsosimilartothose
forDrumsample1,exceptthatDrumsample8hasno
settingsforThresholdVel.(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Xfd,
orCurve.
52a
Here,youcanadjustthetranspose,tune,attack,decay,filter
cutoff,andresonancesettingsforeachdrumsample.These
areoffsetsthatareaddedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
52a: Parameters
(Drumsample Parameters)
1: (Drumsample 1)
Drumsample 1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Thisparameterislinkedwith51b:Drumsample
Drumsample1.
samplewillnotsound.
Transpose
[64...+63]
Adjuststhepitchinsemitonesteps.
+12isoneoctaveup,and12isoneoctavedown.
Tune
[99...+99]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Velocity Split
Attack (Amp EG Attack)
Thisindicatesthevelocityzonesoftheoscillatorseight
multisamples.
Adjuststheattacktimeofthevolume(Amplifier).The
attacktimeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvalue
totheampEGAttackTimeoftheprogramthatusesthis
drumkit.
Themeterontheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalues.
Thisletsyouverifythemultisamples(s)thatwillbesounded
byeachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteronpage 5.).
51c: Return to OSC

ThisbuttonwillbeshownifyoujumpedtoGlobalP5:Drum
KitbypressingtheProgrammodeJumptoDrumKitEdit
button.Youcanpressthisbuttontojumpbacktothe
originalpage.
51: Menu Command
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
Decay (Amp EG Decay)
[64...+63]
[64...+63]
Adjuststhedecaytimeofthevolume(Amplifier).Thedecay
timeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvaluetothe
ampEGDecayTimeoftheprogramthatusesthisdrumkit.
Cutoff (Filter Cutoff)
[64...+63]
Adjustthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.Thecutoff
frequencyforeachkeyanddrumsampleisdeterminedby
addingthisvaluetothefilterFrequency(Prog31b)ofthe
programthatusesthisdrumkit.
Reso (Filter Resonance)
[64...+63]
Thisadjuststhefilterresonance.Thisoffsetvalueforeach
keyanddrumsampleisappliedtothefilterResonance
(Prog31b)oftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
onpage 216.
Here,youcaneditthesampleparametersforDrumsample
28.Formoreinformation,pleasesee1:(Drumsample1)
above.
52: Menu Command
207
Global mode
53: Menu Command
onpage 216.
onpage 216.
53: Driver/EQ
53
Menu
51a
53a
Here,youcanadjustthedriveandthegainofthethree
bandEQforeachdrumsample.Theseareoffsetsthatare
addedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
53a: Driver/EG
1: (Drumsample 1)
Drumsample 1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Drumsample1.
samplewillnotsound.
Drive
[99...+99]
Thisadjuststhedrivelevel.Thisoffsetvalueforeachkey
anddrumsampleisappliedtothedriverDrive(Prog41a)
settingoftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
Low Boost (Driver Low Boost)
[99...+99]
Thisadjuststhelowboostlevelofthedriver.Thislowboost
settingforeachkeyanddrumsampleisappliedtothe
driverLowBoost(Prog41a)settingoftheprogramsthat
usethisdrumkit.
3 Band Parametric EQ [dB]

Low
Mid
High
[36.0...+36.0]
[36.0...+36.0]
[36.0...+36.0]
Theseparametersadjustthegainforeachbandofthethree
bandparametricEQ.Thegainsettingsforeachkeyand
drumsampleareappliedtotheLowGain,MidGain,and
HighGain(Prog48a)settingsoftheprogramsthatusethis
drumkit.
above.
208
Global P5: Drum Kit 54: Velocity Split
54: Velocity Split

55
Menu
51a
55a
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddle
ofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpinthe
volumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLinear
instead.
Layermeansthatthetwodrumsampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
55b
Crossfade Curves
UseThresholdVel.andCrossfadetospecifythevelocity
zonessoundedbyDrumsample18.
54a: Velocity Split

Volume
1: (Drumsample1)
Drumsample 1 On/Off
Velocity
[Off, On]
Drumsample1.
samplewillnotsound.
Threshold Vel. (Threshold Velocity)
Volume
[1127]
Thissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichthedrumsamplewill
sound.Drumsample1sThresholdVel.canbeequalto,but
notlowerthan,thanthatofDrumsample2.
Velocity
YoucanchangetheThresholdVel.valuebytouchingthe
graphicattherightanddraggingit(See*EG,Velocity
Splitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Crossfade (Crossfade Range)
[Off, 1127]
ThisspecifiesthevelocityrangestartingatThresholdVel.
overwhichDrumsample1willfadeoutandDrumsample2
willfadein.
Forinstance,iftheThresholdVel.issetto64,andthe
Crossfadeissetto20,Drumsaple2willstarttofadeinat
velocitiesof84andbelow.
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheCrossfade,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Velocity
above.
TheparametersforDrumsample8arealsosimilartothose
forDrumsample1,exceptthatDrumsample8hasno
settingsforTheshold(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Crossfade,
orCurve.
Select
Crossfade
/Curve
Threshold
Velocity
Volume
Xfade
Range
54: Menu Command
Curve (Crossfade Curve)
[Linear, Power, Layer]
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwodrumsamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofdrumsamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwodrumsamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
onpage 216.
209
Global mode
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
55: Voice/Mixer
55
Menu
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
FX Control Bus
51a
[Off, 1, 2]
Foreachkey,youcanselectwhetherthesignalwillbesent
toFXControlbus(stereotwochannel)FXCtrl1or2.
55a
Normallyyouwillleavethisoff,butyoucanusethissetting
ifyouwanttocontrolaneffectbyplayingaspecifickey.
Youcanusethiswiththefollowingeffects:
Specifythevoiceassign,pan,andeffectroutingetc.foreach
keyofthedrumkit.
Vocoders:
174:Vocoder
Compressorandgatetypeeffects:
55a: Voice Assign Mode

Single Trigger
003:StereoLimiter
[Off, On]
On(checked):Evenwhenthesamekey(note)isplayed
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbehaltedbeforethenew
noteisbegun,sothatthenoteswillnotoverlap.Normally
youwillleavethisunchecked.
Exclusive Group (Exclusive Assign)[Off, 001...127]

001127:Thisallowsyoutoassignkeystoanyof127groups.
Keysassignedtothesamegroupwillbetreatedasasingle
group,andwillbeplayedmonophonicallywithlastnote
priority.Forexampleyoumightassignclosedandopenhi
hatsoundstothesamegroupsothattwoormorehihat
soundscannotsoundsimultaneously.
Off:Keyswillnotbegrouped.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Enable Note On Receive
[Off, On]
006:StereoGate
Example: Gated Reverb

Thisisanexampleofapplyingagatedreverbtoaspecific
snaresound.Whenusingagateeffectonreverb,youmay
notbeabletocontrolthegatingtimingcorrectlyifyouuse
theextendedreverberantsoundtocontrolthegate.
Normally,youwillcontrolthegateusingsoundfrombefore
reverbisapplied.
Forthekeyforwhichyouveselectedthesnaresample,set
Bus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX4.AlsouseFXControlBusto
sendthesignaltoFXControlBus1.InIFX5:StereoGate,
chooseFXControl1astheEnvelopeSource.Nowyoucan
useasignalotherthantheinput(reverberantsound)to
controlthegate.
Gated Reverb Example
Global P5: Drum Kit
On(checked):Noteonmessageswillbereceived.Normally
youwillcheckthis,butyoucanuncheckitifyoudonot
wantspecificnotestosound.
KEY: D3
(Snare)
Bus Select
: IFX4
Program P4, P8: Use DKit Setting = On
IFX4
084: Reverb Hall
Chain to
: IFX4
IFX5
006: Stereo Gate
Bus Select
: L/R
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
FX Control Bus: 1
Enable Note Off Receive
On(checked):Noteoffmessageswillbereceived.Normally
youwilluncheckthis.ThisparameterisvalidwhenHold
(Prog12a)ischecked(HoldOn).Inthecaseofadrum
program,youwillnormallyselectHoldOn.Inthiscaseif
EnableNoteOffReceiveischecked,noteoffmessageswill
bereceived,andthesoundwillstop(thereleasesegmentof
theEGwillbegin)whenthekeyisreleased.
55b: Mixer
InProgrammode,Drumkitswillsoundusingthe
settingsoftheselectedprogram.PanisvalidifUse
DKitSetting(Prog41c)ischecked.Bus(IFX/Output)
Select,FXControlBus,andSend1/2arevalidifUse
DKitSetting(Prog81c)ischecked.Beawarethat
whileeditingadrumkit,theeditedresultswillnotbe
reflectedunlessthesesettingshavebeenmade.
Pan
[Random, L001...C064...R127]
Send1 (to MFX1)

Send2 (to MFX2)
ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/Output)Selectisset
toL/RorOff.IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,the
sendleveltomastereffects1and2willbedeterminedby
theProgram,Combination,orSequencermodeP8:Routing/
IFXInsertFXSetuppageparametersSend1andSend2
whicharelocatedafterthesoundpassesthroughIFX15.
55: Menu Command
Specifiesthepanningforeachkey.
L001placesthesoundatfarleft,andR127placesthesignal
atfarright.WithasettingofRandom,thedrumsamplewill
bepannedrandomlyateachnoteon.
[L/R, IFX 1...5, Off]
Foreachkey,specifythebustowhichthesoundwillbesent.
Forexample,youmightsendSnaresoundstoIFX1andKick
soundstoIFX2toapplyseparateinserteffects,andsendthe
remainingsoundstoL/Rwithoutapplyinginserteffects.
[000...127]
[000...127]
Foreachkey,specifythesendlevelstomastereffects1and
2.
210
(FX Control Bus1)
[Off, On]
onpage 216.
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern 61: Pattern Setup
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern

Here,youcancreateuserarpeggiopatterns.
Inthispage,theKROMEwillcontinuetosoundasitdid
beforeenteringGlobalmode.
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromProgrammode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternthatisselectedby
theprogram.Evenifthepreviouslyselectedprograms
arpeggiatoristurnedoff,itcanbeturnedonbytheARP
button.
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromCombinationmode:
Youreditingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternthatis
selectedbythecombination.Evenifthepreviouslyselected
combinationsarpeggiatoristurnedoff,itcanbeturnedon
bytheARPbutton.
61: Pattern Setup

61
Menu
61a
61b
61c
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(CombiP0:05(6)a,P7:71(2)c)
parameterAorBisnotchecked.Additionally,the
arpeggiatorwillnotoperateifithasnotbeenassignedtoa
timbreinArpeggiatorAssign(CombiP7:71(2)c).
61a: Arpeggio Select, , Pattern, Length
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromSequencermode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedforthe
selectedsong.EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefrom
settingsinwhichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcan
usetheARPbuttontoturniton.
IftheKROMEwaspreviouslyinCombinationorSequencer
modeandyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern,youmust
selecteitherarpeggiatorAorBasthepatterntoedit.Your
editingwillapplyonlytotheselectedone.Bwillnotbe
displayedifthepreviousmodewasProgrammode.
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(SeqP7:71(2)c)parameterAor
Bisnotchecked.Additionally,thearpeggiatorwillnot
operateifithasnotbeenassignedtoatrackinArpeggiator
Assign(SeqP7:71(2)c).
(Tempo)
Ineachoftheabovecases,youcanmodifythesettingsofthe
arpeggiopatternevenifthearpeggiatorisnotturnedon.
Wheneditingapattern,itisagoodideatoturnonthe
arpeggiatorandmakesurethatitisthepatternthatyou
wishtoedit.
Ifyouwanttheediteduserarpeggiopatternsettingsto
bebackedupevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,you
mustwritethemintomemory.SelecttheWrite
ArpeggioPatternmenucommandtoaccesstheWrite
ArpeggioPatterndialogbox.Alternatively,pressthe
WRITEbuttontoaccesstheUpdateArpeggioPatterns
dialogbox.ThenpresstheOKbuttontowritethe
editeddata.
Whenyoueditauserarpeggiopattern,youreditswill
affectallprogramsandcombinationsthatusethe
editedpattern.Ifyouwanttoeditoneofthepreload
arpeggiopatterns,itsagoodideatocopythatarpeggio
patterntoanunusedareaintheuserbankbeforeyou
editit.
Fordetailsoncreatinganarpeggiopattern,seeOGp.91.
Arpeggio Select
[A, B]
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiesthetempo.
ThiscanalsobeadjustedbytheTEMPOknob.Youcanalso
usethe[TEMPO]knobtoadjustthetempo.IfMIDIClock
(Global11a)issettoAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeing
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSBisselected,thisparametersvalueisshownas
EXT,andthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetotheincoming
MIDIclockdatafromtheexternalMIDIdevice.
Pattern
[P0: UP...P4: RANDOM,

U0000(INT)...U1027(USER)]
Selectsthepatternthatyouwanttoedit.
P0:UP...P4:RANDOM
Presetarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)...U0899(INT)
Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)
Userarpeggiopatterns
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern(suchasa
preloadedarpeggiopattern)thatisalsousedbyanother
program,itisagoodideatousethemenucommandCopy
ArpeggioPatterntocopythearpeggiopatterntoanunused
numberU0900(USER)...U1027(USER),andthentoeditthe
copy.
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditthearpeggiopatternname,execute
themenucommandRenameArpeggioPattern.
Length (Pattern Length)
[01...48]
Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.Thearpeggio
patternwillplaythenumberofstepsyouspecifyhereatthe
notevalueintervalspecifiedbyResolution,andwillthen
beginagain.Thisisnotvalidforpresetarpeggiopatterns
P0P4.

Thisshowsagraphicrepresentationofthestepsintheuser
arpeggiopattern.
IfArpeggioToneModeissettoFixedNote,thestep
graphicsareshownashollowcircles.
(Arpeggio Pattern Edit Jump)

ThisopenstheArpeggioPatternEditdialogbox.
211
Global mode
61b: Octave, Resolution, Sort, Latch,

Key Sync., Keyboard
Octave
Resolution
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[ , , , , , , , ]
AsPlayed:012rest012rest0...
Sort
[Off, On]
AsPlayed(Fill):012201220...
Latch
[Off, On]
RunningUp:012001200...
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee71:ARPSetupon
page 53.
Pattern,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,Latch,
KeySync.,andKeyboardareparametersthatcanbe
setinProgram,Combination,Song,andSongPlay
modes,butyoucanalsosetthemhere.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntotheorigi
nalmodeandwritethem.Theseparameterscannotbe
writtenbytheWriteArpeggioPatternscommandin
thispage.
61c: Arpeggio Pattern Setup

TheseparametersarenotvalidforpresetpatternsP0
P4.
Arpeggio Tone Mode
[Normal, Fixed Note]
ThisselectstheTonetypeofthearpeggiopattern.
Normal:Thisistheconventionalarpeggiatortype.Each
Toneinthearpeggiowillplaybasedonthenotenumberof
thekeysthatyouarepressingonthekeyboard.
FixedNote:Thenotenumberofeachtoneisfixed.Thenote
numbersplayedonthekeyboardwillbeignored,andthe
arpeggiowillsoundusingspecifiedpitches.Notenumbers
fromthekeyboardwillonlycontrolthetriggertimingofthe
arpeggiator.FixedNotemodeisidealforarpeggiopatterns
thatyouareusingasdrumpatterns.
IntheP6:UserArpeggio,PatternEditpage,theTone
indicatorswillbewhenNormalisselectedhere,or
whenFixedNoteisselected.
Arpeggio Type
[As PlayedUp&Down]
Specifiestherelationshipbetweenthearpeggionotes
specifiedfromthekeyboardandtheToneateachstep.
AsPlayed:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thosesteps
willnotsound.
AsPlayed(Fill):IftherearemoreTonesinastepthan
arpeggionotesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),the
lastplayednote(SortisOff),orthehighestnote(SortisOn)
willsoundforthosesteps.
RunningUp:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturntothefirstnote(ifSortisOff),orthelowestnote
(ifSortisOn)andsoundit.
Up&Down:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturninreversedirectionfromthelastarpeggionote
backtowardthefirst.
212
Example)
IfyousetLengthto04,StepNo.01toTone0,StepNo.02
toTone1,StepNo.03toTone2,StepNo.04toTone3,and
simultaneouslyplaythreenotestoproduceanarpeggio,
thefollowingresultswillbeproduceddependingonthe
ArpeggioType.
Up&Down:012101210...
Octave Motion
[Up, Down, Both, Parallel]
SpecifiestheoperationwhenOctaveissetto24octaves.
Up:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendwithinthespecifiedrange
ofoctaves.
Down:Noteswillrepeatedlydescendwithinthespecified
numberofoctaves.
Both:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendanddescendwithinthe
specifiednumberofoctaves.
Parallel:Thenotesofthespecifiedoctaveswillsound
simultaneously.
Fixed Note Mode

[Trigger As Played, Trigger All Tones]
WhentheArpeggioToneModeisFixedNote,specifiesthe
conditionthatwilltriggertheTones.
TriggerAsPlayed:TheToneswillbetriggeredaccordingto
thenumberofkeyspressed.
TriggerAllTones:Pressingasinglekeywilltriggerall
Tones.
Example)
WewilluseanArpeggioToneModeFixedNotepattern
ondrums.Tone0isassignedanotenumberthatwill
soundakick,Tone1asnare,andTone2ahihat.
WithasettingofTriggerAsPlayedandArpeggioTypeis
AsPlayed,pressingonekeywillsoundonlyTone0
(kick).PressingtwokeyswillsoundTone0(kick)and
Tone1(snare).Pressingthreekeyswillsoundallthree
Tones02(kick,snare,hihat).IftheVelocityofeach
ToneissettoKey,eachTonewillbesoundedattheveloc
itywithwhicheachkeywasplayed.
WithasettingofTriggerAllTones,playingonekeyis
sufficienttosoundallthree;Tone0(kick),Tone1(snare),
andTone2(hihat).IftheVelocityofeachToneissetto
Key,theToneswillbesoundedatthecorresponding
velocityeachtimeakeyispressed.
(Fixed Notes) Setup

ThisopenstheFixedNotesdialogbox.Hereyoucanspecify
thenotesthatwillbeusedwhenArpeggioToneModeisset
toFixedNote.
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern Arpeggio Pattern Edit
Parameter Panel
Arpeggio Pattern Edit

HereyoucaninputTones011foreachStep0148.There
canbeupto48steps,andthetonesrepresentthenotesof
thescale(amaximumof12notes)thatyoucanpress
simultaneouslyateachstep.IftheSortcheckbox(Global6
1a)isselected,thenotesyoupresssimultaneouslywillbe
sortedfromlowtohigh,andassignedto0,1,...11.Ifthe
Sortcheckboxisnotselected,thenoteswillbeassignedto0,
1,...11intheorderinwhichyoupressthem.
TheseparametersarenotvalidforpresetpatternsP0
P4.
Theparameterpanelinthelowerpartofthisareashowsa
graphicrepresentationoftheselectedstepparameter(61j).
Youcantouchanddragtoeditthis.
Youcanselectastepbypressingthepanel.
Step Parameters Select button

Thisbuttonselectsthespecificstepparameterthatwillbe
shownintheparameterpanelbelow.
Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,thedisplayedstep
parameterwillcyclethroughthefollowingchoices:Pitch
(PitchOffset)GateVel.(Velocity)FlamPitch...
6-1i: Tone Input Mode
6-1f
6-1i
6-1g
6-1k
Usethesebuttonstoselectthemodeyoullusetoenternotes
inthetonepanel.
Alternate mode
6-1j
6-1h
Toneswillbeinsertedordeleted.
Pen mode
Toneswillbeinserted.
Eraser mode
6-1f: Tempo, Length, Zoom Scroll, VIEW,

Overview
Toneswillbedeleted.
(See61a:ArpeggioSelect,,Pattern,Lengthonpage 211.)
OpenstheToolTablet,allowingyoutospecifyaregionand
delete,insert,orcopydata.
Length (Pattern Length)
[01...48]
(SeeLength(PatternLength)onpage 213.)
6-1j: Step Parameters

Step (Step Number)
Zoom Scroll
Usethesetomovethezoomedareahorizontally(Steps)or
vertically(Tones),inincrementsofhalfthearea.Tomake
approximatemovements,touchanddragtheoverview.To
makefineadjustments,usethezoomscrollbuttons.
VIEW
Tool mode
[32, 26, 42, 48]
[01...48]
Usethistoselectthestepthatyouwanttoedit.
IfStepisselected,youcanalsoentertonesbypressingthe
numerickeys.[0][9]correspondtotones09,[]
correspondstotone10,and[.]correspondstotone11.The
numerickeyswillentertonesasprescribedbythetone
inputmodeyouselected.
Thisspecifiesanapproximatelimitfortheareaofthe
overviewdisplay.Ifyousetthisappropriatelyforthe
selectedLengthandResolution,itmaybeeasiertoselect
thezoomarea.
Ifthe
buttonattheleftison,thisfieldwillbe
synchronizedwiththestepofthearpeggiatorwhenitis
running.
Overview
Foreachstep,thepitchcorrespondingtotheTonecanbe
raisedorloweredinsemitonesteps.Thisletsyoumake
settingsforthesametoneineachsteptocreateamelody,or
tomakesettingsfortwoormoretonesineachsteptoplay
parallelchords.
Thearpeggiopatternisshownassymbols.Theregionthat
iszoomedinthetouchgridishighlighted.Toselectthis,use
thezoomscrollbuttonslocatedabove,ortouchanddragthe
overview.
Pitch Offset
Gate
61g: Resolution
SeeResolution*onpage 54.
6-1h: Touch Grid

Tone Panel
YoucaninsertordeleteTonesbypressingthetonepanel
gridintheupperpartofthisarea.UsetheToneInputMode
(61i)buttonstoselecttheinputmethod.
[48...+48]
[Off, 001...100%, Legato]
Off:Evenifatonehasbeenentered,itwillnotsoundatthat
step.Youcanalsousethistostopalegatotonethatwas
previouslysounding.
Legato:Thetonewillcontinuesoundinguntilthesametone
isplayedagain(includingGate:Off)orthepatternreturns
toitsbeginning.
TheLegatosettingisvalidiftheGateparameter(ProgP7:7
1b,CombiP7:73(4)c,SeqP7:73(4)c)ofeachprogram,
combination,orsongissettoStep.IfyouspecifyLegato,
makesurethattheGateofthepreviousmodeissettoStep.
Ontheleft,tonenumbersareshownifArpeggioTone
ModeisNormal,ornotenamesareshowniftheArpeggio
ToneModeisFixedNote.
213
Global mode
Velocity
[001...127, Key]
Key:TheToneofthestepwillsoundwiththevelocityat
whichthekeywasplayed.
001127:Thespecifiedvelocityvaluewillalwaysbeused.
ThissettingisvalidwhentheProgram,Combination,or
SongparameterVelocity(ProgramP7:71b,Combination
P7:73(4)c,SequencerP7:73(4)c)issettoStep.
Tool Tablet
Toopenthetooltablet,pressthetoolmodebuttoninthe
toneinputmodearea.ThistabletcontainsanAreaToolstab
andaCopyToolstab.
6-1l
Whenmakingthissetting,makesurethatVelocityissetto
Stepinthepreviousmodebeforeenteringthispage.
Flam
[99...+99]
Specifieshowthenotetimingwillbeskewedwhentwoor
moreTonesarespecifiedinthesamestep.
6-1m
00:AllToneswillsoundsimultaneously.
+01+99:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedintheorder
oftheTonenumber.(WhenSortisON,fromlownoteto
highnote.WhenSortisOFF,intheorderinwhichkeys
werepressed.)
0199:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedinthe
oppositedirectionas+.
Tosimulatechordsstrummedonaguitar,trysetting+
valuesforoddnumberedstepsandvaluesforeven
numberedsteps.
ThisisnotvalidforpresetpatternsP0P4.
6-1l: Tempo, Length, VIEW, Overview

(See61f:Tempo,Length,ZoomScroll,VIEW,Overview
onpage 213.)
6-1m: Area Tools/Copy Tools

Select an area
6-1k: Fixed Note Setup

ThisbuttonopenstheFixedNotesdialogbox.Hereyoucan
selectthenotesusedwhenArpeggioToneModeissetto
FixedNote.
[01...48, 00...11]
UseSelectanareatospecifytheareawhereyouwantto
executeacommand.Theparameterstotheleftandright
specifytherangeofsteps,andtheparametersaboveand
belowspecifytherangeoftones.
Youcanalsoselectanareabytouchinganddragginginthe
overview.
Undo, Redo
Thesebuttonsundoorredoacommandyouexecuted.Undo
willcanceltheresultofthecommandthatyoupreviously
executed.Redowillonceagainexecutethecommandthat
wascancelledbyUndo.Theseactionsalsoaffecttoneinput
inArpeggioPatternEdit.
Close
PresstheClosebuttontoclosethetooltablet.
Area Tools
Erase
Erasesalltonesintheselectedarea.(Thevariousstep
parametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Fill
Insertsalltonesintheselectedarea.(Thevariousstep
parametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Invert
Invertstheinserted/deletedstateofthetonesintheselected
area.(Thevariousstepparametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Unlikethecommandslistedabove,executingthefollowing
commandswillcausetonestomove.Normallyyoull
executethefollowingcommandsonaspecifiedregionof
tones0011.
Space
Insertsblankspaceintheselectedarea.Stepparameterswill
besettotheirdefaultvalues.
Whentheblankspaceisinserted,tonesfollowingthat
locationwillmovetotheright.
Ifthewithstepparametersoptionisselected,thestep
parametervalueswillalsomove.
214
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern Tool Tablet
Thefirsthalfwillmoveupward.
Delete
Deletestheselectedregion.
External:
Datatotherightoftheselectedregionwillmovetowardthe
lefttofillthegap.
Hereyoucancopythesettingsofadifferentuserarpeggio
pattern.
parametervalueswillalsomove.
<<, >>
Byusinglimitbyselected,youcancreatepatchworkedits
thataremoresophisticatedthansimplyusingCopy
ArpeggioPattern.
Cyclesthetoneswithintheselectedregion.
(Copy From)
parametervalueswillalsobecycled.
with step parameters
Selectsthecopysourcearpeggiopattern.
*Thisfunctionisnotavailableifthecopysourcearpeggio
patternisthesameasthecurrentlyeditedpattern.
limit by selected
Ifthisoptionisselected,thestepparameterswillalsobe
affectedwhenyouexecutetheSpace,Delete,<<,or>>
commands.
Ifthisoptionisselected,onlythespecifiedregionofthe
copysourcearpeggiopatternwillbecopied.
Copy Tools
Ifthisoptioniscleared,theentirepatternwillbecopiedjust
aswhenusingCopyArpeggioPattern.
Print
Insertstheselectedarpeggiopattern.
Local:
Copy
Copiestheselectedregiontothecopybuffer.
61: Menu Command
Cut
Copiestheselectedregiontothecopybuffer,andthen
deletesit.
0:WriteArpeggioPatternsseep.221
Paste
2:CopyArpeggioPatternseep.221
Thiscommandisavailableifthereisdatainthecopybuffer.
onpage 216.
Specifyaregion,andthenpaste(overwrite)thedatafrom
thecopybuffer.
1:RenameArpeggioPatternseep.221
Ifthew/stepparam(withstepparameter)optionis
selected,thestepparametervalueswillalsobepasted.
Thedatafromthecopybufferwillbepastedsothatthe
lowerleftpointoftheregionspecifiedwhencopyingwillbe
atthelowerleftpointoftheregionyouspecifybefore
executingthePastecommand.
w/step parameters (with step parameters)

Ifthisoptionisselected,thestepparameterswillalsobe
copiedwhenyouexecutethePastecommand.
limit by selected
Ifthisoptionisselected,thedatafromthecopybufferwill
bepastedonlytotheextentoftheregionyouspecifybefore
executingthePastecommand.
Ifthisoptioniscleared,allofthedatafromthecopybuffer
willbepasted.
Example) Moving the tones of the first and second beats

1. InSelectanarea,specifytheareaas11/00(vertical)
01/16(horizontal),andthenpresstheCutbutton.
2. Specifytheareaas11/01(vertical)01/16(horizontal),
andthenpressthePastebutton.
215
Global mode
Global: Menu Command

Tip:Ineachpage,youcanaccess(orswitchon/off)uptothe
firsttenmenucommandsbyholdingdowntheENTER
buttonandpressingthecorrespondingnumerickey,09.
astheCancelbutton.
Kind
Content
All(PreloadPCG
andDemoSongs)
AllPCG(Program,Combination,Global
settings,drumkit,,arpeggiopattern),and
demosongdata
AllPreloadPCG
AllPCGdata
AllDemoSongs
Alldemosongdata
Program
Programdata
Combination
Combinationdata
DrumKit
Drumkitdata
ArpeggioPattern
Arpeggiopatterndata
followingexplanationsofeachcommand.
GlobalSetting
Globalsettingdata
Write Global Setting

WriteGlobalSettingisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
BasicSetup,MIDI,Controllers,Scales,andCategorypages.
ThiscommandwritesGlobalmodesettings(exceptfor
DrumKitsandArpeggioPatterns).
2. IfyouselectedProgram,Combination,DrumKit,or
ArpeggioPatternastheKind,specifytherangeofdata
thatyouwanttoload.
All:loadalldata
Bank:loadanindividualbank
Single:loadoneitemofdata
3. IfyoureloadingBankorSingle,useTotospecifythe
loadingdestination.
Change all bank references
Note:Tosavethedrumkit,executetheP5menucommand.
(WriteDrumKits)
ChangeallbankreferencesisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Note:Tosavethearpeggiopattern,executetheP6menu
command.(WriteArpeggioPatterns)
Thiscommandchangesallprogrambanksspecifiedfor
timbresincombinationsortracksofsongs.
TheEffectGlobalSWsettingwillnotbesaved.
Load Preload/Demo Data

LoadPreload/DemoDataisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Thiscommandloadsthepreloadeddataanddemosong
dataintotheKROME.
Beforeyoucanloadthisdata,youmustnavigateto
MemoryProtect(Global01b)andunchecktheprotect
settingforthetypeofdatayouwanttoload.Ifyou
executethisoperationwiththeprotectsettingchecked,
thedisplaywillindicateMemoryProtected,andthe
datawillnotbeloaded.
1. Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforcombina
tions,checkCombination.
Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforsongs,checkSong.
2. InProgramBank,specifythereplacementforeach
bank.
Ifyouchangetwoormoredifferentbankstothesame
bank,itwillnotbepossibletousethisfunctionto
changethembacktodifferentbanks.Becarefulthatthe
changedestinationbanksdonotoverlap.
Display Setup
Thisletsyouadjustthebrightnessofthedisplay.
1. UseKindtoselectthetypeofdatayouwanttoload.
1. ChooseDisplaySetuptoopenthedialogbox.
2. AdjusttheBrightnessasdesired.
Brightness:010(10isthedefault)
216
Global: Menu Command Touch Panel Calibration
Touch Panel Calibration

Ifyourinputinthedisplayisnotdetectedasyouexpect,or
iftheeditcellmovestoalocationinthedisplayotherthan
whereyoupressed,youshouldcalibratethedisplayas
follows.
Toensureoptimalcalibration,touchthecenterofeach
symbol(calibrationtarget)showninthecornersofthe
displayasaccuratelyasyoucan.
1. ChooseTouchPanelCalibrationtoaccessthedialog
box.
Ifyoureunabletochoosethiscommandfromthepage
menu,youcanaccessitbyholdingdowntheENTER
buttoninP0andpressingthe3button.
2. Lightlypressthecenterofthetargetthatappearsinthe
upperleftofthescreen.
Ifyoudecidetocanceltheoperation,presstheEXITbut
ton.
Whenyoutouchatarget,aballshapedsymbolwill
appear.
Thecloserthecenteroftheballistothecenterofthetar
get,themoreaccuratelycalibrationwasperformed.You
canpressthetargetagainasmanytimesasyoulike.
5. Ifdesired,youcanpresstheRedobuttontoreturnto
step2andperformthecalibrationagain.
6. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththetouchresponse,pressthe
OKbutton(ortheENTERbutton)toendtheprocedure.
7. PresstheEXITbutton,andyouwillreturntothestate
priortoexecutingthecalibrationfunction.
Ifinsteps2or3youpressedascreenlocationthatwas
significantlydistantfromthecenterofthe+target,
thedetectionpointsfortheRedobuttonandOKbutton
willalsobeskewed.Ifyoureunabletopressthese
buttonssuccessfully,trypressingtheareaaroundthem.
Alternatively,presstheEXITbuttontoexitthe
procedure,andthenperformtheTouchPanel
Calibrationoperationonceagain.
Half Damper Calibration

HalfDamperCalibrationisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Ifadamperpedalthatsupportshalfdamper(theDS1H
option)isconnectedtotheDAMPERjack,hereshowyou
canadjustthesensitivityifthedampereffectisnotapplied
appropriately.
Whenyourtouchonthetargethasbeendetected,thetar
getwillmove.
3. Lightlypressthecenterofthetargetthatappearsinthe
lowerrightofthescreen.
Ifyoudecidetocanceltheoperation,presstheEXITbut
ton.
Sincethehalfdamperpedalishighlysensitive,please
usetheoptionalDS1H.Otherpedalsmaynotproduce
theappropriateeffect,ormaybeimpossibletocalibrate
correctly.
1. ConnectahalfdamperpedaltotheDAMPERjack.
2. SelectHalfDamperCalibrationtoopenthedialog
box.
3. Pressthehalfdamperpedal,andthenreleaseyourfoot
fromthepedal.
4. PresstheDonebutton.
Iftheadjustmentcouldnotbeperformedcorrectly,anerror
messagewillbedisplayed.Pleaseperformtheprocedure
onceagain.
Whenyourtouchonthetargethasbeendetected,the
touchscreenwillbecalibrated,andthescreenwillask
youtoverifytheresult.
4. Touchthethreetargetstoverifythatcalibrationwas
successful.
217
Global mode
Update System Software
Dump:
UpdateSystemSoftwareisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Dump Program
Dump Combination
Dump Drum Kit
Dump Arpeggio Pattern
Dump Global Setting
Dump Sequencer
Dump Drum Track Pattern
Here,youcanupdatetheKROMEsystem.
Youcandownloadthelatestsystemfileontoyourcomputer
fromtheKorgwebsite(http://www.korg.com/).Fordetails,
pleaseseetheKorgwebsite.
Beforeyoubeginthesystemupdate,youshouldback
upyourimportantdataonanSDcard.
1. InserttheSDcardcontainingthesystemfileintothe
SDcardslotoftheKROME.
Note:FordetailsonhowtocopythesystemfiletoyourSD
card,pleaseseetheexplanationonthedownloadpageof
theKorgwebsite.
2. AccesstheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage.
3. SelectUpdateSystemSoftwaretoopenthedialog
box.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheupdate.
Adialogboxwillaskyouforconfirmation.PresstheOK
buttontobeginupdatingthesystemsoftware.
Note:IfanerrormessageofFile/pathnotfoundappears,
presstheOKbuttonandproceedagainfromstep1.
Whilethesystemisbeingupdated,donottouchthe
KROMEswitches,andneverturnoffthepower.Ifthe
powerisaccidentallyturnedoffwhilethesystemis
beingloaded,theKROMEmaybecomeinoperable.If
thisoccurs,pleasecontactyourlocalKorgdistributor.
5. Whentheupdatehasbeencompleted,adialogbox
withthefollowingmessagewillappear.
Thesystemupdatehasnowbeeninstalled.Tocompletethe
process,youmustnowrestarttheKROME.Pleaseturnthe
poweroff,andthenonagain.
6. PowerofftheKROME.Waitforseveralseconds,and
thenturnthepoweronagain.
Afteryouturnthepoweroff,waitforseveralseconds
beforeyourestarttheKROME.
Thesystemversionnumberisshowninthelowercenterof
theopeningscreen.Verifythatitmatchesthenewsystem
softwareversion.
218
ThesecommandsareavailableontheMIDIpage.
ThesecommandsallowtheKROMEinternaldatatobe
transmittedtoanotherKROME,MIDIdatafiler,or
computerintheformofMIDISystemExclusivedata.
Selectthedesiredcommand(pleaseseethefollowingtable),
andadialogboxwillappear.
Then,selectthebankortimbreetc.ofthedatatobe
dumped,andpresstheOKbutton.
DumpProgram
Programsofallbanks,programsofone
bank,oneprogram
Dump
Combination
Combinationsofallbanks,combinationsof
onebank,onecombination
DumpDrumKit
Alldrumkits,onedrumkit
DumpArpeggio
Pattern
Allarpeggiopatterns,onearpeggiopattern
DumpGlobal
setting
Globalsettings(exceptfortheDrumKits
andArpeggioPatternsofGlobalmode)
DumpSequencer
Allsongdataandcuelistdata
DumpDrumTrack
Pattern
Alldrumtrackuserpattern,onedrumtrack
userpattern
Sending SysEx data dumps

DonottouchtheKROMEsswitchesorturnoffthe
powerwhileSysExdataisbeingtransmitted.
Sending a data dump

1. ConnecttheKROMEtothedevicethatwillreceivethe
datadump.
Ifyouwanttotransmitthedatatoacomputerthatisableto
receiveSysExmessages,connecttheKROMEsUSB
connectortoyourcomputersUSBconnector.
IfyouwanttotransmitthedatatoanotherKROMEortoa
MIDIdatafiler,connecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTconnector
totheMIDIINconnectorofthereceivingdevice.
2. SelectGlobalP1:MIDIpage.
3. Thefollowingillustrationshowsthedialogboxthat
willappearwhenDumpProgramisselected.
IfTodumponebankselectBank,ortodumponeprogram
selectSingle.
Global: Menu Command Dump Drum Track Pattern
4. UsetheTofieldtoselecttheoutputconnectorthatwill
transmitthedata.
MIDIOUT:MIDIOUTconnector
USB:USBconnector
5. PresstheOKbuttontotransmitthedata.
Whilethedataisbeingtransmitted,thedisplaywillindicate
NowTransmittingMIDIData.
Thesizeofthedataandthetimerequiredfortransmission
willdependonthetypeofdata.
Thefollowingtableshowsthesizeofeachdatadump,and
thetimerequired(MIDI).
Type of data to be
dumped
ProgramAll
ProgramBank
ProgramSingle
CombinationAll
CombinationBank
CombinationSingle
DrumKitAll
DrumKitSingle
ArpeggioPatternAll
ArpeggioPatternSingle
GlobalSetting
Data size
(Bytes)
Time
required
MIDI (Sec.)
Time
required
USB-MIDI
(Sec.)*1
1307910
418.5
13.6
261582
83.7
2.7
2067
0.7
0.02
1537848
492.1
16
384462
123
3027
0.04
704122
225.3
7.3
14679
4.7
0.4
498163
159.4
508
0.2
0.005
19835
6.4
0.3
Sequencer
23409...
1966831
7.5...629.4
0.3...20.5
DrumTrackPatternAll
50060...
795060
16.0...254.4
1...9
60...740080
0.02...236.8
0.001...8.4
DrumTrackPattern
Single
*1: TheUSBMIDIdumptimeslistedhereareforwhenthe
KROMEisconnectedtoacomputerwithaUSB1.1port.
Thetimerequiredwillchangedependingonthe
computersystemyoureusing.
Note:Moretimewillberequiredifthesongdatacontains
SystemExclusiveevents,sincethesemustbeconverted.
WhenperformingadatadumpfromtheKROMEonto
aMIDIdatafiler,donottransmitmultipledatadumps
together.Ifmultipledataissavedtogether,thenwhen
thedataisretransmittedfromthedatafiler,the
KROMEwillhavelessthantherequiredtimetowrite
thedataintomemory,andwillbeunabletoreceiveall
ofthedatacorrectly.
Receiving SysEx data dumps

DonottouchtheKROMEsswitchesorturnoffthe
powerwhileSysExdataisbeingreceived.
BeforereceivingMIDIdata,werecommendthatyou
closeanyopendialogboxormenu,withtheexception
oftheMediamodemenucommandSaveExclusive
(ReceiveandSaveMIDISystemExclusiveData)
dialogbox.Also,datadumpscannotbereceivedwhile
intheSequencermodeP6:TrackEditTrackViewpage.
Pleasemovetoanotherpage,suchasP0,before
receivingadatadump.
Inthiscase,holddowntheEXITbuttontogetherwith
PAGEbutton,andturnonthepower.However,this
willinitializethecontentsofmemory.
TransmissionandreceptionofanyotherMIDIdatais
alsoimpossibleduringthistime.Whenreceiving
multipledatadumpsinsuccession,youmustallow
enoughtimebetweeneachdatadumpforthemessage
todisappearfromthescreen.(seetablebelow)
Processing time (MIDI) for writing into memory

Type of data dumped
Processing time for writing into memory
AllPrograms
Approximately1second(eachbank
received)
AllCombinations
Approximately1second(eachbank
received)
AllDrumKits
Approximately1second
AllArpeggioPattern
GlobalSetting
Sequencer
DrumTrackPattern
MIDIcannotbetransmittedorreceivedwhiledatais
beingwrittenintointernalmemory.Also,transmission
ofActiveSensing(FEh)fromtheMIDIOUTconnector
andUSBconnectorwillbehalted.
Receiving a data dump

1. ConnecttheKROMEwiththedevicethatwilltransmit
thedatadump.
Ifyouretransmittingdatafromacomputer,connectthe
KROMEsUSBconnectortoyourcomputersUSBconnector.
IfyouretransmittingdatafromanotherKROMEorfroma
MIDIdatafiler,connectthetargetKROMEsMIDIIN
connectortotheMIDIOUTconnectorofthetransmitting
device.
2. SettheMIDIchannelofthetransmittingdeviceto
matchtheKROMEsglobalMIDIchannelMIDIChan
nel(Global11a).
IfyouwanttheKROMEtoreceivedatathatwaspreviously
transmittedtoaMIDIdevice,youmustsettheglobalMIDI
channeloftheKROMEtothesameglobalMIDIchannelthat
wasusedwhenthedatawastransmitted.
TosettheMIDIchannelofthetransmittingdevice,please
seetheownersmanualforthatdevice.
3. EithercheckEnableExclusive(Global12b),ordisplay
oneofthemenucommandsofthispage.
Whenoneofthesemenucommandsisdisplayed,data
dumpscanbereceivedregardlessoftheEnableExclusive
setting.
4. Transmitthedatafromtheotherdevice.Fortheproce
dure,pleaseseetheownersmanualforthedeviceyou
areusing.
Whilethedataisbeingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate
NowreceivingMIDIdata.
Afteradatadumpisreceived,theKROMEwillrequire
approximatelyonesecondtoprocessthedataandwrite
itintomemory.Duringthistime,thedisplaywillshow
themessage,Nowwritingintointernalmemory.
Whilethismessageisshown,youmustunderno
circumstancesturnoffthepoweroftheKROME.Ifthe
poweristurnedoffduringthistime,theKROMEmay
failtooperatecorrectlywhenthepoweristurnedon
again.
219
Global mode
Reset Controller MIDI Assign
ResetControllerMIDIAssignisavailableontheMIDICC#
AssigntaboftheControllerspage.
Rename Drum Kit
ThisautomaticallyassignstheMIDIcontrolchange
messagesforeachcontrolleroftheP2:ControllersMIDI
CC#Assignpage.
RenameDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thisrenamesadrumkit.
Copy Drum Kit

CopyDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanotherdrumkittothe
currentlyediteddrumkit.
1. SettheTofieldtothedesiredresetmethod.
Note:Drumkits48 (GM)56 (GM)cannotbeedited,butyou

maycopythemtoanotherdrumkitandtheneditthem.
AllOff:AllsettingswillbeOff.
DefaultSetting:ThecontrolllerswillallbesettoOff;theX
YcontrolwillbesettoitsdefaultCCs.
CCDefault:Theparameterswillberesettothetypical
settings,includingthestandardsettingsforthecontrolllers.
IfyouwanttousethecontrollerswithanexternalMIDI
device,werecommendusingthissetting.
(YouarealsofreetoassigndifferentMIDIcontrolchange
messagestothecontrollers,ifyouwish.)
Thedefaultvaluesareshowninthetablebelow.
WhenyouexecuteCopyDrumKit,thesettingsofthe
currentlyselecteddrumkitwillbeoverwritten.
Reset Controller MIDI Assign Default

Controllers \ to
ARPControllers
Selectthecopysourcedrumkit(From).
Default Setting
CC Default
On/Off
CC#14
(CC#14)
Knob1
CC#22
(CC#22)
Knob2
CC#23
(CC#23)
Knob3
CC#24
(CC#24)
Knob4
CC#25
(CC#25)
Copy Key Setup

CopyKeySetupisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanindividualkeyto
anotherkey.Youcanalsocopysettingsfromtwoormore
contiguouskeysatonce.
Copy Scale
CopyScaleisavailableontheScalespage.
Thiscommandcopiesdatafromapresetscaletoauserscale
orcopiesauserscaletoanotheruserscalelocation.For
detailsonthepresetscales,pleaseseeType(Prog12d).
1. IntheFromKeyfields,selecttherangeofkeysthatyou
wishtocopy.
2. IntheToKeyfield,selectthecopydestinationkey.If
youselectedtwoormorekeysintheFromKeyfield,
theirsettingswillbecopiedtothekeysstartingatthe
ToKeyandcontinuingupward.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcescale.
IfyouselectPureMajororPureMinor,specifytheKey
(locatedattheright)aswell.
StretchcannotbeselectedifToisUserAllNotesScale.
2. InTo,selectsthecopydestinationscale.
Swap Key Setup

SwapKeySetupisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thiscommandexchanges(swaps)thesettingsofonekey
withthesettingsofanotherkey.
Write Drum Kits

WriteDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thissavesalldrumkits00(INT)47(USER).
Youmustwriteanediteddrumkitifyouwanttokeepit.
Editeddrumkitscannotberecoveredifyouturnoffthe
powerbeforesavingthem.
220
UseSourceKey1andSourceKey2tospecifythekeys
whosesettingsyouwanttoswap.
Global: Menu Command Write Arpeggio Patterns
Write Arpeggio Patterns

WriteArpeggioPatternsisavailableontheArpeggiopage.
ThiscommandwritesuserarpeggiopatternsU0000(INT)
U1027(USER).
Pattern,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,Latch,
KeySync,andKeyboardareparametersthataresetin
Program,Combination,andSong.TheWriteoperation
executedheredoesnotsavetheseparameters.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntothe
originalmodeandwritethem.
Rename Arpeggio Pattern

RenameArpeggioPatternisavailableontheArpeggio
page.
Thiscommandrenamestheselecteduserarpeggiopattern.
PresetpatternsP0P4cannotberenamed.
Copy Arpeggio Pattern

CopyArpeggioPatternisavailableontheArpeggiopage.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanotheruserarpeggio
patterntothecurrentlyselectedarpeggiopattern.
ItisnotpossibletocopyfromapresetarpeggiopatternP0
P4.
SelectthecopysourcearpeggiopatternFrom.
BeawarethatwhenyouexecuteCopyArpeggio
Pattern,allsettingsofthecurrentlyselectedarpeggio
patternwillbeoverwritten.
221
Global mode
222
Media mode
Inthismode,youcansaveinternalmemorydatatoan
insertedSDcard,orloaddatafrommediaintointernal
memory.Youcanalsocopyordeletefiles,orformatmedia.
Thefollowingmediacanbeused.
SD cards
SDandSDHCmemorycardssupportingMSDOSformat
FAT16orFAT32aresupported.
SDXCmemorycardsarenotsupported.
FormoreinformationabouthandlingtheSDcard,please
seetheInserting/removingacardintheSDcardslot
sectiononpage 118oftheOperationGuide.
Files, directories, and icons

TheKROMEmanagesdataonmediainahierarchicalman
ner,usingfilesanddirectories.Thecontentsofafile
(whetheritisafileoradirectory)areindicatednotonlyby
thename,butalsographically,byanicon.Filesanddirecto
rieshavedifferentlyshapedicons.
TheKROMEcollectivelyreferstofilesanddirectoriesrecog
nizablebyMSDOS(readablebyanMSDOScomputer),as
DOSfilesandDOSdirectories.DifferenttypesofDOS
filearedistinguishedbytheextensionaddedtotheirfile
name.
InthecaseofaDOSfilewithanextensionotherthanlisted
below,selectingLoadselectedtoaccessthedialogboxwill
causethefiletobeconsideredtobeaStandardMIDIFile
(SMF).However,youcantloadfilesthatarenotinSMF
format0/1.
Extension
Type
.PCG
Programs,combinations,drumkits,globalsettings,
arpeggiopatterns,drumtrackpatterns(dedicated
KROMEformat)
.SNG
Song,cuelist(dedicatedKROMEformat)
.MID
StandardMIDIFile(SMFformat0/1)
.EXL
MIDIExclusivedata
WhenKROMEdataissaved,oneofthesefilename
extensionswillbeaddedautomatically,accordingtothe
typeofdata.Ifthesefilenameextensionsaremodifiedona
computer,thefilewillbetreatedasanundefinedfilewhen
itisreloadedbackintotheKROME,andwillbehandledasa
StandardMIDIFile.
FileshandledbytheKROMEhavetheshowninthe
structure(seenextpage).Since.PCGand.SNGfilescanbe
openedtodividetheircontents,theyaredisplayedas
directoryicons.
223
Media mode
Files that can be loaded
DOS files
.PCG file
All programs
1 program
bank A...F
1 program
All combinations
1 combination
bank A...D
1 combination
All drum kits

User
1 drum kit
bank INT, USER
1 drum kit
DOS directory
Undefined DOS file
All user
1 user
arpeggio patterns arpeggiopattern
bank INT, USER
All drum track

patterns
1 drum track
pattern
Global settings
DOS files
.SNG file
Cue list
.MID file
1 song
(S000-127)
All track
.EXL file
1 user pattern
(U0099)
224
Media: File 01: Load
Media: File
01b: Current Directory
01: Load
01b
01
Menu
01c
01a
Here,youcanloadtheselectedfileordirectoryintointernal
memory.UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttonstoselectthe
desiredfileordirectory,andpresstheLoadbuttontoloadit.
YoucanalsoloaddatabyusingtheLoadselectedmenu
command.
Current Directory
Thedirectorycurrentlyselectedforprocessingisreferredto
asthecurrentdirectory.
Thedisplaywillshowthefullpathnameofthedirectory.A
slash/characterisusedasthedelimiterbetweendirectory
levels.Tochangethecurrentdirectory,usetheOpenbutton
andUpbutton(Media01a).
01c: Directory Window

Thisshowsfileinformationforthecurrentdirectory.You
canselectafileordirectoryinthiswindow.
Type
File
Size
Date
01a: Media Select, Command buttons
Type
SD Card
Theiconindicatesthetypeoffile.
Thisshowsthetypeandvolumelabeloftheinserteddevice.
Fordetailsonhowtheiconscorrespondtothedifferentfile
types,pleaseseethediagramFilesthatcanbeloadedon
page 224.
Volume label:
NoLabel:Mediathathasnovolumelabel
Unformatted:Mediathathasnotbeenformatted
NoMedia:Mediaisnotinsertedinthecardslot.
Thevolumelabeldisplaywilldependontheinsertedmedia
andthepage.
Open
WhenyoupresstheOpenbutton,thedirectorywillopen,
andthecurrentdirectorywillmoveoneleveldownward.
Thiscanbeusedwhenadirectoryhasbeenselectedinthe
directorywindow.
Up
WhenyoupresstheUpbutton,thedirectorywillmoveone
levelupward.
Load
Thiscommandloadsthefileordirectorythatwasselectedin
theDirectoryWindow(Media01c)intotheinternal
memory.
WhenyoupresstheLoadbutton,adialogboxwillappear.
Thespecificcontentsofthedialogboxwilldependonthe
fileyouareloading.ThisisthesamefunctionastheLoad
selectedmenucommand.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLoadselectedon
page 227.
PCG Preview
Ifyouselectedjustasingleprogram,combination,ordrum
kitfromwithina.PCGfile(i.e.,fromanopenedbank),you
canlistentothesounddirectlyfromthemediawithout
havingtoloadthefile.Ifyouveselectedacombination,the
timbresinthecombinationwillusetheKROMEsinternal
programs.Inthecaseofauserdrumkit,thesound
parametersoftheprogramthatwasselectedbeforeentering
Mediamodewillbeused.
Lock
[Lock, Unlock]
Filesanddirectorieswiththissymbolarelocked,andcannot
beoverwritten,copied,ordeleted.UsetheLock/Unlock
selectedmenucommandtolockorunlockafileordirectory.
Note:Ifthewriteprotectswitchofthemediaitselfis
enabled,theLocksymbolwillbeshownforallfilesand
directories.
File
ThisisthelowlevelDOSfilename.
Size
Thisisthesizeofthefile,inbytes.
Date
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.From
theleft,thisisshownasday,month,year,hoursandmin
utes.
HoweversincetheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcal
endarorclock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSet
Date/Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
Mode, Stop Watch

01: Menu Command
0:Hideunknownfilesseep.227
1:Lock/Unlockselectedseep.227
2:Sortseep.227
3:Loadselectedseep.227
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMedia:MenuCommand
onpage 227.
225
Media mode
02: Save
03: Utility
02
Menu
01b
01b
03
Menu
01c
01c
01a
01a
Here,youcansavevariousdatatypesfrominternalmemory
tomedia.
Here,youcanrename,copy,ordeletetheselectedmediaor
file,createanewdirectory,format,andsetthedateand
time.
UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontomovetothedesired
directory(i.e.,changethecurrentdirectory),andthenselect
thedesiredmenucommand.
WhenyouexecuteaSaveoperation,thedatawillbesaved
inthesamelevelofthehierarchyasthefilesthatare
displayed.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendaror
clock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSetDate/
Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
Afterselectingmediaorafile,selectthedesiredmenu
command.
03: Menu Command
2:Sortseep.227
3:Renameseep.233
02: Menu Command
4:Copyseep.233
5:Deleteseep.234
6:CreateDirectoryseep.234
2:Sortseep.227
7:SetDate/Timeseep.234
3:SaveAll(PCG&SEQ)seep.231
8:Formatseep.234
4:SavePCGseep.232
onpage 227.
5:SaveSEQseep.232
6:SavetoStandardMIDIFileseep.232
7:SaveExclusiveseep.232
onpage 227.
08: Media Information
08a
01a
TheMEDIAscreenshowsinformationaboutthemedia.
08a: Media Information

VolumeLabel:Thevolumelabelofthemedia.
FormatType:Thetypeofformat.Ifnotformatted,thiswill
indicateUnformatted.
TotalSize:Thecapacityofthemedia(inbytes).
FreeSize:Thefreecapacityofthemedia(inbytes).
WriteProtect:Thewriteprotectstatusofthemedia.This
willindicateOnifprotected,orOffifnotprotected.
226
Media: Menu Command Hide unknown files
Media: Menu Command

Tip:Ineachpage,youcanaccess(orswitchon/off)uptothe
firsttenmenucommandsbyholdingdowntheENTER
buttonandpressingthecorrespondingnumerickey09.
astheCancelbutton.

01: Load Menu Command
Type
Order
Ascent
Size
Date
Sortinascendingorderofsize
Descent
Sortindescendingorderofsize
Ascent
Sortinascendingorderofdate
Descent
Sortindescendingorderofdate
Load selected
LoadselectedisavailableontheLoadtab.
Thisloadsthefileordirectoryselectedinthedirectory
window(Media01c)intointernalmemory.
1. Inthedirectorywindow(Media01c),selectthefileor
directorythatyouwanttoload.
2. SelectLoadselected.
Hide unknown files
Adialogboxwillappear.Thedialogboxthatappearswill
dependonthefileyouareloading.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseepage 228.
Specifythevariousitemsasnecessary.
HideunknownfilesisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,
andUtilitytab.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessthesamedialogboxbypressing
theLoadbuttoninsteadofLoadselected.
IfyouselectHideunknownfiles,acheckmarkwillappear
attheleftofHideunknownfiles.Inthisstate,undefined
fileswillnotbeshowninthedirectorywindow.However,
thisisvalidonlyifthereareDOSfilesinthecurrent
directory.
If a file to be loaded cannot be found

Ifanecessaryfilecannotbefoundinthecurrentdirectoryor
inalowerdirectorywhenloading.PCG,or.SNGfiles,a
dialogboxlikethefollowing(Whereisa)willappear.
Lock/Unlock selected
Lock/UnlockselectedisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,
andUtilitytab.
Thislocks/unlocksthefileordirectorythatsselectedinthe
directorywindow(Media01c).Ifyoulockthefileor
directory,thelockicon(Lock)willappear,and
overwriting,copying,ordeletingwillnotbepossible.
1. Inthedirectorywindow(Media01c),selectthefileor
directorythatyouwanttolockorunlock.
2. SelectLock/Unlockselected;theselectedfileordirec
torywillalternatelybelockedorunlocked.
Sort
SortisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,andUtilitytab.
Thisfunctionsortsthefilesinthecurrentdirectory.
Thisdialogboxwillappearinthefollowingcases.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilethatwassplitacrosstwoor
morevolumesofmedia,whenthefirstvolumehasbeen
loadedandthesecondmediavolumeisnowrequired.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilesimultaneouslywitha.SNG
file,iftheidenticallynamed.SNGfileisnotfoundinthe
currentdirectoryafterloadingthe.PCGfile.
Ifthisdialogboxappears,takethefollowingaction.
1. Selectthedirectorythatcontainsthefileindicatedby
Whereisa
Ifthespecifiedfileislocatedonanothermediavolume,
exchangemedia.Thenpressthedirectorywindowinthe
displaytomaketheKROMErecognizethemedia,andselect
theappropriatedirectory.
UseTypetoselecthowthefileswillbesorted,anduse
Ordertospecifythedirection.
Type
Noorder
Name
(Directory
First)
Name
2. PresstheSelectbuttontoresumeloading.
Order
Itisnotpossibletoopen.PCG,or.SNGfilesinthe
Whereisadialogbox.TheOpenbuttoncannotbe
usedfor.PCG,or.SNGfiles.
Unsorted
Ascent
Sortinalphabeticalorder,first
directoriesandthenfiles
Descent
Sortinreversealphabeticalorder,first
directoriesandthenfiles
Ascent
Sortalphabetically
Descent
Sortinreversealphabetical
LoadingwillbeabortedifyoupresstheCancelbutton.If
youwanttoaborttheloadingprocess,presstheOKbutton.
IfyoupresstheSkipbutton,theindicatedfilewillbe
skipped,andthenextfilewillbeloaded.
Exceptforspecialsituationssuchaswhenthemedia
containingtheindicatedfilehasbeendamagedorcannotbe
found,youshouldusetheSelectbuttontocontinuethe
loadingprocess.
227
Media mode
1) Load .PCG
3) Load Program Bank
Datainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Allprogramdataoftheselectedbankwillbeloadedintothe
bankyouspecify.
[Bank A...F]
1. IfaSNGfileofthesamefilenameexistsinthe.PCG,
youcanselecttheLoad********.SNGtoocheckbox.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationbank.
Ifthisfiledoesnotexistinthecurrentdirectory,loaditas
describedintheaboveprocedureIfafiletobeloaded
cannotbefoundonpage 227.
4) Load a Program
Datafortheselectedprogramwillbeloadedintothe
programnumberyouspecify.
2. IfLoad********.SNGtooischecked,youcanuse
Select.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowsongdata
withinthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Themultidatawillbeloadedstartingatthe
numberthatfollowsthelastsongdatainmemory.Thesong
datawithinthe.SNGfilethatisbeingloadedwillbepacked
intotheavailablelocations.(Seediagrambelow)
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoloadsongdatafrom
mediawithouterasingthesongdatathatisalreadyin
memory.Cuelistdatawillnotbeloaded.
Clear:Erasesallcuelistdataandsongdatafrominternal
memory,andloadthecuelistdatatogetherwiththestateof
thesongdataasitwaswhensaved(Seediagrambelow).
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesavedstate
immediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
.SNG Allocation
.SNG file to load
SNG000
SNG001
Append
Internal memory of
the M50 before loading
SNG000
SNG000
SNG002
SNG003
SNG004
SNG005
SNG006
SNG007
SNG002
SNG003
SNG000
SNG001
SNG000
SNG001
SNG000
SNG003
SNG003
SNG005
SNG005
SNG003
SNG005
Clear
Internal memory of
the M50 after loading
1. Ifyouwishtoloadaprogramotherthantheone
alreadyselected,usethesourceProgram(upperfield)
toselecttheprogramthatyouwishtoload.
Note:Theselectedprogramcanbeplayedfromthe
keyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttoauditiontheprogrambeforeloading.Formore
information,pleaseseePCGPreviewonpage 225.
2. InToProgram,(lowerfield)selectthebankandpro
gramintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.Whenyou
pressthepopupbutton,theBank/ProgramSelectwin
dowwillappear.
5) Load Combinations
Allcombinationsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
SNG002
SNG003
6) Load Combination Bank
[Bank A...D]
Allcombinationsintheselectedbankwillbeloadedintothe
bankyouspecify.
2) Load Programs
Allprogramdatafroma.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
7) Load a Combination
ThisloadstheselectedCombinationintoaspecifiedBank
andnumberininternalmemory.
228
Media: Menu Command Load selected
1. Ifyouwishtoloadacombinationotherthantheone
alreadyselected,useCombination(upperfield)to
selectthecombinationthatyouwishtoload.
Note:Theselectedcombinationcanbeplayedfromthe
youwanttoauditionthecombinationbe
foreloadingit.Formoreinformation,pleaseseePCG
Previewonpage 225.
12) Load Arpeggio Pattern

[U0000-0899(INT), U0900-1027(USER)]:
Alluserarpeggiopatterndataintheselecteduserarpeggio
patternbankwillbeloadedintotheuserarpeggiopattern
bankyouspecifyastheloadingdestination.
2. InToCombination(lowerfield),selectthebankand
combinationintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theBank/Combination
Selectwindowwillappear.
8) Load Drum Kits

Alldrumkitsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
9) Load Drum Kit

[000031(INT), 032047(USER)]
Thiscommandloadsalldrumkitdatafromtheselected
drumkitbankintothedrumkitbankthatyouspecifyasthe
loaddestination.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationuserarpeggiopattern
bank.
IfyouexecutethiscommandwithU09001027(USER)
specifiedastheloadingdestinationfortheselecteduser
arpeggiopatternbank00000899(INT),userarpeggio
patterns00000127willbeloaded.Ifyouselect0000
0899(INT)astheloadingdestinationforU09001027(USER),
thedatawillbeloadedintouserarpeggiopatterns0000
0127.
13) Load an Arpeggio Pattern

Theselecteduserarpeggiopatterndatawillbeloadedinto
theuserarpeggiopatternnumberthatyouspecifyasthe
loadingdestination.
Ifyouveselected(USER)astheloaddestinationforthe
selecteddrumkitbank(INT),000015willbeloaded.If
youveselected(INT)astheloaddestinationfor
(USER),thedatawillbeloadedinto000015.
10) Load a Drum Kit

Theselecteddrumkitwillbeloadedintothedrumkit
numberyouspecifyastheloadingdestination.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserarpeggiopatternotherthan
thecurrentlyselectedone,useArpPattern(upper
field)toreselecttheuserarpeggiopatternthatyou
wishtoload.
Theselecteduserarpeggiopatterncanbeplayedfromthe
youwanttoauditiontheuserarpeggiopatternyouwishto
load.
2. InToArpPattern(lowerfield)specifytheloading
destinationuserarpeggiopattern.
14) Load Drum Track Patterns

1. Ifyouwishtoloadadrumkitotherthantheone
alreadyselected,useDrumKit(upperfield)toreselect
thedrumkityouwishtoload.
Thiscommandloadsalldrumtrackuserpatternsfromthe
.PCGfile.
Note:Theselecteddrumkitcanbeplayedfromthe
youwanttoauditiondrumkitsbeforeloading.Formore
information,pleaseseePCGPreviewonpage 225.
15) Load a Drum Track Pattern
2. InToDrumKit(lowerfield),selecttheloadingdestina
tiondrumkit.
Thiscommandloadstheselectedsingledrumtrackuser
patterndataintothedrumtrackuserpatternlocationthat
youspecifyastheloaddestination.
11) Load Arpeggio Patterns

Alluserarpeggiopatterndatainthe.PCGfilewillbe
loaded.
229
Media mode
1. Ifyouwanttoloadapatternotherthantheselectedpat
tern,usePattern(theupperfield)toreselectthepat
ternthatyouwanttoload.
2. UsetheToPatternfield(thelowerfield)tospecify
theloaddestinationpattern.
20) Load Tracks

Theeventdataofalltracksintheselectedsongwillbe
loadedintothesongyouspecifyastheloadingdestination.
However,itisnotpossibletospecifyanuncreatedsongas
theloadingdestination.
16) Load Global Setting

Globalsettingdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
ThisincludesGlobalmodeparametersotherthandrumkits
andarpeggeiopatterns.
MemoryprotectandEffectGlobalSWsettingswillnot
beloaded.
17) Load .SNG

Alldatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
InSong,specifytheloadingdestinationsong.
21) Load Pattern Data

Theselecteduserpatternwillbeloadedintoauserpattern
oftheselectedloadingdestinationsong.However,itisnot
possibletospecifyanuncreatedsongastheloading
destination.
1. UseSelect.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowthesong
datafromthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Thesongwillbeloadedafterthelastsongdata
thatalreadyexistsininternalmemory.Atthistime,thesong
datainthe.SNGfilebeingloadedwillbepackedforward.
(Seediagramin.SNGAllocationonpage 228)
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoaddsongdatafrommedia
withouterasingthesongdatathatcurrentlyexistsin
internalmemory.Cuelistdatawillnotbeloaded.
Clear:Allcuelistdataandsongdatacurrentlyexistingin
internalmemorywillbeerased,andthecuelistandsong
datawillbeloadedinthestateinwhichitwassaved(See
diagramin.SNGAllocationonpage 228).
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesavedstate
immediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
2. Ifa.PCGfileofthesamefilenameexistsinthecurrent
directory,youcanselecttheLoad********.PCGtoo
checkbox.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserpatternotherthantheone
alreadyselected,usePattern(upperfield)toreselect
theuserpatternthatyouwishtoload.
2. InToSongandPattern(lowerfield),selectthe
loadingdestinationsonganduserpattern.
22) Load Standard MIDI File

TheselectedStandardMIDIFilewillbeloadedintothesong
numberyouselectastheloadingdestination.
Seestep1ofthe1)Load.PCGonpage 228.
18) Load Cue Lists

Thecuelistdatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
19) Load a Song

Datafortheselectedsongwillbeloadedintothesong
numberyouspecifiedastheloaddestination.
1. InSong,selecttheloadingdestinationsong.
2. IfyouturnExclusiveOff(unchecked),anySystem
ExclusivemessagesorUniversalExclusivemessages
includedintheSMFdatawillnotbeloaded.
IfthisisOn(checked),SystemExclusivemessagesand
UniversalExclusivemessagesincludedintheSMFdatawill
beloadedasSystemExclusiveevents.
TheGS/XGsoundmapsandmessagesarenot
supported.Dependingonthecontentofthedata,it
maynotplaybackcorrectly,butthedataitselfwillbe
maintainedifExclusiveischecked.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadasongotherthantheselectedsong,
useSong(upperfield)toreselectthesongtobe
loaded.
2. InToSong(lowerfield),selecttheloadingdestination
song.
230
IfyouselectanundefinedfileandchooseLoad
selected,thefilewillbeassumedtobeaStandardMIDI
File,andtheLoadStandardMIDIFiledialogboxwill
appear.Whenyouexecuteloading,thefilewillbe
loadedintothesongthatwasspecifiedastheloading
Media: Menu Command Save All (PCG & SEQ)
destination.Howeverifthefileformatisinappropriate,
theoperationwillbeinvalidandanerrormessagewill
bedisplayed.
Theprogrambankandprogramnumbersloadedinto
thesongwillfollowtheBankMap(Global02a)
setting.IfBankMapisKORG,bankAwillbeselected
forbankselect00.00(MSB.LSB).IfBankMapisGM(2),
bankGwillbeselected.
23) Load and Transmit MIDI Exclusive Data

Alldatainthe.EXLfilewillbeloaded,andtransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTortheUSBconnector.
02: Save Menu Command

Cautions regarding Save
WhensavingcombinationswithSaveAll(PCG&
SEQ),SavePCG,orSaveSEQ,youshouldalsotryto
savetheprogramsusedbyeachtimbreortrack(and
thedrumkitsusedbytheprogram),userarpeggio
patterns,anddrumtrackuserpatternsatthesame
time.
Similarly,whensavingprograms,youshouldalsosave
thedrumkits,userarpeggiopatterns,anddrumtrack
userpatternsusedbytheprogramatthesametime.
If the data being saved does not fit on one volume

of media
Whensavinga.PCG,or.SNGfile,andthedatadoesnotfit
ononevolumeofmedia,thedisplaywillreadNospace
availableonmedia.
Ifthe.EXLfilecontainstwoormoreExclusivedataitems,
useTransmitIntervalTimetospecifythetimeintervalthat
willbeinsertedbetweeneachitemofExclusivedata.
IfyouaretransmittingthedatatoanotherKROME,the
requiredtimeintervalwilldependonthetypeofdata.After
transmittingallprogramdata,youmustallowanintervalof
approximately1second.FordetailspleaseseetheGlobal
modesectiononDumpProgramDumpDrumTrack
Pattern(seep.218).ForotherMIDIdevices,pleaseseetheir
ownersmanual.
Eitherdeleteunneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthe
mediabeforesaving,orsavethedatatoothermedia.
Save All (PCG & SEQ)

SaveAll(PCG&SEQ)isavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavesallprograms,combinations,drumkits,
globalsettings,userarpeggiopattern,anddrumtrackuser
patternsfrominternalmemorytomediaasa.PCGfile.
Songsandcuelistsaresavedtomediaasa.SNGfile.
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisa
DOSdirectory.
1. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialog
box,andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
Forexample,ifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCG,andNEWFILE.SNG
willbesavedtothemedia.
2. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
Programs,combinations,drumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternscanbesavedinunitsofbanks.Informationonthe
banktobesavedisdisplayedbeloweachSelectionbutton.
Banksthatarecheckedwillbesaved.
Ifyouwanttomodifytheselections,presstheSelection
buttontoopenthedialogbox,andcheckthecheckboxesfor
thedatayouwanttosave.
231
Media mode
Example: when the Selection button for Program is pressed
Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialogbox,
andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
Forexample,ifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,afilenamedNEWFILE.SNGwillbesavedtothe
media.
Save to Standard MIDI File

IfyoupresstheAllbutton,allbankswillbechecked.
IfyoupresstheNothingbutton,allbankswillbe
unchecked.
PresstheOKbuttontochangetheselectionsasspecified,or
presstheCancelbuttontodiscardyourchanges.
TospecifywhetherGlobalSettings,andDrumTrack
UserPatternwillbesaved,usethecheckboxinstep1.
SavetoStandardMIDIFileisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavestheselectedsongfrominternal
memorytostoragemediaasa.MIDfile(StandardMIDI
File).
DOSdirectory.
IfNospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwillappear.
Eitherdeleteunneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthe
mediabeforesaving,orsavethedatatoothermedia.
Whenyousave,fileswillbecreatedinthecurrentdirectory.
Save PCG
SavePCGisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavesallprograms,combinations,drumkits,
globalsettings,userarpeggiopattern,anddrumtrackuser
patternsfrominternalmemorytomediaasa.PCGfile.
DOSdirectory.
1. InSong,choosethesongthatyouwishtosave.
2. IfExclusiveisOn(checked),SystemExclusiveevents
andUniversalExclusiveeventsincludedinthesong
datawillbesavedasExclusivemessages.
IfthisisOff(unchecked),SystemExclusiveeventsand
UniversalExclusiveeventsincludedinthesongdatawill
notbesaved.
box,andspecifythefilename.
Bydefault,thefirsteightcharacters(uppercase)ofthesong
namewillbeassignedautomatically.
4. Usetheradiobuttonstospecifytheformat.
Format0willsavesixteenchannelsofMIDIdatatogetherin
asingletrack.
Format1willsaveeachMIDIchanneltoaseparatetrack.
ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCGandNEWFILE.SNG
willbesavedtothemedia.
2. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
Fortheprocedure,pleasesee02:SaveAllstep3.
Save Exclusive
SaveExclusiveisavailableontheSavetab.
Save SEQ
AccumulatesthereceivedExclusivedataininternal
memory,andthensavesthedatatomediaasan.EXLfile.
SaveSEQisavailableontheSavetab.
DOSdirectory.
Thiscommandsavesallsongsandcuelistsfrominternal
memoryasa.SNGfile.
DOSdirectory.
232
Thesongdatayousaveherecanbeplayedbackonadevice
thatsupportsStandardMIDIFiles.Howeverifyouintendto
playbackthedataontheKROME,werecommendthatyou
useSaveSEQtosavethedata,sincethiswillbemore
easilyrecreated.
1. WhenyouselectSaveExclusive,theKROMEwillwait
forExclusivedatatobereceived.Thefollowingdialog
boxwillappear.
Media: Menu Command Rename
03: Utility Menu Command

Rename
RenameisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandrenamestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
directoryisselected.
2. TransmittheExclusivedatathatyouwishtosavetothe
KROME.
Whilethedataisbeingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate
Status=RECEIVINGMIDIDATA.
1. Selectthefileordirectorywhosenameyouwantto
edit.
2. SelectRenametoopenthedialogbox.
Whenreceptionends,thesizeofthereceiveddataandthe
sizeoftheremainingfreeareawillberewritten.Thedisplay
willchangetoStatus=AWAITINGMIDIDATA,andyou
cancontinuetransmittingExclusivedatatotheKROME.
Duringreception,theCancelbuttonandtheOKbutton
cannotbepressed.
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialog
box,andmodifythename(SeeOGpage 117).
Copy
CopyisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandcopiestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
directoryisselected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttocopy.
2. SelectCopytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Copywillshowthenameoftheselectedfileordirec
tory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatwillbe
copied,usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythefilenamethatyouwishtocopy.
(SeeOGpage 117)
Using[*/?]asaWildcard:Whenyouusethetexteditbutton
toaccessthetextinputdialogboxandspecifythenameof
thefileordirectorytobecopied,youcanuse*and?
charactersaswildcards.Forexample,ifintheabove
exampleyouspecifyPRELOAD1.*(insteadof
PRELOAD1.PCG),allfilenamesofPRELOAD1.withany
filenameextensionwillbecopiedatthesametime:i.e.,
PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,...
Example)
PRELOAD1.*:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,...
PRELOAD?.PCG:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD2.PCG,
PRELOAD3.PCG,...
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubjectto
copying.Directorieswillnotbecopied.
4. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontoselectthecopy
destinationdirectory.
233
Media mode
5. Ifyouwishtocopythefileordirectorywithadifferent
name,usethetexteditbutton(inthelowerfield)to
accessthetextinputdialogbox,andspecifythenew
nameforthefileordirectorytobecopied.
Ifyoureusingwildcardstocopymultiplefiles
simultaneously,youwontbeabletochangefilenames.
Note:Ifyoudecidenottocopy,presstheAbortbutton.
Delete
DeleteisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommanddeletestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlyifaDOSfileordirectoryis
selected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeletetoopenthedialogbox.
Year
19802079
Month
112
Day
131
Hour
023
Minute
059
Second
059
Format
FormatisavailableontheUtilitytab.
3. Deletewillindicatethenameoftheselectedfileor
directory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatistobe
deleted,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythenameofthefileordirectorythat
youwishtodelete.(SeeOGpage 117)
Using[*/?]asaWildcard:Whenyouusethetexteditbutton
toaccessthetextinputdialogboxandspecifythenameof
thefiletobedeleted,youcanusethe*or?charactersas
wildcards.Thisallowsyoutosimultaneouslydelete
multiplefileswithidenticalfilenamesanddifferent
extensions,orfileswhosenamesarepartiallyidentical(see
Copyonpage 233).
Thiscommandformatsthemediathatsinsertedinthe
KROME.Thevolumelabel(anamefortheentiremedia)
youspecifywillbeassignedtothemedia.Thevolumelabel
youassignherewillbedisplayedintheSDCard(Media0
1a).Thevolumelabelcanbeamaximumofeleven
characters.
Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe
COMPAREbuttontoundoformatting.
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis
inserted.
2. SelectFormattoopenthedialogbox.
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubjectto
deletion.Directorieswillnotbedeleted.
Create Directory
CreateDirectoryisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandcreatesanewdirectorywithinthecurrent
directory.
3. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthe
textinputdialogbox,andspecifythevolumelabel(See
OGpage 117).
Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbedisplayed.If
novolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedforthemedia,orifa
nonDOSmediawasinserted,thiswillindicateNEW
VOLUME.
4. Specifytheinitializationformat.
Usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialogbox,
andspecifythenameofthenewdirectory(SeeOG
page 117).
Set Date/Time
SetDate/TimeisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendaror
clock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSetDate/
Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
234
QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuickFormatto
initializethemedia.
FullFormat:Allblocksinthemediawillbeerased.
NormallythereisnoneedforyoutoexecuteFullFormat.
YoushouldexecuteQuickFormatinstead.
Effect Guide
Overview
TheKROMEprovidesfiveinserteffects,twomastereffects,
andatotaleffect,togetherwithamixersectionthatcontrols
theroutingoftheseeffects.
Foreachoftheseeffectprocessors,youcanchoosefrom193
differenttypesofeffects,groupedintothefollowing
categories:
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.
WerecommendthatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
settings.
Classification of 193 effects

Effect type
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.Selectingthis
settingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Contents
Dynamics:
000...006
Effectswhichcontrolvolume,suchas
compressors,limiter,andgates
EQ/Filter:
007...019
Effectswhichcontrolfrequencycontent,suchas
EQ,multimodefilter,exciter,andwah
Overdrive/
Amp/Mic:
020...028
Overdriveandampmodelingeffectssuchas
guitar/bassampsandmics
Chorus/
Flanger/
Phaser:
029...048
Pitchandphasemodulationeffectssuchas
chorusandflanger
Modulation/
PitchShift:
049...067
Othermodulationeffectssuchastremoloand
rotaryspeaker,andpitchshifters
Delay:
038...083
Delays
Reverb/ER:
084...094
Reverbandearlyreflections
MonoMono
Serial:
095...126
Mono&Monochaineffectsthatinternally
connecttwomonoeffectsinseries
Mono//Mono
Parallel:
127...171
Mono&Monoparalleleffectsthatallowtwo
monoeffectstobeappliedtoLandR
independently
DoubleSize:
172...193
Doublesizeeffects
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
page 60.
Effects in each mode

Program mode
WithPrograms,youcanuseinserteffectstoprocessthefinal
soundinthesamewaythatyouusetheFilter,Driver,
Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)toprocessthesoundfromthe
oscillators(OSC1&2).Thenthemastereffectsareusedto
createoverallambiencesuchasreverb,andusethetotal
effecttomakefinaladjustments.Allofthesesettingscanbe
madeindependentlyforeachprogram.
Combination, Sequencer mode

InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethetrackEQ
andinserteffectstoprocesstheprogramsoundofeachtimbre/
track.Youcanthenusethemastereffectstocreateoverall
ambience,andusethetotaleffecttomakefinaladjustments.
Effect Preset
presets.
InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsforeach
combination,andinSequencermodeyoucanmakethemfor
eachsong.
Combination,andSequencer).
InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor
modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,so
thateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffectparameters
willbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesongplaysback.
storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethemasan
favoritesettings.
aparticularProgram,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
Program mode
Oscillator1
Filter1
Driver1
Amplifier1
Oscillator2
Filter2
Driver2
Amplifier2
Send
EQ
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
Insert Effect 15
Total Effect
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Total Effect
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
EQ
Drum Track
Combination mode, Sequencer mode
Send
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1
EQ
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16
EQ
Insert Effect 15
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
235
Effect Guide
3. SettheBPMasdesired.
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)

and Tempo Synchronization
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
Tosetthedelaystoaspecifictempo,separatefromthe
systemclock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00
and300.00BPM).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDynamicModulation
Sources(Dmod)onpage 346.
Ifthecombinationofthetempo,BaseNote,andTimes(x)
settingsinconjunctionwouldexceedthemaximumdelay
time,awarningsuchasTimeOver?>OVER!willappear
inthedisplay.Ifthishappens,justreducethedelaytime.
Notethatthemaximumdelaytimedependsonwhichdelay
effectyoureusing.Forinstance,themaximumdelaytime
for079:StereoBPMDelayis2,730msec,whilethemaximum
delaytimefor192:St.BPMLongDlyis5,460msec.
Tempo Synchronization
Dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)

Dynamicmodulationletsyoucontrolcertaineffects
parametersinrealtime,usingeitherthebuiltincontrollers
orMIDI.Theseeffectparametersaremarkedwiththelogo
.
Youcansynchronizesomeeffectsparameters,suchasLFO
speedsanddelaytimes,tothesystemtempo.Thisletsyou
synctheeffectstoProgramLFOs,DrumTrack,Arpeggiator,
theinternalsequencer,oranexternalMIDIclock.
Theseeffectsparametersaremarkedwiththelogo
Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationtocontrol
aneffectparameterinrealtime.
1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforProgramEffectsset
tingsonpage 79oftheOperatinguide,setIFX1to078:
L/C/RBPMDelay.Verifythatyourehearingadelay
effect.
Synchronizing LFOs
2. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXIFX1page.
MosteffectswithLFOs,suchas011:StereoWah/AutoWah,
canbesynchronizedtotempo.Thisappliestotheindividual
effectsLFOs,andalsotheCommonFXLFO.
Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay level via the
Joystick
3. SetInputLevelDmodto+100.
TosetupLFOstosynchronizetotempo:
4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:#01.
1. SetMIDISynctoOn.
Thedelaysoundwilldisappear.
2. SettheBPMasdesired.
Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythejoystick.
Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself,thedelay
soundwillgraduallyincrease.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
TosettheLFOtoaspecifictempo,separatefromthesystem
clock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00and
300.00BPM).
3. UsetheBaseNoteandTimes(x)parameterstosetthe
rhythmicvalueoftheLFO.
Forinstance,ifyousetBaseNoteto1/8andTimes(x)to2,
eachcycleoftheLFOwilllastforaquarternote(twoeighth
notes).
BPM/MIDI Sync: LFO
LFO
Synchronizing Delay Times

DelayswithBPMintheirtitlewillsynctotempo.
Forinstance,youmightsetupeffect078:StereoBPMDelay
asfollows:
1. SetLDelayBaseNoteto1/8,andTimes(x)to1
In addition, we can use Dmod to change the feedback level

via SW1
5. IntheP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetuppage,set
theSW1functiontoSW1Mod.CC#80,andtheModeto
Toggle.
ChooseP8:Routing/IFXpage.SettheFeedbackSrctoSW1:
#80,andsetAmtto+30.
2. SetRDelayBaseNoteto1/16,andTimes(x)to3
Thismeansthattheleftchannelwillbedelayedbyan
eighthnote,andtherightchannelwillbedelayedbya
dottedeighthnote(threesixteenthnotes).
BPM/MIDI Sync: Delay Time
Dry
Wet
Lch
Dry
Wet
Rch
Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfandpress
theSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,andthe
236
Overview Common FX LFOs
delaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.TheAmtsetting
specifiesthefeedbacklevelthatwillbeineffectwhenthe
SW1switchispressed.IfAmtissetto10,pressingtheSW1
switchwillreducethefeedbacklevelto0.
Finally, we can use the MIDI/Tempo Sync function

to synchronize the delay time to the arpeggiator
tempo.
6. SetBPMtoMIDI.
7. ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimesas
desired.
Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNoteto andTimestox1
sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable.Thedelay
timewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote.
Common FX LFOs
Normally,LFObasedeffectssuchaschoruses,flangers,
phasers,filters,andautopaneachhavetheirown
independentLFO.TheKROMEeffectssupportthis
standardmechanism,butaddanewone:CommonFX
LFOs.
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize
multipleLFObasedeffectstogether.Theyreavailablein
mostLFObasedeffects,inadditiontotheindividualLFOs,
providing:
MastersourcesoffrequencyandphaseforallLFObased
effects
LFOspeedsetbyeitherfrequencyortempo
ResetfromDmodsources,foreitherrealtimeperformance
orsynchronizingtoadownbeatinasequence
WhenusingtheCommonFXLFOs,youcanstillcontrolthe
LFOphaseindividuallyforeacheffect,andoftenchangethe
waveformindividuallyaswell.
YoucanedittheCommonFXLFOparametersontheP8
CommonFXLFOpagesofProgram,Combination,
Sequencermodes.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1
8. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill
change.
Frequency[Hz]
Reset
Stereo Flanger
Waveforem = Triangle
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Generate original LFO waveform
Stereo Phaser
Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)press
theSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,andthedelays
willbecomelonger.
9. WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiatorwill
beginplaying.
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Auto Pan

Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = +90 [deg]
Selectanydesiredarpeggiator.WhenyourotatetheTEMPO
knob,thedelaytimewillchangeinsynchronizationwiththe
changingtempoofthearpeggiator.
Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmayhear
someunexpectednoiseifyouchangethetempowhile
thedelayissounding.Thisisbecausethedelaysound
becomesdiscontinuous,andisnotamalfunction.
Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO
frequencytothetempo.SettheeffectparametersMIDI
SynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.Fordetails,pleasesee
TempoSynchronizationonpage 236.
237
Effect Guide
Example: Vocoder (Combination)
FX Control Buses
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffectssidechains.
Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwithoneaudiosignal
(thesidechain),whiletheeffectprocessesacompletely
differentaudiosignal.
Thisisconvenientforusewithvocodersandlimiters,gates,
etc.Youcanuseavoicetypetimbretomodulateasynth
typeinput,oruseadrumtracketc.tocreaterhythmic
vocodereffects.Limiterorgatetypeeffectsareoftenusedto
controlaninputusingadifferentsound.
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingan
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
Asshownintheillustration,usingtheoutputoftimbre1as
thecarrierandthevoicetypeoutputoftimbre2asthe
modulatorallowsyoutocreatedistinctivetalkingeffects.
Vocoder (Combination)
Timbre1
: Pad
KROMEincludestwotruestereoFXControlBuses,which
canbeusedwiththefollowingeffects:
Bus Select
: IFX1
(Carrier)
IFX1
174: Vocoder
Bus Select
: L/R
Modulator Source
: FX Control1
(Modulator)
Timbre2
: Voice
FX Control Bus
:1
(FX Control Bus1)
Vocoder
174:Vocoder
Example: Rhythmic Vocoder (Program)
Limiter, and gate effects

003:StereoLimiter
006:StereoGate
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingone
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
Example: Gated Reverb (Program mode)

Ifyouprocessreverberantsoundthroughagateeffect,the
gatingmaynotoccurasdesiredsincethereverbextendsthe
durationofthesound.Normally,youwillusetheun
reverberatedsoundtocontrolthegate,asshowninthe
diagram.UseBus(IFX/Output)SelecttosendOSC1and2
toIFX1andalsoviaFXControlBusto1.SettheIFX2:Stereo
GateEnvelopeSourcetoFXControl1.Thisletsyoucontrol
thegateusingadifferentsignalthantheinput(inthis
example,thereverberatedsound).
Gated Reverb (Program)
OSC1&2
Bus Select
: IFX1
IFX1
084: Reverb Hall
Chain to
: IFX2
IFX2
006: Stereo Gate
Bus Select
: L/R
Envelope Source
: FX Control1
FX Control Bus
: FX Ctrl1
Youcanalsouseadrumpatternorsimilarsignalasthe
modulator,producingarhythmvocodereffect.
Intheexampleshowninthediagram,adrumpattern
generatedbyArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunctionissent
totheFXControlbusandusedasthemodulatorforthe
vocoder.
Foroscillator1(thecarrier),setBus(IFX/Output)Selectto
IFX1,sendingthesignaltoIFX1:Vocoder.Fordrumtrack
wereusingasthemodulator),setFXControlBusto1,
sendingthesignaltoFXCtrl1bus.ForIFX1:Vocoder,set
ModulatorSourcetoFXControl1sothatthedrumtrack
signalwillbethemodulatorforthevocoder.
Rhythmic Vocoder (Program)
(FX Control Bus1)
Bus Select
OSC1
: IFX1
: Synth/
Single wave
(Carrier)
IFX1
174: Vocoder
Modulator Source
: FX Control1
Example: Limiter (Combination)
(Modulator)
Compressortypeeffectsusetheleveloftheaudioinputto
controlthelevelgainoftheaudiooutput.
Fortheseeffects,theenvelopedetectionsourcecanbeeither
theaudioinputitself(theusualmethod)orFXControlBus1
or2.
Theexampleshowninthediagramisofasplitcombination
inwhichtheleveloftimbre1(Pad,playedfromthelowkey
range)isbeingcontrolledbytimbre2(Guitar,withIFX2
OD/HiGainWahinserted,playedfromthehighkeyrange).
Youcanmakesettingssothatwhenyouplaytheguitar
sound,thevolumeofthepadwilldecreaseautomatically.
SendthepostIFX2signalviaFXControlBustoFXCtrl1,
andsettheIFX1:StereoLimiterEnvelopeSourceparameter
toFXControl1.
Limiter (Combination)
IFX1
003: Stereo Limiter
Bus Select
Timbre1 : IFX1
: Pad
Program
A
Program
B
Bus Select
split
Timbre2 : IFX2
: Guitar
IFX2
020: OD/
Hi.Gain Wah
Ctrl Bus
(FX Control Bus)
:1
Bus Select
: L/R
238
Bus Select
: L/R
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
(FX Control Bus1)
Drum pattern/
Drum Track
Drum
Track
FX Control Bus
:1
(FX Control Bus1)
Bus Select
: L/R
Overview Effect I/O
Effect I/O
Toachievethebesttonalquality,signalssenttotheeffects
shouldbeatthemaximumlevelbelowclipping.Also,use
theWet/DryparameterfortheInsertEffects,TotalEffectand
theWet/DryorReturn1,2parameterfortheMasterEffects
toadjusttheeffectoutputlevel.
Iftheinputlevelistoolow,theSNratiomaydecrease.
Ontheotherhand,iftheinputlevelistoohigh,
clippingmayoccur.
Thefollowingtableshowstheparametersrelatedtothe
levelsettings:
Program mode
OSC1/2Volume,DrumTrackVolume(P0)
OSC1/2MS1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8Level(P2)
Filter1/2Trim(P3)
Filter1/2Output(P3)
Input
Driver1/2Drive(P4)
Amp1/2AmpLevel(P4)
EQInputTrim(P4)
Send1/2(P8)
EffectTrimparameter*1(P8,P9)
EffectWet/Dryparameter(P8,P9)
Output
Return1,2(P9)
MasterVolume(P9)
Combination mode/Sequencer mode

Volume(P0)
Input
Timbre/TrackEQInputTrim(P2)
Send1/2(P8)
EffectTrimparameter*1(P8,P9)
EffectWet/Dryparameter(P8,P9)
Output
Return1,2(P9)
MasterVolume(P9)
*1
Someeffectsmaynothavetheseparameters.
239
Effect Guide
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5)

bypassed,andthestereoinputsignalwillbeoutputin
stereowithoutbeingprocessed.
In/Out
InsertEffects(IFX15)haveastereoinputandastereo
output.IfyousettheWet/DryparametertoDry(noeffect),
theinputsignalwillbepassedthrough,instereo,without
beingprocessedbytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effect
applied),theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthe
followingways:
Wet
TheKROMEcanalsoturnIFX1IFX5offseparately
fromthesettingoftheOn/OffbuttonbyreceivingMIDI
controlchangemessageCC#92.Value0willturnthem
off,andvalue1127willturnthemon.
YoucanalsouseEffectGlobalSW(Global01b)to
turnIFX15onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolisperformed
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Double-size effects
Mono In - Stereo Out
Effect
Doublesizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter193:Early
Reflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
Effect
Effect
Stereo In - Stereo Out
MonoMono Parallel Effects

127: P4EQ // P4EQ 171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl
Mono In/Out Effect

Mono In/Out Effect
YoucanusedoublesizeeffectsforinserteffectsIFX1IFX4
andmastereffectMFX1.However,theeffectofthenumber
thatfollowsitwillbeunavailable.Forexampleifyouve
selectedadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,youwontbeableto
useIFX2.IfyouveselectedadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,
youwontbeabletouseMFX2.
An example of when a double-size effect is selected for IFX1 and
IFX4
Pan
Pan
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,buttheyhave
aspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannelofthe
stereoinputeachhavetheirownindependentmonoeffect.
Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedtothedesired
positioninthestereofield.
Track1:Piano,Pan=L001,Bus(IFX/Output)Select=IFX1
Track2:E.Piano,Pan=R127,Bus(IFX/Output)Select=IFX1
Sothatyoudontmixthesoundofthetwotracksthatare
beinginput,settheP0:Play/RECPanparametertoL001and
R127respectively.
Example: IFX1: 134: P4EQ // Phaser

Track1:PianoissenttotheLchannelP4EQ,andTrack2:
E.PianoissenttotheRchannelPhaser.UsetheP8:Routing/
IFXIFX1pagePanparametertosettheoutputpositionof
eachsound.Inthisexample,botharesettoC064.Seethe
diagrambelow.
IFX1: 134: P4EQ // Phaser
Routing
Youcanuseuptofivechannels(IFX15)fortheInsert
Effectsinanymode.
Program mode
UseBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)tosetthe
destinationbusoftheoscillatoroutput.
L/R:SendtheoutputtotheL/Rbus.Instead,itissentto
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRaftertheTFX.
IFX15:ThesignalissenttoInsertEffectsIFX15.
Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttoconnectthe
oscillatoroutputtoamastereffectinseries.UseSend1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(Prog81d)to
specifythesendlevelfortheMasterEffects.Thissettingis
effectiveifBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)issettoL/R
orOff.
Input/outputvariationsforeacheffectareshowninupper
leftoftheblockdiagramsstartingonpage 320.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,stereoinputsignalsareoutput
instereowithoutbeingprocessed.
PressingtheOn/OffbuttonofIFX1IFX5intheP8:Routing/
IFXInsertFXSetuppagesineachmodewilltoggle
betweenOnandOff.WhenOffisselected,theeffectwillbe
240
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2(Prog82a)tospecifythesendlevelofthepostIFX
signal.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2,
multipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedvia
MIDI.
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) Routing
Intheexampleshowninthenextdiagram,Oscillators1and
2outputsbeingsenttoIFX1.
soundtoIFX2toapplyEQ,andothersoundstoAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandRwithoutapplyinganyInsert
Effects.
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyoudeselectthebox,alldruminstrumentoutputsare
senttothebusspecifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog
81b).YoumayapplyanyInsertEffectstoalldrum
instruments,regardlessoftheDrumkitsettings.
Combination and Sequencer modes

IfyouareconnectingtheInsertEffectsinseries,checkthe
Chainbox(Prog82a).UseChainto(Prog82a)tospecify
thedestinationtowhichthesignalwillbechained.
IfyouchecktheIFX1checkbox,theoutputofIFX1willbe
senttotheinputoftheIFXyouspecifyinChainto.Effects
canbechainedonlyinascendingorderoftheirnumber;for
exampleIFX1canbechainedtoIFX2throughIFX5,and
IFX2canbechainedtoIFX3throughIFX5.Youcancreatea
chainofuptofiveinserteffectsinseries,IFX1throughIFX5.
WhentheInsertEffectsareconnectedinseries,thevaluesof
thePan:CC#8,Bus,Send1,andSend2parametersforthe
postIFXsignalwillbeused.
Intheexampleshowninthenextdiagram,theChaincheck
boxischecked,andeachChaintoparameterissettothe
subsequenteffect,creatingaseriesconnectionofIFX1
IFX2IFX3IFX4IFX5.ThepostIFX5settingsforPan:
CC#8,Bus,Send1,andSend2willbeused.
UseBus(IFX/Output)Select(Combi/Seq81(2)d)for
timbres(Combination)andtracks(Sequencer)toselectan
InsertEffecttoapplytothecorrespondingtimbresand
tracks.Youcanroutemultipletimbresandtrackstoasingle
InsertEffect.
Tip:Youcanuseeachtimbre/tracksBus(IFX/Output)
Select,postIFXChaintoandChainparameters(Combi/
Seq83b)tocreateavarietyofroutings.
Example: Inserting one IFX into two or more timbres
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and inserting

another IFX later
Example: Sharing part of a timbres IFX chain with another timbre
AswithProgrammode,selectL/R,IFX15,orOffforeach
timbreandtrack.
Settings for drum programs

IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSettingbox(Prog81c)
becomesavailable.Formoreinformation,pleaseseenext
diagram.
Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)becomeavailableif
Bus(IFX/Output)SelecthasbeensettoL/RorOff.Ifyouve
setBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2(Combi/Seq83b)followingtheinserteffecttoadjust
thesendlevels.
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2ofthe
Programs(selectedforthetimbresandtracks),
multipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedvia
MIDI.
ThefollowingdiagramshowsanexampleofCombination
mode.TheTimbre1outputissenttoIFX1andtheTimbre2
outputissenttoIFX2accordingtotheBus(IFX/Output)
Selectsetting.OthertimbresaresenttoL/R.Theoutput
signalpassesthroughtheTFX,thengoestoAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Ifyoucheckthisbox,Bus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControl
Bus,Send1,andSend2(Global55b)foreachkeyofthe
selectedDrumkitbecomeseffective.Forexample,youcan
sendasnaresoundtoIFX1toapplytheGateeffect,akick
241
Effect Guide
Ifyouwanttoreverttotheoriginalsettingsofthedrumkit,
executeDrumKitIFXPatchwiththesettingsIFX1IFX1,
IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Inthefollowingdiagram,DrumProgramisassignedto
Timbre1,andnormalProgramsareassignedtoTimbres2
and3.Bus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKitforTimbre1,
IFX1forTimbre2,andIFX2forTimbre3.WithTimbre1,the
Bus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)forDrumkitsetting
becomeseffective.
Inthenextdiagram,IFX1sChaincheckboxischeckedand
ChaintosettoIFX2,sendingtheoutputofIFX1toIFX2.
Timbre1isbeingprocessedbyIFX1:StereoCompressorand
IFX2:038:StereoFlangereffects.Timbre2isbeingprocessed
bytheIFX2:038:StereoFlangereffect.TheRoutingMap
areaofthenextdiagramshowsthesesettings.(Withthese
settings,IFX35arenotbeingused.)
DrumKit IFX Patch dialog
Drum Programs in Combination and Sequencer

modes
Ifyouveselectedadrumprogram(OscillatorMode=
DrumsorDoubleDrums)foratimbre(inCombination
mode)ortrack(inSequencermode),theDKitsettingwillbe
availableasachoiceforBus(IFX/Output)Select(seethe
followingdiagram).
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKit,ofeachkeyinthe
drumkit,lettingyouspecifythebustowhicheachdrum
instrumentwillbesent.Forexampleyoucansendsnare
soundstoIFX1,kicksoundstoIFX2,andotherdrumsounds
toL/MONOandR.
Ifthischeckboxisunchecked,alldruminstrumentswillbe
outputaccordingtotheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingof
eachtimbre/track(Combi/Seq81(2)d).Thisletsyouapply
aninserteffecttoallofthedruminstrumentsinthatdrum
kit.
Drum Kit IFX Patch

IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKit,youllbeableto
selectthemenucommandDrumKitIFXPatch.
ThisoptionallowsyoutochangetheroutingoftheInsert
EffectstemporarilybychangingBus(IFX/Output)Selectfor
eachkey.
Forexample,assumethattheDrumkitkeyassignmentisset
sothatasnaresoundisroutedtoIFX1andakicksoundis
routedtoIFX2etc.,IFX13.Inthiscase,ifyouwishtoassign
IFX1and2totheProgramsusedbyothertimbresand
tracks,youcanviewtheroutingsothattheseDrumkit
soundsareroutedtoIFX3andIFX5respectively.
PatchingispossibleonlyiftheBus(IFX/Output)Select
(Global55b)settingofeachkeyinthedrumkitisassigned
toaninserteffect.Thestateofthesesettingsisalsoshownin
theRoutingMap.MakethedesiredsettingsforDrumKit
IFXPatch,andpresstheOKbuttontoexecute.
242
UsetheDrumKitIFXPatchmenucommandifyouwantthe
drumprogramtouseeffectsotherthantimbres2and3.
ChooseDrumKitIFXPatchfromthepagemenu,and
temporarilysendthedrumkitIFX1toIFX3,IFX2toIFX4,
andIFX3toIFX5.Executingwiththesesettingswill
temporarilychangetheeffectstowhichthedrumkitis
beingsent(seethefollowingdiagram).
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) Mixer
FX Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
Mixer
ThisspecifiestheFXControlbusthatfollowstheinsert
effect.TheFXControlbuses(FXControl1,2)aremonotwo
channelbuses.
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,theP8
InsertFXSetuppageletsyousetthePan:CC#8(postIFX
panning),BusSel.(BusSelect),CtrlBus(FXcontrolbus),
andtheSend1andSend2levelstothemastereffects.
TheKROMEprovidestwo(monotwochannel)effect
controlbuses,givingyouawiderangeofwaystocontrol
effects.
IfyouhavecheckedtheChaintoconnecttheInsertEffects
inseries,theseparametersPan:CC#8Send2forthepost
IFX(lastInsertEffectinthechain)signalbecomeeffective.
FXControlbusescanbeusedwithvocoder,limiter,and
gatetypeeffects.
FordetailsontheeffectsthatbeusedwithFXControlbuses,
seeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
Asanexample,hereshowyoucanusetheFXControlbus
followinganinserteffect.
Example: Gated Reverb

Whenusingagateeffectwithareverberantsound,usingthe
reverberantsoundtocontrolthegatemaynotproducethe
desiredresultsbecausethereverbextendsthedurationof
thesound.Normally,youwillusetheunreverberated
soundtocontrolthegate,asshowninthediagrambelow.
Inthisexample,wesendthesoundfromtheOSCetc.to
IFX1andprocessitthroughanequalizer.IFX1issentvia
ChaintoIFX2andalsosentviaCtrlBus(FXControlBus)to
1.TheEnvelopeSourceofIFX3:StereoGateissettoFX
Control1.Thisallowsthegattobetriggeredbyasignal
otherthanitsinput(thereverberantsound).
Pan: CC#8
ThisparameterenablesyoutosetthepanofthepostIFX
signal.
Gated Reverb Example
Ifyouareusingthestereoin/stereooutInsertEffects,set
thisparametertoC064toenablethePansettingsforthe
oscillators(Prog41c,45),timbres(Combi03(4)b),tracks
(Seq03(4)b).
OSC1&2
Timbre/Track
Bus Select IFX1

: IFX1
008: St.Graphic
7EQ
Chain to
: IFX2
FX Control Bus
:1
Ifyouareusingmonoin/stereooutormonoin/monoout
InsertEffects,thePansettingsfortheoscillators,timbres,
andtracksareignored,andtheyaresettoCenter.Usethe
Pan:CC#8parameter(Prog82a,Combi/Seq83b)tosetthe
pan.L000ishardleft,andR127ishardright.
IFX2
084: Reverb Hall
Chain to
: IFX3
IFX3
006: Stereo Gate
Envelope Source
: FX Ctrl1
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
Send1, Send2
Theseparametersenableyoutosetthesendlevelofthe
signalsroutedtoMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thesignal
issentinstereotomastereffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thisis
validwhenBus(BusSelect)isL/RorOff.
Formoreabouteffecttypessuchasstereoin/stereoout,
seeIn/Outonpage 240.
YoucancontroltheseparametersviaCC#8.
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffects,useSend1andSend2
oftheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpageinProgram,
Combination,Sequencer,andSongplaymodestosetthe
MasterEffectsendlevel.
Bus Sel. (Bus Select)

Thisparameterenablesyoutospecifythedestinationbus
forthepostIFXsignals.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
CC#91.
L/RisacommonsettingtosendsignalstotheTotalEffect
(TFX)beforetheyareroutedtotheAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandRoutputs.
IfsettoOff,thesignalwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus.
ChoosethissettingifyouwanttousetheSend1orSend2
levelstoroutethesignalthroughamastereffectinseries
(i.e.,notasasendeffect).
Insert Effect = Mono In - Stereo Out

Mono In - Mono Out
Insert Effect = Stereo In Stereo Out
OSC1
OSC1
OSC2
OSC1: Amp1 Pan = L001
Left
Left
Center
Center
Right
Right
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R127
OSC2

Left
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
C064
C064
L032
L032
L032
L001
L001
L001
R096
R096
R096
R127
R127
R127
Left
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
243
Effect Guide
Controlling the Insert Effects

via MIDI
UsingtheDynamicModulation(Dmod)functionenables
youtocontrolalleffectparametersinrealtimeduring
performancefromthecontrollersoftheKROMEora
connectedMIDIsequencer.YoucanalsocontrolthePan:
CC#8,Send1,andSend2parametersinthesameway.
Program mode
YoucancontroltheparametersontheglobalMIDIchannel
(Global11a).
Combination mode
TheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pageletsyouspecifythe
controlchannelCh(ControlChannel)forIFX15.Youcan
choosefromCH0116,Gch,orAllR(AllRouted).
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbe
displayedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthe
timbrethatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftherouted
timbreshavedifferentMIDIchannelsettings,thisparameter
isusedtospecifythechannelthatwillcontroltheinsert
effect.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Thisisacommon
setting.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.
IfyouveselectedadrumprogramforaCombination
modetimbreoraSequencermodetrack,andsetitsBus
(IFX/Output)SelecttoDKit(81(2)d),theMIDI
channelofthattimbre/trackwillbevalidifanyoneof
IFX15issettoAllR,regardlessofthedrumkitsBus
(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)settingorthemenu
commandDrumKitIFXPatchsetting.
Sequencer mode
UseChparametersoftheP8:Routing/IFXIFX1IFX5
pagestosetupthecontrolchannelsforIFX15.Selectan
appropriateoptionfromCh0116andAllRouted.
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbe
displayedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthe
trackthatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftwoormoretracks
withdifferingMIDIchannelsCh0116arebeingsenttoa
singleinserteffect,thisparameterisusedtospecifytheone
trackthatwillcontroltheinserteffect.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.AllRisatypical
option.Ifyouwishtocontroltheparametersonasingle
channel,youmayselectitfromCh0116.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
244
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) In/Out
Master Effects (MFX1, 2)

SeparatelyfromthesettingofthisOn/Offbutton,MFX1
andMFX2canbeswitchedoffbyreceivingaMIDI
controlchangeCC#94.Value0willturnthemoff,and
value1127willturnthemon.Youcanalsousethe
frontpanelMFXbuttonorEffectGlobalSW(Global0
1b)toturnMFX1and2onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolis
performedontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
In/Out
Double-size effects
Reflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
YoucanuseadoublesizeeffectformastereffectMFX1.If
youveselectedadoublesizeeffect,MFX2wontbe
availableforuse.
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereoin/
stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesendleveltothe
MasterEffects.(ForSend1and2,seeRoutingand
Mixer.)
MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed)signal
specifiedinWet/Dry(P9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1,2page).
OnlytheWet(processed)signalwillbeoutput.Theoutput
signalsfromtheMasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbus
withtheoutputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.
Theseoutputsignalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfrom
thebusspecifiedbyBus(P8:Routing/IFXRoutingpagein
eachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignalsfromthebus
specifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(InsertFXSetup
pageineachmode)L/R,thenroutedtotheMasterEQ.
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowingways,
accordingtothetypeofeffects001193.
Wet
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Routing
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffectsinanymode,the
MasterEffectssendlevelsaredeterminedbytheSend1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parametersspecified
independentlyfortheoscillators(Programmode),timbres
(Combinationmode),tracks(Sequencermode).
Forexample,sinceyoucanadjustthemastereffectsend
levelsforeachtimbre/track,youcanmakesettingssothat
reverbisapplieddeeplytothepiano,lightlytothestrings,
andnotatalltothebass.
Ifyoureusinginserteffects,usethepostIFXSend1and
Send2toadjustthesendamounts.
Program mode
UsetheSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parameters
oftheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage,ortheSend1and
Send2parametersoftheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup
pageforthepostIFX15signals,tosettheMasterEffect
sendlevel.
IfyouhavesetBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoL/RorOff,Send1
(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)oftheRoutingpageare
effective.Theseparameterscanbesetforoscillators1and2
individually.
MonoMono Parallel
127: P4EQ//P4EQ171: BPM Dl//BPM Dl
Mono In/Out Effect

Mono In/Out Effect
Pan
Pan
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,buttheyhave
aspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannelofthe
stereoinputeachhavetheirownindependentmonoeffect.
Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedtothedesired
positioninthestereofield.Normally,youwillusetheseas
inserteffects,butyoucanalsousethemasmastereffects.
Fordetails,seeMonoMonoParallelEffectsonpage 240.
PressingtheOn/OffbuttonforMFX1and2oftheP9:MFX/
TFX/LFORoutingpageineachmodewilltogglebetween
OnandOff.WhenOffisselected,theoutputsignalswillbe
muted.
IfyouhavesetBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX15,Send1
andSend2oftheInsertFXpageforthepostP8:Routing/
IFXIFX15signalsareeffective.IfyouareusingtheInsert
Effectsinchain(series),theSend1andSend2parameters
forthepostIFX(lastIFX)areeffective.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondstoCC#91
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Atthistime,
theactualsendlevelusesthevalueoftheSend1and2
settingsforOscillators1and2,multipliedbytheSend1
and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSettingbox(Prog81b)
245
Effect Guide
becomesavailable.Ifyoucheckthisbox,Send1andSend2
levelsforeachkeyoftheselectedDrumkitbecomeeffective.
IfBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)issettoL/RorOff
foradruminstrumentkey,Send1(toMFX1)and
Send2(toMFX2)(Global55b)becomeeffective.
(Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2
valuesmultipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforProgram
oscillators1and2.)
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thepostIFX15
Send1andSend2(Prog85a)becomeeffective.
Ifthisisunchecked,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)
(Prog81d),andthepostIFX15Send1andSend2(Prog8
2a)willbevalidforalldruminstruments,inthesameway
aswhenOscillatorModeisSingleorDouble.

UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(P8:Routing
page)fortimbres(Combination)andtracks(Sequencer)to
settheSend1and2levelsforeachtimbreandtrack.Aswith
Programmode,ifBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/Ror
Off,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)become
effective.
TheactuallevelsusetheseSend1and2levelvalues,
multipliedbythesendlevelvaluesofoscillators1and2of
theProgP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage.
Send level
ForexampleifyousettheprogramsOSC1Send1(toMFX1)
to127,Send2(toMFX2)to064,OSC2Send1(toMFX1)to
064,Send2(toMFX2)to127,andthecombinationsSend1
(toMFX1)to064andSend2(toMFX2)to127,theactual
sendlevelsofthecombinationwillbeasfollows.
OSC1Send1=127(100%)*064(50%)=064(50%)
OSC1Send2=064(50%)*127(100%)=064(50%)
OSC2Send1=064(50%)*064(50%)=032(25%)
OSC2Send2=127(100%)*127(100%)=127(100%)
BusSelectDKitisvalidifyouveselectedadrumtrackfor
aTimbre(Combination)orTrack(Sequencer).
IfyouselectDKit,theBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global5
5b)settingsforeachkeybecomeeffective,andeachdrum
instrumentsoundwillberoutedtothecorrespondingbuses.
Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2
values,multipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforeach
Drumkitkey.
IfadrumkitsBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff,
thelevelswillbetheseSend1and2settingsmultipliedby
thesendlevelsyouspecifyinProgP8:Routing/IFX
RoutingpageforOSC1Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)(Prog81d),justasinothercases(OscillatorMode
SingleorDouble).
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2forthepostIFXsignal.
InMediamode,effectswillusethesettingsofthemode
inwhichyoupreviouslywere.
IfIFX15isselectedforBus(IFX/Output)Select,usethe
Send1andSend2parametersforthepostIFXsignals.
CC#91.IfSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(MFX2)foreach
timbre/trackareeffective,theparameterwillbe
controlledontheMIDIchannelssetforthe
correspondingtimbresandtracks.IftheSend1and
Send2parametersforthepostIFX15signalsare
effective,theycanbecontrolledontheMIDIchannels
assignedtoIFX15.
AnexampleforCombinationmodeisgivenbelow.Inthe
followingdiagram,Bus(IFX/Output)Selectissetsothat
Timbre1isroutedtoIFX1,Timbre2toIFX2,Timbres3and
4toIFX3,Timbres516toL/R.
Mixer
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaredeterminedbythe
sendlevels.IntheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpageofeach
mode,youcanspecifytheoutputlevelandchaining(series
connection)betweenthetwomastereffects.
3
4
1
1. Return1, Return2
Theseadjusttheamountofsignalthatisreturnedfromthe
mastereffectsMFX1andMFX2outputstotheL/Rbus.
Inthiscase,useSend1andSend2forthepostIFX1(001:
StereoCompressor)signaltosetthesendleveloftheTimbre
1routedtotheMasterEffect.(Inthisexampletheyaresetto
032and127.)Inthesameway,useSend1andSend2forthe
postIFX2signaltosetthesendlevelsofTimbres2,anduse
theSend1andSend2parametersforthepostIFX3signalto
setthesendlevelsofTimbres3and4.ForTimbres58,the
settingsofSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)willbe
effective(forTimbres916,usetheRouting1T0916page).
246
TheleftsidevalueoftheWet/DryparameterfortheMFX1
or2effectistheoutputlevelofthatmastereffect.(Inother
wordsifWet/Dryis25:75,theoutputlevelis75%.Itis100%
ifWet,and0%ifDry.)TheWet/Dryvaluemultipliedbythe
Return1orReturn2valueissenttotheL/Rbusandmixed
withtheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpageBus(IFX/Output)
SelectL/RorInsertFXSetuppageBusL/Routput.
Forexample,withMFX1Wet/Drysetto50:50(50%)and
Return1setto64(50%),theresultanteffectlevelwillbe25%.
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) Controlling the Master Effects via MIDI
Theeffectlevelismaximum(100%)whenWet/Dryissetto
WetandReturn1issetto127.
2. Chain check box

PressthisboxtochainMFX1andMFX2toeachother.
Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,theoutputof
MFX1:029:StereoChorusisaddedtotheinputofMFX2:084:
ReverbHall.
3. Chain Direction
IfyouhavecheckedtheChainbox,youcansetthedirection
oftheconnectionhere.Youcanalsovisuallyconfirmthe
directiononthedisplay.
4. Chain Level
Thisparameterdeterminesthelevelofsignalsroutedfrom
oneMFXtotheotherMFXinachainconnection.
Controlling the Master Effects

via MIDI
Inthesamewayasforinserteffects,parametersofthe
mastereffectscanalsobecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamic
Modulation(Dmod)fromtheKROMEscontrollersoran
externalMIDIdeviceduringperformanceorfromthe
sequencer.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel(Global11a).

InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrolchannel
forMFX1andMFX2arespecifiedbytheCh(Control
Channel)settingintheMFX1and2pages.Youcanchoose
Ch0116orGch.
Ch0116:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontrolthe
parametersforeachMasterEffectondifferentchannels.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Thisisthe
normalsetting.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
247
Effect Guide
Total Effect (TFX)

SelectissettoL/R,thesignalwillbeoutputfromthe
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.
In/Out
ThetotaleffectTFXisstereoinandstereoout.TheDry
(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dryparametersendsthe
stereoinputsounddirectlytothestereooutput.Thewayin
whichtheWet(processed)sideisoutputdependsonthe
typeofeffect,asfollows.
Wet
ThesoundfromMFX1and2isroutedthroughTFX,and
thenoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Mixer
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
MASTER (Master Volume)
Effect
Thissetsthelevelofthefinaloutputafterpassingthrough
thetotaleffect.
Effect
Effect
MonoMono Parallel
127: P4EQ // P4EQ 171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMonoMonoParallel
Effectsonpage 240.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,thestereoinputwillbepassedto
thestereooutputwithoutanyprocessing.
Youcanswitchtheeffectson/offusingtheMFX1or2ON/
OFFbuttonsortheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingsettingsin
eachmode.Whenoff,theeffectwillbebypassed.Thestereo
inputwillbepassedtothestereooutputwithoutany
processing,justasif000:NoEffectisselected.
SeparatelyfromthisOn/Offbutton,MIDIcontrol
changeCC#95canbereceivedtoturnTFXoff.Acontrol
changevalueof0turnsthemoff,andavalueof1127
restoresthemtothepriorsetting.Youcanalsousethe
frontpanelTFXbuttonorEffectGlobalSW(Global0
1b)toturnoffTFXinthesameway.Thisiscontrolled
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Double-size effects
Reflections)cantbeusedforthetotaleffect.
Routing
Using MIDI to control the Total

Effect
InthesamewayasforInsertandMasterEffects,theTotal
EffectcanbecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamicModulation
(Dmod).YoucanuseeitherthebuiltinKROMEscontrollers
oranexternalMIDIdevice,duringliveperformanceorfrom
asequencer.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel(Global11a).

InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrolchannel
forTFXisspecifiedbytheCh(ControlChannel)settingin
theTFXpage.YoucanchooseCh0116orGch.
Ch0116:Choosefromthesesettingsifyouwanttocontrol
eachtotaleffectonaseparatechannel.
Gch:Choosethissettingifyouwanttocontrolthetotal
effectontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Note:InSequencermode,youcanrecordandplayback
exclusivemessages,andedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents.Thisletsyouswitcheffectsorvarythe
valueofeffectparameterswhileasongplays.
Outputs
ThetotaleffectTFXiaplacedimmediatelybeforethe
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRoutputs.Effect(TFX)is
availableinallmodes.
Main Outputs
ThemainL/MONOandRoutputsoftheKROMEareoutput
fromtheAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONO,Rjacks,andthe
headphonejack.
IftheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingforanoscillator
(Programmode),timbre(Combinationmode),track
(Sequencermode),orthepostinsertBus(IFX/Output)
248
Drum Track
Oscillator 2
Oscillator 1
Pan
Select from:
IFX3
L/R
IFX4
IFX1
IFX5
IFX2
Off
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= IFX1
Bus Select
mono x 2
stereo
Effect / Mixer Block Diagram in Program Mode
IFX1 Bus
IFX5 Bus
IFX4 Bus
IFX3 Bus
IFX2 Bus
FX Control Bus
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
Chain &
Chain to
IFX5
IFX4
IFX3
IFX2
IFX1
Insert Effects
P8: Routing/IFX
Post IFX
Pan: CC#8
Select from:
L/R Off
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= Off
Post IFX
Bus Select
stereo
stereo
Chain
Post IFX
Send1 / 2
Send1 Send2
MFX2
MFX1
Master Effects
stereo
stereo
Return1 / 2
stereo
L/R Bus
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO
TFX
Total Effect
Master Level
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/Mono, R
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams Main Outputs
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams
Program mode
249
250
Bus Select
Bus Select
=L/R
Select from:
IFX3
L/R
IFX4
IFX1
IFX5
IFX2
Off
Timbre/Track 16
Bus Select
= IFX1
Bus Select
= IFX4
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= Off
Pan
Timbre/Track 4
Timbre/Track 3
Timbre/Track 2
Timbre/Track 1
mono x 2
stereo
IFX5 Bus
IFX4 Bus
IFX3 Bus
IFX2 Bus
IFX1 Bus
Effect / Mixer Block Diagram in Comination/Sequencer Mode
FX Control Bus
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
Chain &
Chain to
IFX5
IFX4
IFX3
IFX2
IFX1
Insert Effects
P8: Routing/IFX
Post IFX
Pan(CC#8)
Select from:
L/R Off
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= Off
Post IFX
Bus Select
stereo
stereo
Chain
Post IFX
Send1 / 2
Send1 Send2
MFX2
MFX1
Master Effects
stereo
stereo
Return1 / 2
stereo
L/R Bus
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO
TFX
Total Effect
Master Level
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/Mono, R
Effect Guide
Combination mode, Sequencer mode
Dynamics (Dynamic) 000: No Effect
Dynamics (Dynamic)
Compressor - Sensitivity
000: No Effect
Level
Wet
Sensitivity=100
Louder
Selectthisoptionwhenyoudonotuseanyeffects.The
InsertEffect/TotalEffectsectionoutputsunprocessed
signalsandtheMasterEffectsectionmutestheoutput.
Sensitivity=40
Dry
Time
001: Stereo Compressor
c: Attack
Thisparametercontrolstheattacklevel.
Thiseffectcompressestheinputsignaltoregulatethelevel
andgiveapunchyeffect.Itisusefulforguitar,piano,and
drumsounds.Thisisastereocompressor.Youcanlinkleft
andrightchannels,oruseeachchannelseparately.
Compressor - Attack
Level
Attack=80
Attack=20
Wet
Dry
Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Time
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Envelope - Control
Compressor
EQ Trim
LEQ
Output Level
002: Red Comp
HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
L/R Mix,
L/R Individually
Determines whether the left and

right channels are linked or used
separately
Envelope
Select
Sensitivity
1...100
Sets the sensitivity
Attack
1...100
Sets the attack level
EQ Trim
0...100
Sets the EQ input level
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff frequency (low

or mid-low) of the low-range
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff frequency

(high or mid-high) of the highrange equalizer
Pre LEQ Gain 15.0...+15.0

[dB]
Sets the gain of the Low EQ
Pre HEQ Gain

15.0...+15.0
[dB]
Sets the gain of the High EQ
Output Level 0...100
Sets the output level of the

compressor
Whenplayingchordsonanelectricpianoorsimilar
instrument,itshelpfultouseacompressortokeepeach
notesmoothandwellbalanced.Inadditiontoadistinctive
percussiveaccent,itwillalsoprovidealongsustain.This
effectmodelsapopularcompressorwithacleansound
thatsperfectforpopandfunkmusic.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Compressor
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
Attack
1...100
p.251
Level
0...100

compressor
p.251
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source

for the compressor output level
Amt
100...+100
Sets the modulation amount for

the compressor output level
Src
Off...Tempo
Sets the balance between the

effect and the dry input

for Level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Amt
100...+100

Level
Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation source for

Wet/Dry
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

100...+100

Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo

for Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Src
Amt
a: Envelope Select
Thisparameterselectswhethertheleftandrightchannels
arelinkedtocontrolbothsignalssimultaneously,orwhether
eachchanneliscontrolledindependently.
b: Sensitivity
g: Output Level (Level)
TheSensitivityparametersetsthesensitivityofthe
compressor.Ifthisparameterissettoahighervalue,lower
levelsoundswillbeboosted.WithahigherSensitivity,the
overallvolumelevelishigher.Toadjustthefinalvolume
level,usetheOutputLevelparameter.
251
WithL/Rindividually,theleftandrightchannelscontrolthe
Limiterindividually.
003: Stereo Limiter

TheLimiterregulatestheinputsignallevel.Itissimilarto
theCompressor,exceptthattheLimitercompressesonly
signalsthatexceedthespecifiedleveltolowerunnecessary
peaksignals.TheLimiterappliesapeakingtypeEQtothe
triggersignal(whichcontrolsthedegreeoftheLimiter
effect),allowingyoutosetanybandwidthtobecovered.
Thiseffectisastereolimiter.Youcanlinkleftandright
channels,oruseeachchannelindividually.
c: Ratio
d: Threshold [dB]
f: Gain Adjust [dB]
ThisparametersetsthesignalcompressionRatio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio

Left
Wet / Dry
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Gain Adjust
Output Level
Limiter
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Trigger Monitor
Threshold
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Envelope Source
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Limiter
Louder
Gain Adjust
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Louder
Input Level
Envelope
Source
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the trigger source to use:

the input signal, FX Control Bus
1, or FX Control Bus 2
p.252
FX Ctrl Trim
0...100
Sets the trigger input level from

FX Control Bus 1/2
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only, R
Only, L/R
Individually
Selects from linking both

channels, controlling only from
left channel, only from the right
channel, or controlling each
channel individually
p.252
Ratio
1.0 : 1
50.0 : 1,
Inf : 1
Sets the signal compression ratio

p.252
e: Attack
e: Release
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Sets the level above which the

compressor is applied
p.252
Attack
1...100
Sets the attack time
p.252
Release
1...100
Sets the release time
p.252
Theseparameterssettheattacktimeandreleasetime.A
higherattacktimewillcausethecompressiontobeapplied
moreslowly.
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the output gain
p.252
Src
Off...Tempo

for the output gain
Amt
63...+63
Sets the modulation amount of

the output gain
Side PEQ
Insert
Off, On
Toggles between on/off of the

trigger signals EQ
p.252
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Switches between effect output

monitor and trigger signal
monitor
p.252
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
Sets the EQ center frequency for

the trigger signal
p.252
0.5...10.0
Sets the EQ bandwidth for the

trigger signal
p.252
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Sets the EQ gain for the trigger

signal
p.252
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Level
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Time
Limiter - Attack / Release

Threshold
Dry
Wet
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=1
Release=1
Wet
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=100
Release=100
Release
Attack
g: Trigger Monitor
a: Envelope Source
ByselectingFXControl1orFXControl2youcanusethe
signalofFXControlBus1or2asthetriggersignal.
Forinstance,youmightuseadifferent,unprocessedsound
asthetrigger,orapplyalimitertriggeredbyadifferent
timbre(Combination)ortrack(Sequence).Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
b: Envelope Select
WhenL/RMixisselectedforthisparameter,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinkedtocontroltheLimiterusingthe
mixedsignal.IfLOnly(orROnly)isselected,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinked,andtheLimiteriscontrolledvia
onlytheleft(orright)channel.
252
SettingthisparameterOnwillcausethetriggersignaltobe
output,insteadoftheeffectsound.Usethisparameterto
checkthetriggersignalwithEQapplied.Usually,setthisto
Off.
g: Side PEQ Insert

h: Side PEQ Cutoff [Hz]
h: Q
h: Gain [dB]
TheseparametersareusedtosettheEQappliedtothe
triggersignal.
TheLimiterdetermineswhetherthecompressionisapplied
ornot,basedonthepostEQtriggersignal.Settingthe
Dynamics (Dynamic) 004: Multiband Limiter
equalizerallowsyoutosettheLimitertorespondtoany
frequencyband.
004: Multiband Limiter
005: St.MasteringLimtr (Stereo

Mastering Limiter)
Thisisastereolimiterthatisoptimizedformasteringsongs.
ThiseffectappliestheLimitertothelowrange,midrange,
andhighrangeoftheinputsignal.Youcancontrol
dynamicsforeachrangetoadjustthesoundpressureofthe
lowrange,midrange,andhighrangeinadifferentway
fromtheEQ.

Left
Wet / Dry
Out Ceiling
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Out Ceiling

Right
Left
Mid
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Low Offset
Envelope - Control
High Mid Offset
Limiter
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Ratio
1.0 : 1...50.0 : 1, Sets the signal compression ratio

Inf : 1
p.252
Threshold
[dB]
40...0

p.252
Attack
1...100
p.252
Release
1...100
p.252
Low Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain of the low-range trigger

signal
p.253
Mid Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain of the mid-range trigger

signal
p.253
High Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain of the high-range trigger

signal
p.253
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Src
Off...Tempo

for the output gain
Amt
63...+63

the output gain
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
Threshold
[dB]
30.0...0.0

p.252
Out Ceiling
[dB]
30.0...0.0
Release
[msec]
0.50...1000.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
High Offset
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Band-Pass Filters
Low
100...+100
p.252
p.252
006: Stereo Gate

Thiseffectmutestheinputsignalwhenitfallsbelowa
specifiedlevel.Youcanalsoinverttheon/offstatusofthe
gate,orusenoteon/offmessagestoturnthegateon/off
directly.
Left
Gain Adjust
Envelope Source
Delay
Wet / Dry
Gate
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control

Wet/Dry
Envelope Select
Trigger Monitor
Envelope - Control
Delay
Gate
-mod
Gain Adjust
Right
Wet / Dry
e: Low Offset [dB]

f: Mid Offset [dB]
g: High Offset [dB]
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Theseparameterssetthegainofthetriggersignal.
Forexample,ifyoudonotwanttoapplycompressiontothe
highrange,reducetheHighOffsetvaluedownbelowthe
Thresholdlevel.Inthisway,thehighrangelimiterwillnot
respond,andcompressionwillnotbeapplied.
Envelope
Source
D-mod,
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the source to control the

gate: D-mod control, or use the
input signal or FX Control Bus 1
or 2 as a trigger
p.252
Fx Ctrl Trim
0...100
Sets the trigger input level from

FX Control Bus 1/2
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Selects the control signal: left

and right linked, left only, or right
only
p.252
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the source that will

control the gate when Envelope
Src = D-mod
Threshold
0...100
Sets the level at which gating is

applied
p.254
Polarity
+,
Switches the polarity of gating

p.254
d
e
Attack
1...100
p.254
Release
1...100
p.254
Delay Time
[msec]
0...100
Sets the delay time for the gate

input
p.254
Side PEQ
Insert
Off, On
Switches the trigger signal

equalizer on/off
p.252
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Switches between monitoring

the effect output and the trigger
signal
p.252
253
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
Sets the center frequency of the

equalizer for the trigger signal
p.252
0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of the

equalizer for the trigger signal
p.252
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Sets the gain of the equalizer for

the trigger signal
p.252
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
c: Threshold
d: Attack
d: Release
Thresholdspecifiesthelevelatwhichgatingoccurswhen
EnvelopeSelectissettoL/RMix,LOnly,orROnly.
AttackandReleasespecifytheattacktimeandreleasetime
ofthegate.
Gate - Threshold
Output Level
Louder
Threshold
Louder
Input Level
Gate - Attack / Release
Threshold
Dry
Wet
Attack=1
Release=1
Wet
Attack=100
Release=100
Attack
Release
c: Polarity
Thisinvertsthepolarityofthegateon/offoperation.With
thesetting,thegatewillclosewhentheinputsignal
exceedsthespecifiedlevel.Thedirectioninwhichthe
modulationsourceopensorclosesthegatewillalsobe
reversed.
e: Delay Time [msec]

Thissetsthedelaytimefortheinputtothegate.Whenusing
shorterAttackTimesettings,youcanlengthentheDelay
Timesothatthesoundisinputafterthegateopens.
254
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 007: St.Parametric4EQ (Stereo Parametric 4-Band EQ)
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter)

Parametric 4EQ - Band2 Gain Mod
007: St.Parametric4EQ (Stereo

Parametric 4-Band EQ)
+15dB
-mod
Band2 Cutoff
+6dB
+6dB
0dB
Thisisastereo4bandparametricequalizer.Youcanselect
peakingtypeorshelvingtypeforBand1and4.Thegainof
Band2canbecontrolledbydynamicmodulation.
0dB
Band2 Cutoff
9dB
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0

Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= +9.0
D -mod
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0

Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]=
15.0

Left
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4

PEQ
Trim
PEQ
PEQ
LEQ
PEQ
HEQ
PEQ
PEQ
PEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
0...100
Band1 Type
Peaking,
Selects the type of Band 1
Shelving-Low
p.255
Band4 Type
Peaking,
ShelvingHigh
Off...Tempo
Band2
Dynamic
Gain Src
Selects the modulation source of

the Band 2 gain
p.255
18.0...+18.0

Band 2 gain
p.255
Amt [dB]
d: Band2 Dynamic Gain Src

d: Amt [dB]
YoucancontrolthegainofBand2usingthemodulation
source.
D -mod
a
e, f, g, h: Q
Theseparameterssetthebandwidthofeachequalizer.The
higherthevalue,thenarrowerthebandbecomes.
HEQ
LEQ
Trim
Wet / Dry
PEQ
Sets the input level
Selects the type of Band 4

p.255
Band1 Cutoff
20...1.00k
[Hz]
Sets the center frequency of

Band 1
0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of Band 1

p.255
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
008: St. Graphic 7EQ (Stereo

Graphic 7-Band EQ)
Thisisastereo7bandgraphicequalizer.Thebargraphof
thegainsettingforeachbandgivesyouaclear,visualidea
offrequencyresponses.Youcanselectacenterfrequency
settingforeachbandfromtwelvetypes,accordingtothe
sound.
Sets the gain of Band 1
Left
Wet / Dry
Band2 Cutoff 50...10.00k

[Hz]

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
Trim
Q
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Trim

[Hz]

Band 3
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7

Right
Wet / Dry
Band4 Cutoff
500...20.00k
[Hz]

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7
Type
1:Wide 1,
2:Wide 2,
3:Wide 3,
4:Half Wide 1,
5:Half Wide 2,
6:Half Wide 3, Selects a combination of center
7:Low,
frequencies for each band p.255
8:Wide Low,
9:Mid,
10:Wide Mid,
11:High,
12:Wide High
Trim
0...100
Band1 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band2 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
b: Band1 Type
c: Band4 Type
Band3 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band4 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
SelectsafiltertypeforBand1and4.
Band5 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band6 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band7 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Parametric 4EQ - Band1, Band4 Type
+Gain
3dB
Band4 Type=Shelving High
Band4 Type=Peaking
0dB
Gain
Band1 Type=Shelving Low

Band1 Type=Peaking
3dB
Band1 Cutoff
Band4 Cutoff
a: Type
Thisparameterselectsacombinationofcenterfrequencies
foreachband.Thecenterfrequencyofeachbandisshown
intherightofthescreen.
255
Youcanconfigurea21BandGraphicEQrangingfrom80
Hzto18kHzifyouroutethreeGraphic7BandEQeffectsin
series,withasettingof7:Low,9:Mid,and11:Highforeach
EQ.
009: St.Exciter/Enhncr (Stereo

Exciter/Enhancer)
ThiseffectisacombinationoftheExciter,whichaddsa
punchtothesoundandtheEnhancer,whichaddsspread
andpresence.
Left
Wet / Dry
LEQ
c: Enhancer Delay L [msec]

d: Enhancer Delay R [msec]
TheseparameterssetthedelaytimefortheEnhancerleft
andrightchannel.Specifyingaslightlydifferentdelaytime
fortheleftandrightchannelwilladdastereoimage,depth,
andwidthtothesound.
010: Stereo Isolator

Thisisastereoeffectthatseparatestheinputsignalintolow,
mid,andhighfrequencybands,andcontrolsthevolumeof
eachbandindependently.Forexampleyoucanseparately
boostorcutthekick,snare,andhihatsoundsfromadrum
signalinrealtime.
HEQ
Exciter
EQ Trim
Delay
Left
Depth
Low
Delay
EQ Trim
Wet / Dry
Mid
Exciter
Trim
Enhancer
Right
High
Isolator
Wet / Dry
Low
D -mod
Mid
Trim
Sets the intensity (depth) of the

Exciter effect
p.256
Src
Off...Tempo

the Exciter intensity
Amt
100...+100

the Exciter intensity
Trim
Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
Sets the frequency to be emphasized

p.256
Low/Mid [Hz] 100...500
Sets the frequency at which the

low and mid bands are divided
Src
Off...Tempo

the frequency to be emphasized
Mid/High
[Hz]

mid and high bands are divided
Amt
70...+70
Sets the amount of modulation

of the frequency to be emphasized
Enhancer
Delay L
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the

Enhancer left channel
p.256
Enhancer
Delay R
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the

Enhancer right channel
p.256
Enhancer
Depth
0...100
Sets the determines to what

degree the Enhancer effect is
applied
Src
Off...Tempo

the Enhancer width
Amt
100...+100

the Enhancer width
EQ Trim
0...100
Sets the 2-band EQ input level
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
High,
Mid-High

g
Pre HEQ Fc

[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain

15.0...+15.0
[dB]
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Exciter Blend
Thisparametersetsthedepth(intensity)oftheExcitereffect.
Positivevaluesgiveafrequencypattern(tobeemphasized)
differentfromnegativevalues.
b: Emphasis Frequency
Thisparametersetsthefrequencytobeemphasized.Higher
valueswillemphasizelowerfrequencies.
256
High
Right
Exciter Blend 100...+100
Wet / Dry
D -mod
D -mod
D -mod
0...100
2000...6000
Low Gain [dB] Inf,

59...+12
Sets the low-frequency gain
Src
Off...Tempo

modulate low-frequency gain
Amt
72...+72
Sets the amount by which the

low-frequency gain will be
modulated
Mid Gain [dB] Inf,

59...+12
Sets the mid-frequency gain
Src
Off...Tempo

for mid-frequency gain
Amt
72...+72

mid-frequency gain will be
modulated
High Gain
[dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the high-frequency gain
Src
Off...Tempo

for high-frequency gain
Amt
72...+72

high-frequency gain will be
modulated
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 011: St. Wah/Auto Wah (Stereo Wah/Auto Wah)
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Thisstereowaheffectallowsyoutocreatesoundsfrom
vintagewahpedalsimulationtoautowahsimulation,and
muchbroaderrangesettings.
Frequency
Top=75
Wah
Bottom=60
Wah
Woo
Top=30
Woo
Bottom=25
Higher
Frequency
Higher
011: St. Wah/Auto Wah (Stereo

Wah/Auto Wah)
D -mod
Higher
Zero
D -mod
Higher
Zero
Max
Max
Sweep Mode=Auto
Frequency
Frequency
Left
Wet / Dry
Envelope Shape
Response
D -mod
Sweep Mode
Auto
D-mod
Woo
LFO
Wah
Wah
Higher
Bottom=75
Higher
Envelope Sens
Wah
Top=75
Wah
Woo
Bottom=25
Envelope
Top=25
Woo
LFO
Wah
Envelope
Right
Time
Envelope
Time
Wet / Dry
b: Sweep Mode
a
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of the wah

center frequency
p.257
Frequency
Top
0...100
Sets the upper limit of the wah

center frequency
p.257
Auto,
Sweep Mode D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control from autowah, modulation source, and

LFO
p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

for the wah when Sweep
Mode=D-mod
Response
0...100
Sets the response speed when

Sweep Mode = Auto or D-mod
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the sensitivity of auto-wah

p.257
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the sweep curve of autowah

p.257
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Sets the speed of the LFO p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On
When this is on, the LFO speed is

set by BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of Frequency
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the system tempo;

40300 sets the tempo manually
for this individual effect
p.257
Base Note
...
Selects the type of notes that

specify the LFO speed
p.257
Times
x1...x32
Sets the number of notes that

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Selects either (individual) LFO,

Common FX LFO1, or Common
LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase offset when Type

= Common 1 or Common 2
p.257
Resonance
0...100
Sets the resonance amount
Low Pass
Filter
Off, On
Switches the wah low pass filter

on and off
Sets the output level of the effect

sound
Src
Off...Tempo

that will control the effect output
level
Amt
100...+100

the effect output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Frequency Bottom
a: Frequency Top
Thesweepwidthanddirectionofthewahfilterare
determinedbytheFrequencyTopandFrequencyBottom
settings.
Thisparameterchangesthewahcontrolmode.Setting
SweepModetoAutowillselectanautowahthatsweeps
accordingtoenvelopechangesintheinputsignallevel.
Autowahisfrequentlyusedforfunkguitarpartsandclav
sounds.
WhenSweepModeissettoDmod,youcancontrolthe
filterdirectlyviathemodulationsourceinthesamewayasa
wahpedal.
WhenSweepModeissettoLFO,theeffectusesLFOto
sweepincycle.
c: Envelope Sens
Thisparametersetsthesensitivityofautowah.Increasethe
valueiftheinputsignalistoolowtosweep.Reducethe
valueiftheinputsignalissohighthatthefilterisstopped
temporarily.
c: Envelope Shape
Thisparameterdeterminesthesweepcurveforautowah.
Envelope Shape
Level
Envelope
value = 0...+100
value = 0...100
Time
d: LFO Frequency [Hz]

e: MIDI Sync
WhenMIDISync=Off,theLFOspeedusestheLFO
Frequencyparametersetting.WhenMIDISync=On,the
LFOspeedfollowstheBPM,BaseNote,andTimessettings.
e: BPM
e: Base Note
e: Times
OnecycleofLFOsweepisobtainedbymultiplyingthe
lengthofanote()(selectedforBaseNote,inrelationto
thetempospecifiedinBPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoif
BPMissettoMIDI)bythenumberspecifiedintheTimes
parameter.
f: LFO Type
f: Common LFO Offset [deg]
IfTypeissettoCommon1orCommon2,modulationwill
beappliedusingtheCommonFXLFOratherthantheLFO
withintheeffectitself.SincethisletsyouusethesameLFO
formultipleeffects,itsusefulwhenyouwanttoapply
varioustypesofmodulationinsynchronization.
257
CommonLFOOffsetspecifiesthephasedifferencerelative
totheCommonFXLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CommonFXLFOsonpage 237.
012: St. Vintage Wah (Stereo

Vintage/Custom Wah)
Thiseffectsimulatesthetonalcharacterofavintagewah
pedal.Youcancustomizethetoneandrangesettings.
Sets the output level of the effect

sound
Src
Off...Tempo

that will control the effect output
level
Amt
100...+100

the effect output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Shape
Left
Wet / Dry
Wah
Envelope Sens
Sweep Mode
Auto
Response
Shape / Invert
Mode
D-mod
D -mod
LFO
Preset Setting
LFO
Custom Parameters
Wah
Right
Preset,
Custom
Selects either preset or custom

settings
p.258
Shape
100...+100
Sets the curve of the sweep

p.258
Invert
Off, On
Inverts the polarity of the sweep
Frequency
Bottom
0...100

center frequency when Mode =
Custom
p.258
Frequency
Top
0...100

center frequency when Mode =
Custom
p.258
Resonance
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of resonance

amount when Mode=Custom
p.258
0...100
Sets the upper limit of resonance

amount when Mode=Custom
p.258
Mode
a
Wet / Dry
c
Resonance
Top
Auto,
Sweep Mode D-mod,
LFO

LFO
p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

Mode=D-mod
Manual
0...100
Sets the center frequency when

Sweep Mode=D-mod and
Source=Off
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the auto-wah sensitivity
Response
0...100
Sets the speed of response when

Sweep Mode=Auto or D-mod
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Thisparameterspecifiesthesweepcurveofthewah.It
appliestoallcontrolviaautowah,modulationsource,and
LFO,andletsyouadjustsubtlenuancesofthewaheffect.
a: Mode
b: Frequency Bottom
b: Frequency Top
c: Resonance Bottom
c: Resonance Top
IfMode=Preset,thissimulatesavintagewahpedal.Inthis
case,internallyfixedvaluesareusedforFrequencyBottom/
TopandResonanceBottom/Top,andthesesettingswillbe
ignored.ThesettingsforFrequencyBottom/Topand
ResonanceBottom/ToparevalidifMode=Custom.
013: VOX Wah

ThismodelsthelegendaryVOXV847andV848Clyde
McCoywahpedals.Itsdistinctivetone,soundingasthough
itwerewrungfromthethroat,madethispedalafavoriteof
manypromusicians.
Left
258
Wet / Dry
Wah
Auto Sensitivity
Envelope
Auto
Attack / Polarity
D-mod
Mode
Pedal(D-mod)
Right
Wet / Dry
Type
V847, V848
Selects the type of wah
Open
1...100

center frequency
p.257

LFO speed
Close
1...100

center frequency
p.257
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
Mode
Pedal, Auto
Switches between pedal wah

and auto-wah
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
Pedal Source 0...100
Specifies the modulation source

that will use the pedal wah

p.257
Pedal Manual 0...100
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Sets the center frequency for the

pedal wah when the modulation
source is not moved
Auto Sensitivity
Base Note
...

p.257
Auto Polarity Up, Down
Times
x1...x32

p.257
Auto Attack
0...10
Sets the auto-wahs attack speed
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
180...+180

p.257
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
0...100
Sets the auto-wah sensitivity

Specifies whether the auto-wah
sweep is normal or inverted
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 014: St. Random Filter (Stereo Random Filter)
014: St. Random Filter (Stereo

Random Filter)
a: LFO Phase [degree]

Offsettingtheleftandrightphasesaltershowmodulationis
appliedtotheleftandrightchannels,creatingaswelling
affect.
LFO Phase
Thisstereobandpassfilterusesastepshapewaveformand
randomLFOformodulation.Youcancreateaspecialeffect
fromfilteroscillation.
+90 +180 [degree]

Left
Wet / Dry
180
90
0 [degree]
Filter
Filter
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
LFO
Waveform
a
Step-Tri,
Random
Selects the LFO Waveform p.259
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
Sets the LFO phase difference

between the left and right
p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

used for both LFO speed and
step speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step speed (speed

that changes in steps
p.259
Amt
50.00...
+50.00

LFO step speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.259
Base Note
...

p.259
Times
x1...x32

p.259
...
Selects the type of notes to

specify the LFO step speed
Times
x1...x32
Sets the number of notes to

p.259
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2 to control the LFO step
speed
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Step Base
Note
e
p.259
Manual
0...100
Sets the filter center frequency
Src
Off...Tempo

for the filter center frequency
Amt
100...+100

the filter center frequency
Depth
0...100
Sets the modulation depth of

filter center frequency
Src
Off...Tempo

filter modulation
Amt
100...+100

filter modulation
Resonance
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: LFO Waveform
b: LFO Frequency [Hz]
c: LFO Step Frequency [Hz]
WhenLFOWaveformissettoStepTri,LFOisastepshape,
trianglewaveform.TheLFOFrequencyparametersetsthe
originaltrianglewaveformspeed.ChangingtheLFOStep
Frequencyparameterenablesyoutoadjustthewidthofthe
steps.
WhenLFOWaveformissettoRandom,theLFOStep
FrequencyparameterusesarandomLFOcycle.
Random Filter LFO
LFO Frequency
Step Frequency
Step Frequency
Step-Tri
Random
d: BPM
e: Step Base Note
e: Times
ThewidthofanLFOstep,oracycleofrandomLFO,is
obtainedbymultiplyingthelengthofanote()(selected
forStepBaseNote,inrelationtothetempospecifiedin
BPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI)bythe
numberspecifiedintheTimesparameter.
i: Wet/Dry
Theeffectsoundsphasewillbereversedwhenyousetthis
parameterintherangeofvaluesfromWetto1:99.
259
015: Multi Mode Filter (Stereo

Multi Mode Filter)
Thisisamultimodefilterwithfourtypes;lowpass,high
pass,bandpass,andbandreject.YoucanuseLFOor
dynamicmodulationtovarythecutofffrequencyor
resonance.
Left
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
016: St. Sub Oscillator (Stereo

Sub Oscillator)
Wet / Dry
Multimode Filter
Thiseffectaddsverylowfrequenciestotheinputsignal.Itis
veryusefulwhensimulatingaroaringdrumsoundor
emphasizingpowerfullowrange.Thiseffectisdifferent
fromtheequalizerinthatyoucanaddverylowrange
harmonics.Youcanalsoadjusttheoscillatorfrequencyto
matchaparticularnotenumber,foruseasanoctaver.
Driver
Trim
Output
LPF
HPF
Filter Type
BPF
BRF
Multimode Filter
Driver
Trim
Output
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Left
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
LFO: Tri / Sine
Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens
Type
Trim
0...100
Cutoff
0...100
Sets the cutoff frequency (center

frequency)
Src
Off...Tempo

the cutoff
Amt
100...+100

the cutoff
Resonance
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo

modulate the amount of
resonance
Amt
100...+100

resonance will be modulated
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine Selects the LFO Waveform
Phase [deg]
Depth
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
e
LPF, HPF, BPF, Selects the type of filter

BRF
180...+180

p.259
0...100
Sets the depth to which the LFO

will modulate the cutoff
frequency
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Drive SW
Off, On
Switches distortion on/off within

the filter

Drive Gain
i
Low Boost
Sets the output level
0...100
Sets the distortion amount
0...100
Sets the amount of low-range

boost
D -mod
Note No.
Envelope Sens
Pre LPF
Fixed Frequency
Sine Oscillator
Fixed
OSC Mode
Note Interval, Fine
Pitch
Note (Key Follow)
Pre LPF
Envelope Shape
Right
OSC Mode
Wet / Dry
Determines whether the oscilNote (Key

lator frequency follows the note
Follow), Fixed number or whether it is fixed
p.260
Note Interval 48...0
Sets the pitch difference from

the note number when OSC
Mode=Note (Key Follow) p.260
Note Fine
100...+100
Fine adjustment of the oscillator

frequency
p.260
Fixed
Frequency
[Hz]
10.0...80.0
Sets the oscillator frequency

when OSC Mode=Fixed
Src
Off...Tempo

for the oscillator frequency when
OSC Mode=Fixed
Amt
80...+80

modulation amount when OSC
Mode=Fixed
Envelope Pre 1...100

LPF
Sets the upper limit of the

frequency range for which very
low harmonics are added
p.260
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the sensitivity with which

very low harmonics are added
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the oscillators volume

envelope curve
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: OSC Mode
b: Note Interval
b: Note Fine
TheOSCModeparameterselectstheoscillatoroperation
mode.WhenNote(KeyFollow)isselected,theoscillators
frequencyisdeterminedbasedonthenotenumber,
allowingyoutouseitasanoctaver.TheNoteInterval
parametersetsthepitchoffsetfromtheoriginalnote
numberbysemitonesteps.TheNoteFineparameterallows
youtofinetuneinstepsofcents.
d: Envelope Pre LPF

Thisparametersetstheupperlimitofthefrequencyrangeto
whichverylowharmonicsareadded.Adjustthisparameter
260
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 017: Talking Modulator
ifyoudonotwanttoaddlowerharmonicstothehigher
range.
IfSweepModeissettoDmodisselectedasthemodulation
source,movingyourfingerfromtherighttoleftofwill
changethesoundfromatoi,thenu.
IfSweepModeissettoLFO,thesoundwillchange
cyclicallyfromatoi,u,i,thena.
017: Talking Modulator
Talking Modulator Control

Voice Bottom
Thiseffectaddsanunusualcharacter,likeahumanvoice,to
theinputsignal.Modulatingthetoneviadynamic
modulation,youcancreateaninterestingeffectthatsounds
asiftheguitarorsynthesizeristalking.
Voice Center
Voice Top
A
I
U
E

Left
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Talking Modulator
A-I-U-E-O
JS X
JS +Y
JS Y
etc
Max
+ Max
Zero
+ Max
Zero
Right
D -mod
LFO
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
D-mod
LFO
f: Formant Shift
Voice Top: A
Voice Center: I
Voice Bottom: U
Switches between modulation

source control and LFO control
Sweep Mode D-mod, LFO
Manual Voice Bottom,

1...49, Center, Voice pattern control
Control
51...99, Top
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls the voice pattern
Voice Top
A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound at the top

end of control
p.261
Voice Center
A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound in the

center of control
p.261
Voice Bottom A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound at the

bottom end of control
p.261
Formant Shift 100...+100
Sets the frequency to which the

effect is applied
p.261
Resonance
0...100
Sets the Level of resonance of

the voice pattern
p.261
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
Off, On

p.257
MIDI Sync
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
BPM
Thisparameteradjuststhefrequencyleveltowhichthe
effectisapplied.Ifyouwishtoapplytheeffecttoahigher
rangesound,setthisparametertoahighervalue;toapply
theeffecttoalowerrangesound,setthistoalowervalue.
f: Resonance
Thisparametersetstheintensityofresonanceforthevoice
pattern.Alargervaluewilladdmorecharactertothesound.
018: Stereo Decimator

Thiseffectcreatesaroughsoundlikeacheapsamplerby
loweringthesamplingfrequencyanddatabitlength.You
canalsosimulatenoiseuniquetoasampler(aliasing).
Left
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Resolution
High Damp
Output Level
High Damp
Output Level
Decimator
D -mod
Sampling Frequency
LFO
Decimator
Pre LPF
Resolution
Right
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Off, On
Selects whether the harmonic

noise caused by a decrease in
sampling frequency is generated
or not
p.262

p.257
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of cut of the high

range
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...
48.00k
Sets the sampling frequency
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]

p.257
Src
Off...Tempo
180...+180

the sampling frequency
Amt

48.00k...
+48.00k

the sampling frequency
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Sets the speed of the LFO
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
0.02...20.00
Src
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

Base Note
...

Times
x1...x32

c: Voice Top
d: Voice Center
e: Voice Bottom
Theseparametersassignvowelstothetop,center,and
bottompositionofthecontroller.
E.g.:WhenVoiceTop=A,VoiceCenter=I,andVoice
Bottom=U:
261
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Depth
0...100
Sets the depth of the sampling

frequency LFO modulation
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the LFO modulation

source of the sampling
frequency
Amt
100...+100
Sets the LFO modulation

amount of the sampling
frequency
Resolution
4...24
Sets the data bit length
p.262
p.262
Src
Off...Tempo

for the output level
Amt
100...+100

the output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
LFO Type
e
Amt
100...+100
019: St. Analog Record (Stereo

Analog Record)
Thiseffectsimulatesthenoisecausedbyscratchesanddust
onanalogrecords.Italsoreproducessomeofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
Left
Wet / Dry

Wet/Dry
IfyousettheSamplingFrequencytoabout3 kHzandset
PreLPFtoOff,youcancreateasoundlikearingmodulator.
Pre EQ
EQ Trim
Pre EQ
Analog Record
Simulation
Right
Wet / Dry
Speed [RPM]
33 1/3, 45, 78 Sets the r.p.m. of a record
Flutter
0...100
a: Pre LPF
Ifasamplerwithaverylowsamplingfrequencyreceives
veryhighpitchedsoundthatcouldnotbeheardduring
playback,itcouldgeneratepitchnoisethatisunrelatedto
theoriginalsound.SetPreLPFtoOntopreventthisnoise
frombeinggenerated.
EQ Trim
g: Resolution
h: Output Level
IfyousetasmallervaluefortheResolutionparameter,the
soundmaybedistorted.Thevolumelevelmayalsobe
changed.UseOutputLeveltoadjustthelevel.
p.262
Noise Density 0...100
Sets the noise density
Noise Tone
0...100
Sets the noise tone
Noise Level
0...100
Sets the noise level
Src
Off...Tempo

for the noise level
Amt
100...+100

the noise level
Click Level
0...100
Sets the click noise level

p.262
Src
Off...Tempo

for the click noise level
Amt
100...+100

the click noise level
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre EQ Cutoff
300...10.00k
[Hz]
Sets the modulation depth
Sets the EQ center frequency
0.5...10.0
Sets the EQ band width
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Sets the EQ gain
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
b: Flutter
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedepthofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
e: Click Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutosettheleveloftheclicknoise
thatoccursonceeveryrotationoftheturntable.This
simulationreproducesrecordnoise,andthenoisegenerated
afterthemusiconavinylrecordfinishes.
262
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 020: OD/Hi.Gain Wah (Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic)

WhenSw=Moment,thewaheffectisusuallyturnedoff.It
isturnedononlywhenyoupressthepedaloroperatethe
joystick.
020: OD/Hi.Gain Wah

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
ThisdistortioneffectutilizesanOverdrivemodeandaHi
Gainmode.Controllingthewaheffect,the3bandEQ,and
theampsimulationwillallowyoutocreateversatile
distortionsounds.Thiseffectissuitableforguitarandorgan
sounds.
Whenavalueforthemodulationsourceislessthan64,
offspeedisselected,andwhenthevalueis64or
higher,onisselected.
WhenSw=Toggle,thewaheffectisswitchedbetweenon
andoffeachtimeyoupressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Theswitchwillbeturnedon/offeachtimethevalueof
themodulationsourceexceeds64.

Left
Wet / Dry
Pre Low-cut
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain

Drive
3 Band PEQ
Amp Simulation
Driver
Output Level
Direct Mix
Right
Wet / Dry
b: Wah Sweep Range

b: Wah Sweep Src
Thisparametersetsthesweeprangeofthewahcenter
frequency.Anegativevaluewillreversethedirectionof
sweep.Thewahcenterfrequencycanbecontrolledbythe
modulationsourcespecifiedintheWahSweepSrc
parameter.
D -mod
d: Pre Low-cut
Wah
Off, On
Switches Wah on/off
Src
Off...Tempo

that switches the Wah on and off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Selects the switching mode for

the modulation source that
switches the Wah on and off
p.263
Wah Sweep
Range
10...+10
Sets the range of Wah
Wah Sweep
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls the Wah
p.263
Drive Mode
Overdrive, Hi- Switches between overdrive and

Gain
hi-gain distortion
Drive
1...100
Sets the degree of distortion

p.263
Pre Low-cut
0...10
Sets the low range cut amount

of the distortion input
p.263
p.263
p.263
Output Level 0...50
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
50...+50

the output level
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center frequency for

Low EQ (shelving type)
Cuttingthesignalinthelowrangebeforeitisinputtothe
Distortionwillcreateasharpdistortion.
d: Drive
e: Output Level (Level)
Thedegreeofdistortionisdeterminedbythelevelofinput
signalandthesettingofDrive.RaisingtheDrivesetting
willcausetheentirevolumeleveltoincrease.Usethe
OutputLevelparametertoadjustthevolumelevel.The
OutputLevelparameterusesthesignallevelinputtothe3
BandEQ.Ifclippingoccursatthe3BandEQ,adjustthe
OutputLevelparameter.
p.263
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Sets the gain of Low EQ
Mid1Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Mid/High EQ 1 (peaking type)
0.5...10.0
Sets the band width of Mid/High

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Sets the gain of Mid/High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Direct Mix
0...50
Sets the amount of the dry

sound mixed to the distortion
Speaker
Simulation
Off, On
Switches the speaker simulation

on/off
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Wah
TheWahparameterswitchesthewaheffecton/off.
a: Sw
Thisparametersetshowthewaheffectisswitchedonand
offviathemodulationsource.
263
021: St. Guitar Cabinet (Stereo

Guitar Cabinet)
022: St. Bass Cabinet (Stereo

Bass Cabinet)
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofaguitaramps
speakercabinet.
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofabassamps
speakercabinet.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
0...100
Wet / Dry
Trim
0...100
Selects the type of the cabinet
Selects the cabinet type
TWEED 1x12
Open-back cabinet with one 12"

speaker, typically used for blues
LA - 4x10
Four 10" speakers / LA sound

cabinet
TWEED 4x10
Open-back cabinet with four 10"

speakers
MODERN 4x10
Four 10" aluminum-cone

speakers / modern cabinet
cabinet with two 10"

BLACK - 2x10 Open-back
speakers
264
Type
10" aluminum-cone
METAL - 4x10 Four
speakers / modern cabinet
BLACK - 2x12
American open-back cabinet

with two12" speakers
CLASSIC 8x10
Eight 10" speakers / classic

cabinet
VOX AC15 1x12
Vox AC15 open-back cabinet

with one 12" Blue speaker
UK - 4x12
Four 12" speakers / UK-manufactured cabinet
VOX AC30 2x12
Vox AC30 open-back cabinet

with two 12" Blue speakers
STUDIO Cabinet Type 1x15
One 15" speaker / studio combo

cabinet
VOX AD412 - VOX AD412 closed-back cabinet

4x12
with four 12" speakers
JAZZ - 1x15
One 15" speaker / jazz combo

cabinet
UK H30 4x12
VOX AC100 2x15
Two 15" speakers / cabinet for

Vox AC100
UK T75 - 4x12 Closed-back cabinet with four

75W 12" speakers
US - 2x15
Two 15" speakers / US-manufactured cabinet
Closed-back cabinet with four

US V30 - 4x12 30W 12" speakers
UK - 4x15
Four 15" speakers / UK-manufactured cabinet
LA - 1x18
One 18" speaker /

LA sound cabinet
Closed-back classic cabinet with

four 30W 12" speakers
Air
0...100
Sets the mic position
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
COMBI - 1x12 One 12" and one 18" speaker

& 1x18
combination cabinet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 023: Bass Amp Model
023: Bass Amp Model
024: Bass Amp+Cabinet (Bass

Amp Model+Cabinet)
Thissimulatesabassamp.
Thissimulatesabassampandspeakercabinet.

Left
Wet / Dry

Left
Volume
Wet / Dry
Bass Amp Model

Volume
Bass Amp Model1
Cabinet Simulator
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Selects the amplifier type

LA STUDIO
An amp that is typical of the LA

sound.
A combo amp favored by jazz

JAZZ COMBO bassists.
c
d
Amplifier
Type
An amp distinctive for its eyeGOLD PANEL catching gold panel and clean
sound.
Amplifier
Type
SCOOPED
An amp typical of 80s sounds.
VALVE2
A tube amp suitable for rock.
Volume
0...100
VALVE
A tube amp with the ULTRA LO

switch turned ON.
Src
Off...Tempo

CLASSIC
A tube amp whose basic

character changes according to
the setting of the value dial.
Amt
100...+100

the output level
Bass
0...100
Sets the bass (low range) level
Volume
0...100
Middle
0...100
Sets the middle (mid range) level
Src
Off...Tempo

Mid Range
0...4
Sets the mid-frequency range
Amt
100...+100

the output level
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Mid Range
0...4
Sets the mid-frequency range
Treble
0...100
Sets the treble (high range) level
Presence
0...100
Sets the presence (highfrequency tone)
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
LA STUDIO,
JAZZ
COMBO,
GOLD PANEL, Selects the type of the amplifier
SCOOPED,
p.265
VALVE2,
VALVE,
CLASSIC
c
d
e
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Cabinet
Simulater
Off, On
Switches the cabinet simulator

on/off
LA - 4x10,
MODERN 4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC 8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO Selects the cabinet type
Cabinet Type 1x15,
JAZZ - 1x15,
VOX AC100 2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
p.264
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Amplifier Type
h: Cabinet Type
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and
Cabinets:
Amplifier Type
Cabinet Type
LASTUDIO
LA4x10,LA1x18
JAZZCOMBO
JAZZ1x15
GOLDPANEL
MODERN4x10
SCOOPED
METAL4x10
VALVE2
CLASSIC8x10
VALVE
CLASSIC8x10
CLASSIC
COMBI1x12&1x18
Note:ItisconvenienttousetheEffectPresetfunctionto
presetyourfavoritepairingsofampmodelandcabinet.(see
p.60)
265
025: TrebleBST (Treble

Booster)
Thiseffectmodelsafamousboost/overdriveeffectthatwas
developedinordertoproduceaguitarorchestraeffect,
anddesignedforusewiththeVOXAC30.Youcanusethis
toaddclearboosttothesignal,orapplyittoanorgansound
toaddanoverdrivethatgeneratesrichovertones.Three
controlsallowabroadrangeofsettings,lettingyoucreatea
widevarietyofoverdrivesounds.
Left
Sets the bias voltage for stage 2

p.266
Tube2 Bias
Tube2
Output Level 48.0...+0.0
[dB]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
b, f: Saturation [%]
Withhighersettingsofthisvalue,thewaveformwillchange
athighgainlevels,tendingtocausedistortion.Lower
settingsofthisvaluewillproducelinearresponse.
Wet / Dry
Mic/Pre Amp - Saturation

Out
Treble Booster
Saturation = 0
Saturation = 50
Saturation = 100
Right
Wet / Dry
Drive
1...100
Sets the gain for overdrive p.263
Level
0...100
Tone
1...100
Sets the tone for overdrive
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...

99:1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
In
Bias = 0
p.263
c: Tube1 Bias
Thisexpressestheeffectthatchangesinvacuumtubebias
haveonthedistortionofthewaveform.Highersettingsof
thisvaluewillproducedistortionevenatlowgainlevels.
Sincethiswillalsochangetheovertonestructure,youcan
useittocontrolthetonalcharacter.
Mic/Pre Amp - Bias
Out
026: Tube PreAmp Model

(Tube PreAmp Modeling)
Bias = 100
Bias = 50
Bias = 0
In
Thiseffectsimulatesatwostagevacuumtubepreamp.You
canmakeindividualsettingsfortwovacuumtubes
connectedinseries.Thisletsyoucreatethewarmsound
typicalofvacuumtubes.
d: Tube1 Phase

Left
Wet / Dry
Tube Pre Amp1
Invert
+
Satulation = 50
Tube Pre Amp2

Output Level
WiththeWetInvertsetting,thephaseofthesignalwillbe
invertedbetweenstage1andstage2.SinceBiasisapplied
totheinvertedsignalinstage2,thiswillchangethetonal
character.
Right
Wet / Dry
c
d
266
Tube1 Low
Cut [Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Sets the cutoff frequency for the

low cut filter of stage 1
High Cut [Hz] 53...20.00k,

Thru

high cut filter of stage 1
Tube1 Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain for stage 1
Saturation
[%]
0...100
Sets the input/output response

for stage 1
p.266
Tube1 Bias
0...100
Sets the bias voltage for stage 1

p.266
Tube1 Phase
Normal,
Wet Invert
Turns phase reversal on/off
Tube2 Low
Cut [Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k

low cut filter of stage 2
027: St. Tube PreAmp (Stereo

Tube PreAmp Modeling)
Thisisastereovacuumtubepreampsimulator(See026:
TubePreAmpModel(TubePreAmpModeling)on
page 266.).
Left
Wet / Dry
p.266
High Cut [Hz] 53...20.00k,

Thru

high cut filter of stage 2
Tube2 Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain for stage 2
Saturation
[%]
0...100

for stage 2
p.266
Tube Pre Amp1
Tube Pre Amp2
Output Level
Invert
Tube Pre Amp1
Tube Pre Amp2
Right
Wet / Dry
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 028: Mic Model+PreAmp (Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
028: Mic Model+PreAmp (Mic

Modeling + PreAmp)
Thiseffectsimulatesamicandvacuumtubepreamp.You
canchoosefromvarioustypesofmicandpositionstocreate
differingsoniccharacters.
Left
Wet / Dry
Mic Simulation
Tube Pre Amp

Output Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Mic Type
Vintage
Dynamic,
Multi
Condenser,
Percussion
Condenser,
Drums Dynamic, Selects the type of mic
Vocal Dynamic,
Multi Dynamic,
Vocal
Condenser,
Vocal Tube,
Kick Dynamic
Mic Position
Close, On, Off, Sets the mic placement distance

Far
p.267
Tube Low Cut Thru,

[Hz]
21...8.00k
Sets the frequency of the low cut

filter
High Cut [Hz] 53...20.00k,

Thru
Sets the frequency of the high

cut filter
Tube Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain to the

vacuum tube preamp
Saturation
[%]
0...100

of the preamp
p.266
Tube Bias
0...100
Sets the bias level of the preamp

p.266
Tube Output 48.0...+0.0

Level [dB]

preamp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
b: Mic Position
Thisexpressestheeffectthatthemicpositionhasonthe
sound.TheClosesettingistheclosestmicposition,andthe
Farsettingisthefarthest.
267
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser)

e: L Pre Delay [msec]
e: R Pre Delay [msec]
029: Stereo Chorus

Thiseffectaddsthicknessandwarmthtothesoundby
modulatingthedelaytimeoftheinputsignal.Youcanadd
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftand
rightLFOsfromeachother.
Settingtheleftandrightdelaytimeindividuallyallowsyou
tocontrolthestereoimage.
030: Vintage Chorus

Left
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus
EQ Trim
Right
Thismodelsafamouschorusunitthatwasbuiltintoa
guitaramp.Althoughitdoesnotprovideachorusand
vibratoselectswitch,youcanusetheWet/Drysettingto
producetheireffect.TheSpeed,Depth,andManual
parametersallowanevenwiderrangeofsoundsthanthe
originalunit.
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
LFO: Tri / Sine
Left
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
L Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the left

channel
p.268
R Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the right

channel
p.268
Depth
0...100
Sets the depth of LFO

modulation
e: Wet/Dry
d: Output Mode
Src
Off...Tempo

for the LFO modulation depth
Forthemastereffects,Wet/Dryadjuststheoutputlevelof
theeffectsound.
Amt
100...+100

the LFO modulation depth
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High

268
Mono
Output Mode
Chorus
Right
Wet / Dry
Stereo
(L-D&R-W)

[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain 15.0...+15.0

[dB]
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Sets the speed of LFO
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
Amt
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Depth
0...100
Sets the modulation depth
Src
Off...Tempo

Depth
Amt
100...+100

Depth
Manual
1...100
Sets the sweep frequency
Output Mode 0: Mono,

Sets the outpu mode
1: ST (L-D&R-W)
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...

99:1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100 ... +100

Wet/Dry
WhenOutputModeisMono,LandRwilloutputthesame
vibratoeffect.Normally,youllusetheWet/Drysettingto
mixthedirectsoundandprocessedsoundsothatachorus
effectisproduced.IfyousetthistoWetsothatnoneofthe
directsoundisincluded,youllobtainavibratoeffect.
IfOutputModeisST(LD&RW),thedirectsoundwillbe
pannedtoL,andtheeffectsoundwillbepannedtoRfor
output.Normally,youllusetheWet/Drysettingtomixthe
directsoundandprocessedsound,producingachorus
effectononlytheRchannel,andcreatingaspaciousstereo
effectthatextendstotheleftandright.IfyousetthistoWet,
andpanthedirectandprocessedsoundstoleftandright,
andthenoutputthemtostereospeakers,thedirectsound
andprocessedsoundwillbemixedintheair,producinga
choruseffectwithspaciousclarity.
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 031: Black Chorus
031: Black Chorus

ThismodelsaDanishmadestereochorus+pitchmodulator
&flanger.Althoughthiseffectwasoriginallyintendedfor
guitar,itwasalsousedbynumerouskeyboardplayers.
Usedwithelectricpiano,itproducesadistinctivetone.
Left
033: St.HarmonicChorus
(Stereo Harmonic Chorus)
Thiseffectapplieschorusonlytohigherfrequencies.This
canbeusedtoapplyachoruseffecttoabasssoundwithout
makingthesoundthinner.Youcanalsousethischorus
blockwithfeedbackasaflanger.
Wet / Dry
Mode & Intensity

Left
Chorus
Input Gain
Chorus/Flanger
Output Mode
Low Level
Mono
Stereo
Right
High Level
High Level
Chorus/Flanger
Wet / Dry
LFO
High Damp
Feedback
High Damp
High/Low Split Point
Wet / Dry
Low Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Sets the LFO speed
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
Amt
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
LFO Phase
Intensity
1...100
Sets the intensity of LFO

modulation
Mode
0, 1, 2
Select a mode
0: Chorus
1: Pitch Modulation
2: Flanger
Width
0...100
Sets the LFO modulation depth
Input Gain
1...100
Sets the input gain
Output Mode 0, 1
LFO: Tri / Sine
Select a output mode

0: Mono
1: Stereo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...

99:1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100 ... +100

Wet/Dry
c: Mode
b: Intensity
IncreasingtheIntensityvaluewillstrengthenthe
modulationeffect.Thiscontrolstheeffect,direct,and
feedbackvalues.Thevaluesthatarecontrolledwilldepend
ontheModesetting.
032: EP Chorus
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Sets the LFO speed
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry,
1:9999:1,
Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100+100

Wet/Dry
Amt
Thisisinspiredbyararechorusbuiltintoanearlyversionof
afamousmodifiedtinepiano.
p.259
h
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time from the

original sound
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

High/Low
Split Point
1...100
Sets the frequency split point

between the low and high range
p.269
Feedback
100...+100
Sets the feed back amount of the

chorus block
p.270
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the high range damping

amount of the chorus block
Low Level
0...100
Sets the low range output level
High Level
0...100
Sets the high range (chorus)

output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
g: High/Low Split Point

Thisparametersetsthefrequencythatsplitsthehighand
lowrange.Onlythehighrangewillbesenttothechorus
block.
269
h: Feedback
Setsthefeedbackamountofthechorusblock.Increasingthe
feedbackwillallowyoutousetheeffectasaflanger.
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
034: St. Biphase Mod. (Stereo

Biphase Modulation)
Bi-Phase Modulation LFO
LFO1
ThisstereochoruseffectaddstwodifferentLFOstogether.
YoucansettheFrequencyandDepthparametersforeach
LFOindividually.DependingonthesettingoftheseLFOs,
verycomplexwaveformswillcreateananalogtype,
unstablemodulatedsound.
Depth1
LFO2
Depth2

Left
Wet / Dry
035: Multitap Cho/Delay

(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
Feedback
High Damp
Chorus/Flanger
Right
Wet / Dry
180 [degree]
LFO1: Tri / Sine
LFO2: Tri / Sine
LFO1
Waveform
Triangle, Sine Selects LFO1 waveform
LFO2
Waveform
Triangle, Sine Selects LFO2 waveform
Phase Sw
LFO1
Frequency
[Hz]
b
0 deg,
180 deg
Switches the LFO phase

difference between left and right
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO1&2 speed
LFO1 Amt
30.00...
+30.00

LFO1 speed
LFO2
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...30.00
Sets the LFO2 speed
Amt
30.00...
+30.00

LFO2 speed
LFO1 Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase offset when LFO1

Type = Common 1 or Common 2
p.257
LFO2 Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
180...+180
Sets the phase offset when LFO2

Type = Common 1 or Common 2
p.257
Tap2 Delay
Tap4 Delay
Right
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
90 [degree]
270 [degree]
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...13.00
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Tap1 (000)
[msec]
0...1000
Sets the Tap1 (LFO phase=0

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Sets the Tap1 chorus depth
Level
0...30
Sets the Tap1 output level
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Tap1 stereo image
Tap2 (180)
[msec]
0...1000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30

0...100
Sets the depth of LFO1

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO1&2 modulation depth
100...+100

LFO1 modulation depth
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Depth2
0...100
Sets the depth of LFO2

modulation
Tap3 (090)
[msec]
0...1000

degrees) delay time
Amt
100...+100

LFO2 modulation depth
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Tap4 (270)
[msec]
0...1000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
L Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0

channel
p.268
R Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0

channel
p.268
High Damp
[%]
100...+100
0...100
Sets the feedback amount

p.270
Sets the damping amount in the
high range
Wet / Dry
LFO: Triangle
Depth1
Feedback
270
Tap1 Delay
Tap3 Delay
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Sets the LFO1 speed
Amt
Left
0.02...30.00
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
ThiseffecthasfourchorusblockswithadifferentLFO
phase.Youcancreateacomplexstereoimagebysetting
eachblocksdelaytime,depth,outputlevel,andpan
individually.Youcanalsofixsomeofthechorusblocksto
combinethechorusanddelayeffects.
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 036: Ensemble
Tap1
Feedback
g
100...+100
Sets the Tap1 feedback amount
Src
Off...Tempo

Tap1 feedback amount and
effect balance
Amt
100...+100

and modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
037: Polysix Ensemble

ThismodelstheensembleeffectbuiltintotheclassicKorg
PolySixprogrammablepolyphonicsynthesizer.
Left
Wet / Dry
Polysi x
Ensemble
Right
036: Ensemble
Wet / Dry
ThisEnsembleeffecthasthreechorusblocksthatuseLFOto
createsubtleshimmering,andgivesthreedimensional
depthandspreadtothesound,becausethesignalisoutput
fromtheleft,right,andcenter.
Depth
0...100
Sets the depth of the effect
Src
Off...Tempo

that will control the effect depth
Amt
100...+100

effect depth will be modulated
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry

Left
Wet / Dry
Ensemble
Right
Wet / Dry
Shimmer
LFO
Speed
a
1...100
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
100...+100

LFO speed
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Shimmer
0...100
Sets the amount of shimmering

of the LFO waveform
p.271
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

038: Stereo Flanger

Thiseffectgivesasignificantswellandmovementofpitch
tothesound.Itismoreeffectivewhenappliedtoasound
withalotofharmonics.Thisisastereoflanger.Youcanadd
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftand
rightLFOsfromeachother.
Left
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
c: Shimmer
ThisparametersetstheamountofshimmeringoftheLFO
waveform.Increasingthisvalueaddsmoreshimmering,
makingthechoruseffectmorecomplexandricher.
Flanger
Feedback
High Damp
Flanger
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Ensemble LFO
Level
Shimmer
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...50.0
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
Changes the curvature of the

LFO Waveform
p.258
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
Time

original sound
271
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
LFO Type
f
High Damp
[%]
Thestereoeffectusesastepshapewaveformandrandom
LFOformodulation,creatingauniqueflangingeffect.

p.272
Sets the feedback damping

amount in the high range
Left
Wet / Dry
p.272
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Wet/Dry
i
0...100
040: St. Random Flanger

(Stereo Random Flanger)
Flanger
Feedback
High Damp
Flanger
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
h: Feedback
i: Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalue
isdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhenthe
effectsoundismixedwiththedrysoundifyouseta
positivevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry,andifyou
setanegativevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry.
h: High Damp [%]

Thisparametersetstheamountofdampingofthefeedback
inthehighrange.Increasingthevaluewillcuthighrange
harmonics.
039: Vintage Flanger
Thismodelsaclassicanalogflanger.Itishighlyeffectivefor
chordingonclavitypekeyboardsorelectricpiano.
Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...50.0

original sound
LFO
Waveform
Step-Tri,
Random
Selects the LFO Waveform p.259
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

used for both LFO speed and
step speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step speed (speed

that changes in steps)
Step Amt
50.00...
+50.00

LFO step speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
Step Base
Note
...

Times
x1...x32

p.259
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100

Left
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Flanger
Right
LFO Sync
LFO
Reset Offset
Wet / Dry
f
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Sets the speed of LFO
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Depth
Amt
100...+100

Depth
Resonance
0...100
Manual
1...100
Sets the sweep frequency
LFO Reset
Source
Off...Tempo

LFO reset
Reset Offset
0...100
Sets the offset
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Src
Amt
272
p.259

p.272
High Damp
[%]
0...100

Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.272
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 041: St. Env. Flanger (Stereo Envelope Flanger)
041: St. Env. Flanger (Stereo

Envelope Flanger)
ThisFlangerusesanenvelopegeneratorformodulation.Youwill
obtainthesamepatternofflangingeachtimeyouplay.Youcan
alsocontroltheFlangerdirectlyusingthemodulationsource.
042: Stereo Phaser

Thiseffectcreatesaswellbyshiftingthephase.Itisvery
effectiveonelectricpianosounds.Youcanaddspreadtothe
soundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftandrightLFOsfrom
eachother.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Flanger
Resonance
Feedback
High Damp
Phaser
High Damp
Flanger
Right
Right
D-mod
-mod
EG Attack/Decay
L Delay
Bottom
[msec]
EG
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
LFO: Tri / Sine

Sweep Mode
0.0...50.0
Sets the lower limit of the leftchannel delay time
L Delay Top
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the upper limit of the leftchannel delay time
R Delay
Bottom
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the lower limit of the rightchannel delay time
R Delay Top
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the upper limit of the rightchannel delay time
Sweep Mode EG, D-mod
Determines whether the flanger

is controlled by the envelope
generator or by the modulation
source
p.273
Src

that triggers the EG (when
Sweep Mode = EG), or the
modulation source that causes
the flanger to sweep (when
Sweep Mode = D-mod)
p.273
c
Off...Tempo
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
EG Attack
1...100
Sets the EG attack speed
p.273
EG Decay
1...100
Sets the EG decay speed
p.273
Base Note
...

p.257
Feedback
100...+100
p.272
Times
x1...x32

p.257
High Damp
[%]
0...100
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.272
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo

for the LFO modulation
Amt
100...+100

the LFO modulation
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

for the LFO modulation depth
Amt
100...+100

Resonance
100...+100

p.272
e
c: Sweep Mode
c: Src
Thisparameterswitchestheflangercontrolmode.WithSweep
Mode=EG,theflangerwillsweepusingtheenvelope
generator.Thisenvelopegeneratorisincludedintheenvelope
flanger,andnotrelatedtothePitchEG,FilterEG,orAmpEG.
TheSrcparameterselectsthesourcethatstartstheenvelope
generator.Ifyouselect,forexample,Gate,theenvelope
generatorwillstartwhenthenoteonmessageisreceived.
WhenSweepMode=Dmod,themodulationsourcecan
controltheflangerdirectly.Selectthemodulationsource
usingtheSrcparameter.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSrcparameterissmallerthan64,and
theeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
EnvelopeGeneratoristriggeredwhenthevalue
changesfrom63orsmallerto64orhigher.
d: EG Attack
d: EG Decay
AttackandDecayspeedaretheonlyadjustableparameterson
thisEG.

p.274
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the resonance damping

p.274
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
h: Resonance
i: Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalue
isdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhenthe
effectsoundismixedwiththedrysound,ifyouseta
273
positivevalueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry,andifyou
setanegativevalueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry.
h: High Damp [%]

Thisparametersetstheamountofdampingoftheresonance
inthehighrange.Increasingthevaluewillcuthighrange
harmonics.
045: Black Phaser

ThismodelsaDanishmadefourstagephaserthatfeatured
awiderange.
Left
Wet / Dry
Resonance
043: Small Phaser
ThismodelsaclassicphaserthatwasborninNewYork
duringthe1970s.Withawarm,richtone,itisalsolovedby
manyelectricpianoplayers.
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO

Left
Wet / Dry
Color
a
+
Phaser
Right
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
Amt
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Depth
Amt
100...+100

Depth
Wet / Dry
LFO
Speed [Hz]
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
Amt
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Color
Off, On
Switches the tone of the phaser

sound
p.274
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Resonance
0...100
Manual
1...100
Sets the frequency where the

effect is applied
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
b: Color
046: U-VIBE
Thisletsyouchoosebetweentwotypesofphasersound.
TurningthisOnproducesadeeperphaseshifteffectwitha
distinctivemodulation.
Thismodelsafamouschorus/vibratopedaleffect.
Simulatingarotaryspeaker,thiseffectproduceda
fascinatinglylushtone.
Left
044: Orange Phaser

Thismodelsastandardmodelofanalogphaserthat
achievedgreatpopularity.Itgivesasenseofmovementto
electricpianosounds,addingarichsoundingphaseshift
effect.
Wet / Dry
U-VIBE
Mix
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
274
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Sets the speed of the vibration
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
Amt
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Depth
0...100
Sets the depth of vibration
Src
Off...Tempo

Depth
Amt
100...+100

Depth
Mix
0...100
Sets the effect mix level
Src
Off...Tempo

Mix
Amt
100...+100

Mix
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 047: St. Random Phaser (Stereo Random Phaser)
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.275
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
c: Mix
d: Wet/Dry
TheMixparameterspecifiestheamountofeffectsound
relativetothedirectsound.Asettingof0producesthe
directsound,asettingofabout50produceschorus,anda
settingof100producesavibratoeffect.IfyousettheWet/
DryparametertoWet,thesoundwillbeoutputwiththe
mixbalancespecifiedbyMix.
Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Src
Off...Tempo

for the LFO modulation
Amt
100...+100

the LFO modulation
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100

p.274
High Damp
[%]
0...100

p.274
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
047: St. Random Phaser

(Stereo Random Phaser)
Thisisastereophaser.Theeffectusesastepshape
waveformandrandomLFOformodulation,creatinga
uniquephasingeffect.
Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
High Damp
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO
Waveform
Step-Tri, StepSin, Random Selects the LFO Waveform p.259
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

commonly used for LFO speed
and step speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step speed
Amt
50.00...
+50.00

LFO step speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
Step Base
Note
...

Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
p.259
p.257
275
048: St. Env. Phaser (Stereo

Envelope Phaser)
Thisstereophaserusesanenvelopegeneratorfor
modulation.Youwillobtainthesamepatternofphasing
eachtimeyouplay.YoucanalsocontrolthePhaserdirectly
usingthemodulationsource.
Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
High Damp
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D -mod
EG Attack/Decay
Sweep Mode
EG
0...100
Sets the lower limit of the

frequency range for the effect on
the left channel
L Manual Top 0...100

the left channel
R Manual
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of the

the right channel
R Manual Top 0...100

the right channel
Sweep Mode EG, D-mod
Determines whether the flanger

is controlled by the envelope
generator or by the modulation
source
p.273
Src
Off...Tempo

that triggers the EG (when EG is
selected for Sweep Mode), or
modulation source that causes
the flanger to sweep (when Dmod is selected for Sweep
Mode)
p.273
EG Attack
1...100
L Manual
Bottom
a
p.273
Sets the EG decay speed
EG Decay
1...100
Resonance
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

p.274
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
276
Sets the EG attack speed
p.273
p.274
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 049: Stereo Vibrato
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift)

triggertoautomaticallyfadeinthemodulationamount.
WhenMIDISyncissettoOn,youcannotusethis.
049: Stereo Vibrato

Thiseffectcausesthepitchoftheinputsignaltoshimmer.
UsingtheAutoFadeallowsyoutoincreaseordecreasethe
shimmeringspeed.
Left
Wet / Dry
Vibrato
TheFadeInRateparameterspecifiestherateoffadein.The
FadeInDelayparameterdeterminesthetimefrom
AutoFademodulationsourceOnuntilthefadeinstarts.
ThefollowingisanexampleoffadeinwheretheLFO
speedisincreasedfrom1.0Hzto4.0Hzwhenanoteon
messageisreceived.
AUTOFADESrc=Gate1,LFOFrequencyMod=AUTOFADE,
LFOFrequency[Hz]=1.0,Amt=3.0
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthedynamic
modulationsourcespecifiedfortheAUTOFADESrc
parameterissmallerthan64,andtheeffectisonwhen
thevalueis64orhigher.TheAutoFadefunctionis
triggeredwhenthevaluechangesfrom63orsmallerto
64orhigher.
Vibrato
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
AutoFade
AUTOFADE
Src
LFO Shape
Fade-In Delay
Off...Tempo
Fade-In Delay
00...2000
[msec]
LFO Frequency
Sets the fade-in delay time

p.277
Source=Gate1
LFO Freq. Mod=AUTOFADE
LFO Frequency[Hz]=1.0
Amount=+3.0
Gate1 Signal
Sets the rate of fade-in
Fade-In Rate
1...100
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.259
LFO
Frequency
Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
Switches between D-mod and

AUTOFADE for the LFO
frequency modulation
p.277
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
LFO Frequency
=1.0Hz
050: St. Auto Fade Mod. (Stereo

Auto Fade Modulation)
Thisstereochorus/flangereffectenablesyoutocontrolthe
LFOspeedandeffectbalanceusingautofade,andyoucan
spreadthesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftandright
LFOsfromeachother.
Left
Wet / Dry
Delay

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Rate

Wet/Dry
LFO
Frequency
Mod
100...+100
a: AUTOFADE Src
b: Fade-In Delay [msec]
b: Fade-In Rate
d: LFO Frequency Mod
WhenLFOFrequencyModissettoAUTOFADE,youcan
usethemodulationsourceselectedinAUTOFADESrcasa
LFO Frequency
=1.0+3.0=4.0Hz
Fade-In Rate
Fade-In Dealy
AUTOFADE
x1...x32
Amt
All Note Off
Note On
p.277
Times
Src
AutoFade
AUTOFADE

that starts AutoFade
p.277
Feedback
Delay
High Damp
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO Shape
LFO Frequency
AutoFade
Wet / Dry
AUTOFADE
Src
a
Off...Tempo
Fade-In Delay
00...2000
[msec]
1...100
Sets the fade-in delay time

p.277
Sets the rate of fade-in
p.277
D-mod,
AUTOFADE

AUTOFADE for the LFO
frequency modulation
p.277
D-mod,
Wet/Dry Mod AUTOFADE

AUTOFADE for the effect balance
modulation
p.277

that starts AutoFade
p.277
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
277
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.259
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Mod. Depth
100...+100
Sets the amount of resonance

intensity control via LFO/D-mod
Trim
0...100
Sets the input level at the

resonator
Voice1: Pitch
C0...B8
Sets the voice1 Pitch for

resonance

p.257
Fine [cent]
50...+50
Fine-adjusts the voice 1 pitch for

resonance
p.278
Level
0...100
Sets the Voice1 output level
Sets the left channel delay time
Voice1:
Resonance
100...+100
Sets the intensity of resonance

when Control Mode = Manual
p.278
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping amount of

resonant sound in the high
range
p.279
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Voice1 stereo image
Voice2: Pitch
C0...B8
Sets the voice 2 Pitch for

resonance
Fine [cent]
50...+50
Fine-adjusts the voice 2 pitch for

resonance
p.278
Level
0...100
Sets the Voice2 output level
Voice2:
Resonance
100...+100
Sets the intensity of resonance

when Control Mode = Manual
p.278
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping amount of

resonant sound in the high
range
p.279
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Voice2 stereo image
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 :99... 99 Sets the balance between the

: 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
180...+180
L Delay Time
0.0...500.0
[msec]
Amt
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
LFO Type
R Delay Time
0.0...500.0
[msec]
Sets the right channel delay time
Depth
0...200

modulation
Feedback
100...+100

p.272
High Damp
[%]
0...100

Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.272
051: 2Voice Resonator

Thiseffectresonatestheinputsignalataspecifiedpitch.
Youcansetthepitch,outputlevel,andpansettingsfortwo
resonatorsindividually.Youcancontroltheresonance
intensityviaanLFO.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Resonator
Trim
Level
Pan
Resonator
High Damp
Level
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Invert: On/Off
Pitch, Fine [cents]
LFO
Control Mode
Manual
278
a: Control Mode
g: Voice 1: Resonance
i: Voice 2: Resonance
Thisparameterdeterminestheresonanceintensity.
WhenControlMode=LFO,theintensityofresonance
variesaccordingtotheLFO.TheLFOswaysbetween
positiveandnegativevalues,causingresonancetooccur
betweenspecifiedpitchesanoctaveapartinturn.
Manual, LFO,
D-mod
Switches the controls of

resonance intensity
LFO/D-mod
Invert
Off, On
Reverses the Voice 1 and 2

control when LFO/D-mod is
selected
p.278
WhenControlMode=Dmod,theresonanceiscontrolled
bythedynamicmodulationsource.IfJSXisassignedasthe
modulationsource,thepitchanoctavehigherandlowercan
becontrolled,similartowhenLFOisselectedforControl
Mode.
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
a: LFO/D-mod Invert
D-mod Src
Off...Tempo

that controls resonance intensity
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
Control
Mode
a
p.278
WhenControlMode=Manual,theResonanceparameter
setstheintensityofresonance.IftheResonanceparameter
hasanegativevalue,harmonicswillbechanged,and
resonancewilloccuratapitchoneoctavelower.
Resonance
Trim
p.278
p.278
WhenControlMode=LFOorDmod,thecontrolledphase
ofeitherVoice1or2willbereversed.Whentheresonance
pitchissetforVoice1(Resonancehasapositivevalue),
Voice2willresonateatapitchanoctavebelow(Resonance
hasanegativevalue).
f: Voice 1: Pitch
f: Fine [cent]
h: Voice 2: Pitch
h: Fine [cent]
ThePitchparameterspecifiesthepitchofresonancebynote
name.TheFineparameterallowsforfineadjustmentin
stepsofcents.
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 052: Doppler
g: High Damp [%]

i: High Damp [%]
Thissetstheamountofdampingamountforthehigh
frequenciesoftheresonantsound.Lowervaluescreatea
metallicsoundwithahigherrangeofharmonics.
052: Doppler
ThiseffectsimulatestheDopplereffectofamovingsound
withachangingpitch,similartothesirenofanpassing
ambulance.Mixingtheeffectsoundwiththedrysoundwill
createauniquechoruseffect.
Left
Doppler
Pan Depth
WhenLFOModeissetto1Shot,theDopplereffectis
createdonlyoncewhenthemodulationsourcespecifiedin
theSrcfieldisturnedon.Atthistimeifyoudonotsetthe
Srcparameter,theDopplereffectwillnotbecreated,andno
effectsoundwillbeoutput.
specifiedfortheSrcparameterissmallerthan64,and
theeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
Dopplereffectistriggeredwhenthevaluechanges
from63orsmallerto64orhigher.
f: Pitch Depth
Wet / Dry
LFO
Trigger
TheLFOModeparameterswitchesLFOoperationmode.
WhenLoopisselected,theDopplereffectwillbecreated
repeatedly.IfLFOSyncissettoOn,theLFOwillbereset
whenthemodulationsourcespecifiedwiththeSrc
parameteristurnedon.
Wet / Dry
Right
D -mod
a: LFO Mode
a: Src
b: LFO Sync
WiththeDopplereffect,thepitchisraisedwhenthesound
approaches,andthepitchisloweredwhenthesoundgoes
away.Thisparametersetsthispitchvariation.
LFO Mode = 1-Shot
g: Pan Depth
LFO Mode
Loop, 1-Shot
Switches LFO operation mode

p.279
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO reset
p.279
LFO Sync
Off, On
Switches between LFO reset on

and off when LFO Mode is set to
Loop
p.279
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
Higher
Doppler - Pitch / Pan Depth

Pitch
Pan Depth
= (+) value
Pan Depth
= () value
Pitch Depth
Original Pitch
Lower
Thisparametersetsthewidthofthestereoimageofthe
effectsound.Withlargervalues,thesoundseemstocome
andgofrommuchfurtheraway.Withpositivevalues,the
soundmovesfromlefttoright;withnegativevalues,the
soundmovesfromrighttoleft.
Center
Left
Right
Pan Depth
<
<
< < < <<<<<< >>>>>> > > >
>
>
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Pitch Depth
0...100
Sets the pitch variation of the

moving sound
p.279
Src
Off...Tempo

pitch variation
Amt
100...+100

pitch variation
Pan Depth
100...+100
Sets the panning of the moving

sound
p.279
Src
Off...Tempo

panning
Amt
100...+100

panning
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

Scratch
Source
Off...Tempo

for simulation control
p.280
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Response
0...100
Sets the speed of the response

to the Scratch Src
p.280
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Envelope
Select
Selects whether the start and

D-mod, Input end of recording is controlled via
the modulation source or the
input signal level
p.280
Src
Off...Tempo
Louder
Volume
Louder
053: Scratch
Thiseffectisappliedbyrecordingtheinputsignaland
movingthemodulationsource.Itsimulatesthesoundof
scratchesyoucanmakeusingaturntable.
Left
Wet / Dry
Scratch
Rec Control
Direct
Mix
Scratch
Right
D-mod
Envelope Control
Input
Envelope Select
Wet / Dry
D -mod
D -mod

that controls recording when
Envelope Select is set to D-mod
p.280
279
d
e
f
0...100
Sets the recording start level

when Envelope Select is set to
Input
p.280
Response
0...100

to the end of recording
p.280
Direct Mix
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Selects how a dry sound is mixed

p.280
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Threshold
054: Grain Shifter

Thiseffectcutsextremelyshortsamples(grains)fromthe
inputsignalwaveformandplaysthemrepeatedly,givinga
mechanicalcharactertothesound.
Left
Wet / Dry
Grain Shifter
Sample Cycle
a: Scratch Source
b: Response
Right
Wet / Dry
TheScratchSourceparameterenablesyoutoselectthe
modulationsourcethatcontrolssimulation.Thevalueofthe
modulationsourcecorrespondstotheplaybackposition.
TheResponseparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedofthe
responsetothemodulationsource.
LFO
D -mod
Trigger
Duration
0...100
Sets the duration of the grain

p.280
Src
Off...Tempo

modulate the duration of the
grain
Amt
100...+100

grain duration will be modulated
Scratch Source
Start
Playback Position
End
Recorded Sound
b
Scratch Source
-mod
JS X
JS+Y
JSY
etc
Scratch!
Max
Zero
Zero
+ Max
+ Max
c: Envelope Select
c: Src
d: Threshold
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenthemodulationsourcevalueis64or
higher.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenitslevelisovertheThresholdvalue.
Themaximumrecordingtimeis2,730msec.Ifthisis
exceeded,therecordeddatawillstartbeingerasedfromthe
top.
e: Response
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedoftheresponse
totheendofrecording.Setasmallervaluewhenyouare
recordingaphraseorrhythmpattern,andsetahighervalue
ifyouarerecordingonlyonenote.
f: Direct Mix
WithAlwaysOn,adrysoundisusuallyoutput.With
AlwaysOff,drysoundsarenotoutput.WithCrossFade,a
drysoundisusuallyoutput,anditismutedonlywhen
scratching.
SetWet/DrytoWettousethisparametereffectively.
LFO Sync Src Off...Tempo

that will reset the LFO
LFO Sample
Cycle [Hz]
0.02...20.00

grain will be switched
p.280
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1: 99... 99 Sets the balance between the

: 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Duration
c: LFO Sample Cycle [Hz]
Durationsetsthelengthofthesampledgrain,andtheLFO
SampleCyclecontrolshowoftenanewgrainissampled.In
betweenSampleCycles,thecurrentgrainisrepeated
continuously.
Sample Cycle / Duration
Sample Cycle
Duration
In
Out
280
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 055: Stereo Tremolo
paneffectinwhichthesoundispannedbetweenleftand
right.
055: Stereo Tremolo

Thiseffectmodulatesthevolumeleveloftheinputsignal.
Theeffectisstereo,andoffsettingtheLFOoftheleftand
rightphasesfromeachotherproducesatremoloeffect
betweenleftandright.
Left
Wet / Dry
056: TEX Treml (TEX Tremolo)

Thismodelsthehighlyacclaimedtremolocircuitthatwas
builtintoaUSmadecomboamp.TheSpreadsettinglets
youcreateapaneffectthatwaversbetweenleftandright.
Tremolo
Left
Wet / Dry
Tremolo
Tremolo
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down
Tremolo
LFO Shape
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage, Up, Selects the LFO Waveform p.281
Down
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.281
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

the depth of modulation
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Spread
LFO
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Sets the tremolo speed
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed [Hz]
Amt
100...+100

Speed [Hz]
Depth
0...100
Select the tremolo depth
Src
Off...Tempo

Depth
Amt
100...+100

Depth
Spread
0...100
Sets the width of the stereo

image of the effect sound
Level Adjust
1...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
057: St. Env. Tremolo (Stereo

Envelope Tremolo)
Thiseffectusestheinputsignalleveltomodulateastereo
tremolo(LFOvolumemodulation).Forinstance,youcan
createatremoloeffectthatbecomesdeeperandfasterasthe
inputgetsmorequiet.
Left
Wet / Dry
Tremolo
a: LFO Waveform
ThisparametersetsthebasicshapeoftheLFO.TheVintage
waveformmodelsclassicguitaramptremolo.
Tremolo
Right
LFO Phase
Tremolo - LFO Waveform
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage
+
Triangle
Sine
Vintage
Up
Envelope
Down
b: LFO Phase [degree]

Thisparameterdeterminesthedifferencebetweentheleft
andrightLFOphases.Ahighervaluewillsimulatetheauto
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the envelopes sensitivity to

the input signal
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the envelopes curvature
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Selects the LFO Waveform
Vintage
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
281
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00

p.281
Sets the amount added to or

subtracted from the Frequency
when the envelope is at
maximum
p.282
Envelope
20.00...
Amount [Hz] +20.00
Envelope
Amount
0...100
Sets the initial amount of

tremolo
100...+100
Sets the amount added to or

subtracted from the Depth when
the envelope is at maximum
p.282
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
d: LFO Frequency [Hz]

d: Envelope Amount [Hz]
e: Depth
e: Envelope Amount
Thegraphicbelowshowsanexampleoftremolo
modulationwithnegativemodulationofbothDepthand
Frequency.Atthestartofthenote,theinputisatmaximum
volume.ThisslowsdowntheLFOFrequencyto1.0Hz,but
alsomodulatestheDepthto0sothetremolodoesnthave
anyeffect.
Astheinputvolumediesdown,theFrequencyspeedsup;
theDepthalsoincreases,makingthetremoloeffect
increasinglyaudible.Whentheinputvolumeapproaches
silence,theDepthisatitsmaximum(100)andFrequencyis
at8Hz.
Shimmer
Level
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Depth
0...100

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.282
Wet/Dry
Amt
0.02...20.00
p.282
Depth
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Louder
Dry Envelope
LFO Frequency[Hz]=8.0
Envelope Amount[Hz]= 7.0Hz
Depth=100
Envelope Amount= 100
Time
a: LFO Shape
YoucanchangethepanningcurvebymodifyingtheLFOs
Shape.
b: LFO Phase [degree]

Thisdeterminesthephasedifferencebetweentheleftand
rightLFOs.Whenyougraduallychangethevalueaway
from0,thesoundsfromtheleftandrightchannelswillseem
tochaseeachotheraround.Ifyousettheparameterto+180
or180,thesoundsfromeachchannelwillcrossovereach
other.
Youllonlyheartheeffectofthisparameteriftheinputis
truestereo,withdifferentsignalsintheleftandright
channels.
058: Stereo Auto Pan
Stereo Auto Pan - LFO Phase

LFO Phase = 0 degrees
Thisisastereoin,stereooutautopanner.ThePhaseand
Shapeparametersletsyoucreatevariouspanningeffects,
suchasmakingtheleftandrightinputsseemtochaseeach
otheraroundthestereofield.

L-In
L-In
L-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
R-In
R-In
R-In

Wet / Dry
R-In
Left
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
282
L-In
L-In
Depth
LFO: Tri / Sin
R-In
R-In
R-In
Pan
LFO Shape
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.282
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.282
L-In
L-In
L-In
Left
Right
Center
Output Stereo Image
R-In
L-In
R-In
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 059: St. Phaser + Trml (Stereo Phaser + Tremolo)
059: St. Phaser + Trml (Stereo

Phaser + Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesastereophaserandtremolo,with
linkedLFOs.Swellingphasermodulationandtremolo
effectssynchronizewitheachother,creatingasoothing
modulationeffectparticularlysuitableforelectricpiano.
Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Tremolo
Phaser Wet / Dry
Resonance
Phaser Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Type
LFO
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
Type
Phaser Tremolo,
...
Phaser LR Tremolo LR
Selects the type of the tremolo

and phaser LFOs
p.283
Phaser - Tremolo,
Phaser - Tremolo Spin,
Phaser - Tremolo LR,
Phaser LR - Tremolo,
Phaser LR - Tremolo Spin, Phaser
LR - Tremolo LR
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
Sets the phase difference

between the tremolo and phaser
LFOs
p.283
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the LFO speed modulation

amount
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
BPM
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

p.283
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Type
a: LFO Phase [degree]
SelectthetypeofphaserLFOandtremoloLFOfortheType
parameter.Howtheeffectsoundmovesorrotatesdepends
onthetypeofLFO.SelectingLFOPhaseenablesyouto
offsetthetimingofthephaserpeakandcontrolasubtle
movementandrotationofthesound.
g: Phaser Wet/Dry
j: Wet/Dry
Tremolo
Phaser
Wet/Dry
PHASERWet/Drysetsthebalancebetweenthephaser
outputandthedrysound.OUTPUTWet/Drysetsthe
balancebetweenthefinalphaserandtremolooutputlevel
andthedrysound.
060: St. Ring Modulator

(Stereo Ring Modulator)
Thiseffectcreatesametallicsoundbyapplyingthe
oscillatorstotheinputsignal.UsetheLFOorDynamic
Modulationtomodulatetheoscillatortocreatearadical
modulation.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywithanote
numberwillproducearingmodulationeffectinspecifickey
ranges.
Left
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Direct Mix
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Right
Wet / Dry
Fixed
Fixed Frequency
Sine Oscillator
Pitch
OSC Mode
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Phaser
Manual
0...100
Sets the phaser frequency range
Resonance
100...+100
Sets the phaser resonance

amount
Phaser Depth 0...100
Sets the phaser modulation

depth
Src
Off...Tempo

for the phaser modulation depth
Amt
100...+100

the phaser modulation depth
Phaser Wet/
Dry
Wet, 2 :
98...Dry... 2 :
98, Wet

phaser effect and dry sounds
p.283
Tremolo
Shape
100...+100
Sets the degree of the tremolo

LFO shaping
Tremolo
Depth
0...100
Sets the tremolo modulation

depth
Src
Off...Tempo

for the tremolo modulation
depth
Amt
100...+100

the tremolo modulation depth
Note Offset, Fine
Note No.
Note (Key Follow)

LFO
OSC Mode
Fixed, Note
(Key Follow)
Switching between specifying

the oscillator frequency and
using a note number
p.284
Pre LPF
0...100
Sets the damping amount of the

high range input to the ring
modulator
p.284
Fixed
Frequency
[Hz]
0...12.00k

when OSC Mode is set to Fixed
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the oscillator frequency when
OSC Mode is set to Fixed
Amt
12.00k...
+12.00k

the oscillator frequency when
OSC Mode is set to Fixed
Note Offset
48...+48
Sets the pitch difference from the

original note when OSC Mode is
set to Note (Key Follow)
p.284
Note Fine
100...+100
Fine-adjusts the oscillator

frequency
p.284
Direct Mix
0...100
Direct signal (after passing

through the pre-low-pass filter)
mixed into the ring modulation
output
283
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
d
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
LFO Depth
0...100

modulation for the oscillator
frequency
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Src
a: OSC Mode
Thisparameterdetermineswhetherornottheoscillator
frequencyfollowsthenotenumber.
a: Pre LPF
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedampingamountof
thehighrangesoundinputtotheringmodulator.Ifthe
inputsoundcontainslotsofharmonics,theeffectmay
sounddirty.Inthiscase,cutacertainamountofhighrange.
061: Detune
Usingthiseffect,youcanobtainadetuneeffectthatoffsets
thepitchoftheeffectsoundslightlyfromthepitchofthe
inputsignal.Comparedtothechoruseffect,amorenatural
soundthicknesswillbecreated.
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level
High Damp
Detune
Delay
Feedback
Input Level
Right
Wet / Dry
b
c
Pitch Shift
[cent]
100...+100

the input signal
Src
Off...Tempo

pitch shift
Amt
100...+100

pitch shift
Delay Time
[msec]
0...1000
Sets the delay time
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
d: Input Level D-mod [%]

d: Src
Thisparametersetsthedynamicmodulationoftheinput
level.
Input Level Dmod
b: Fixed Frequency [Hz]
Input Level
Input Level
x1.0
x1.0
ThisparametersetstheoscillatorfrequencywhenOSC
ModeissettoFixed.
TheseparametersfortheoscillatorareusedwhenOSC
ModeissettoNote(KeyFollow).TheNoteOffsetsetsthe
pitchdifferencefromtheoriginalnoteinsemitonesteps.
TheNoteFineparameterfineadjuststhepitchincentsteps.
Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywiththenotenumber
producesaringmodulationeffectinthecorrectkey.
284
Input Level Dmod= 100
Input Level Dmod= +100
x0.5
x0.5
D -mod
Higher
Zero
Louder
Input Level Dmod= +50

Louder
c: Note Offset
c: Note Fine
Input Level Dmod= 50
Max
D -mod
Higher
Zero
Max
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 062: Pitch Shifter
willberaised(orlowered)moreandmoreeachtime
feedbackisrepeated.
062: Pitch Shifter

Thiseffectchangesthepitchoftheinputsignal.Youcan
selectfromthreetypes:Fast(quickresponse),Medium,and
Slow(preservestonalquality).Youcanalsocreateaneffect
inwhichthepitchisgraduallyraised(ordropped)usingthe
delaywithfeedback.
IfFeedbackPositionissettoPost,thefeedbacksignalwill
notpassthroughthepitchshifteragain.Evenifyouspecify
ahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitchshifted
soundwillberepeatedatthesamepitch.
063: Pitch Shifter BPM

Left
Wet / Dry
Thispitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
Input Level
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Delay
Pre
Post
Feedback Position
Input Level
Feedback

Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
High Damp
Mode
Slow,
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
Medium, Fast
p.285
Pitch Shift [1/ 24...+24

2tone]
Sets the pitch shift amount by

steps of a semitone
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo

pitch shift amount
p.285
Amt
24...+24

pitch shift amount
p.285
Fine [cent]
100...+100
Sets the pitch shift amount by

steps of a cent
p.285
Amt
100...+100

pitch shift amount
p.285
Delay Time
[msec]
0...2000
Sets the delay time
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
Switches the feedback

connection
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
Pitch Shifter
Delay
Pre
Post
Feedback Position
Input Level
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
p.285

2tone]
Sets the pitch shift amount in

steps of a semitone
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo

pitch shift amount
p.285
Amt
24...+24

pitch shift amount
p.285
Fine [cent]
100...+100

steps of one cent
p.285

high range
Amt
100...+100

pitch shift amount
p.285
100...+100

the input level
p.284
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.285
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Time Over?
---, OVER!
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Displays an error message when

the delay time exceeds the
upper limit
p.285
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Delay Base
Note
...
Src

specify the delay time
p.285
x1...x32
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Times
Amt

p.285
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post

connection
Feedback
100...+100
p.285

p.285
a: Mode
Thisparameterswitchesthepitchshifteroperatingmode.
WithSlow,tonalqualitywillnotbechangedtoomuch.With
Fast,theeffectbecomesaPitchShifterthathasaquick
response,butmaychangethetone.Mediumisinbetween
thesetwo.Ifyoudonotneedtosettoomuchpitchshift
amount,setthisparametertoSlow.Ifyouwishtochange
thepitchsignificantly,useFast.
b: Pitch Shift [1/2tone]

b: Src
b: Amt
c: Fine [cent]
c: Amt
TheamountofpitchshiftwillusethevalueofthePitch
ShiftplustheFinevalue.Theamountofmodulationwill
usetheb:Amtvalueplusthec:Amt.
ThesameModulationSourceisusedforbothPitchShift
andFine.
e: Feedback Position
f: Feedback
WhenFeedbackPositionissettoPre,thepitchshifter
outputisagaininputtothepitchshifter.Therefore,ifyou
specifyahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitch
p.285

p.285
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
d: BPM
e: Delay Base Note
e: Times
ThedelaytimeisthedurationofTimesnumberofDelay
BaseNotenotevaluesattheBPMtempo(orifBPMissetto
MIDI,thetempodeterminedbyMIDIClock).
d: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,290msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearson
thedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
messagewillnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplay
parameter.
285
g: Pan
h: Wet/Dry
064: Pitch Shift Mod. (Pitch

Shift Modulation)
Thiseffectmodulatesthedetunedpitchshiftamountusing
anLFO,addingaclearspreadandwidthtothesoundby
panningtheeffectsoundanddrysoundtotheleftandright.
Thisisespeciallyeffectivewhentheeffectsoundanddry
soundoutputfromstereospeakersaremixed.
Left
Wet / Dry
ThePanparameterpanstheeffectsoundanddrysoundto
theleftandright.WithL,theeffectsoundispannedleft,and
thedrysoundispannedright.WithaWet/Dry=Wetsetting,
theeffectanddrysoundwillbeoutputinaproportionof
1:1.
065: Organ Vib/Chorus (Organ

Vibrato/Chorus)
Thiseffectsimulatesthechorusandvibratocircuitryofa
vintageorgan.Themodulationspeedanddepthcanbe
customized.
Pitch Shifter
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry

LFO: Tri / Sqr
Left
Wet / Dry
Pitch Shift
[cent]
100...+100

the input signal
p.286
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Square
Selects the LFO Waveform
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo

LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

LFO speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
180...+180

p.257
Depth
100...+100
Sets the LFO modulation depth

for pitch shift amount
p.286
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Pan
L, 1 : 99...99 :
1, R
Sets the panning effect sound

and dry sound separately
p.286
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

p.286
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Vibrato/Chorus
Preset Setting
Custom Parameters
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
Amt
a: Pitch Shift [cent]

f: Depth
Pitch Shift Mod - Pitch Shift / Depth
Higher
Pitch
LFO Waveform=Triangle
Depth (+value)
Pitch Shift (+ value)
Lower
Original Pitch
LFO Waveform=Square
Depth (value)
Mode
Right
Wet / Dry
Input Trim
0...100
Control
Mode
Preset,
Custom
Selects either preset or custom

settings
p.286
Preset Type
Selects the effect type when

V1, C1, V2, C2, Mode=Preset
V1/V2/V3 are variations of
V3, C3
vibrato, and C1/C2/C3 are variations of chorus
p.286
Src
Off...Tempo

that will change the effect type
Amt
5...+5

changing the effect type
p.287
Custom Mix
Vibrato,
1:99...99:1,
Chorus
Sets the mix level of the direct

sound when Mode=Preset
p.286
Src
Off...Tempo

that will control the mix level of
the direct sound
Amt
100...+100

controlling the mix level of the
direct sound
Custom
Depth
0...100
Sets the vibrato depth
Src
Off...Tempo

that will control vibrato depth
Amt
100...+100

controlling the vibrato depth
Custom
Speed [Hz]
0.02...20.00
Sets the vibrato speed
Src
Off...Tempo

for controlling the vibrato speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00

controlling the vibrato speed
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Theseparameterssettheamountofpitchshiftandamount
ofmodulationbymeansoftheLFO.
286
p.286
p.286
b: Control Mode
c: Preset Type
d: Custom Mix
e: Custom Depth
f: Custom Speed [Hz]
IfControlMode=Preset,youcanusec:PresetTypetoselect
theeffect.Inthiscase,theCustomMix/Depth/Speedsettings
areignored.IfControlMode=Custom,theCustomMix/
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 066: Rotary Speaker
Depth/Speedsettingsarevalid,andthec:PresetType
settingisignored.
c: Amt
IfPresetType=V1andSrc=JS+Y,youcansetthisto+5and
moveJS+Ytocontroltheeffectintheorderof
V1C1V2C2V3C3.
Thiseffectsimulatesarotaryspeaker,andobtainsamore
realisticsoundbysimulatingtherotorinthelowrangeand
thehorninthehighrangeseparately.Theeffectalso
simulatesthestereomicrophonesettings.
Left
Wet / Dry
Horn
Rotary Speaker
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Speaker Simulation
Wet / Dry
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
Mode Switch Rotate, Stop
Switches between speaker

rotation and stop
Src
Off...Tempo

Rotate/Stop
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Rotate/

Stop modulation
p.287
Ifyouwishtocontroltherotationspeedmanually,instead
ofswitchingbetweenSlowandFast,selectamodulation
sourceintheManualSpeedCtrlparameter.Ifyoudont
wanttousemanualcontrol,setthistoOff.
d: Horn Acceleration
e: Rotor Acceleration
Onarealrotaryspeaker,therotationspeedacceleratesor
deceleratesgraduallyafteryouswitchthespeed.TheHorn
andRotorAccelerationparameterssetthetransitiontimes
betweenfastandslowspeeds.
Switches the speaker rotation

speed between slow and fast
p.287
g: Mic Distance
g: Mic Spread
Src
Off...Tempo

Slow/Fast
Thisisasimulationofstereomicrophonesettings.
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Slow/

Fast modulation
p.287
Off...Tempo
Sets a modulation source for

direct control of rotation speed
p.287
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
How quickly the horn rotation

speed in the high range is
switched
p.287
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-range side)

horn rotation speed. Standard
value is 1.00. Selecting Stop will
stop the rotation
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Determines how quickly the

rotor rotation speed in the low
range is switched
p.287
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-frequency) rotor

speed. Standard value is 1.00.
Selecting Stop will stop the
rotation
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Sets the level balance between

the high-frequency horn and
low-frequency rotor
Manual
Speed Ctrl
Mic Distance 0...100
Sets the distance between the

microphone and rotary speaker
p.287
Mic Spread
0...100
Sets the angle of left and right

microphones
p.287
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
WhenSw=Moment,thespeedisusuallyslow.Itbecomes
fastonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,modulationvaluesabove64setthespeedtoFast,and
valuesbelow64setittoSlow.
Speed Switch Slow, Fast
WhenSw=Toggle,thespeedwillswitchbetweenslowand
fasteachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,thespeedwillswitcheachtimethemodulation
amountexceeds64.
c: Manual Speed Ctrl
Right
Thisparametercontrolshowtherotationspeed(slowand
fast)isswitchedviathemodulationsource.
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Rotor
D -mod
D -mod
D -mod
WhenSw=Moment,thespeakerrotatesbydefault,and
stopsonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.
ViaMIDI,modulationvaluesabove64makethespeaker
rotate,andvaluesbelow64makeitstop.
b: Speed Switch
066: Rotary Speaker
WhenSw=Toggle,thespeakerrotatesorstopsalternately
eachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,rotationwillswitchbetweenstartandstopeachtime
themodulationamountexceeds64.
Rotary Speaker - Mic Placement

Mic Spread
Microphone
Mic Distance
Microphone
Mic Distance
Rotary Speaker (Top View)
a: Sw
Thisparametersetshowthemodulationsourceswitches
betweenrotationandstop.
287
067: St.EP Tone+Trml (Stereo

EP Tone+Tremolo)
Thisfaithfullysimulatesthepreampsectionandvibrato
(tremolo)effectfromafamousmodeloftinetypeelectric
piano.
0100
Sets the volume level of the

preamp
b Treble
10.0+10.0
Sets the high-frequency boost or

cut.
10.0+10.0
This controls the low-frequency

boost or cut.
Volume
Bass
Vibrato Switch On, Off
Switches Vibrato on/off
Src
Off...Tempo

Vibrate on/off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment

switches the Vibrate on and off
p.288
Vibrato
Intensity
1...100
Sets the intensity of LFO

modulation
Src
Off...Tempo

Intensity
Amt
100...+100

Intensity
Vibrato
Speed
00.0100
Sets the LFO speed
Src
Off...Tempo

Speed
Amt
100...+100

Speed
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
g Src
Amt
d: Sw
WhenthisissettoToggle,theVibratoSwitchwillalternate
betweenonandoff.Forinstance,ifvibratoisoff,andSrcis
assignedtoafootswitch,thefirstpresswillturnonthe
Vibrato,andthenextpresswillturnitoffagain.
Momentarymeansthatthechangehappensonlywhilethe
controllerisenabled.Continuingtheexamplefromabove,
whenthefootswitchispresseddown,theVibratowillturn
on;whenthefootswitchisreleased,theVibratowillturnoff
again.
Srcletsyouswitchtotheoppositeoftheprogrammed
setting.Forinstance,ifvibratoison,andtheSwissetto
Moment,thenpressingdownonthefootswitchwouldturn
offtheVibrato.
Ifyousetmodulationsourcetouseacontinuouscontroller,
suchastheJoystick,valuesof063areasiftheswitchwas
off,andvaluesof64127areasiftheswitchwason.
Finallynotethattheassignableswitches,SW1andSW2,
canthemselvesbesettoeithermomentortogglemodes,
andthesesettingsarereflectedbytheswitchLEDs.
Individualparametersettings,suchasthevibratoon/offand
Sw,donotaffecttheLEDs.
So,ifyoureusingSW1orSW2asthemodulationsource,its
besttosettheSwtoMoment,andthenjustlettheswitch
itselfdeterminethemomentary/togglebehavior.
288
Delay 068: L/C/R Delay
Delay
068: L/C/R Delay
069: Stereo/CrossDelay
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstotheleft,
right,andcenterrespectively.Youcanalsoadjusttheleft
andrightspreadofthedelaysound.
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeedback
delayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossoverbetween
theleftandrightbychangingthefeedbackrouting.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
Level
C Delay
Stereo/Cross
Delay
R Delay
Level
Spread
Low Damp
Stereo/Cross
Right
Wet / Dry
Switches between stereo delay

and cross-feedback delay
L Delay Time
0...2730
[msec]
Sets the delay time of TapL
Stereo/Cross
Level
Sets the output level of TapL
L Delay Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]

channel
R Delay Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]

channel
L Feedback
100...+100
Sets the feedback amount for

the left channel
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
Amt L
100...+100

the left channel feedback
R Feedback
100...+100

the right channel
Amt R
100...+100

the right channel feedback
0...50
C Delay Time
0...2730
[msec]
Sets the delay time of TapC
Level
Sets the output level of TapC
0...50
Stereo, Cross
R Delay Time
0...2730
[msec]
Sets the delay time of TapR
Level
0...50
Sets the output level of TapR
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
Sets the feedback amount of

TapC
Src
Off...Tempo

the TapC feedback amount
Amt
100...+100

the TapC feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Spread
50...+50

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Spread
0...50

p.289
High Damp
Input Level D-mod
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Level
Right
Low Damp
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Spread
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Wet / Dry
High Damp
L Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Amt
p.289
e: High Damp [%]

e: Low Damp [%]
Theseparameterssetthedampingamountofhighrange
andlowrange.Thetoneofthedelayedsoundbecomes
darkerandlighterasitfeedsback.
g: Spread
Thisparametersetsthepanwidthoftheeffectsound.The
stereoimageiswidestwithavalueof50,andtheeffect
soundofbothchannelsisoutputfromthecenterwitha
valueof0.
289
070: St. Multitap Delay (Stereo

Multitap Delay)
071: St. Mod Delay (Stereo

Modulation Delay)
TheleftandrightMultitapDelayshavetwotaps
respectively.Changingtheroutingoffeedbackandtap
outputallowsyoutocreatevariouspatternsofcomplex
effectsounds.
ThisstereodelayusesanLFOtosweepthedelaytime.The
pitchalsovaries,creatingadelaysoundwhichswellsand
shimmers.Youcanalsocontrolthedelaytimeusinga
modulationsource.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp (1)

Mode
Tap1 Level
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
(2)
Mode
(1)
Delay
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Spread
Delay
Feedback
Right
Feedback
(2)
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
D
a
Mode
Normal, Cross
Feedback,
Switches the left and right delay
Cross Pan1,
routing
p.290
Cross Pan2
Tap1 Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
Tap2 Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap2 delay time
Tap1 Level
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
Off...Tempo

the Tap2 feedback amount
100...+100

Src
Amt
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Spread
100...+100
LFO Sync
Response
LFO: Tri / Sine
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape

Modulation Mode
LFO, D-mod
Switches between LFO

modulation control and
modulation source control
D-mod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Reversed L/R control by

modulation source
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls delay time
Response
0...30
Sets the rate of response to the

modulation source
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO D-mod
Sync
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo

that resets the LFO
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
p.291

LFO Waveform
p.258
Switches LFO reset off/on
p.291
Src
Off...Tempo

the effect sounds stereo image
width
Amt
100...+100

width
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Times
x1...x32

p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase obtained when

the left LFO is reset
p.291
L Depth
0...200
Sets the depth of the left LFO

modulation
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180

the right LFO is reset
p.291
R Depth
0...200
Sets the depth of the right LFO

modulation
Mode: Normal
Mode: Cross Feedback
Mode: Cross Pan1
Mode: Cross Pan2
a: Mode
Youcanchangehowtheleftandrightdelaysignalsare
pannedbymodifyingtheroutingoftheleftandrightdelay
asshowninthefigureabove.Youneedtoinputdifferent
soundstoeachchannelinorderforthisparametertobe
effective.
d: Tap1 Level
ThisparametersetstheoutputlevelofTap1.Settinga
differentlevelfromTap2willaddauniquetouchtoa
monotonousdelayandfeedback.
290
LFO
Modulation
Mode
p.289
i
D-mod
LFO Phase
p.290
-mod

[msec]

channel
L Feedback
Sets the feedback amount of left

delay
100...+100

[msec]

channel
R Feedback

right delay
100...+100
Delay 072: St. Dynamic Delay (Stereo Dynamic Delay)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Wet/Dry
l
b: D-mod Modulation
Whenthemodulationsourceisusedforcontrol,this
parameterreversestheleftandrightmodulationdirection.
072: St. Dynamic Delay (Stereo

Dynamic Delay)
Thisstereodelaycontrolsthelevelofdelayaccordingtothe
inputsignallevel.Youcanusethisasaduckingdelaythat
appliesdelaytothesoundonlywhenyouplaykeysata
highvelocityoronlywhenthevolumelevelislow.
d: LFO D-mod Sync

d: Src
h: L LFO Phase [deg]
i: R LFO Phase [deg]
IfLFODmodSyncisOn,theLFOwillberesetbythe
modulationsourcethatisreceived.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Feedback
Delay
Right
FB
TheSrcparametersetsthemodulationsourcethatresetsthe
LFO.Forexample,youcanassignGateasamodulation
sourcesothatthesweepalwaysstartsfromthespecified
point.
LLFOPhaseandRLFOPhasesetthephaseobtainedwhen
theleftandrightLFOsarereset.Inthisway,youcancreate
changesinpitchsweepfortheleftandrightchannels
individually.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueofthemodulationsource
specifiedintheSrcparameteris63orsmaller,andthe
effectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.TheLFOis
triggeredandresettotheLLFOPhaseandRLFO
Phasesettingswhenthevaluechangesfrom63or
smallerto64orhigher.
Spread
High Damp Low Damp
Wet / Dry
Out
Attack, Release
Envelope
Control Target
Threshold
Control
Target
None, Out, FB Selects from no control, output,

and feedback
p.291
Polarity
+,
Reverses level control
Threshold
0...100
Sets the level to which the effect

is applied
p.291
Offset
0...100
Sets the offset of level control

p.291
Attack
1...100
Sets the attack time of level

control
p.291
Release
1...100
Sets the release time of level

control
p.291
L Delay Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]

channel

[msec]

channel
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Spread
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.291

p.289
a: Control Target
Thisparameterselectsnolevelcontrol,delayoutputcontrol
(effectbalance),orfeedbackamountcontrol.
a: Polarity
b: Threshold
b: Offset
c: Attack
d: Release
TheOffsetparameterspecifiesthevaluefortheControl
Targetparameter(thatissettoNone),expressedastheratio
relativetotheparametervalue(theWet/Dryvaluewith
ControlTarget=OutputLevel,ortheFeedbackvaluewith
ControlTarget=Feedback).
WhenPolarityispositive,theControlTargetvalueis
obtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebytheOffset
value(iftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold),orequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelexceedsthethreshold.
WhenPolarityisnegative,ControlTargetvalueequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold,or
isobtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebythe
Offsetvalueifthelevelexceedsthethreshold.
291
TheAttackandReleaseparametersspecifyattacktimeand
releasetimeofdelaylevelcontrol.
Dynamic Delay
Level
Thisstereodelayeffectpansthedelaysoundleftandright
usingtheLFO.
Dry
Threshold
Envelope
073: St. AutoPanningDly

(Stereo Auto Panning Delay)
Release
Attack
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Pan
Delay
Wet
(Ducking Delay)
Depth
Feedback
Target=Output Level
Polarity= ()
Pan
Delay
Delay Time
High Damp Low Damp

Right
Wet
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Target=Output Level
Polarity= (+)
LFO: Tri / Sin
LFO Shape
Time

[msec]

channel
L Feedback

the left channel
R Delay Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]

channel
R Feedback
100...+100

the right channel
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
Phase
[degree]
180...+180

p.282
Panning
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Sets the panning speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On
Switches between using the

frequency of the panning speed
and using the tempo and notes
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

specify the delay time for the
panning speed
p.257
Times
x1...x32

panning speed
p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Panning
Depth
0...100
Sets the panning width
Src
Off...Tempo

for the panning width
Amt
100...+100
Set the modulation amount of

the panning width
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
292
100...+100
Delay 074: Echo Plus
074: Echo Plus
Thismodelsafamousanalogtapeechounit.Ontheoriginal
device,echowascreatedbyaplaybackhead,andthe
delaytimewasspecifiedbyadjustingthespeedofthe
motor.Thewarmthandsubtletyoftheechoesitgenerated
madethislofiunitafavoritewithmanypromusicians.
Tap2 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Sets the stereo image of tap2
Feedback
Amt
100...+100

p.293
Tap3 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100

p.293
Feedback
0...100
Sets the amount of feedback for

Taps 1, 2, and 3
p.293
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
Amt

Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level
D-mod
Tone
Delay
h
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
i
j
Time [ms]
0...2700
Sets the delay time
Src
Off...Tempo

Time [ms]
Amt
100...+100
Sets the amount for Time [ms]
Feedback
0...100
Sets the amount of feedback
Src
Off...Tempo

Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Sets the amount of Feedback
Tone
1...100
Sets the tone of the delay sound
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Input Level
Mod Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
Saturation
0...100
Input Trim
0...100
Sets the input gain
Pre Tone
Low Damp
0...100
Sets the tone of the input
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
Sets the frequency at which

pitch variation will occur
Wow Flutter
depth
0...100
Sets the depth of pitch variation
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Delay (Tap1) [msec]

a: Src
a: Amt
b: Tap2 Position [%]
b: Tap3 Position [%]
ThedelaytimeforTap2and3isspecifiedasaproportion
(%)relativetoDelay(Tap1).Evenifyouusedynamic
modulationtocontrolDelay(Tap1),Tap2and3willchange
atthesameproportion.
075: Tape Echo

Thiseffectsimulatesatapeechounitwiththreeplayback
heads.Thedistortionandtonalchangetypicalofmagnetic
tapearealsoreproduced.
d: Feedback Amt
e: Feedback Amt
f: Feedback Amt
g: Feedback
ThefeedbackoutputfromTap1,2,and3ismixedaccording
totheFeedbackAmt,andthenthefinalamountoffeedback
isspecifiedbyFeedback.
Left
Wet / Dry
(3)
Feedback
076: Auto Reverse
(2)
Feedback Amt
Tape
Saturation
Trim Pre Tone
(1)
Level
Pan
Delay
Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandautomaticallyplays
itinreverse(theeffectissimilartoatapereversesound).
High / Low Damp

Wah Flatter
Tap2/3
Position
Right
D-mod
Wet / Dry
Delay Time

Left
Delay (Tap1)
[msec]
0...2700
Src
Off...Tempo

the delay time
p.293
Amt
2700...
+2700

delay time
p.293
p.293
Tap2 Position
0...100
[%]
Sets the position of Tap 2 relative

to the Tap 1 delay time the
depth of pitch variation
p.293
Tap3 Position 0...100

[%]

p.293
Wet / Dry
Sets the delay time (tap1)
Tap1 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100

p.293
Auto Reverse
Direct
Mix
Rec/Reverse Play
Control
Right
D -mod
Wet / Dry
D-mod
Input
Envelope Control
Envelope Select
Rec Mode
Reverse Time 20...2640

[msec]
Single, Multi
Sets the recording mode

p.294
Sets the maximum duration of
the reverse playback
p.294
293
Envelope
Select
D-mod, Input
Selects whether the start and

end of recording is controlled via
the modulation source or the
input signal level
p.294
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls recording when
p.294
Threshold
0...100
Sets the recording start level

when Envelope Select is set to
Input
p.294
Response
0...100

to the end of recording
p.280
Direct Mix
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Selects how a dry sound is mixed

p.280
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
077: Sequence BPM Dly

(Sequence BPM Delay)
Thisfourtapdelayenablesyoutoselectatempoand
rhythmpatterntosetupeachtap.
Left
Wet / Dry
Pan
Input Level D-mod
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
a: Rec Mode
b: Reverse Time [msec]
Rythm Pattern
WhenRecModeissettoSingle,youcansetupto2,640msec
forReverseTime.Ifrecordingstartsduringthereverse
playback,theplaybackwillbeinterrupted.
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.294
WhenRecModeissettoMulti,youcanmakeanother
recordingduringthereverseplayback.However,the
maximumReverseTimeislimitedto1,320msec.
Rhythm
Pattern
3
...
Selects a rhythm pattern
Tap1 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Sets the panning of Tap1
Tap2 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Ifyouwishtorecordaphraseorrhythmpattern,setRec
ModetoSingle.Ifyourecordonlyonenote,setRecModeto
Multi.
Tap3 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Tap4 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
TheReverseTimeparameterspecifiesthemaximum
durationofthereverseplayback.Thepartinexcessofthis
limitwillnotbeplayedinreverse.Ifyouwishtoaddshort
piecesofthereverseplaybackofsinglenotes,makethe
ReverseTimeshorter.
Mode/Reverse Time
Rec
Reverse Rec
Reverse
Envelope Select = Input
f
Input
Time
Mode = Single
Mode = Multi
a: BPM
b: Rhythm Pattern
Reverse Time
Reverse Time
c: Envelope Select
c: Src
d: Threshold
Theseparametersselectthesourcetocontrolthestartand
endofrecording.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenthevalueofthemodulationsource
selectedbytheSrcparameteris64orhigher.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenitslevelexceedstheThresholdlevel.
Whenrecordingiscompleted,reverseplaybackstarts
immediately.
294
p.294
WiththetempospecifiedbytheBPMparameter(orthe
MIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI),thelengthofone
beatequalsthefeedbackdelaytime,andtheinterval
betweentapsbecomesequal.Selectingarhythmpatternwill
automaticallyturnthetapoutputsonandoff.WhenBPMis
settoMIDI,thelowerlimitoftheBPMis44.
Delay 078: L/C/R BPM Delay
078: L/C/R BPM Delay
079: Stereo BPM Delay
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.Youcanalsosynchronizethedelaytime
withthearpeggiatororsequencer.Ifyouprogramthetempo
beforeperformance,youcanachieveadelayeffectthat
synchronizeswiththesonginrealtime.Delaytimeissetby
notes.
Thisstereodelayenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Feedback
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Right
Level
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
L Delay
C Delay
Spread
BPM
BPM
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Wet / Dry
Tempo
Level
R Delay
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over? L ---, OVER!
Display the error message if the

left channel delay time exceeds
the upper limit
p.295
Base Note x Times
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.285
---, OVER!

right channel delay time exceeds
the upper limit
p.295
Time Over?
---, OVER!

upper limit
p.295
L Delay Base
Note
...

specify the left channel delay
time
p.285
L Delay Base
Note
...

specify the delay time for TapL
p.285
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Times
x1...x32

p.285
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the left channel delay

time
Level
0...50
...
C Delay Base
Note

specify the right channel delay
time
p.285
...

specify the delay time for TapC
p.285
R Delay Base
Note
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Times
x1...x32

p.285
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the right channel

delay time
Level
0...50
L Feedback
100...+100

the left channel
...

specify the delay time for TapR
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
Times
x1...x32

p.285
Amt L
100...+100

Level
0...50
R Feedback
100...+100

the right channel
Amt R
100...+100

R Delay Base
Note
d
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100

TapC
Src
Off...Tempo

for the TapC feedback
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Amt
100...+100

the TapC feedback
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
0...100

high range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
High Damp
[%]
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Spread
0...50

p.289

p.285
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

a: Time Over? L, R
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
a: Time Over?
295
080: St.BPM Mtap Delay (Stereo

BPM Multitap Delay)
081: St.BPM Mod. Delay (Stereo

BPM Modulation Delay)
Thisisastereomultitappeddelaythatletsyousetthedelay
timetomatchthetempoofthesong.
Thisisastereomodulationdelaythatletsyousynchronize
thedelaytimetothetempoofthesong.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp (1)

Mode
Tap1 Level
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
(2)
Mode
(1)
Delay
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Spread
Delay
Feedback
Right
Feedback
(2)
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Tempo
Tempo
BPM
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
D
a
Mode
Normal, Cross
Feedback,
Switches the left and right delay
Cross Pan1,
routing
p.290
Cross Pan2
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over? 1 ---, OVER!

the delay time for Tap1 exceeds
the upper limit
p.295
---, OVER!
Tap 1 Base
Note
...

specify the delay time for Tap1
p.285
Times
x1...x32

p.285
Tap 2 Base
Note
...

p.285
Times
x1...x32

p.285
Tap1 Level
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
100...+100


p.285

the delay time for Tap2 exceeds
the upper limit
p.295
Spread
Src
Amt
296
-mod
LFO Sync
Response
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
LFO: Tri / Sine

width
100...+100

width
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
LFO
Modulation Mode
Modulation
Mode
LFO, D-mod
Switches between LFO

modulation control and
modulation source control
D-mod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Reversed L/R control by

modulation source
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls delay time
Response
0...30
Sets the rate of response to the

modulation source
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO D-mod
Sync
Off, On
p.291

LFO Waveform
p.258
Switches LFO reset off/on
p.291
Src
Off...Tempo

that resets the LFO
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On

p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

p.257
Times
x1...x32

p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180

the left LFO is reset
p.291
Depth
0...200
Sets the depth of the left LFO

modulation
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180

the right LFO is reset
p.291
Depth
0...200
Sets the depth of the right LFO

modulation
BPM(Delay)
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.285
p.290
Off...Tempo
D-mod
LFO Phase
p.289
i
Base Note x Times

the upper limit
p.297

the upper limit
p.297
---, OVER!
Delay 082: St.BPMAutoPanDly (Stereo BPM Auto Panning Delay)
...

time
p.285
x1...x32

time
p.285
100...+100
Sets the feedback amount of left

delay
...

time
p.285
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Feedback
100...+100

right delay
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Delay Base
Note
k
Times
Feedback
R Delay Base
Note
Src
Amt
082: St.BPMAutoPanDly (Stereo

BPM Auto Panning Delay)
Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
LFO Phase
180...+180

p.281
Panning
Frequen0.02...20.00
cyuency [Hz]
Sets the panning speed
MIDI Sync
Off, On
When this is on, the pan LFO

speed is set by BPM, Base Note,
and Times, instead of Frequency
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.257
Base Note
...

panning speed
p.257
Times
x1...x32

panning speed
p.257
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2

LFO2
p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180

p.257
Panning
Depth
0...100
Sets the panning width
Src
Off...Tempo

for the panning width
Amt
100...+100
Set the modulation amount of

the panning width
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
j: Time Over? L, R
LFO
Waveform
Thisstereoautopanningdelayenablesyoutosetthedelay
timetomatchthesongtempo.
p.257

Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Pan
Delay
Depth
Feedback
Thisisatapeechothatletsyousynchronizethedelaytime
tothetempoofthesong.
Pan
Delay
083: Tape Echo BPM
High Damp Low Damp

Right
Wet / Dry

Left
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Wet / Dry
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
LFO: Tri / Sin
(3)
Feedback
LFO Phase
(2)
LFO Shape
(1)
Feedback Amt
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

the upper limit
p.295
---, OVER!

the upper limit
p.295
L Delay Base
Note
...

time
p.285
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Feedback
100...+100

the left channel
R Delay Base
Note
...

time
p.285
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Feedback
100...+100

the right channel
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Tape
Saturation

p.285
Trim Pre Tone
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Pan
High / Low Damp

Wah Flatter
Right
Level
Delay
Delay Time
Tap2/3 Position
Wet / Dry
BPM
D -mod
BPM (Delay)
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.285
Tap1 Dmod
Src
Off...Tempo

the delay time
p.298
Tap1 Delay
Note
...

specify the delay time (tap1)
p.285, p.298
Times
x1...x32

specify the delay time (tap1)
p.285, p.298
Time Over?
---, OVER!

upper limit
p.298
Tap1 Dmod
Note
...
Selects the note value used to

specify the delay time when the
modulation is at maximum
p.298
Times
x1...x32
Specifies the number of notes

used to specify the delay time
when the modulation is at
maximum
p.298
297
Tap2 Position
0...100
[%]

p.293
Tap3 Position 0...100

[%]

p.293
j
k
l
Tap1 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100

p.293
Tap2 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100

p.293
Tap3 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100

p.293
Feedback
0...100
Sets the amount of feedback for

Taps 1, 2, and 3
p.293
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
Amt
100...+100
Sets the depth by which

feedback amount will be
modulated
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
Saturation
0...100
Input Trim
0...100
Sets the input gain
Pre Tone
0...100
Sets the tone of the input
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
Sets the frequency at which

pitch variation will occur
Wow Flutter
depth
0...100
Sets the depth of pitch variation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Tap1 Dmod Src

b: Tap1 Delay Note
b: Times
c: Tap1 Dmod Note
c: Times
IfTap1DmodSrcisOffortheselectedmodulationisat0,
thedelaytimewillbethelengthspecifiedbyTap1Delay
NoteandTimes.
IfTap1DmodSrcisotherthanOff,thedelaytimewill
changesothatitwillbeasspecifiedbyTap1DmodNote
andTimeswhenthemaximummodulationisreached.
b: Time Over?
298
Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER) 084: Reverb Hall
Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER)

Reverb - Hall / Plate Type
084: Reverb Hall
Level
Reverb
Louder
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationofmidsize
concerthallsorensemblehalls.
Dry
Pre Delay Thru

Time
085: Reverb SmoothHall
Pre Delay
Reverb Time
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationoflarger
hallsandstadiums,andcreatesasmoothrelease.
088: Reverb Room

086: Reverb Wet Plate
Thisplatereverbsimulateswarm(dense)reverberation.
087: Reverb Dry Plate
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundtighter.Changingthebalancebetweenthe
earlyreflectionsandreverbsoundallowsyoutosimulate
nuances,suchasthetypeofwallsofaroom.
089: Reverb BrightRoom
Thisplatereverbsimulatesdry(light)reverberation.
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundbrighter.

Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
Pre Delay Thru
Left
Wet / Dry
HEQ
Pre Delay
ER Level
Reverb
ERs
EQ Trim
LEQ
Pre Delay Thru
HEQ
EQ Trim
Pre Delay
Reverb
Reverb Level
Right
Wet / Dry
ERs
EQ Trim
ER Level
Right
b
c
Wet / Dry
Reverb Time
[sec]
0.1...10.0
Sets the reverberation time
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the delay time from the dry

sound
p.299
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
Sets the mix ratio of non-delay

sound
p.299
Reverb Time
[sec]
0.1...3.0
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200

sound
p.299
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
Sets the mix ratio of non-delay

sound
p.299
Sets the level of early reflections
p.299
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
ER Level
0...100
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High

Reverb Level
0...100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High

EQ Trim

[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
15.0...+15.0
[dB]

Sets the gain of High EQ
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
b: Pre Delay [msec]

b: Pre Delay Thru [%]
ThePreDelaysetsthedelaytimetothereverbinput,
allowingyoutocontrolspaciousness.
UsingthePreDelayThruparameter,youcanmixthedry
soundwithoutdelay,emphasizingtheattackofthesound.
Sets the reverberation level

p.299

[dB]

[dB]
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
c: ER Level
d: Reverb Level
Theseparameterssettheearlyreflectionlevelandreverb
level.
299
Changingtheseparametervaluesallowsyoutosimulatethe
typeofwallsintheroom.Thatis,alargerERLevel
simulatesahardwall,andalargerReverbLevelsimulatesa
softwall.
Time
Inthesereverbs,Timeisnotexpressedinseconds,but
insteadisavaluefrom1to100.Avalueof1producesthe
shortestreverb,and100providesthelongestreverb.
Reverb - Room Type

Dry
ER
(Early Reflections)
Louder
Level
094: Early Reflections

Reverb
Thiseffectisonlytheearlyreflectionpartofareverberation
sound,andaddspresencetothesound.Youcanselectone
ofthefourdecaycurves.
Time
Pre Delay Thru
Pre Delay
Reverb Time
Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
090: Reverb2 Spring

TheReverb2typereverbsReverb2SpringReverb2Room
haveadifferentsoniccharacterthanRev.HallRev.Room2.
Theymodelthespringreverbsystemsthatarebuiltinto
someamps.
091: Reverb2 Hall

Thismodelsthereverberationofaconcerthallthatincludes
numerousechocomponents.
Pre Delay
Thismodelsatypeofreverbunitthatvibratesametalplate
ratherthansprings.Thereverbtimeisrelativelyshort.
Becausethereverberationhasafastattack,itissuitablefor
percussiveplaying.
EQ Trim
Wet / Dry
Type
Sharp, Loose,
Selects the decay curve for the
Modulated,
early reflection
p.300
Reverse
ER Time
[msec]
10...800
Sets the time length of early

reflection
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the time taken from the

original sound to the first early
reflection
EQ Trim
0...100
Sets the input level of EQ applied

to the effect sound
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High

093: Reverb2 Room

Thismodelsthereverberationofatypicalroomthat
includesnumerousearlyreflections.
Early Reflections
Right
092: Reverb2 Plate
Left
HEQ

[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain

15.0...+15.0
[dB]
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Type
Thisparameterselectsthedecaycurvefortheearly
reflection.
Wet / Dry
Pre Delay
Early Reflections - Type
Reverb
Sharp
Right
Wet / Dry
Loose
Time [sec]
0...100
Sets the reverberation time p.300
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...70

sound
p.299
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
300
Modulated
Reverse
Dry
Pre Delay
ER Time
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 095: P4EQ - Exciter (Parametric 4-Band EQ - Exciter)
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono)

095: P4EQ - Exciter (Parametric 4Band EQ - Exciter)
096: P4EQ - Wah (Parametric 4Band EQ - Wah/Auto Wah)
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andanexciter.
andawah.Youcanchangetheorderoftheconnection.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wah/Auto Wah
Exciter
Wah
Trim
Trim
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope
D
P4EQ
a
[E]Trim
0...100
Sets the parametric EQ input

level
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
Sweep Mode
Wet / Dry
Auto
D-mod
LFO
LFO
P4EQ
0...100
Routing
Changes the order of the

P4EQ Wah, parametric equalizer and wah
Wah P4EQ connection
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255

level
[E]Trim
18...+18
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Band 3
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

Band 4
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0

p.255
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
EXCITER
f
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
Sets the frequency range to be

emphasized
p.256
Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99... 99 Sets the balance between the

: 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
-mod
Gain [dB]
d Q
Wet / Dry
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ
Exciter
WAH
f
[W]Frequenc 0...100
y Bottom

center frequency
p.257
Frequency
Top
0...100

center frequency
p.257
[W]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO

LFO
p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

Mode=D-mod
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Resonance
0...100
LPF
Off, On

on and off
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99... 99 Sets the wah effect balance

: 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry modulation

source for the wah
Amt
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry modulation

amount for the wah
Wet/Dry

: 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
301
097: P4EQ - Cho/Flng

(Parametric 4-Band EQ Chorus/Flanger)
098: P4EQ - Phaser (Parametric 4Band EQ - Phaser)

andaphaser.
andachorus/flanger.

Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ

Left
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Chorus/Flanger
Phaser
Trim
Resonance
Chorus/Flanger
Trim
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
+
Feedback
Right
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry

Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
P4EQ
a
P4EQ
a
[E]Trim
0...100

level
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18

level
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Depth
0...100

modulation
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100
Feedback
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Sets the phaser effect balance

p.259, p.274
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect balance of the

chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo

source for the phaser
Src
Off...Tempo

source for the chorus/flanger
Amt
100...+100

amount for the phaser
Amt
100...+100

amount for the chorus/flanger
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser output mode

p.305
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output mode for the

chorus/flanger
p.302
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.272
i: [F]Output Mode
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
302
0...100
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
[E]Trim

p.274
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 099: P4EQ - Mt. Delay (Parametric 4-Band EQ - Multitap Delay)
099: P4EQ - Mt. Delay

(Parametric 4-Band EQ Multitap Delay)
100: Comp - Wah (Compressor Wah/Auto Wah)

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandawah.Youcan
changetheorderoftheconnection.
andamultitapdelay.

Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Wah/Auto Wah
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Multitap Delay
Comp
Wah
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Feedback
Delay
High Damp (1)
Trim
(2)
Right
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Auto
D-mod
-mod
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
Wet / Dry
LFO
P4EQ
a

level
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
b
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
d Q
Gain [dB]
a
b
c
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
Gain [dB]
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
p.251
Sets the compressor output level

p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]
18...+18
300...10.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0

p.255
[W]Frequenc
0...100
y Bottom

center frequency
p.257
Frequency
Top
0...100

center frequency
p.257
[w]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO

LFO
500...20.00k

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Src
Off...Tempo

Mode=D-mod
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Resonance
0...100
LPF
Off, On

on and off
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the wah effect balance
Src
Off...Tempo

source for the wah
Amt
100...+100

amount for the wah
Routing
CompWah, Switches the order of the

Wah Comp compressor and wah
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
[D]Tap1 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Tap1 Level
1...100
WAH
MULTITAP DELAY
f
[C]
Sensitivity
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
e
COMPRESSOR
0...100
[E]Trim
0...100

p.290
[D]Tap2 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100

high range
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap delay effect

balance
Src
Off...Tempo

source for the multitap delay
Amt
100...+100

amount for the multitap delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
303
101: Comp - Amp Sim

(Compressor - Amp Simulation)
102: Comp - OD/HiGain

(Compressor - Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanoverdrive/
highgaindistortion.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.

Left
Compressor
EQ Trim
LEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Wet / Dry
Routing
Amp Simulation
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Compressor
3 Band PEQ
HEQ
Comp
Amp Simulation Filter
Comp
Output Level
Driver
Output Level
Output Level
Wet / Dry

Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
COMPRESSOR
a
b
c
d
Right
COMPRESSOR
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251

p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]
a
b
c
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
Routing
CompAmp, Switches the order of the

AmpComp compressor and amp simulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Amt
Selects the type of guitar

amplifier
304
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251

p.251
OD/HI-GAIN
AMP SIM
e
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
[O]
Drive Mode

Gain
high-gain distortion
Drive
1...100

p.263
[O]Output
Level
0...50
Sets the overdrive output level

p.263
Src
Off...Tempo

for the overdrive output level
Amt
50...+50

the overdrive output level
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the overdrive effect balance
Src
Off...Tempo

source for the overdrive
Amt
100...+100

amount for the overdrive
Routing
CompOD/
HG,
OD/HG
Comp
Switches the order of the

compressor and overdrive
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 103: Comp - P4EQ (Compressor - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
103: Comp - P4EQ (Compressor Parametric 4-Band EQ)
104: Comp - Cho/Flng

(Compressor - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandachorus/
flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Left
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ
Compressor
EQ Trim LEQ
Chorus/Flanger
HEQ
Wet / Dry
Routing
Left
Comp
Chorus/Flanger
+
Output Level
Comp
Output Level
Trim
Feedback
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
a
b
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251

p.251
P4EQ
c
[E]Trim
0...100

level
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Routing
CompP4EQ, Switches the order of the

P4EQ Comp compressor and parametric EQ
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251

p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]
CHORUS/FLANGER
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
[F]Delay Time 0.0...1350.0

[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

chorus/flanger
p.305
Routing
Comp
Flanger,
Flanger
Comp

compressor and chorus/flanger
p.305
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry

p.272
h: [F]Output Mode
i: Routing
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
WhenRoutingissettoFlangerComp,[F]OutputMode
willbesettoNormal.
305
105: Comp - Phaser

(Compressor - Phaser)
106: Comp - Mt. Delay

(Compressor - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandaphaser.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandamultitap
delay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Left
Compressor
EQ Trim
LEQ
EQ Trim
Comp
Resonance
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
c
d
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
0...100
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]

d
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
306
0...100

effect is applied
0...100

modulation
100...+100

p.274
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

p.302
Routing
Comp
Phaser,
Phaser
Comp
Wet / Dry
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251

p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain 15...+15

[dB]
MULTITAP DELAY
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Resonance
[C]EQ Trim
Depth
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Right
[P]Manual
f
Output Level

p.251
PHASER
Delay
High Damp (1)
COMPRESSOR
[C]
Sensitivity
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Feedback
Comp
Envelope - Control
COMPRESSOR
Multitap Delay
HEQ
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry
+
Right
Envelope - Control
LEQ
Phaser
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Phaser
HEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing

compressor and phaser
p.305
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
[D]Tap1 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Tap1 Level
0...100
[D]Tap2 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
p.290
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100

high range
p.289
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

balance
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Routing
Comp
Mt.Delay,
Mt.Delay
Comp

compressor and multitap delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 107: Limiter - P4EQ (Limiter - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio
107: Limiter - P4EQ (Limiter Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Output Level
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Threshold
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Louder
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder

Left
Input Level
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
Parametric 4Band EQ
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry
Level
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Limiter
Trim
Gain Adjust
Threshold
Right
Ratio=Inf : 1
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Time
LIMITER
b
c
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0

p.307
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter output gain
[E]Trim
0...100

level
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
p.307
108: Limiter - Cho/Flng

(Limiter - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandachorus/flanger.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
P4EQ
d
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255

Left
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Limiter
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Gain Adjust
Feedback
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
500...20.00k

Band 4
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Routing
LimiterP4EQ, Switches the order of the limiter

P4EQ Limiter and parametric EQ
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: [L]Ratio
a: Threshold [dB]
c: [L]Gain Adjust [dB]
Thisparametersetsthesignalcompression[L]Ratio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
LIMITER
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
Wet/Dry
j

p.255
Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform

p.307
p.307
CHORUS/FLANGER
f
g
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
[F]EQ Trim
0...100
[F]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]

p.272
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

307
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

chorus/flanger
p.305
Routing
Limiter
Flanger,
Flanger
Limiter
Switches the order of the limiter

and chorus/flanger
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
110: Limiter - Mt.Delay

(Limiter - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandamultitapdelay.
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Multitap Delay
Limiter
Feedback
Limiter
109: Limiter - Phaser
Gain Adjust
Right
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
Phaser
Phaser
Gain Adjust
Resonance
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry

Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
LIMITER
Limiter
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
Delay
High Damp (1)
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0

p.307
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24

p.307
MULTITAP DELAY
LIMITER
a
b
c
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24

p.307
f
p.307
PHASER
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the phasers Wet/Dry

modulation source
Amt
100...+100
Sets the phasers Wet/Dry

modulation amount
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

p.302
Routing
Limiter
Phaser,
Phaser
Limiter

p.305
and phaser
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
308
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]

effect is applied
[D]Tap1 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Tap1 Level
Sets the Tap1 output level p.290
0...100
[D]Tap2 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Feedback
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100

high range
p.289
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

balance
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the multitap delays Wet/

Dry modulation source
Amt
100...+100
Sets the multitap delays Wet/Dry

modulation amount
Routing
Limiter
Mt.Delay,
Mt.Delay
Limiter

and multitap delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.274
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 111: Exciter - Comp (Exciter - Compressor)
111: Exciter - Comp (Exciter Compressor)

Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandacompressor.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
112: Exciter - Limiter

Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandalimiter.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Compressor
Exciter
Limiter
Exciter
Exciter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Exciter
Comp
Output Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
EXCITER
EXCITER
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70

emphasized
p.256
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70

emphasized
p.256
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]EQ Trim
0...100
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]
c
d

[dB]
LIMITER
COMPRESSOR
e
f
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[L]Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Routing
Exciter
Limiter,
Limiter
Exciter
Switches the order of the exciter

and limiter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry

p.251
Exciter
Comp,
Comp
Exciter
Switches the order of the exciter

and compressor
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Routing

p.307
p.307
309
113: Exciter - Cho/Flng (Exciter Chorus/Flanger)

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandachorus/flanger.
114: Exciter - Phaser

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.
Left
Wet / Dry
Exciter

Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Exciter
Phaser
Exciter
HEQ
Exciter
Resonance
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Phaser
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
+
Right
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry

Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
EXCITER
EXCITER
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70

emphasized
p.256
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70

emphasized
p.256
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15

[dB]
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15

[dB]
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
310
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

p.302
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
[F]Delay Time 0.0...1350.0

[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

chorus/flanger
p.302
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.272
g
p.274
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 115: Exciter - Mt.Delay (Exciter - Multitap Delay)
115: Exciter - Mt.Delay (Exciter

- Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandamultitapdelay.
Left
Wet / Dry
Multitap Delay
Exciter
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
116: OD/HG - Amp Sim

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Amp
Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgaindistortion
andanampsimulation.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Feedback
Exciter
Delay
High Damp (1)
(2)
Left
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
Wet / Dry
Driver
Output Level
EXCITER

Drive
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70

emphasized
p.256
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]
Right
Wet / Dry
OD/HI-GAIN
a
MULTITAP DELAY
e
[D]Tap1 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Tap1 Level
0...100

p.290
[D]Tap2 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100

high range
p.289
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

balance
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
[O]Drive
Mode

Gain
Drive
1...100

p.263
[O]Output
Level
0...50

p.263
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
50...+50

[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
AMP SIM
h
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6

amplifie
Routing
OD/HG
Amp,
Amp
OD/HG

overdrive and amp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
311
117: OD/HG - Cho/Flng

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Chorus/
Flanger)
andachorus/flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
118: OD/HG - Phaser

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Phaser)
andaphaser.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain

Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
3 Band PEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Phaser
Driver
Output Level
3 Band PEQ

Drive
Chorus/Flanger
Driver
Output Level
Drive
Feedback
Normal
Output Mode
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
OD/HI-GAIN
OD/HI-GAIN
a
[O]Drive
Mode

Gain
Drive
1...100

p.263
[O]Output
Level
0...50

p.263
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
50...+50

[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
312
Drive
1...100

p.263
[O]Output
Level
0...50

p.263
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
50...+50

[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
Src
Off...Tempo

[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth

modulation
0...100

p.274
Feedback
100...+100
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Amt
100...+100

[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

p.305
[F]Output
Mode
Normal, Wet
Invert

chorus/flanger
p.305
Routing
Routing
OD/HG
Flanger,
Flanger
OD/HG

overdrive and chorus / flanger
OD/HG
Phaser,
Phaser OD/ overdrive and phaser
HG
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry

Gain
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
[O]Drive
Mode
p.272
j
p.305
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 119: OD/HG - Mt.Delay (Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Multitap Delay)
119: OD/HG - Mt.Delay

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Multitap Delay)
120: Wah - Amp Sim (Wah Amp Simulation)
andamultitapdelay.
Thiseffectcombinesamonowahandanampsimulation.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Wah/Auto Wah
Feedback
Delay
Driver
High Damp (1)
Wet / Dry
Routing
Multitap Delay
(2)
Amp Simulation
Wah
Wet / Dry
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry

Drive
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Auto
-mod D-mod
D
OD/HI-GAIN
a

Gain
Drive
1...100

p.263
0...50

p.263
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
50...+50

[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Resonance
0...100
Gain [dB]
18...+18
LPF
Off, On
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k


on and off
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the wah effect balance
0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Src
Off...Tempo
Gain [dB]
18...+18

source for the wah
Amt
100...+100

amount for the wah
amplifier
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
f
WAH
i
j
[D]Tap1 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Tap1 Level
0...100
[W]
Frequency
Bottom
0...100

center frequency
p.257
Frequency
Top
0...100

center frequency
p.257
[W]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO

LFO
p.257
Src
Off...Tempo

Mode=D-mod
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MULTITAP DELAY
h
LFO
LFO
[O]Drive
Mode
[O]Output
Level
b
Wet / Dry
AMP SIM
e
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
Routing
Wah Amp, Switches the order of the wah

Amp Wah and amp simulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.290
[D]Tap2 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
Feedback
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100

high range
p.289
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

balance
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
313
[C]Attack
121: Decimator - Amp

(Decimator - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
g

Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Decimator
Amp Simulation
Routing
Decimator
Comp,
Comp
decimator and compressor
Decimator
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
High Damp
Right
Wet / Dry
DECIMATOR
123: AmpSim - Tremolo (Amp

Simulation- Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoampsimulationandatremolo.
[D]Pre LPF
Off, On
Turn the harmonic noise caused

by lowered sampling on and off
p.262
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of high-range

damping
[D]Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...48.00k Sets the sampling frequency
Resolution
4...24
[D]Output
Level
0...100
Sets the decimator output level

p.262

Left
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6

amplifier
Routing
Decimator
Amp,
Amp
decimator and amp simulation
Decimator
Right
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Left
Output Level
Comp
Decimator
Pre LPF
High Damp
Output Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
DECIMATOR
[D]Pre LPF
Off, On
Turn the harmonic noise caused

by lowered sampling on and off
p.262
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of high-range

damping
[D]Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...48.00k Sets the sampling frequency
Resolution
4...24
0...100
Sets the decimator output level

p.262
1...100
[D]Output
Level
p.262
COMPRESSOR
314
[C]
Sensitivity

amplifier
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage, Up, Selects the LFO Waveform p.281
Down
LFO Shape
100...+100

LFO Waveform
p.258
[T]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[T]Depth
0...100

modulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Compressor
Resolution
SS, EL84, 6L6
[T]LFO
Waveform
Wet / Dry
Routing
Decimator
[A]Amplifier
Type
TREMOLO
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
AMP SIM
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandacompressor.
Tremolo
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down
122: Decimator - Comp

(Decimator - Compressor)
Tremolo
p.262
AMP SIM
d
p.251

p.251
Decimator
Pre LPF
Output Level
Resolution
1...100
p.251
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 124: Cho/Flng - Mt.Dly (Chorus/Flanger - Multitap Delay)
124: Cho/Flng - Mt.Dly (Chorus/

Flanger - Multitap Delay)
125: Phaser - Cho/Flng (Phaser

- Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonochorus/flangerandamultitap
delay.
Thiseffectcombinesamonophaserandachorus/flanger.
Left

Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Multitap Delay
Phaser
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
Delay
(1)
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry High Damp
(2)
Resonance
Mt.Dly
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ
Trim
Phaser
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
c
d
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
[F]EQ Trim
0...100
[F]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
PreHEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...1 : 99,
Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.272
c
Tap1 Level
b
c
0...100
d
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
e
p.290
Feedback
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

p.259, p.274
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
p.274
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
[F]EQ Trim
0...100
[F]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
PreHEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert

chorus/flanger
p.302
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
[D]Tap2 Time 0.0...1360.0

[msec]
100...+100
0.02...20.00
CHORUS/FLANGER
MULTITAP DELAY
[D]Tap1 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]

high range
p.289
[D]Mt.DelayW Dry, 1 : 99...

et/Dry
99 : 1, Wet

balance
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
f
g
p.272
315
Normally,set[G]InputReverbMixtoDry(thegateis
controlledonlybythedrysound).Ifyouwishtoextendthe
gatetime,setthe[G]InputReverbMixvaluehigherand
adjusttheThresholdvalue.
126: Reverb - Gate

Thiseffectcombinesamonoreverbandagate.
Left
Wet / Dry
Reverb
EQ Trim
Pre Delay
Reverb
Gate
Reverb
Balance
LEQ HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
Input Reverb Mix
Input
Envelope - Control
Gate+Dmpr
D-mod Envelope Select
Gate
REVERB
a
b
c
[R]Reverb
Time [sec]
0.1...10.0
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
[R]Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the delay time of the reverb

sound and gate control signal
[R]EQ Trim
0...100
Reverb
Balance
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the reverb effect balance
[R]PreLEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High

[R]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
15.0...+15.0

[dB]
GATE
[G]Envelope
Select
Switches between modulation

D-mod, Input source control and input signal
control
p.316
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls the gate when
p.316
[G]Input
Reverb Mix
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

dry and reverb sounds of the
gate control signal
p.316
Threshold
0...100
Sets the gate threshold level

p.316
[G]Polarity
+,
Switches between non-invert and

invert of the gate on/off state
p.254
[G]Attack
1...100
p.254
Release
1...100
p.254
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
h
i
f: [G]Envelope Select
f: Src
g: [G]Input Reverb Mix
g: Threshold
The[G]EnvelopeSelectparameterenablesyoutoselect
whetherturningthegateonandoffistriggeredbytheinput
signallevelorcontrolleddirectlybythemodulationsource.
YoucanselectfromOfftoGate2+DmprfortheSrc
parametertospecifythemodulationsource.
When[G]EnvelopeSelectissettoInput,thegateis
controlledbythelevelofsignalsthatarethecombinationof
thedrysoundandthereverbsound.Whenthesignallevel
exceedsthethreshold,thegateopensandthereverbsound
isoutput.
316
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 126: Reverb - Gate
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono)

127:P4EQ//P4EQ(Parametric4BandEQ//Parametric4
BandEQ)through171:BPMDl//BPMDl(MultitapBPM
Delay//MultitapBPMDelay)areparalleleffects.
Thepanandeffectbalanceofeacheffectcanbeset
independently.
Inthescreen,theLsideisshownas[1],andtheRsideas
[2].
Theseprovidevariouscombinationsof4bandEQ,
Compressor,Limiter,Exciter,Overdrive,Wah,Chorus/
Flanger,Phaser,andMultitapDelay,asdescribedbelow.
P4EQ (4-band EQ)
Limiter
LIMITER
a
Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...
C064...R127
Sets the stereo image
P4EQ
a
Trim
0...100

Band 1
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
B2 Cutoff [Hz] 50...5.00k

Band 2
0.5...10.0

p.255
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
B3 Cutoff [Hz] 300...10.00k

d
B1 Cutoff [Hz] 20...1.00k

Band 3
0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of Band3

p.255
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
B4 Cutoff [Hz] 500...20.00k

Band 4

p.255
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R Sets the stereo image

127
EXCITER
a
Exciter Blend 100...+100

Exciter effect
p.256
Emphasis
Frequency
0...70

emphasized
p.256
0...100
Trim
Pre LEQ Gain 15...+15

[dB]

[dB]
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
0D/HG (Overdrive)
OD/HI GAIN
Comp (Compressor)
COMPRESSOR
a
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
Attack
1...100
p.251
EQ Trim

[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain

15...+15
[dB]
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
f
Src

: 1, Wet
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)

127
p.307
Exciter
Drive Mode

Gain
Drive
1...100
0...100

p.307

p.263
Output Level 0...50
Src
Off...Tempo

p.263
Amt
50...+50

the output level
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)

127
317
Wah
BPM Dly (Multi-tap BPM Delay)
WAH
a
MULTITAP BPM DELAY

Frequency
Bottom
0...100

center frequency
p.257
Frequency
Top
0...100

center frequency
p.257
Auto,
Sweep Mode D-mod,
LFO

LFO
p.257
Src

Mode=D-mod
Off...Tempo
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Resonance
0...100
Low Pass
Filter
Off, On

on and off
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)
BPM
LFO
Waveform

Sets the delay time
Depth
0...100

modulation
Feedback
100...+100
EQ Trim
0...100
c
d
e

[dB]
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)

127
Phaser
PHASER
a
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
Manual
0...100

effect is applied
Depth
0...100

modulation
Resonance
100...+100
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)

127
318
Tap1 Base
Note
...

Tap1
p.285
Times
x1...x32

Tap1
p.285
Tap2 Base
Note
...

Tap2
p.285
Times
x1...x32

Tap2
p.285
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
High
Damp[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
p.272

[dB]

upper limit
p.295
Tap1 Level
Delay [msec] 0.0...1350.0
Time Over? R ---, OVER!
f
0.02...20.00

upper limit
p.295
Cho/Flng (Chorus / Flanger)

CHORUS/FLANGER

p.274

p.285

127
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 127: P4EQ // P4EQ (Parametric 4-Band EQ // Parametric 4-Band EQ)
127: P4EQ // P4EQ (Parametric

4-Band EQ // Parametric 4Band EQ)
ThiseffectconnectstwofourbandEQ(p.317)unitsin
parallel.
130: P4EQ // Exciter (Parametric

4-Band EQ // Exciter)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andanexciter
(p.317)inparallel.
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan
Parametric 4Band EQ
Left
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Right
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim
Exciter
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Parametric 4Band EQ
128: P4EQ // Comp (Parametric

4-Band EQ // Compressor)
131: P4EQ // OD/HG

(Parametric 4-Band EQ //
Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)anda
compressor(p.317)inparallel.
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Pan
Left
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Output Level
Output Level
Compressor
Trim
LEQ
3 Band PEQ
Driver
HEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Envelope - Control
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
129: P4EQ // Limiter (Parametric

4-Band EQ // Limiter)
132: P4EQ // Wah (Parametric

4-Band EQ // Wah)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andalimiter
(p.317)inparallel.
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andawah
(p.318)inparallel.
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Left
Trim
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Parametric 4Band EQ
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Wah
Envelope
Envelope - Control
LFO
Sweep Mode
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Pan
D -mod
Wah / Auto Wah
319
133: P4EQ // Cho/Flng

Chorus/Flanger)
136: Comp // Comp

(Compressor // Compressor)
Thiseffectconnectstwocompressor(p.317)unitsinparallel.
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andachorus/
flanger(p.318)inparallel.
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Pan
Output Level
Left
Output Level
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Compressor
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Envelope - Control
Right
Feedback
Trim
LEQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Chorus / Flanger
137: Comp // Limiter

(Compressor // Limiter)
134: P4EQ // Phaser (Parametric

4-Band EQ // Phaser)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andaphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andalimiter
(p.317)inparallel.
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Parametric 4Band EQ
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Pan
Gain Adjust
Left
Limiter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Limiter
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Phaser
138: Comp // Exciter

(Compressor // Exciter)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andanexciter
(p.317)inparallel.
135: P4EQ // BPM Dly

Multitap BPM Delay)
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andamultitap
BPMdelay(p.318)inparallel.
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Output Level
Exciter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
LEQ
HEQ
Right
Left
Wet / Dry
Exciter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
320
Wet / Dry
Pan
Pan
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 139: Comp // OD/HG (Compressor // Overdrive Hi.Gain)
139: Comp // OD/HG

(Compressor // Overdrive
Hi.Gain)
142: Comp // Phaser

(Compressor // Phaser)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andaphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Left
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Resonance
Compressor
Output Level
Output Level
Phaser
3 Band PEQ
Driver
LFO: Tri / Sine
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Pan
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
140: Comp // Wah (Compressor

// Wah)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andawah(p.318)
inparallel.
143: Comp // BPM Dly

(Compressor // Multitap BPM
Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andamultitap
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
HEQ
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Trim
Output Level
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Output Level
Wah
Feedback
Envelope
LFO
Sweep Mode
Right
(2)
Delay
-mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Wet / Dry
Base Note x Times
Pan
Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
141: Comp // Cho/Flng

(Compressor // Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andachorus/
144: Limiter // Limiter

Thiseffectconnectstwolimiter(p.317)unitsinparallel.
Compressor
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pan
Pan
Left
Left
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Limiter
Compressor
Gain Adjust
Output Level
Gain Adjust
Feedback
Trim
LEQ
Limiter
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Envelope - Control
Right
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Right
Pan
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Chorus / Flanger
321
145: Limiter // Exciter

Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andanexciter(p.317)in
parallel.
148: Limiter // Cho/Fl (Limiter /

/ Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
Gain Adjust
HEQ
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Exciter
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Chorus / Flanger
146: Limiter // OD/HG (Limiter /

/ Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
149: Limiter // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andaphaser(p.318)in
parallel.
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Limiter
Left
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Output Level
Limiter
Gain Adjust
3 Band PEQ
Driver
Resonance
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Phaser
147: Limiter // Wah

Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andawah(p.318)in
parallel.
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
150: Limiter // BPM Dl (Limiter

// Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andamultitapBPM
delay(p.318)inparallel.
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Wah
Envelope - Control
Envelope
LFO
Sweep Mode
Limiter
Right
Gain Adjust
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Feedback
Wah / Auto Wah
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
322
Wet / Dry
Pan
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 151: Exciter // Exciter
151: Exciter // Exciter

Thiseffectconnectstwoexciter(p.317)unitsinparallel.
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
154: Exciter // Cho/Fl (Exciter //

Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
Left
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Pan
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Chorus / Flanger
152: Exciter // OD/HG (Exciter //

Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
155: Exciter // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andaphaser(p.318)in
parallel.
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
LEQ
Exciter
HEQ
Exciter
Trim
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LEQ
HEQ
3 Band PEQ
Exciter
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Resonance
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Phaser
153: Exciter // Wah

Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andawah(p.318)in
parallel.
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
156: Exciter // BPM Dl (Exciter /

/ Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andamultitapBPM
Exciter
Exciter
Wah
Envelope
LFO
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Sweep Mode
Trim
Right
D -mod
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
Pan
Wah / Auto Wah

Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
323
157: OD/HG // OD/HG

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain //
Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
160: OD/HG // Phaser

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain // Phaser)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andaphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
Thiseffectconnectstwooverdrive(p.317)unitsinparallel.
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Left
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Output Level
Driver
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
3 Band PEQ
Resonance
Driver
Phaser
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
158: OD/HG // Wah (Overdrive/

Hi.Gain // Wah)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andawah(p.318)
inparallel.
161: OD/HG // BPMDly

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain // Multitap
BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andamultitap
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Wah
Output Level
Envelope
LFO
Sweep Mode
3 Band PEQ
Feedback
Right
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
(2)
Delay
Wah / Auto Wah
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
159: OD/HG // Cho/Fln

(Overdrive/Hi.Gain // Chorus/
Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andachorus/
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
162: Wah // Wah

Thiseffectconnectstwowah(p.318)unitsinparallel.
Wah / Auto Wah
D -mod
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO
Output Level
Pan
3 Band PEQ
Feedback
Wah
Envelope
HEQ
LFO
Chorus/Flanger
Sweep Mode
Right
D -mod
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wah / Auto Wah

Wet / Dry
Chorus / Flanger
324
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
Wah
Driver
LEQ
Pan
Envelope
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Trim
Wet / Dry
Left
Pan
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 163: Wah // Cho/Flng (Wah // Chorus/Flanger)
163: Wah // Cho/Flng (Wah //

Chorus/Flanger)
166: Cho/Fl // Cho/Fl (Chorus/

Flanger // Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
Thiseffectconnectstwochorus/flanger(p.318)unitsin
parallel.
Chorus / Flanger
Wah / Auto Wah
-mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Sweep Mode
LFO
Chorus/Flanger
Envelope
Wah
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
Feedback
Feedback
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Right
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus / Flanger
164: Wah // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andaphaser(p.318)in
parallel.
167: Cho/Fl // Phaser (Chorus/

Flanger // Phaser)
Thiseffectconnectsachorus/flanger(p.318)andphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
Wah / Auto Wah
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Sweep Mode
LFO
Chorus / Flanger
Envelope
Wah
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
Resonance
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Resonance
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Phaser
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Phaser
165: Wah // BPM Dly (Wah //

Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andamultitapBPMdelay
(p.318)inparallel.
168: Cho/Fl // BPMDly (Chorus/

Flanger // Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsachorus/flanger(p.318)andamultitap
Wah / Auto Wah
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Sweep Mode
LFO
Chorus / Flanger
Envelope
Wah
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
Trim
(2)
Delay
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
(1)
Feedback
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Wet / Dry
Pan
Base Note x Times
(2)
Delay
High Damp
Multitap BPM Delay
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
325
169: Phaser // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectstwophaser(p.318)unitsinparallel.
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Resonance
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Phaser
170: Phaser // BPMDly (Phaser //

Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsaphaser(p.318)andamultitapBPM
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Resonance
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl

(Multitap BPM Delay //
Multitap BPM Delay)
ThiseffectconnectstwomultitapBPMdelay(p.318)unitsin
parallel.
Multitap BPM Delay

BPM
Tempo
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
High Damp
(1)
Delay
(2)
Feedback
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Multitap BPM Delay
326
Double Size 172: St. Mltband Limiter (Stereo Multiband Limiter)
Double Size
DoublesizeeffectscanbeusedonlywithinserteffectsIFX1,
2,3,4andmastereffectMFX1.
172: St. Mltband Limiter

(Stereo Multiband Limiter)
173: PianoBody/Damper
(PianoBody/Damper Simulation)
Thiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthepianosoundboard
causedbythestringvibration,andalsosimulatesthe
resonanceofotherstringsthatarenotbeingplayedwhen
youpressthedamperpedal.Itwillcreateaveryrealistic
soundwhenappliedtoacousticpianosounds.
Thisisastereomultibandlimiter.
Left
Band-Pass Filters
Low
Envelope - Control
Mid
Envelope - Control
High
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Low
Envelope - Control
Mid
Right
Envelope - Control
High
Left
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Offset
D
a
Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0

p.307
Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
Low Offset
[dB]
40...0
Sets the low range gain of trigger

signal
p.253
Mid Offset
[dB]
40...0
Sets the mid range gain of

trigger signal
p.253
High Offset
[dB]
40...0
Sets the high range gain of

trigger signal
p.253
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Src
Off...Tempo

for the output gain
Amt
63...+63

the output gain
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Piano
Body/Damper
Simulation
Gain Adjust
-mod
Damper
Sound Board 0...100

Depth
Sets the intensity of resonance of

the sound board
p.327
Damper
Depth
0...100
Sets the intensity of the string

resonance created when the
damper pedal is pressed p.327
Src
Off...Tempo

damper effect
p.327
Tone
1...100
Sets tonal quality of effect sound

p.327
Mid Shape
0...36
Sets the mid range of tonal

quality
p.327
Tune
50...+50
Fine tuning
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.307
f
p.327
a: Sound Board Depth

Thisparametersetstheintensityofresonanceofthepiano
soundboard.
b: Damper Depth
b: Src
Thisparametersetstheresonanceintensityoftheother
stringscreatedwhenthedamperpedalispressed.TheSrc
parameterselectsthemodulationsourcefromwhichthe
dampereffectisapplied.Usually,selectDamper#64Pdl
(Damperpedal).
specifiedfortheSrcparameteris63orsmaller,andthe
effectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.
c: Tone
d: Mid Shape
Theseparameterscontrolthetonalqualityoftheeffect
sound.
e: Tune
Sincethiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthestrings,the
soundvariesdependingonthepitch.Ifyouhavechanged
tuningusingtheMasterTune(GlobalP0),adjustthis
parametervalue.
327
174: Vocoder
Thiseffectappliesthetimbralcharacterofaonesignal(the
modulator)toasecondsignal(thecarrier).
OntheKROME,anexternalsourcesuchasamiccannotbe
usedasthemodulatorsource,butyoucancreateunique
effectsbyusinganinternalsoundsourceasthemodulator.
Tryselectingvoicetypesounds,rhythms,orsoundeffects
asthemodulator.Themostsuitablechoicesforthecarrier
aresoundsthatcontainalargenumberofovertones,suchas
stringsordistortedguitar.Fordetailsonhowtomake
settings,refertoExample:Vocoder(Combination)on
page 238.
175: OD/HyperGain Wah

(Overdrive/Hyper Gain Wah)
Thisdistortioneffecthastwomodes:overdriveandhyper
gainthatproducesastrongdistortion.Ahigherhighgain
settingisrequiredforthiseffectrelativetoanormalsize
effect.
Left
Wet / Dry
Pre Low-cut
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hyper-Gain

Drive
3 Band EQ
Amp Simulation
Driver
Output Level
Wet: Stereo In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Direct Mix
Left
Wet / Dry
Carrier Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Envelope
Modulator Trim
Band Pass Filter
Wah
Modulator Select
Modulator Source
Modulator High Mix
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1
Noise Level
FX Control BUS 2
Noise
Generator
Carrier Trim
0...100
Sets the Carrier input level
Modulator
Trim
0...100
Sets the Modulator input level
Modulator
Source
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the modulator input
Modulater
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Selects whether to use the left/

right mix, only left, or only right
of the modulator input
Formant Shift 2...+2
Sets the height of the frequency

for the vocoder effect
p.328
Response

to the modulator input
0...100
Noise Level
0...100
Sets the noise mix level to the

Carrier
p.328
Src
Off...Tempo

for the noise mix level
Amt
100...+100

the noise mix level
Modulator
High Mix
0...100
Sets the high-range output level

of the modulator
p.328
Low Gain [dB] 12...+12
Sets the low-range output level

of the vocoder
High Gain
[dB]
Sets the high-range output level

of the vocoder
12...+12
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
e: Formant Shift
ByoffsettingtheCarrierfilter,youcanadjusttheheightof
thefrequencyrangetowhichthevocodereffectisapplied.
Thetonalqualitywillchangesignificantly.
g: Noise Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutomixwhitenoisewiththe
Carrier.
h: Modulator High Mix

Thisparametersetsthehighrangeoutputlevelofthe
modulatorsound.Ifthemodulatorisahumanvoice,itwill
makethewordsmoreclear.
328
Switches Wah on/off
Src
Off...Tempo

that switches the Wah on and off
p.263
Sw
Toggle,
Moment

switches the Wah on and off
p.263
Wah Sweep
Range
10...+10
Sets the range of Wah
Wah Sweep
Src
Off...Tempo

that controls the Wah
p.263
Drive Mode
Overdrive,
Hyper-Gain
Switches between overdrive and

hi-gain distortion
Drive
1...120

p.263
Pre Low-cut
0...10
Sets the low range cut amount

of the distortion input
p.263
Off, On
p.263
p.263
Output Level 0...50
Src
Off...Tempo

p.263
Amt
50...+50

the output level
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k

Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 1
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k

0.5...10.0

EQ 2
p.255
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Direct Mix
0...50
Sets the amount of the dry

sound mixed to the distortion
Speaker
Simulation
Off, On

on/off
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Double Size 176: GuitarAmp + P4EQ (Guitar Amp Model + Parametric 4-Band EQ)
a: Amplifier Type
d: Presence
176: GuitarAmp + P4EQ

(Guitar Amp Model +
Parametric 4-Band EQ)
IftheAmplifierTypeisVOXAC15...VOXAC30TB,thissets
theattenuationofthehighfrequencyrange.Forothertypes,
thissetstheboostofthehighfrequencyrange.
Thiscombinesaguitarampsimulation(whicheven
faithfullyreplicatesthedistortionandtonecontrolcircuitry)
withafourbandequalizer.
Byusingthisinconjunctionwith021:St.GuitarCabinet
(StereoGuitarCabinet)onp.264,youcanobtainaneven
morerealisticguitarsoundthatsimulatesaguitaramp+
speakercabinet.
ThiscorrespondstotheCutknobcontrolofampsmadeby
theVOXCorporation.
e: Post P4EQ
Bychainingthiswith19:St.GuitarCabinetyoucansimulate
thecombinationofaguitarampandspeakercabinet.Inthis
case,werecommendthatyousetPostP4EQtoThru,but
ifnecessaryyoucanturnitOnandadjustthetone.
Recommended Combinations of Guitar Amp Models

and Cabinet Simulators:

Left
Wet / Dry
Amplifier Type
Volume
VOXAC15
Guitar Amp Model

Parametric 4Band EQ
Right
Wet / Dry
d
e
-mod
Amplifier
Type
VOX AC15,
VOX AC15TB,
VOX AC30,
VOX AC30TB,
UK BLUES, UK
70'S,
UK 80'S,
UK 90'S,
UK MODERN,
US MODERN, Selects the type of the amplifier
US HIGAIN,
p.329
BOUTIQUE
OD,
BOUTIQUE
CL,
BLACK 2x12,
TWEED 1x12,
TWEED 4x10
Drive Gain
0...100
Volume
0...100
Sets the input gain

Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

the output level
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Post P4EQ
Thru, On
Selects through or on for the

equalizer
p.329
VOXAC15TB
VOXAC151x12
VOXAC30
VOXAC302x12
VOXAC30TB
VOXAC302x12
UKBLUES
UKH304x12
UK70S
UKH304x12
UK80S
UKT754x12
UK90S
UKT754x12
UKMODERN
UKT754x12,USV304x12
USMODERN
USV304x12
USHIGAIN
USV304x12,UKT754x12
BOUTIQUEOD
UKH304x12
BOUTIQUECL
UKH304x12
BLACK2x12
BLACK2x12
TWEED1x12
TWEED1x12
TWEED4x10
TWEED4x10
p.60)
177: G.Amp Clean Combo

Thismodelsthecleanchannelofaampthatwentonsalein
1975andcontainedtwo12speakers.Asthenamesuggests,
itproducesacleantonewithatightsoundingcharacter,and
adeepandcompactlowend.
p.329
Band1 Cutoff
20...1.00k
[Hz]

Band 1
0.5...10.0
Sets Band 1s bandwidth
Gain [dB]
18...+18

[Hz]

Band 2
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
178: G.Amp California

ThisAmericancomboampwithfour10speakerswas
producedduringtheyears19631968,andwasknownfor
itsbig,cleansoundanditswarmandhuskysoundwhen
drivenheavily.

[Hz]

Band 3
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Band4 Cutoff
500...20.00k
[Hz]

Band 4
0.5...10.0
Cabinet Type
VOXAC151x12
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
179: G.Amp Tweed

ThisAmericanmadetweedcovered1957modelcombo
ampwithtwo12speakersisknownforitsrich,cleantone
thatisidealforclassicrock,blues,andcountry.Byraising
thevolumeyoucanalsoproduceapowerfulandpunchy
overdrivesound.
329
180: G.Amp Modded OD

Thismodelsa100WboutiqueampheadproducedinNorth
Hollywood.Anoverdrivetonewitharichharmonic
structureiscombinedwitharelaxedsustain,makingforan
enjoyableplayingexperience.
181: BassTubeAmp+Cab. (Bass

Tube Amp Model + Cabinet)
Thissimulatesabassamp(withgainanddrive)andspeaker
cabinet.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Volume
Volume
Guitar Amp Model
Bass Amp Model2
Cabinet Simulator
Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
a
Gain
0...100
Sets the input gain
Volume
0...100
Source
Off...Tempo

Volume
Amount
100...+100

Volume
Selects the type of the amplifier

p.329
a
STUDIO
COMBO
A tube combo ideal for the

Motown sound
VOX AC100
A 100W tube amp AC100 made

by Vox
UK MAJOR
A 200W tube amp made in the

UK
Drive Gain
0...100
Sets the input gain
Volume
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

the output level
Amplifier
Type
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

Source
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100

Wet/Dry
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Cabinet
Simulator
Off, On
Switches the cabinet simulator

on/off
LA - 4x10,
MODERN 4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC -8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO - 1x15,
Selects the cabinet type
Cabinet Type JAZZ - 1x15,
p.265, p.330
VOX AC100 2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
Amount
100...+100
Examples of amp and cabinet combinations

Werecommendthatyouusetheseampmodeleffectsina
chainwiththecabinetmodeleffect(S21:St.GtCab).Youare
freetouseanycombinationtocreateavarietyofsounds,so
tryoutvariouscombinationsandlistentotheresult.Here
aresometypicalcombinations.
1x12 TWEED
177: G,Amp Clean Combo
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
1x12 TWEED
178: G.Amp California
4x10 TWEED
1x12 TWEED

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
180: G.Amp Modded OD
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
179: G.Amp Tweed
Wet/Dry
4x12 UK T75
a: Amplifier Type
i: Cabinet Type
4x12 US V30
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and

Cabinets:
Amplifier Type
Cabinet Type
STUDIOCOMBO
STUDIO1x15
AC100
VOXAC1002x15
UKMAJOR
UK4x15,UK4x12
p.60)
330
Double Size 182: EP Cabinet/Drive
182: EP Cabinet/Drive
Thisfaithfullysimulatesthecharacteristicsofthepower
ampandspeakercabinetofafamousmodeloftinetype
electricpiano.Itproducesatonewithadistinctivesenseof
driveandwarmth.
Tine EP I,
Cabinet Type Tine EP II,
Reed EP
Select the power amp and

speaker cabinet.
Drive Switch
Off, On
Switches drive on/off
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation source to

switch drive on/off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for drive

on/off modulation
00.0100
Sets the amount of overdrive

and distortion in the amp
Src
Off...Tempo

Drive
Amt
100...+100

Drive
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Drive
c
Amt
184: Multitap Cho/Delay

(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
ThiseffecthassixchorusblockswithdifferentLFOphases.
Youcanproduceacomplexstereoimagebysettinga
differentdelaytimeanddepthforeachblock.Youcan
controlthedelayoutputlevelviaamodulationsource.
Left
Feedback
Tap2 Delay
Tap4 Delay
Tap5 Delay
Tap6 Delay
Right
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
60 [degree]
240 [degree]
120 [degree]
300 [degree]
Wet / Dry
Panning Preset
LFO: Triangle
D -mod
Atlowersettings,theampisveryclean;asyouincreasethe
Drive,itgetsdirtierandmoredistorted.Theoutputlevelis
compensated,soincreasingDrivecausesonlyamoderate
increaseinperceivedvolume.
183: St. Mic + PreAmp (Stereo

Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
Thisisastereomicandpreampsimulator(See028:Mic
Model+PreAmp(MicModeling+PreAmp)onpage 267.).
Forexampleyoumightusethistosimulatemicingofa
stereosourcesuchasarotaryspeaker.
0.02...13.00
Tap1 (000)
[msec]
0...2000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or modulation

source for the control of Tap1
output
p.332
Tap2 (180)
[msec]
0...2000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff (Dm),
OffOn (Dm)

output
p.332
Tap3 (060)
[msec]
0...2000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)

output
p.332
Tap4 (240)
[msec]
0...2000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)

output
p.332
Tap5 (120)
[msec]
0...2000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)

output
p.332
Tap6 (300)
[msec]
0...2000

degrees) delay time
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)

output
p.332
Left
Wet / Dry
Tube Pre Amp
Output Level
Tube Pre Amp
On/Off Control
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Mic Simulation
Tap3 Delay
c: Drive
Mic Simulation
Wet / Dry
Tap1 Delay
Right
Wet / Dry
331
Panning
Preset
1:L12345
6 R,
2 : L 135 246 R, Selects the stereo panning
3 : L 1 3 5 2 4 pattern for each tap
6 R,
p.332
4:L14563
2R
184: St. Pitch Shifter (Stereo

Pitch Shifter)
Tap1
Feedback
100...+100
Thisisastereopitchshifter.Thepitchshiftamountforthe
leftandrightchannelscanbereversedfromeachother.
Src
Off...Tempo

for the Tap output level,
feedback amount, and effect
balance
Amt
100...+100

Tap1 feedback amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Src
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry

Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Input Level
Delay
Pre
Post
Feedback Position
Pre
Input Level
Pitch Shifter
Feedback
Spread
Post
Delay
High Damp
Right
Wet / Dry
Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
p.287
AlwaysOn:Outputisalwayson.(Nomodulation)
L/R Pitch
Normal,
Up/Down
AlwaysOff:Outputisalwaysoff.(Nomodulation)

2tone]

steps of a semitone
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo

pitch shift amount
p.285
Amt
24...+24

pitch shift amount
p.285
Fine [cent]
100...+100

steps of one cent
p.285
Amt
100...+100

pitch shift amount
p.285
L Delay
[msec]
0...2000

channel
R Delay
[msec]
0...2000

channel
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post

connection
b, c, d, e, f, g: Status
TheseparameterssettheoutputstatusofeachTap.
OnOff(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromontooff
dependingonthemodulationsource.
OffOn(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromofftoon
dependingonthemodulationsource.
Combiningtheseparameters,youcanchangefrom4phase
chorustotwotapdelaybycrossfadingthemgraduallyvia
themodulationsourceduringaperformance.
h: Panning Preset
Thisparameterselectscombinationsofstereoimagesofthe
tapoutputs.
Determines whether or not the

L/R pitch shift amount is inverted
p.332
p.285
p.285
100...+100

Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Spread
p.289
h
a: L/R Pitch
WhenyouselectUp/Downforthisparameter,thepitchshift
amountfortherightchannelwillbereversed.Ifthepitch
shiftamountispositive,thepitchoftheleftchannelis
raised,andthepitchoftherightchannelislowered.
332
Double Size 185: St. PitchShift BPM (Stereo Pitch Shifter BPM)
185: St. PitchShift BPM (Stereo

Pitch Shifter BPM)
186: Rotary SpeakerOD

(Rotary Speaker Overdrive)
Thisstereopitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimeto
matchthesongtempo.
Thisisastereorotaryspeakereffect.Ithasaninternal
speakersimulatorthatsimulatesoverdrive(recreatingthe
ampdistortion)andcharacteristicsoftherotaryspeaker,
producingaveryrealisticrotaryspeakersound.

Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Input Level
Pre
Pre
Pitch Shifter
Left
Post
Feedback Position
Input Level
Delay
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Spread
Horn
Post
Delay
High Damp
Right
Overdrive
Rotary Speaker
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Rotor
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Speaker Simulation
Base Note x Times
Right
Wet / Dry
Base Note x Times
Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
p.285
L/R Pitch
Normal,
Up/Down

steps of a semitone
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo

pitch shift amount
p.285
Amt
24...+24

pitch shift amount
p.285
100...+100

steps of one cent
p.285
100...+100

pitch shift amount Sets the
modulation amount of pitch
shift amount
p.285
c
Amt
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop

Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
Overdrive
Off, On
Switches overdrive on/off
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation source to

switch overdrive on/off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for

overdrive on/off modulation
p.334
Overdrive
Gain
0...100
Determines the degree of

distortion
Overdrive
Level
0...100
Overdrive
Tone
0...15
Sets the tonal quality of the

overdrive
Speaker
Simulator
Off, On

on/off

p.285
Mode Switch Rotate, Stop
Switches between speaker

rotation and stop
Src
Off...Tempo

Rotate/Stop
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Rotate/

Stop modulation
p.287
---, OVER!

the upper limit
p.285
Sw
L Delay Base
Note
...

time
p.285
Speed Switch Slow, Fast
Switches the speaker rotation

speed between slow and fast
Src
Off...Tempo

Slow/Fast
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Slow/

Fast modulation
p.287
R Delay Base
Note
...

time
p.285
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Sets the volume balance

between the high-range horn
and low-range rotor
Times
x1...x32

time
p.285
Manual
SpeedCtrl
Off...Tempo
Sets a modulation source for

direct control of rotation speed
p.287
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post

connection
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
Spread
100...+100

Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
On/Off

the upper limit
p.285
D
D -mod
D -mod
D -mod
Determines whether or not the

L/R pitch shift amount is inverted
p.332

2tone]
Fine [cent]
-mod
p.285
p.287
Sets how quickly the horn

rotation speed changes
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-frequency)

horn rotation speed. Standard
value is 1.00. Stop stops the
rotation
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Sets how quickly the rotor speed

changes
p.287
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-frequency) rotor

rotation speed. Standard value is
1.0. Stop stops the rotation
p.285
Mic Distance 0...100
Distance between the microphone and rotary speaker

p.287

Wet/Dry
Mic Spread
0...100
Angle of left and right microp.287

phones

Wet/Dry
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
333
a: Sw
Thisparameterdetermineshowtoswitchon/offthe
overdriveviaamodulationsource.
WhenSw=Toggle,overdriveisturnedon/offeachtimethe
pedalorjoystickisoperated.
Overdrivewillbeswitchedon/offeachtimethevalue
ofthemodulationsourceexceeds64.
WhenSw=Moment,overdriveisappliedonlywhenyou
pressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Onlywhenthevalueforthemodulationsourceis64or
higher,theoverdriveeffectisapplied.
189: St/Cross Long Delay

(Stereo/Cross Long Delay)
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeedback
delayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossoverbetween
leftandrightbychangingthefeedbackrouting.Youcanset
amaximumof2,730msecforthedelaytime.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Input Level D-mod

Stereo/Cross
188: L/C/R Long Delay
Left
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
C Delay
334
L Delay Time
0.0...2730.0
[msec]

channel

[msec]

channel
L Feedback
100...+100

the left channel
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
Amt
100...+100

R Feedback
100...+100

the right channel
Amt
100...+100

Wet / Dry
L Delay Time
0...5460
[msec]
Sets the delay time of TapL
Level
0...50
Stereo, Cross
Level
C Delay Time
0...5460
[msec]
Sets the delay time of TapC
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Level
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Spread
50...+50

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
0...50
R Delay Time
0...5460
[msec]
Sets the delay time of TapR
Level
0...50
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100

TapC
Src
Off...Tempo

Amt
100...+100

the TapC feedback
High Damp
[%]
0...100

high range
p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Spread
0...50

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
p.289
Stereo/Cross
R Delay
Switches between stereo delay

and cross-feedback delay
Spread
Level
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Level
Low Damp
Spread
Right
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Stereo/Cross
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstoleft,right
andcenterrespectively.Youcansetamaximumof
5,460msecforthedelaytime.
Input Level D-mod
Low Damp
Delay
p.289
Double Size 190: Hold Delay
190: Hold Delay

Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandplaysitback
repeatedly.Youcancontrolthestartofrecordingandreset
viaamodulationsource.Easytouseforrealtime
performances.
Left
Wet / Dry
Delay
Pan
Loop Time: Auto/ ...5400ms

Right
Wet / Dry
-mod
D
D -mod
REC Control
Tempo
RST Control
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
b: Loop BPM Sync

c: BPM
d: Loop Base Note
d: Times
IfLoopBPMSyncison,theTimessettingisignored;the
looptimeisdeterminedbyBPM,LoopBaseNote,and
Times.Eveninthiscase,thedelaytimecannotexceed
10,800msec.
Holdprocedure(whenLoopTime=Auto)
1. RecSrcJS+Y:#01
ResetSrcJSY:#02
ManualRECControlRECOff
ManualRSTControlRESET
LoopTime[msec]Auto
MIDI/TempoSyncOff
Itshouldbenotedthatallrecordingswillbedeleted
whileResetisOn.
2. ManualRSTControlOff
ResetiscancelledandtheunitentersRecreadymode.
Auto,
1...10800
Sets Automatic loop time setup

mode or specifies loop time
p.335
Loop BPM
Sync
Off, On
Specifies whether delay time is

set in milliseconds, or as a note
value relative to tempo
p.335
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.335
Time Over?
---, OVER!
An error indication that appears

if delay time exceeds the upper
limit when MIDI/Tempo
Sync=On
Loop Base
Note
...

p.335
Times
x1...x32

p.335
REC Control
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects control source for

recording
p.335
RST Control
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects control source for reset

p.335
Manual REC
Control
REC Off,
REC On
Sets the recording switch
Manual RST
Control
Off, RESET
Sets the reset switch
Pan
L100...L1, C,
R1...R100
Sets the stereo image of the

effect
Src
Off...Tempo

stereo image of the effect
Amt
100...+100

stereo image of the effect
e: REC Control Src

g: Manual REC Control
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
RECControlSrcselectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrols
recording.
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
Loop Time
[msec]
p.335
p.335
a: Loop Time [msec]

WithAuto,thelooptimeisautomaticallyset.Otherwise,
youcanspecifythelooptime.
WhenAutoisselected,theLoopTimeisautomaticallysetto
thetimeittakesforaperformancerecordedwhilethe
ModulationSourceorManualRECControlison.However,
ifthetimelengthexceeds10,800msec,thelooptimewillbe
automaticallysetto10,800msec.
c: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto10,800msec.Ifthedelay
timeexceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appears
inthedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
parameter.
3. Pushthejoystickinthe+Ydirection(forward)andplay
aphraseyouwishtohold.Whenyoupullthejoystick
toitsoriginalposition,therecordingwillbefinished
andthephraseyoujustplayedwillbeheld.
LoopTimeisautomaticallysetonlyforthefirstrecord
ingafterresetting.Ifthetimelengthexceeds10,800msec,
LoopTimewillbeautomaticallysetto10,800msec.(If
youhavesetTimesto110,800msec,thespecifiedloop
timewillbeusedregardlessofthetimetakenfrompush
ingthejoystickforwarduntilitispulledback.However,
therecordingmethodremainsthesame.Thephrase
beingplayedwhilethejoystickispushedforwardwillbe
held.)
4. Ifyoumadeamistakeduringrecording,pullthejoy
stickintheYdirection(back)toreset.Inthisway,the
recordingwillbeerased.Repeatstep3.again.
5. Therecordedphrasewillberepeatedagainandagain.
Youcanusethistocreateanaccompaniment.
6. Bypushingthejoystickinthe+Ydirection(forward),
youcanalsooverdubperformancesoverthephrasethat
isbeingheld.
Ifthismodulationison,orifManualRECControlissetto
On,youcanrecordtheinputsignal.Ifarecordinghas
alreadybeencarriedout,additionalsignalswillbe
overdubbed.
specifiedfortheRECControlSrcparameteris63or
smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
higher.
f: RST Control Src

h: Manual RST Control
TheRSTControlSrcparameterspecifiesthemodulation
sourcethatcontrolstheresetoperation.
WhenyousetthismodulationsourcetoOn,orManualRST
ControltoRESET,youcanerasewhatyourecorded.Ifthe
LoopTimeparameterhasbeensettoAuto,thelooptimeis
alsoreset.
specifiedfortheRSTControlSrcparameteris63or
smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
higher.
335
191: LCR BPM Long Dly (L/C/R

BPM Long Delay)
192: St. BPM Long Dly (Stereo

BPM Long Delay)
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.
Thestereodelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.

Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod
Delay
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
Level
C Delay
Feedback
Spread
Level
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
R Delay
Level
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Tempo
Tempo
BPM
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Base Note x Times
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00

p.285
Time Over?
---, OVER!

upper limit
p.336
...

p.285
Times
x1...x32

p.285
Level
0...50
C Delay Base
Note
...
Times
Level
---, OVER!

the upper limit
p.336
L Delay Base
Note
...

time
p.285
Times
x1...x32
elects the type of notes to

p.285

time
p.285
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the left channel delay

time
x1...x32

p.285
R Delay Base
Note
...

time
p.285
0...50
Times
x1...x32
...

p.285

time
p.285
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the right channel

delay time
Times
x1...x32

p.285
L Feedback
100...+100

the left channel
Level
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo

feedback amount
100...+100

TapC
L Amt
100...+100

Src
Off...Tempo

R Feedback
100...+100
100...+100

the TapC feedback

the right channel
Amt
R Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]

0...100

high range
p.289

high range
p.289
0...100

low range
p.289
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
Low Damp
[%]
0...100

low range
p.289
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100

the input level
p.284
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Src
Off...Tempo

for the input level
p.284
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
R Delay Base
Note
d
Feedback
(C Delay)
Input Level
D-mod [%]
Src
Spread
0...50

p.289
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
a: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto10,920msec.Ifthedelay
timeexceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appears
inthedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
parameter.
336

p.285
the upper limit
p.336
L Delay Base
Note
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
BPM
a: Time Over? L, R
Double Size 193: Early Reflections
193: Early Reflections

Thisearlyreflectioneffecthasmorepreciseearlyreflections
withtwicethemaximumlengthofanormalsizeeffect(See
094:EarlyReflectionsonpage 300.).Youcancreateavery
smoothanddensesound.
Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Pre Delay
Early Reflections
EQ Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Type
Sharp, Loose, Selects the decay curve for the

Modulated,
early reflection
p.300
Reverse
ER Time
[msec]
10...1600
Sets the time length of early

reflection
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the time taken from the

original sound to the first early
reflection
EQ Trim
0...100
Sets the input level of EQ applied

to the effect sound
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low

equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High


[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain

15.0...+15.0
[dB]
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet

Src
Off...Tempo

Wet/Dry
Amt
100...+100

Wet/Dry
337
338
Appendices
Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS)
AMS Mixers
Alternate Modulation
Overview
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
AlternateModulationletsyouusecontrollers,envelopes,
LFOs,etc.tomodulateProgramparameters.Youcanuse
onecontrollertomodulatemultipleparameters
simultaneously.Youcanalsocreatecomplexmodulation
setupsinwhich(forexample)anenvelopemodulatesthe
frequencyofanLFO,andthatLFOisthenusedtomodulate
afilter.
Programsprovide48types(88destinations)foralternate
modulation.
Alternate Modulation Sources
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcanalso
usethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvarious
ways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,andmore.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMSsources,
justliketheLFOsandEGs.
Theoriginal,unmodifiedinputstotheAMSMixersarestill
availableaswell.Forinstance,ifyouuseLFO1asaninput
toaAMSMixer,youcanusetheprocessedversionofthe
LFOtocontroloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginal
versiontocontrolanother.
Finally,youcancascadetwoAMSMixerstogether,byusing
oneastheinputofanother.
Youcanusethesourceslistedonthefollowingpageto
controlAlternateModulation.Ifyouselecttwoormore
AlternateModulationdestinationsforcontrolbythesame
AMS,asinglesourcewillapplymodulationtoeachofthe
specifieddestinations.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee61:OSC1AMSMix1on
page 46.
FrequentlyusedassignmentssuchasusingJoystickXto
controlpitchareprovidedasspecialparameters,soitisnot
necessarytouseAlternateModulationtoaccomplishthis.
Alternate Modulation
Common LFO
Shape
Intensity Mod
Frequency Mod 1
Frequency Mod 2
Shape
Intensity Mod
Frequency Mod 1
Frequency Mod 2
LFO1
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod to A
Cutoff Mod 1
Cutoff Mod 2
Resonance Mod
Output Level Mod
Time Mod 3
Reset
Pitch EG
Amp 1
Amp Mod
Drive
Low Boost
Pan Mod
Intensity Mod to B
Filter1 EG
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Shape
Reset
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Driver
Filter1 B
Cutoff Mod 1
Cutoff Mod 2
Resonance Mod
Output Level Mod
Pitch Mod
Intensity Mod
Frequency Mod
Intensity Mod to B
Intensity Mod to B
Intensity Mod to B
Filter1 A
OSC1
LFO2
Amp1 EG
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Time Mod 3
Reset
OSC 1
OSC 2
Level Mod 1
Level Mod 2
Time Mod
Reset
339
Appendices
AMS (Alternate Modulation

Source) List
Basically,therearetwoseparatefactors:aphysicalknob
namedUSERknob1,andanAMSsourcenamedKnob
Mod.1:#17.Thisprovidesagreatdealofflexibilitybuts
itsalsoeasytolinkthetwotogether.Todoso:
1. GotothecurrentmodesControllerspage.
Physical and MIDI controllers
2. SetknobUSER1sRealtimeControlsKnobAssignto
KnobMod.1:#17.
Off
Thismeansthatnomodulationsourceisselected.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee13:ControllersSetup
onpage 16,andRealtimeControlsKnobs14
Assignmentsonpage 348.
Note Number
ThisisthenotesMIDInotenumber,from0(C2)to127
(G9).
Velocity
ThisisthenotesMIDInoteonvelocity.
KnobMod2: #19 (Realtime Knob Modulation2: CC#19)

ThisAMSsourcealwaysrespondstoMIDICC#19,andwill
usuallyalsocorrespondtoRealtimeControlsUSERknob2.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKnobMod1:#17(Realtime
KnobModulation1:CC#17)onpage 340.
Exp. Velocity (Exponential Velocity)

ThisisMIDInoteonvelocitythroughanexponentialcurve.
Thecurvemeansthatlowvelocitieswonthaveverymuch
effect,andthedifferencebetweentwolowervelocityvalues
wontbeverynoticeable.

Ontheotherhand,highvelocitiesproduceincreasingly
greatereffects,andthedifferencebetweenanytwohigher
velocityvalueswillbemorepronounced.

Poly After
Polyphonicaftertouchallowsadifferentaftertouchvaluefor
eachnote.ThiscanbereceivedfromexternalMIDIdevices
orgeneratedbytheinternalsequencer.TheKROME
keyboarditselfdoesnotgeneratepolyaftertouch,however.
After Touch
Theeffectwillbeappliedbychannelaftertouchmessages
fromtheKROMEssequencedataorreceivedfromMIDIIN.
JS X
Thisisthehorizontalmovementofthemainjoystick.Italso
receivesMIDIPitchbend.
JS+Y: CC#01
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,upwards
fromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#01(modwheel).
JSY: CC#02
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,
downwardsfromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#02
(breathcontroller).
JS +Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)
Theeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystick+Y(Vertical
upward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
JS Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick Y & After Touch/2)
TheeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystickY(Vertical
downward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
Pedal: CC#04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
ThisAMSsourcereceivesMIDICC#04.Itcanalsobe
generatedbyafootpedalconnectedtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLEPEDALinput,iftheGlobalFootPedal
AssignparameterissettoFootPedal(CC#04).Formore
information,pleaseseeFootPedalAssignmentson
page 350.
ThisAMSsourcealwaysrespondstoMIDICC#17.AMIDI
valueof0causesthemaximumnegativemodulation;64
(center)meansnomodulation;and127causesthemaximum
positivemodulation.(Youcaninvertthisresponse,if
desired,byusinganegativeAMSintensity.)
ItalsousuallycorrespondstoRealtimeControlsUSERknob
1ontheControllersSetuppage;butthiswilldependonthe
RealtimeControlsknobAssignsettingsofeachindividual
Program,Combination,andSong.
340
KnobMod1[+] (Realtime Knob Modulation1[+])

WiththeseAMSsources,theknobpositionandthedirection
oftheresultingchangearedifferentthanKnobMod1:#17
KnobMod4:#21.IfAMSintensityissettoapositive(+)
value,rotatingtheknobtothefarleftwillproduceanAMS
effectof0.Rotatingtheknobtowardtherightwillapply
changeonlyinthepositivedirection.(Iftheintensityissetto
anegativevalue,theresultwillbetheopposite.)
Damper: #64
ThisistheDamperpedal,alsosometimescalledthesustain
pedal.ItcorrespondstoMIDICC#64.
WhenusingKorgsoptionalhalfdamperpedal,theDS1H,
thisAMSsourceiscontinuousnotjuston/off.
Porta.SW: #65
ThisistheMIDIportamentoswitch(CC#65),whichalso
enablesanddisablesportamento.
Sostenuto: #66
ThisistheMIDIsostenutopedal(CC#66).
Soft: CC#67
ThisistheMIDIoftpedal(CC#67).
SW 1: CC#80 (SW 1 Modulation: CC#80)
ThisisCC#80,whichisthedefaultforassignablefrontpanel
switch1(SW1).TouseSW1andSW2asAMSsources:
1. GototheControllersSetuppage.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,assignSW1toSW1Mod.
(CC#80)andSW2toSW2Mod.(CC#81).
TheseassignmentsarestoredseparatelyforeachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSW1/2Assignmentson
page 348.
SW 2: CC#81 (SW 2 Modulation: CC#81)

ThisisCC#81,whichisthedefaultforassignablefrontpanel
switch2(SW2).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSW1:
CC#80(SW1Modulation:CC#80)above.
Foot SW: #82 (Foot SW: CC#82)

ThisAMSsourcereceivesMIDICC#82.Itcanalsobe
generatedbyafootswitchconnectedtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLESWITCHinput,iftheGlobalFootPedal
AssignparameterissettoFootSW(CC#82).Formore
information,pleaseseeFootSwitchAssignmentson
page 349.
MIDI: CC#83
MIDIcontrolchange(CC#83)
Tempo
Thisletsyouusethesystemtempoasamodulationsource.
120isthecenter,foravalueof0;60BPMis99,and240BPM
is+99.
Notethatthisisdifferentfromactuallysyncingtotempo;
forthatpurpose,usethededicatedsynchronization
functionsfortheLFOs,effects,etc.
Gate1
Gate1+Damper
Gate1istriggeredbyanewnoteafterallnoteshavebeen
released,suchasatthebeginningofaphrase.Gate
1+Damperissimilar,exceptthatitistriggeredbyanew
noteonafterallnotesandthedamperarereleased.
YoucanusethistoresettheCommonLFO.Forinstance,to
createaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOandStep
SequencersKeySyncOffsetting,useGate1+Damperas
theresetsource.
Gate2
Gate2+Damper
Gate2issimilartoGate1,butittriggerswitheverynew
noteon,eveninthemiddleofalegatophrase.
Gate2+Damperincludesthedamperpedalintheequation,
asshowninthediagrambelow.
Note:WhenusedasaresetcontrollerforCommonLFO,
Gate2andGate2+Damperwillhavethesameeffect.
1
Note
Gate1,Gate1+Damper,
Gate2,Gate2+Damper
Dmpr
Damper Pedal
Gate1
On
Off
Gate1+Dmpr
Reset
Controller
Gate2
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
341
Appendices
Alternate Modulation settings
Thetone,EG,andLFOetc.canbecontrollednotonlyby
keyvelocityorthejoystick,butalsofromabutton,knob,
orpedaletc.
WhenyouoperateanAMS(AlternateModulationSource),
themodulationdestinationwillbeaffectedasshowninthe
tablebelow.
Panningcanbecontrolledinrealtimefromacontroller,
EG,orLFOetc.
Byusingalternatemodulation,youcancreatecomplex
systemsofmodulationinwhichEG,LFO,keyboardtracks,
andcontrollersworktogether.
YoucanapplycomplexchangetoanLFOorEG,for
examplebyusingthepitch/filter/ampEGtocontrolthe
frequencyorintensityofanLFOthatmodulatesthepitch/
filter/amp,orbyusingLFO2tocontrolthefrequencyof
LFO1.
YoucanusethefilterEGtocontrolpitchorvolumeatthe
sametimethatitcontrolsthefilter.
Controllersetc.canbeusedtocontrolEGlevelsortimes.
ThisletsyoushapetheEGinrealtime.
Filter/ampkeyboardtrackingornotenumbercanbeused
tocontroltheEGorLFOaccordingtothekeyboardpitch
thatisplayed.
Pitch,tone,EGorLFOcanbecontrolledbythetempoof
thearpeggiatorand/orsequencer.
AMSoperationsandtheirresult
AMS source
& value range
Amp EG
0...+99
Pitch & Filter

EGs
99...0...+99
Common LFO
99...0...+99
Filter & Amp

Key Track
99...0...+99
Common
Key Track
1&2
99...0...+99
Note Number
C1...C4...C9
EXT(+/) *1
Max...0...+Max
EXT(+) *3
0...127
Parameter
AMS
Intensity
Pitch*4
(+12.00)
0...+1
Octave
10+1
Octaves
(FilterEGas
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
forPitchEG)
Dedicated
parameter
PitchEG
Int.
(+12.00)
Dedicated
parameter
forPitchEG
Pitch
LFO1/2Int.
(+12.00)
0...+1
Octave
1...0...+1
Octaves
Filter
Frequency
(+99)
0...+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
(PitchEGas
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
forFilterEG)
Filter
Resonance
(+99)
0...+99
FilterEG
Int.
(+99)
Dedicated
parameter
forFilterEG
FilterLFO1/ (+99)
2Int.
0...+99
99...0...+99
Filter
Output
LevelA/B
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
0...+99
0...+99
1...0...+1
Octaves
EXT (Tempo) *2
=...60.00...120.00...240.00...
Dedicated
parameter
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
Dedicatedparameter
Dedicated
parameter
forFilter
KTrk
99...0...+99
100+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
Amp
(+99)
Dedicated
parameter
0...1x...8x
Dedicated
parameter
Amp
LFO1/2Int.
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
Pan
(+50)
0...+63
EGLevel
(+66)
EGTime
(+49)
0...1x...8x
Dedicated
parameter
forAmp
KTrk
0...+10
Octaves
0...+99
0...+99
0...+99
0...1x...8x
1x...8x
99...0...+99
0...+99
99...0...+99
0...+99
63...0...+63
99...0...+99
99...0...+99
Drive
0...+1
Octave
0...+99
99...0...+99
LowBoost
0...+1
Octave
0...+1
Octave
99...0...+99
0...+63
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
LFO1
(+99)
Frequency*4
1x...64x
1/64x...
1x...64x
(LFO2
only)
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
LFO2
(+99)
Frequency*4
1x...64x
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
Common
(+99)
LFO
Frequency*4
342
LFO1 & 2
99...0...+99
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
LFO1
Shape
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
(LFO2
only)
99...0...+99
0...+99
LFO2
Shape
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
0...+99
Common
LFO
Shape
(+99)
99...0...+99
0...+99
Notes for the table

*1 EXT(+):JSX,Ribbon:CC#16,KnobMod1(CC#17),Knob
Mod2(CC#19),KnobMod3(CC#20),KnobMod4
(CC#21)
*2 WhenTempoisselectedasanAMSsource,thebase
valueis=120.00.
ForexampleifthePitchAMSissettoTempo,and
Intensityissetto12.00,doublingthetempovalue(
=120.00240.00)willraisethepitchoneoctave,and
halvingthetempo(=120.0060.00)willlowerthepitch
oneoctave.Thestatedmodulationresultsarefortempo
valuesbetween60bpmand240bpm.Asthetempo
decreasesfrom60to0bpm,AMSmodulationwillhave
increasinglynegativeeffects;asitincreasesfrom240to
250bpm,modulationwillhaveincreasinglypositive
effects.
*3 EXT(+):Velocity,Exp.Velocity,PolyAfter,AfterTouch,
JS+Y:CC#01,JSY:CC#02,JS+Y&AT/2,JSY&AT/2,
Pedal:CC#04,ValueSldr:#18,KnobMod1[+],KnobMod2
[+],KnobMod3[+],KnobMod4[+],Damper:CC#64,
Porta.SW:CC#65,Sostenuto:CC#66,Soft:CC#67,
SW1:CC#80,SW2:CC#81,MIDI:CC#83,MIDI:CC#85,
MIDI:CC#86,MIDI:CC#87,MIDI:CC#88.
*4 ItispossibletocontrolLFOFrequencybyusingTempo
AMSandIntensity.HoweverifyouusetheFrequency
MIDI/TempoSyncfunction(Prog51c),theLFO
frequencycanbesynchronizedtothetempoandnote
value.
The effects of AMS on various

parameters, and example applications
Welldescribesomeexamplesofusingalternate
modulation.
Pitch (Prog 22a)

PitchcanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,filter/ampEG,
controllers,ortempoetc.
IfyouselectFilterEGorAmpEGastheAMSandset
Intensityto+12.00,thepitchwillchangeupto1octave
insynchronizationwiththeEG.
IfyouselectTempoastheAMSandsetIntensityto
+12.00,doublingthetempo(basedon=120.00)willraise
thepitchoneoctave,andhalvingthetempowilllowerthe
pitchoneoctave.
Pitch EG (Prog 22b)

PitchEGintensitycanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,
keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo.
IfyouselectJS+Y:CC#01astheAMSandsetIntensityto
+12.00,movingthejoystickinthe+Ydirectionwill
graduallyincreasetheeffectofthePitchEGtoa
maximumof1octave.IfIntensityhasanegativevalue,
theeffectofthePitchEGwillbeinverted.
LFO 1/2 (Prog 22d)

PitchmodulationintensityoftheLFO1/2canbecontrolled
bytheCommonLFO,anEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,
ortempoetc.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,thepitchchangewidthof
LFOmodulationetc.canbecontrolledinsynchronization
withthelevelchangesoftheEG.Withpositive(+)
settingsofIntensity,thevibratoeffectwillgradually
deepenastheEGlevelrises,orgraduallylessenastheEG
leveldecreases.Withnegative()settingsofIntensity,the
LFOphasewillbeinverted.
IfyouselectacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,
youcanpresstheSW1orSW2switchwhendesiredto
turnonthevibratoeffect.
Filter (Cutoff) Frequency (Prog 31b(c))

ThecutofffrequencyoffilterA/Bcanbecontrolledbythe
pitch/ampEG,Commonkeyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempo.Usethe33:Filter1ModulationpageFilterA/B
Modulation(Prog33b)tosetAMSandIntensityforFilter
AorB.
IfyouselectJSXastheAMS1orAMS2andsetIntensity
toapositive(+)value,movingthejoysticktowardthe
rightwillraisethecutofffrequency,andmovingit
towardtheleftwilllowerthecutofffrequency.Negative
()settingswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
IfyouselectthesamecontrollerasanAMS1orAMS2and
setseparateintensitiesforFilterA(LowPassFilter)
IntensityandFilterB(HighPassFilter)Intensity,you
canoperateasinglecontrollertosimultaneouslycontrol
thecutofffrequenciesofbothfilters.
Resonance (Prog 31b)

YoucanusetheEG,LFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontroltheresonancelevel.
IfyouselectFilterKTrkorAmpKTrkastheAMS,you
canusethefilterorampkeyboardtrackingsettingsto
controltheresonancelevel.Forexampleiftheamp
keyboardtrackingparametersRampBtmLoandRamp
HiToparesettopositive(+)values,AmpKTrkisselected
astheAMS,andIntensityitsettoapositive(+)value,
playingtowardeitherendofthekeyboardwillcauseamp
keyboardtrackingtoincreasethevolume,andAMSto
raisetheresonancelevel.
YoucanselectacontrollerastheAMS,andapply
resonancewhendesiredbyoperatingthecontroller.
YoucanselectCommonLFO,LFO1or2astheAMS,and
usetheLFOtocontroltheresonancelevel.
Output (Prog 31b)

tempoetc.tocontroltheoutputlevelofFilterA/B.
SettheFilterRoutingtoParallel,andspecifythedesired
TypeandothersettingsforFilterAandFilterB.Setthe
AMStoLFOforFilterAandFilterB,andsettheLFOto
+99and99respectively.TheoutputofFilterAandFilter
Bwillbecyclicallyfadedin/outbytheLFO.
Filter EG Intensity (Prog 33a)

FilterEGintensitycanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,
Commonkeyboardtracking,acontrollerortempoetc.You
canuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBtoindependently
specifytheintensityforFilterAandB.
IfyouselectJSY(CC#02)astheAMSandsetIntensity
toAandIntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,movingthe
joystickintheYdirectionwillgraduallyincreasethe
effectoftheFilterEG.IfyousetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoanegative()value,theeffectofthe
FilterEGwillbeinverted.
IfyouselectJSXastheAMSandsetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,operatingthe
joysticktowardtherightwillgraduallyincreasetheeffect
oftheFilterEG.Operatingthejoysticktowardtheleftwill
graduallyincreasetheeffectoftheFilterEGwithan
invertedphase.
Filter LFO1/2 Intensity (Prog 34a)

TheLFO1/2filtermodulationintensitycanbecontrolledby
theEG,CommonLFO,keyboardtracking,controller,or
tempoetc.YoucanuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBto
independentlyspecifytheintensityforFilterAandB.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,theautowaheffect
producedbyLFOmodulationwillbecontrolledbythe
changesinEGlevel.IfyousetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,thewaheffectwill
deepenastheEGlevelrises,andwilllessenastheEG
343
Appendices
levelfalls.Withnegative()valuesofIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoB,thephaseoftheLFOwillbeinverted.
IfyouuseacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,you
canapplytheautowaheffectwhendesiredbypressing
theSW1orSW2switch.
Filter Common LFO (Prog 34b)

tempoetc.tocontroltheCommonLFOfiltermodulation
intensity.YoucanuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBto
specifytheintensityseparatelyforFilterAandB.
YoucansetAMStoacontroller,andoperatethe
controlleronlywhendesiredtocontrolthedepthofthe
filtersweepproducedbytheCommonLFO.
Driver Drive (Prog 41a)

Driver Low Boost (Prog 41a)
YoucanusetheEG,LFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,
andtempoetc.tocontrolthedriversboostandlowboost.
AlthoughyoucanuseseparateAMStocontrolthesetwo
parameters,itisalsoeffectivetocontrolthem
simultaneouslybyusingcontrollerssuchastheknobsetc.(It
isparticularlyeffectivetocontrolthefilterresonanceatthe
sametime.Thisisalsoniceforsynthbasssounds.)
IfyouchooseKnobMod.1(CC#17)astheAMS,set
Intensitytoapositive(+)value,andsetRealtimeControls
toUSER,turningknob1towardtherightofcenterwill
raisethedriveorlowboostlevel,whileturningtheknob
towardtheleftofcenterwilllowerthedriveorlowboost
level.IfIntensityissettoanegative()value,the
oppositewilloccur.
IfyousetAMStoCommonLFO,LFO1,or2,thedrive
amountwillbecontrolledcyclicallybytheLFO.
Amp (Prog 42b)

Thevolumecanbecontrolledbythepitch/filterEG,
CommonLFO,controllers,ortempoetc.
IfanEGorcontrollerthatchangeswithapositive(+)
value(EXT(+))isselectedastheAMS,settingthe
Intensityto+99willallowyoutoincreasethevolumetoa
maximumofeighttimesthatofthecurrentvolume.
IfanEG,LFO,orcontrollerthatchangeswithavalue
(PitchEG,FilterEG,LFO,KT,EXT(+)isselectedasthe
AMS,settingtheIntensityto+99willallowyouto
increasethevolumetoamaximumofeighttimesthatof
thecurrentvolume(forpositive(+)changesoftheAMS),
ortodecreasethevolumetozero(fornegative()
changesoftheAMS).
Inadditiontothetimevariantchangesinvolume
producedbytheampEG,youcanalsomakethevolume
changeinsynchronizationwiththepitch/filterEG.Select
PitchEGorFilterEGastheAMS,andadjustIntensity.If
youwishtocanceltheeffectoftheAmpEGandusethe
pitch/filterEGtocontrolthevolume,setalllevelsofthe
AmpEGto+99.
Amp LFO1/2 Intensity (Prog 42b)

TheampmodulationintensityofLFO1/2canbecontrolled
bytheEG,CommonLFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,thedepthofthetremolo
effectproducedbyLFOmodulationwillchangein
synchronizationwiththechangesinEGlevel.Ifyouset
Intensitytoapositive(+)value,thetremoloeffectwill
deepenastheEGlevelrises,andlessenastheEGlevel
falls.IfIntensityissettoanegative()value,thephaseof
theLFOwillbeinverted.
IfselectacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,you
canapplythetremoloeffectbypressingtheSW1orSW2
switchwhendesired.
344
Pan (Prog 41c)

TheoscillatorpancanbecontrolledbytheEG,LFO,
keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
IfyouselectNoteNumberastheAMSandsetIntensity
to+50,panningwillbecontrolledbythekeyboard
position:centerattheC4note,farrightatC9orabove,
andfarleftatC1orbelow.
IfEGisselectedastheAMS,theoscillatorpanwillbe
controlledinsynchronizationwiththechangesinEG
level.IfIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,thepanwill
movetowardtherightastheEGlevelincreases,and
towardtheleftastheEGleveldecreases.IfIntensityis
settoanegative()value,theoppositeeffectwilloccur.
EG Reset
Pitch EG (Prog 28a)
Filter EG (Prog 35a)
Amp EG (Prog 43a)
tempoetc.tocontrolEGReset.UsetheThresholdsettingto
specifytheAMSvalueatwhichresultwilloccur.
BysettingAMStoCommonLFO,youcanresetthe
envelopecyclicallyattheintervaloftheCommonLFO.
Theresultisjustasiftheshapespecifiedbytheenvelope
werebeingusedasaspecialLFO.
YoucanresettheenvelopebysettingAMStoacontroller
suchasJS+Y,andoperatingthecontrollerwhendesired,
producingaoneshotfilterenvelopesweep.
EG Level
Pitch EG (Prog 28c)
Filter EG (Prog 35c)
Amp EG (Prog 43c)
EGlevelscanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Start,Attack,Break).IfyousettheIntensityvalueto+66,
youwillbeabletocontroltherespectivelevelovera
maximumrangeof99.
SetAMStoVelocityforAmpEGLevelModulation,
IntensityStartto+00,Attackto+66,andBreakto66.
SetallAmpEGlevelsto+00.Asyouplaywithincreasing
velocity,theEGlevelswillchangemoregreatly.Atthe
maximumvelocity,theStartLevelwillstayat+00,butthe
AttackLevelwillchangeto+99andtheBreakLevelwill
changeto99.
EG Time
Pitch EG (Prog 28c)
Filter EG (Prog 35c)
Amp EG (Prog 43d)
EGtimescanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Attack,Decay,Slope,Release).EGtimesaredetermined
bytheAlternateModulationvaluewhenthepreceding
pointisreached.Forexample,theAlternateModulation
valueatthemomenttheenvelopereachestheattacklevel
willdeterminethedecaytime.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof8,17,25,33,41,or49,the
correspondingtimecanbemultipliedbyamaximumof2,4,
8,16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32,1/
64).
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetAMSIntensityto+8,
Atto+,Dcto,andSlandRlto0.Whenyoumovethe
joystickinthe+Ydirection,theAttackTimewillbe
lengthenedbyamaximumof2times.TheDecayTime
willbeshortenedbyamaximumof1/2.TheSlopeand
Releasetimeswillnotchange.
LFO Frequency (Prog 51a)

ThefrequencyofLFO1,2orCommonLFOcanbe
controlledbytheEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.
YoucanalsousetheLFO2frequencytomodulateLFO1,or
usetheCommonLFOfrequencytomodulateLFO1/2.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof16,33,49,66,82,or99,the
correspondingfrequencycanbemultipliedbyamaximum
of2,4,8,16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,
1/32,1/64).
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetIntensityto+16.
Whenyoumovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,theLFO
frequencywillbeincreasedbyamaximumof2times.If
yousetIntensityto16andmovethejoystickinthe+Y
direction,theLFOfrequencywillbedecreasedbyupto1/
2.
LFO Frequency AMS Intensity (Prog 51b)

YoucanusetheEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontroltheintensityoftheAMSthatcontrols
thefrequencyoftheLFO1,2,orCommonLFO.
ForexampleifyoureusingthepitchEGtomodulatethe
LFOfrequency,youcoulduseaseparateAMStocontrolthe
depthofthiseffect.
SetAMStoacontrollersuchasSW1or2,sothatthe
pitchEGwilllightlycontroltheLFOfrequencywhenthe
switchisoff,andmoredeeplywhentheswitchison.
LFO Shape (Prog 51a)

YoucanuseaEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo
etc.tocontroltheshapeoftheLFO1,2,orCommonLFO
waveform.YoucanalsousetheLFO2frequencyto
modulateLFO1,orusetheCommonLFOfrequencyto
modulateLFO1/2.
YoucancontroltheLFOwaveformbysettingAMStoa
controllersuchasJS+Y,andoperatingthecontrollerwhen
desired.
Common LFO Reset (Prog 510a)

Youcanuseacontrollerortempoetc.toresettheCommon
LFO.
BysettingAMStoGate1,youcanmaketheCommon
LFOresetwhenanoteisplayedfromastateinwhichall
notesareoff.Forexample,thiswillensurethatafilter
sweepalwaysstartsfromthesameplace.
YoucansetAMStoacontrollersuchasJS+Y:CC#01,and
operatethecontrollerwhenyouwanttoresettheLFO.
345
Appendices
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod)

Youcancontrolcertaineffectparametersusingthejoystick,
RealtimeControlsknobs,SW1/SW2,etc.onthefly.
Theseparameterscanalsobecontrolledbythesequencer.
ControllingeffectsinthiswayisreferredtoasDynamic
Modulation.Forexample,youcanuseAfterTouchtospeed
uptheLFOofthechorusandflanger,oryoucanusethe
joysticktosweepawaheffect.Thisletsyoutakefull
advantageoftheeffectsaspartoftheexpressivepotentialof
yourinstrument.
Mostoftheparametersfordynamicmodulationconsistof
parametervaluesforSourceandAmount.TheSourcefield
selectsthemodulationsource,andAmountsetsthe
modulationintensity.WhentheSourceisatitsmaximum
value(forinstance,whenJS+Yismovedallthewayup),the
actualdegreeoftheeffectwillbetheparametervalueplus
theAmount.
Example:Wet/Dry10:90,SourceJS+Y:#01,Amount+50
Inthiscase,theeffectbalancewillnormallybe10:90,and
movingthejoystickinthe+Ydirectionwillgradually
increasetheproportionoftheeffectsound.Whenthe
joystickismovedallthewayinthe+Ydirection,theeffect
balancewillbe60:40.
Dynamic Modulation (Example)
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry=10:90
Amt= +50
Wet
Wet / Dry=60:40
Amt= 50
Dynamic Modulation Source

List
Off
noteon/off(p.347)
Gate1+Dmpr
noteon+damperon/off(p.347)
Gate2
noteon/off(retrigger)(p.347)
Gate2+Dmpr
noteon+damperon/off(retrigger)(p.347)
NoteNumbr
notenumber
Velocity
velocity
ExpVelocity
exponentialvelocity(p.347)
AfterTouch
aftertouch(ChannelAfterTouch)reception
JSX
joystickX(horizontal)direction
JS+Y:#01
joystick+Y(Verticalupward)direction(CC#01)
JSY:#02
joystickY(Verticaldownward)direction
(CC#02)
Pedal:#04
assignablefootpedal(CC#04)(p.347)
FXCtrl1:#12
MIDIeffectcontrol1(CC#12)
FXCtrl2:#13
MIDIeffectcontrol2(CC#13)
Ribbon:#16
MIDIControlChange(CC#16)
ValSldr:#18
MIDIControlChange(CC#18)(p.347)
KnobM1:#17
RealtimeControlsUSERknob(knob
modulation1CC#17)(p.347)
KnobM2:#19
KnobM3:#20
KnobM4:#21
KnobM1[+]
RealtimeControlsUSERknob1[+](p.347)
KnobM2[+]
KnobM3[+]
60:40
D -mod
10:90
Dry
Zero
Higher
Max
Seetheindividualeffectsdescriptionsforexplanationsof
otherdynamicmodulationparameters.Parameterswhich
canbecontrolledthroughdynamicmodulationaremarked
bythe
symbol.
KnobM4[+]
Damper:#64
damperpedal(CC#64)
PrtaSW:#65
portamentoswitch(CC#65)
Sostenu:#66
sostenutopedal(CC#66)
InProgrammode,dynamicmodulationisalways
controlledviatheglobalMIDIChannel.
Soft:#67
softpedal(CC#67)
InCombinationandSequencermodes,dynamic
modulationiscontrolledviatheMIDIchannel
independentlyspecifiedbytheChforIFX15,MFX1,2,
andTFX.
SW1:#80
assignablepanelswitch1(SW1modulation
CC#80)(p.348)
SW2:#81
assignablepanelswitch2(SW2modulation
CC#81)(p.348)
Dmod and MIDI
346
dynamicmodulationisnotused
Gate1
FootSW:#82
assignablefootswitch(CC#82)(p.349)
MIDI:CC#83
MIDI:CC#85
MIDI:CC#86
MIDI:CC#87
MIDI:CC#88
Tempo
tempo(internalclockorexternalMIDIclock
tempodata)(p.347)
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod)
Gate1, Gate1+Dmpr (Gate1, Gate1+Damper)

Theeffectisatmaximumduringnoteon,andwillstop
whenallkeysarereleased.WithGate1+Damper,theeffect
willremainatmaximumevenafterthekeysarereleased,as
longasthedamper(sustain)pedalispressed.
Gate1,Gate1+Dmpr
1
Note
Dmpr
Damper Pedal
On
Off
Gate1
Gate1+Dmpr
Time
Gate2, Gate2+Dmpr (Gate2, Gate2+Damper)

ThisisessentiallythesameasforGate1orGate1+Dmpr.
HoweverwhenGate2orGate2+Damperareusedasa
dynamicmodulationsourcefortheEGof041:St.Env.
Flangeretc.ortheAUTOFADEof049:StereoVibrato,a
triggerwilloccurateachnoteon.(InthecaseofGate1and
Gate1+Dmpr,thetriggeroccursonlyforthefirstnoteon.)
Gate2,Gate2+Dmpr
1
Note
Dmpr
Damper Pedal
Gate2
On
Off
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
KnobM1 [+] (Knob Modulation1 [+])

Theknobpositionandthedirectionoftheresultingchange
aredifferentthanKnobMod.1(CC#17)KnobMod.4
(CC#21).IfAmountissettoapositive(+)value,rotatingthe
knobtothefarleftallthewaywilproduceaneffectof0as
thedynamicmodulationsourceallthewaywillapply
changeonlyinthepositivedirection.(IftheAmountissetto
anegativevalue,theresultwillbetheopposite.)
SW 1: #80 (Switch Modulation 1: CC#80)
SW 2: #81 (Switch Modulation 2: CC#81)
IfyouwishtousetheSW1orSW2switchasadynamic
modulationsource,makesettingsinProgram,orSongtoset
theControllersSetuppageparameterPanelSwitchAssign
tothefollowingvaluesrespectively:SW1toSW1Mod.
(CC#80),orSW2toSW2Mod.(CC#81)(SeeSW1/2
Assignmentsonpage 348.).
TheeffectwillbecontrolledwhenyouoperatetheSW1or
SW2switch.
FootSW: #82 (Foot Switch: CC#82)

Ifyouwishtouseanassignablefootswitchasadynamic
modulationsource,setFootSwitchAssign(Global21a)to
FootSwitch(CC#82)(SeeFootSwitchAssignmentson
page 349.).
Theeffectwillbecontrolledwhenyouoperateafootswitch
etc.connectedtotheASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
Tempo
Theresultingmodulationwillbezeroat120BPM,the
maximumpositivevalueat240BPM,andthemaximum
negativevalueat60BPM.
Exp Velocity (Exponential Velocity)

Modulationwillbeappliedexponentiallyaccordingtothe
velocityvalue.Weakvelocityvalueswillproducelittle
effect,buttheeffectwillincreaserapidlyasthevelocity
valuesrise.
Pedal: #04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
Ifyouwishtousetheassignablefootpedalasadynamic
modulationsource,setFootPedalAssign(GlobalP2:
Controller21a)toFootPedal(CC#04).(SeeFootPedal
Assignmentsonpage 350.)
Afootcontrolleretc.connectedtotheASSIGNABLEPEDAL
jackcanbeusedtocontrolaneffect.
KnobM1:#17 (Knob Modulation1: CC#17)

Ifyouwanttouseknobs14asadynamicmodulation
sourcewhentheRealtimeControlsisUSER,usethe
ControllersSetuppageRealtimeControlsKnobAssign
parametertoassignKnobUSER1toKnobMod.1(CC#17),
KnobUSER2toKnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobUSER3to
KnobMod.3(CC#20),andKnobUSER4toKnobMod.4
(CC#21)foreachprogram,combination,orsong.(See
RealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentsonpage 348.)
ThenputtheRealtimeControlsinUSER,andyoucanuse
knobs14tocontroltheeffects.
Iftheknobissettothe12oclockposition,theresulting
effectasadynamicmodulationsourcewillbezero.Ifthe
Amountisapositive(+)value,rotatingtheknobtowardthe
rightwillapplypositivechange,androtatingittowardthe
leftitwillproducenegativechange.(Withnegativevalues,
theresultwillbetheopposite.)
347
Appendices
Controller Assignments
SW1/2 Assignments
Switchassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheach
Program,Combination,andSong.
Programs:13:ControllersSetuponpage 16
Combinations:11:ControllersSetuponpage 78
Sequencermode:11:Setuponpage 122
List of SW 1/2 assignments
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLockingtheJoystickon
JS X Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickXaxis.
JS Y Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickYaxis(both+and
directions).
JS+Y Lock
Lockstheeffectofthejoystick+Ydirection.
JSY Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickYdirection.
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoSW1andSW2.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheswitch.
SW1 Mod. (CC#80) (SW1 Modulation: CC#80)
SW2 Mod. (CC#81) (SW2 Modulation: CC#81)
ThisletsyouusetheswitchasanAMSorDmodsource.
NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignSW1ModorSW2Mod
tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramor
Effect.
Eachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff,ittransmitsthe
correspondingMIDICC(80or81);Offis0,andOnis127.
Thefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedasthefunctionof
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsisassignedtoUSER.
KnobassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Programs:13:ControllersSetuponpage 16
Porta.SW (CC#65) (Portamento SW: CC#65)

ThisturnsPortamentoonandoff.WhentheLEDislit,
Portamentoison.
Sequencermode:11:Setuponpage 122
Eachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff,ittransmitsMIDI
CC#65;Offis0,andOnis127.
List of Knobs 14 assignments
WithsinglePrograms,thissimplyenablesanddisables
Portamento,regardlessoftheoftheProgramsstored
PortamentoEnablesetting.
WithdoublePrograms,itsslightlymorecomplex.If
PortamentoiseitherenabledforbothOSC1and2,orofffor
both,thenthePortamentoSwitchcontrolsbothOSC.
IfPortamentoisenabledforonlyoneofthetwo,onlythat
elementwillbeaffectedbytheswitch;fortheotherelement,
Portamentowillalwaysbeoff.
Octave Down
Whentheswitchison(LEDlit),thepitchwillbetransposed
downbyoneoctave.
Octave Up
Whentheswitchison(LEDlit),thepitchwillbetransposed
upbyoneoctave.
Lock functions
TheLockfunctionsletyouuseSW1orSW2tolockthe
currentpositionofthejoystick.Thisleavesyourhandsfree
toplayonthekeyboard,ortouseothercontrollers.
Forinstance,letssaythatJS+Yisassignedtocreateafilter
sweep,andthatSW2isassignedtoJS+YLock.Youcanthen:
1. Movethejoysticktoopenupthefilter.
2. PressSW2toturnonJS+YLock.
3. Releasethejoystick.
SinceSW2islockingJS+Y,thefilterremainsopen,even
thoughthejoystickhasphysicallysnappedbacktoitscenter
position.
NotethatLockaffectsonlythephysicalcontrols.Evenif
LockisOn,incomingMIDImessagescanstillchangethe
joystick.
348
Realtime Controls Knobs 14

Assignments
Combinations:11:ControllersSetuponpage 78
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoRealtime
Controlsknobs14.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheknob.
Knob Mod. 14 (CC#s17, 19, 20, 21)
ThesesettingsletyouusetheknobasanAMSorDmod
source.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassigntheknobto
controlthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Master Volume
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitsthe
UniversalSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,
7FH,nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthe
volumesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,while
preservingtheirrelativebalance.
Portamento Time (CC#05)
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Notethatadifferent
controller,CC#65,turnsPortamentoonandoff;see
Porta.SW(CC#65)(PortamentoSW:CC#65)onpage 348.
Volume (CC#07)
Controlsthevolume,andtransmitsCC#7.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlsthepanningafterthelastInsertEffectinthechain,
andtransmitsCC#8.
Pan (CC#10)
Controlsstereopan,andtransmitsCC#10.
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.
Whenusedoneatatime,MIDIVolumeandExpression
affectlevelinexactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127is
equaltoProgramsmainLevelsetting,andlowervalues
reducethevolume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,theone
withthelowervaluedeterminesthemaximumvolume,and
theonewiththehighervaluescalesdownfromthat
maximum.
FX Control 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)

TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamic
Modulation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFX
Control1or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
Effect.
Cutoff (CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.
Forinstance,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
Resonance (CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.For
instance,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
Filter EG Int. (CC#79)
Itaffectsallofthefiltersatonce;forinstance,itaffectsboth
FiltersAandB.
F/A Attack (CC#73)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,along
withotherrelatedparameters.
WhentheCCvalueisabove64,thisalsoaffectstheAmp
EGsStartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttack
TimeAMS,asdescribedbelow:
Betweenvaluesof65and80,theStartLevel,StartLevel
AMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefromtheir
programmedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,theAttack
Levelwillchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.
F/A Decay (CC#75)

ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterandAmp
EGs.
F/A Sustain (CC#70)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
F/A Release (CC#72)
Pitch LFO1 Spd (CC#76)
ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.
Pitch LFO1 Dep (CC#77)
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
Pitch LFO1 Dly (CC#78)
ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.
SW 1 Mod. & SW 2 Mod (CC#s 80 & 81)
Normally,theseareusedforthetwoassignableswitches
butyoucanassignthemtotheknobsinstead,ifyoulike.
Foot Switch (CC#82)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFootSW
(CC#82)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
MIDI CC#83 (CC#83)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignMIDI
CC#83tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgram
orEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
MIDI CC#0095 and 102119

ThesesettingsletyoutransmitanyMIDICC,exceptfor
registeredandnonregisteredparameters(CCs96101).If
youchooseaCCwhichisusedbyAMS,Dmod,orthe
standardCCroutings,thenitwillaffectthecorresponding
KROMEparameters.
WhentheRealtimeControlsinTONE,thefunctionof
knobs14isfixed.
Knobs 14
RealtimeControlsknob14havepresetassignments,as
below:
TONE [1]: CUTOFF (Filter Cutoff: CC#74)

Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.
TONE [2]: RESONANCE (Filter Resonance: CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.
TONE [3]: EG INTENSITY (Filter EG Intensity: CC#79)
TONE [4]: EG RELEASE (Filter, Amplifier EG Release: CC#72)
Foot Switch Assignments

Youcanconnectafootswitch(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1
orPS3)totherearpanelASSIGNABLESWITCHinput,and
thenuseittocontrolawidevarietyoffunctions,as
describedbelow.
Thissettingismadeglobally,ontheGlobalP2:Controllers
FootControllerspage.
Foot Switch and MIDI CCs

SomeoftheassignmentsincludeMIDICCs,whichare
transmittedeachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff(Off=0,
andOn=127).NotethattheMIDICCscanstillbereceived
eveniftheyarenotassignedtoaphysicalcontroller.
USER[1][4]andSW1/2arespecialcases,sincethesecan
themselvesbeassignedtodifferentMIDICCs.Ifthe
footswitchisassignedtoduplicatethesecontrols,itwillalso
usetheirCCassignments.
List of Foot Switch assignments

Off
Thissettingdisablestheswitch.
Foot Switch (CC#82)
ThisletsyouusetheswitchasanAMSorDmodsource.
NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFootSW(CC#82)to
controlthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Portamento SW (CC#65)
Thiscontrolsportamentoon/off.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseePorta.SW(CC#65)(PortamentoSW:CC#65)on
page 348.
Sostenuto (CC#66)
Thiscontrolsthesostenutoeffect,whichholdsonlythe
notesbeingplayedatthemomentthatthefootswitchis
turnedon.
Soft (CC#67)
Turnsthesoftpedaleffectonandoff.
Damper (CC#64)
Turnsthedamperpedaleffectonandoff.
349
Appendices
ARP VELOCITY
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
Whenyouusethiscontrol,theKROMEwillalsotransmit
thecorrespondingMIDIProgramChangeandBankSelect
messages.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
Program Down
ThisdecrementsthecurrentProgramorCombination
number,forhandsfreepatchchanges.Formore
information,pleaseseeProgramUpabove.
ARP LENGTH
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsLength.
Value Inc
Operatingthefootswitchwillproducethesameoperation
aspressingtheINCbutton.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
21:MenuCommandonpage 202.
Value Dec
Operatingthefootswitchwillproducethesameoperation
aspressingtheDECbutton.
Song Start/Stop
Thefootswitchwillcontrolsequencerstart/stop.
Simultaneously,aMIDIStartorStopmessagewillbe
transmitted.
thefarleft.)
ARP STEP
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsStep.
thefarleft.)
Foot Pedal Assignments
Song Punch In/Out

IfSeqP0:PreferenceRecordingSetup(08b)issetto
ManualPunchIn,theswitchcanbeusedtopunchinand
punchoutwhenrecordingonthesequencer.
Youcanconnectapedal(suchastheoptionalKorgXVP10
orEXP2)totherearpanelASSIGNABLEPEDALinput,
andthenuseittocontrolawidevarietyoffunctions,as
describedbelow.
Cue Repeat Control

ThisisvalidiftheRepeatsettingforeachstepinSeqP11:
CueListissettoFS(111b).Ifyoupressthepedalswitch
whileastepisrepeating,thiswillbethetriggertoproceed
tothenextstep.
ThissettingismadefortheentireKROME,ontheGlobalP2:
ControllersFootControllerspage.
Tap Tempo
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofthefrontpanelTAPbutton,
forsettingthesystemtempoinrealtime.
ARP ON/OFF
Thefootswitchwillturnthearpeggiatoron/off.
A note on MIDI CCs

SomeoftheassignmentsincludeMIDICCs,whichare
transmittedwhenevertheknobismoved.Notethatthe
MIDICCscanstillbereceivedeveniftheyarenotassigned
toaphysicalcontroller.
IfyouselectUSER[1]USER[4],theMIDIcontrolchange
messagespecifiedbytheRealtimeControlsKnobAssign
settingsineachmodewillbetransmitted.
DRUM TRACK ON/OFF

ThefootswitchwillturntheDrumTrackon/off.
List of Foot Pedal assignments
JS+Y (CC#01)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward).
Off
Thissettingdisablesthepedal.
JSY (CC#02)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward).
Value Slider (CC#18)
Dmodsource.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassign
ValueSlider(CC#18)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithin
theProgramorEffect.
TONE [1]TONE [4]
USER [1]USER [4]
Usetheswitchtocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsisinUSER/TONE.
thefarleft.)
SW1, 2
Thefootswitchduplicatesthefunctionoftheselectedfront
panelswitch.
ARP GATE
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
350
thefarleft.)
Program Up
Thisletsyouusetheswitchtoincrementthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationnumber,forhandsfreepatch
changes.NotethatthisisonlyactivewhileontheProgP0:
PlayorCombiP0:Playpages,respectively.
Master Volume
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitsthe
UniversalSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,
7FH,nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthe
volumesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,while
preservingtheirrelativebalance.
Foot Pedal (CC#04)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFoot
Pedal(CC#04)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Portamento Time (CC#05)
Controlsthespeedatwhichportamentowillchangethe
pitch.
Volume (CC#07)
ControlthevolumeofaProgram,Combination,orofa
MIDItrackinSequencermodes.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlthepanafterpassingthroughtheInsertEffect.
Pan (CC#10)
ControlthepanofaProgram,ofatimbreinaCombination,
orofaMIDItrackinSequencermodes.
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Expression(CC#11)onpage 348.
FX Control 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)
TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamic
Modulation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFX
Ctrl1or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
JS+Y (CC#01)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJS+Y.WhateverJS+Yis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
JSY (CC#02)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJSY.WhateverJSYis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
Ribbon (CC#16)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignRibbon
(CC#16)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Value Slider (CC#18)
Dmodsource.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassign
ValueSlider(CC#18)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithin
theProgramorEffect.
TONE [1]...TONE [4]
USER [1]...USER [4]
Usethepedaltocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsisinUSER/TONE.
ARP GATE
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
ARP VELOCITY
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
ARP SWING
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsSwing.
ARP STEP
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsStep.
351
Appendices
System exclusive messages affected by Create Excl Data,

Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit
Create/Erase
Event Edit
Event Edit
EQ Low Gain
T01:EQ Low Gain
*Unavailable*
Bus Select
T01:Bus Select
Univ: Mater Volume
MaterVolume
Send1(MFX1)
T01:Send1(MFX1)
Univ: Master Balance
MasterBalance
Send2(MFX2)
T01:Send2(MFX2)
Univ: Master Fine Tune
MasterFineTune
FX Control Bus
T01:FX Ctrl Bus
Univ: Master Coarse Tune
MasterCoarseTune
SW1:Assign
T01TA:SW1:Assign
Song Setup
Song Common
Drum Track
Track 01
Play/Mute/Solo
Parameter
352
Create/Erase
*Dump/Ext*
Tone Adjust
Controls [SELECT]
Controls [SELECT]
SW2:Assign
T01TA:SW2:Assign
Tone Adjust Track
Tone Adjust Track
SW3:Assign
T01TA:SW3:Assign
SW4:Assign
T01TA:SW4:Assign
SW5:Assign
T01TA:SW5:Assign
Tone Adjust Auto

Load
TA AutoLoad
Scale Type
Scale Type
SW6:Assign
T01TA:SW6:Assign
Scale Key
Scale Key
SW7:Assign
T01TA:SW7:Assign
Scale Random
Scale Random
SW8:Assign
T01TA:SW8:Assign
[SW1]
[SW1]
SW1:On/Off
T01TA:SW1:on/off
SW1:Assign
SW1:Assign
SW2:On/Off
T01TA:SW2:on/off
SW1:Mode
SW1:Mode
SW3:On/Off
T01TA:SW3:on/off
[SW2]
[SW2]
SW4:On/Off
T01TA:SW4:on/off
SW2:Assign
SW2:Assign
SW5:On/Off
T01TA:SW5:on/off
SW2:Mode
SW2:Mode
SW6:On/Off
T01TA:SW6:on/off
USER CONTROL1:
Assign
USER1:Assign
SW7:On/Off
T01TA:SW7:on/off
USER CONTROL2:
Assign
USER2:Assign
USER CONTROL3:
Assign
USER3:Assign
USER CONTROL4:
Assign
USER4:Assign
[ON/OFF]
DT:[ON/OFF]
Pattern Bank
DT:Pattern Bank
Pattern Number
DT:PatternNumber
SW8:(On)Value
T01TA:SW8:Value
Shift
DT:Shift
Slider1:Assign
T01TA:SL1:Assign
Input MIDI Channel
DT:In MIDI Ch
Slider2:Assign
T01TA:SL2:Assign
Output MIDI Channel
DT:Out MIDI Ch
Slider3:Assign
T01TA:SL3:Assign
Trigger Mode
DT:Trigger Mode
Slider4:Assign
T01TA:SL4:Assign
Trigger Sync
DT:Trigger Sync
Slider5:Assign
T01TA:SL5:Assign
Trigger Latch
DT:Trigger Latch
Slider6:Assign
T01TA:SL6:Assign
Keyboard Zone
Bottom
DT:KeyZone Btm
Slider7:Assign
T01TA:SL7:Assign
Keyboard Zone Top
DT:KeyZone Top
Slider8:Assign
T01TA:SL8:Assign
Slider1:Value
T01TA:SL1:Value
SW8:On/Off
T01TA:SW8:on/off
SW1:(On)Value
T01TA:SW1:Value
SW2:(On)Value
T01TA:SW2:Value
SW3:(On)Value
T01TA:SW3:Value
SW4:(On)Value
T01TA:SW4:Value
SW5:(On)Value
T01TA:SW5:Value
SW6:(On)Value
T01TA:SW6:Value
SW7:(On)Value
T01TA:SW7:Value
Velocity Zone
Bottom
DT:VelZone Btm
Slider2:Value
T01TA:SL2:Value
Velocity Zone Top
DT:VelZone Top
Slider3:Value
T01TA:SL3:Value
Play/Mute
T01:Play/Mute
Slider4:Value
T01TA:SL4:Value
Solo
T01:Solo
Slider5:Value
T01TA:SL5:Value
Program
T01:Program
Slider6:Value
T01TA:SL6:Value
Pan
T01:Pan
Slider7:Value
T01TA:SL7:Value
Volume
T01:Volume
Slider8:Value
T01TA:SL8:Value
Play/Mute/Solo
Play/Mute
T02:Play/Mute
Tone Adjust
Slider8:Value
T16TA:SL8:Value
Arpeggio
[ON/OFF]
KAR:[ON/OFF]
T01:OSC Select
Run A
KAR:[LATCH]
Arpeggiator Assign
T01:Portamento
Run B
KAR:[MOD.CTRL]
Portamento
T01:Portamento
[GATE]
KAR:[M] SCENE
Transpose
T01:Transpose
[VELOCITY]
KAR:SceneQuantze
Detune
T01:Detune
[SWING]
KAR:LinkStartSeed
EX2 Bank
Select(MSB)
T01:EX2Bank MSB
EX2 Bank Select(LSB)
T01:EX2Bank LSB
Force OSC Mode
T01:OSC Mode
OSC Select
Bend Range
T01:Bend Range
Use Program's Scale
T01:Prog's Scale
Track 02...16
Arpeggiator
Arpeggior-A, B
[STEP]
KAR:Load GE Opt
Pattern
KAR:UseRTCModel
KAR:Reset Scenes
Delay Time [ms]
T01:DelayTime:ms
Resolution
Delay MIDI/Tempo
Sync
T01:DelayMIDISync
Octave
KAR:DT Run 1
Delay Sync Base Note
T01:Delay Base
Gate
KAR:DT Run 2
Delay Sync Times
T01:Delay Times
Velocity
KAR:DT Run 3
Auto Load Program

EQ
Sort
KAR:DT Run 4
T01:Auto Prog EQ
Latch
KAR:DT Run 1
EQ Bypass
T01:EQ Bypass
Key Sync.
KAR:DT Run 2
EQ Input Trim
T01:EQ Input Trim
Keyboard
KAR:DT Run 3
EQ High Gain
T01:EQ High Gain
KAR:DT Run 4
EQ Mid Freq
T01:EQ Mid Freq
Keyboard Zone
Bottom
EQ Mid Gain
T01:EQ Mid Gain
Keyboard Zone Top
KAR:DT Run 1
System exclusive messages affected by Create Excl Data, Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit
Create/Erase
Insert Effect
Event Edit
Setup
IFX1:No Effect
IFX2:No Effect...
IFX5:No Effect
Common FX LFO1
Velocity Zone
Bottom
KAR:DT Run 2
Velocity Zone Top
KAR:DT Run 3
IFX1 SW
IFX1:SW
IFX1
IFX1
IFX1 Control Channel
IFX1:Control Ch.
IFX1 Chain To
IFX1:Chain To
IFX1 Chain
IFX1:Chain
IFX1 Pan
IFX1:Pan
IFX1 Bus Select
IFX1:Bus Select
IFX1 Control Bus
IFX1:Control Bus
IFX1 Send1
IFX1:Send1
IFX1 Send2
IFX1:Send2
IFX2 SW
IFX2:SW
IFX5
IFX5:Send2
Parameter0
IFX1:Parameter0
Parameter71
IFX1:Parameter71
Parameter0
IFX2:Parameter0
Parameter71
IFX5:Parameter71
Frequency[Hz]
FX LFO1:Freq[Hz]
Sync(Reset)
FX LFO1:Sync
Sync Source
FX LFO1:Sync Src
Sync Control Channel FX LFO1:Sync Ctrl
Common FX LFO2
Master Effect
Setup
MFX1:No Effect
MFX2:No Effect
Total Effect
Setup
TFX:No Effect
MIDI/Tempo Sync
FX LFO1:MIDI Sync
MIDI Sync BPM
FX LFO1:BPM
MIDI Sync BaseNote
FX LFO1:Base Note
MIDI Sync Times
FX LFO1:Times
Frequency[Hz]
FX LFO1:Freq[Hz]
MIDI Sync Times
FX LFO2:Times
MFX1 SW
MFX1:SW
MFX1
MFX1
MFX1 Control
Channel
MFX1:Control Ch.
MFX1 Return
MFX1:Return
MFX2 SW
MFX2:SW
MFX2
MFX2
MFX2 Control
Channel
MFX2:Control Ch.
MFX2 Return
MFX2:Return
MFX Chain
MFX Chain
Chain Direction
MFX Chain Direct.
Chain Level
MFX Chain Level
Parameter0
MFX1:Parameter0
Parameter71
MFX1:Parameter71
Parameter0
MFX2:Parameter0
Parameter71
MFX2:Parameter71
TFX SW
TFX SW
TFX
TFX
TFX Control Channel
TFX:Control Ch.
Master Volume
TFX Master Vol.
Parameter0
TFX:Parameter0
Parameter71
TFX:Parameter71
353
Appendices
MIDI transmission when the KROMEs controllers are operated

ThefollowingtablesshowtherelationbetweentheMIDI
messagesthataretransmittedwhentheKROMEs
controllersareoperated,andtheAMS(alternatemodulation
source)orDMS(dynamicmodulationsource)that
correspondtoeachMIDImessage.
#indicatesafixedfunction,and*indicatesanassignable
function.
MIDI Messages and physical controllers

ARP
MIDImessages
CC#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33...37
38
39...63
64
65
66
67
68...69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89...90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
114
115
116
117
118
119
354
Noteoff
Noteon(notenumber)
Noteon(velocity)
Polyaftertouch
Bankselect(MSB)
Modulation1
Modulation2
Footcontroller
Portamentotime
Dataentry(MSB)
Volume
PostInsertEffectpanpot
Panpot
Expression
Effectcontrol1
Effectcontrol2
ARPOn/Offcontrol
Controller(CC#16)
Knobmodulation5
Controller(CC#18)
Knobmodulation6
Knobmodulation7
Knobmodulation8
ARPGATEcontrol
ARPVELOCITYcontrol
ARPSWINGcontrol
ARPSTEPcontrol
Bankselect(LSB)
Dataentry(LSB)
Damper
PortamentoOn/Off
Sostenuto
Softpedal
Sustainlevel
Filterresonancelevel
Releasetime
Attacktime
Filtercutofffrequency
Decaytime
LFO1speed
LFO1depth(pitch)
LFO1delay
FilterEGintensity
SW1modulationOn/Off
SW2modulationOn/Off
FootswitchOn/Off
Controller(CC#83)
Controller(CC#85)
Controller(CC#86)
Controller(CC#87)
Controller(CC#88)
Effectdepth1(send2level)
Effectdepth2(IFX15On/Off)
Effectdepth3(send1level)
Effectdepth4(MFX1,2On/Off)
Effectdepth5(TFX1,2On/Off)
Dataincrement
Datadecrement
NRPN(LSB)
NRPN(MSB)
RPN(LSB)
0:Bendrange
1:Finetune
2:Coarsetune
RPN(MSB)0
Programchange
Channelaftertouch
PitchBend
Universalexclusive
Mastervolume
Masterbalance
Masterfinetune
Mastercoarsetune
Joystick
Realtime
Knob
TONE14
#(+Y)
#(Y)
#(Knob2)
#(Knob4)
#(Knob1)
#(Knob3)
Realtime
Knob
USER14
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
SW1,2
*(SW1)
*(SW2)
On/Off
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob1
(GATE)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob2
(VELOCITY)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob3
(SWING)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob4
(STEP)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Damper
Foot
Switch
*
*
Foot
Pedal
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
+X,X
*
Available Available
forAMS forDmod
MIDI transmission when the KROMEs controllers are operated
(1):WhenaarpeggiatorcontrollerisassignedtoaCC#
indicatedby[*](GlobalP2:ControllersMIDICC#
Assign)
*:Assignable
[*]:TheARPControllerscanbeassignedtoCC#00119.
CC#sindicatedby[*]willbeassignedautomatically
whenyouexecutetheGlobalP2MIDICC#Assign
menucommandResetControllerMIDIAssignwiththe
CCDefaultsetting.
TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecommendedas
theCC#foreachofthesecontrollers.Normallyyou
shouldusethesesettingswhenassigningCC#s.
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,the
correspondingortheassignedcontrolchangewillbe
transmitted.
IfyouchooseUSER[1]USER[4],orSW1/2,itsMIDI
controlchangemessagewillbetransmittedaccordingtothe
settingsinRealtimeControlsKnobAssign,SW1/2Assign.
IfyouveselectedARPON/OFF,ARPGATE,ARP
VELOCITY,ARPSWING,ARPSTEP,thoseMIDIcontrol
changemessageswillbetransmittedaccordingtotheGlobal
P2MIDICC#Assignsettings.
transmittedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDI
Channel(Seq31(2)c).
IftheStatusisINTorBTH,operatingoneoftheKROMEs
controllerswillaffectonlythatMIDItrack.Simultaneously,
thesameeffectwillalsoapplytoanyMIDItrackwiththe
sameMIDIChannelsetting.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmitted.
YoucanmakesettingsforMIDIFilter(SeqP3)toenable
ordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersforeach
track.Whenchecked,theoperationseffectivefora
StatusofINTorBTHwillbeenabled.Trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2,orBTHwilltransmitcontrol
changesregardlessofthissetting.
EffectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhentheCh
(Seq84a,92a)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXmatches
theMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelect.(In
thecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleontheMIDI
channelofallroutedtracks.)
IfoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperatedduring
realtimerecording,thecorrespondingorassignedcontrol
changewillberecorded.
Thefollowingsectionsdescribesoperationineachmode.
Program mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,acontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(MIDIChannelGlobal11a).
IftheRealtimeControlsissettoUSER,andknobs14
ortheassignablepedalareassignedtoMasterVolume,
theuniversalexclusivemessageMasterVolumewillbe
transmitted.
Combination mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,acontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(MIDIChannelGlobal11a).
Simultaneously,themessagewillalsobetransmittedonthe
MIDIchannel(MIDIChannelCombi31(2)c)ofanytimbre
whoseStatus(Combi31(2)c)isEXTorEX2.
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,itseffect
willapplytoanytimbrewhoseStatusisINTandwhose
MIDIChannelsettingiseitherGchorthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmittedonlyonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
YoucanmakesettingsforMIDIFilter(CombiP5)to
enableordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersfor
eachtimbre.Whenchecked,theaboveoperationswill
beenabled.
EffectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhentheCh
(Combi84a,92a)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXis
eithersettoGchortothesamechannelastheglobalMIDI
channel.(InthecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleonthe
MIDIchannelofanyroutedtimbre.)
Sequencer mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,itseffect
willapplytotheMIDItrack116thatiscurrentlyselected
byTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
IftheStatus(Seq31(2)c)ofthetrackselectedbyTrack
SelectisEXT,EX2,orBTH,acontrolchangemessagewillbe
355
Appendices
KROME and MIDI CCs

Responses to standard MIDI
controllers
ThefollowingtableshowshowtheKROMErespondsto
MIDIcontrolchangemessages,andtherelationbetween
settingsandcontrollermovementsontheKROME.
CC#
Control
Function
0127
bankselectmessageMSB
1 Modulation1
0127
correspondstojoystickmovementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward)
*1
2 Modulation2
0127
correspondstojoystickmovementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward)
4 Footcontroller
0127
correspondstowhentheassignablepedalfunctionissettoFoot
Pedal
portamentotime
5 Portamentotime
0127
6 Dataentry(MSB)
0127
MSBofRPNandNRPNdata
*2
7 Volume
0127
volume
*3
8 PostInsertEffectpanpot
0127
panaftertheInsertEffect
10 Panpot
0127
pan
11 Expression
0127
volume
12 Effectcontrol1
0127
correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl1(p.363)
13 Effectcontrol2
0127
correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl2(p.363)
14 ARPON/OFFcontrol
063(Off),
64127(On)
equivalenttoon/offwhenCC#14isassignedtotheARPbuttons
15
16 Controller(CC#16)
0127
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
17 Knobmodulation1
0127
correspondstowhentheRealtimeControlsknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.1
0127
19 Knobmodulation2
0127
Mod.2
20 Knobmodulation3
0127
Mod.3
21 Knobmodulation4
0127
Mod.4
22 ARPGATEcontrol
0127
equivalenttowhenCC#22isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob1
(GATE)
*7
23 ARPVELOCITYcontrol
0127
(VELOCITY)
*7
24 ARPSWINGcontrol
0127
(SWING)
*7
25 ARPSTEPcontrol
0127
(STEP)
*7
0127
LSBofbankselectmessage
2631
32 Bankselect(LSB)
3337
38 Dataentry(LSB)
3963
0127
LSBofRPNorNRPNdata
64 Damper
0127
dampereffect
65 PortamentoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turntheportamentoeffecton/off
66 SostenutoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turnthesostenutoeffecton/off
0127
softpedaleffect
67 Soft
6869
356
Value
0 Bankselect(MSB)
*3
*7
*8
*1
*2
70 Sustainlevel
0127
sustainlevelsofthefilterEGandampEG
*4
71 Filterresonancelevel
0127
resonancelevelofthefilter
*4
72 Releasetime
0127
cutofffrequencyofthehighpassfilter
*4
73 Attacktime
0127
releasetimesofthefilterEGandampEG
*4
74 Filtercutofffrequency
0127
cutofffrequencyofthelowpassfilter
*4
75 Decaytime
0127
decaytimes/slopetimesofthefilterEGandampEG
*4
76 LFO1speed
0127
LFO1speed
*4
KROME and MIDI CCs
CC#
Control
Value
Function
77 LFO1depth
0127
pitchLFO1intensity
*4
78 LFO1delay
0127
LFO1delay
*4
79 FilterEGintensity
0127
filterEGintensity
*4
80 SW1modulationOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhentheSW1functionissettoSW1Mod.
81 SW2modulationOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhentheSW2functionissettoSW2Mod.
82 FootswitchOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhenthefunctionoftheassignablefootswitchisset
toFootSW
0127
84
0127
0127
send2level
89,90
91 Effectdepth1(send2level)
Effectdepth2(InsertEffect15On/ 063(Off),
92
Off)
64127(On)
turnInserteffect15on/off
93 Effectdepth3(send1level)
0127
send1level
Effectdepth4(mastereffect1,2
94
On/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
mastereffect1,2on/off
*5
95 Effectdepth5(totaleffectOn/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
totaleffecton/off
*5
96 Dataincrement
97 Datadecrement
98 NRPN(LSB)
LSBofNRPN
99 NRPN(MSB)
MSBofNRPN
*5
selectsthepitchbendrange
*2
100 RPN(LSB)
controlsFineTune
*2
controlsCoarseTune
*2
101 RPN(MSB)
MSBofRPN
102...119
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theRealtimeControlsKnobsUSER14.Inthiscase,the
transmittedvalueswillallbe0127.
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theARPbutton,arpeggiocontrolknobs14.Inthiscase,
ARPbuttonswilltransmitvaluesof0(Off)or127(On),
knobs14willtransmitvaluesof0127.
*1 IntheKROMEsequencer,bankselectmessagesare
normallyspecifiedasprogramchangeevents(MIDI
EventEditSequencerP6).Howeverinsomecasesthis
willbeinsufficientwhenyouwishtochangebanksonan
externaldevice.Insuchcases,youcanuseCC#00and
CC#32tospecifythebanks.
Forinformationontherelationbetweenbankselect
numbersandthebanksofyourexternaldevice,referto
theownersmanualforyourexternaldevice.
*2 Unlikeconventionalcontrolchanges,pitchbendrange,
finetune,andcoarsetunesettingsaremadeusingRPC
(RegisteredParameterControl)messages.InProgram,
Combination,andSequencermodes,youcanuseRPC
messagestocontrolthebendrangeandtuningforeach
program,Timbre(Combination),orTrack(Sequencer).
TheprocedureistouseanRPN(RegisteredParameter
Number)messagetoselecttheparameterthatyouwish
toedit,andthenuseDataEntrytoinputavalueforthat
parameter.Toselecttheparameter,useCC#100(witha
valueof0002)andCC#101(withavalueof00).use
CC#06andCC#38toenterthedata.
Thedataentryvaluesforeachparameterandthecorre
spondingsettingsareasfollows.
RPN=0 (Pitch bend range)

CC#06 CC#38
Parameter value (Semitone steps)
00
12
00
+12
24
00
+24
127
00
+24
RPN=1 (Fine tune)

Parameter value (1 cent steps)
CC#06 CC#38
0
00
-100
64
00
127
00
+98
127
127
+99
RPN=2 (Coarse tune)

CC#06 CC#38
Parameter value (Semitone steps)
00
-24
40
00
-24
64
00
88
00
+24
127
00
+24
Forexample,ifinSequencermodeyouwishtoseta
MIDItrackthatisreceivingchannel1toatranspose
(coarsetuning)valueof12,youwouldfirsttransmit[B0,
64,02](64H=CC#100)and[B0,65,00](65H=CC#101)to
theKROMEtoselecttheRPNcoarsetune.Thenyou
357
Appendices
Eachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedtoanydesired
MIDIcontrolchangemessageCC#00119,butnormally
youwillchoosetheGlobalP2MIDICC#Assignmenu
commandResetControllerMIDIAssignandusetheCC
Defaultsettings.
wouldsetthisto12bytransmitting[B0,06,34]
(06H=CC#6),34H=52(correspondsto12),and[B0,26,
00](26H=CC#38,00H=0).
*3 ThevolumeoftheKROMEisdeterminedbymultiplying
theVolume(CC#07)withtheExpression(CC#11).In
Sequencermodewhenyoustopthesongplaybackand
returnthelocationtothebeginningofthetrack,the
Volumewillbesettothestartingvalue,andthe
Expressionwillbesettothemaximumvalue(127).
*4 Avalueof64willcorrespondtothevaluespecifiedby
theprogramparameter.0istheminimum,and127isthe
maximum.Changingfrom631orfrom65126will
adjusttheeffectfromtheprogramparametersetting
towardtheminimumvalueormaximumvalue.
Fordetailsaboutthespecificparameterscontrolledby
theseCCs,pleaseseeParameterscontrolledbyMIDI
CCs#7079onpage 358.
*5 ControlledontheglobalMIDIchannel.
*6 IfyouassignaCC#totheARPbuttonorarpeggiocontrol
knobs14andperformtheseoperationsontheKROME,
theassignedCC#willbetransmitted,andtheKROME
itselfwillalsobecontrolledatthesametime.Ifthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameasifthe
KROMEitselfhadbeenoperated.
TheCC#settingsforeachknobandbuttonaremadein
theGlobalP2MIDICC#Assignpage.Usethesesettings
ifyouneedtoassigncontrolchangemessages,forexam
plewhenyouwanttorecordbuttonoperationsonthe
internalsequenceroranexternalMIDIsequencer,orto
controlthearpeggiatorfromanexternalMIDIdevice.
CC#
358
ThistableshowstheoperationsfortheCCDefaultset
tings.TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecom
mendedforusewiththesecontrollers.Normally,you
willassigntheseCC#s.
Parameters controlled by MIDI

CCs #70-79
CC#7079correspondtotheKROMEsprogramparameters
listedbelow.
InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogramparameters
willbetemporarilyeditedwhenCC#7079messagesare
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannel(MIDIChannelGlobal
11a),whenknobs14areoperatedwhentheRealtime
ControlsisinTONE,orwhenknobs14areoperatedwhen
assignedtoCC#7079withtheRealtimeControlsinUSER.
Inmostcases,youcanusetheWriteProgrammenu
commandtosavetheeditedvalues,overwritingthe
previousProgramsettings.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanuse
theseCCstotemporarilyedittheparametersforall
TimbresorTracksonagivenMIDIchannel.However,
Internal parameters controlled by the CC
70(Sustainlevel)
FilterEG1/2Sustain(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Sustain(seepage 39)
71(Filterresonance)
FilterA/B,1/2Resonance(seepage 27)
72(Releasetime)
FilterEG1/2Release(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Release(seepage 39)
73(Attacktime)
EGTimes:
FilterEG1/2Attack(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Attack(seepage 39)
AmpEG1/2TimeModulation:Attack(seepage 39)
EGLevels:
AmpEG1/2LevelStart(seepage 38)
AmpEG1/2LevelAttack(seepage 38)
AmpEG1/2LevelModulation:Start(seepage 40)
74(Filtercutofffrequency)
FilterA/B,1/2Frequency(seepage 27)
75(Decaytime)
FilterEG1/2Decay(seepage 32)
FilterEG1/2Slope(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Decay(seepage 39)
AmpEG1/2Slope(seepage 39)
76(LFO1speed)
LFO1Frequency(seepage 42)
77(LFO1Pitchintensity)
PitchLFO1Intensity(seepage 22)
78(LFO1delay)
LFO1Delay(seepage 43)
79(FilterEGintensity)
FilterEG1/2IntensitytoA(seepage 30)
FilterEG1/2IntensitytoB(seepage 30)
MIDI applications
MIDI applications
About MIDI
Local Control On settings
MIDIstandsforMusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface,andis
aworldwidestandardforexchangingvarioustypesof
musicaldatabetweenelectronicmusicalinstrumentsand
computers.WhenMIDIcablesareusedtoconnecttwoor
moreMIDIdevices,performancedatacanbeexchanged
betweenthedevices,eveniftheyweremadebydifferent
manufacturers.
IfyouveconnectedtheKROMEtoacomputerorexternal
MIDIsequencerandwanttousetheechobackfromthat
devicetoplaytheKROME,turnechobackonforyour
externalMIDIsequencerorcomputer(sothatthedatait
receivesatMIDIINwillberetransmittedfromMIDIOUT),
andturnofftheKROMEslocalcontrolsetting(sothatthe
KROMEskeyboardsectionandsoundgeneratorwillbe
internallydisconnected).
Settings when connected to a

MIDI device or computer
WhenyouplaythekeyboardoftheKROME,themusical
datawillbetransmittedtotheexternalMIDIsequenceror
computer,andthenechoedbacktoplaytheKROMEstone
generator.Inotherwords,byturningLocalControlOFF,
youcanpreventnotesfrombeingsoundedinduplicate,as
wouldotherwiseoccurifanoteweresoundedbythe
KROMEsownkeyboardandagainbythedatathatwas
echoedback.
Herewewillexplainthesettingsyoullmakeonthe
KROMEwhenconnectingittoanotherdevice.
The Convert Position setting

TheKROMEssettingsKeyTranspose,VelocityCurve,and
AfterTouchCurve(MIDIIN)(Global01a)respectively
allowyoutoadjustthetransposition,velocitysensitivity,
andaftertouch(receivedonlyfromtheinternalsequenceror
fromMIDIIN)sensitivity.
Theaftertouchcurveisappliedonlytodatareceived
fromtheinternalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.TheAfter
TouchCurve(MIDIIN)settingdoesnothingif
ConvertPosition(Global11a)isPreMIDI.
Theeffectthatthesesettingswillhaveontheinternal
sequencerandontheMIDIdatathatistransmittedand
receivedwilldependonConvertPosition(Global11a)
setting.
IfyouwanttocontrolanexternalMIDItonegenerator
fromtheKROME,setConvertPositiontoPreMIDI.The
varioussettingslistedabovewillbereflectedintheMIDI
datathatistransmitted.Thesesettingswillalsobe
reflectedinthedatathatisrecordedontheinternal
sequencer.
Ifthearpeggiatorfunctionison,playingtheKROMEs
keyboardwillnotcausethearpeggiatortooperate,andonly
themusicaldataproducedbyplayingthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.Thearpeggiatorwilloperateonlyinresponse
tothenotesthatareechoedbackandreceivedatMIDIIN.
Inthisway,turningoffLocalControlpreventsthe
arpeggiatorfromoperatinginduplicate.
Usethissettingwhenyouwishtorecordontheexternal
MIDIsequencerorcomputeronlythenotesthattriggerthe
arpeggiator,andtousetheechoedbacknotestooperatethe
arpeggiatorwhilemonitoringyourrecordingorduring
playback.
Note:Ifyouwantthenotedataproducedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer/computer,setLocal
Controlon,andturnofftheEchoBacksettingoftheexternal
sequencer/computer.
ToturnoffLocalControl,presstheLocalControlOn
(Global11a)checkboxtouncheckit.
WhenusingtheKROMEbyitself,leaveLocalControl
turnedon.(IfthisisoffwhentheKROMEisusedbyitself,
playingthekeyboardwillnotproducesound.)
IncomingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,VelocityCurve4,andAfter
TouchCurve3.
WhencontrollingtheKROMEstonegeneratorfroman
externalMIDIdevice,selectPostMIDI.Theabovelisted
settingswillaffecttheMIDIdatathatisreceived.These
settingswillalsoaffectthedatathatisplayedbackfrom
theinternalsequencer.
OutgoingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,andVelocityCurve4.
359
Appendices
Messages transmitted and

received by the KROME
Inthetextbelow,[]indicateshexadecimalnotation.
MIDI channels
MIDImessagescanbeexchangedwhenthetransmitting
andreceivingdevicesaresettothesameMIDIchannel.
MIDIusessixteenchannels,numbered116.Thewayin
whichchannelsarehandledwilldifferdependingonthe
mode.
Program mode
OtherthantransmissionfortheDrumTrackfunction,all
dataistransmittedandreceivedontheglobalMIDI
channel.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisthebasicchannelthatthe
KROMEusesforMIDItransmission/reception,andisset
byMIDIChannel(Global11a).
TheDrumTrackfunctioninProgrammodewilltransmit
andreceiveonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:GlobalMIDIchannel.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumTrack
ProgMIDIOut(Global11a)setting(default:channel
10).
Note:TransmissionisenabledifDrumTrackProgMIDI
Out(Global11a)ischecked.Bydefault,thisisoff
(unchecked).
Combination mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
messagesforselectingacombinationandturningeffects
on/off,andtotransmit/receiveexclusivedata.
Eachtimbrewilltransmit/receiveMIDIdataontheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)thatisspecifiedforthattimbre.
TheDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitandreceiveonthe
followingMIDIchannels.
Receive:GlobalMIDIchannel.TheKROMEskeyboard
willcontroltriggering.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternOutput(Combi76a)settingofeachcombination.
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofatimbretowhicha
drumprogramisassigned.
TheChMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffect(Combi8
4a,92a)isusedtocontroldynamicmodulationofthe
insert/master/totaleffect,thepanfollowingtheinsert
effect,andsend1and2.
Whenyouoperatethekeyboardorcontrollersofthe
KROME,messageswillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel,andwillalsobetransmittedontheMIDIchannel
ofanytimbrewhoseStatus(Combi21a)issettoEXTor
EX2.
ChannelmessageswillbereceivediftheymatchtheMIDI
channelofatimbrewhoseStatusissettoINT(Combi3
1(2)c).
Sequencer mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
exclusivedataandformessagesthatswitcheffectson/off.
MIDIdatatransmission/receptionforeachMIDItrack
willoccurontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachMIDI
trackbyMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).
TheDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitandreceiveonthe
followingMIDIchannels.
360
Receive:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternInput(Seq11a)settingofeachsong.Youwillnor
mallysetthistoTchandusetheKROMEskeyboardto
controltriggering.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternOutput(Seq11a)settingofeachsong.Setthisto
matchtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItracktowhicha
drumpatternisassigned.
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffectbytheCh
parameter(Seq84a,92a)isusedtocontroldynamic
modulationoftheinsert/master/totaleffect,thepan
followingtheinserteffect,andsend1and2.
Whenyouoperatethekeyboardorcontrollersofthe
KROME,messageswillbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedbyTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).However,
messageswillbetransmittedonlyiftheselectedMIDI
trackhasaStatusofBTH,EXT,orEX2.Formore
information,pleaseseeTrackSelectonpage 110.
Whenthesequencerisplayedback,musicaldataofMIDI
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willbe
transmittedonthespecifiedMIDIchannels.
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisINTorBTHwillreceive
channelmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannel.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeStatusonpage 125,and
MIDIChannelonpage 125.
Note on/off
Note-on [9n, kk, vv]
Note-off [8n, kk, vv]
(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:velocity)
WhenyouplayanoteontheKROMEskeyboard,itwill
transmitnoteon/offmessages.
Whenthearpeggiatorisrunning,noteon/offmessages
generatedbythearpeggiatoraretransmitted.IfLocalisOff,
noteon/offmessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatorwillnot
betransmitted.(SeeLocalControlOnsettingson
page 359)
IftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting(Global11a)is
checked,thedrumtrackpatternwilltransmitnoteon/off
messageswhilethedrumtrackfunctionisoperating.
However,mostinstrumentsdonotreceiveortransmitnote
offvelocity,andneitherdoestheKROME.
Program Change/Bank Select

Changing the program/bank
Program change [Cn, pp]
(n:channel,pp:programnumberthatallows128soundsto
beselected)
Programs000127inbanksAEcorrespondtoprogram
changes[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Programs001128inbanksGM,g(1),g(2),g(3),g(4),g(5),
g(6),g(7),g(8),g(9),andg(d)correspondtoprogram
changes[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Bank select MSB (CC#0) [Bn, 00, mm]

Bank select LSB (CC#32) [Bn, 20, bb]
(n:channel,mm:banknumberupperbyte,bb:banknumber
lowerbyte)
Theinternalbanksthatcorrespondtoeachbankselect
numberwilldependontheBankMapsetting(Global0
2a).KORGisthedefaultsetting.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeBankMaponpage 196.
SimplyreceivingaBankSelectmessagewillnotcausethe
programorbanktochange.Theprogramorbankwill
MIDI applications
actuallychangewhenaProgramChangemessageis
received.
Program mode
InProgP0:Play,thesemessageswilltransmitandreceive
programchangeandbankselectoperations.Theywillnot
bereceivedinP1P9.
Note:Drumtrackprogramsdonotsupporttransmissionor
receptionofprogramchangeorbankselectmessages.
Combination, Sequencer modes

Programchangeandbankselectmessagescanbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre/
MIDItracktoselectprogramsonthattimbre/track.
Whenyouselectacombination,programchangeand
bankselectmessageswillbetransmittedbytimbres
whoseStatusisEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,programchangeorbankselectmes
sageswillbetransmittedbytrackswhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2whenyouselecttheProgramSelectparame
ter(01(2)b),whenyouselectasong,orwhenyoureturn
tothebeginningofameasure.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeProgramSelectonpage 112.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptioncanbeswitchedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
SeeEnableProgramChangeonpage 87,andGlobalP1:
MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200.
Selecting combinations
Youcanuseprogramchangeandbankselectmessagesto
selectcombinationsinthesamewaythatyouselect
programs.
Combinations000127inbanksADcorrespondto
programchanges[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Similarlyasforprogrambanks,theinternalbanksthat
correspondtoeachbankselectnumberwilldependon
theBankMapsetting(Global02a).Formore
information,pleaseseeBankMaponpage 196.
InCombiP0:Play,programchangeandbankselect
messagesaretransmitted/receivedontheglobalMIDI
channel.TheyarenotreceivedinP1P9.
Note:AllprogramchangescanbeturnedoffinMIDIFilter
(Global12b)
Asneeded,youcanindependentlyturnallprogramchanges
on/off,specifywhetherornotincomingmessageswillbe
abletochangecombinations,andturnreception/
transmissionofbankselectmessageson/off.
IfCombinationChange(Global12b)isunchecked,the
combinationwillnotchangeevenifaprogramchangeon
theglobalMIDIchannelisreceivedinCombiP0:Play.In
thiscase,theprogramofthetimbrethatmatchesthe
MIDIchannelofthereceivedmessagewillchange.
IfBankChange(Global12b)isunchecked,bankselect
messageswillnotbetransmittedorreceived.
Aftertouch
Channel aftertouch [Dn, vv]
(n:channel,vv:value)
Whenthismessageisreceived,theaftertoucheffectwillbe
applied.Theassignedalternatemodulationordynamic
modulationeffectwillalsobeapplied.
ThekeyboardoftheKROMEitselfcannottransmit
aftertouch.Aftertouchcanbereceivedonlyfromthe
internalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,aftertouchcanbe
turnedon/offindependentlyforeachtimbre/track
(EnableAfterTouchCombi/Seq51(2)c).
Polyphonic aftertouch [An, kk, vv]

(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:value)
ThereisanothertypeofaftertouchcalledPolyphonicKey
Pressure,whichallowsaftertouchtobeapplied
independentlyforindividualkeys.Thismessagecanbe
usedasanalternatemodulationsource,butcannotbe
transmittedbytheKROMEskeyboard.Inordertousethis
message,itwillhavetobereceivedfromanexternaldevice,
orrecordedonyoursequencer.
TheaftertouchmentionedinthismanualreferstoChannel
AfterTouch.
Pitch bend
Pitch bend change [En, bb, mm]
(n:channel,bb:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteof
thevalue,togetherexpressingavalueof16,384stepswhere
8,192[bb,mm=00H,40H]isthecentervalue)
WhentheKROMEsjoystickismovedintheXaxis(left/
right),apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied,andpitchbender
messageswillalsobetransmitted.Whenthesemessagesare
received,apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied.
Therangeofpitchchangethatisproducedbypitchbend
messagescanalsobeadjustedviaMIDI.(SeeChangingthe
pitchbendrangeonpage 365)
Control change
[Bn, cc, vv]
Transmittedandreceivedas(n:channel,cc:controlchange
no.,vv:value)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDItransmissionwhen
theKROMEscontrollersareoperatedonpage 354,and
KROMEandMIDICCsonpage 356.
Controlchangescanbeturnedon/offasawholein
EnableControlChange(Global12b).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,theP3:MIDI
Filter1settingsallowtransmission/receptionofcontrol
changestobeindividuallyturnedon/offforeachtimbre/
track.Fortheassignablecontrollers(SW1,SW2,Realtime
ControlsKnobUSER1USER4,andFootPedal/Switch),
MIDIfiltersettingswillapplytothecontrolchange
numbertowhicheachcontrollerisassigned.Other
ControlChangeappliestocontrolchangesthatarenot
coveredbytheitemsoftheothercheckboxes.
Note:YoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119forknobs14
whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
AlthoughyoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119fortheARP
Controllers,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthat
areassignedwhenyouexecutethemenucommandReset
ControllerMIDIAssignwithDefaultSetting,ARP
ControllersSWARPON/OFFatCC#014,KNOB1ARP
GATEatCC#022,KNOB2ARPVELOCITYatCC#023,
KNOB3ARPSWINGatCC#024,KNOB4ARPSTEPat
CC#025.
Selecting program/combination banks

Bank select (CC#00, CC#32)
Technically,BankSelectisacontroller.Inpractice,however,
itisacomponentofProgramChange.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeProgramChange/BankSelectonpage 360)
Aftertouchreceptionfortheentireinstrumentcanbe
turnedon/offinEnableAfterTouch(Global12b).
361
Appendices
Using the joystick to apply modulation

Modulation 1 depth (CC#01) [Bn, 01, vv]
WhenyoumovetheKROMEsjoystickinthe+Ydirection
(Verticalupward),Modulation1Depthmessageswillbe
transmitted.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesame
effectwillbeappliedaswhentheKROMEsjoystickis
operated.Normallythiswillapplyavibratoeffect(pitch
LFO).
IfadjustingtheVolumemessagedoesnotincreasethe
volumeasyouexpect,orifthereisnosound,transmitMIDI
messagesfromanexternaldevicetoresetthevalueofthe
Expressionmessage(setvvto127).
Note:InSequencermode,thiswillberesetwhenthe
Locationofthesongismovedto001:01.000.
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track
(EnableJS+YCombi/Seq53(4)c).
InCombinationmode,Volumemessageswillbe
transmittedbyeachtimbrewhoseStatusisEXTorEX2
whenyoureselectthecombination.
Modulation 2 depth (CC#02) [Bn, 02, vv]

WhenyoumovetheKROMEsjoystickintheYdirection
(Verticaldownward),Modulation2Depthmessageswillbe
transmitted.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesame
effectwillbeappliedaswhentheKROMEsjoystickis
operated.Normallythiswillapplyawaheffect(filterLFO).
WhenyouchangetheVolumesetting(Seq03(4)b)in
Sequencermode,orwhenyoureselectthesongorreturn
tothebeginningofthesonginSequencermode,volume
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.SeeGlobalP1:MIDITrackMIDI
Outonpage 200.
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track
(EnableJSYCombi/Seq53(4)c).
Note:RegardlessoftheStatussettings,reselectingasong,
orreturningtothebeginningwillresettheinternalVolume
valuetothevaluespecifiedbyeachtrack(thestarting
settings),andwillresettheExpressionvaluetothe
maximum.
Othermanufacturersusethismessageforotherpurposes
(e.g.,breathcontroller,etc.)
Controlling portamento
Portamento time (CC#05) [Bn, 05, vv]
IfyouassigntheaboveCC#toanAssignablePedalorknobs
14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,rotating
thatknobwilltransmitPortamentoTimemessages,andwill
modifythespeedatwhichtheportamentopitchchanges.
Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameas
whenthecontrollerisoperated.
Portamento switch (CC#65) [Bn, 41, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtoSW1,SW2orthe
AssignableSwitch,operatingthatswitchwilltransmit
vv=127[7F]forONorvv=0[00]forOFF,andtheportamento
effectwillbeswitchedon/off.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.(vvof63[3F]orlesswillbeOFF,and64[40]or
greaterwillbeON.)(SeeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 348)
receptionofthismessagecanbeturnedon/off
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnablePortamento
SWCombi51(2)c/Seq31a).
InSequencermode,portamentotime/switchmessages
willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2whenyousetPortamento(Seq33(4)c),re
selectasongorSMF,orreturntothebeginningofa
measure.Formoreinformation,pleaseseePortamento
onpage 126.
Controlling volume
Volume (CC#07) [Bn, 07, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitVolumemessages,
andthevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.
Expression (CC#11) [Bn, 0B, vv]
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitExpressionmessages,
andthevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
operated.
362
ThevolumeoftheKROMEisdeterminedbymultiplying
thevalueoftheVolumemessagewiththevalueofthe
Expressionmessage.
Note:Thismessagecanbeusedtocontrolthevolumeof
eachMIDItrack.Normally,youwillincludeaVolume
messageintheMIDItracksettingdata(thesettingsatthe
beginningofthetrack)tosettheinitialvolume,anduse
Expressiontocreatechangesindynamicsasthesong
progresses.
ByusingtheuniversalexclusiveMasterVolumemessage,
youcanadjusttheoverallvolumewithoutchangingthe
volumebalancebetweentimbresortracks.(Aboutsystem
exclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Controlling pan (stereo position)

Pan (CC#10) [Bn, 0A, vv]
(vv:value,where00isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right)
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitPanmessages,and
thepanningwillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,the
resultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.
WhenyousetthePan(Seq03(4)b)inSequencermode,or
whenyoureselectthesongorreturntothebeginningof
themeasureinSequencermode,Panpotmessages(except
forRND)willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.SeePanonpage 113,GlobalP1:
MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200.
Post insert effect pan (CC#08) [Bn, 08, vv]

(vv:value,where00isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right)
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitPostInsertEffect
Panpotmessages,andthepanningofthesoundfollowing
theinserteffectwillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
operated.
InProgrammode,thismessageistransmitted/receivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.InCombination,andSequencer
modes,thismessageistransmitted/receivedontheMIDI
channelspecifiedforeachinserteffect.
WhenyousetPan:#8(Seq83b)inSequencermode,or
whenyoureselectthesongorreturntothebeginningof
themeasureinSequencermode,PostInsertEffectPanpot
MIDI applications
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.Formoreinformation,pleasesee8
3b:InsertEffectonpage 149.
Controlling effects
Effect control 1 (CC#12) [Bn, 0C, vv]
Effect control 2 (CC#13) [Bn, 0D, vv]
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitEffectControl1/2
messages,andthespecifieddynamicmodulationwillbe
controlled.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbe
thesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.
Althoughvarioustypesofcontrolchangecanbeselectedas
dynamicmodulationsources,EffectControl1(CC#12)and2
(CC#13)arededicatedfordynamicmodulation.
Using various controllers

Herewewillexplaintypicalwaystousethevarious
controllers.YoucanchoosefromMIDICC#00CC#119for
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
Foot controller (CC#04) [Bn, 04, vv]

IftheaboveCC#isassignedastheAssignablePedal
function,thismessagewillbetransmittedwhenthe
controllerisoperated.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableFootPedal/
SwitchCombi/Seq51(2)c).
Controller (CC#18) [Bn, 12, vv]

ThismessagewillbetransmittedwhentheKROMEs
VALUEdialisoperated.
Effect 1 depth (Send 2) (CC#91) [Bn, 5B, vv]

Effect 3 depth (Send 1) (CC#93) [Bn, 5D, vv]
RealtimeControlsknobs14,operatingthatcontrollerwill
transmitEffect1Depth(Send2)orEffect3Depth(Send1)
messages,andthesendlevel1or2tothemastereffects
MFX1orMFX2willbecontrolledrespectively.Whenthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthe
ThisisvalidinProgramSelect(Prog01a)and
CombinationSelect(Combi01(2)a)whentheprogramor
combinationnumber/nameisselected(highlighted).
OnthecorrespondingMIDIchannels,thiswill
simultaneouslycontrolthetimbre/tracksettingaswellas
thesettingfollowingtheInsertEffect.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableRealtime
ControlsKnobUER[1],USER[2],USER[3],USER[4]
Combi57(8)c/Seq57(8)c).
InCombination,andSequencermodes,theactualsend
levelofthetimbre/trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingthis
valuewiththesend1/2settingsforeachoscillator(Prog
81d).(SeeSend1(MFX1),Send2(MFX2)on
page 96,GlobalP1:MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
WhenyouadjustSend1(MFX1)orSend2(MFX2)
(Sequencer81b)inSequencermode,orwhenyoure
selectasongorreturntothebeginningofthemeasurein
Sequencermode,Send1/2willbetransmittedbyeach
trackwhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.(SeeSend1
(MFX1)onpage 148).
Effect 2 depth (IFX15 on/off) (CC#92) [Bn, 5C, vv]

Effect 4 depth (MFX1, 2 on/off) (CC#94) [Bn, 5E, vv]
Effect 5 depth (TFX on/off) (CC#95) [Bn, 5F, vv]
Separatelyfromtheeffecton/offsettingsineachmode,
EffectGlobalSW(Global01b)allowsyoutoturnoffinsert
effectsIFX15andmastereffectsMFX1,2andtotaleffect
TFX.MastereffectsMFX1/2andthetotaleffectTFXcanalso
beturnedoffusingthefrontpanelMASTERFXbuttonand
TOTALFXbutton.
IfyouuncheckEnableIFX15,EnableMFX1&2orEnable
TFX,thecorrespondingmessagewillbetransmittedwith
vv=0[00].Ifyoucheckthesesettings,thecorresponding
messagewillbetransmittedwithvv=127[7F].Ifyou
uncheckthesesettings,thecorrespondingeffect(s)willbe
turnedoffasagroup.Ifyoucheckthesesettings,theon/off
settingsofeachmodewillbeused.Thesameappliesto
reception.(vvof00isoff,and01orgreateristheoriginal
setting.)Thesemessagesaretransmitted/receivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel.(IFX15on/offMFX1,2on/off
TFXon/offonpage 59,page 61)
Note:Thesemessagesaredefinedsimplyforusein
adjustingtheeffectlevels,andmaynothavethesame
functiononanotherinstrumentconnectedtotheKROME.
Knob modulation USER [1], USER [2], USER [3], USER [4]
(CC#17, 19, 20, 21)
[Bn, 11, vv], [Bn, 13, vv], [Bn, 14, vv], [Bn, 15, vv]
IftheaboveCC#areassignedtotheknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsUSERmodeisselected,thesemessages
willbetransmittedwhentheknobsareoperated.
Controller (CC#83) [Bn, 53, vv]

IfyouassigntheaboveCC#toaknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsUSERmodeisselected,thismessagewill
betransmittedwhenyouoperatethecorresponding
controlleroftheKROME.
Damper pedal (CC#64) [Bn, 40, vv]
Thismessageistransmittedwhenyouoperateadamper
pedal(optionalDS1H)connectedtotheDAMPERjack,and
thedampereffectwillbeturnedon/off.IftheDS1Hisused,
ahalfdampereffectcanbeapplied.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableDamper
Combi/Seq51(2)c).
SW1 modulation (CC#80) [Bn, 50, vv]

SW2 modulation (CC#81) [Bn, 51, vv]
IftheaboveCC#areassignedasthefunctionofSW1or
SW2,operatingtheswitchwilltransmitthismessagewith
vv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]forOFF.
receptionofthesemessagescanbeturnedon/off
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableSW1,Enable
SW2Combi/Seq59(10)c)
Foot switch (CC#82) [Bn, 52, vv]

IftheaboveCC#isassignedasthefunctionofthe
ASSIGNABLESWITCH,operatingtheswitchwilltransmit
thismessagewithvv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]for
OFF.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableFoot
SwitchCombi/Seq59(10)c).
Sostenuto (CC#66) [Bn, 42, vv]

ASSIGNABLESWITCH,operatingtheswitchwilltransmit
thismessagewithvv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]for
363
Appendices
OFF,andthesostenutoeffectwillbeturnedon/off.When
thismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhen
thecontrollerisoperated(OFFforvv=63[3F]orbelow,and
ONforvv=64[40]orabove).
Soft pedal (CC#67) [Bn, 43, vv]

ASSIGNABLESWITCH,operatingtheswitchwilltransmit,
andthesoftpedaleffectwillbeturnedon.Whenthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthe
WhenFootcontroller(CC#04)Softpedal(CC#67)are
operatedontheKROME,thespecifiedalternatemodulation
ordynamicmodulationetc.willbecontrolled.Whenthese
messagesarereceived,theresultwillbethesameasifthe
controllerhadbeenoperated.ForSW1modulation
(CC#80)Softpedal(CC#67),vvof63[3F]orlesswillbe
OFF,and64[3F]orgreaterwillbeON.
Controlling via the controllers of a connected

MIDI instrument such as the KRONOS
Ribbon Controller (CC#16) [Bn, 10, vv]
Whenacontrolchangeisreceivedfromtheribbon
controllerorotherassignedcontrollerofaMIDIinstrument
(suchastheKRONOS),thespecifiedeffect(e.g.,alternate
modulationordynamicmodulation)willbeapplied.
InCombinationorSequencermodes,transmissionand
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
(EnableRibbonCC#16onpage 88,page 134)
Controller (CC#85, CC#86, CC#87, CC#88)

[Bn, 12, vv], [Bn, 13, vv], [Bn, 14, vv], [Bn, 15, vv]
WhentheVALUEdialofMIDIinstrumentssuchasthe
KRONOS,oracontrolchangeassignedtoacontrolleris
received,thespecifiedalternatemodulationordynamic
modulationeffectwillbeapplied.
Controlling Program tone & envelope

shapes
CC#7079controlspecificparametersofaprogram.
Fordetailsontheprogramparametersthatcorrespondto
eachcontrolchange,andhowtheKROMEwillrespondin
eachmodewhenthesearereceived,refertoKROMEand
MIDICCsonpage 356.
Filter cutoff (CC#74) [Bn, 4A, vv]

Resonance level (CC#71) [Bn, 47, vv]
Filter EG intensity (CC#79) [Bn, 4F, vv]
Release time (CC#72) [Bn, 48, vv]
Thesemessagesaretransmittedwhenyouoperatethe
RealtimeControlsTONE[1][4]knobs.(Theycanalsobe
setasRealtimeControlsUSER[1][4]knobsfunctions.)
Sustain level (CC#70) [Bn, 46, vv]
Attack time (CC#73) [Bn, 49, vv]
Decay time (CC#75) [Bn, 4B, vv]
LFO 1 speed (CC#76) [Bn, 4C, vv]
LFO 1 depth (pitch) (CC#77) [Bn, 4D, vv]
LFO 1 delay (CC#78) [Bn, 4E, vv]
ThesemessagesaretransmittedwhenassigntheaboveCC#
totheRealtimeControlsUSER[1][4]knobsfunction.
Whenyouoperatethese,thecorrespondingprogram
parameterswillbecontrolled,andthesoundandenvelope
willchange.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,theresult
willbethesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.(When
themessagehasavaluevv=64[40],thesettingwillhavethe
valuethatwassetbytheprogramparameter.)
receptioncanbeturnedon/offindependentlyforeach
timbre/track(EnableRealtimeControls
364
CUTOFFRELEASE,USER[1]...USER[4]Combi/Seq5
5(6/7/8)).
Note:InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogram
parameterswillbetemporarilyeditedbythesemessages.
YoucanWritetheprogramtosavethemodifiedstate
(exceptforcertainparameters).TheWriteoperationcanalso
beperformedbyaMIDISystemExclusiveProgramWrite
Requestmessage,inadditiontotheusualmethodofusing
theKROMEsbuttons.Whenyouwritethedata,thevalues
ofthecorrespondingprogramparameterswillberewritten.
Note:Theresultsofreceivingthesemessageswilldepend
ontheinstrument.Theoperationmaybedifferentwhena
deviceotherthantheKROMEisconnected.
Control the arpeggiator

IfyouassignthefollowingCC#stoknobandswitchof
arpeggiator,thespecifiedCC#willbetransmittedwhenyou
operatetheKROME,andtheKROMEitselfwillbe
controlledsimultaneously.Whenthesemessagesare
received,theresultwillbethesameasifyouoperatedthe
KROMEitself.
TheCC#settingsfortheknobsandbuttonsaremadeinthe
GlobalP2MIDICC#Assignpage.However,youcanedit
thesesettingsifyouneedtoassignMIDIcontrolchange
messagestothecontrollers,suchaswhenyouwantto
recordtheRealtimeControlsARPknob,ARPbutton
operationsontheinternalsequenceroranexternalMIDI
sequencer,ortocontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
MIDIdevice.IfGlobalP1:MIDIARPControllersMIDIOut
issettoControlChange,MIDIcontrolchangemessageswill
betransmitted.(SeeARPControllersMIDIOuton
page 200)
EachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedanyMIDIcontrol
changeCC#00CC#119,oradesiredMIDInotenumber.
However,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthatare
assignedwhenyouexecutethemenucommandReset
ControllerMIDIAssignwithCCDefault.Formore
information,pleaseseeResetControllerMIDIAssignon
page 220.
TheoperationsdescribedbelowarefortheseCCDefault
settings.TransmittedwhenthecorrespondingKROME
controlleristransmitted.Whenthisisreceived,thesame
effectwillapplyaswhentheKROMEscontrolleris
operated.
ARP ON/OFF (CC#14) [Bn, 0E, vv]

CorrespondstotheARPbutton.Itwilltransmitvv=127[7F]
whenOn,andvv=000[7F]whenOff.
KNOB1 ARP GATE (CC#22) [Bn, 16, vv]
KNOB2 ARP VELOCITY (CC#23) [Bn, 17, vv]
KNOB3 ARP LENGTH (CC#24) [Bn, 18, vv]
KNOB4 ARP STEP (CC#25) [Bn, 19, vv]
Correspondstoknobs14whentheRealtimeControlsisset
toARP.
Silencing all notes on a specific channel

All note off (CC#123) [Bn, 7B, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,allcurrentlysoundingnotesonthat
channelwillbeturnedoff(asthoughthekeyshadbeen
released).However,thereleaseportionofthenoteswill
remain.
All sound off (CC#120) [Bn, 78, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,allcurrentlysoundingnotesonthat
channelwillbesilenced.WhiletheAllNoteOffmessage
allowsthereleaseportionofthenotestoremain,theAll
SoundOffmessagewillsilencethenotesimmediately.
However,thesemessagesareprovidedforemergencyuse,
andarenotsomethingthatyouwillusewhileperforming.
MIDI applications
Resetting all controllers on a specific channel
Changing the pitch bend range
Reset all controllers (CC#121) [Bn, 79, 00] (value 00)

Whenthisisreceived,thevalueofallcontrollersonthat
channelwillbereset.
RPN pitch bend range [Bn, 64, 00, 65, 00]

ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthepitchbend
rangeforaprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode)orfor
atrack(inSequencermode).
Using RPN (Registered Parameter

Numbers)
RPN(RegisteredParameterNumbers)areatypeofmessage
thatallowsettingstobemadeinawaythatiscommon
betweeninstrumentmanufacturers.(NRPN(Nonregistered
ParameterNumbers)andexclusivemessagescanbefreely
usedinnoncompatiblewaysbydifferentmanufacturers
andmodelsofinstrument.)
RPNmessagescanbeusedforeditingwiththefollowing
procedure.
1. UseRPNMSB(CC#101)[Bn,65,mm]andRPNLSB
(CC#100)[Bn,64,rr](n:channel,mm,rr:upperand
lowerbytesoftheparameternumber)messagesto
selecttheparameter.
2. UsedataentryMSB(CC#6)[Bn,06,mm]anddataentry
LSB(CC#38)[Bn,26,vv](n:channel,mm,vv:upperand
lowerbytesofthevalue,togetherexpressing16,384lev
els)tospecifythevalue.
Theprocedureisasfollows.
1. [Bn,65,00,64,00]:SelectRPNparameter00.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof0[mm,vv=00,00]is+00,andavalueof1536[mm,
vv=0C,00]is+12(oneoctave).Althoughitispossibletoseta
negativevalueforatimbre/track,onlypositivevaluescanbe
setusingRPNmessages.
About system exclusive messages

Sincethewayinwhichthesemessagesareusedisleftupto
eachmanufacturer,theyaremainlyusedtotransmitand
receivesounddataandeditingdataforparametersthatare
uniquetoaparticularinstrument.TheKROMEssystem
exclusivemessageformatis[F0,42,3n,00,01,15,ff,.F7]
F0:exclusivestatus
42:KorgID
3n:[n=0F]globalMIDIchannel116
3. Youcanusedataincrement(CC#96)[Bn,60,00]ordata
decrement(CC#97)[Bn,61,00](n:channel,valueis
fixedat00)tochangethevalueinstepsofone.
mm:ModelIDbytes2(01)
TheKROMEcanreceivethefollowingthreeRPNmessages
(tuning,transpose,andpitchbendrange).
ff:functionID(typeofmessage)
Tuning
RPN fine tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 01]

ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthedetuningfora
programortimbre(inCombinationmode),orforatrack(in
Sequencermode).
F7:endofexclusive
mm:ModelIDbyte1(00)
mm:ModelIDbytes3(15)
:
Note:ToobtainacopyoftheMIDIImplementationwhich
includesMIDISystemExclusiveformatinformation,please
contactyourKorgdistributor.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.A
valueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,0[mm,vv=00,
00]is100cents,and16383[mm,vv=7F,7F]is+99cents.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveFineTune
messagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
MasterTune(GlobalP0:01a)parameter.(SeeAbout
systemexclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Transposing
RPN coarse tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 02]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthetransposition
foraprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode),orfora
track(inSequencermode).
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,
00]is12semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12
semitones.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveCoarseTune
messagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
KeyTranspose(GlobalP0:01a)parameter.(SeeAbout
systemexclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Universal system exclusive

Certainofthesystemexclusivemessagesarepublicly
definedforaspecificuse,andthesearecalleduniversal
systemexclusivemessages.
TheKROMEusesthefollowingsixuniversalsystem
exclusivemessages.
Inquiry message request [F0, 7E, nn, 06, 01, F7]

Inquiry message [F0, 7E, nn, 06, 02, (nine bytes), F7]
Whenaninquirymessagerequestisreceived,theKROME
willrespondbytransmittinganinquirymessagethatmeans
IamaKorgKROME,withsystemversion
GM system on [F0, 7E, nn, 09, 01, F7]
WhenthismessageisreceivedinSequencermode,the
KROMEwillbeinitializedforGMplayback.
Master volume [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 01, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps)
ThismessageistransmittedifyouassignMasterVolumeas
thefunctionoftheAssignablePedalorasaRealtime
ControlsUSER14knobs.Thiswilladjusttheoverall
volumebalancewithoutchangingtherelativevolume
balancebetweentimbres/tracks.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.
Master balance [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 02, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps,where8192isthedefault
365
Appendices
position,andlowervalueswillmovethesoundtowardthe
left)
Whenthisisreceived,theoverallpanningwillbeadjusted
withoutchangingtherelativepanningbetweentimbres/
tracks.
Master fine tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 03, vv, mm, F7]
(Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,4096[mm,vv=20,
00]is50cents,and12288[mm,vv=60,00]is+50cents.)
Whenthisisreceived,theMasterTune(GlobalP0:01a)
parameterwillbeset.
Drum kit parameter change and user arpeggio pattern parameter change
InGlobalmode,youcaneditdrumkitanduserarpeggio
pattern.
SincetheotherglobalparametersorSequencermode
musicaldatacannotbeedited,youwillusedatadumpsto
transferthisdata.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmitandreceivethis
data.
Master coarse tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 04, vv, mm, F7]
(Normallyonlytheupperbytemmisused.Avalueof8192
[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,00]is12
semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12semitones.)
FirstchecktheEnableExclusive(Global12b)settingto
enabletransmissionandreceptionofexclusivedata.When
youswitchmodesontheKROME,amodechangewillbe
transmitted.Whenyoueditindividualparameters,
parameterchangemessageswillbetransmitted.
Whenthisisreceived,theKeyTranspose(Global01a)
parameterwillbeset.
Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesameediting
operationwillbeperformedasonthetransmitteddevice.
Transmitting sound settings data (Data

Dump)
AfterMIDISystemExclusivedatahasbeenreceivedand
processed,aDataLoadCompletedmessagewillbe
transmitted.Thecontrolmasterdevicemustnottransmit
thenextmessageuntilthismessageisreceived(oruntila
sufficientintervaloftimehaselapsed).
Cautionsregardingdatadumpsandsoundediting
Dataforprograms,combinations,drumkits,userarpeggio
pattern,globalsettings,andsequencerdatacanbe
transmittedasMIDISystemExclusivemessages.The
operationofsendingthissystemexclusivedatatoan
externaldeviceiscalledadatadump.
Byperformingadatadump,youcanstoretheKROMEs
soundsandsettingsonanexternaldevice,orrewritethe
soundsandsettingsofanotherKROME.
Therearethefollowingtwotypesofdatadump.
WhenyouusetheDump(GlobalP1)menucommandto
dumpdata,varioustypesofinternalmemorydatawillbe
transmitted.IfthisdataisreceivedbytheKROME,the
datawillbewrittendirectlyintointernalmemory,andit
willnotbenecessarytoperformtheWriteoperation.(See
SendingSysExdatadumpsonReceivingSysExdata
dumpsonpage 219)
IftheEnableExclusive(Global12b)settingischecked,
datawillalsobedumpedinresponsetoaDumpRequest
message.Thisdataistransmittedandreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
WhentheKROMEreceivesthisdata,thedatawillbe
writtenintotheeditbuffer.Ifyouwanttosavethedata
intointernalmemory,youllhavetoexecutetheWrite
operation.ThiscanbedoneeitherbyexecutingtheWrite
operation(SeeWritingtointernalmemoryonpage 115
oftheOperationguide)ontheKROMEitself,orbya
MIDISystemExclusiveprogramwriterequest,combina
tionwriterequest,drumkitwriterequest,userarpeggio
patternwriterequestorglobalsettingwriterequest.
Editing sounds via SysEx

ByusingvariousMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps,you
canrewriteallprogramsoranindividualprogram.Byusing
parameterchangemessages,youcaneditindividual
parametersasfollows.
Parameter changes
InProgrammode,allparametersotherthantheprogram
namecanbeedited.
InCombinationmode,parametersotherthanthe
combinationnamecanbeedited.
InSequencermode,youcaneditthetrackparametersin
P0,1,2,3,4,and5,andtheP7:Arpeggiator/DrumTrack,
P8:InsertEffect,andP9:Master/TotalEffectparameters.
(SeeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 191)
366
Whenyouchangeuseparameterchangestoedit,the
changeswillaffectthedataintheeditbufferandwillnot
bestoredininternalmemoryunlessyouWrite,sothatthe
changeswillbelostifyoureselecttheprogramor
combination.TheWriteoperationcanbeperformedbya
MIDISystemExclusiveProgramWriteRequestor
CombinationWriteRequestmessage,inadditiontothe
usualmethodofusingtheKROMEsbuttons.Formore
information,pleaseseeWritingtointernalmemoryon
Thereisnoneedtowriteasong,butitwillnotbebacked
upwhenyouturnoffthepower.Importantdatathatyou
wanttokeepmustbesavedtoanSDcardbeforeyouturn
offthepower.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSaving
toSDcardonpage 113oftheOperationguide.
If notes are stuck

Ifsomeproblemcausesstucknotesthatcontinue
soundingeventhoughyouarenolongerplayingonthe
keyboardorviaMIDI,youcanstopthesoundbyswitching
theKROMEsmode.
Playing the KROME multi-timbrally from

an external device
TheKROMEcanbeconnectedtoanexternaldeviceand
playedmultitimbrallyinthefollowingways.
MIDImessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanplaya
combination(16partmultitimbralperformance).You
canchangetheoverallsettings(programs,levels,and
effects)byusingprogramchangemessagestoswitch
combinations.
MIDImessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanbeusedto
playasong(16partmultitimbralperformance).Overall
settings(programs,levels,effectsetc.)canbechangedby
usingaSongSelectmessagetoswitchsongs.
MIDIClockmessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanbe
usedtomaketheKROMEplaybackasong(setMIDI
ClocktoExternalMIDI,andruntheKROMEs
sequencer).(Synchronizingtheplaybackofthe
Arpeggiator,DrumTrackfunctionorsequencer)You
canchangetheoverallsettings(programs,levels,effects)
byusingsongselectmessagestoswitchsongs.
MIDI applications
Note:MIDIClockExternalUSBwilloperateinthesame
wayasExternalMIDI.WiththeAutosetting,anexternal
MIDIclockreceivedattheMIDIINconnectorortheUSBB
connectorwillautomaticallycausetheKROMEtoswitchto
thesamemethodofoperationasExternalMIDIorExternal
USB.
Synchronizing the playback of the

Arpeggiator, Drum Track function or
sequencer
ThechoiceofwhethertheKROMEwillbethemaster(the
controllingdevice)ortheslave(thecontrolleddevice)is
madebyMIDIClock(Global11a).
Note:WhenMIDIClockissettoAuto,theKROMEwill
normallyoperateinthesamewayasfortheInternalsetting.
WhenanexternalMIDIclockisreceivedfromtheMIDIIN
orUSBconnector,theKROMEwillautomaticallyoperateas
fortheExternalMIDIsetting.
Using the KROME as master and the external MIDI

device as slave
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTconnectortotheMIDIIN
connectoroftheexternalMIDIdevice.Connectthe
KROMEsUSBBconnectortoyourcomputersUSBport.
WhenyousetMIDIClocktoInternal,theKROMEwill
bethemasterdevice,andwilltransmitMIDItimingclock
messages.
ArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunction:Thetempocan
becontrolledfromtheKROME.
PerformancedatawillbetransmittedviaMIDI.(Perfor
mancedatafromthedrumtrackwillbetransmittedin
ProgrammodeiftheDrumTrackProgMIDIChsetting
(Global11a)ischecked.Performancedatafromthe
ArpeggiatorandtheDrumTrackfunctioninCombina
tionorSequencermodewillbetransmittedfromtimbres
orMIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.)An
externaltonegeneratorconnectedtoMIDIOUTorUSB
willsound,andthetempoofanexternalsequencercan
becontrolled.
Sequencer:Themusicaldatacanbeplayedbackand
controlledontheKROME.
Simultaneously,thesequencerplaybackwillbetransmit
tedviaMIDIfromMIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2.Anexternaltonegeneratorconnectedto
MIDIOUTorUSBwillsound,andthetempoofanexter
nalsequencercanbecontrolled.
Using the external MIDI device as master and the

KROME as slave
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIINconnectortotheMIDIOUT
connectoroftheexternalMIDIdevice.Connectthe
KROMEsUSBconnectortoyourcomputersUSBport.
IfyouusetheMIDIconnectorstomakeconnections,set
MIDIClocktoExternalMIDI.IfyouusetheUSB
connectortomakeconnections,setittoExternalUSB.The
KROMEwillbetheslave.
ArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunction:Thetempowill
followtheMIDItimingclock.Ifyouplaybacktheexter
nalsequencer,theKROMEsArpeggiatororDrumTrack
functionwillsynchronizetotheexternaltimingclock.
EvenifMIDIClockisExternalMIDIorExternalUSB
andtheKROMEisbeingcontrolledfromtheexternal
device,theperformanceoftheArpeggiatororDrum
TrackfunctionwillstillbetransmittedviaMIDI.(Perfor
mancedatafromtheDrumTrackwillbetransmittedin
ProgrammodeiftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting
(Global11a)ischecked.Performancedatafromthe
arpeggiatorandthedrumtrackfunctioninCombination
orSequencermodewillbetransmittedfromtimbresor
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.)
Sequencer:TheKROMEwillnotbeabletocontrolthe
performancedata;itwillbecontrolledbytheexternal
MIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIINorthecomputercon
nectedtoUSB.Ifyouwishtoplaybacktheexternal
sequencertomaketheKROMEssequencerplaybackin
synchronizationtotheexternaltimingclock,youmust
firstsetthesametimesignatureandstartingmeasure
locationsonbothdevices.
EvenifMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternal
USBandtheKROMEisbeingcontrolledfromanexternal
device,musicaldatawillbetransmittedbytrackswhose
StatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Recording musical data from an external

device
Therearetwowaysinwhichyoucanplaybackanexternal
sequencerandrecorditsplaybackontheKROME.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal,begin
recording,andthenstarttheexternalsequencer.Withthis
method,theMIDImessageswillberecordedwithoutthe
twodevicesbeingsynchronized.Sincetheincoming
musicaldatawillsimplyberecorded,thismethodallows
theperformancetobereproducedfaithfully,butsince
measuredivisionsetc.willnotbekepttrackof,this
methodisnotsuitableifyouintendtoeditthedatalater.
IfyousetMIDIClocktoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,
thestartofrecordingandthetempoetc.willallbeunder
thecontroloftheexternalsequencer.
Sincethetwodeviceswillbesynchronizedduringthe
recordingprocess,measuredivisionsetc.willbe
accuratelypreserved.(Youwillneedtosetthetime
signaturebeforerecording.)Formoreinformation,please
seeMultiREConpage 118.
Recording the MIDI output of the

KROMEs controllers, Arpeggiator, Drum
Track function and internal sequencer to
an external sequencer/computer
IfyouwishtorecordtheMIDIoutputoftheKROMEs
controllers,Arpeggiator,DrumTrackfunction,andinternal
sequenceronanexternalsequencerorcomputerandusethe
KROMEasthemonitoringandplaybacktonegenerator
whileyourecord,youmustturnofftheKROMEsLocal
Controlsetting(LocalControlOnGlobal11a),andset
yourexternalsequencer/computerforechoback(afunction
bywhichthedatareceivedatMIDIINisretransmitted
withoutchangefromMIDIOUT)sothatthedatafromthe
KROMEscontrollers,Arpeggiator,DrumTrackfunction
andinternalsequencerwillnotbeappliedinduplicateto
thetonegenerator.
Using an external MIDI sequencer/computer to

record performance data from the Drum Track
function
TurnofftheKROMEslocalcontrolsetting.InProgram
mode,theDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitperformance
dataiftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting(Global11a)
ison(checked).Bydefault,thisisoff(unchecked),soyoull
needtoturniton.
Inyourexternalsequencer/computer,turntheechoback
settingon.Withthesesettings,thesoundgeneratorwont
produceduplicatenotes,andrecordingandplaybackwill
occurcorrectly.
367
Appendices
Using the Realtime Controls Knob 14 to record

MIDI control changes on an external MIDI sequencer/computer
SettheKROMEtoLocalControlOff.SettheexternalMIDI
sequencer/computertoEchoBackOn.Withthesesettings,
recordingandplaybackwilloccurcorrectly,andthecontrol
changeswillnotbeappliedtothetonegeneratorin
duplicate.
Recording the Arpeggiator or RPPR function on

an external MIDI sequencer/computer
Whenthearpeggiatorison,playingthekeyboardor
operatingthecontrollersoftheKROMEwilloperateand
controlthearpeggiator.
Inthesameway,thearpeggiatorwillbecontrolledbyMIDI
messagesreceivedfromMIDIIN.
NotestransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB)bythearpeggiator
arecontrolledasfollows,accordingtothelocalcontrol
setting(LocalControlOnGlobal11a).
InSequencermode,whentheRPPRfunctionison,playing
thekeyboardwillcauseRPPRtooperate.Similarly,the
RPPRfunctionwillalsooperateinresponsetonotes
receivedontheMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrack
Select(Seq01(2)a).NoteswillbetransmittedbyRPPR
fromMIDIOUTaccordingtothelocalcontrolsetting(Local
ControlOn)asdescribedbelow.
LocalControlOn:NotesfromthearpeggiatororRPPRwill
betransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB).
LocalControlOff:NotesfromthearpeggiatororRPPRwill
notbetransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB).TheKROMEwill
soundonlyinresponsetoMIDImessagesreceivedatMIDI
IN,orgeneratedbythearpeggiatororRPPR.
Setting example 1
Recordthenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatoror
RPPRfunctionontheexternalMIDIsequencer/computer.
1. TurnonthisinstrumentsarpeggiatororRPPRfunc
tion.SetthisinstrumenttoLocalControlOn.
2. TurnLocalControlOnforthisinstrument.
3. TurnEchoBackOffonyourexternalsequencer/com
puter.
Byturningechobackoff,youwillpreventthearpeggiatoror
RPPRfunctionfromperformingduplicateprocessingonthe
monitorednotesduringrecording.
4. Duringplayback,turnoffthearpeggiatorandRPPR
functionsofthisinstrument.
Setting example 2
UsetheexternalMIDIsequencer/computertorecordonly
thenotesthattriggerthearpeggiatororRPPRfunction,
andoperatethisinstrumentsarpeggiatororRPPR
functionformonitoringwhilerecording,andduring
playback.
1. TurnontheKROMEsarpeggiatororRPPRfunction.
2. SettheKROMEtoLocalControlOff.
ThenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatororRPPR
functionwillnotbeoutput.
3. OnyourexternalMIDIsequencer/computer,turnecho
backon.
Withthesesettings,thedatawillberecordedandplayed
correctly,andthearpeggiatororRPPRfunctionwillnotbe
appliedinduplicate.
About GM (General MIDI)

TheKROMEsupportstheGMstandard.Italsosupportsthe
GM2soundmap(includingbankselect)with256programs
and9drumprogramsprovidedinROMbanksGM,g(1)
g(9),andg(d).(Banksg(1)g(9)areGM2variationprograms,
andg(d)containsdrumprograms.)
GMisastandardthatensuresbasiccompatibilityofsounds
andcontrollersbetweenGMcompatibleinstrumentsmade
bydifferentmanufacturers.WhenusingGMwithKROME,
beawareofthefollowing.
GMSystemOnissupportedinSequencermode.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeonpage 165.
WhenyouwishtoplayaGMsequence,orloadGMdata
intoasong,setBankMap(Global02a)toGM(2).
About standard MIDI files

StandardMIDIfiles(SMF)makeitpossiblefordifferent
computerprogramsormusicalinstrumentsmadeby
differentmanufacturerstoexchangetimebasedMIDIdata.
EachstandardMIDIfilecontainsonesong.TheKROME
supportsformat0(type0)inwhichalloftheMIDIdatais
combinedintoonetrack,andformat1(type1)inwhichthe
dataisseparatedbytrack.
WhenaSMFisloadedintoasonginMediamode,the
programbankthatisselectedwilldifferdependingonthe
BankMap(Global02a)setting.Whenplaying/loading
SMFdatathatconformstotheGMspecifications,setBank
MaptoGM(2).
Sequencer mode
InMediamodewhenyouconvertasongintoaStandard
MIDIFileandsaveit,youcanchooseeitherformat0or
format1.
IfKROMEsongdatathatwassavedasaformat1SMF
fileisloadedintoanotherdevice,thetrackconfiguration
maybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeingsaved.Thisis
becauseMIDItracksthatcontainnomusicaldataare
omitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
Ifsongdatathatwassavedbyanotherdeviceasaformat
1SMFfileisloadedintotheKROME,thetrack
configurationmaybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeing
saved.Thisisbecausetracksthatcontainnomusicaldata
areomitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
WhenexchangingsequencedatabetweentwoKROME,we
recommendthatyousavethesequencedatainthe
KROMEsnativeformat(SaveSEQ).
WhensequencedataissavedintheKROMEsnativeformat,
allofthesettingsandpatternsuniquetotheKROMEwillbe
saved,whichwillensureahigherlevelofreproducibility
thanwhenthedataissavedasaStandardMIDIFile(Save
toStdMIDIFile).
Parameterchangesandotherrecordeddataisincludedin
thesongdataasSystemExclusiveevents,soitcanbesaved
toorloadedfrommediaasusual.Exclusivemessagescan
alsobeloadedorsavedasSMF(StandardMIDIFile)data
(LoadStandardMIDIFile,SaveSongasStandardMIDI
File).ThisallowsrecordedSystemExclusiveeventstobe
savedasSMFdata,orexclusivemessagesincludedinSMF
datatobeconvertedintosongdata.
Duringplayback,thisdatacanbetransmittedtoanexternal
MIDIdevice,orusedtocontroltrackparametersoreffect
parametersofthesong.
368
Compatibility with the M50
Compatibility with the M50

TheKROMEcanloadM50format.PCGand.SNGfiles
whileconvertingthem.Datacompatibilityissupportedfor
loadingandsavingeachtypeofdataviamedia.
KROMEformat.PCGand.SNGfilescannotbeloadedby
theM50.Songdata(.SNG)canbeloadedintotheM50ifyou
firstsaveitasStandardMIDIFile(SMFformat)data(see
p.232).
WhenloadingM50format.PCGor.SNGfilesintothe
KROME,pleasebeawarethatthefollowinglimitationswill
apply.
Pad parameters
(Program, Combination, Song)
SincetheKROMEdoesnothavethesefunctions,the
correspondingparameterswillnotbeloaded.
External Setup parameters (Global)

SincetheKROMEdoesnothavethesefunctions,the
correspondingparameterswillnotbeloaded.
Global Mode Foot Switch Assign parameters

Settingsrelatedtootherfunctionswillbeloadedinthe
followingways.
M50
KROME
RTKnob1A...4B
TONE[1][4],USER[1][4]knobs
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,
LENGTH,OCTAVE
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,STEP
Global Mode Foot Pedal Assign parameter

Settingsrelatedtootherfunctionswillbeloadedinthe
followingways.
M50
KROME
RTKnob1A...4B
TONE[1][4],USER[1][4]knobs
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,
LENGTH,OCTAVE
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,STEP
Bank/number configurations on the KROME and

M50
Thefollowingtableshowstheconfigurationofthe
Combination,Program,DrumKit,DrumPattern,
Multisample,andDrumsamplebanksandnumbersforthe
KROMEandtheM50.Thetableattherightshowswhatwill
happenwhenanM50formatfileisloadedintotheKROME.
Ifthedatabeingloadedcontainsabankornumberthat
doesntexistontheKROME,itssettingswillbemodifiedif
thereisnocorrespondingbank.Thismeansthatthedata
maynotsoundcorrectly.Pleaseusecautionwhenloading
filesbetweentheKROMEandtheM50.
Bank configurations on the
KROME
Combination
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
Program
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
G(GM),g(1)g(9),g(d)
GM,g(1)g(9),g(d)
Drum Kit
0031(INT)
0031(INT)
3247(USER)
3247(USER)
4856(GM)
4856(GM)
User Drum Track Pattern
U000U999
U000U999
User Arpeggio Pattern
U000U999
U000U1027
Multisample
Mono
Mono
Stereo
Stereo
XLMono
XLStereo
Drumsample
Mono
Mono
Stereo
Stereo
XLMono
XLStereo
Bank configurations on the M50
369
370
March.15.'12
1-1 CHANNEL MESSAGES

[H] :Hex, [D] :Decimal
+------+---------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------+----+
|Status| Second |
Third
|
Description ( Transmitted by ....)
|ENA |
|[Hex] |[H] [D] | [H]
[D]
|
|
|
+------+---------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------+----+
| 8n | kk (kk) | 40
(64)
| Note Off
( Key Off )
*1| A |
| 9n | kk (kk) | vv
(vv)
| Note On (vv)=1-127 ( Key On )
*1| A |
| An | kk (kk) | vv
(vv)
| Poly Key Pressure
( Sequence data )
| Q |
| Bn | 00 (00) | mm
(mm)
| Bank Select(MSB)
( BANK keys, Prog/Combi change )
*2| PB |
| Bn | 01 (01) | vv
(vv)
| Modulation1
( Joystick +Y, ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 02 (02) | vv
(vv)
| Modulation2
( Joystick -Y, ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 04 (04) | vv
(vv)
| Foot Pedal
( Pdl = Foot Pedal )
| C |
| Bn | 05 (05) | vv
(vv)
| Portamento Time
( Knob/Pdl = Porta.Time, S Chg )
| C |
| Bn | 07 (07) | vv
(vv)
| Volume
( Knob/Pdl = Volume, S/C Chg )
| C |
| Bn | 08 (08) | vv
(vv)
| Post IFX Panpot
( Knob/Pdl = IFX Pan, S Chg )
| C |
| Bn | 0A (10) | vv
(vv)
| Panpot
( Knob/Pdl = Pan, S Chg )
| C |
| Bn | 0B (11) | vv
(vv)
| Expression
( Knob/Pdl = Expression )
| C |
| Bn | 0C (12) | vv
(vv)
| Effect Control 1
( Knob/Pdl = FX Control1 )
| C |
| Bn | 0D (13) | vv
(vv)
| Effect Control 2
( Knob/Pdl = FX Control2 )
| C |
| Bn | 0E (14) | vv
(vv)
|
( ARP ON/OFF, ASW )
*3| C |
| Bn | 10 (16) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl1 ( ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 11 (17) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl2 ( Knob = Knob Mod1)
| C |
| Bn | 12 (18) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl3 ( ASW/Pdl)
| C |
| Bn | 13 (19) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl4 ( Knob = Knob Mod2 )
| C |
| Bn | 14 (20) | vv
(vv)
|
( Knob = Knob Mod3 )
| C |
| Bn | 15 (21) | vv
(vv)
|
( Knob = Knob Mod4 )
| C |
| Bn | 16 (22) | vv
(vv)
|
( ARP Knob1 GATE, ASW/Pdl )
*3| C |
| Bn | 17 (23) | vv
(vv)
|
( ARP Knob2 VELOCITY, ASW/Pdl )
*3| C |
| Bn | 18 (24) | vv
(vv)
|
( ARP Knob3 SWING, ASW/Pdl )
*3| C |
| Bn | 19 (25) | vv
(vv)
|
( ARP Knob4 STEP, ASW/Pdl )
*3| C |
| Bn | 20 (32) | bb
(bb)
| Bank Select(LSB)
( BANK keys, Prog/Combi change )
*2| PB |
| Bn | 40 (64) | vv
(vv)
| Hold1
( Damper )
| C |
| Bn | 41 (65) | 00/7F
(00/127) | Portamento Off/On
( SW1/SW2/ASW = Porta.SW, S Chg )
| C |
| Bn | 42 (66) | 00/7F
(00/127) | Sostenuto Off/On
( ASW = Sostenuto )
| C |
| Bn | 43 (67) | vv
(vv)
| Soft Pedal
( ASW = Soft )
| C |
| Bn | 46 (70) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 1 ( Knob = F/A Sustain )
| C |
| Bn | 47 (71) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 2 ( Knob TONE2, Knob = Resonance, ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 48 (72) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 3 ( Knob TONE4, Knob = F/A Release, ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 49 (73) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 4 ( Knob = F/A Attack )
| C |
| Bn | 4A (74) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 5 ( Knob TONE1, Knob = Filter Cutoff, ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 4B (75) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 6 ( Knob = F/A Decay )
| C |
| Bn | 4C (76) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 7 ( Knob = Pitch LFO1 Spd )
| C |
| Bn | 4D (77) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 8 ( Knob = Pitch LFO1 Dep )
| C |
| Bn | 4E (78) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 9 ( Knob = Pitch LFO1 Dly )
| C |
| Bn | 4F (79) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 10 ( Knob TONE3, Knob = Filter EG Int, ASW/Pdl )
| C |
| Bn | 50 (80) | 00/7F
(00/127) | Multi Purpose Ctrl5 ( SW1/Knob = SW1 Mod. )
| C |
| Bn | 51 (81) | 00/7F
(00/127) | Multi Purpose Ctrl6 ( SW2/Knob = SW2 Mod. )
| C |
| Bn | 52 (82) | 00/7F
(00/127) | Multi Purpose Ctrl7 ( ASW/Knob = Foot SW )
| C |
| Bn | 53 (83) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl8 ( Knob = MIDI CC#83 )
| C |
| Bn | 5B (91) | vv
(vv)
| Effect 1 Depth
( Knob/Pdl = MFX Send2, S Chg )
| C |
| Bg | 5C (92) | 00/7F
(00/127) | Effect 2 Depth
( All Insert FX Off/On )
| C |
| Bn | 5D (93) | vv
(vv)
| Effect 3 Depth
( Knob/Pdl = MFX Send1, S Chg )
| C |
| Bg | 5E (94) | 00/7F
( Master FX1/2 Off/On )
| C |
| Bg | 5F (95) | 00/7F
( Total FX Off/On )
| C |
| Bn | cc (cc) | vv
(vv)
| Control (cc)=0-119 ( Sequencer data )
| Q |
| Bn | cc (cc) | vv
(vv)
| Control (cc)=0-119 ( Knob
= MIDI CC#00-119 )
| C |
| Bn | cc (cc) | vv
(vv)
| Control (cc)=0-119 ( ARP Controllers = MIDI CC#00-119 )
| C |
| Cn | pp (pp) | --| Program Change
( Prog/Combi change )
*2| P |
| Dn | vv (vv) | --| Channel Pressure
( After Touch )
| Q |
| En | bb (bb) | bb
(bb)
| Bender Change
( Joy Stick X )
| C |
+------+---------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------+----+
1. TRANSMITTED DATA
Consult your local Korg dealer for more information on MIDI System Exclusive implementation.
KROME MIDI IMPLEMENTATION

Assignable Foot Pedal
Assignable Foot Switch
Realtime Control Knob 1,2,3,4
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
:
:
:
:
Combination
: Bank
A 000
:
B 000
:
C 000
:
D 000
:
:
:
:
:
-
127
127
127
127
MIDI Out[Hex] (Bank Map is KORG)

: mm,bb,pp
= 00,00,
00 - 7F
:
00,01,
00 - 7F
:
00,02,
00 - 7F
:
00,03,
00 - 7F
00,04,
00 - 7F
00,05,
00 - 7F
79,00,
00 - 7F
79,01-09, 00 - 7F
78,00,
00 - 7F
KROME 61Keys (61keys + Transpose)

Sequencer
(Bank Map is GM(2))

= 3F,00,
00 - 7F
3F,01,
00 - 7F
3F,02,
00 - 7F
3F,03,
00 - 7F
3F,04,
00 - 7F
3F,05,
00 - 7F
79,00,
00 - 7F
79,01-09, 00 - 7F
78,00,
00 - 7F
*4 : For example, if time signature is 4/4 or 8/8, tt,ss = 00,10 means one measure.
1-2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGES

+------+--------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+
|Status| Second |
Third
|
Description ( Transmitted when )
|
|[Hex] |[H] [D] | [H]
[D]
|
|
+------+--------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+
| F2 | ss (ss)|
tt
(tt)
| Song Position Pointer
|
|
|
|
|
ss : Least significant [LSB]
*4|
|
|
|
|
tt : Most significant [MSB]
*4|
| F3 | ss (ss)|
| Song Select (Song or Cue List is selected)
|
|
|
|
|
ss : Song(0-127)
|
+------+--------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+
Transmits Song Position Pointer message when in Sequencer mode. (Internal Clock)
Transmits Song Select message when in Sequencer mode.
*3 : When CC# by "CC Default" is assigned to the ARP Controllers in Global Mode.
Reset Controller MIDI Assign = CC Default
ARP ON/OFF
:CC#14
ARP Knob1 GATE
:CC#22
ARP Knob2 VELOCITY :CC#23
ARP Knob3 SWING
:CC#24
ARP Knob4 STEP
:CC#25
*2 : Program
Bank
A 000
B 000
C 000
D 000
E 000
F 000
GM 001
g(1)-(9) 001
g(d) 001
108
108
120
127
24
12
09
00
*1 : kk =
=
=
=
MIDI Channel No. (0 - 15) ------ Usually Global Channel.

When in Combination/Sequencer mode, each timbre's/track's channel. (Status = EXT,EX2 or BTH)
Always Global Channel No. (0 - 15)
Always Enabled.
Enabled when Enable Control Change in Global mode is checked.
Enabled when Enable Program Change in Global mode is checked.
Enabled when Enable Program and Bank Change in Global mode is checked.
Enabled when Enable After Touch in Global mode is checked.
Enabled when Sequencer is playing(transmit), recording(receive).
g :
ENA = A :
C :
P :
PB:
T :
Q :
n :
S Chg :
Transmitted when change a Song No.(Seq. mode). (Status = EXT,EX2,BTH)
C/S Chg : Transmitted when change a Combination or Song No.(Seq. mode). (Status = EXT,EX2 or BTH)
Pdl :
ASW :
Knob :
Appendices
MIDI Implementation
1-4-2 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES ( REALTIME )

Master Volume
[ F0,7F,0g,04,01,vv,mm,F7 ]
3rd byte
6th byte
7th byte
mm = 05
mm = 0E
mm = 17
)
)
)
)
g : Global Channel
vv : Value(LSB)
mm : Value(MSB)
mm,vv = 00,00 - 7F,7F : Min - Max
1-4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

1-4-1 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE ( NON REALTIME )
DEVICE INQUlRY REPLY ( Transmits when received a INQUIRY MESSAGE REQUEST )
[ F0,7E,0g,06,02,42,15,01,mm,00,vv,ww,xx,00,F7 ] 3rd byte
g : Global Channel
6th byte 42 : KORG ID
7th byte 15 : KROME series ID LSB
8th byte 01 : KROME series ID MSB
9th byte mm : KROME 61Keys member code
KROME 73Keys member code
KROME 88Keys member code
11th byte vv : System Version 1st ( 1 12th byte ww : System Version 2nd ( 0 13th byte xx : System Version 3rd ( 0 (i.e. Version 1.0.2: vv=01, ww=00, xx=02
1-3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

+------------+------------------------------------------------------------+
|Status[Hex] |
Description ( Transmitted when ... )
|
+------------+------------------------------------------------------------+
| F8
| Timing Clock
( Always in Prog/Combi/Seq/Global mode ) *5|
| FA
| Start
( START in Seq mode )
*5|
| FB
| Continue
( Continue START in Seq mode )
*5|
| FC
| Stop
( STOP in Seq mode )
*5|
| FE
| Active Sensing ( Always )
*6|
+------------+------------------------------------------------------------+
*5 Transmits these messages when MIDI Clock in Global mode is Internal.
*6 Transmits this message when MIDI Clock in Global mode is External.
2. RECOGNIZED RECEIVE DATA
2-1 CHANNEL MESSAGES [H] :Hex, [D] :Decimal
+------+---------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------+----+
|Status| Second |
Third
|
Description ( Use ..... )
|ENA |
|[Hex] |[H] [D] | [H]
[D]
|
|
|
+------+---------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------+----+
| 8n | kk (kk) | xx
(xx)
| Note Off
| A |
| 9n | kk (kk) | 00
(00)
| Note Off
| A |
| 9n | kk (kk) | vv
(vv)
| Note On (vv) = 1-127
| A |
| An | kk (kk) | vv
(vv)
| Poly Key Pressure
( as AMS )
| T,Q|
| Bn | 00 (00) | mm
(mm)
| Bank Select(MSB)
( for Prog/Combi change )
*1| P |
| Bn | 01 (01) | vv
(vv)
| Modulation1
( as Joy Stick +Y )
| C |
| Bn | 02 (02) | vv
(vv)
| Modulation2
( as Joy Stick -Y )
| C |
| Bn | 04 (04) | vv
(vv)
| Foot Pedal
( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Foot Pedal )
| C |
| Bn | 05 (05) | vv
(vv)
| Portamento Time
| C |
| Bn | 06 (06) | vv
(vv)
| Data Entry (MSB)
( for RPC edit )
| C |
| Bn | 07 (07) | vv
(vv)
| Volume
| C |
| Bn | 08 (08) | vv
(vv)
| Balance Control
( for Post IFX Panpot control )
*2| C |
| Bn | 0A (10) | vv
(vv)
| Panpot
| C |
| Bn | 0B (11) | vv
(vv)
| Expression
| C |
| Bn | 0C (12) | vv
(vv)
| Effect Control 1
( as FX Dmod Src = Fx Control1 )
| C |
| Bn | 0D (13) | vv
(vv)
| Effect Control 2
( as FX Dmod Src = Fx Control2 )
| C |
| Bn | 0E (14) | vv
(vv)
|
( as ARP ON/OFF )
*4| C |
| Bn | 10 (16) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl1 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Ribbon CC#16 )
| C |
| Bn | 11 (17) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl2 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod1 )
| C |
| Bn | 12 (18) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl3 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Value Slider CC#18 )
| C |
| Bn | 13 (19) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl4 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod2 )
| C |
| Bn | 14 (20) | vv
(vv)
|
( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod3 )
| C |
| Bn | 15 (21) | vv
(vv)
|
( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod4 )
| C |
| Bn | 16 (22) | vv
(vv)
|
( as ARP Knob1 GATE )
*4| C |
| Bn | 17 (23) | vv
(vv)
|
( as ARP Knob2 VELOCITY )
*4| C |
| Bn | 18 (24) | vv
(vv)
|
( as ARP Knob3 SWING )
*4| C |
| Bn | 19 (25) | vv
(vv)
|
( as ARP Knob4 STEP )
*4| C |
| Bn | 20 (32) | bb
(bb)
| Bank Select(LSB)
( for Prog / Combi change )
*1| P |
| Bn | 26 (38) | vv
(vv)
| Data Entry (LSB)
( for RPC edit )
| C |
| Bn | 40 (64) | vv
(vv)
| Hold1
( as Damper)
| C |
| Bn | 41 (65) |<=3F/>=40(<=63/>=64)| Portamento Off/On
| C |
| Bn | 42 (66) |<=3F/>=40(<=63/>=64)| Sostenuto Off/On
| C |
| Bn | 43 (67) | vv
(vv)
| Soft Pedal
| C |
| Bn | 46 (70) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 1 ( for Sustain Level control )
| C |
| Bn | 47 (71) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 2 ( for Resonance control )
| C |
| Bn | 48 (72) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 3 ( for Release Time control )
| C |
| Bn | 49 (73) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 4 ( for Attack Time control )
| C |
| Bn | 4A (74) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 5 ( for Filter Cutoff control )
| C |
| Bn | 4B (75) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 6 ( for Decay Time control )
| C |
| Bn | 4C (76) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 7 ( for LFO1 Speed control )
| C |
| Bn | 4D (77) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 8 ( for LFO1 Pitch Depth control )
| C |
| Bn | 4E (78) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 9 ( for LFO1 Delay control )
| C |
| Bn | 4F (79) | vv
(vv)
| Sound Controller 10 ( for Filter EG Intensity control )
| C |
| Bn | 50 (80) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl5 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = SW 1 )
| C |
| Bn | 51 (81) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl6 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = SW 2 )
| C |
| Bn | 52 (82) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl7 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Foot Switch )
| C |
| Bn | 53 (83) | vv
(vv)
| Multi Purpose Ctrl8 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#83 )
| C |
| Bn | 55 (85) | vv
(vv)
|
( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#85 )
| C |
| Bn | 56 (86) | vv
(vv)
|
| C |
| Bn | 57 (87) | vv
(vv)
|
| C |
| Bn | 58 (88) | vv
(vv)
|
| C |
| Bn | 5B (91) | vv
(vv)
| Effect 1 Depth
( for Send 2 Level control )
| C |
| Bg | 5C (92) |00/!=00
(00/!=000)| Effect 2 Depth
( for All Insert FX Off/On )
| C |
| Bn | 5D (93) | vv
(vv)
| Effect 3 Depth
( for Send 1 Level control )
| C |
| Bg | 5E (94) |00/!=00
( for Master FX1,2 Off/On )
| C |
| Bg | 5F (95) |00/!=00
( for Total FX Off/On )
| C |
| Bn | 60 (96) | 00
(00)
| Data Increment
( for RPC edit )
| C |
| Bn | 61 (97) | 00
(00)
| Data Decrement
( for RPC edit )
| C |
| Bn | 64 (100)| 0r
(0r)
| RPN Param No. (LSB) ( for RPN select )
*3| C |
| Bn | 65 (101)| 00
(00)
| RPN Param No. (MSB) ( for RPN select )
*3| C |
| Bn | cc (cc) | vv
(vv)
| Control data
( for Seq. recording (cc) = 0-119 )
| C,Q|
| Bn | 78 (120)| 00
(00)
| All Sound Off
| C |
| Bn | 79 (121)| 00
(00)
| Reset All Controllers
| C |
| Bn | 7A (122)| 00/7F
(00/127) | Local Control Off/On
| A |
| Bn | 7B (123)| 00
(00)
| All Notes Off
| A |
| Bn | 7C (124)| 00
(00)
| Omni Mode Off
( as All Notes Off )
| A |
| Bn | 7D (125)| 00
(00)
| Omni Mode On
| A |
| Bn | 7E (126)| <=10
(<=16)
| Mono Mode On
| A |
| Bn | 7F (127)| 00
(00)
| Poly mode On
| A |
| Cn | pp (pp) | --| Program Change
( for Prog/Combi change )
*1| P |
| Dn | vv (vv) | --| Channel Pressure
( as After Touch )
| T |
| En | bb (bb) | bb
(bb)
| Bender Change
| C |
+------+---------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------+----+
MIDI Implementation
371
372
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
Program
: Bank
A
:
B
:
C
:
D
:
E
:
F
:
GM
: g(1)-g(9)
:
g(d)
:
GM
:
g(d)
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
Program
: Bank
A
:
B
:
C
:
D
:
E
:
F
:
GM
: g(1)-g(9)
:
g(d)
:
GM
:
GM
:
g(d)
: Mute (KORG
000 000 000 000 000 000 001 001 001 001 001 001 MUTE)
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
128
128
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
128
Combination
: Bank
A 000
:
B 000
:
C 000
:
D 000
Combination
: Bank
A 000
:
B 000
:
C 000
:
D 000
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
*4 : When CC# by "CC Default" is assigned to the ARP Controllers in Global Mode.
n : When in Program/Combination mode, Global channel.
When in Sequencer mode, current selected track's channel.
For drum program, both of Fine Tune and Coarse Tune affect to Detune.
Data Entry LSB value has no effect for Pitch Bend Sensitivity and Coarse Tune.
*3 : r = 0 : Pitch Bend Sensitivity ( Bend Range )

= 1 : Fine Tune ( Detune )
= 2 : Coarse Tune ( Transpose )
*2 : When in Program mode, Global channel.

When in Combination/Sequencer mode, each IFX's channel.
MIDI In
[Hex]
mm,bb,pp = 3F,00,
3F,01,
3F,02,
3F,03,
3F,04,
3F,05,
79,00,
79,01-09,
78,00,
00,00,
38,00,
3E,00,
3F,7F,
When Bank Map in Global mode is GM(2);
MIDI In
[Hex]
mm,bb,pp = 00,00,
00,01,
00,02,
00,03,
00,04,
00,05,
79,00,
79,01-09,
78,00,
38,00,
3E,00,
000
000
000
000
000
000
001
001
001
001
001
: MIDI Channel No. (0 - 15) Usually Global Channel.

When in Combination/Sequencer mode, each timbre's/track's channel.(Status is INT or BTH)
: Always Global Channel No. (0 - 15)
: Random
: Same as Transmitted data
*1 : When Bank Map in Global mode is KORG;
g
x
ENA
AMS
: Alternate Modulation Source
FX Dmod Src : Effect Dynamic Modulation Source
Master Coarse Tune ( Control Transpose (chromatic step) in Global )

[ F0,7F,0g,04,04,vv,mm,F7 ] 3rd byte g : Global Channel
6th byte vv : Value(LSB)
7th byte mm : Value(MSB)
mm,vv = 34,00:-12, 40,00:+00, 4C,00:+12
Master Fine Tune ( Control Master Tune(cent) in Global )

mm,vv = 20,00:-50, 40,00:+00, 60,00:+50
Master Balance
mm,vv = 00,00:Left, 40,00:Center, 7F,7F:Right
2-4-2 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES ( REALTIME )

Master Volume
mm,vv = 00,00 - 7F,7F : Min - Max
GM System On ( Receive when in Sequencer mode )

[ F0,7E,nn,09,01,F7 ] 3rd byte nn : Channel = 0 - F : Global Channel
= 7F
: Any Channel
2-4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

2-4-1 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE ( NON REALTIME )
DEVICE INQUlRY ( When received this message, transmits INQUlRY MESSAGE REPLY )
[ F0,7E,nn,06,01,F7 ] 3rd byte nn : Channel = 0 - F : Global Channel
= 7F
: Any Channel
2-3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

+------------+--------------------------------------------------------------+
|Status[Hex] |
Description ( Use for..... )
|
+------------+--------------------------------------------------------------+
| F8
| Timing Clock
( Tempo, AMS & FX Dmod Src )
*5|
| FA
| Start
( Seq Start & Arpeggiator Control)
*6|
| FB
| Continue
( Seq Continue start & Arpeggiator Control)*6|
| FC
| Stop
( Seq Stop & Arpeggiator Control)
*6|
| FE
| Active Sensing ( MIDI Connect check )
|
+------------+--------------------------------------------------------------+
*5 Receive when MIDI Clock in Global mode is External MIDI.
*6 Receive when MIDI Clock in Global mode is External MIDI,
and Receive Ext. Realtime Commands in Global mode is checked.
2-2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGES

+------+--------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+
|Status| Second |
Third
|
Description ( Use for ..... )
|
|[Hex] |[H] [D] | [H]
[D]
|
|
+------+--------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+
| F2 | ss (ss)|
tt
(tt)
| Song Position Pointer ( Location )
*6|
|
|
|
|
ss : Least significant [LSB]
|
|
|
|
|
tt : Most significant [MSB]
|
| F3 | ss (ss)|
| Song Select (Song or Cue List select)
|
|
|
|
|
ss : Song(0-127) No.
|
+------+--------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+
Receive when in Sequencer mode.
Appendices
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS

This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage
requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should
be used. If you have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a
telephone sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in
which you reside.
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could
be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturers or distributors warranty.
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be
disqualified from the manufacturers or distributors warranty.
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan
2012 KORG INC.

Krome Parameter Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Krome Parameter Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Parameter Guide

About this manual

Conventions in this manual

Abbreviations for the manuals: QS, OG, PG, VNL

Quick Start Guide

Example screen displays

Voice Name List

PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track

PROG Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)

PROG P2: OSC/Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . 58

PROG P1: Basic/Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

PROG P3: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

PROG P4: Amp/EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

PROG P5: LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/

Program: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

COMBI P1: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters)

COMBI P4: Zone/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) . .125

31:MIDIT0108,32:MIDIT0916 .......... 125

COMBI P5: MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)

COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect). . . . . . 95

COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/

Combination: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . .101

Sequencer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

SEQ P1: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

SEQ P2: EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

SEQ P4: Zones/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

SEQ P5: MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

SEQ P6: Track Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)

SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . .148

SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/

SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

SEQ P11: Cue List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Sequencer: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Global mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Global P1: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Master Effects (MFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Total Effect (TFX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Global P3: Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

31:Scales ................................ 203

Global P4: Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Dynamics (Dynamic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Global P2: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Global P5: Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Media: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Effect Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD

Global: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Media mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser)

Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 277

Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER) .299

Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono). . . . . . . . .301

Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) . . . . . 317